Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History"

See other formats 


indian ae PALO RDA Pe. 0 et ON OI EN MAES Ry in A Ry nts pe 


ae ny asl” Nm ye, ty ah on Lan hid - 


CI, beta oie atl Hahn tb ath So nsutbe bee em 0) Ps 


” = PE OE 
Nepaen ‘seasdieiond Sm hn. pa Be o-oe Retest oon Aohem me a. DOP LP PAG 5 ee WOE tO Pete Fe LOL Ree LGA AA edie GA Oe OL ERAN Dey: Sarg LT ht Rar Ae Nhe tm ante 

Oak oo BPP ie BO ed Mae A LIMO od Ah ted Obie ee att OA ol atm Mee Date na rae PEARED od he Pre Pan ere te Oa et id ate Fie RMS ee ty A ate re 
se ienetieninde ne ee ee re ee an Binet Bodh Deg tl RMN Gh 0 A PA Ph ARB fe hp ELM be: Boyett Gone he Pe me OS Fei ae ee anne 

i eninetin Iibamaetinntas cua kon nine dit bn ee Fan ttn fn Mie APP BO I tt AO Ea Nottm tne Hebe ge ae hae ELA IL me Pe ee A tn hte Br hah Preamp cere ‘Ageia a 
dee oi ad tn ton pat al oD he a Be Oe LARA Bat Aa hey no tel RB hte Bade ml tha dom rare arte Rte m6 Pago Rasp e a Iu ee P tnak) Ja ede BTS om yim on 
at OE A nth LD Blt MF wth 0, MOA! Ott oo mB Fal ype aie Pad! etn att Ae Ret A bw ee ALOT DS Lie PRE Dae Pe A Pe Re PP bela te wm a Ant © 
OF OO + Oa PhI t. P tlinten Re eK meine tet Mae OPPO Ooo, D+ a od Fon (At Petre Pan Be PRA E M Ine 9 Bp hte I ie et sme ee ee ee ee A ary wee Mech Nets ee the es 
(a ee AeA Oak oto f that alk eh oR f ware dielh 1) othe Bol) Bn Gally htm Ohad oar ntistuedt Pa Cedtent GO ong IH PO et tien So LM Be np hte Bm Tn teat BM OL ae Bi On PR ee me eee ‘ i 
Pi et Dt oh nko Pte neh ete A wh Pe Sn ee EMAL AL ect Pari, Ave tre Ms Pie Bn BE the nl Li cl. td nbn ha Pat af a eM Do te Pin pa oteathy smb OE em te POA ADS MOR wa 
OVAL i LAL etiam oo PR ie oO BPM Be Lic yf nme ® Prot me inf aha bab cabed abahasar-anepimumeniatnaen tes ws i oa NAG OEP ee eh bias 
et tn nf PO SA mt. 8 AR ony Plat BEN Se PD ys eh b Ame BO Bede Des me gee ee Sperna tee oe ae AIO. Diy oe vl th pang ra thehtael net a7 ~itneth im - 
Pee et Fence AON eo che eNO OR oh 5 PA etRetetn Stow Pinatas hee te oman fang fomenaritos Le af . 
A a Mona 2s Mahe Bhan! Pare oh peared arte as 


POA Re a 10 te aged «tat sty nah ee ee it Se 


= OO in Ot oath Mn ae RI te 


hh At nts Ree 
ha Penteene A Se A a ciperan Waren of PPR NN FS in pa AAP Bie Meroe ey i Bell Py gee bangs Se eee Rat Aa ebann a PR wen 
bare Od op ee eee ee ea aces Smee kl, Sets AOR th PAY Dit fre te * oe ais an ote pai deghigteltehipedio-asekedm~aaaiie te, eee WA A ar tare iietetinhntuaseannaldid heoadlors —s 50 ent a alte ene tee 
a aetna dy eae ate Re Mp eae mt eee aed dine Pim tne bine Regi ie Ae Flee AS PPR that etite Yo am ee ae a ALG sccy guiltnentom, Men BP Shinnt - nar ot, Oe eee 
are im er Batt A) ee at a At Sie PO, tte Mle hl he Gord se Bak MEP 0 Bie. manrly- Hat odion8'a, 50) Mar tration? itp Path atm As Ce eo ee we a9 i ae a on a ie eee Aas aw “an von ee Sars RE Pt - epee pa aay ea ntetenare Me. Remade Ta ote een Seth SAH cata Ree annette 

=o. _—. Ae OR Ae a LE a adept Mel Bad ate Roti Pena Koei <b allele kath th. oa oe ad cieamnmineae ot toed PAN Se Oh wn Tinea t pte ILI Ie Pt a Srl pars a Se pee eet A A ame = 

peliespdeeieedtepeadiitieniadaiedin arpa ciibeedidedeataa nee ae ee ee a ae ee Ain ipl + Pin Ray rer dt ee <P Of tee ES iaermnii ET tt NE IN ee, Se DO ate tage geet 

te OT ECM Ot ete MAPA PBI Mog aetthe He Date Rall Bagh rai a heen a Pe Pete tee Bb we OAR ED 2 <A aim we ane. teenie mAs Fethntt oT « 

-- ipa peels tan ihn + 0 oc pt eal ite «02 he obs Bite tet at te Li et he De me Pn 


Sidieidetes eae 


ee ee nee ee rae red Famueitreratiindanlioean ‘onan 


whe RAE RO AA Ht ata di tee oe ee RIGS SPATE ACS tee 8 is et 


arto nee PPE Pera 


4 Me te nee me are ean = whe htt @ BE Pree. mee ™ er Radosh tenis ee sent ne Acthictedangseeowreon 


el eabeniatentaleaieditea aiid ot a eet ee 


a A cw Bart oe eet aie BE 9 OIF RAT I Me! ai a te Po 
rt, mh chen aete ho nt AAD wet WS ne nti th cet Be ne Paige Ry abet g BOD Onl sal alg tReet athe Pande badlboe ta 
ime BOB OOP thot stern oo “ait A ate te AA Pete | eh Bn demetenD alt! nae Pae bole Hk Gag 9 Paat- Memp ins emaat Fabayragne indananaatetanceiananihemmen 
et or a eee + Sind DD Rade ac PEd AaPk Ones. etree mento ct Oe Nn AI OL, oeteerioduca a Fathen 

Cnn Daag ta elas Pee a net hw ott nSoet man Ride AP eben LG the Pedal sca ge onthe igs 
<i fhe neds tity aint ae ee ign ie og aie ta 

. One ee ome 24 a Rae te Ansion einem 

STeeaalbdieshuah tate dart nate a nt tae a Rpbedecnateaaaee . : 
OE aan e Aone i - ape Me) at Ph tn Din ete 2 
nate re el een EADIE ND I mh 
= 


Aan NeMetiat 2? Pam te gaat 


tke AAD de rate e® Son © tant 
centeeinal heaaedea ee ae 
ate er ame ee | 
Parton” Aah wi -- « ss hs Bee a im 
aLnaeetideand PES omhed sted ore® 


eh pessoa Olt Siete ea tire 
- abectenaaaate Me beP ee ate hm © 


oe a Fee mee 


* = RE ete mee 
“ <P nee ee = 
ne me he 7 a 
ae “ . 
ae . oe Smee 
- ~ 
. eee Oe - ate ae ee eee nate 8 
~-- PO ot ee at = ae 
oe - - 
ute “ EB inf 
PA mtn iets 
a Feet ant Pmt #89 OY me yg 
a er “ 
1 es a — a 
~ - bg ree m, 
ie na 
weet e - ner => eur 7 nas = 
» na A tone fi 
-* -“* oa a bates 
- - ~ 5 2 
. + ~ - ; 
- 2 seeioal - “ - “ ee Rene A, = a) ee 
. t : an - Pete - 
: — - ~~ . - a talenerns - : a 
. - - . ~ mF we mer ee an = « 
am - - oon 7 “ ges 7 
- ra - ~ . ~ 
- + . a om 
al - - ~ e Se ee 4 
- A tin sedi so - - x + SPO ee ee - « 
arate - = _ 7 ry 
- + - oo ose _ 7 r a. 
aot. me - a 7 ss 
7 e 
~ “ = —— 
F are “ 
a : - - o 
‘ ~ - 7 
- + - - y 
. 
” 
oP 
a 
= . 
7 , 
as — . a . : a y, 
. -+ > ~ - 
- - Dus - 
i ~ ae Aas tte - « ion = * 
a « A Seeds —_ a teeth 


a a ee 
ODPL A Reh OO tte FOO wate atrqn & 


rant Awe oD 


OOF Rein we the kee FAM tle dO IR Pin Dt POT, anand Ea . h Ban tesrs 
war aR eee Bde aan Le et OP A dint eae Meter RA otetFonn oo ethene See oA 
AERA RIA PNM AL! Wet Et Ree D eens tebe hinds Pec One deb on ~n we 
che OR TROMN ob Manon bod RS Rater a Poteet te Oe ata 
nt ehePahiestel alt ha th aPe: seen won etaboee ithe mse Fi ressnya Hahn Bodh, 
wupepraeer airy Se Ae Ah be nee Bia Hang) pel dD me Ane Ah AA CEs ena le alte Pahl npn d Boon, 
7 * a ae te es ann eh tad owen toner eres vied AM Nat Bend Mal GR mM om pal AH ts 
cectaghee aren 8 ei MPO AD LOL Bich Mg Pm Sip Re Radome etm tt i“ 
(OT Pep tential mete Cah pt abel Ne Ratan and 4, Bt 
AOR GO net oo eternal lite pnb alPy no ore eine ak nated Ki 7 


aide detente adda Rimemuieh mtectnien: a 


Pot oma e ” so ih Pn Cot, Ma ac Gh ps nt Yate int Fm ome 
ve ty PMA th tt ee act A A Oi Gg LOB ARLE mH A oY 
te Oe matt cil ae ll ttn Bye tottn toe Pee Be Re ttn ny Nes nae Ne AO ge pee 


fel tere rename oP ae aoe eee et aer) 


mk See Paine Tose es 


ary mole Pl ne 7 * az ae) Ae cle ha a Onn a ee eee 
a” are Dery PR te ek GA ha Ea Ee Na ae EN a bette ee Cae wrth mth Metin SD a Ns RAY wn tig UO gyn Tiny aterm Ninel 


i. P * a “ 2 een | 2 ste ame 

NNN Ot poaren ™ the alah dy eee ee Ae DeVoe Pe A EY he Retr NR art om Amen a. S atheornet eget Patti gM atten  eaiiedinainetaeal o; 
PN pny Kale he AE TI eG a 0 Hee Mets Ai re tre elie Rngitie nat te Me Na’ TED Retin ey a alten alpha ee eee be OT ERIE I renee cnipreae 
Re Ne Mee) AA ae A a wee. ile ete ee Re ne I PR TL eaten ea th mah etl te A ela nhs tee Mell Ane ar a hatte nN GN te tt a Ear Ra Ty Mowe — 


. oe te PR at Alt Mg le ae ple Mente nen. Sanit Oh hee “a witha AM Let ote, 4 Be hep Matin fre Seattle ye ene mT ET SRA ee Toot eet oO MET ume 


- o C we ee ee 
ee ee ee, ee ee ee ee es he ee ee ines beng ~ % = 
eee erie Re I tree 2 Ree re RI Te a Re Be verte tee ne Matt aetna Tee tae Min Mae tae Rain ee eee err ne Ca 


ed a hae eS Ree 
Rm mete ath ne NEN Ng Be Na TG. ie gS ee Pale a thay re AN Aa cen GAA seg? win gt a Reetete Mn Ch narndlins a 
arekdinaaeaaie Scaaeeae nehdinisa-dhlimemaiieredie-a indiana So els eet tetera tte a os at nat nie Serene entaalpeniateds 


i ee Ce ee a Se eee - ee er ne Ne _—~ 
a. ctv AaSig ge Frei neve 
a al nmi pct cts mers fares ave A anata satan? NR ie tener ene manele set 
Saeincee CREPE MPT cae Fate Reo ee a cet at ot See ag Ren Martner alten Maro Rett. oa Aree gti —e 
fee ee ne 8 ste. ats 7 os Saath Lg, hee ee vperlaine het 
a eed PSE PE Oe SEE AY CRIN ee ’ re 
= — A LE Semen seen TY fem an ce Oh Ree Mert oan Ses op CRT en ee: Saraeeticinersnanalararet 
Pog Me ating Ae mekeg any een = os Ba vi e> Seance om ttn ~~ Ned wan ee gr teofbrtbarcaibndantamnin—ehalengonied>tieiandie ph dame aiemarte tte a fe he necae — a 
et Se Re tan yy te ee ea ea oe eee eee ee ee 


ee 
© ab ae eS Pens Media Da angen, Felli, wird cdh, Nees yn Seren Meh eH at Ane Sag re itn eng tlt a An te Ns Pm a tL Pan 0 my nw ns Moen Ne Ray 


~~ 
a ele eats ot att eet gp Ps he eagle Ria ge A ae Fm ne ge of Te ee Teather te he tata tate Me 


tt 
Anne 


Avital ae ee Na tet a ae te pena ta he eh gtininatonn ng 
ee a rn ald ay. = Sng ee 
OSes fe Rae te Snr ge > ~. eine 
— + AR a tate Bere a nen eee 
™ ee an) ~ -> a at “ . Sh Ree me He —, - -‘- 
— - pes ee De Ae a ee RL ee 
a aah te a Ning mrt Sin: a wane o® 
PME Ne a a at ata I NA Pe aM at ee le. we 
-. se tO oh se tan ee 
~~ ~ te ~ am tlachdeaten cialis 
~ anaes hea A ae ~ Aa! a a an as a Pn ee 
~ - ‘ - - SF Me ae ew ee = —_ ty eine? owt 
aA RANA Meat te i era ae een re. eee 
TAB 
a et Pe Bie +e - . - 
. °. mo 4 ve + Pt eer he — - sor. ined 
Nn et eRe eee Neate le. at — =. Yee = PEE gt > 
nd ied - lineage fae ok intel nae na — eh 
te Ro oe Rate Ps Arete He Re eet a nae oe ee 
- = ~ A tere wre 
~ fins tence Peery 
. i 
ne. A A ~ Pm - 7 
<em > ah Mee : 
- = ~ ne terete - ~ 
~ Piha Maris . rere 
a — - ~ = _ ed Md - ~—- 
ms eee Sosa eae tes Hae ete, "0 he Reieete te weber date - - - 
m teie 4 av itete ss - : 7 : Sar : 
rain Aactleng = - en ee - - 
a m~ be a a ~ ~~ e 
= - nw wt > & =e ate 
“ *- - — eo - . ~ be = = 
a) _ ~ oe - a ms. - - - - 
. — Oe te usw 
: Pew: a dna ot Pes etn SG gonna in wVaks 
. - ate z 
- “ - wa Re _ = ott : 
yy > ! « * - - ° nd r ——~ = 
See 7 + ta Be = - = = - 
~ ~~ . - © - . ~ ete a we 
os = ~ - = _ pam - 
a aS = << 
ty noe - - = ~ 
pe Nal - e 
? = ~ ~ ~~ « - Pa 
. 724 
_ a en . ~~ ~ 
7 ie! 
7 * 
- = -- 


= 


ALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS 


ie a oo 


h 


% <<. 
S3IYVUGIT_ LIBRARIES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT! 


RS 
& 


ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS 


N 


SMITHSONIAN 
NVINOSHLIWS S 
SMITHSONIAN 
NVINOSHLINS S 


SSIYVHE 


LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN 


= (ep) cad 
2 is 2. eyo 
yet ae iz a XE 
. ip ip = = = Ws 
Wy S : aN 
“Yj 3 = 5 . 
Pig od Zz a: 


NVINOSHLIAS _>o4 lYVvug I1_ Ul BRARI ES_ SMITHSONIANs INSTITUT! 


AAA RAAEACAR Ct 
\ 


VLILSNI 


Tp) 


J 


‘JiuvUE 


Wy 
P fe 
tf fre’ 


NVINOSHLINS S3IiY¥vVYslT LIBRARIES 


N 


1 POEM NAN AAR NANOS ES 


NLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT 


INSTITUTION | NOILALILSNI 


De - a = 2 WS 

ify O sists, O NK ai a oO WS Ry 

Mf ° S ZR 3 2 NX 

Yi Z E WY Z aN 

Yd = = oe = : 
” : W”) 


SARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SJ3IYVUs 


y 3 “ = 
ae ' : a” pie! ” JQ aes 
oc typ fifp ay ox ED. \\N oc 
< * VA YY pa. < = WK < 
“« “Yj = : a FA 2 
fea) lif — m — NX m 
on @ a oO ae 
ea ee =I Fes Sh Beal 

ALILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS _S 3 lY¥VYdgIiT LIBRARI ES. SMITHSONIAN ant | 

. Fae 

AN Bs Ve 5 4 ae 
om eet A hy co 
= 5 0 3 ty 7 
7 nie Be) m8 Me La 
m 2 : oe 
WN — W < n- 


LIBRARIES 


Be 


Ye 
‘8 


INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI 


Saiuvuag! 


heer wn = 
Reis = nae 
: a i 
2 SOUYG Tt 
2 2 “iy 
s S , s 
7) xe ap) 
IES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 
” Zz ne 
tat sp cep lJ 
= ie sk 
a oc 
< e < 
es 5 oe 
a 3S a 
wd ra a 
{iSN! NVINOSHLINS S3IYVuaglI 
| Oe re S . iS 
w BS aE loos 
0 Wa 5 ooh 
= WWE Sf 
a N \ se a 
nw ph = ‘ wn 
[ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION | 
a me * Uy 
= a = 
= z =i 
ra S ws 
2) a6 wile) 
< a = 
> = ~ > 
Be ” Cee —- 
JLSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3luvuait 
Zz ef z 
a) ’ aaa! ” 
2 5 2 
SAY es = 
fe) SS = fe) 
a ll z 
1ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 
z is a 
: 3 : 
a 
Ey 2 E 
= 5 
| = ie’ z 
NLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uVvuaglt 
<< = oe 
z a = 
o Tes “”) 
a Qr7 ae 
ste = aE 
= >. S 
2p) as Vv) 
RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


S3S'¥YVYUGIT LIBRARIES 


NVINOSHLIWS 
SMITHSONIAN, 


NVINOSHLINS S3IYV 


s 


SMITHSONIAN 


NOILNLILSNI 


LIBRARIES 


S3IUVUGIT LIBRARIES 


INSTITUTION 


NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS SJIYV 


<4 


INSTITI 


HLIWS 


NVINOS 


LIBRARIES 


LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN 


NOILALILSNI S31uYv 


-j 


INSTITUTION NOILNILILSNI 


SMITHSONIAN 


LIBRARIES INSTIT 


NVINOSHLINS S3/1auvudl 
N 


SMITHSONIA 


aN 


NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3Iut 


LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTIT 


INSTITUTION NOLLALILSNI 
SJIUVUGIT LIBRARIES 


PROCEEDINGS 
Second Lie 


Hoston Socety of Natural History. 
SE ek GV ic 


1870-1871. 


BeOwsuy ON: 
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY. 
TRUBNER & CO., 60 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON. 
Eee 2. 


PUBLISHING COMMITTEE. 


T. T. Bouvet. Tuomas M. BREWER. 
SaAmMuEL LL. ABBOY. A. S. PACKARD, JR. 


Epw. BURGESS. 


PRESS OF A. A. KINGMAN. 
MUSEUM OF BOSTON SOCIETY OF NATURAL HISTORY, 
BERKELEY STREET, 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


BOSTON SOCIETY OF NATURAL HISTORY. 


TAKEN FROM THE SOCIETY’S RECORDS. 


Wednesday, June 15, 1870. 


Vice President, Dr. C. T. Jackson, in the chair. Forty-eight 
persons present. 


Voted, on motion of Mr. C. J. Sprague, to suspend the 
rules and make the Report of the Nominating Committee 
first in the order of proceedings. 


Mr. Edward Pickering, in behalf of the Nominating Com- 
mittee, presented the following report :— 


The committee appointed at the last meeting of the Society to 
nominate a President, have attended to that duty, and beg leave to 
report. The name which first suggested itself to your Committee 
was that of our first Vice-President, Charles T. Jackson, one of the 
earliest, most constant and devoted of the friends of this Society. 
Upon his unwearying interest in its welfare, his liberal contributions 
to its treasures, his courtesy as a presiding officer, his well-known 
scientific attainments, it is not necessary, in the presence of this 
Society to enlarge. We are all witnesses. But the reception of the 
following letter has prevented the Committee from offering his name 
as a candidate tor the office. 


PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 1 JUNE, 1871. 


Pickering.] 2, [June 15, 


Boston, June 13, 1870. 
Epwarp PickerInG, Esq., Chairman of Committee. 

My Dear Sir: 

Having been informed that the Committee on Nomination of Pres- 
ident of the Boston Society of Natural History were disposed to 
offer my name as a candidate for that office, I beg leave through 
you to say to the Committee, that however highly I consider the 
proposed honor, I cannot consent to become a candidate, since my 
health, which is often impaired, especially in the winter months, 
might be inadequate to the very important duties and constant atten- 
tion required of the first officer of the Society. So far as my health 
and ability will permit, I shall always be happy to labor for the 
interests of the Society, and whatever influence I can exert will be 
in its favor. 

A younger man than myself, I believe, would be able to serve the 
Society as President much better than I can, and my personal 
preference would be in favor of the promotion of the second Vice- 
President, Mr. T. T. Bouvé, to the Presidency of the Society. 

Most cordially thanking the Committee for their favorable con- 
’ sideration, I have the honor to be, 

Your Obt. Servt. 
Cuarues T. JACKSON. 


I am under these circumstances instructed by the Committee to 
propose for the office of President of this Society, the name of our 
second Vice-President, Thomas T. Bouvé. 

KE. PickERING, for the Committee. 

Boston, June 15, 1870. 


It was then moved by Dr. C. F. Winslow that the report 
be accepted, and that the Society proceed to ballot for the 
candidate presented by the Nominating Committee. 

Dr. J. B. 8. Jackson moved, as an amendment, that the 
ballot be postponed to a meeting to be held on Wednesday 
next, of which notice shall be given in the newspapers on 
the Monday and Tuesday preceding, and on Wednesday, the 
day of the meeting. 

Dr. D. H. Storer moved, as a second amendmcni, that the 
ballot be postponed to the first meeting in October. 


1870.] 3 [Bliss. 


The amendments were rejected, and the motion of Dr. 
Winslow prevailed. 

The ballot was ordered. Dr. J. C. White and Mr. B. P. 
Mann were appointed scruteneers. They announced as the 
result that thirty-three votes had been cast, thirty-one of 
which were for Mr. Thomas T. Bouvé, and he was declared 
elected. 


The Secretary read a list of nominations for membership. 
The following communications were presented : — 


ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF THE ANTERIOR VERTEBR&H IN Doras 
NIGER, WITH A COMPARISON OF THE STRUCTURE OF THE 
Dorsat Fin in DorAs AND Battistes.! By Ricuarp Buiss, JR. 


In the preparation of the present paper I have limited myself to 
a discussion of the above mentioned subjects, in the hope of being 
able at some future day to prepare, with appropriate illustrations, a 
monographic work on the Osteology of the Doradide. Hence the 
consideration of the osteology of the head, shoulder-girdle, pelvis, 
etc., has here been omitted. 

The tendency of the anterior vertebre to coalesce, so peculiar 
to the cartilaginous Sturgeons and Plagiostomes, is also manifested in 
some of the osseus fishes, it being particularly noticeable in Fistularia, 
Dactylopterus, many Cyprinoids, the Siluroids and allied families. 

In Fistularia the four anterior centrums are greatly elongated and 
anchylosed, their parapophyses unite to form a continuous lateral 
ridge on each side of the centrums, and the neural spines form a 
similar ridge above them. 

In Dactylopterus the first four centrums are united into a tube 
sustaining a solid wall above, formed by the union of the neural and 
interneural spines. 


1 Having been engaged in the study of fishes, under the direction of Professor 
Agassiz, at the Museum of Comparative Zoology, for several years, I have had 
ample opportunity of studying the different modifications of fin-structure in the 
various genera of Siluroids and Doroids, the collection brought by Professor 
Agassiz from Brazil being exceedingly rich in the genera and species of these 
families, to which valuable material I have had free access during the preparation 
of this paper. 


Bliss.] 4 [June 15, 


t 


In the Cyprinoids the three anterior centrums are soldered to- 
gether. The parapophyses arising from them exhibit a modification _ 
of structure quite remarkable. The coalesced neural spines are 
much developed, but the interneurals are small, and exhibit no 
striking peculiarities. 

But it isin the Siluroid and its allied family, the Doradidz, that this 
enlargement of the centrums, and the modification of their apophy- 
ses and spines is carried to its greatest extent. In these groups the 
centrums are so firmly united that the sutures are almost obliterated. 
The neural and interneural spines are often so thoroughly united as 
to form a solid wall extending from the centrum to the nuchal plates, 
separating the right and left halves of that portion of the body above 
the vertebral column. ‘The parapophyses of these soldered vertebree 
present the most diverse forms, sometimes appearing as porous, 
rounded prominences, as in Doras niger, at other times uniting and 
forming a broad shield projecting from the sides of the coalesced 
centrums, as in Perinampus typus. 

Intimately connected with this extraordinary condition of the ver- 
tebral elements, are the modifications which we observe in the osseous 
rays of the dorsal fin of these fishes. The lateral apophyses of 
the interneural spine supporting the first fin rays, not only serve as 
articulating surfaces for the bases of the rays, as is ordinarily the 
case, but spread out into dermal plates, which unite together in a 
sincular manner to form a nuchal shield, to which Cuvier gave the 
name of “ bouclier.”1 

In Doras niger the united anterior vertebrae are four in number, 
the first three exhibiting modified parapophyses; in the third is seen 
the first indication of a costal organization. 

The first centrum is quite small, and is closely united to the 
basilar bone by a serrated suture. Its small, thin, neural spine rests 
anteriorly against the prolonged occipital crest; posteriorly it is 
united to the first neural spine of the next vertebra, and there rising 
half way to the shield covering the neck, meets the point of the first 
interneural spine. 


1 For a detailed description of the fin structure in the various families of fishes, 
I would refer to a series of papers by Dr. Rudolph Kner, ‘‘ Ueber den Flossenbau 
der Fische,’’ published in the Sitzungsberichte der Kaiserliche Akademie der 
Wissenschaften Wien, Vols. xi, pp. 807-824. 1860 ; x11, pp. 232-260, 1860; x1, 
pp. 128-152, 1861; xxiv, pp.49-80, 1861. 


1870.] 5 | [Bliss, 


‘ 


This interneural spine, which is small and thin, expands at its 
upper extremity into a thick, superiorly arched plate which forms a 
part of the nuchal shield. Anteriorly this plate is united by sutures 
to the supraoccipital and parietal bones. Posteriorly it is embraced 
by the two anterior branches of the dermal plate belonging to the 
second interneural spine. Cuvier, Meckel and others, have described 
this plate as a lateral expansion of the top of the first interneural 
spine, affirming that this spine had no corresponding fin ray. This 
seems to me, however, to be incorrect, for this plate, although in 
many species closely united to the interneural spine, appears to be, 
in reality, a modified dermoneural spine —the first spine of the 
dorsal fin,— thus altered from its normal form to constitute a part of 
the defensive armor of the neck. An examination of our common 
Amiurus catus tends to confirm this view; for in that species the 
homologue of this plate is not soldered to the upper end of the 


_interneural spine, but rests loosely upon it; showing that it is a dis- 


tinct bone. 

This plate, above described, exhibits every variety of form in the 
different members of the Doras and Siluroid families. In some it is 
very large, and forms a prominent bone in the nuchal shield. In 
others, as in Oxydoras, it is a slender, lozenge-shaped piece inter- 
calated between the supraoccipital and the large plate of the second 
interneural spine. In many Siluroids it is removed from the cranial 
bones, uniting only with the supraoccipital at its posterior extremity. 
This is the case in Perinampus typus. In Amiurus catus we find 
it reduced to its minimum of development, and hidden under the 
thick skin of the body. 

The second centrum is six times as long as the first, and carries an 
anterior and posterior pair of parapophyses, not united together at 
their bases, as is the case in many Siluroids. ‘The anterior pair of 
these apophyses consist of thin, vertically expanded plates, arising in 
common from the centrum and the neural spine above, and expand- 
ing at their extremities into porous spatulate discs, to which the 
anterior portion of the air bladder is attached. Ordinarily in the 
Siluroids the extremities of these apophyses are not thus modified, 
but unite by synarthrosis with the suprascapula. Between the cen- 
trum and the bases of these apophyses are found, on each side, three 
small curiously shaped bones united to one another and to the cen- 
trum by ligaments. Posteriorly these bones afford attachment toa 
portion of the investing sheath of the air bladder. ‘The anterior 


Bliss.] 6 [June 15, 


portion of the larger bone passes through an opening im the basi- 
occipital into the cavity of the cranium. These bones have received 
the name of “the bones of Weber,” in honor of Weber, who first 
described them, and who homologized them with the bones of the 
ear in mammals. Owen, in his “Anatomy of the Vertebrates ” (Vol. 
I, p. 844, et seq.), shows them to be a part of the auditory apparatus, 
connecting the acoustic labyrinth with the air bladder. Owen says 
Weber mistook the relation of analogy for one of homology when he 
named them malleus, incus, and stapes.? 

The posterior pair of parapophyses consist of small and thin trian 
gular plates rising outward and upward, for a short distance, from 
the centrum. 

In the first centrum of Doras niger the hemapophyses exist as 
downward prolongations of the centrum, forming a deep furrow in its 
inferior surface. In the second centrum the furrow is closed for 
nearly its entire leneth by the union of the hemapophyses. In the 
third and fourth centrums the hemapophyses form a furrow, as in the 
first, which exists also in the two following centrums, though much 
less distinctly marked. Hence the hemapophyses form a continuous 
furrow on the under surface of the coalesced centrums, but unite in 
the second so as to form a tube. 

The second centrum has not only two pairs of parapophyses, but 
also two neural spines. The first neural spine of this centrum (the 
second spine of the vertebral column) starts from the anterior por- 
tion of the centrum, above the anterior parapophyses, and rising 
upward and backward, meets the downward prolongation of the 
second interneural spine, to which it is firmly united. ‘This inter- 
neural spine has two outstanding lateral wings ; these expand supe- 
riorly, and uniting form a single broad and arched dermal plate, 


1'This view of Weber was strongly opposed by Geoffroy St. Hilaire, who consid- 
ered these bones to be the modified ribs of the first, second and third vertebrae. 
Meckel was inclined to agree with Weber in considering them the homologues of 
the bones of the ear. Saagmans Mulder described the bones as a part of the audi- 
tory apparatus; believing the air bladder to be identical with the tympanic mem- 
brane. Later, however, he came to the conclusion that the bones considered by 
Weber as malleus and incus, were but ribs; and the stapes as transverse apophyses 
of the first vertebra. Brechet believed them to belong to the auditory apparatus, 
and Valenciennes considered them as special bones. Baudelot reviews the subject 
at some length in ‘‘ Comptes Rendus”’ for 1868, pp. 330-334 and comes to the conclu 
sion that these bones represent the superior arches of the first and second vertebrz 
the inferior arch of the third, and the os intercrural parted in two. 


1870.] 7 (Bliss. 


which covers the neck immediately in front of the dorsal fin. The 
anterior, posterior and lateral margins of this plate are concave, 
forming a pair of arm-like projections in front and behind. The 
anterior arms partially clasp the plate, which I consider to be the 
first dermoneural spine, and unite by suture with the two parictals 
and with the posterior angles of the suprascapular bones. The pos- 
terior arms embrace the second dermoneural spine, and are firmly 
united to the two lateral apophyses of the third interneural spine. 

Behind the plate just described rises the second dermoneural 
spine ; but so modified that its true nature as a fin-ray is not at first 
discernible. A smooth bony projection or keel rises from the top of 
the second interneural spine, behind and somewhat beneath the 
roof formed by the last described dermal plate. This keel, which 
is somewhat sharply ridged and rounded anteriorly, supports the 
second dermoneural spine. This spine is a short, triangular, forked 
bone, anteriorly convex and posteriorly concave. When in posi- 
tion it rides upon the keeled crest, and is hidden beneath the skin 
surrounding the fin. Its posterior edges give attachments to liga- 
ments connecting it with the third dermoneural spine, and a pair of 
muscles extend from the arms of the rider to the anterior edge of the 
articulating facet of the third interneural and to a portion of the 
dermal plate above. From the anterior face of the rider, just above 
the fork, arise two muscles which are attached to the inner surface 
of the dermal plate immediately in front of the spine. These two 
sets of muscles serve to move this spine up and down upon the keel, 
by which the large spine behind it is raised and lowered as will be 
described hereafter. 

The third neural spine rises above the second pair of para- 
pophyses belonging to the enlarged centrum, and meets, and is 
united to the interneural above, in the same manner as is the one 
before it. It is also united to the neural spines before and behind 
it. In fact, the neural and interneural spines of the second, third 
and fourth vertebra are so soldered together as to form a wall almost 
entirely dividing the space above the vertebre. 

The lateral ridges of the third interneural spine expand supe- 
riorly into two lateral apophyses modified into dermal plates. The 
anterior edges of these apophvses are united to the posterior arms 
of the plate in front of them ; posteriorly they extend downward and 
outwardly, and terminate in an obtuse point. 

On each side of the fin the top of this third interneural spine is 


Bliss.] 8 : [June 15, 


formed into an articulating facet, upon which rest the two lateral 
branches of the third dermoneural spine, and which are kept in 
position by a pair of muscles extending from the outer edges of the 
facet to the posterior edges of the arms of the spine. The bone 
between the facets is hollowed out for the reception of the down- 
ward projection of the middle portion of the spine. This spine, 
the third dermoneural, is very large and thick, and has on its ante- 
rior edge a row of stout conical teeth. The posterior edge of the 
spine is furrowed and likewise furnished with teeth, but smaller than 
those in front. The base of this spine is widened and perforated 
through its centre in an antero-posterior direction. The head of the 
interneural beneath is united without suture to the second interneural, 
and tothe basal portion of the second interneural crest, and projecting 
backward as a slender, bent rod, passes through the perforation in 
the base of the fin-spine, and uniting with the interneural again 
behind the spine, forms a kind of linked joint. I believe that this 
kind of joint is formed by the inward projection of the arms of the 
spine through the crest upon the head of the interneural, and not by 
an antero-posterior prolongation of the crest through the base of the 
spine. My reasons for this belief will be made evident in my descrip- 
tion of the first dorsal fin of Balistes, (see p. 10), where it will be 
seen that though the interneural crest is completely perforated, the 
arms of the spine do not pass entirely through it. ‘This peculiar mode 
of articulation is found in the fishing filaments upon the head of. 
Lophius piscatorius, in which species the spines of the dorsal fin are 
modified into long filaments to serve a special purpose;! and whose 
extreme mobility is secured by the kind of articulation I have’ just 
described. In the ordinary forms of fin spines, the prolongation of 
the head of the interneural, which passes through the base of the 
dermoneural spine behind it, does not unite with the mterneural be- 
longing to the spine through which it passes. But in the Siluroids, 
as well as in Lophius and Balistes, the use to which the spine is 
put necessitates this linked-joint mode of articulation. 
The mechanical operation of this complicated apparatus is as fol- 

lows: the enlarged spine of the fin being used as a weapon of of- 
fense, the union of the neural and interneural spines with each other 


1 See, Description des filets pécheurs de la Baudroie, par M. Bailly, Annales des 
Sciences Naturelles, ler, Ser., Tom. 11, 1824, pp. 323-332; and also, Analogie des 
Filets Pécheurs, etc., par Geoffrey St. Hilaire, Mémoires du Muséum d’Histoire 
Naturelle, Tom. x1, 1824, pp. 182-142. 


1870.] 9 [Bliss. 


and with the dermal plates, serves to give the necessary support to 
' the apparatus. When the fish would erect the spine of the fin, the 
muscles attached to the anterior face of the little forked bone or 
rider, contract, pulling the bone forward and downward on the 
rounded crest of its interneural. The articulating facet, upon which 
rest the arms of the large spine, acting as a fulerum, the ligaments 
which pass from the posterior edge of the rider to the base of the 
spine, cause it to rise with the forward and downward movement of 
the rider. When erect, the spine cannot be lowered by pressure 
upon it from above; any attempt to thus depress it serves only to 
pull the rider more closely against the crest which now stands be- 
tween it and the large spine. By this means the fish is enabled to 
inflict so severe a wound as to render him a formidable antagonist. 
In order to lower the spine, the muscles connecting the arms of the 
rider with the anterior edge of the articulating facet contract, pull- 
ing the rider up the crest, which, at the same time, allows the large 
spine to be lowered by appropriate muscles attached to the posterior 
edge of its arms. 

Geoffroy St. Hilaire, in his paper on the analogy of the fishing 
filaments of Lophius piscatorius with the first rays of the dorsal fin 
in the Siluroids, published in the Mémoirs du Muséum d’ Histoire Na- 
turelle (Tom. x1, p. 132), gives a detailed account of this fin appa- 
ratus, and there shows for the first time, that the little forked bone, 
which had escaped the notice of former naturalists, is truly a spine 
of the dorsal fin. He describes it, however, as the first spine of the 
fin, while, as previously mentioned, I am led to regard it as the 
second; believing that the dermal plate supported by the first inter- 
neural is really the first spine. 

Cuvier, also, in his ‘ Anatomie Comparée” (Tom. 1, p. 126), al- 
ludes to this peculiar articulation of the large dorsal spine in the 
Siluroids ; and in his Valenciennes and * Histoire Naturelle des Pois- 
sons” (Tom. xiv, pp. 310-322), gives a very brief description of 
this fin structure in the diagnosis of the family of Siluroids. 

The third anchylosed centrum is quite short, not much larger than 
the first. Its neural spine is broad and short, and unites with the 
neural spines in front of and behind it, as well as with the inter- 
neural spine belonging to the first branched ray of the dorsal fin. 
The parapophyses of this centrum consist of large, porous, rounded 
excrescences, affording attachments to the posterior portion of the 
air-bladder. They are true apophyses, and near their bases afford 


Bliss.] 10 [June 15, 


support to a pair of very stout mbs. A long, and rather thick bone ~ 
extends from the extremity of each of these ribs to the posterior 
point of the dermal plate of the third interneural spine. This bone, 
which is serrated externally, forms one of the series of keeled der- 
mal scutes which run along the side of the body. It is much larger 
than the others, and its apparent office is to afford support to the 
scutes. In Ozydoras, the porous apophyses above described are 
wanting, though the large ribs are present. 

In Doras. the hemapophyses of the third vertebre are not closed 
beneath the centrum. 

The fourth anchylosed centrum is somewhat larger than the third, 
and differs from it in exhibiting normal parapophyses with ribs of 
the ordinary form. Its neural spine is united loosely to the neural in 
front, and to the interneural of the second branched ray. As in the 
third centrum, the hemapophyses do not unite. 

In the Doradide the different members of the coalesced vertebra, 
and the interneural spines of the dorsal fin are so soldered together 
and modified, that it is exceedingly difficult to distinguish them. A 
comparison of Doras with Perinampus typus, however, will aid in 
determining the relations of the neural and interneural spines in 
Doras. For in Perinampus the interneural plates are so separated 
from the bones of the cranium, and the spines themselves so slightly 
united, that it is quite easy to trace them. But in Perinampus the 
parapophyses of the coalesced vertebre differ widely from those of 
Doras, for they are not separate as in this latter species, but unite to 
form a broad, flat, scale-like bone, projecting laterally from the cen- 
trums, and bearing, as Meckel has said, a striking resemblance to the 
carapace of a chelonian. 

in connection with the structure of the dorsal fin in Doras, it will 
be of advantage to make a comparison with the fin apparatus of the 
first dorsal of Balistes, which, in some points of structure, resembles 
that of Doras. 

In £alistes the apparatus which supports the first dorsal fin con- 
sists of a number of bones, — the interneurals, — soldered together 
into a boat-shaped piece which is attached anteriorly by ligaments to 
the occiput, and supported posteriorly by a bony rod resting against 
the fourth neural, and the first interneural spine of the second dor- 
sal fin. This little boat has a deep keel, formed by the union of the 
two sides. An oval, longitudinal opening in the sides of the boat in 
its anterior part, affords exit for the two arms of the second spine of 


1870.] 11 [Bliss. 


the fin. A prolongation of the upper anterior edge of the sides of 

the boat extends downward to the keel below the middle of the 
leneth of tae oval opening. The anterior portion of the keel is 
somewhat prolonged, and fits into an opening in the occiput, by 
which additional support is afforded to the apparatus. 

This naviculate bone bears three spines; two of them, one imme- 
diately succeeding the other, are peculiarly articulated with the bone 
which supports them. The third spine is placed at the hinder ex- 
tremity of the boat, on a bone, which, though soldered to the bone 
bearing the two anterior spines, is yet distinct from it, as is shown 
by the direction of its fibres. A tendon, the use of which will be 
described presently, extends from the upper part of this third spine 
to the base of the second. 

The first spine is stout and roughened on its anterior face with 
small, blunt teeth. The posterior face of the spine is deeply grooved, 
and the two edges of the groove somewhat approach each other to 
form a kind of shoulder, which, when the spine is erect, rests upon a 
* projection on the anterior face of the second spine. The portion of 
the first spine which rests upon the thickened prow of the boat ex- 
pands on each side, and the bases of these expansions are formed 
into articulating surfaces, and rest upon corresponding facets on the 
bone beneath. Between the articulating facets of the naviculate 
bone, rises a little crest, hollowed so deeply on each side as to form a 
complete perforation. Into these hollows project two inward prolon- 
gations of the lateral articulating arms of the spine. But these in- 
ward prolongations of the arms do not meet through the perforated 
crest. It is, as will be seen, an approach to the linked joint mode of 
articulation described in Doras. 

The second spine of the fin, which is smaller than the first, is 
forked at its base, and bestrides a small crest formed by an upward 
extension of the keel of the boat. The two arms of the spine are 
prolonged downwardly, as previously stated, through the oval open- 
ing in the sides of the boat, and are supported movably at the point 
where the bony rod from the anterior edge of the boat is joined to 
the keel, below the opening in the side of the boat. The anterior 
face of the spine is provided with a protuberance just above the 
fork, upon which rests the shoulder of the large spine in front. 

In Balistes, as in Doras, the large spine is used as a weapon, and 
like that of Doras cannot be lowered till the other spines are’ moved. 
When the spines are raised the second spine rides forward over its 


Bliss. ] 12 [June 15, 


crest and fits closely under the shoulder of the large spine in front 
of it. The third spine is also raised by the tendon connecting it 
with the second. When erect, any pressure upon the large spine 
forces its shoulder against the protuberance on the second, which 
is supported by its crest and by the extremities of its arms, so that 
a backward movement of either of the spines is impossible, and the 
large spine is rendered serviceable as a weapon. If now the third 
spine be pushed down, the tendon which connects it with the second 
causes this latter to rise and ride over its crest, which thus allows 
the first spine to be readily depressed by appropriate muscles 
attached to its base. 

The operation of this peculiar apparatus much resembles that of a 
lock of a gun, and has given to the fish its common name of “ trig- 
ger” or ‘* cock fish.”’ 

Thus it is seen that the principle of the working of this apparatus 
is the same as in Doras, though the means by which it is accom- 
plished are somewhat different. In Doras it is the third spine which 
is enlarged to serve as a weapon; while in Balistes it is the first. In 
Doras the large spine maintains its erect position by pulling the 
small spine in front of it against its crest. In Doras only two spines 
compose this weapon, the first of which must be moved before the 
second can be ; in Balistes three spines enter into the structure of 
the apparatus; the third to be moved before the position of the other 
two can be altered. Equal support is obtained in both ; but in the 
one case resistance results from a pulling movement from behind ; 
and in the other from a pushing movement from before.1 


1 For further information regarding the fin structure of Balistes and allied fam- 
ilies see Hollard’s Monograph of the Balistide in Annales des Sciences Naturelles, 
Vol. xx, 38me Ser., p. 101, 1853 ; Meckel’s description of Balistes in his System der 
Vergleichenden Anatomie, Theil 11, pp. 239-242, 1824; Bruhl’s “ Osteologisches aus 
dem Pariser Pflanzengarten, p. 58, et seq. and L. Agassiz’ Poissons Fossiles, Tom. 
II, Pt. 2, p. 249. 


1870.] 13 [Packard. 


EMBRYOLOGY oF IsoromA, A GENUS oF PopuURIDa&. By A. S. 
PACKARD, JR., M.D. 


*The egos were found laid singly or in masses on the damp under 
surface of the bark of an apple tree. They are spherical, white, with 
the chorion very transparent, and measure .0625 of an inch in diame- 
ter. On the 25th of April many of the young had hatched out; they 
continued to hatch until the 6th of May. 

In none of the eggs was I fortunate enough to observe the segment- 
ation of the yolk, nor the formation of the blastoderm. Numerous 
egos, however, were observed, in which the blastoderm had not yet 
been formed. In these, amid a mass of minute cells, floated four large 
fat cells, measuring about one-fourth the diameter of the egg itself, 
with numerous smaller cells measuring about one-fourth the diameter 
of the largest cells just mentioned. The earliest stage observed was 
that when the blastoderm has been resolved into the primitive band. 
(Fig. 1.) At this time the primitive band becomes infolded, indi- 
cating the cephalic lobes of the head. In a succeeding stage (Fig. 2) 
the antennal, mandibulary and 1st maxillary segments, and the three 
thoracic segments are indicated. The formation of the germ thus 
far closely resembles that of the Phryganeide, as described and 
figured by Zaddach. 

The next change is the closure of the body walls over the yolk, and 
the appearance of the rudiments of the appendages, and the ceph- 
alic lobes. At this time, also, the somewhat bilobate end of the 
abdomen is formed, and also the rudiments of the future ‘“ spring,” 
consisting of a pair of tubercles, larger at this period than the rudi- 
mentary antenne. This fact is interesting, as I have observed in 
other insects (Bombus, Vespa, Cicada, Aschna and Agrion) that these 
were sternal outgrowths, and not articulated, and therefore, as I 
supposed, not homologous with the legs and jointed appendages of 
the head. This spring, therefore, partially represents the ovipositor 
of the higher insects, the ovipositor originally consisting of three such 
pairs of tubercles. At this period the “amnion”? or ‘ parietal em- 
bryonal membrane,’’ appears as a tough membrane surrounding the 
embryo. 

In a succeeding stage the intestine is formed, and the rudiments 
of the antenne and legs have greatly increased in size. Still 
later the appendages begin to show traces of articulation, and the 


Packard.] 14 {June 15, 


tip of the abdomen is deeply cleft by the median furrow of the body. 
The rudimentary mandibles and 1st maxille are distinct; the ceph- 
alic lobes appear very distinct, and the antenne are nearly twice as 
large as the legs. I was unable, after careful and repeated en- 
deavors, to discover at this or any other period, any traces of the 2d 
maxille (labium) though they may be found on more careful examin- 
ation hereafter, as they are present in a very rudimentary form in 
the adults, and are large and well developed in the Lepismatide. 

A later period still (Fig. 3, 38a) is characterized by the differen- 
tiation of the head as a distinct region of the body; the posterior 
portion, including the mandibular and 1st maxillary segments, unit- 
ing with the cephalic lobes, in which the eyes (each now consisting 
ah eight ocelli) are situated. The antenne are now of much the 
same shape as in the larva, while the epicranium, clypeus and 
labrum are differentiated, and the “spring” is fully formed, con- 
sisting of a pair of finger-shaped, three jointed appendages, the 
basal joints consolidated into a single tubercle, from which the ex- 
tremities diverge. 

Another well marked stage, 7.e., just previous to the hatching of 
the embryo, is signalized by the mandibles and 1st maxille becoming 
acute, closely appressed to one another and to the under side of the 
head, and withdrawn within the head, so that the mouth is some- 
what tubular, as it appears in a front view of the head. At this 
period, also, the absence of any apparent traces of a labium is 

worthy of notice. 

The embryo throws off the chorion and amnion in a moment, and 
the larva is very active in its movements. The larva is white, be- 
coming after a second moult of a purplish hue, while the adults are 
snuff brown. The larva is much shorter and thicker than the adult, 
and the spring is very short and stout, while the head is much 
rounded, and the antenne are short, and thick, and very large. In 
fact the larva repeats the general form of Podura, Achorutes and 
Lipura, while the adult is more closely allied to Degeeria. The 
species, which is undescribed, is named Jsotoma Walkerii, and belongs 
to Nicolet’s first section of the genus, of which the European J. 
glacialis is a type. 

The development of this insect is throughout very similar to that 
of the Phryganeide; the germ, as in that neuropterous family, be- 
ing developed on the outside of the yolk. The parietal membrane — 


1870.) 15 (Packard. 


was distinct, but the inner or visceral membrane, which exists in the 
Phryganeidz, was not observed. 


Explanation of the Figures. 


Fig. 1, egg with the primitive band lying on the outside of the 
yolk; ab, fold indicating the meeting of the cephalic and abdominal 
end of the germ; 2, large yolk cells. 

Fig. 2, the primitive band, with the rudiments of the cephalic 
(1, 2, 3) and thoracic (1, 11, 111) segments. 

Fig. 3, side, and 3a, front view of the embryo; al, antennz; md, 
mandibles; mz, maxille; sp, spring. 


Knight.] 16 [June 15, 


The Rev. C. F. Knight presented to the Society a collec- 
tion of shells and skulls of various turtles made by him 
in Florida, during the past winter, and offered some re- 
marks on the habits of the animals. 


He described the construction of the burrow which the Testudo 
polyphemus [Xerobates Carolinus Agass.] (Gopher) makes, digging a 
gallery often sixteen feet long, and sinking to the depth of twelve 
feet, with several chambers branching from it. These are not 
unfrequently occupied by a curious collection of probably unwel- 
come guests. On one occasion, a pair of opossums, a raccoon, a 
rattlesnake more than six feet long, and two other snakes, beside 
several of the native black rats of the district, were taken from one 
of these holes. Mr. Knight spoke of the enormous strength of this 
land tortoise, one of them carrying a full grown man on his back with 
apparent ease, and of their curious uneasiness if the slightest rain 
fell upon their thick shells. 

The Trionyx ferox [Platypeltis ferox Fitz.] is found in great num- 
bers in the lakes of middle Florida. It is remarkable as having a 
leathery integument upon its back and belly, which are only very 
partially covered with a bony structure, and feet which resemble 
more the flippers of the sea turtle than the limbs of those found in 
fresh waters. ‘The anus, in the female, is almost at the extremity 
of a wide and fleshy tail. The jaws, serrated, and of great strength, 
are covered with a pendulous upper lip. The nostril is greatly pro- 
longed, suggesting at first sight the proboscis of an elephant, and it 
was observed, while the creatures were living in captivity, that they 
always swam with only the extremity of this nostril exposed above 
the surface ; while most turtles lift the whole top of the upper shell 
above the water. This soft shelled creature being a favorite food 
both of man and various fish-hawks and eagles, it was conjectured 
that this formation of nostril enabled the creature to keep sub- 
merged beneath the turbid water and out of sight of its watchful 
enemies. 

Lhe Emys serrata [Trachemys scabra Agass.] in the early summer 
congregates in great numbers in the shallow parts of certain lakes, and 
the warm and still bayous near the mouths of those streams which 
empty into the Gulf. On one occasion the speaker, floating quietly 
down stream, came upon one of these gatherings where there seemed 


1870.] » 17 [Knight. 


to be many thousands within the space of two or three acres, cov- 
ering every log and stump and hummock almost as thickly as 
shingles lie upon a roof. 

The Emys Floridana | Ptychemys concinna es is found in 
brackish waters near the Gulf. It has upon its fore feet three claws 
of ordinary length, and two of an enormous development; they 
being often found nearly three inches long. The reason of this 
elongation was not apparent, until by close observation from a boat 
at the mouth of the river Wakulla, the speaker saw two turtles of 
this species, thrusting these long claws into the holes made by some 
worm, with which the hard clay bottom of the stream was every- 
where perforated. The transfixed worms were probably the common 
food of this turtle. 

The Chelonia Mydas (common green turtle) is said by the turtle- 
fishers to enter the creeks which abound on that coast, and having 
eaten its fill of the sea-grass growing there, to roll together masses 
of it, of the size of a man’s head, which it cements with the clay on 
which the grass grows, and then when the turn of the tide takes it 
out to sea, follows it, feeding upon it. When, therefore, the fishermen 
find any of these balls floating down from a creek, they at once 
spread a strong net across the mouth and almost always secure a 
number of these turtles. 

After referring to the large size of the Loggerhead, Thalassochelys 
caouana Agass., Mr. Knight called attention to the shell of an exceed- 
ingly pretty little turtle which inhabits the deep, cold springs of 
upper Florida, Thyrosternum Pennsylvanicum. When inhabited by 
the living animal it is covered with a light green, hairy substance; 
but whether of an animal or vegetable character he could not 
decide. 

Mr. Knight closed his remarks BF saying that this part of Florida, 
near Tallahassee, with its high clay bluffs and its broad pine plains, 
was an exceedingly rich field both for the zoologist and the arche- 
ologist. 


Mr. Putnam remarked that Mr. Knight’s communication 
contained several important and interesting observations on 
the habits of the several species of turtles on the table, and 
much that had never been published. 

The habits of the young Gopher Cooke Carolinus), 
as described by Mr. K., were interesting, as showing a marked 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 2 JUNE, 1871. 


Putnam.) 18 [October 5, 


difference between the habits of the young and old of the 
same species. 

The “green hair” fotieed by Mr. K. as found on the small 
water turtle (Thyrosternum Pennsylvanicum) was a con- 
fervoid growth common on the many species of fresh water 
turtles, -and especially on the members of the family Cinos- 
ternoidcee and other species living mostly in stagnant water. 

The observations on the use of the long nails of the feet 
of Piychemys he considered as a most important and inter- 
esting fact added to our knowledge of the habits of turtles, 
and as another most interesting example of the adaptation 
of structure to habits. 


Mr. B. P. Mann spoke of carbolic acid as a presen 
He had used two preparations successfully, viz.: Ist, 1 part 
carbolic acid to 150 parts water. 2d, 1 part canane acid to 
57 parts water. Mr. Scudder had informed him that the 
stronger was the better preparation for the preservation of 
the larvee of insects. 


Prof. N.S. Shaler presented the following papers by title: 
“On the Progress of Life on the several Continents,” and 
“On the Geological Structure of the Wachusett Range.” 


October 5, 1870. 


The President, Mr. Thomas T. Bouvé, in the chair. Twenty- 
three persons present. 


Messrs. Samuel How, Frank D. Millet, Edward S. Shaw 
and Albert H. Tuttle of Cambridge, Caleb Cook and James 
H. Emerton of Salem, Daniel T. Letteney and Charles A. 
Walker of Chelsea, Rev. Caleb D. Bradlee, Prof. Alfred P. 


1970.] 19 [Dwight. 


Rockwell, C. F. Lyman, Wm. Norton Bullard and Arthur W. 
Willard of Boston, were elected Resident Members. 


Dr. Thomas Dwight, Jr., exhibited some flexible dissections 
prepared by lim, and made the following remarks on the 
preservation of anatomical specimens : — 


It has always been a great objection to the dried dissections which 
abound in anatomical museums and are much used for instruction, 
that they give by no means a true idea of the parts. The branches 
of the arteries and nerves are there, but their relations to the neigh- 
boring parts are lost, and the muscles so shrunken as for the most 
part to be unrecognizable. In short, such preparations are carica- 
tures, not representations of nature. In May, 1869, I saw in the 
Musée Orfila, at Paris, some admirable preparations of extremities 
bearing the label “ Procédé de Brissaud et Lascowski,” in which the 
muscles, instead of being shrivelled cords, were of natural shape and 
size, flexible, and in some cases quite red. Motion in the joints was 
almost perfect, and the arteries and nerves bore their original rela- 
tions to the other structures. 

I declined Dr. Lascowski’s offer to sell me the secret by which 
they were prepared, and have endeavored to discover it. With the 
exception of the color, the results have been very satisfactory, as 
shown by many specimens, some over a yearold. One part of car- 
bolic acid to five of glycerine preserved the shape and flexibility 
admirably, but the color was very dark. Perhaps the best prepara- 
tion is one of a forearm and hand, dissected to show the muscles, 
arteries and nerves. This was preserved by a mixture made by 
throwing an excess of two parts chloride of sodium and one of ni- 
trate of potash, into six parts of glycerine and one of alcohol. This 
preparation has the disadvantage that there is danger of mould if 
the specimen be at all exposed to damp, which is not the case when 
carbolic acid has been used. Preserved specimens of this nature will 
probably be of great value in the study of Comparative Myology. 

In a paper read at the Annual Meeting of the Massachusetts Medi- 
eal Society, in 1870, I have given a more minute account of the 
process and of the various mixtures employed. 


Dr. J. B. 8. Jackson spoke of the importance, in an educa- 
tional point of view, of these flexible preparations, and 


Winslow:] 20 | [October 5, 


thought similar preparations of the internal organs might be 
made. He doubted if any of these solutions would preserve 
colors permanently, but if a preparation could be discovered 
which would preserve the form perfectly, he would be willing 
to dispense with color. 


The following papers were read : — 


LETTER FROM Dr. C. F. WINSLOW, CONTAINING A DESCRIPTION 
oF A Deep EXCAVATION IN THE VALLEY OF THE RHINE, 
NEAR THE MovuTH oF THE NECKAR, AND OF A MorrTAr- 
SHAPED PEBBLE FOUND TWENTY-FIVE FEET BELOW THE 
SURFACE. 


HEIDELBERG, BADEN, March 31, 1868. 


This afternoon I walked with my friend, Mr. William H. Wahl,! 
of Philadelphia, a scientific student at the University here, to show 
him a deep excavation or gravel pit in the flat valley of the Rhine, 
and give him some idea of the water action by which these valley 
deposits have been made. The spot which we explored is on the 
road to Schwetzengen, and is about one mile, or one and one-half 
miles from the base of the mountain south of the Neckar. The gravel 
pit is a short distance west of the railroad crossing, and on the. south 
side of the road, or common highway. 

The deposit consists of: 

1. Silt, fine and dark yellow, with many helices irregularly inter- 
spersed, and some small pebbles rounded and angular, extending in 
irregular, horizontal lines or laminations, with two or three large, 


angular, or partially rounded stones, or boulders of granite and red 


sandstone, similar to the granite and red sandstone existing in the 
Neckar valley. (The silt is of the same character as that composing 
in many places the surface of the valley of the Rhine, and which 
crops out on the north banks of the Neckar, and which I have ob- 
served constituting banks of considerable thickness on the flanks of 
the hill, both north and south of the Neckar valley, and in the 
Neckar valley east of Heidelberg.) This deposit varies from two to 


1 Mr. Wahl soon after graduated at Heidelberg with the first honors of that Uni- 
versity, and is now (Aug., 1870) a Professor in the Franklin Institute, and an Asso- 
ciate Editor of the Journal of the Franklin Institute, Philadelphia. 


1870.] 21 [ Winslow. 


six feet in thickness, according to the irregularity of the surface of 
the field. 

2. Rounded pebbles and stones of all sizes, mixed with some 
angular ones, composed of granite, red sandstone, muschelkalk, etc., 
lying in lines or layers at irregular inclinations to each other, as if 
constantly cut out and disturbed and redeposited by tidal currents of 
different degrees of strength. Large angular boulders and fine sili- 
cious sand are here and there interspersed in this gravelly deposit. 
This varies also from ten to fifteen feet in thickness, with irregular 
edges of connection with the deposits above and below it. 

3. A layer of fine silicious sand fit for mixing with mortar, con- 
taining few pebbles and presenting a front or outcrop which shows 
the sand to have been. constantly shifting by the action of wind or 
water (water without doubt as it appeared tome). ‘This is from one 
to two and one-half feet in thickness. 

4, Another deposit of pebbles, stones, boulders, etc., as described 
in the second deposit. ‘The excavation reaches down no further than 
about thirty or thirty five feet from the surface. 

We found two German laborers (peasants), at work there in sift- 
ing this material for mortar sand and building purposes. Perceiving 
us interested in examining the place and in breaking the stones, they 
showed us what they called “a curious looking stone,”’ which they 
had just taken out where the deposit No. 3 joins No. 4. The stone 
was still saturated with moisture, and looking very dark, as wet red 
sandstone does look, and sand and small pebbles were still adhering 
to it as if loosely cemented to it by long contact. I-purchased it of 
them believing it to be an implement in the domestic economy of 
some extremely ancient representatives of the human race. The 
spot where this object was found was twenty five feet from the sur- 
face of the field as carefully examined and estimated by Mr. Wahl 
and myself. | 

The implement appears to be a red sandstone mortar (like our 
North American Indian mortars) 3 3-4 inches in diameter, and 1 1-2 
in depth, and 3-4 of an inch in the thickness of the shell—or about 
these dimensions. The object is concave and convex, with rounded 
edges, smooth and evenly rubbed and worn on the inside like any 
mortar in long use, and roughish on the outside as if weather worn 
or knocked about by hard usage. The mark of the pick is visible on 
the convex part where it was struck when it was dislodged from the 
deposit in which it was embedded, The laborers informed us that 


Hyatt.] 22, [October 5, 


some months before they had found a large bone there about 
eighteen inches long which had been taken by some professor of the 
University. 


Mr. Bouvé thought this object was a natural production, in 
which opinion other members who examined it concurred. 


On REVERSIONS AMONG THE AMMONITES. By Pror. A. Hyart. 


In some remarks relating to the origin of characteristics among 
animals, Mr. Hyatt stated that he had recently discovered a series 
of reversionary characteristics among the Ammonites which might 
be considered worthy of exceptional consideration. 

These are the peculiar extensions of the pile (ribs so called) and 
of the intervening sulci, or lateral depressions, across the abdomen 
or external periphery of the shell, characteristics found especially in 
Microceras planicosta and laticosta. ‘The genus which was founded 
upon this peculiarity and the (“ Discoceratide)” Arietide, having 
been recently subjected to a revision, certain similarities of a very 
remarkable kind were observed. 

It was found, that among the Arietide, Coroniceras rotiforme, 
occurring in the ‘‘ Bucklandibett ’’ of ‘Oppel, Cor. nodosum, in the 
upper part of the same bed, Amm. Birchii, just above this in the 
“ Tuberculatusbett”’ and Asteroceras obtusum, still later in the “Obtu= 
susbett,” all exhibited toa greater or less degree the planicostan pile 
on the abdomen during some stage of growth in certain individuals. 

In Coroniceras nodosum this is especially remarkable, and the con- 
trast between the young in those individuals which show this stage, 
and the adults, with keel channels and septa all so typically arie- 
tian in character, is very great. In all these species the planicos- 
tan stage appears only in a limited number of individuals in each 
species, and is always succeeded in course of growth by the features 
just described of keel, channels and septa, peculiar to the family of 
the Arietide. In Ophioceras raricostatum, however, the latest 
occurring species of the lower Lias which has the typical septa of this 
family, the planicostan stage is superseded in course of growth only 
by a keel, this species having no channels. 

Of course, in trying to account for the presence of this transient 
characteristic, one follows the family back to its lowest representa- 
tives. These may be said to be two species, Caloceras torus and 
Arnioceras cuneiforme, the former closely allied to Psiloceras psilo- 


1870.] 2a (Hyatt. 


notum in its septa, and the latter also in its external characteristics. 
None of the lower forms, however, display, so far as observed, the: 
planicostan stage, though they occur earlier than the species which 
do exhibit this peculiarity. The planicostan abdomen, therefore, 
must either be a new characteristic suddenly interpolated in the 
erowth of some individuals, or a reversion to certain ancestral char- 
acteristics which have been discontinued for a time in the lower 
members of the family. 

The lower forms of the Arietide, Caloceras torus and such species 
as Amm. nodotianum, with which this species is closely allied, have 
septa that. are similar to those of certain Triassic species, such as 
Amm. Brunnerit and Amm. Batteni Strachey, which also resemble 
Psiloceras psilonotum in their septa and forms, 

The affinity, therefore, is doubly proved through the latter species, 
which is a contemporaneous form, and by direct comparison. Besides 
these there are other species, such as Amm. levidorsatus Hauer, and 
Clydonites quadrangulus Hauer, which show us that the planicostan 
abdomen is by no means a new feature. Thus, though we cannot 
assert that the Arietide are directly traceable to species in the Trias 
having the planicostan abdomen, we can say that the family on its 
lower borders have affinities with Triassic species, and that the plam- 
costan abdomen is found in the Trias. It is probable, therefore, that 
the same modification, when it occurs in the higher Arietide, after a 
certain interval of time is a reversionary feature. 

The young of Coroniceras nodosum, Amm, Sauzeanus of D’Orbieny, 
is succeeded in the next bed, the “ Tuberculatusbett,” by a new form, 
Microderoceras Birchii, whose young are entirely distinct in their 
mode of development from any of the Arietide, They are at first 
very cylindrical and smooth, then two rows of tubercles are intro- 
duced; and sometimes, though rarely, a specimen occurs in which 
the planicostan abdomen is presented. The septa develop to a 
more complicated outline in a shorter time than any of the species 
which follow in the same series or any species among the Arietidx. 

Very similar to this in its adult ornaments and septa is Microceras 
biferum; in fact, I was disposed to think them members of the same 
genus, until I became aware that a representative species, “ MJicrod. 
Hebertu,” existed in the middle Lias. This establishes a distinct 
series for Birchu, and makes it necessary to employ a different name. 


1 Haidinger’s Abhand., Bb. 8, p. 23, pl. v, figs. 7-9. Mem. Geol. Survey of India, 
Stol., vol. v, pl. i, p. 59; pl. v, figs. 2, 8. 


Hyatt.] 24 [October 5, 


The series which we are now considering, has three other ss 
allied species in the middle Lias. 

The first is Wicroceras laticosta,1 whose young are precisely similar 
in all respects to Microceras biferum, though the adults differ consider- 
ably, the planicostan abdomen being brought out more distinctly in the 
adult stage than in biferum. Associated with this species is Microce- 
ras crescens, whose septa in the young have the same characteristic 
outline and proportions as in the adult of Ophioceras raricostatum, 
though the whole form and external features identify it with MJicro- 
ceras laticosta. Then there is Microceras arcigerens, whose septa in 
the young are like those of the compressed form of raricostatum at 
an earlier age, just before the minor lobes and cells attain a decided 
prominence.” The whorls in this species are flattened dorso-abdom- 
inally. The dorsum is broader than the abdomen, and this, together 
with the flattened aspect of the whorls and the early development 
of the closely set pil, gives an umbilicus closely simulating that of 
raricostatum. 

The genus Androgynoceras returns to the peculiar pile and tuber- 
cles of JMicroderoceras Birchii in the adult, though retaining the adult 
characteristic of Microceras until a late stage of its growth. This 
is especially remarkable in Androgynoceras hybridum (D’Orb.), but 
becomes confined to an earlier stage in Androgynoceras appressum. 

The next genus of this same genetic series exhibits in Liparoceras 
indecisum the planicostan abdomen not later than the fourth whorl. 
In Liparoceras Henley this is apparent at an earlier stage only, and 
in Liparoceras Bechei it is absent altogether. 

The same mode of growth is here returned to, which was first ob- 
served in Microderoceras Birch; namely, a smooth, round whorl, suc- 
ceeded immediately by two lines of tubercles or spines, erected upon 
pile which do not cross the abdomen, except.as fine, distinct linear 
ridges. ‘The difference between the two species, in other respects, is 
very great, sufficient, in fact, to constitute very distinct genera. It 
will be observed that we have here a closed series, one in which the 


1In the Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, No.5, this species ap- 
pears under the names of Microceras sinuosum and Microceras maculatum, two 
species which I now regard as the compressed and gibbous forms of Mic. laticosta. 


* This compressed variety is the one figured by Sowerby, and can only be doubt- 
fully referred to the same species as O. raricostatus, which is much flatter on the 
abdomen, and altogether different in form as well as smaller, though precisely sim- 
ilar in the septa. 


1870.] 25 [Hyatt. 


genetic connection is traceable from species to species, and these 
species agreeing quite closely, even as regards the two most widely 
separable forms in the proportions and outline of their septa. The 
planicostan abdomen is a reversionary feature, occurring transiently 
and rarely in Microderoceras Birchii, but becoming characteristic of 
the adult in Microceras biferum, and the prominent peculiarity of the 
remaining forms of this genus. 

That this is not an artificial arrangement may be seen by consult- 
ing the geological succession of the groups. Microderoceras Birchu 
is found in the “ Tuberculatusbett” of Oppel. Microceras biferum 
and Microceras laticostat in the “ Oxynotusbett,” the latter, how- 
ever, lasting into the middle Lias. In this formation it overlaps 
Androgynoceras, which appears in the “ Jamesonibett,” followed, and 
perhaps associated, with Liparoceras Henleyi and Liparoceras Bechei. 

Ophioceras raricostatum, with its keel and septa, development and 
form, allying it closely with the Arietidz, and indicating that its true 
position is at the head of a series of this family, occupied geologically 
an earlier position in the “ Raricostatusbett” of the lower Lias, than 
the two species which resemble it in the middle Lias. These are, 
undoubtedly, part of the Amm. capricornus of Oppel, and are there- 
fore found in the “ Davoibett” of that formation. 

The planicostan abdomen which occurs occasionally in the young 
of raricostatum before the keel appears, leads to the conclusion, if we 
credit the hypothesis of evolution, that Microceras crescens and Mi- 
croceras arcigerens derived their peculiarities from the same source, 
and are either directly or indirectly the descendants of this or some 
other common ancestor. I am disposed to credit the latter supposi- 
tion. The septa examined were those of young specimens, and in 
the case of the last named it will be noticed that the resemblance is 
remarkable in the external features of the shell as well as the septa. 
No one, however, I am confident, without having subjected them to 
the closest scrutiny would suspect that they could be separated from 
Microceras laticosta, with which they are also associated geologically. 
Again, this species is genetically connected with Microceras biferum 
on the one side and with Androgynoceras hybridum on the other. 
According to Quenstedt, the former species is hardly separable in 
some of its varieties from Ophioceras raricostatum, but if the septa are 
examined closely they are found to differ, and the young are different. 


1 Microceras laticosta here includes also the Amm. capricornus of Oppel and the 
two species alluded to in the note above, as M. maculatum and M. sinuosum. 


Hyatt.] 26 [October 5, 


The superior lateral lobes of Microceras biferum always, even in the 
young, seem to possess a median, minor cell which is absent in O. 
raricostatum. The latter species is much the largest, and the adult 
septa differ widely. No genetic connection is traceable in their de- 
velopment except in very general terms. On the other hand, the 
affinities of M. biferum in all respects point them out as degraded 
and dwarfed descendants of Microderoceras Birchii, which precedes 
them, also, in time. 

There are other forms, however, which render these questions still 
more puzzling. A series of single spined or armatus-like species be- 
gins with Deroceras planicostatum, Dudressiert and Deroceras ziphius 
in the “‘Obtususbett,” andis continued by Deroceras confusum in the 
“ Raricostatusbett.” The development of Deroceras armatum does not 
join it directly with any of these species, and since it occurs only in 
the lower bed of the middle Lias it need not be considered in this 
connection. 

Deroceras Dudressieri has the planicostan abdomen in the young, 
but in the adult possesses the abdomen of Microderoceras Birchii, and 
in fact differs from that species at this stage principally by the ab- | 
sence of the inner line of spines; the septa are very similar in both. 
Deroceras ziphius differs more widely from Microderoceras Birchi 
than Deroceras Dudressieri, but in features which it is not important 
to discuss here. Then we have Deroceras planicosia, which never 
parts with the typical planicostan abdomen, though in the adult it 
acquires a single row of spines, as in Deroceras Dudressieri; and lastly, 
Deroceras confusum (Amm. Lohbergensis Emerson), which differs 
somewhat from D. planicosta in the septa, but more in the slighter 
form of the whorl. 

If, now, we examine closely the development of the septa in Micro- 
deroceras Birchii, we find that it equally resembles the development 
of the septa in all of the members of the two series just described, 
which exhibit the planicostan abdomen largely in their growth. The 
septa of Microderoceras Birchii on the first quarter of the third 
whorl acquires three minor cells, and the superior lateral lobes 
become divided, first by the rise of minor cells from the sides of the 
superior lateral cells. During the same stage a very minute crenu- 
lation becomes developed from the side of the inferior lateral cell; 
this, however, does not increase as fast as its opposing cell, which 
eventually reaches a very large size, equally dividing the superior 
lateral lobes. 


1870.] 27 (Hyatt. 


In Deroceras Dudressieri this process is repeated at about the same 
period, but the dividing cell does not reach a similar prominence, nor 
do the septa in general terms become quite as complicated as those 
of the adult Microderoceras Birchii until a much later period. Thus, 
while the lobes and cells of the former have become almost as com- 
plicated as in the adult, on the last quarter of the fourth whorl, those 
of Deroceras Dudressiert are a full volution later in reaching the 
same stage, and are never so deeply cut or foliaceous even in the 
adult as in the adult of Microderoceras Birchi. 

The first stage in the development of the latter corresponds to one 
which occurs in a precisely similar manner in Deroceras planicosta, 
but not until that species nearly reaches the completion of its fourth 
whorl. In Deroceras confusum there is no constancy in the de- 
velopment of the minor cells. Two opposing cells may be brought 
out unequally, as in the young Birchi, or symmetrically, or only one, 
invariably that from the side of the superior lateral cell. In other 
words, the adults have all the modes of division found in the different 
stages of growth of Birchii, according to the stage at which arrest 
of development has occurred. In neither Deroceras planicosta or 
Deroceras confusum do the septa reach a stage of complication com- 
parable with any but the youthful stages of Deroceras Dudressiert and 
Deroceras Birchi. D. ziphius was not examined, but the septa prob- 
ably accord with the growth of the external ornaments and pile which 
place it near D. Dudressieri. The condition of D. Dudressieri and 
D. ziphius in the adult stage corresponds in their single external line 
of spines and rounded abdomen to the early stage of M. Birchii, 
before the internal line of spines is brought out; that of the adults 
of Deroceras planicosta and D. confusum to the young of these two 
species when the spines are developed, and the abdomens still have 
the planicostan folds. This characteristic, it will be remembered, 
occurs also in some specimens of Microderoceras Birchii, but is only 
faintly expressed ; in Deroceras Dudressiert and Deroceras ziphius it 
is constantly expressed in the young, to a later period in the former 
than in the latter, and is of constant adult value in Deroceras plani- 
costa and Deroceras confusum. ‘The inference seems to be unavoid- 
able that the species of this series, which occur later in time and are 
all smaller than Microderoceras Birchit, are really dwarfed and de- 
graded descendants of this comprehensive species. 

Considering the septa in the next series, we have first Microce- 
ras biferum. ‘The superior lateral lobes in this species constantly 


Hyatt.] 28 [October 5, 


divided equally, as in the adult of Microderoceras Birchu; the supe- 
rior lateral cells are divided into two unequal portions by a large 
minor cell, and are very similar in outline to the young of Deroceras 
Dudressieri on the fifth whorl, and to the young of Microderoceras 
Birchii at an earlier period, while the cells are broader and less 
deeply cut than they were observed to be upon the latter part of the 
fourth whorl. The young of MV. laticosta are precisely similar to 
the young and adult of Microceras biferum, but the septa bring out 
equally the opposing median cells, and the superior lateral lobes thus 
become unequally divided. In the adults they reach a state of com- 
plication comparable to those of Microderoceras Birchit and Deroceras 
Dudressiert. With Microceras laticosta are associated the strongly 
reversionary species, which only need a keel to be classified with the 
Arietide. This is’ especially the case with Microceras arcigerens, 
whose septa, in one specimen, are remarkably similar in proportions 
and outline to those of Asteroceras obtusum, and what is still more 
remarkable in this same specimen, a slightly raised siphonal line 
is plainly apparent between the prominent planicostan folds. + 

In Androgynoceras hybridum an equally complicated state of the 
septa is reached at an early stage, and still earlier in the succeeding 
species of Liparoceras. 

Microceras biferum is of small size, about an inch in diameter, and 
at the latest stage assumes a double row of spines, or is smoother; the 
pila in all cases closely simulating those of the adult Microderoceras 
Birchvi at this period. Thus it may be said to play the same part 
that Deroceras Dudressieri does in the armatoid or single spined 
series in its external characteristics and form, while in its septa it 
corresponds to Deroceras planicosta. In the same way Deroceras 
laticosta may or may not have the double row of spines, but never 
has a single row,? and never in the adult returns to the rounded 
abdomen and peculiar pile and ornaments of Microderoceras Birchit. 
Androgynoceras, however, does return to this condition in the 
adult, but at the same time another tendency is developed both in 


1A close comparison with Zieten Amm. Turneri, which I regard as a variety of 
Asteroceras obtusum, shows, however, that a discrepancy exists in the proportions 
of the abdominal lobe and in the remaining general characteristics of form, which 
do not permit any attempt to trace a direct genetic connection. 


2 Microceras biferum occasionally has a broad projection on the pile which 
might be mistaken for a single spine, whereas it is really formed by the coalescing 
or arrested development of two rows. 


1870.] 29 _ (Hyatt. 


the form and septa. One is a greater degree of involution, the outer 
whorls as they grow, beginning to spread laterally over the sides of 
the inner whorls, and the septa keeping pace with the increased 
breadth of the sides, adding to the number of the auxiliary or inner 
lobes and cells. This higher degree of complication is carried to its 
greatest development in Liparoceras ; which, however, in its highest 
species, Liparoceras Bechei, returns wholly to the mode of growth 
originally observed in Microderoceras Birchii. It proceeds directly 
from the young, smooth, round-abdomened stage, to produce the 
double row of tubercles, without the interpolation of the planicostan 
characteristics. It may be possible that the planicostan stage occurs 
in some individuals, but this would only complete the parallel with 
Birchui which sometimes faintly expresses this reversionary feature. 

The conclusion with reference to this series appears to be, that 
its members are also at first deeraded descendants of Birchii, 
but instead of steadily decreasing in size and ceasing to exist, they 
first decrease and then speedily increase in size again, adding new 
elements of complication to the mode of involution, and increasing 
the number of the lobes and cells. All my attempts to trace a 
direct connection with those members of the Psiloceratide and 
Arietidz, which approximate to these series, have signally failed. 
The planicostan abdomen and the similar septa and forms which 
are found in the adults of Psiloceras, Caloceras,} and Ophioceras, 
and in Microceras and Deroceras can be viewed merely as reversions, 
indicating, as in the different breeds of pigeons, only a common 
ancestry. 

It should be observed also, that where reversion is apparently 
piled upon reversion, as for instance, in the return of the Birchean 
characteristics in Androgynoceras, after an interval caused by the pre- 
potent development of the planicostan abdomen, and an interval 
of time also, that this is not a reversion at all. It is, in fact, the re- 
sumption of a normal tendency beneficial to the race, which for a 
time has been entirely suppressed by the prepotent influence of a 
true reversionary feature. 

This can be doubly proved. In the Deroceran series, where no 
tendency to increased complication or size is observable, the race 
becomes enfeebled and dies out almost immediately. In the Microce- 
ran series, where a constant effort is observable to retain the double 


1 A new genus, of which Caloceras torus and tortilis are types. 


Hyatt.] 30 [October 5, 


row of spines, to complicate the septa and increase the size, the law 
of acceleration is brought into full play, and overcoming the tend- 
ency of the species to be arrested in development both of size and 
characteristics, counteracts this tendency and reproduces the usual or 
natural succession of forms and characteristics. 

This may be substantiated in any series of Ammonites. By com- 
paring the lower forms with the higher of the same series it will be 
found that in most instances, when the series is complete, the spe- 
cies, as in Androgynoceras and Liparoceras, increase the extent of 
the involution and the number of lobes. This is precisely what 
occurs in the Arietidz#, which are even more successful in suppress- 
ing the reversionary planicostan tendencies than the Microceran 
series. 

In this family the higher forms, Asteroceras stellare, Asteroceras ac- 
celeratum 1 and others, are much more involuted than any of the lower 
forms, and this is still more strongly expressed in their descendants, 
the Amaltheoide and Hildoceratide of the middle and upper Lias. 

It may be objected that Microceras biferum is a young form of 
which we do not yet know the adult. Its size, the limited number 
of the whorls and the likeness of the septa, in the full grown speci- 
men, to the young of Deroceras Dudressieri and Microderoceras Birchu 
might be considered as proof of this supposition. The development 
is just intermediate between that of laticosta and Birchiu; any larger 
forms could therefore only intensify this relation. 

Besides the negative evidence, however, that no large specimens 
have ever been found, there is something positive. 

The possession of prominent tubercles makes it probable that quite 
an advanced stage of life is reached, since at a corresponding age in 
laticosta no spines are yet developed. 

Similar doubts with regard to the size of planicosta and confusum 
in the Deroceran series are answered with more difficulty. The grad- 
ual decrease in size which the series makes from Microderoceras Birchit 
through D. Dudressieri, D. ziphius and D. planicosta to D. confusum, 
in all the dimensions of its whorls, when the full sized shells are 
considered, and the fact that these species, especially D. planicosta, 
have been very extensively collected, appear to make it probable 
that we now know the shells as they occurred in the localities and 
strata in which they are found. That they may be dwarfed speci- 


1 New species, which has the abdomen like Aster obtusus, but is more involute 
than any other species of Arietes. 


errr se cer err 


1870.] 3 [Hyatt. 


mens which did not develop beyond periods corresponding to the 


_ younger stages of lower species appears to be very probable. 


- 


Quite a strong confirmation of this tendency of Birchu to have 
dwarfish descendants is to be found in its own series, if we may so 
call the only species which succeeds it and inherits all of its peculiar 
characteristics. JZicroderoceras Hebertu Opp.1 of the middle Lias is 
precisely similar to M. Birchi in all its characteristics, except the 
smaller size of the spines and the shorter diameter of the full grown 
shell. The superior lateral lobes are not invariably equally divided 
by a median minor cell, as in D’Orbigny’s figure of this species, but 
sometimes are unequally divided, this cell being thrown to one side 
as in Hebert. We know that Muicroceras Hebertii is very much 
smaller than Mficroderoceras Birchi, because the shell enters upon the 
old age or senile period of growth before the latter has attained its 
fullest adult condition.2, The whorls themselves do not differ in size, 
so that the shell compares with Birchii in the same manner that bife- 
yum or Deroceras Dudressiert compares with it, and in the same 
manner that planicosta and D. confusum or laticosta compare with 
these two; they are as large as the young of the species which they 
resemble in many cases in their whorls, the only difference being that 
they do not have as many whorls, or attempt to develop the septa 
beyond a certain youthful or immature condition. They may be said 
to be arrested in development so far as size is concerned, and retro- 
gressive in development when the reversionary characteristics are 
considered. 

Darwin’s close and exhaustive work upon the reversionary charac- 


teristics of domesticated breeds is, to a certain extent, unsatisfactory, 


since, while it points to a probable ancestor, it cannot, from the na- 
ture of existing animals, show the preéxisting steps by which the 
change has been accomplished. The element of time, also, is com- 
paratively short, and the whole evidence is necessarily hypothetical. 

In the cases given above, however, it will be noticed that while 
the facts are not so numerous and conclusive as in the great pigeon 
argument, they possess the additional confirmation derived from the 
consideration of the manner of their introduction and their serial 
succession in geological time. 


1 This is the Amm. brevispina D’Orbigny (not Sowerby). 


2 Tt should have been mentioned that D. Dudressteri begins its old age period on 
the eighth whorl, while still very much smaller than the adult MW. Birchit. - 


Hyatt] 32 _ [October 5, 


It will be noticed that these reversionary species! all descend from 
one, to which they may be traced by all the evidences within the 
scope of observation, and that this single ancestor has occasionally 
in its own development, characteristics which do not occur in its own 
series in any of the faune of the lower Lias below its own level, and 
between it and the Trias. Ke 

The objection will naturally suggest itself, that perhaps Mdicrodero- 
ceras Birchii is a migratory species from India, or somewhere out of 
Eastern Europe, and that in its native haunts we shall probably find 
the missing links which connect it with the Trias, and farther find 
that these have the same reversionary features in their growths. 
But it must be remembered that the planicostan abdomen occurs in 
some individuals only, a fact very strongly in favor of the supposition 
that it is a reversion. Darwin’s observations seem to establish the 
fact, that reversions are transient characteristics, and peculiarities 
directly inherited are, on the other hand, more or less constant, ap- 
pearing in every individual of the species. Farther, the Arietes are 
a group native to Eastern Europe, during the Lias, and they most 
unquestionably revert just as the young of Microderoceras Birchii, 
and in precisely the same transient manner, to the planicostan abdo- 
men,—or rather, as it ought to be called, the Triassic abdomen, in 
allusion to the age from which it is derived. 


LIPAROCERATIDZ. 


MICRODEROCERAS. 


>) 


Microderoceras Birchii. 

Amm. Birchii Sow., Min. Conch., vol. m1, p. 121, pl. 267. 

This well known species has septa which are different from those 
of the so-called Amm. brevispina of D’Orbigny. A perfect specimen 
of the French brevispina possessed by the Museum is a much smaller 
shell than the M. Birchu, having fewer whorls and entering upon 
the old age period, whilst the typical Birchit is still in its prime. In 
the young the tubercles and pile of brevispina are just as prominent 
during the younger stages of growth as in Birchii, but in the adult 
the spines and pile are less prominent, though the latter are more 
closely set upon the sides of the whorls. The septa, according to 


1 And I might add other species, which are not necessary to the present argu- 
ment. i 


1870.] 33 {Hyatt. 


D’Orbieny’s figures, differ more from Birchii than they do from Amm. 
muticus, a true armatoid species, though I think this difference, per- 
haps, is less than it appears to be from D’Orbigny’s figures. MM. 
Birchu has two series of forms, as is usual among the Ammonites, 
one a thick gibbous form, and the other thinner. Brevispina is 
therefore a different species, a stunted or dwarf descendant of 
Birchi. 

The young of M. Birchi are round, smooth shells, like Thysanoce- 
ras fimbriatum, marked by prominent lines of growth which represent 
transient mouths and finally pile. They increase very gradually in 
size, and acquire a line of genicular tubercles on the fourth whorl, 
which augment rapidly in size and prominence. On the first quarter 
of the fifth or last of the fourth whorl an internal line of tubercles 
appears. ‘These increase very slowly in prominence, until they equal 
those of the outside line. Occasionally the pile become bifurcated, 
and sometimes they cross the abdomen, producing a very faint resem- 
blance to planicosta. This last, however, is very faintly and very 
seldom expressed, and then at a comparatively late period of the 
srowth, so that Birch cannot be said to closely resemble D. Du- 
dressier? in this respect. 

The septa on the first quarter of the third whorl acquire three mi- 
nor cells on superior lateral cells, and the superior lateral lobes be- 
come divided by the rise of a minor cell from the side of the superior 
lateral cell. On the last quarter of the fourth whorl these have al- 
ready become equally divided by the increase of this cell, and the 
lobes and cells possess much of the adult complication, though the 
lobes are no deeper than the abdominal lobe. From this it may be 
seen that the progress in complication is very rapid. Since on the 
third whorl even the septa have already become nearly as compli- 
cated as those of planicosta at a very much later period, and on the 
fourth whorl are very similar to those of D. Dudressiert on the sixth 


‘whorl. And onthe early part of the fourth whorl, when the superior 


ANaterals become equally divided, they must be very similar to those 
of the adult M. biferum, and in fact cannot do otherwise than closely 
resemble them. Sometimes the young have broad tubercles with 
the pilz: split into two or three parts as in subarmatus, etc. 

Microderoceras Hebertii. 
Amm. brevispina D’ Orb., Terr. Jurass., Ceph. p. 272, pl. 79. 
‘¢. Hebert Opp., der Jura, p. 278. | 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 3 SJUNE, 1871. 


Hyatt.] a4 [October 5, 


The Amum. brevispina figured by Sowerby, appears to be a different 
species from this, one that shows more prominently the planicostan 
pile. In fact, Sowerby’s figure resembles closer what I have called 
Microceras sinuosum (laticosta Sow.) than anything else. These 
distinctions, and the geological gap which divides the two species, 
induced Oppel to give it a new name. 


MICROCERAS. 


Microceras biferum. 

Turrillites Valdani D’Orb., Terr. Jurass. Ceph., pl. 42, figs. 1, 3. 

Amm. bifer bispinosus Quenstedt, der Jura, p. 104, pl. 13, figs. 10, 
11 and 13. : 

Amm. polymorphus miztus Quenstedt, der Jura, p. 128, pl. 15, 
fig. 12. 

M. biferum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 80. 

This species has septa very distinct from those of D. confusum, 
and they approximate more closely in their outlines perhaps to those 
of Psiloceras psilonotum than to Caloceras torus or Ophioceras raricos- 
tatum. ‘This is due to the presence of a median cell in the superior 
lateral lobes in both pstlonotum and confusum, and the outlines of the 
lobes and cells which are very similar also. The species is of small size 
and may be readily distinguished from ‘O. raricostatum, with which 
Quenstedt thinks it to be very closely allied. ‘The young are not so 
cylindrical as the young or adults of raricostatum, and above all they 
are never flattened dorso-abdominally with bulging sides, as in the 
typical O. raricostatum. In fact, the abdomen in the young is con- 
siderably more elevated, the whole shell being thicker and larger 
in the young as well as in the adult, than Ophioc. raricostatum at the 
same age or the representative species, D. confusum. Subsequently, 
in many individuals, a much closer external similarity is brought 
about, and this is especially remarkable when the planicostan variety 
of the young raricostatum is compared with the adult of biferum. 

When fully developed, the species may or may not have two rows 
of spines,as the pila may extend into one large, undivided projection 
which cannot be called a spine, but is only a prominent, truncated 
pilum, with or without very slight points or spines at either extremity. 

Quenstedt remarks that these tuberculated varieties, when unsym- 
metrical, correspond to D’Orbigny’s Turrillites Valdani. Another 
variety presents only smooth pile, and these when unsymmetrical are, 
according to Quenstedt, identical with Turr. Coynarti of D’ Orbigny. 


| 
| 
: 
| 
: 
| 
| 
: 


1870.] 35 [Hyatt. 


This unsymmetrical form is less common than in D. confusum, at 
least in the collection I have examined; and I have never found 
such specimens as are mentioned by Quenstedt, which, though 
unsymmetrical in the young, become symmetrical in course of growth. 
Most of the specimens that I have yet seen have this tendency to form 
a spiral, expressed on or towards the right side,—remembering that 
the external periphery is the abdomen and not the dorsum as is gen- 
erally supposed—on the same side, in fact, as the want of symmetry 
so frequent in the lobes of Psil. psilonotum. 

Though this species has been placed in the same genus as M. 
confusum, I think it can only be considered as one of a different series 
of planicostan forms, those with two lines of lateral tubercles. 

Variety mixtum. 

The two specimens of this so called species, if the label from 
the Museum of Stuttgard is reliable, agree very closely with the fig- 
ure of Amm. polymorphus quoted above, and in their septa with 
M. biferum of the same age, as well as with some of the other figures 
of Amm. Polymorphus given by Quenstedt. It may be a variety of 
that species. One specimen has the Turrillite deformity so often 
found in MW. biferum. 

Microceras laticosta. 

Microceras laticosta Sow., Min. Conch., vol. vi, p. 106, pl. 556, fig. 1. 

“¢  brevispina Sow., oy * Hh CF eh 2 
“  sinuosum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, no. 5, p. 82. 

_ & maculatum Hyatt, Op. cit., p. 82. 

The young of this species resembles Microceras biferum so closely 
in all its characteristics, that 1¢ does not differ so much from it, as the 
different varieties of that species do among themselves. The form 
of the whorl in most individuals begins very soon to exhibit a flatness 
of the abdomen and sides and a sharp bending forward of the pile 
on the abdomen, which are the only distinctive characteristics. The 
septa are not precisely similar. The differences, however, increase 
with age as the septa become more complicated and the pile more 
prominent. Two rows of tubercles are acquired in some specimens 
during the adult stage. The abdomen is still deeply sinuous as in 
the typical MW. biferum. 

There are two forms of this species, one flatter and less robust than 
the other, which I have called MZ. maculatum. This has no spines, 
at least none are apparent upon the casts. 

In variety sinuosum, the age at which the tubercles are assumed 


Hyatt. ] 36 [October 5, 


varies exceedingly, as well as the size and prominence of these and 
the pile upon which they stand. 

There seems to be one constant difference between this species and 
M. biferum. The superior lateral lobes are unequally divided into 
three minor lobes instead of, as in M. biferum, being equally divided | 
into two. The young septa are precisely similar in development, 
and also similar to those of the adult and young of Deroceras plan- | 
icosta ; the superior lateral lobes being at first equally divided by a 
cell arising from the side of the superior lateral cell. This is sub- 
sequently met by a cell advancing from the other side and making | 
the usual threefold division of the lobe. 

Microceras crescens. 

M. crescens Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp.'Zoology, no. 5, p. 82. 

In this species we have a form which is intermediate between I. 
laticosta and Ophioceras raricostatum. It agrees with the latter in its 
septa, and with M. laticosta in its pile and general external char- 
teristics of form and growth. In one specimen from Rautenberg, © 
there is a Turrillite distortion, but the deviation of form is in this case 
very marked toward the left instead of the usual dextral twisting. 
The superior lateral cells are broad and very slightly indented by 
the minor, divided into two unequal portions, however, by one minor 
lobe slightly larger than the rest. The superior lateral lobes are 
equally divided, the inferior laterals very shallow. All the cells are 
very broad in comparison to the lobes. The superior lateral lobes 
are about two-thirds as long as the abdominal lobe, and the inferior 
not more than half as long as the superior lateral. 

Microceras arcigerens. 

Amm. arcigerens Phill., Geol. York, p. 163, pl. 13, fig. 9. 

M. arcigerens Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 82. 

In this species the septa are very peculiar. The outlines are 
remarkably simple. All the lobes are remarkably broad, the supe- 
rior laterals and abdominal nearly of the same height, and the infe- 
rior laterals fully two-thirds as long as the superior laterals. The 
whorl is compressed abdomino-dorsally, and much broader on the 
dorsal than abdominal side. This, and the prominence of the closely 
set pile in the young, gives the shell a very decided resemblance to 
O. raricostatum. It will be observed that in this ease the resemblances 
to O. raricostatum are in those very external characteristics in which 
none could be traced in M. crescens. 


1870.] 37 (Hyatt. 


DEROCERAS. 


Deroceras Dudressieri. 

Amm. Dudressiert D’Orb., Terr. Jurass., Ceph., p. 325, pl. 103. 

From France, this species comes to us with the name of Amm. 
brevispina, and from England, as Amm. armatus or Birchii. With 
none of these except Amm. armatus has it any close affinities. From 
Amm. armatus it differs in the septa, besides having very different 
young. The shell is strongly pilated and tuberculated and has the 
planicostan abdomen very distinctly marked, whereas Deroceras 
armatus does not repeat this last feature so decidedly, being much 
more cylindrical and smoother. The pile are also closer together in 
Deroceras Dudressieri, the spines and pile also being filled with solid, 
shelly matter, instead of the spines alone, as in D. armatus. Oppel 
has stated that he found Amm. Dudressieri of D’Orbigny in the Eng- 
lish lower Lias, and this species is so closely similar in all respects to 
D’Orbigny’s figure of this species, that it seems to be the only one he 
could have seen. D.confusum comes so near to the young of this 
species that in external characteristics they seem to be nearly iden- 
tical. 

The young is smooth for the first four whorls; the pile begin on 
the fifth, but the tubercles are hardly visible until the last half of 
the sixth. Soon after the pile begin to appear, first as folds on 
the sides, they stretch across the abdomen and form the planicos- 
tan flexures. Though there are some slight differences between the 
young of this species, on the fifth and earlier half of the sixth whorl, 
and the typical planicosta, both in the shell and septa, they are 
hardly sufficient to distinguish the two forms separated from the adult 
whorls. On the seventh whorl the spines are very large but decrease 
in prominence on the eighth, the pila approximating more. The 
abdomen also becomes more elevated and rotund instead of rather flat- 
tish, and the whole form approaches closely to what it is in Birchit. 
The first three whorls have sides widely divergent ; these become 
rounded on the fourth, flattened on the fifth and sixth, divergent on the 
seventh, and rounded on the eighth. On the latter part of the tenth 
whorl the tubercles entirely disappear, the pile being reduced to mere 
folds. The period at which these characteristics may be obtained or 


1 From this I of course exclude the form figured by Quenstedt as having a keel in 
_ the young. 


Hyatt.] 38 [October 5, 


parted with, is subject to considerable variation, sometimes an entire 
whorl earlier or later. 

Deroceras ziphius. 

Amm. ziphius Ziet. Verst. Wurt., p. 6, “sp 5, fiz. 2 

D. ziphius Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 81. 

This species occupies a position precisely inten elite between | 
D. confusum, D. Dudressieri and the true armatoid, large, single- | 
spined species like the typical armatus. It has, in the young, an 
abdomen similar to the planicostan abdomen observed in the two first 
named species, and in the adult it drops this characteristic for an 
abdomen similar to that found in D. Dudressieri, assuming at the 
same time a row of large single tubercles. My observations were 
made upon a single specimen, but they are confirmed by Quenstedt | 
who takes a similar view of the relations of this species from more 
extended experience. 

Deroceras planicosta Hyatt. 

Amm. planicosta Sow., Min. Conch., vol. 1, p. 167, pl. 73. 

Microceras planicosta Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, no. 5, 
p- 80. 

For the first four whorls this species is smooth, and the wheels is 
remarkably broad, with gibbous sides. On the fifth whorl the pile 
are introduced as depressed folds, and gradually increase in size. 
Spines are never developed in the majority of the specimens, but in 
a few cases they may be noticed rising either on the cast or the shell, 
during the third quarter of the sixth volution and becoming quite 
prominent on the last quarter. The number of pile on a single 
whorl, the time at which they cross the abdomen, and the pres- 
ence or absence of tubercles, vary remarkably. The abdomens of 
some specimens may be crenulated by the first pile, or they may re- 
main smooth even throughout the fifth whorl, and the number of 
pile vary from twenty in some to twenty-six in others. 

The septa also in the young, instead of retaining the usual propor- 
tions of the superior lateral cells and lobes, almost obliterate these 
two which are represented, as in the adult of Coroniceras tenue, by 
a row of minor lobes and cells. It, however, still retains the peculiar 
median cells of the superior lateral lobes, which are so characteristic 
of the three series of planicostan forms. These begin to show them- 
selves as lateral expansions or crenulations of the superior lateral cells 
on the latter part of the fourth or early part of the fifth whorls. The 
subsequent division of the superior lateral cell into two unequal por- 


1870.] 89 (Hyatt. 


tions by a pointed minor lobe, the depth of the superior lateral lobes 
about equal to the abdominal lobe, and the shallowness of the inferior 
lateral lobes, together with the great breadth of the cells and sim- 
plicity of outline of the cells, and absence of numerous minor lobes 
and cells, are all characteristics of the Arietide. 

They show that planicosta, and the series to which it belongs, come 
nearest to this family ; in fact, are precisely intermediate between the 
Microceran series and the Arietide. If, indeed, specimens of D. con- 
fusum sometimes have a keel as stated by Quenstedt, the evidence 
is still stronger. In the adult the triplicate division of the base of 
the superior lateral cells, and the outlines of the septa, remind us 
forcibly of Caloceras torus, the lowest of the Arietide, though the 
shallowness of the inferior lateral lobes still remains. This, however, 
is probably sometimes found in C. torus and in those specimens in 
which the development of the pile is retarded, an external similarity 
to the smooth abdomen and fold-like lateral pile of C. torus is also 
produced. 

Deroceras confusum. 

Amm. confusus Quenstedt, der Jura, p. 127, pl. 75, fig. 89. 

‘¢ —_ planicosta Sow., (pars) Min. Conch., vol. rv, p. 149, pl. 
406, not 73. 

Microceras confusum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, no. 5, 
p- 80. 

Amm. Lohbergensis Emerson, Die Liasmulde von Markoldendorf, 
pe Gli iple3) fig. 8. .\) 

In this species the first three and a half whorls are smooth and 
flattened ventrally, the sides bulging as in O. raricostatum. This 
resemblance is still further increased by the development of the 
pile. On the latter part of the fourth, fifth and sixth whorls the 
resemblance to raricostatum is very close, or rather to the earlier 
stages of that species before the keel appears. On the sixth whorl the 
tubercles begin to appear and the form changes ta a more laterally 
compressed and thinner whorl, and the tuberculated pile cross the 
abdomen as in the typical planicosta. 

The septa on the fifth whorl are quite like those of raricostatum 
in their outlines, though the inferior auxiliary lobes and cells slope 
inwardly and posteriorly. All the shells examined were small, 
hardly more than an inch in diameter. ‘The developmental resem- 
blance to Q. raricqstatum does not extend to the septa. These have 
a close similarity to those of Caloceras torus, differing however in one 


Hyatt.) 40 [October 5; 


essential point,—the presence of median minor cells which equally 
divide the superior lateral lobes. This characteristic, though it may 
be absent in many specimens, is so constant that it prevents the 
direct connection of the young of this species with the young of 
C. torus or O. raricostatum, which it otherwise so closely imitates. 

The resemblance to the young of JMJicroderoceras Birchii is not so 
close, however, in external features, though the septa are very closely 
allied. The Turrillite variety is quite common in this species, - 
whereas it is not so common in the true Amm. planicosta Sow. 

One of Quenstedt’s figures of this species represents a young shell 
decidedly keeled. This, I think, cannot be of the same species, and 
his accompanying descriptions do not justify its associations with his 
Amm. Bronnit. . 

The variations in the lobes are excessive. The median cells of the 
superior lateral lobes are usually largely developed, often, though not 
invariably, retaining the youthful or one-sided aspect which they 
have in the young of Deroceras planicosta and M. Birchii. In some 
specimens, however, they are very small, and the lobes are unequally 
divided by two very minute minor cells. These lobes, in other words, 
may be equally divided, or have all the gradations from this to a state 
of unequal division. The same lobes are either longer, equal to, or 
shorter than the abdominal lobe, but seem invariably to greatly ex- 
ceed the inferior lateral lobes. 

Deroceras densinodum. 

Amm. armatus densinodus Quenstedt, der Jura, p. 105, pl. 13,_ 
fies. 9, 10. 

D. densinodum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 84. 

This species does not apparently occur in the middle Lias as stated 
in my paper in the Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, 
but only in the lower Lias. The mistake resulted from an erroneous 
reading of the label on the specimen. It may be only a variety of 
D. confusum, but the young differ somewhat, the abdomen is nar- 
rower and the septa are invisible in the single specimen of D. densi- 
nodum in the possession of the Museum. 

According to Quenstedt’s figure this species is really an armatus in 
which the young is pilated or ribbed at a very early period, instead 
of being smooth as in armatus proper. Having only the young it is 
impossible to say much about the affinities of the shell ; it is, how- 
ever, evidently a member of the planicostan group or series of 
Deroceras. 


1870.] | 41 [Hyatt. 


ANDROGYNOCERAS. 


From the specific descriptions it will be seen that we have here 
two groups or series, both developing from the first variety of one 
species, Androgynoceras hybridum. From this we have the series in 
which acceleration of development produces the flattened abdomens 
and broad whorls of the second variety of A. hybridum, and of 
Liparoceras indecisum, the more elevated, though still broad whorled 
adult of LZ. Henleyiy with young just like the adults of A. hybridum, 
second variety, and finally the high whorled Z. Bechei. The amount 
of involution is just proportionate to this progress, reaching to the 
first line of tubercles in the first three forms, to the second only in 
the adults of the fourth, and to the second in both the young and 
adults of the fifth. 

The second offshoot or series contains only one species, A. 
appressum, which is highly accelerated when compared with A. 
hybridum. 'This has remarkably flattened sides and the connection 
with the other is shown by the development of the young. Whether 
this ought to be set aside as a distinct genus, or not, will depend upon 
the discovery of other descendants. 

Androgynoceras hybridum. 

Amm. hybrida D’ Orb., Terr. Jurass. Ceph., p. 285, pl. 85. © 

And. hybridum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 83. 

For six volutions the shell is apparently inseparable from certain 
forms of M. laticosta. Upon the seventh whorl, instead of continuing 
the same degree of increase in size, a more rapid enlargement takes 
place, the lateral pile become less prominent and more crowded, 
sometimes coalescing near the umbilicus. The inner tubercles in the 
latter case, also, either partially or entirely coalesce. ‘The abdomen 
in the meantime has become more prominent, less furrowed, and 
more rounded, and the sides converge outwardly. The abdominal 
pile split up each into several minor ridges on the latter part of the 
seventh whorl, reducing these furrows to a minimum. 

A variety of this species from Schippenstadt and Semur completes 
the same stages of growth as have been described in A. hybri- 
dum, a full volution earlier. It has at the end of the sixth volution a 
whorl nearly as large and of the same form, but much broader in pro- 
portion to the length than in the first. The pile begin to take upon 
themselves similar characteristics. J am unable to state whether this 
or some intermediate form between this and the first variety is the 


Hyatt.] 42 [October 5, 


one described by D’Orbigny ; or with any certainty, whether the first 
variety is a distinct species, though it seems to be such. 

Androgynoceras appressum. 

And. appressum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 83. 

For perhaps the first four or five volutions the shell is similar to 
the young of thinner varieties of MJ. laticosta. The extent of 
envelopment, also, is slight ; soon however, on the last of the fifth or 
first of the sixth the planicostan pile split into several ridges united 
at either end by tubercles. The abdomen at this period, the inclina- 
tions of the sides, etc., closely resemble the characteristics of the 
adult of the first variety of A. hybridum. 


LIPAROCERAS. 


Liparoceras indecisum. 

Lip. indecisum Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, p. 8. 

This is evidently a very much more accelerated form than even the 
second variety of A. hybridum. It still preserves, however, the 
form of the adult of this species. The young, if I am correct in 
referring a young specimen from Rautenberg to this species, has plan- 
icostan pile certainly until after the completion of the fourth, and 
probably until near the end of the fifth volution. 

Liparoceras Henleyi. 

Amm. Henleyi Sow., Min. Conch., vol. 11, p. 161, pl. 172. 

Naut. striatus Rein, Naut. et argo., p. 85, pl. 8, figs. 65, 66. 

L. Henleyi Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5. p. 84. 

This species differs from the last in not repeating the planicostan 
abdomen at all, unless upon a volution preceding the last quarter of 
the third. This seems improbable, though it may occur in some speci- 
mens. At this period in the specimens examined all the adult char- 
acteristics were well developed, and it only remained for them to 
increase in size. ‘The form of the shell is also precisely that of the 
adult A. hybridum, second variety, or at least of that shell at. 
the end of the sixth volution. 

The L£. Henleyi differs from LZ. Bechet in having larger and 
more prominent tubercles, a broader whorl in proportion to the 
height, and in the slighter involution of the young. For the first four 
whorls the involution does not reach the internal line of tubercles, 
leaving a larger umbilicus than in Z. Bechet. In one specimen from 
Lyme Regis the only distinction from Bechei consists in this single 


1870.] 43 [Hyatt. 


characteristic. Usually, however, the angular, prominent, ribbed 
tubercles of the younger whorls at once show great differences. 
While LZ. Henleyi thus seems to show variations advancing towards 
L. Bechei, the last never has a variety like L. Henleyi. 
Liparoceras Bechei. 
Amm. Bechei Sow., Min. Conch., v. 111, p. 143, pl. 280. 
Ke  Ziet. Verst. Wurt., p. 37, pl. 28, fig. 4 

Lip. Bechet Hyatt, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., no. 5, pl. 84. 

Fold-like lines of growth are prominent in the young, which are 
otherwise smooth and rounded. ‘These increase in number and 
sharpness until they become true pile. 

Two lines of tubercles are introduced, also, in the young, but 
appear either quite late or comparatively early on the third whorl. 

The septa on this volution precisely resemble the septa of the 
nearly adult JZ. laticosta. ‘They have very broad abdominal and 
superior lateral lobes; the latter unequally divided. The siphonal 
cells are very large. In one specimen a very decided resemblance to 
A. sternalis is produced by the angulation of the abdomen and the 
unusual development, for so young specimens, of the lateral pile 
with their tubercles on the last quarter of the third whorl. 


Section of Microscopy. October 12, 1870. 
Mr. E. Bicknell in the chair. Fifteen members present. 


Mr. C. Stodder exhibited a slide containing albumen coagu- 
lated with carbolic acid, which had been carefully sealed in 
July, 1869. With a high power, he showed that the particles 
were in continual vibration. He thought the appearance of 
this preparation was identical with what was represented in 
figures published by Dr: Lionel 8. Beale, in his germ-theory 
of disease. 

Dr. C. Ellis remarked, that all such particles from their mi- 
nuteness, appeared alike; and that any solid in a state of fine . 
subdivision exhibited this molecular motion. Their motion 
was no proof that they were alive. 


Bicknell. ] 44 [October 12, 


The following paper was presented :— 


A Mernuop oF PRODUCING VERY LOW POWERS FOR THE 
Microscorgs. By Epwin BICKNELL. 


I use a plano-convex “collecting,” or “ reducing” lens, in the draw 
tube of the microscope, about midway between the objective and eye- 
piece; it is achromatic, of four inches focal length and six-tenths of 
an inch in diameter. | A 

Placed about midway between the objective and eyepiece, its effect 
is to reduce: the magnifying power of any objective about one-half; 
at the same time shortening the “working distance” of the objective 
materially. Used with a 2-inch, 3-inch, or 4-inch objective it practi- 
cally makes them 4-inch, 6-inch, or 8-inch, respectively. Its effect is 
not good with high powers, where of course it is not needed. 

By using a similar lens as an objective, in connection with the 
reducing lens, I have a very low power of only five or six diameters 
and three and a half inches working distance. This power takes into 
the field of the lowest eyepiece an object, eighty-eight hundredths of 
an inch in diameter, with a depth of focus of nearly halfan inch. 

This lowest power I have found very useful in viewing whole flowers, 
large sections, Zoophytes in glass troughs, etc., as all their parts, both 
breadth and depth, were brought into view at once. i do not bring 
this forward as an “ optically ” perfect instrument, but as a conven- 
ient method of producing very low powers for certain purposes. 
Below I give a table of diameters with the different eyepieces. 


Lowest 38-inch. 
power. objective. 
Eyepiece Al 2) ro) diameters: 10 diameters. 
ee Bist teaes SeonO & 18 ee 
s Coote ce 1S Ge 32 


Tt will be seen that the lowest power gives only the magnifying 
power of the eyepieces used, and the 3-inch only about double the 
power. ue 


1870.} 45 [Hunt, 


Wednesday, October 19, 1870. 


The President in the chair. Forty-two persons present. 


The following papers were presented : — 


On THE GEOLOGY OF THE VICINITY OF Boston. By Dr. T. 
STERRY Hunt. 


During the past week I have made several geological excursions in 
the neighborhood of Boston, in some of which I was accompanied by 
Prof. N. 8. Shaler, and in the others by Prof. Alpheus Hyatt; the 
familiarity of these gentlemen with the local geology has greatly 
facilitated my examinations. ‘The rocks which we have seen may be 
considered in three classes. A, the crystalline stratified rocks; 
B, the eruptive granites; C, the unaltered slates, sandstones and 
conglomerates. The former of these may be separated lithologically 
into two divisions; the first being the quartzo-feldspathic rocks. 
Among these are included the felsite-porphyrites of Lynn, Saugus 
and Marblehead, with their associated non-porphyritic and jasper-like 
varieties, the compact feldspar of Hitchcock, who has well described 
these rocks in the Geology of Massachusetts, pages 664, 667. Asso- 
ciated with them is a granular quartzo-feldspathic rock which is often 
itself porphyritic, with feldspar crystals, and sometimes appears as a 
fine grained syenitic or gneissoid rock, often distinctly stratified. 
This has been described by Hitchcock as intermediate between por- 
phyry and syenite; his syenites with “a nearly or quite compact feld- 
spar base”? and some of his porphyritic syenites (Geol. Mass., pp. 
668, 669) will probably be found to belong to these granular eurites, 
which I connect with the porphyries. ‘These rocks are seen inti- 
mately associated with the porphyry on Marblehead Neck, also in 
Marblehead, and underlying the argillites of Braintree and 
Weymouth. 

The second division of the rocks of class A includes a series of 
dioritic and ‘chloritic rocks, generally greenish in color, sometimes 
schistose, and frequently amygdaloidal. ‘They often contain epidote, 
quartz, and calcite, and occasionally actinolite, amianthus, scaly 
chlorite, and copper pyrites. ‘This series holds a bed of dolomite at 
Stoneham, and serpentine in Lynnfield, where bedded serpentines, 
dipping at a high angle to the N. W., occur apparently in the strike 
of these dioritic and epidotic rocks, which include the greenstones of 


Hunt.] 46 [October 19, 


Dr. Hitchcock, described by him as occasionally schistose and pass- 
ing into hornblende slate, (Geol. Mass., pp. 548, 647) ; and also his 
varioloid wacke, under which name he describes the green and choc- 
olate-colored amygdaloidal epidotic and chloritic rocks of Brighton, 
and the somewhat similar rocks of Saugus, which are seen within a 
few hundred feet to the northwest of the limit of the red jaspery pe- 
trosilex. This series of magnesian rocks is apparently identical with 
that which occurs with dolomite and massive dark colored serpen- 
tines in the city of Newport, R. I., where the beds have also a high 
dip to the northwest. A similar series of strata is largely displayed 
on the islands and along the shores of Passamaquoddy Bay. ‘The 
dioritic and chloritic beds towards their base are there interstratified 
with red felsite-porphyries like those of this vicinity, which, asso- 
ciated with granular eurites, form great masses in that region. I 
regard these two types of rocks as forming parts of one ancient crys- 
talline series, which is largely developed in the vicinity of Boston, 
and may be traced at intervals from Newport to the Bay of Fundy, 
and beyond. ‘To this same series I refer the great range of gneissic 
and dioritic rocks with serpentines, chloritic, taleose and epidotic 
schists which stretches through western New England. 

These ancient rocks are in various places penetrated by intrusive 
granites, which are generally more or less hornblendic—the syenites 
of Hitchcock and others. They often contain true feldspars, as in the 
well-marked granite of Newport, which there cuts the greenish dio- 
ritic and sometimes amygdaloidal rocks. In this vicinity, besides the 
granites of Cape Ann and of Quincy, which probably belong to this 
class, examples of intrusive granites (or syenites) are well seen in 
Stoneham and in Marblehead, where they cut the greenish chloritic 
rocks, and on Marblehead Neck, where they are erupted among the 
felsite-porphyries. In all of these places the phenomena of disrup- 
tion and enclosure of fragments of the broken rock in the granite are 
well seen, the lines of contact being always sharp and well-defined. 
Considerable varieties in the colors and the constitution of these 
erupted rocks are observed in different localities, and sometimes even 
in portions of the same mass. ‘This is well seen on Marblehead 
Neck, where the aspect is such as might result from the simultaneous 
gushing forth of two somewhat different varieties of granite, as if from 
contiguous beds of an older granitic gneiss beneath. In one case at 
Marblehead the eruptive granite is traversed by segregated or endo- 
genous veins of red orthoclase with quartz and epidote. 


1870.] AT [Hunt. 


The evidences of the eruptive origin of the granites of our vicinity 
were well described by Hitchcock, though, as before remarked, he 
includes with them, under the common name of syenite, many rocks 
belonging to class A. The coarse white granites on Marblehead 
Neck are seen in one place intersecting thin bedded and somewhat 
contorted quartzites, which hold dark micaceous layers, and resemble 
rather a fine grained gneiss.1_ These beds, which occupy but a small 
area, are not unlike the strata which at Biddeford, Maine, and in 
some parts of Nova Scotia, are cut by granites, and probably belong 
to a newer series than the rocks of class A, as above described. All 
of these rocks, the granites included, are on Marblehead Neck trav- 
ersed by dykes of intrusive greenstone, which are sometimes very 
similar in aspect to certain of the bedded diorites of A. 

Of the rocks of class C, the unaltered argillites of Braintree, hold- 
ing a primordial fauna, were observed by Prof. Shaler and myself 
to rest directly upon a hard porphyritic felsite of the ancient series. 
The line of demarkation between this and the soft argillite is very 
distinct. A more detailed examination than we were able to make 
during a violent rain-storm, will be required to show whether the 
contact here observed is due to original deposition or to a subsequent 
dislocation. Reddish granulites directly underlie the black argillites 
of Weymouth, and the quartzites with conglomerates and argillites 
of Chestnut Hill Reservoir, and of Brighton near by, are in several 
places observed in contact with the old dioritic and epidotic rocks 
already noticed. The Roxbury conglomerate was observed to 
contain pebbles of the felsite-porphyries, diorites and intrusive gran- 
ites of the older series, besides, as already remarked by Hitchcock, 
fragments of argillaceous slate. In this connection may be noticed 
a remarkable recomposed rock long since correctly described by the 
same careful observer, as an aggregate of broken-up and recemented 
felsite-porphyry, (Geol. Mass., pp. 547, 665). He observed it at 
Hingham and Cohasset, and Mr. Hyatt has since found it on Mar- 
blehead Neck, resting directly on the parent rock, and very firmly 
cemented. The unequal weathering of the surface, however, clearly 
shows both its conglomerate character and the inferior hardness of 
the cement. Such conglomerates may of course be of very different 
ages, a remarkable example of a similar reconstructed telsite-por- 


1 These micaceous and gneissic rocks have since been found by Mr. Hyatt to be 
largely exposed at Naugus Head in Marblehead, where they run to the west of 
north and are nearly vertical. 


Hunt. 48 [October 19, 


phyry adjoining the old porphyries of Passamaquoddy Bay, is inter- 
stratified with fossiliferous sandstones which show it to be of Silurian 
age. The same thing is observed in Cobscook Bay, near to Eastport, 
in Maine; while elsewhere similar conglomerates are met with of 
Lower Carboniferous age. 

The fact that the primordial strata of Braintree have suffered no 
metamorphism is the more significant, since the beds of similar age 
in New Brunswick and Newfoundland ! rest uncomformably on erys- 
talline strata supposed to’ belong to the same ancient series that 
underlies the Braintree beds, and are, like these, unaltered sand and 
mud rocks. The alteration in the paleozoic strata along our north- 
eastern coast is apparently confined to the proximity of intrusive 
rocks. Thus the so-called flinty slates at Nahant, containing patches 
and bands of epidotic matter, are, as long since pointed out by 
Hitchcock, penetrated by great masses of eruptive greenstone, and 
I have found that at distances of a few yards from this they appear 
as argillites but little indurated. The Upper Silurian beds about 
Passamaquoddy Bay are, in like manner, altered in the immediate 
vicinity of eruptive greenstones, becoming hard, greenish and epi- 
dotic, but the same beds a few feet distant are eee and earthy 
in their aspect. 7 

The difficulties which have attended the study of the geology of 
this region have arisen in part from great lithological diversities, 
which led our early observers to separate into different classes rocks 
of the same geological series; while on the other hand, rocks geog- 
nostically very unlike were brought together. These points are 
shown in what we have cited from Hitchcock with regard to the 
syenite and greenstone, under both of which heads he has placed 
with true eruptive rocks others which are doubtless stratified. The 
indigenous greenstones or diorites were at the same time separated 


from the amygdaloids and serpentines (which were correctly looked . | 


upon as stratified rocks), a misconception which could only lead to 
confusion. I have ventured in these remarks to state briefly the 
conclusions to which a few days of observation have led me with 
regard to the relations of some of the rocks of this vicinity. ‘They 
will be found, I think, to show a greater simplicity than has hitherto 
been supposed in the geological structure of the region, and are pre- 


1 Mr. Billings informs me that he regards the Paradoxides Bennetti (Salter) from 
Newfoundland as identical with the Paradoxides Harlani (Greene) from Braintree. 


” 1870.) 49 [Dall. 


sented, imperfect as they must needs be, in the hope that they may 
lead some of the members of this Society to give more attention to 
this very interesting subject of study. 


PRELIMINARY SKETCH OF A NATURAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE 
OrpER DocoGciossa. By W. H. DAL. 


The following is a preliminary sketch of a more natural arrange- 
ment of the mollusca, contained in the Orders Cervicobranchiata and 
Cyclobranchiata of Gray, taken from the results of investigations now 
in preparation for publication in a more extended form. These in- 
vestigations having shown that no line can be drawn between the two 
orders of Gray above mentioned, it follows that they must be consol- 
idated; and for the group in question, the Order Docoglossa Troschel 
(minus the Polyplacophora and Solenoconche), has been restricted 
and adopted. As the denominations previously applied, all imply an 
erroneous idea of the structure of the animals, this course has been 
determined upon in preference to using prior, but incorrect, ordinal 
names. - 

The order, as here restricted, was first recognized by me in ‘ A 
Revision of the Mollusca of Massachusetts ”’ (Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. 
Hist., x11, p. 245, March, 1870) at which time only the characters 
of the suborder Abranchiata had been fully worked out. Since that 
time I have investigated the characters of the suborder Proteobranchi- 
ata, as here restricted ; and in a paper read before the American 
Association for the advancement of Science, at Troy, September, 
1870, of which a synopsis was published in the American Naturalist, 
(November, 1870, p. 561,) I restricted the order Docoglossa within its 
present limits, from the researches above mentioned. Among the 
fruits of these investigations was the definite exclusion of the Gadin- 
tide from the order. (See Am. Journ. Conch., Weis Ooty MUS 0)c . / 1h 
is proper to state that Prof. Theodore Gill had, upon general con- 
siderations, adopted the same limits for the order in his unpublished 


-Imanuscript, although the conclusions to which I have been led were 


« 


the result of independent anatomical investigations upon my part, 
which, so far as I am aware, are the only ones, including the whole 
order, which have been made. I am indebted to Prof. Gill for sug- 
gesting the very appropriate names by which I have designated the 
suborders as restricted. 


PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 4 JUNE, 1871. 


Dall.] 50 [October 19, 


Clas GASTEROPODA. 


Order DOCOGLOSSA Dall ex Trosch. 1870. 


Suborder ABRANCHIATA (Gill) Dall. 1870. 


Radula furnished with a rhachidian tooth and two aaeaae Ani- 
mal destitute of eyes, branchiz, and lateral teeth on the area. 


Family LEPETID# (Gray) Dall. 1869. 


Shell patelliform; apex erect, or anteriorly directed. Muzzle of 
the animal with an entire edge; furnished with a tentacular append- 
age below on each side. 


Formula of the radula, = 


Genus Lepeta Dall ex Gray. 1869. 


A. Lepeta Dall. 


Rhachidian tooth tricuspid, concave in front; central cusp simple, 
much the largest; lateral cusps small, emarginate, base very broad; 
uncini with simple cusps. 

Type Lepeta ceca (Gray) Dall, Am. Journ. Conch., v, p. 141, 1869. 


B. Cryptobranchia Dall ex Midd. 1869. 


Rhachidian tooth with three short cusps, equal and parallel before 
and behind; not pointed. Base moderately broad, more or less 
ornate behind; uncini with simple cusps. 

Type Cr untobranenes concentrica (Midd.) Dall, Am. Sine. Conch., 
V, p- 143, 1869. 


C. Pilidium Dall ex Forbes. 1869. 


Rhachidian tooth tricuspid, central cusp much the largest, convex 
in front; lateral cusps simply pointed; base narrow. Uneini with 
cusps obliquely twisted. 

Type Pilidium fuluum (Forbes) Dall, Am. Journ. Conch., y, p. 
146, 1869. 


1870.] 51 (Dall. 


Suborder PROTEOBRANCHIATA Dall. 1870. 


Animal provided with three lateral teeth, with eyes and with ex- 
ternal branchiz. Jhachidian tooth usually wanting. Uncini pres- 
ent or absent. ' 


Family ACM z1D Carpenter. 


Shell patelliform; animal provided with a free cervical branchia, 
issuing from the left side of the body, above the head; muzzle sur- 
rounded with a frill of integument. Radula without a rhachidian 
tooth and with three lateral teeth on each side; with or without ac- 
cessory uncini. 


A. Destitute of a branchial cordon. Acmea. 


1. Acmea Eschscholtz, 1828. Syn., Tectwre Cuvier, 1830; Tec- 
tura Gray, 1847. 
Teeth subequal, parallel in both axes; uncini absent; muzzle 


frill produced into two lappets. 


0 
Formula, W210i 0210" 


Type A. mitra Esch., Zool. Atlas, v, p. 18, no. 1. 1833. 
Philippi. Zeit. f. mal., p. 106, 1846. 
2. Collisella! Dall, n. sube. 
(a). Third lateral smaller than, and opposed to, the second. 
First laterals anterior. Muzzle frill without lappets. A 
single minute uncinus on the pleura. 


Formula, pel 
Type Acmea pelta Esch., 1. c. no. 5. 1838. 
(b). Provided with two minute uncini on the pleura. (? Col- 
lisellina). 
Formula, yc 
Type Patella saccharina Lin., Gmel., 8. N., p. 3695, no. 19. 
1792. 


B. Cordon present; interrupted in front. Lottia. 


1, Lottia (Gray) Cpr., 1863. Without muzzle lappets. Teeth as 
in Collisella (a). 

6 
Formula, Tecticpr 


1 From Collis, a mound, in allusion to their shape. 


Dall.) 52 —_ 19, 


Type L. gigantea (Gray) Cpr., Am. Journ. Conch., m1, p. 342. 
1866. 


C. Cordon present; complete, uninterrupted. Scurria. 


1. Scurria Gray, 1847. No muzzle lappets. Teeth as in the last. 


0 
Formula, 1 @=ar=eyan 
Types S. scurra (Lesson) Gray, P. L. S., 1847, p. 158. S. 
mesoleuca (Mke.) Cpr., Maz. Cat., p. 208, no. 263 (as 


Acmea). 1857. 


Family PATELLID# H. & A. Adams. 


Animal without a cervical gill or muzzle frill. Rhachidian tooth 
rarely present; uncini three in number. A more or less complete 
cordon of branchize between the mantle edge and foot. 


A. Branchial cordon complete. 
a. Provided with a rhachidian tooth. Ancistromesus.1 


1. Ancistromesus Dall, n.¢. Two inner laterals on each side 
anterior to the third, which is larger and denticulate. 
Branchial lamellae produced, arborescent. Sides of foot 
smooth. 


1 
Formula, SLPS" 


Type Ancistromesus mexicanus Dall ex Brod. & Sby. (as Pa- 
tella) Zool. Journ., tv, p. 369. Rve. Conch. Ic., Patella, 
pl. 1, nol.) 1855. 


6. Without a rhachidian tooth. Patella. 


ld. Patella Lin., 1757. Lateral teeth and foot essentially as in the : 
last. Branchial lamelle linguiform, short, subequal all 


around. 
0 
Formula, SacpILys" 
Type Patella vulgata Lin., Syst. Nat., Ed. 12, p. 1258, no. 


(doen Gil 


1From Ayk.oteov, a hook or tooth, and weoos, median or middle. 


1870.] 53 , [Dall. 


2. Patinella? Dall, n. subg. First inner lateral on each side an- 
terior to the other two. Second laterals largest, denticu- 
late. Foot with a scalloped frill, interrupted only in front. 
Branchiez as in Patella. 


0 
Formula ; 3@-11-2)3 ° 


Type Patinella magellanica Gmel. (as Patella) Syst. Nat. 1, p. 
37038, no. 52. 1792. 

3. WNacella Schum,, 1817. Shell thin, pellucid, apex anterior. 
Foot frilled, as in Patinella. Teeth bidentate, arranged as’ 
in the last. Branchial lamelle very small in front, but not 
interrupted. 


Formula, 8(g-44-2)3° 


Type Nacella mytilina Gmel., Syst., Nat., vol. 1, p. 3698, no. 
28, 1792 (as Patella) = Nacella mytiloides Schum., 1817, 
and Patella cymbularia Lam., 1819. 


B. Branchial cordon interrupted in front. Helcion. 


1.. Helcion Montf, 1810. Shell solid, capuloid, with pectinated 
ribs. Teeth? 
Type Helcion pectinatus (as Patella pectinata) Lin., Gmel., 
Syst. Nat., p. ovl0, no, 93. 1792. 
_ 2. Helcioniscus? Dall, n. subg. prov. Shell depressed, solid, 
with a subcentral apex. Teeth arranged as in Patinella. 
Sides of foot smooth. 
? = 
Type Helcioniscus rota (Chemn.) Rve. (as Patella) Conch. 
ieon. pl. x vit, fis. 39, a, b, c. 
3. Patina (Leach) Gray, 1840. Shell very thin, pellucid. Sides 
of foot smooth. Third pair of laterals posterior, largest, 
denticulated. 


Formula 


0 

2-13 

Type Paiina pellucida Lin., Syst. Nat., X11, 1260, no. 770 (as 
Patella). 1767. 


Formula, Te DES 


1 From patina, a dish. 2 Diminutive of Helcion. 


Dall.] o4 [October 19, 


Soft parts? 


1 Metoptoma Phillips, 1836. Shell ovate, triangular, apex sub- 

. central; posterior end truncated, or deeply, broadly emar- 
ginated. Type Metoptoma pileus Phil. Geol. Yorkshire, 
II, p. 223, 1836. Fossil in the carboniferous formation of 
Great Britain. Many of the species referred to this genus 
by Billings and other palzontologists, clearly do not belong 
to it. : 


The above sections, with the exception of Helcion, are well defined 
and will probably include the greater portion of the known species, . 
though some may prove distinct from any yet examined. Extensive 
study of the soft parts has shown, beyond dispute, that generic dis- 
tinctions founded on the shells alone, are wholly valueless, as the lat- 
ter cannot be depended upon for diagnostic characters, and many 
so-called genera and subgenera founded upon the shells, will fall as 
synonyms, or retain their places solely as the result of accident. 
Scutellina, as far as known, is equivalent to Acmcea. Olana, Scutel- 
lastra, Cellana, etc., are founded upon characters of hardly specific. 
value. The results of extended researches on this order are now in 
press, which will include a thorough revision of the synonymy in full, 
with a definite reference of many species to their proper position, as 
determined by the sum of all their characters. 


Voted: To amend Article VI. of the Constitution as proposed at 
the meeting of May 18th. 


Section of Entomology. October 26, 1870. 
Mr. Edward Burgess in the chair. Ten members present. 


Mr. Philip 8. Sprague exhibited specimens of an Aleochara 
which he had discovered to be parasitic on Anthomyia cepa- 
rum, or an allied species, attacking the cabbage ; and of sweet 
corn attacked by Sitophilus oryze. He also read a letter 
from Mr. E. C. Rye, of London, giving the information that 


1870.] ye [Minot. 


* 


the types of Kirby, described in the Fauna Boreali Americana, 
as well as in his Monographia Apum Angliz, are still in ex- 
istence, in the British Museum. 


The following paper was read: — 


Notes ON THE Fuicut or N. E. Butrerrurs. By CHARLES 
S. Minor, 


In the course of the past summer I spent a good deal of time 

investigating the flight and some of the habits of the imagines of our 
common New England butterflies. Though my studies on this sub- 
ject are far from complete, yet afew remarks may not be uninter- 
esting. ; 
My experiments and observations have not as yet extended to 
the mechanical principles, but merely to the character, of the 
flight, and the influence of certain structural differences upon it. 
J find that, according to their flight, the New England butterflies 
may be divided into three large divisions, each of which may be 
again divided into two or three sections, which may be further di- 
vided into groups, each of which will contain usually a single genus 
and all the species of that genus. I give an example quoting the 
three main divisions. 

I. Flight sweeping, long, sailing. 

A. Not turning often. 
a Strong and steady. 
1. Prolonged, swift. Papilio. 

II. Flight not sailing, shorter than in I, more or less undulating. 

Ill. Flight jerky, generally short. 

The terms which I have used above will be understood only by 
those who have watched the butterflies out of doors. There is 
another division, more artificial but equally possible, which has no 
immediate connection with the flight, which I give below. 

Genera, the individuals of which, if disturbed, return after a short 
interval to the same spot. 

I. Usually; as Thecla, Grapta, Hesperia, etc. 

II. Seldom ; as Melitza, Pieris, ete. 

I will speak only of one or two of the other facts that I have noticed. 
A large thorax which allows room for powerful muscles, with a stiff 
crust, which gives a firm point from which the muscles can act, 


Minot.] 56 . : [October 26, 


indicate that the flight of the insect will be powerful and zig-zag. 
The shape of the wing also exerts great influence; e.g., a shoul- 
dered costa adds strength to the wings and therefore to the flight;* 
or again, if the wings are very broad, the insect finds difficulty in 
moving them, and the flight becomes slow and unsteady. The abdo- 
men is used as arudder. It is by means of this that dragon-flies can 
turn so quickly. It may be well to mention here that all insects 
turn, during flight, in one of two ways: first, as in the case of the 
butterflies, by making a decided angle, the result being a zig-zag 
course ; second, as in the dragon-flies, by making a curve, the course 
through the air becoming a series of curves, each of which is tangent 
to the preceding one. Numerous examples in confirmation of my 
views might be adduced. 

The position of butterflies when at rest, I have studied in some 

detail, and have arrived at some interesting results. A great variety 
is found in their postures by day, but they are all different from those 
which are assumed by night, which are almost exactly the same for 
every individual of the same species. 
_ Having often been asked where insects spend the night, I selected 
two of our commonest species, Colias Philodice Godt, and Pieris rape 
Schrank, and watched them for a great many evenings. A little be- 
fore sundown they begin to alight in the grass very frequently ; as it 
grows later they become more and more inactive, until finally they 
will allow themselves to be trodden upon, pinned, and handled in any 
way.- Before the twilight is ended they creep down, or descend in 
some manner, I know not how, to the very roots of the stalk or blade 
of grass they have selected for their resting place. They always 
choose a perpendicular stalk. ‘The wings are raised over the back, 
with the outer edges pressed together. The antenne are kept nearly 
perpendicular to the axis of the body and are almost concealed be- 
tween the front edges of the fore-wings. 


Mr. F. G. Sanborn exhibited specimens of Lepidoptera from 
California and Neuroptera and Geometride, presented by Dr. 
G. F. Waters; also insects purchased of G.,W. Belfrage, of 
Texas, and a collection made by Prof. A. 8. Bickmore, in 
Southern Asia. 


1 Wallace, Contrib. Nat. Selec., p. 179, also has noticed this fact. 


1870.] Si | (Shaler. 


Wednesday, November 2, 1870. 


The President in the chair. Thirty-nine persons present. 


Prof. N. S. Shaler made a verbal communication on the 
changes which have taken place on the Atlantic Coast; and 
especially on the denuding action of ice. 


Mr. E. Bicknell referred to the flexible, muscular prepara- 
tions exhibited by Dr. Dwight, at a previous meeting, and 
called the attention of the Society to some specimens of 
human muscle, and that of a turtle, (the glistening character 
of the latter still preserved) which he had prepared with equal 
parts of alcohol, glycerine and water. These preparations he 
had found useful for microscopical examination and dissec- 
tion. 


- Second and final action was taken on the proposed amend- | 
ment of Article VI. of the Constitution, and it was 


Voted: That Article VI. of the Constitution, be amended by in: 
serting the words ‘‘ after having been nominated at a preceding meet- 
ine” ; so that the article shall read, officers shall be chosen by ballot, 
after having been nominated at a preceding meeting, and a majority 
of votes shall be sufficient for a choice. 


Section of Microscopy. November 9, 1870. 
Mr. E. Bicknell in the chair. Seventeen members present. 


Calvin Ellis, M. D., Thomas Dwight, Jr., M. D., Alpheus 
Hyatt, G. F. Marden, C. 8. Minot, and J. A. Swan, were elec- 
ted members of the Section. 


Bicknell.] 58 [November 16, | 


Mr. Bicknell remarked that he had found great numbers of 
Tsthmia nervosa on the fronds of a species of Callitham- 
nion, off Portland harbor, yet the mud dredged from the | 
same place contained none of their frustules; he could ac_ 
count for their total disappearance only by supposing them to 
have been absorbed by the water. 


Prof. A. Hyatt referred to some points in the embryology 
of the fossil Nautiloids, discovered by a microscopic examina- 
tion of the umbilici of some fossil specimens. He showed 
that the embryos of the same age are quite variable in their 
mode of development. ' 


Mr. A. Tuttle described a form of Paramecium, from 
Fresh Pond, Cambridge, differing from the common species 
in having a much smaller vestibule, occupying only one-fifth 
of the length and one-eighth of the breadth of the animal. 


Mr. Bicknell described the structure of whalebone. He 
said the lamella were composed of a single row of: hairs set 
closely together and united into a plate at the base by a 
horny sheathing, while their ends were free. These hairs are 
hollow throughout their entire length, and he thought each 
one probably contained a nerve-fibre. 


* 


Wednesday, November 16, 1870. 


The President in the Chair. Fifty persons present. 


Count Pourtales made some remarks on the constitution 
of the bottom of the ocean off the east coast of the United 
States, south of Cape Hatteras, as developed by the sound- 
ings and dredgings of the U, 8. Coast Survey, 


1870.] 59 [Pourtales. 


The chief constituent is silicious sand from the coast line to about 
the one hundred fathoms line, a limit which also coincides nearly with 
the inner edge of the Gulf stream for a great portion of its course. 
Outside of this line the whitish calcareous mud, also called Globige- 

rina mud, prevails and extends probably under the greater part of the 

ocean. The silicious sand is replaced to the southward of the Vine- 
yard Islands and off the eastern end of Long Island by a greenish or 
bluish mud, known by the navigators as the Block Island Soundings. 
Similar mud is found off Sandy Hook, in a range of depressions known 
as the mud-holes, which form a leading mark to find the entrance of 
New York in thick weather. In the neighborhood of New York a 
few rocky patches are found, which require investigation. Near Cape 
Fear, also, rocky bottom is sparingly found, affording a foothold to 
some Corals, Gorgonians, and Sponges. Otherwise the sand is pretty 
uniform in constitution, varying only in the size of the grain. 

A remarkable deposit of green sand is found on the inner edge of 
the Gulf stream off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina. The 
bottom consists here chiefly of living or dead Foraminifera, the cham- 
bers of the latter becoming filled with a silicate which injects even 
the finest ramifications of the canals of the shell. At first: yellow, it 
gradually turns green, at the same time the shell proper decays and 
breaks off, leaving a cast, which by attrition or conglomeration with 

others often losés the characteristic form of a cast. Sometimes black 
pebbles are found, of which a section shows plainly the origin, due to 
an agglomeration of casts of Foraminifera. The dredgings made by 
the Coast Survey in the Straits of Florida, have revealed the existence 
of a large bank of deep sea plateau off the Florida reef, consisting of 
_ a highly fossiliferous limestone, still in process of formation from the 
‘numerous shells, Echinoderms and corals, mostly new to science, 
which live on it at a depth of from one hundred to three hundred 
fathoms. Between this plateau and the reef, the bottom consists of 
the detritus of the reef, more or less finely comminuted, and not rich 
in animal life. In depths beyond the three hundred fathoms line, but 
with considerable variation in its limits, we find again the Globigerina 
mud, which also fills the greater part of the Gulf of Mexico in deep 
water. 

The Coast Survey intends to prosecute these researches next year 

with increased means, 


Packard.] 60 fat ovember 16, 


Dr. A. S. Packard, Jr., gave an account of the devel- | 


opment of Limulus Polyphemus, the Horse-Shoe crab. 


The eggs are laid near high tide mark, loose in the sand, late in | 
the spring and during June and July. The larva hatches in about | 
six weeks. Previous to hatching it bears a striking resemblance to | 
the Trilobites, and may also be compared with the fossil Carbonifer- | 
ous King Crab, Bellinurus. It passes through a very slight metamor- | 


phosis, consisting of the addition of three pairs of abdominal lamelli- 
form feet, and is remarkably similar to the larval trilobite. For this 


and other reasons he considered the Peeciloptera, or King Crabs and — 
their allies, the Eurypterus, Pterygotus, etc., to be a subdivision of | 
the Branchiopoda, which also includes the true Phyllopads and | 


Cladocera. 


He considered this order as having flourished most in Paleozoic | 
times, the living representatives being the remnants of an extensive. | 


group, the missing links of which are to be sought among the Silu- 


rian, Devonian, and Carboniferous strata. He regarded the known | 


forms as generalized types, which preceded in time and in process 


of evolution the Decapod Crustacea. The Branchiopoda pass 


jhrough, either in the egg or in the larval state, a nauplius form; 
and to such a form, probably living in the Laurentian seas, he would 
trace the ancestry of the group, the order of descent being by per- 
haps three or more parallel lines. Huxley has compared Pterygotus 
tio the zoéa of a crab. The speaker extended this apt comparison to 
the higher Branchiopoda, and the comparison does not apparently 
fail when applied to Limulus, the larva of which is nearer a zoéa than 


a nauplius; there being a pair of compound eyes, and a distinct | 


abdomen, bearing three pair of legs, while the cephalothoracic 
appendages are comparable to the feet of the zoéa of the Decapods, 
which become by subsequent moults, mouth-organs, the true thoracic 
feet being added at the first moult. He likened the Neuroptera and 
Orthoptera, and, among Lepidoptera, the family Bombycide to the 
Branchiopoda, the generic forms often widely differmg among them- 
selves, being in fact generalized types, the links connecting them 
having probably perished in past geological periods. 

Dr. Packard also announced the recent discovery at Salem of a 
new species of Pauropus, which he named Pauropus Lubbockii, in 
honor of the discoverer of this most remarkable type of Myriapods, 
which, as Lubbock has remarked, combines the characters of the 


1870.] 61 [Morse. 


Myriapods with other insects, while its antenne are bifid, a crusta- 
cean character. 3 

Speculating on the probable ancestry of insects (including the 
Arachnids anJ Myriapods) he would trace their descent from a form 
resembling in some respects the hexapodous larva of Pauropus, which 
seems reproduced in larval Myriapods (Julus); in larval Arachnides 
(mites) ; and larval and degraded forms of many insects (such as the 
flea, louse, bat-tick, Braula, Chionea, female Anisopteryx, Ciceti- 
cus, the Thysanura, etc., etc.,) all showing a strong tendency to 
assume a hexapodous Podura-like form, which may be compared with 
the Nauplius form through which Fritz Miller, Dr. Dohrn, and 
Haeckel consider all crustaceans to pass. For this ancestral form he 


had proposed the term Leptus, from the fact that like Nauplius, 


which was first supposed to’ be an adult Entomostracan, the larval 
form of Trombidium had been described as a genus of mites under 
the name of Leptus, and was supposed to be an adult. The Leptus 
was hexapodous, and bore a general resemblance to the Podure, and 
the young of Pauropus, though the body (especially the abdominal 
portion) was not segmented. He thought there were several parallel 
lines of descent, diverging from some forms such as the Tardigrades 
or Linguatule, or both, and probably others, which again might- 
have descended from some terrestrial worm like Peripatus, and other 
generalized types of worms. 


Prof. Edward 8. Morse made a few remarks on the struc- 
ture of the common sipunculoid worm of the coast, Phas- 


— colosoma. 


It occurs in the greatest abundance at Eastport, Me., living in the 
shells of Dentalium principally, though found in other species. The 
worm takes possession of the empty shell, and partially plugging it 
with hardened mud, forms a constricted aperture. Owing to the 
translucence of the animal, the internal organization can be studied 
to advantage. He referred to certain features in its structure, and 
in the character of its earlier stages, as throwing additional light on 
the affinities of the Brachiopods with the Vermes. 


Dr. Samuel Kneeland gave an account of a visit made by 
him during the past summer, to the country lying about the 
upper Mississippi. He described the beauty and attractive- 


Perry.] 62 December 7, 


ness of the scenery and healthfulness of the climate. He 
also exhibited and presented to the Society valuable speci- 
mens of minerals collected during his visit, and referred to 
this section of the country as one possessing peculiar attrac- 
tions for the students of Natural History. 


Rey. R. C. Waterston, by invitation, spoke briefly of his 
recent visit to California, and was requested to make a more 
extended statement at a future meeting. 


December 7, 1870. 
Prof. A. Hyatt in the chair. Forty-four persons present. 


_ The following is a brief abstract of a paper which will 
appear in full in the future pages of these Proceedings: — __ 


ON THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN NEw ENGLAND. By Rev. 
J. B. Prrry: 


Mr. Perry introduced his communication with the remark that it 
contained the main results of his studies in this direction during the 
past fifteen years. 

Proceeding at the outset to give a brief account of the indications 
of ice-agency, he first enumerated those furnished by the underlying 
rock-masses. These are erosion, as of lake-beds, and the like ; plan- | 
ation, as almost every newly-bared surface indicates ; also striation, 
as witnessed by the countless scratches and furrows on the rocky floor 
of the country. 

Next were brought into view the facts indicative of ice-agency 
from the overlying material. These are such as the composition of — 
typical drift, it being generally different from that of the subjacent 
rocks; its derivation, it having been for the most part brought a short 
distance from the north; as well as its condition, it invariably being 
a heterogeneous jumble. 

Indications from incidental phenomena were likewise noticed ; such 
as the accumulation of travelled matter, moraines being an instance}; 


1870.] 63 [Perry. 


the location of perched rocks, they being often found in extraordi- 
nary abundance on isolated summits; and the position of certain 
old beaches, as that of the shore-remains at Ripton, Vermont. _ 

These, and other kindred facts, having been advanced as decisive 
proof of glacial agency, Mr. Perry proceeded to enquire, under what 
form, according to the evidence, the ice must have acted? ' Were the 
phenomena in question produced by icebergs, as supposed by Sir 
Charles Lyell and the geologists of his school, in connection with a 
general depression of the country? The several cited effects of gla- 
cial agency having been passed in review and subjected to close 
scrutiny, it was found that the larger proportion of them could never 
have been produced by icebergs; that the remainder may be better 
explained in another way ; that for the most part the theory of 
depression is entirely unsupported by facts, and therefore to be 
discarded. 

The iceberg hypothesis having been considered, Mr. Perry next in- 
quired whether the results were produced in connection with a gen- 
eral elevation of the country, at the close of the Tertiary Era, as held 
by Professor Dana. It was shown that the theory of elevation is also a 
mere supposition, wholly unauthorized by positive evidence ; that the 
facts relied on for its support, as change of climate, the existence of 
pot-holes, of fiords, and of aérial deposits now lying beneath the level 
of the sea, can all be more satisfactorily explained in the light of an- 
other view; and that instead of an elevation of the land there was 
perhaps far more probably a depression of the ocean. 

Having discussed the inadequacy of the theory of elevation, Mr. 
Perry finally noticed the theory of glaciation substantially as proposed 
and defended by Professor Agassiz. He inquired whether all the 
main facts passed in review be not just what we must suppose they 
would have been in case the country had been covered by an im- 
mense sheet of ice moving slowly southward. In the light of this 
view, he indicated how’ the several classes of effects indicative of ice- 
agency receive a simple and easy explanation, and especially that the 
more difficult phenomena, as perched rocks, elevated pot-holes, the 
Ripton Beach, tlie Berkshire boulder trains, and other kindred points, 
are not anomalies, but special instances and illustrations of the work- 
ing of the great agency characteristic of the glacial times. 


Farlow.] 64 [December 7, 


Dr. W. G. Farlow exhibited a collection of Marine Alge, 
of the eastern coast of the United States, and remarked on 
their geographical distribution. 


The coast may be divided into three regions in which the alge 
present a marked difference. In the first division, extending from 
Cape Cod north, the Melanosperms predominate and are the dis- 
tinguishing mark. Of these, although the Fuci are more numerous, 
the Laminariacee are the most striking. The Laminaria longicruris, 
not rarely eighty feet long, is very abundant. It has never been found 
south of Cape Cod. In Europe it is found sometimes on the north 
of Scotland and on the coast of Norway. The Agarum Turner, the 
sea-colander, another of the Laminariacez, is peculiar to the coast 
of America north of Cape Cod. Its only other habitat is Alaska. 

Of the Rhodosperms the Euthora cristata is very abundant, much 
more so than in any other part of the world. The beautiful Piilota 
serrata may almost be said to be peculiar to our coast. Its only 
other habitat is Norway, where it sometimes occurs. The Halos- 
accion is found north of Rye Beach in abundance, but as its fruit has 
never been seen, its scientific position is still doubtful. 

The Chlorosperms, although rich in species, are limited to few 
genera, the Cladophore outnumbering all the others. The beautiful 
Siphonacee, the highest of all the Chlorosperms, are represented 
only by Bryopsis plumosa. 

The marine flora of New England resembles very strongly that 
of the north of Scotland and } Norwar 

The moment we pass south of Cape Cod we have a vegetation most 
strikingly like that of the Adriatic in the neighborhood of Venice. 
Dasya elegans, Solieria chardalis, and Polysiphonia variegata are dis- 
tinguishing algz of both Long Island Sound and Venice. Besides 
these we find the extremely beautiful Grinnellia Americana, perhaps 
our most beautiful alga, and only found in Long Island Sound. The 
Chlorosperms of this region are few in number and uninteresting 
in character. The Melon caperme are by no means as numerous, eith- 
er in species or individuals, as north of Cape Cod. But in Greenport 
harbor we first find in a growing state a representative of the tropical 
genus Sargassum, Montaguci, while south of Nantucket large masses 
of Sargassum bacciferum, the common gulf-weed, are found floating, 
probably brought from the Gulf of Mexico by the GulfStream. The 


% 


1870.] 65 [Farlow. 


Long Island alge, it will be seen, are distinguished by the predomi- 
nance of Rhodosperms. 

The coast, from New Jersey to South Carolina, is a desert as far as 
alow are concerned. In Charleston harbor we find a few alga, 
principally Grateloupia Gibbesii and Delesseria hypoglossum, but when 
we reach Key West we find a subtropical flora forming the third 
region into which our shore is usually divided by algologists. 

Here the Fuci are wanting, and the Melanosperms are represented 
by Sargassum and several genera of Dictyotace. The Rhodosperms 
are very numerous and interesting, but it is in the number and high- 
ly organized character of the Chlorosperms that this region surpasses 
the two previously mentioned. The Siphonacee are numerous and 
extremely beautiful, forming large green patches near the shore, and 
resembling Lycopods and the larger mosses. They even have a 
creeping subterranean stem, as the Lycopods, by which they are able 
to remain fixed in the sand where very few alge can grow. 

Dr. Farlow closed by showing specimens and explaining the struc- 
ture of the calcareous Chlorosperms of this region called corallines. 
The genus Udotea and Penicillus seem to be badly limited by 
Harvey. In Udotea flabellata we have the type of that genus. The 
filaments here branch at their end into root-like expansions, forming 
the surface of the frond, and the calcareous coating is uniform. In 
Udotea conglutinata the filaments are undivided at the end, but in 
the stipe give off lateral root-like processes and their calcareous coat- 
ing is cribriform. In Penicillus capitatus we have a precisely similar 
structure, except that the calcareous coating surrounds each filament, 
while in Udotea we have it uniting the filaments into a flat frond. 
But in Penicillus Pheniz we have the connecting link where the 
filaments are united into plates by threes. Dr. Farlow showed a new 
species of Udotea from Cuba nearly related to Udotea conglutinata. 


December 21, 1870. 
The President in the chair. Twenty-six persons present. 


GLACIER THEORY OF DriFrt. By Dr. C. T. Jackson. 


Dr. C. T. Jackson made a few remarks on the conditions required 
for the formation of glaciers, and explained why he had not been 
able to adopt the glacier theory of drift phenomena. 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 5 JULY, 1871. 


Jackson.] 66 [December 21, 


He would welcome any reasonable theory to account for the origin 
and distribution of drift, since there were serious objections to all 
theories that had thus far been proposed. 

The conditions absolutely necessary for the formation and move- 
ment of glaciers had not been proved to have ever existed in this 
region, or anywhere, except in mountainous countries situated in a 
temperate climate. We require, first, that there should be a suffi- 
ciently elevated temperature to provide for abundant evaporation of 
water; secondly, that there should be high mountains reaching the 
regions of perpetual snow, and such variations of temperature as 
would secure alternate freezing and thawing, so that neve or half 
melted snow, from which glaciers are formed, should be produced. 
Warm valleys and high mountains were then absolutely necessary for 
the production of glaciers. A general cooling of the globe to a tem- 
perature below freezing could not result in the formation of any 
glaciers, even if such a general reduction of temperature took place. 

If the earth was ever cooled to so low a temperature we must 
naturally inquire how it ever became again heated. Astronomy 
does not justify any such hypothesis, and geological facts seem also 
to disprove it. We can understand the theory of Fourrier, of a 
slowly cooling globe, and his results are that the earth is losing but a 
small fraction of a degree of heat per century, owing to the imperfect 
conduction of heat by the thick crust of rocks. It is also shown 
that in the epoch immediately preceding the drift (the tertiary), 
that a tropical temperature pervaded the now temperate regions of 
the earth. The fossil remains of monkeys, tigers, and other inter- 
tropical animals in the north prove this fact beyond question. 

If the earth, in our now temperate regions, was at the tertiary 
period heated to a tropical temperature, as all the facts of geology 
prove, how could it have been suddenly cooled to so low a degree as 
to allow the formation of three or four thousand feet thickness of 
ice in New England and other temperate countries? No facts or 
principles in astronomy point to any cause for such a marvelous 
change. Physical principles give such an assumption no support, 
and it derives none from paleontology and fossil botany, which indi- 
cate a higher, but not a lower, temperature than now exists in tem- 
perate and even polar regions. Witness the abundant remains of 
elephants in the northern Siberian soil; Mylodons in the soil of Ore- 
gon ; monkeys, tigers and other tropical animals in the tertiary of 
Iingland and other northern countries. These all indicate a warmer 


) 


1870.] 67 ) [Jackson, 


climate at the north ages ago. Now what physical, cosmical, geolog- 
ical or astronomical causes can be cited to explain a cooling below 
zero of the earth in those regions ? 

Suppose it could be proved that the whole earth was reduced in 
temperature to that low degree, what would follow? There would 
be no evaporation of water adequate to the formation of snow thou- 
sands of feet deep, and hence no glaciers could be produced even 
were the other conditions also existent. 

Furthermore, it has been shown by recent experiments in France, 
that if the rocky crust of the globe should be cooled universally below 
freezing, all the water now existing on the earth’s surface would be 
absorbed by the pores of the rocks, for the water of our globe is kept 
_ at the surface only by the internal heat of the globe, and cannot pen- 
etrate beyond a depth of two miles without being returned as 
steam, which condenses into water again. 

Indeed, it has been proved that if the interior of the earth consists 
of rocks, and the temperature of the whole earth was reduced to the 
freezing point, that five times the quantity of water now existing, as 
oceans, lakes and rivers, would be absorbed by the rocks, and every 
trace of humidity of the earth’s surface would disappear; and fur- 
thermore, that the porosity of the rocky strata would be equal to the 
absorption, also, of the entire atmosphere, so that the earth would be 
in the condition of the moon, without either water or air. 

This would hardly be a state of things favorable to the formation 
of glaciers. 

We need not go so far as this to render improbable the exist- 
ence of ancient glaciers in New England; for the considerations be- 
fore advanced are suflicient to create at least serious doubts, since 
the requisite conditions for their formation are wanting. 

Glaciers form from partially melted snow on high mountains. In 
Switzerland their lower limit, or line of perpetual snow, is nine thou- 
sand feet elevation above the sea. A continuous supply of snow, 
from evaporated water in warmer regions, is required to keep up 
the supply in the elevated portions of the mountain. 

The movement of glaciers is determined by the slopes of the 
mountains, the ice moving, as proved by Forbes, like a soft solid in a 
trough. 

It is evident, also, that glaciers descend from mountains qua-qua 
versal, that is, go in all directions as allowed by the mountain 
slopes and gorges, and make their grooves and scratches in the rocky 


Perry.] 68 [December 21, 


bed or channel and carry their debris in all the directions pursued by 
the moving glacier. This does not correspond with the facts 
observed in drift scratches and drift deposits, for they are invariably 


from north to south, deviating a little from that general course, the | 
most common direction of dvrift-scratches being from north-west to | 


south-east in Maine, New Hampshire and Massachusetts, while in 
Rhode Island they run due north and south. 
Neither the drift scratches nor the drifted materials bear any such 


relations to the hills and mountains as to indicate a glacial origin or | 


movement. 

American geologists are more inclined to adopt the theory of ice 
floes, as a drift agency, and the two or more sets of drift scratches, 
in the ledges, seem to be accounted for by the changing course of 
tidal currents, moving the grounded ice and gravel on the bottom. 


It should be remembered that eight-ninths of all floating ice is below — 


the surface of the water, and that ice frequently grounds at the pres- 
ent time on the Grand Banks, the bottom there being undoubtedly 
grooved in the same manner as the rocks were in the drift epoch. 
Dr. Jackson observed that the highest geological authorities rejected 


the glacial theory of drift, and he need but name De Luc, the veteran 


geologist of the Alps, Leopold Von Buch of Berlin, L. Elie De 
Beaumont of Paris, the most eminent geologists the world has ever 
seen, as stern opponents of this theory. 


In response to the invitation of the President, Mr. Perry 
discussed at some length the objections urged by Dr. Jack- 
son. 


As to the assertion that the glacier theory is a mere hypothesis, 
and that the various forms of this theory have been one after 
another demolished, he would frankly admit that this explanation, 


in a certain sense, is an hypothesis; it cannot be proved true by a | 


mathematical demonstration; no more can it be sustained by one 
kind of evidence alone. But that it is a mere hypothesis, he was not 
so ready to grant. There is a great variety of considerations bearing 
on the subject; the argument js cumulative. So, too, if we find, 
upon examination, that the main effects to be explained are substan- 
tilaly what we must suppose they would have been in case the coun- 
try were once covered by an immense blanket of ice; that there are 
also facts indicating the prevalence of agencies capable of forming such 


| 


1870.] 69 [Perry, 


a wintry mass ; and that the so-called counter-facts are equally sus- 
ceptible of explanation according to the glacier theory, we surely 
have the best kind of demonstration possible in the nature of the 
case. Should this prove to be the fact, though he could only just 
touch the points now, the glacier theory must be regarded as far more 
than an empty hypothesis, and the various forms of its so-called demo- 
_lition may be counted for nought. 

Another objection claiming notice is the alleged weight of author- 
ity against the glacier explanation. Von Buch, the greatest geolo- 
gist of the age, it is urged, entirely discarded this hypothesis. The 
same is-true of other eminent and able investigators. This argument 
might be good, if eminent men had never done foolish things. The 
opinions of distinguished savants have presumptive evidence in their 
favor, so long as there is nothing against them, and they are to be 
received not as their dicta, but because they are reasonable. While 
we are to have due respect for their legitimate decisions, we are also 
to remember that in some cases their judgments are not worth a 
straw ; that we are to recognize only the weight of their evidence as 
authority. In given points and under certain circumstances the 
ablest investigators have made the grandest mistakes. Most people, 
after passing a given age, cling tenaciously to the theories they 
adopted when they were younger. Early manhood is the period of 
inspiration. It is because young men are constantly coming upon 
the stage that the world moves. When a little older, these same 
persons, with rare exceptions, stand in the way of progress, and it 
must be confessed that in so doing they sometimes exert a whole- 
some influence, and sometimes—not. Now Von Buch (for whom he 
had a high veneration) was already somewhat advanced in years, 
and had his predilections fixed, when the youthful Agassiz first 
advanced the glacier theory in explanation of the drift phenomena. 
It is not therefore surprising that he, and other eminent geologists 
similarly situated, rejected, and have continued to reject it, outright. 

Several other objections urged have respect to the conditions sup- 
posed to be necessary to the existence and action of glaciers. These 
are evaporation, congelation, and inclination. As these favorable 
conditions occur in Switzerland, so do ice-streams as their result. 
And the implication is that these favorable conditions have not 
existed in New England, and consequently that the theory of an 
extensive ice-sheet moving over the region is a myth. Now he would 
not say that the same conditions existed here in the past as are now 


Perry.] 70 [December 21, 


found amongst the Alps; he would simply ask whether there were 
conditions capable of producing the effects in question. 

On the one hand, then, are there any facts indicative of conditions 
favorable to a sufficient supply of moisture? In order to the forma- 
tion of extensive ice-sheets, the water must have come mainly from 
the ocean. Strange to say, there is the best proof that volcanic 
agency was very active for some time, about the close of the ter- 


tiary period. The extensive masses of erupted matter on the Pacific 


coast and in Central France are, at once, instances and evidence. In 
connection with these disturbances, submarine volcanoes were no 
doubt prevalent. These must have heated the waters in the great 
oceanic basins, and their action being for a long time continued, the 
evaporation would be immense and continuous, furnishing a supply 
ef moisture fully equal to the demand. 

On the other hand, it may be asked whether there be any facts 
indicative of cold at the period in question. It must be admitted 
that there is no positive evidence of an elevation of the northern part 
of North America at that time, and that thus the condition of con- 
gelation now existing in Switzerland did not probably prevail in this 
region. But there are cosmical facts suggestive of a degree of cold 
equal to that required in the production of the effects demanding an 
explanation. Without dwelling on the supposition that the earth 
may have been passing through a colder region of space, or on the 
probability that the sun is a variable body, affording sometimes. more 
and sometimes less heat, he mentioned three points :— 


1st. Variation in the obliquity of the earth’s axis to the plane of 


the ecliptic. 

2d. Variation caused by the absence of the perihelion in connec- 
tion with the precession of the equinoxes ; and 

3d. Variation in the eccentricity of the earth’s orbit. 

While no one of these variations alone may be sufficient to account 
for the cold of the ice period, we should remember that they occur in 
cycles, which may be represented in round numbers by 10,500, 26,000 
and 234,000 years each, and that in the course of many revolutions 
all the tendencies suited to produce cold must have coincided, and 
that thus, by the combination of intensities, there would result a great 
winter of the ages. Now let evaporation take place at the same 
time, and for a long while (and I have evidence bearing on both 
these points), also let the vapors from the heated basins of the ocean 
be borne over the cooling regions lying to the ncrth, we have just the 


1870.] 71 [Perry. 


conditions suggested by facts, and needful to the glaciation of the 
country. Whatever theory, in short, we may adopt, in regard to the 
ice period, the facts of astronomy compel us to admit changes of 
temperature—great onian summers and winters—in the progress 
of the globe. And geology tells the same story ; for instance, the 
earboniferous period followed by the permian, the miocene tertiary 
by the period of drift. 

Again, however, it is said that, even if ice were formed, its motion 
would be impossible; there being no great elevation of the conti- 
nent, an inclined surface like that of Switzerland must haye been 
wanting, and thus the necessary condition of motion. Let us sup- 
pose North America a level plane, and that, vapors condensing, a vast 
amount of moisture is deposited upon it. What would be the result ? 
This accumulation of water cannot remain heaped up, even on a 
dead level, to say nothing of an inclined surface ; it must flow off. 
The case is not different, even if it be congealed. Ice, as influenced 
by gravity, would have the same tendency to motion as water. If, 
now, the cold on the extreme north be greater than elsewhere, there 
would be a barrier to motion in that direction. If melting take 
place to some extent on the upper surface and the southern side, wf 
moisture from the snows melting at midday percolate the ice which 
beneath the surface was much below the point of freezing, if gravita- 
tion does its legitimate work on a mass five or six, not to say ten 
thousand feet in thickness, surely some elements of motion are fur- 
nished, in case the ice-sheet were resting on a plane, and still more, 
if there were, as was no doubt the case, on the whole a gentle inclina- 
tion toward the Gulf of Mexico. Indeed, under such conditions, 
motion southward would be inevitable. 

But it is also objected that, such cold prevailing, the rocks would 
absorb all moisture, and the surface of the earth be left, like that of 
the moon, without air or water. It should be remembered that the 
cold of the glacial period was not necessarily so intense as has been 
sometimes asserted, very extreme cold not being the condition most 
favorable, all things considered, to the production of glaciers. So it 
should be borne in mind, that as soon as snows and ice began to man- 
tle large tracts of land, they would be largely proof against external 
cold. Meantime, the internal heat being as intense as ever, the tem- 
perature of the water that penetrated the rocks would be raised, and 
thus an extreme absorption of moisture prevented. 

Again it is asked, by way of objection, how, in case intense cold 


Perry.] 12 [December 21 


prevailed during the glacial period, a return of warmth was secured? 
If the astronomie agencies already referred to be sufficient, when 
taken in combination at their concurring points of greatest intensity, 
to occasion a winter of the ages, the same agencies would be sure 
to bring, in the natural course of things, an alternating sonian sum- 
mer. This might be a long while in coming, and the glacial period 
was probably of considerable duration; still it must finally appear, 
even as summer invariably succeeds to winter. 

-Once more it is objected, that an ice-sheet moving southward | 
could not have produced the variations observable in the direction of 
the striz. It seems to be forgotten by many that the glacial mass 
must have varied in thickness during the different portions of the 
ice-period. When it was at its acme, the direction, as a rule, must 
have been north-southward. In the closing portion of the period, as 
the thickness gradually diminished, the direction would be more 
largely influenced by the inequalities of the country. Local glaciers 
finally becoming predominant, their direction must be down the 
existing valleys; thus in a great variety of directions, as in the Green 
Mountains, predominantly east-west and west-east, leaving furrows 
and grooves to correspond. Accordingly an ice-sheet, varying in 
thickness at different stages, would produce just the variations 
referred to, while they are hardly to be explained by resort to any 
other known agency. 

The principal objections urged by Dr. Jackson having been con- 
sidered, and, as it is thought, fairly met, the hypothesis proposed in 
place of the glacier theory may be briefly noticed. 

And, first, some geologists have maintained that the effects, 
referred to the agency of ice, were produced by the action of flowing 
water. In respect to this hypothesis, it may be simply remarked that, 
so far as we know, flowing water never produces, and is in no wise 
able to produce, some of the most characteristic features of the 
glacial times. In many cases the effects of its action are just the 
opposite of those requiring an explanation. For instance, flowing 
water tends to efface, not to produce, the polished surfaces met with 
all over the country, whenever the underlying solid rock is freshly 
laid bare. 

Again, and this is said to be the prevailing view, icebergs and ice- 
floes are invoked as the all-sufficient cause of the phenomena. As 
to the argument involved in ‘the prevailing view,” he would simply 
quote, ‘‘Broad is the way of’ delusion, and the many find it.” To the 


1870.] 73 [Perry. 


hypothesis itself he could only devote a word. That bergs from an. 
arctic continent did not bring the drift, is evident from the fact that it 
was to a large extent derived from rocks lying only a short distance 
to the north of the respective places in which it is now found. It is 
equally clear that the great mass of typical drift was not formed by 
local glaciers, since it spreads in one continuous sheet, having com- 
mon glacial characteristics, over the whole region, while it is itself in 
places uncomformably overlaid by the debris of local ice-streams. 
That it was not dropped by slowly-thawing icebergs, either as 
stranded or in motion, is also apparent, since matter thus disengaged 
would fall particle by particle and be regularly arranged or semi- 
stratified, and not left in a jumble. So it is manifest that icebergs 
did not erode, polish and striate almost the whole rocky floor of the 
country, since the drift markings are made obliquely across meridional 
ridges, ordinarily without the slightest reference to differences of 
level. Indeed, for icebergs to make continuous furrows over high 
hills and through deep intervening valleys, irrespective of the ever- 
varying inequalities of surface, would be a far greater marvel than 
the wonders to be explained. 

Having thus discussed some of the objections to the glacier theory 
and having briefly shown why he had never been able to adopt the 
iceberg hypothesis, he desired to bear witness to the great number and 
accuracy of Dr. Jackson’s observations of drift phenomena, and to 
assure him of his kindest personal regard. 


After Rev. Mr. Perry’s answer, Dr. Jackson said that Mr. Perry 
had made an excellent defence of the glacial theory, but had not 
removed his objections. -He did not see how volcanoes, in distant 
countries, could furnish the moisture required for the production of 
thousands of feet of ice in New England, nor could he understand 
how a glacier could rise from the bottom of Lake Superior, which is 
more than six hundred feet below,the sea level, or how glaciers could 
exist in Brazil. 


To the additional objections suggested by Dr. Jackson, Mr. 
Perry briefly replied. 


As to the statement that, however effective volcanic agency may 
have been elsewhere, at the close of the tertiary period, it could have 
had little influence in New England, since there were no volcanoes 


Perry.] 14 [December 21, 


here, he would say that there was evidence of a great disturbance, 
even in this neighborhood, at the time in question. The tertiary beds 
of Martha’s Vineyard are tilted up at a high angle, and there are 
facts indicating that the uplifting took place not far from the begin- 
ning of the ice period. The strike of the beds suggests that the 
agency was also submarine; that thus the waves of the Atlantic were 
probably greatly heated, and the conditions furnished for immense 
evaporation. 

The question raised in regard to the evidence of glacial agency in 
Brazil, requires a moment’s notice. As to the statement that the 
extension of the glacier hypothesis to that region is one of the great- 
est objections to it, he would merely say, that whether the extension 
be justifiable or not, it in no wise militates against the existence of 
ice agency in New England. As he had never visited the region, he 
was not prepared to discuss features which can be adequately under- 
stood only after the closest examination. The presumption, of 
course, is that Professor Agassiz has only spoken after due considera- 
tion, and that he is abundantly able to defend his view of the matter. 

The former occurrence of ice agency in the basin of the Amazons 
being granted, it may be asked whether it were synchronous with the 
existence of drift agency in North America. After all he could learn 
on the subject, the observations thus far made seemed to him insufhi- 
cient for the decision of the question whether the drift agency of the 
northern hemisphere was simultaneous with that of the southern, or 
subsequent to it. For that reason, while he might sometimes speak 
of one set of cosmical agencies, and sometimes of another, he was 
indisposed to say, because he did not know, just which prevailed ; 
only that, under given circumstances, they were abundantly sufficient 
for the production of the facts requiring an explanation. 

In respect to the assertion that, tlie bottom of Lake Superior being 
lower than the surface of the ocean, ice could not have moved from 
that basin seaward, he would say that the implied objection seems 
to rest on a misapprehension of the condition of things during 
the ice period. Let us remember that the ice, for instance, 
on the north shore of the lake was probably from five to 
ten thousand feet in thickness; that it was pressed by a portion 
equally thick, if not thicker, adjoining it on the north, and this by 
another and another ; that the basin, which was probably far more 
shallow at the beginning of the ice period, would be filled with ice, 
and greatly deepened, because of the immense force pressing from 


1870.) 15 [Pickering. 


above and from the north ; that thus the ice at one time in the basin 
must slowly pass over the southern shore, as it gradually gave way 
to the irresistible vis a tergo incessantly at work on the northern shore 
of the lake. With a caution against the indiscriminate application 
to ice of the conditions peculiar to the motion of water, he would 
illustrate the matter by a familiar instance. Water passes from Lake 
Superior into Lake Huron, and yet the bottom of the former is far 
lower than either the surface or the bottom of the latter. If there 
be no valid objection to this statement, he failed to see any reasonable 
difficulty in the supposition that ice, during the glacial period, passed 
from the basin of the great lake southward toward the Gulf of Mex- 
ico; indeed, some of the very channels which it probably eroded are 
visible to-day. 


Dr. Charles Pickering said he found it difficult to adopt the view 
of Dr. Jackson, as it supposed the boulders to have been brought 
from a great distance. In the localities most familiar to him, he had 
found the boulders not far removed from their original position—a few 
miles only. 

He thought land and water might be so distributed as to make an 
equal temperature on the surface of the globe. New Zealand is in a 
somewhat high latitude, yet produces tree ferns. At Cape Horn it is 
difficult to determine whether the climate is perpetual summer or 
perpetual winter; snow falls at intervals throughout the year, but 
quickly disappears, leaving the country always green; vegetation con- 

_tinues uninterrupted, and the natives go without clothing. 

Great geographical changes have taken place since the earlier 
geological periods, for the crest of the Andes was once the bottom 
of the ocean. 


Section of Entomology. December 28, 1870. 


Mr. J. H. Emerton in the chair. Nine members present. 


Mr. Edward Burgess exhibited a drawing of peculiar cu- 
taneous muscles intersecting the nerve centre of the larva of 
Darapsa myron, and crossing just before the third thoracic 
ganglion, and causing an expansion or spreading of the gan- 


Dwight.] 76 [January 4, 


glionic commissure at that point. He had seen a drawing of 
the same muscle (numbered 18) in another species of larva 
in a paper by Lubbock. 


January 4, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Thirty-six persons present. 


John P. Payson of Chelsea, John D. Billings of Jamaica 
Plain, G. Brown Good of Cambridge, Charles M. Sumner, 
M. D., Samuel Henshaw, John S. White, John Prince 
Knight, S. Gardner Lewis, Edward Wigglesworth, Jr., M. D., 
and Thomas C. Chandler of Boston, were elected Resident 
Members. 

Mr. Henry E. Dresser of London, Josiah Curtis, M. D., of 
Knoxville, Tenn., and Thomas F, Perley of Bridgeton, Me., 
were elected Corresponding Members. 


The following paper was presented:— 


On Two Fowts WITH SUPERNUMERARY LEGS. 
By Tomas Dwicut, Jr., M. D. 


Two specimens of three-legged fowls were received by the Society 
on December 28th, 1870, and on January 2d, 1871, respectively. 
Each had a third misshapen leg, which did not reach the ground, 
suspended between the other two; but the anatomy of the malforma- 
tion was entirely different in the two specimens. 

The one first received (Catalogue; No. 1208) was loaded with fat. 
The third leg was suspended by a rounded mass of fat, in the 
median line below the highest caudal vertebra, and contained no 
bone for the first inch. A rudimentary ligament (the upper end 
of which was perhaps slightly muscular) descended from the 
ischial spine of either side, each to be inserted into one of the 
two spines by which the limb began. Otherwise the pedicle was 


1871.] Te [Dwight. 


merely fat and skin. The bony structure is as follows: (Figure 1). 
First come two slender spicule of bone, the left (a) nearly three- 
quarters of an inch in length, the right (a) somewhat shorter, con- 
nected by a narrow trans- 
verse piece. These are con- 
tinuous with a single irreg- 
ularly cylindrical bone (d) 
an inch and a quarter long, 
having at either end a pro- 
tuberance directed forward. 
To this, another bone (c), 
seven-eighths of an inch 
long, is anchylosed at a 
right angle so as to point 
forward. At the proximal 
end this has a small process 
jutting out on either side, 
and below it shows a com- 
mencing bifurcation. Next 
come the phalanges. On 
the right there are two (d?). 
On the left the proximal 
phalanx (d) may be said 
either to bifurcate or else Fig. 1. 

to have an outgrowth from 

its right side; each of these subdivisions has a small terminal phalanx 
which is not so well developed as that of the right toe. The proximal 
phalanx has also a slight knob on its outer and lower side opposite to 
its bifurcation. This extremity was covered with fat and skin, having 
’ no other tissue. There is considerable difficulty in naming the various 
parts. .To begin with the phalanges ; d’ from its number of segments 
is evidently the hallux, the sole representative of the right foot. If 
we hold that d bifurcates we have two left halluces, which is absurd; 
but if we consider the median toe to be an outgrowth from d we shall 
have a left Hallux and a second toe. 

C evidently represents a double metatarsus and has at its lower 
end somewhat the appearance of being inverted. There were 
remains of joints between this bone and the phalanges, but above, all 
the segments are codssified. The segments a, a}, and 0 are the most 
difficult to identify. It might be argued that 6 represents the two 


Dwight.] 78 [January 4, 


tibize, and a and a! the two femora, which would account for all of the. 
various segments; but while it is not uncommon to have a single 
limb become double towards its extremity, it is perhaps unheard of 
to have the single limb with a double origin; still more so to have it 
single in the middle, as at 6, and double at each end. I think it 
more natural to consider 6 a fusion of the two tibiz while a, and a! 
are prolongations of the fibula upward. , 

The other specimen (No. 1209) before dissection was “not very 
unlike the first. ‘The supernumerary leg was longer, thinner and 
separated by a greater interval from the body. ‘There were but two- | 


toes, which were of an equal number of segments and of nearly equal — 
size. ‘The pelvis, after removal of the soft parts, was found to be very 
peculiar. The sacrum is deflected to the right and the caudal verte- 
bre very markedly so. (Fig. 2). Between the renal portion of the 


1871.] 79 [Dwight. 


left illum and the left ischium on one side, and the extremity of the 
sacrum and caudal vertebre on the other, two plates of bone are 
inserted, uniting with one another at a right angle by a transverse 
line of union (1, 2, 3,4). The upper, nearly horizontal (1, 2, 3), 
plate and the deflected vertebra close the space between the two 
iliac bones almost completely, while the lower vertical plate (2, 3, 4) 
shuts off about two-thirds of the opening behind. 

The transverse line of union of the two plates (1-3) is an inch and 
a half long, with a well marked process at each end. The outer sur- 
face of the horizontal plate presents little to be described. The ver- 
tical plate has a ridge (5-4) dividing it into a right and a left por- 
tion, each of which is roughly triangular. There is an oval foramen 
(6) at the outer superior angle of the left portion, and a smaller one 
(7) at the left upper angle of the right portion. Viewed from 
within we find the upper part of the interposed bone to be divided 
by a framework into two fosse, of which that to the right is much 
the larger, and into each of which one of the lately described fora- 
mina opens. A careful comparison with the normal pelvic bones will 
show very strikingly that the upper plate of the abnormal bone cor- 
responds to the renal portion of the ilium, and the lower to the 
ischium. And what is more interesting is that the ridge on the outer 
side of the latter and the framework on the inner side of the 
former, together with the general lateral symmetry of the two halves, 
make it probable that they represent the fused supernumerary bones 
of the two sides. The viscera had been removed before the impor- 
tance of these homologies was evident, but the well marked addi- 
tional renal cavities make it very probable that there was at least 
one additional kidney. 

A muscular bundle, having a circular attachment about half an inch 
in diameter, arose from the outer aspect of the vertical plate, and at 
a distance of an inch and five-eighths from its origin, was inserted into 
the summit of the third leg. (Fig.3). The chief bone (a) is two 
and a half inches long, compressed laterally above so as to be very 
slender, but expanding below to a breadth of a third of an inch; its 
lower end is bent forward and has a groove on the anterior surface, 
the posterior being plane. The lower extremity is bifid. On the 
anterior aspect, near the lower end, there is a small elevation shaped 
like a compressed V inverted. The superior end of the bone is sur- 
mounted by a delicate process which, turning suddenly to the right, 
ends in a knob. The bone appears to represent the metatarsus of 


Dwight.] 80 ot [January 4, | 


the two legs turned on its long axis so that the posterior surface is in 
front. From each of its two inferior terminations arises a toe (0) 
consisting of four phalanges, the right one being a trifle the longer, 
and each with the plantar side above. 
These, therefore, are the fourth digits 
of different feet. Although the muscu- 
lar fibres ceased at the upper end of 
the bone, tendons were continued down 
the limb, and the flexor tendons going 
to the last phalanges were very dis- 
tinct; on the dorsal aspect the arrange- 
ment was not so clear. As these ten- 
dons were more or less united to the 
periosteum of the long bone (@), the 
muscle can have had little action ex- 
cept to raise the whole limb at once. 
There were several good-sized blood 
vessels, and the whole limb had the 
appearance of a much higher degree of 
organization than that of the other 
specimen. These are examples of what 
Vrolik calls inferior lateral duplicity. 
As anomalies of this class are by no 
means fully understood, and as it is 


ee 


= 


b Vv very rare to find two cases which re- 
WZ semble one another, I have thought it 
Fig. 3. more for the good of science to describe 


the appearances accurately than to in- 
dulge in speculations which, in the present state of knowledge, must 
rest on imperfect data. 


SoME INTERESTING PHENOMENA OBSERVED IN QUARRYING. 
By W. H. Nixes. 


In working a quarry at Monson, Mass., some phenomena have been 
observed, which I trust will prove to be of scientific interest. For a 
few years, Mr. W. N. Flynt, proprietor of the quarry, and his fore- 
men, have observed spontaneous fractures, movements and expan- 
sions of the rock. Mr. Flynt called the attention of some persons 
interested in science to these phenomena, yet no one made them a 


‘ 


1871.] | 81 [Niles. 
subject of special study. In November, 1870, he first called my at- 
tention to them by quite a full account of what had been observed. 
To me the facts were both new and interesting, and I have since 
made visits to the locality, that I might personally observe and study 
them. With the consent of Mr. Flynt and his foremen, I shall, in 
the present paper, give some account of the facts they have nar- 
rated to me, as well as of my own observations, in order that the 
subject may be more fully elucidated. 

The quarry is located in the belt of gneiss, which lies east of 
the red sandstone of the Connecticut Valley. From the city of 
Springfield, Mass., the quarry lies east about 4° north, and at a dis- 
tance of about twelve miles and a half in a direct line. In going 
towards the quarry from Springfield, at a distance of about seven 
miles and a quarter in a direct course and in the town of Wilbraham, 
we come to the eastern edge of the red sandstone, and the base of 
the first range of hills forming the eastern boundary of the Connecti- 
cut Valley. ‘These hills of metamorphic rock reach about six hun- 
dred feet in height. Crossing the range to the eastward, we descend 
into the valley in which the village of Monson is situated. The quarry 
is located on a low foot-hill at the eastern base of this first range. It 
extends from near the crest of the hill, over quite an area upon its 
southern end and western side, and where the surface is only gently 
inclined. ' 

The rock at the quarry is chiefly gneiss. It is of fine, even-grained 
texture, quite free from impurities, and valuable for architectural 
purposes. The strike is north 10° east,2 and the dip is west 10° 
north, at an angle of 80°. The rock is not divided by planes of 
stratification, but a set of parallel joints, cutting transversely to 
the stratification, divides it into regular beds, that at a distance, 
might be mistaken for strata. These beds incline only about 10° 
from a horizontal position, and are nearly parallel to the general sur- 
face of the hill. They vary in thickness from a*few inches to several 
feet. 

In quarrying, the beds are first broken at the lower or western 
side of the quarry. ‘The stone is then obtained by first drilling small 
holes in rows, parallel to the strike of the stratification, and upon the 
upper surface, of the beds. Into these holes wedges are driven, 


_1 Since this paper was read, it has been so enlarged as to include the observations 
made up to the time of publication. 


* Magnetic. 
PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 8 AuGuBT, 187]. 


Niles.] 82 [January 4, 


thus breaking the rock into slabs of regular form. The beds are so 
free from seams, and the rock is so homogeneous in structure, that 
pieces of great length may be obtained in this manner. Jn working 
from the lower side of the quarry towards the upper, the edges of 
those portions of the beds which are still in position, rise above each 
other like successive steps. The edges of these steps form nearly 
straight lines, parallel to the strike of the strata. When these por- 
tions of the beds remain sometime without being worked, cracks 
frequently appear along these edges. If still allowed to remain 
undisturbed, the fractures become more extensive, and frequently 
break up large quantities of the excellent stock of the bed. It 
has been found by experience that when these cracks first appear 
their extension may be prevented, and the stock preserved from fur- 
ther injury, by making an opening in the bed, trending in easterly 
and westerly directions, thus cutting it across the strike, and at 
right angles to the ordinary working lines. It is evident that such 
an east and west opening could counteract only a force which is 
exerted in nearly north and south directions. ‘That the force works 
in the direction of the strike of the strata, is still further evident upon 
the examination of some of these fissures. A single example may be 
sufficient for illustration. 

When at the quarry, April 29th, 1871, I observed an irregular 
fracture in a bed three feet and nine inches in thickness. The frac- 
ture was about sixty-one feet long. ‘The northern portion of thirty- 
eicht feet was nearly parallel to the strike, and the southern part of 
twenty-three feet curved to the eastward, and was accompanied by 
secondary fractures near it. Commencing at the northern end of the 
fracture and going southward, it would be noticed that at a few 
places it turned suddenly to the east, and immediately to the south 
again, thus making two right angles in its course. At these places 
the very short portions of the fracture trending eastward were wider 
than the long ones running southward, thus showing that the great- 
est movement had been from the north towards the south. At 
that time, April 29th, the southward movement had amounted to 
three-sixteenths of an inch; but when I visited the quarry July 7th, 
it had amounted to five-eighths of an inch, though at the time, the 
greatest width of the crack, at any place where it followed its general 
north and south course, was only one-fourth of an inch. ‘Therefore 
the force which fractured the rock, had, moved the relieved portion 
southward, more by three-eighths of an inch than it had been moved 
westward. 


1871.) 83 [Niles 


Spontaneous fractures, similar to the one described above, have 
been visible at the quarry whenever I have visited it. Sometimes 
they are quite large. I measured one, July 7th, which was full four 
inches wide. 

Another series of phenomena is exhibited at the quarry, in the 
spontaneous elevation of the beds and the formation of miniature 
anticlinals. These elevations are common, and affect beds differing 
in thickness. In April I observed two anticlinals which had been 
recently formed. In one instance, a bed one foot eight inches thick 
had been elevated one inch and a half. The curvature of the upper 
surface of this bed was most distinctly visible. From the crest of 
this anticlinal to the base of the northern slope, the distance was 
twenty-three feet. The base of the southern slope could not be de- 
termined on account of the debris which had accumulated there. At 
one end of the crest there was a crack three-sixteenths of an inch 
wide, trending with the fold nearly east and west, but at the other 
end no fracture could be seen. In the other instance the bed was 
three inches thick, and at the centre had been elevated one inch. A 
fracture extended the entire length of the crest, which trended nearly 
east and west, as in the preceding instance. 

On the afternoon of July 7th, a little anticlinal was formed while I 
was at the quarry. The bed was only two inches and three-fourths in 
thickness. The span of the arch from north to south was five feet 
five inches and a half. The length of the crest was five feet and a 
half, and a fracture extended the entire length of it. During the’ 
afternoon, the portion of the bed forming the crest was elevated three 
inches and a quarter. The situation showed that the force which 
caused the elevation, was not an artificial one used in working the 
quarry. 

According to the testimony of the persons occupied at the quarry, 
explosions sometimes attend the fracturing and elevation of the beds. | 
Mr. A. T. Wing, superintendent at the yard, says that cracking 
‘sounds are very frequently heard, especially after the work of the 
day, and the noise attending it has ceased. Though these sounds are 
more frequent in warm weather, yet they are heard in winter. 
These explosions sometimes throw dust into the air, and he has seen 
stones, weighing a few pounds, thrown several feet high by them. 
The sound of these explosions is sometimes as loud as the blasting 
of rock, and in a few instances it has been even louder. At one 
time, after the workmen. had left the quarry, so loud a report was 


% 


Niles.] 84 [January 4, 


heard that they supposed the powder magazine had exploded. On 
hastening to the spot they found that it was not the powder, but the 
rock, which had exploded. <A portion of a bed of nearly circular 
outline, and more than thirty feet in diameter and one foot in thick- 
ness, had been thrown up and broken. When they reached it, a 
portion at the centre was three feet above the surface from which 
it was broken, and the rock was still cracking and falling. 

Another very interesting phenomenon is the expansion of the rock, 
as it is being quarried. 

The most remarkable instance of this was observed in the autumn 
of 1869. By the use of more than twelve hundred wedges, a bed 
was split three hundred and fifty-four feet in leneth, in a line along 
the strike of the rock. The fracture extended from the northern 
and upper portion of the quarry southward, for the distance men- 
tioned, but could be traced no further; so that this slab, which for 
three hundred and fifty-four feet had been fractured from the rock, 
was at its lower end, still attached to the bed, apparently as firmly as 
ever. The stone thus partly loosened, was eleven feet wide and 
three feet thick. At the upper portion of the fracture it was soon 
noticed, that the halves of the drill holes upon the freshly broken 
edge of the slab were not directly opposite their corresponding halves 
on the edge of the parent rock, but that they had been moved fur- 
ther up the hill, toward the north. At the extreme lower end, the 
wedges were still firmly held in the rock, and there was no percepti- 
ble evidence of any movement. But in passing from the lower end 
to the upper, the first evidence of expansion was shown in only a 
slightly oblique position of the corresponding halves of the drill holes. 
Passing on, the amount of unconformability of position inereased 
regularly, until at the upper end it amounted to an inch and a half. 
Thus from the lowest wedge to the upper end, the stone was an inch 
anda half longer than that portion of the bed from which it had 
been broken. ‘There is an abundance of testimony to this instance of 
expansion from those engaged at the quarry, and from those who 
came to the locality to see the curiosity. The stone was allowed to 
remain in the position above described for more than two months, 
and during that time it was exposed to warm and cold, and to wet 
and dry weather; but these changes of temperature and moisture 
produced no perceptible difference in the amount of the expansion. 
As the expansion was from the lower end to the upper, gravity could. 
not have been a cause of the phenomenon. 


1871.] 85 [Niles. 


In three instances, I have had the opportunity of observing the 
rock, when it has been split at shorter lengths in the manner de- 
scribed above. In each case the expansion was suflicient to admit 
of measurement. 

Near the upper end of the quarry, four hundred holes had been 
drilled into a bed, making a row one hundred and twenty-eight feet 
long. When the wedges had been driven sufficiently to merely frac- 
ture the rock, and while most of them were still firmly held, the ex- 
pansion amounted to one-sixteenth of an inch. The stone which had 
so expanded, was eleven feet wide, and three feet thick at the lower 
end, and five feet thick at the upper. In this example the upper 
end was the one attached, and the extension was southward. 

Near the southern end of the quarry, a split thirty-three feet and a 
half long had been made. Here the slab was firmly attached to the 
bed at the lower end. Its width was six feet and nine inches, and its 
thickness one foot and eight inches. Iwas permitted to take out 
the wedges, when I found the expansion amounted to one eighth of 
inch at the upper end. I could distinctly see that it increased reg- 4 
ularly in amount, from the lower end to the upper. 

The other instance was in the working of a bed, the western edge 
of which extended in a direct line along the strike, without having 
been anywhere cut or fractured transversely. A row of wedges fifty- 
eight feet long was driven into holes upon the upper surface of the 
bed, and seven feet from its edge, thereby splitting the bed only 
along the line of the wedges. It was then necessary to cut from the 
western edge of the bed eastward to this fracture. The workmen 
attempted to do this by taking out a piece in the form of a triangle, 
the base of which was upon the edge of the bed, and the apex 
reached the upper end of the fracture. They found this a somewhat 
difficult task. The piece appeared to be held by something more 
than the tenacity of the rock, and it was necessary to break it into 
small pieces before it could be removed. When considerable stone 
had been cut away, cracking sounds were heard, and the remaining 
portion of the triangular mass was quickly fractured and easily re- 
moved. Fortwo hours I had been watching the corresponding halves 
of the drill holes, at the upper end of the fracture first made by the 
wedges, to observe at what period of the work, the expansion, if 
any, should take place. The halves of the holes remained perfectly 
conformable in position, up to the time of the cracking sounds and 
the loosening of the stone, but immediately upon this taking place, 


Niles. ] 86 [January 4, 


those upon the edge of the slab were one-fourth of an inch further to 
the north, than those of the parent rock. 

Prof. Johnston, of Middletown, Ct., has described! “some sponta- 
neous movements occasionally observed in the sandstone strata in oné of 
the quarries at Portland, Ct.” The movements there observed, he 
says, are the sliding of one stratum upon another. ‘These occur 
whenever a stratum at the bottom of the quarry is first broken by 
excavating a channel in it, which trends in easterly and westerly di- 
rections. When such a channel has been cut only partly through 
the thickness of the stratum, the stone remaining at the bottom is 
crushed with a loud report, and the edge of the northern side moves 
southward about three-fourths of an inch. ‘“ These facts,” he thinks, 
‘plainly show that the strata of sandstone at this place are not, at 
the present time, perfectly at ease in their ancient bed,” but he does 
not attempt to determine the cause. 

Jam not aware that any other scientific man has observed and 
recorded facts similar to those given by Prof. Johnston. Probably 
such phenomena are to be observed at comparatively few localities. 
At many quarries the rock is so divided by loose joints, that it would 
quietly yield to a force, which at Monson would cause the phenomena 
described. From some statements made to me by persons interested 
in. quarrying extensive and comparatively unbroken strata, I am 
inclined to believe that facts of a similar character might be 
collected. > 

When I visited Portland, the condition of the quarries gave me no 
opportunity for observing phenomena of the kind described by Prof. 
Johnston. I found, however, that the facts were well known to 
those who had been engaged there for a long time, through whom 
I was able to determine that the movements were from east of north 
towards west of south, or very nearly parallel to the directions of the 
movements at Monson. The force causing the phenomena at the two 
localities may be identical, for the manner of working the quarries at 
Portland gives no opportunity for observing fractures, elevations and 
expansions, like those so well shown at Monson. 

Certain features in the structure of rocks, as cleavage, for example, 
have been considered, by eminent geologists, as evidences of severe 
compression; also, polished and striated surfaces have been regarded 


1Proc. Am. Association for the Advancement of Science. Eighth Meeting. 
1854. p. 283. | 
National Magazine. Vol. 11, No.4. Oct., 1858. p. 862. 


eee 


1871.] 87 [Niles. 


as proof of a sliding and slipping of parts. These features, however, 
afford no evidence of present action. 

The phenomena observed seem to me to establish the following 
facts concerning the rocks at Monson: — 

1. That they are compressed at the present time with great force. 

2. That there is a lateral pressure exerted in northerly and south- 
erly directions, but no indications of any acting in an easterly and 
westerly course. 

3. That beds of very compact rock may be flexed and broken by 
Jateral pressure, as seen in the actual formation of anticlinals. 

4, ‘That continued pressure does occasionally culminate in explo- 
sions and movements of the rock. 

5. That even compact gneiss is, to a certain extent, compressible 
and elastic. 

6. That whether lateral pressure originally brought the rock to 
its present compressed state or not, it now keeps it in that’ condition, 
excepting, of course, where it has been artificially removed; then the 
rock expands. 

I believe that these and similar phenomena, will throw important 
light upon the more extensive folding, fracturing, and movement of 
rocks, and the elevation of mountains; but the discussion of these 

important relations is reserved with the hope of illustrating them by 
further observations, in a future paper. 


Dr. C. T. Jackson and Rev. J. B. Perry mentioned in- 
stances of similar expansion of solid rock masses which they 
ascribed to changes of temperature. 


Dr. P. P. Carpenter, of McGill College, Montreal, made a 
communication on the family of Chitons. 


January 18, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Forty-four persons present. 
The following paper was presented :— 


EXPERIMENT WITH THE PoIsOoN OF THE COBRA DE CAPELLO 
or Inpia (Naja tripudians). By Georcr Sceva. 


Jan. 8,1871. One quarter of a grain of the dried poison, which 
had been kept a little more than seven months, was dissolved in 


Sceva.] 88 [January 18, 


twenty drops of water, and the liquid reduced by evaporation at a 
temperature of 85° Fahr. to four drops. This was exposed to the air 


at a temperature of 22° and completely frozen in four minutes (the | 
warmth of the porcelain vessel retarding the process slightly). The | 
poison was allowed to remain in the frozen state sixteen hours, dur- | 


ing which time the temperature fell to 8°—or 24° below the freezing 


point. On the following day, Jan. 9th, the poison was thawed and | 
diluted with three or four drops of water, and two drops of the liquid | 
injected with a fine pointed syringe into the pectoral muscle of a | 


pigeon about half an inch from the keel of the sternum, the point 
of the syringe penetrating the muscle about one-eighth of an inch. 


This part of the pigeon’s body was selected in order to avoid wound- — 


ing any of the viscera or large blood vessels. The poison was in- 
jected at 4.32! p.m. 

4,34’. A motion of the bowels. Although this almost invariably 
occurs as the first symptom of the action of the poison in the lower 
animals, it cannot be fully relied on in the case of birds, as it very 
frequently occurs from fright. 

5.10°.. Another motion of the bowels, followed by slight tremors 
and convulsive movements clearly indicating the action of the poison. 
Dr. Thomas Dwight, Jr., who was present, thought he observed in 
the general appearance of the bird the action of the poison a few 
minutes earlier. 

At 5.15’, no further symptoms were shown. At this time I left 
the room for about two hours and on returning a few minutes past 
seven found the pigeon dead, its death having occurred in less than 
two and a half hours from the time of being poisoned. 

Since making this experiment I have found that a similar one has 
been made on the venom of the rattlesnake by Dr. S. Weir Mitchell, 
of Philadelphia. Dr. Mitchell found that neither boiling nor a putre- 
factive change destroyed its poisonous action. These experiments 
have also been made with the venom of the Cobra de Capello with 
like results. 

Mr. Sceva, after reading the report of his experiment, made some 
general remarks on the habits of the cobra and on the action of its 
poison. He said he had been much surprised, on looking over some 
of the works on natural history, at the erroneous statements which 
some of them contain respecting this subject. Fle thought these 


errors might be attributed in a great measure to the general dread — 


and aversion which people feel for all poisonous reptiles. This 


,. cae 89 [Sceva. 
seemed to account, when combined with the usual credulity shown 
in such matters, for the many strange stories and absurd reports that 
had been published concerning the poisonous snakes of distant coun- 
tries, such as India; and in many instances he had found that men 
holding high positions in the government civil service, and physicians 
residing in that country, had published statements which had been 
accepted here and in Europe as facts—well established by their per- 
sonal observations and careful investigations,—whereas they were 
founded merely on the stories told by the jugglers, snake-charmers, 
and other ignorant people. In some popular works on natural his- 
tory recently published, which on. many subjects appeared to be care- 
fully written, there seemed in this matter a great want of careful 
discrimination. In J. G. Wood’s natural history of reptiles, several 
pages were devoted to accounts of antidotes, such as the leaves and 
root of the Aristolochia Indica, the ‘‘snake-stone,” etc. These, with a 
great many other reputed antidotes had been found by recent in- 
vestigations to be utterly worthless. 

Mr. Sceva during the past three years, while attached to the 
Indian Museum at Calcutta, had assisted Dr. Fayrer, (the Professor 
of Surgery in the Medical College there) in his numerous experi- 
ments with the venom of poisonous snakes. Among those made to 
test the value of local applications, was that of the use of the actual 
cautery by plunging pointed red-hot irons deeply into the flesh in the 
places where the fangs had entered, but this failed to destroy the poi- 
son. This result, however, would not surprise one who fully under- 
stood the rapidity with which the blood passes through the soft tissues 
of the body and the instantaneous action of the poison upon it. 

To show the rapid effect of the poison on the blood, Mr. S. read 
one of Dr. Fayrer’s experiments that he had witnessed, in which the 
inguinal fold of the skin of a dog was held by two pairs of long- 
bladed forceps in such manner as to include a triangular piece of 
about three inches on a side. The cobra’s fangs were applied to the 
middle of the free edge and with a sharp scalpel held in readiness 
the piece of the fold of the skin was at once cut out, and yet the 
dog died from the effects of the poison in fifty-nine minutes. Dr. 
Fayrer in his report made the following comments. 

‘This was a very interesting and instructive experiment, most 
clearly demonstrating the deadly nature of the virus and the awful 
rapidity with which it passes into the circulation. ‘Ihe bitten part 
was not merely excised as we speak of excising the parts around the 


Sceva.] 90 [January 18, ° 


spot which the fang had penetrated, but the fold of skin into which 
the fangs had injected the poison was removed within a second after 
the bite, for the knife had entered almost before the fangs had left. 
In fact it could not have been done more rapidly, and yet within one 
hour the animal was dead from the effects of the poison. The 
infinitesimal portion of time during which the cobra’s fangs were 
inserted into the tissues was sufficient to have sent the poison through 
the circulation beyond the reach of incision ; and yet how very al 
must that quantity have been.” 

Mr. Sceva exhibited on the president’s table a living specimen of 
the cobra which he had brought with him from India. It was 
about five feet in length and of the variety known in India as the 
“ Keuteah.” It had eaten nothing while it had been in his pos- 
session, since the 8th of June last, a period of seven months and 
ten days . 

He had also kept others in India for over five months without food. 

He said that the common belief that the cobra would seek to exer- 
cise its deadly power by biting any person who should come within 
its reach was quite erroneous; on the contrary it avoided using its 
fangs as much as possible except when securing its food. When two 
cobras were placed together in a cage, they would sometimes strike at 
each other for hours with their noses, and would blow their venom and 
saliva from their mouths, but he had never seen one bite another, al- 
though he had kept a large number of them in cages convenient for 
observation. 

Of the great number of deaths (some thousands) occurring annu- 
ally in India from cobras, the bites were almost always received when 
people stepped upon them. 

Until very recently it was almost universally supposed that the 
poison of the cobra had no effect on the mongoose, an animal re- 
sembling the weasel. It was well known that the mongoose would 
attack and kill the cobra and would sometimes eat a large part of the 
body; but in these encounters the mongoose by his great agility could 
easily avoid being bitten, and Mr. S. had found on examining a 
cobra after being killed by a mongoose that all the wounds had been 
inflicted back of the head. When, however, the mongoose was se- 
cured and a cobra was compelled to bite its leg by having it put into 
the snake’s mouth, the mongoose died in a very short time. 


1871.] 91 [Pickering. 


Dr. Charles Pickering made a verbal communication on 
the “drift” and especially the examples of it, which he had 
carefully studied in Salem. These he explained by diagrams 
on the blackboard. 


He said Prof. Agassiz’s idea of a great mass of overlying ice 
seemed at first to account for the movement of the boulders near 
Salem, but there are circumstances that hardly correspond. Once 
enveloped in ice, fragments of rock, whether large or small, would be 
all treated alike, whereas the largest of the Salem boulders are pretty 
recularly left near their source; water, as suegested by Dr. Jackson, 
would make this discrimination, but there is more resemblance to 
the probable effect of a slight check of the earth’s rotation, sending 
loose material eastward. 

The source of supply is clearly defined, a bed of syenite extending 
along the west side of Tapley’s brook from Danvers to Saugus; the 
derived boulders are scattered over a bed of greenstone-trap, from 
Tapley’s brook eastward to the sea; and the exact amount of force 
expended in transporting each boulder to its present position can be 
mathematically demonstrated. 

Neither beyond nor around Salem had he ever met with a frag- 
ment of conglomerate, even in the finer “ drift.” Eight miles farther 
south, on the edge of Little Nahant, he had found a large boulder of 
porphyry-conglomerate, that came, in all probability, from the hills 
between East Boston and the sea, and therefore nearly due east. 

These boulders having been transported by some cause that has 
ceased to operate, a question arises as to the date. Was it anterior 
to the advent of the existing species of animals and plants on the 
surface of the earth? 


Mr. Hyatt stated that he had recently explored the region referred 
to by Dr. Pickering, and could confirm the statements of that gen- 
tleman, so far as they related to the limited distribution of boulders. 
The geology of that vicinity was of great interest, and had been 
the object of several of his excursions during the past summer. He 
then described the valley which leads southward from Peabody to 
Swampscott, as having been at one time filled by a vast body of 
eruptive syenite. Remnants of this are still to be found capping the 
summits or forming the south-western face of the ridge on the 
eastern side, while on the western side they project in numerous, 


Hyatt. 92 [January 18, 


round-topped hills, which continue until they abut against, or change 
into, the flesh-colored syenite that les in contact with the Lynn por- 
phyries. To the east of this a great thickness of a very remarkable 
granitic rock had been observed, which presents in various localities | 
a gneissic structure with perceptible strike generally to the east of — 
north, which had led him to think it the broken and much altered | 
remains of a sedimentary rock. Salem township, Swampscott and | 
part of Peabody are underlaid by this formation. The whole mass 
to an unknown depth has been uplifted and shattered by internal | 
forces, which at the same time have injected the cracks and crevices | 
with fleshy or white feldspar, more or less homogeneous or mixed | 
with quartz, and in some instances mica or horneblende, according to | 
the locality. 

The cliffs along the Marblehead shore admirably illustrate this. 
point. One large cliff especially, near the line between Marblehead 
and Swampscott, would make a solid mass if all the injected rock 
were removed from the seams. 


Richard Bliss, Jr., called attention to some of the peculiar | 
markings which distinguish the young from adult fishes. In 
examining some specimens recently received at the Museum 
of Comparative Zoology, from India, which had a double 
band on the side of the body, or rather a single line starting 
from the gill-covers, running to the tail and then returning 
to the gill-covers, he found this to be the young state, and — 
this the manner in which a dark, solid band was formed, and | 
became perfect as the fish reached the adult state. Another | 
species forms a band which entirely disappears leaving only — 
a spot at the head and another at the tail. A third species | 
begins with a band, which is at length resolved into cross 
bands. These examples, he said, show the Ge: of 
studying fishes in all stages of their growth. 


Capt. N. EH. Atwood made a few remarks on the habits of 
the Blue-fish, Temnodon saliator Cuv. It was not found 
north of Cape Cod until the year 1847. Since that time it 
has been abundant in Eastern waters, appearing annually 
about the fifth of June, but in his opinion is now gradually 
disappearing. He also referred to other species, viz.: the 


& 1871.) 93 ((nler. 


Weak-fish, Otolithus regalis Cuv., the Spanish mackerel, 
Scomber Decayi Storer, and the Halibut, Lippoglossus vulga- 
ris Cuy., as gradually occupying the waters of a higher latitude. 


February 1, 1871. 
The President in the chair. Forty persons present. 


The following papers were presented : — 


NOTICES OF SOME HETEROPTERA IN THE COLLECTION OF DR. 
T. W. Harris. By P. R. UBLER. 


Fam. PACHYCORIDA. 


AULACOSTETHUS. Nov. Gen. 


Head about two-thirds as long as the width across the eyes, much 
shorter than the pronotum ; bluntly curving to the tylus.. Tylus 
longer than the lateral lobes, cylindrically elevated above tke plane 
of the adjoining surface. Ocelli near the base and not far from the 
eyes. Inferior lobes blunt, convexly thick, the buccule very slender; 
rostrum extending almost to the end of the second ventral segment ; 
the second joint subequal to the third and fourth united ; the third 
and fourth equal. Pronotum almost twice as broad as long, subhexag- 
onal, the lateral and posterior angles bluntly rounded ; the anterior 
aspect steeply convex, the humeri elevated into a rounded knob, 
bounded inwardly by a distinct depression ; the lateral edge narrow, 
raised, the submargin longitudinally impressed. Sternal raised flaps 
short, broadly rounded, not quite reaching to the base of the antenne. 
Lateral margin of the sternal groove feebly elevated between, the 
anterior and intermediate cox, but thick and much elevated between 
the intermediate and posterior coxw. Femora stout ; exterior face 
of tibiz obsoletely carinate, the exterior edges acutely carinate. 
Odoriterous duct long, rather straight, running from the coxa almost 
to the exterior margin of the plate on which it lies, the osteole placed 
at the inner end of the groove, the groove deep and occupying more 
than one half the length of the duct. Scutellum a little humped at 
base, a little inclining from the base to the middle and then obliquely 
declining to the tip; the sides broadly rounding towards the tip; 
edge of connexivum acute. 


Uhler.] 94 ) [February 1, | 


A. marmoratus. 

Tetyra marmorata Say. Heteroptera, New Harmony. p. 2, no. 1. 

No. 112. Harris Collection. ‘North Carolina, April. Mr. 
Nuttall.” , 

Mr. Say’s specimens were obtained in New Jersey. A male from 
Maryland, in my own collection, is much smaller than the specimen 
of Dr. Harris ; but it agrees, in all other respects, with his type. The | 
description of Mr. Say is too short to limit the species precisely, but 
it is likely that the present type was determined, as were many others, 
by Mr. Say himself. 


Fam. STIRETRIDA. 


Popisus Stal. 


P. serieventris, n. sp. 

Similar to P. modestus Dallas, but of a more blackish grey color. 
Pronotum, sides less deeply sinuated, the humeral angles not so prom- 
inent, obtusely triangular, blackish ; the surface less regularly punc- 
tured, those each side anteriorly and in the corners finer, confluent, 
presenting the appearance of four blackish spots, the middle surface 
somewhat bald, yellow. Scapus and basal joint of the antenne 
blackish outwardly. Scutellum punctured with black, the punctures 
at base aggregated in a large patch, the basal angles with a large, 
smooth, whitish spot, the tip smooth, white. Pectus remotely punc- 
tured with fuscous, the impressed portion of the propleura, the middle 
of the mesopleura, and exterior part of the metapleura with a large 
patch of black, confluent punctures, the exterior margin smooth ; 
exterior end of the osteolar duct black, the suleus broad, not reaching 
to the tip. Legs pale orange-yellow, the femora pointed with black, 
the dots more or less aggregated beyond the middle. Corium less 
coarsely punctured, the punctures fuscous or rufous; those of the 
costal area coarser, the finer ones aggregated in smali patches; the 
surface adjoining the inner surface and tip of the median suture smooth, 
with a more or less embrowned spot before the tip ; embolium yellow, . 
with a fuscous spot at base; the membrane tinged with brown, the 
basal margin, nervures basally, and a broad, longitudinal streak run- 
ning to tip blackish. ‘Tergum with large clouded spots each side and 
behind ; connexivum bright yellow above, with a quadrangular black 
spot at the base and apex of each segment, on the under side having 


1871.] 95 [Uhler, 


a corresponding series of spots which are sometimes reduced to mere 
dots. Venter punctured with rufous and black, the latter arranged 
each side in a longitudinal series of patches; interior to these is a row 
of black spots, and upon the middle line four round spots, with the 
largest one at the posterior end. 

Length to tip of abdomen, 93 millims. Humeral width, 5 
millims. 

No. 40. Harris Collection. $. “ Cambridge, Mass., April 20th, 
eat.” 

The specimens vary very much in depth of color and in the size 
and distinctness of the markings. 

In my own collection are specimens from Maine and Minnesota. 
A female from Massachusetts is twelve millims. in length. 


Fam. HALYDIDA. 


BROCHYMENA Am. et Serv. 


B. Harrisii, n. sp. 

Similar to B. annulata Fab., but broader and shorter. Head elon- 
gate-subquadrate, much shorter than in B. annulata, the lateral mar- 
gins straight, parallel; the tylus a little shorter than the lateral lobes, 
the anterior prolongations of these lobes not much longer than the 
lateral projections, the exterior corner of the latter almost toothed. 
Pronotum short and broad, the anterior lobe having the lateral teeth 
direct and sub-equal in size; humeral angles obliquely rounded, 
elevated, having a few short, oblique, ill-defined teeth, the 
surface behind the humeri obliquely impressed. Connexivum 
with a transverse, black, subdepressed spot. before and behind each 
incisure. Membrane, hardly reaching beyond the abdomen, 
charged with fuscous ramifications as in B. annulata. Venter very 
convex, the longitudinal groove continued distinctly to the penulti- 
mate segment. Femora mottled with brown, having a yellow, mac- 
ular ring before the tip ; tibiee brownish, with a yellow ring upon 
the middle. 

Length, 163-18 millims. Humeral width, 9} millims. 

Hab. South Carolina. In Dr. Harris’s Collection, without a num- 
ber. A female in my own collection was taken in Lancaster Co., 
Pennsylvania, from a tree, in the month of May. 


~ 


Uhler.] 96 [February 1, 


TRICHOPEPLA Stal. 


T. semivittata. 
Pentatoma semivittata Say. Heteropt. p. 9, no. 21. 
P. semivittatum H. Schf. Wanz. Ins., fig. 766. 
P. pilipes Dallas, Brit. Mus. Catal. Hemipt., p. 247, no. 37. 
Trichopepla pilipes Stal, Ofv. 1867. p. 528. 
No. 89. Harris Collection. ‘“ North Carolina, Prof. Hentz.’’ 


Fam. PENTATOMIDA. 


Euscuistus Dallas. 


E. fissilis, n. sp. 

Form and general appearance of EF. servus Say. Pale yellow, 
finely aciculatedly punctured with fuscous or black, the punctures 
more or less grauped together, and appearing very dense near the 
lateral margins of the pronotum.. Head appearing split in front, 
caused by the prolongation of the lateral lobes beyond the tylus. 
Basal joint of antennz not reaching to the tip of the head, the sec- 
ond joint a little shorter than the third. Surface of the pronotum 
depressed each side in front of the humeral angles, humeral angles 
prominent, rounded, alike in both sexes. Corium more or less, and 
membrane distinctly, dotted with fuscous. ‘The whole inferior sur- 
face minutely sprinkled with red, the specks on the pectus larger; 
underside of the head and pectus coarsely punctured. Venter pol- 
ished, finely punctured. | 

Length 12-13 millims. Humeral width 8-8) millims. 

No. 2. Harris Collection. 

Dr. Harris refers this species to EL. punctipes Say, making it synon- 
ymous with HE. serva Say; but it differs from both in distinet char- 
acters which seem to be permanent. 


NEottTiaLossa Kirby. 


N. undata. 

Pentatoma undata Say. Heteropt. p. 18, no. 17. 

Neoitiglossa trilineata Kirby. Fauna Bor. Amer. p. 276, 3; pl. vi, 
fig. 6. 

Alia trilineata Dallas. Brit. Mus. Catal. Hemipt, p. 224, 6. 

No. 83. Harris Collection. ‘Ipswich. Mr. Oakes.” 


1871.] OT [Uhler. 


The European congener of this species has been referred by Dr. 
Fieber to a new genus Platysolen, which he established for it. The 
- generic name here adopted has priority over that of Dr. Fieber, and 
should be adopted in its stead. 


LIODERMA. Nov. Gen. 


General characters of Pentatoma Fieber. Body longer in propor- 
tion to its width than in that genus; pronotum, together with the 
head, forming a long triangle. Rostrum reaching at least to the mid- 
dle of the first ventral segment, the first joint much shorter than the 
head ; buccule not reaching quite to the base of the head, very slen- 
der, dilated at the anterior end. Antenne as long as the corium, 
the tooth at base of scapus long. Scutellum long, rather narrow, 
fully two-thirds as long as the abdomen. Osteolar canal closed, sub- 
cylindrical, the orifice of the osteole opening beneath a projection at 
tip of the canal. Corium a little produced at the outer extremity. 

1. L. saucia. 
Pentatoma saucia Say. Heteropt. p. 6, no. 12. 
No. 47. Harris Collection. 

2. L. senilis. 

Pentatoma senilis Say. Heteropt. p. 5, no. 8. 

Pentatoma grisea Dallas. Brit. Mus. Cat. Hemipt. p. 246, 33. 

No. 38. Harris Collection. g9. “June 30th, 1826. May 
10th, 1835.” 


AtTomosira. Nov. Gen. 


Oval, the sides subparallel, not dilated posteriorly. Head short, 
rounded in front, the sides sinuated before the eyes; eyes large, sub- 
truncated behind. Antenne longer than the head and thorax united. 
Rostrum reaching beyond the first ventral segment; buccule slender, 
waved, not reaching the base of the head. Thorax hexagonal, con- 
vex, transverse, the lateral margins thickened, almost straight, 
posterior margin concavely arcuated; mesosternum with a feeble 
carina which becomes. enlarged and produced at its anterior end. 
Scutellum long, suddenly narrowed before the tip. Corium curved 
on the posterior margin, the exterior angle a little produced. Ven- 
ter convex, the basal spine rudimentary. Osteole situated at the 
outer end of a short, closed duct, the groove running from it out- 
wardly very slender and long. 


Uhler.]) ) 98 [February 1, 


A. sordida, n. sp. 

Brownish, or greenish-yellow, polished, the upper surface punc- 
tured with fuscous or black. Face finely, closely punctured, each 
side of tylus, and some spots near the occiput and eyes impunctured; 
basal and second joints of antenne green, the other joints reddish, 
excepting their greenish bases; rostrum green, paler at base, the 
apical joint piceous. Pronotum coarsely, deeply punctured in trans- 
verse, wavy, interrupted lines, the lateral submargins impressed, more 
densely and finely punctured, the lateral margins and some spots 
behind the head, and also upon the anterior margin, smooth, yellow; 
humeri rounded. Sides of the antepectus densely punctured near the 
anterior corners, the rest of the surface more coarsely, remotely — 
punctured; medio and post-pectus each with a spot of dense black | 
punctures upon the pleura. Legs green, the upper side of last tarsal 
joint and the apex of the nails piceous. Scutellum punctured in 
transverse, wavy, interrupted rows, the punctures finer towards the 
tip; tip yellow, impunctured. Corium guttated with distinct, deep 
punctures, which are more crowded near the base, the suture separat- 
ing the exterior field of the corium piceous, and terminating upon 
the disk in an ill defined spot of the same color; membrane brownish, 
transparent, the nervures darker. Connexivum yellow, finely punc- 
tured, having a double black spot at the incisures of the segments, 
both above and below; venter remotely punctured with brown, the 
punctures more dense on the sides and near the base, each side with 
two longitudinal series of double, black spots. 

Length 10 millims. Humeral breadth 53 millims. — 

No. 71. Harris Collection. ‘+ August 30, 1828.” 


RHAPHIGASTER Lap. 


R. Pennsylvanicus. | 
Cimex Pennsylvanicus DeGeer. Bd. 111; p. 216; pl. xxxiv; fig. 5. 
Pentatoma abrupta Say. Heteropt. p. 6, no. 10. 

No. 129. Harris Collection. ¢. “ Cambridge, Mass., Mr. Randall.” 
I have examined specimens of this species found in Panama, IIli- 
nois, New York, New Jersey and Mass. 


Fam. MICTIDA. 
Metapropius Westw. 


1. M. instabilis, n. sp. | 
Blackish fuscous, sparingly clothed with yellowish pubescence; in | 


1871.] 99 [Uhler. 


form less robust than MJ. femoratus Fab., and with the posterior 
femora much more slender and scarcely curved. Apical joint of 
antennz bright orange, much longer than the others, the basal joint 
about equal to the second. Rostrum reaching the tip of the interme- 
diate cox, hairy, more or less tinged with yellow. Pronotum a 
little broader than long, the humeri prominent, bluntly subacuminate, 
having a slightly backward curvature; the surface finely remotely 
punctured, and with small, scattered tubercles, some of which are 
excavated, the lateral margins deeply sinuated, the subearinate edge 
bearing a few short, oblique, rather remote teeth, margins behind the 
humeri granulated. Scutellum transversely wrinkled, the extreme 
tip orange. Hemelytra minutely, closely punctured, the punctures 
becoming a little coarser upon the clavus, the costal area near its base 
bearing a few minute granules. Antepleura shining, granulated, 
punctured; the odoriferous glands fulvous. Legs blackish piceous; 
the tarsi and ends of the tibiz fulvous, nails piceous; posterior femora 
almost straight, the teeth graduating in size towards the tip, the five 
in a row nearest the tip large and curved; posterior tibie dilated 
exteriorly through two-thirds of their length, sinuated on the middle, 
the base of the sinus almost acutely angulated, the opposite end 
tapering and beyond this a few small, remote teeth; the inner dilata- 
tion feeble, extending to about the middle, beyond this to the tip 
minutely tuberculate-denticulate, the upper and lower surface of the 
dilatation granulated. 

Length, 19 millims. Humeral breadth, 7 millims. 

No. 50. Harris Collection. g. Anisoscelis prominulus Say. Mss. 
Penn., Dr. Pickering; “ North Carolina, Prof. Hentz.” 

2. M. confraternus, n. sp. 

Dark brown, blackish fuscous beneath, clothed with yellowish, 
almost prostrate hairs, which extend also upon the legs. 

Form and general appearance of the preceding species, but easily 
recognized by the long and very robust posterior femora. Antenne 
slender, fuscous, the apical joint fulvous, longer than the basal joint. 
Pronotum minutely tuberculated, a few of the tubercles excavated, 
the humeral angles a little curved upwards, bluntly subacuminate; 
lateral margins subcarinate, armed with small, rather remote, tuber- 
cular teeth, the sides subsinuated. Antepleura polished, granulated, 
anteriorly with a few coarse punctures. Odoriferous glands orange. 
 Scutellum a little elevated on the disk, each side with a shallow 
Impression, surface transversely, obsoletely wrinkled, the extreme 


> 


Uhler.] 100 [February 1, 


tip orange. Hemelytra densely, finely punctured, minutely granu- 
lated at base and on the costal area. Legs blackish piceous, the 
anterior and intermediate from near the base, the tips of the poste- 
rior tibize and all the tarsi, fulvous ; posterior femora robust, clavate, 
longer than in femoratus Fab., the row of five teeth nearest the tip 
large and stout; the tibiz moderately dilated exteriorly almost to 
the tip, tapering, the sinuosity shallow, the angle at its base not very 
prominent, interior dilatation very narrow, sublinear, from its mid- 
dle to the apex of the tibia minutely denticulated ; three or four 
minute teeth on the opposite side of the tibie. 

Leneth, 23 millims. Humeral breadth, 8 millims. g. 

“Florida. Mr. Doubleday.” 

In Dr. Harris’s Collection without a number. 


Fam. COREIDA. 


Nerpes Latus. 


N. decurvatus, n. sp. 
Form and general appearance of Neides spinosus Say. Luteus, or 


pale cinnamon yellow. Head with a slender, decurved tooth pro- | 


jecting forward and downward from the vertex. Thorax a little 


longer, less coarsely punctured, the callosities at the anterior end | 


of the median carina small and indistinct ; sternum dull black, no 


spines against the posterior coxe. Tip of the corium of hemelytra | 


without the dusky spot. Venter densely punctured. 
Length 7-9 millims. Humeral breadth 3-1 millim. 


No. 72. Harris Collection. g 9. «Dublin, N. H., Mr. Leonard.” 


Fam. LYGAIDA. 


PTOCHIOMERA Say. 


P. nodosa. 
-Ptochiomera nodosus Say. Heteropt. p. 18, no. 9. 
Aphanus clavatus Dallas. Brit. Mus. Cat. Hemipt. p. 560. no. 5. 


No. 144. Harris Collection. “ Alabama, February ; Prof. | 


Hentz.” 


This genus must not be confounded with Plociomerus Amyot and | 
Serv., as has been done by several European hemipterists. The | 
clavate, irregular antennz and shape of the thoracic pieces are quite 


different from those of the types of that genus. 


1871.] 101 [Uhler. 


Following Dr. Erichson in Prof. Agassiz’s Index Universalis, the 
above spelling should be changed to Ptochomera. 


PiLociomERus Amyot et Serv. (Autor). 


1. P. constrictus. 

Pamera constricta Say. Heteropt. p. 15, 1. 

Beosus abdominalis Guerin. La Sagra. Hist. Nat. Ile de Cuba. 
p: 397. 

No. 122, Harris Collection. “ Milton, Aug. 15th, 1831.” 

This species extends from the West Indies to Canada. 

2. P. diffusus, n. sp. 

Closely allied to P. silvestris Linn. Dull black, minutely pubes- 
cent. Head black, very minutely punctured, above with minute, 
prostrate, yellowish pubescence, the face with a few long erect hairs ; 
tip of the tylus piceous. Antenne honey yellow, tinged with piceous, 
the apical.joint and tip of third fuscous. Rostrum testaceous, more 
or less obscured, the apical joint piceous. Pronotum with remote, 
prostrate, white pubescence, and a few erect bristles ; the anterior 
lobe dull black, smooth, very convex, much narrower than the pos- 
terior lobe ; posterior lobe piceous, remotely punctured, the disk 
with three pale lines ; humeral angles whitish, smooth. Pectus with 
remote, prostrate, whitish pubescence; a spot above each coxa, 
coxal tips, posterior edge of the metapleurz, and legs, honey yellow; 
the middle of the anterior femora, an indistinct band near the tip of 
the posterior femora (and occasionally on the intermediate femora) 
and tips of all the tarsi piceous. Scutellum dull black, remotely 
punctured, clothed with remote, prostrate, whitish pubescence, the 
tip testaceous. Hemelytra honey yellow, more or less tinged with 
piceous, with whitish, prostrate pubescence, punctured in fuscous 
lines, with a larger blackish spot upon the lateral middle, almost 
touching the margin, and a smaller one at the exterior apical angle, 
near the interior apical angle with a small white spot ; membrane 
brownish, the nervules and a spot at tip whitish. Tergum black, 
occasionally rufo-piceous on the disk; the venter dull black, or 
tinged with piceous, sericeous pubescent. Posterior margins of the 
ventral segments sometimes piceous. 

Length, 54, 64 millims. Humeral breadth, 14, 14 millims. 

No. 103. Harris Collection. ‘ New Hampshire, Mr. Leonard.” 


Uhler.] 102 [February 1, 


Dr. Harris refers this species to Pamera bilobata Say, but it does 
not agree with Mr. Say’s description. 


OzorHoRA. Nov. Gen. 


Antenne long and slender, the basal joint reaching fully one-half | 
its length beyond the tylus. Eyes large, rather distant from the 
base of the head, prominent, but deeply inserted, the facets rather — 
large, postorbital surface swollen. Pronotum campanulate, broader | 
than long, at sides deeply sinuated, the anterior lobe rounded, con- 
vex, shorter than the posterior one, the sides bounded by a thick, 
raised margin; collum distinctly elevated, sinuated in the middle; | 
posterior lobe very broad, the sides oblique, bounded by the continua- — 
tion of the same elevated margin; humeri prominent, resembling 
long, thick tubercles. Impression between the lobes moderately 
deep. Disk of scutellum excavated. | 
O. picturata, n. sp. 

Pale rufo-piceous, or rufo-testaceous, elongate-oval, colors beneath 
and upon the anterior lobe of pronotum opaque; hemelytra and base of 
pronotum glossy. Antenne, rostrum, legs, hemelytra, posterior lobe 
of pronotum, and scutellum testaceous. Apex of the second and 
third joints and apical two-thirds of the last joint of the antenne 
blackish; the basal third of the latter white. Head densely punc- 
tured on the middle line, front and near the eyes, beneath finely 
punctured; tips of the lateral lobes and of the tylus honey-yellow, 
apex of rostrum piceous. Anterior lobe of pronotum impunctured, 
brown, the raised collar yellow, with brown spots; lateral raised mar- | 
gins yellowish : posterior lobe coarsely, remotely punctured with — 
brown, and usually with five longitudinal brown stripes; humeral | 
angles smooth, yellow, generally with a brown spot exteriorly. Pos- 
terior and upper margins of the metastethium yellow. Scutellum 
remotely punctured, carrying a V-shaped, yellow line, the lateral 
edges and tip also yellow. Hemelytra punctured in oblique lines 
with brown, the clavus clouded with brown; corium with a small 
streak near the base, a broad spot behind the middle, reaching the 
outer margin by contact with a smaller spot, a spot at the apical 
exterior angle, continued along the membranal suture, fuscous; costal 
margin broadly white, impuncturéd; membrane fuscous, a few irregu- 
lar lines near the base, the nervures and a large spot at tip white. 


1871.] 103 [Uhler, 


Length, about 6 millims. Humeral breadth, 11 millims. 
No. 127. Harris Collection. ¢. ‘‘ Cambridge, Mass., April 9, 
1835.” 


EREmMocoRIS Fieb. 


EH. ferus. 

Pamera fera Say. Heteropt. p. 16, 4. 

Rhyparochromus borealis Dallas. Brit. Mus. Cat. p. 565, 16. 

No. 73. Harris Collection. ¢ 9. 

The manuscript index to this collection gives the name Anisoscelis 
prominulus Say, Mss. to No. 73. The true genus Anisoscelis being 
known to both Dr. Harris and Mr. Say, the reference must have 
been originally made to an insect quite different from the one now 
bearing that number. 


PERITRECHUS Fieb. 


P. fraternus, n. sp. 

Elongate-oval, very slightly convex, black, dull. Head black, 
finely, remotely punctured both above and beneath, face pubescent, 
having some erect long hairs about the tip. Antenne piceous-black, 
the scapus and incisures of joints pale. Rostrum and tip of tylus 
pale piceous, the former (¢) reaching beyond the mesosternum, the 
tip darker. Pronotum broad, the transverse impression very ill-de- 
fined, but more distinct at each end, lateral reflexed margin decurv- 
ing anteriorly to meet the middle of the eyes; the surface dull, with 
remote, prostrate pubescence, the collar pale piceous; posterior lobe 
dull ochreous-yellow, with remote, coarse blackish punctures, humeri 
with a dusky spot in front. Pectus dull black, the pleural pieces 
remotely, obsoletely punctured. Legs pale rufo-piceous, the anterior 
femora blackish, excepting the knees; tibie dusky above, paler 
towards the tip; tarsi pale, but more or less dusky above and at tip: 
immediate and posterior femora dark piceous on the middle, the 
trochanters, cox and adjoining surface pale rufo-piceous. Hemely- 
tra pale, dull ochreous-yellow, punctured with black in numerous 
oblique rows, a few dusky spots and clouds produced by aggregations 
of the punctures, the costal margin and two or more small spots on 
the disk smooth, yellow. Membrane whitish, with a spot near the 
interior angle, and a few less distinct ones on the middle and sides 


a 


Uhler] 104 [February 1, 


brown. Venter black, polished, minutely, closely punctured, mi- 
nutely pubescent. Tip of costal margin with a black spot. 

Length, 5 millims. Humeral breadth, 12 millims. 

No. 146. Harris Collection. 9. ‘‘ Cambridge, Mass., April 20, 
1837, under a board.” 


BELoNocHILUS. Nov. Gen. 


Elongate, oval, flattened, pronotum and head together forming a 
long triangle. Head very long, acutely narrowing to the tip ; the 
tylus narrow, projecting prominently forwards. Ocelli placed on a 
line with the back of the eyes and near them. Antenne about half 
as long as the body, the apical joint subfusiform, much stouter than 
the others, about equaling the third in length ; basal joint very short, 
not reaching to the tip of head, contracted at base, the second as 
long as the basal and third united. Buccule narrow, tapering toa 
point behind the middle of the throat, the rostral groove deep, nar- 
rowing behind. Rostrum slender, reaching behind the middle of the 
venter, the basal joint fully as long as the head, almost enclosed in 
the groove, second joint a little longer than the first, third about 
twice as long as the fourth, the fourth a little shorter than the first. 
Prosternal groove broad, not carried as far as the collum, mesoster- 
nal groove broad, well defined. Osteolar appendix auriculate, 
grooved. Base of venter triangularly produced against the sternum ; 
the median line sulcate to behind the middle. Anterior femora very 
stout, armed with one large tooth. Membrane with five longitudinal 
nervures, and at base with one long and one transverse cell. Very 
closely related to Orsillus Dallas. 

B. numenius. 

Lygeus numenius Say. Heteropt. p. 15. 9. 

No. 81. Harris Collection. 9. “September 1st, 1829. Penn. 
Dr. Pickering.” 

A very rare insect in Maryland; but of which I have examined 
specimens from Ohio and Illinois. | 


Fam. ARADID/. 


ARADUS Fab. 


A. robustus, n. sp. 
Fuscous, or rufo-fuscous, with close-set, short sete over most of 
the surface. Form of A. quadrilineatus Say. Head broad, short, 


} 


1871.] 105 [Uhler. 


deeply grooved each side, with the posterior part of the grooves more 
deeply sunken. Tylus narrow, high, rounded at tip; on the con- 
striction behind it is a minute, elevated granule. Antenniferous 
processes stout, subacute at tip, extending almost to the tip of the 
basal joint of the antenne. Antenne very broad, a little flattened, 
the basal joint very short, not as long as the apical one ; second 
joint longest, subfusiform, more than twice as long as the apical one, 
much stouter than the basal ; third equally stout, a little more than 
one-half the length of the second, apical much narrower than the 
third, the tip subconical. Rostrum reaching fully to the anterior 
cox. Pronotum transversely elongate-oval, more than twice as wide 
as long, the lateral margins remotely denticulated, the teeth decreas- 
ing in size posteriorly; anterior margin subtruncated, posterior margin 
somewhat lobed behind the humeri; the disk with four longitudinal 
ridges, the lateral ones incomplete, curving inwards anteriorly, and 
on each humerus is a short ridge. Margins of the scutellum much 
elevated. Tibiz pale yellowish, with the base, tip and a broad band 
on the middle, black. Disk of corium usually reticulated with pale 
ferruginous, which includes also the two elevated nervures ; mem- 
brane pale, marmorated with fuscous, and having four long nervules. 
Middle line of venter incised ; post-genital flaps long and broad, 
obliquely approaching at tip. Lateral margins of the posterior seg- 
ments broadly scalloped. 
Length, 53-7 milims. Humeral breadth, 2-2) millims. 
No. 82. Harris Collection @. ‘May 20th, 1829.” 


ANEURUS. Curtis. 


A. inconstans, n. sp. 


Ferruginous, or rufo-fuscous. When deeply colored displaying a 
large, whitish spot upon the middle of the corium. Antenne stouter 
than in the allied species, the second joint a little longer than the 
basal one; the third almost as long, or at least two-thirds as long as 
the fourth. Spines of the antenniferous tubercles acute and a little 
curved. ‘The other characters are those common to the allied 


species. 
Length, 64 millims. Humeral breadth, 2 millims. 
No. 13. Harris Collection. 9. ‘‘Aradus sanguineus Say. 


Mss., May 29th, 1822, Mass. On a fence.” 


Uhler.} 106 [February a 


The following scheme embraces all the species known to me. 

A. Coarsely granulated species. | 

Antenne, second joint stout, longer than the feel one; third 
joint about one-half as long as the fourth. 1. A.levis Fab. , Europe. 

Antennz, second joint stout, longer than the basal one; third | 
joint almost as long as the fourth. 2. A. inconstans, n. sp. Mass. 

Antenne, very slender, second joint more slender at base, much 
longer than the basal one; third joint less than one-half as long as 
the fourth ; fourth very long and slender. 3. A. simplex, n. sp. 
New England. 

B. Minutely granulated, highly polished. 

Antenne, second and third joints subequal, neither longer than 
the basal one; the fourth longer than any two of the others con- 
joined. Antenniferous tubercles not denticulated. 4. <A. politus 
Say. Florida and Cuba. 


Fam. ANTHOCORIDZ. 


Lyctocoris Hahn. 


L. domesticus. 

Cimex domesticus Schill. Isis. 1834. p. 738. 

Anthocoris bicuspis H. Schf. Nomencl. Ent. p. 60. 

No. 148. Harris Collection. ‘‘ Alabama, Feb. North Carolina. 
Prof. Hentz.” 

Widely distributed throughout North America, and probably a 
species imported from Europe. 


TRIPHLEPS Fieb. 


T. insidiosus. 
Reduvius insidiosus Say. Heteropt. p. 32. 5. 
Anthocoris pseudo-chinche Fitch. Second Report, p. 295. ; 
The specimens in this collection are destitute of a number, and 
have no indication of the place where they were found. 


Fam. REDUVIDZ. 


PYGOLAMPIS Germar. 


P. pectoralis. 
Reduvius pectoralis Say. Ins. of Louisiana, p. 11. 


1871.] 107 [Uhler, 


Pygolampis fuscipennis Stal. Ofv. Vetens. 1859. p. 380. 4. 
No. 33. Harris Collection. g. ‘‘ May 15th, 1826.” 


Fam. EMESIDA. 


Emesa Fab. 


EH. longipes. 

Cimex longipes DeGeer. Mem. m1, pl. xxxv, figs. 17 and 19. 

Plowaria brevipennis Say. Amer. Ent. 111, pl. xlvii. 

Fimesa pia Amyot & Serv. Hem., p. 394. 2. 

Emesa jfilum G. R. Gray. Cuvier’s Animal Kingdom, vol. 11., p. 
244, pl. xcvii, fig. 3. 

_ Emesa pia 1. Schf. Wanz. Ins. 1x, p. 114, fig. 937. 

No. 93. Harris Collection. ¢. “Penn., Dr. Pickering.” 

After carefully comparing specimens of this species, from many 
parts of the United States, with the descriptions and figures above 
cited, I feel convinced that they are all to be referred to that 
described by DeGeer. Dr Dohrn, Linnea Entomologica, vol. xiv, 
p- 220, cites a species from Georgia for the Plo. brevipennis Say, but 
Say’s species came from Pennsylvania and does not agree with the 
description of Dr. Dohrn. It seems to me to be a new species which 
J have never seen. 


Pra@aria Amyot and Serv. 


P. errabunda. 

Ploiaria errabunda Say. Heteropt. p. 34. 2. 

Ploiaria maculata Hald. Proc. Acad. Phila. 111, p. 151. 

No. 107. Harris Collection. ‘ New Hampshire, Mr. Leonard.” 

A somewhat immature specimen now remains in the collection. 
It seems to be rare, although widely distributed in the United 
States. 


Fam. HYDROESSZ. 


RHAGOVELIA Mayr. 


R. obesa, n. sp. 

Allied o R. collaris Mayr, but differs in the colors, in the more 
contracted abdomen (unwinged) with its acutely produced tips of 
the connexivum, and in the absence of the tuft of hairs at the 


Uhiler.] 108 [February Ly 


end of the abdomen in the corresponding sex. Brownish, or bronzed 
black, the underside bluish sericeous. Head velvety black, the front 
almost truncated, cinereous, with an impressed longitudinal line run- 
ning almost to base, with a few long hairs about the sides and above; 
base of cranium a little carinately elevated. Labrum and lateral 
lobes yellowish, or rufo-piceous ; rostrum black, reaching to the tip 
of the anterior coxe. Eyes brown. Antenne, excepting the pale 
base of basal joint, black, basal joint stoutest, curved, about twice as 
long as the second, the second subequal to the third, the fourth 
decidedly shorter than the third. Thorax obese, pronotum velvety 
black, sparingly clothed about the sides with fine golden pubescence; 
the collum orange, interrupted in the middle by blackish, middle line, 
faintly carinated ; tip of pronotum produced, at tip curved upwards, 
the extreme end expanded, with a granulated process at each corner 
(winged) ; in the unwinged, the posterior margin forms a long tri- 
angle with the angles bluntly rounded. Each side of prosternum 
broadly orange. Cox, trochanters and usually the base of femora 
yellow; the femora bronzed- or blue-black. Cerci of the male 
long, slender, curved, hairy. . 

Length, 34-4 millims. Greatest breadth of pronotum, 1% 
millims. 

No. 64. Harris Collection. ‘‘ Velia collaris Say, Mss. On 
water, September 30th.” 

Occurs both with and without wings in some localities. Near 
Baltimore and in Eastern Massachusetts I have found great numbers 
of specimens, but always unwinged. 


Fam. HYDROMETRIDZ. 


Metrosatss. Nov. Gen. 


Similar to Halobates Esch. (autor.) Robust and broad. Anten- 
nz stout, almost as long as the entire body, the basal joint nearly as 
long as the three others united, curved at base, narrowing in that 
direction, much stouter in the male and expanded at the tip, the 
underside with erect hairs; second joint about one-third the length of 
the basal, greatly enlarged at tip, the third shortest, also enlarged at 
tip, fourth very stout, fusiform, almost as long as the second. Prono- 
tum ample (in the unwinged form narrow and short, the mesothorax 
forming the stoutest and largest part of the body), a very little 


1871] 109 [Uhler. 


wider than long, the posterior lobe large, and extending back in the 
form of a broad triangle with the sides nearly straight and the tip 
a litthe rounded; the lateral margins, including the humeri, forming 
high, broad ridges. Anterior legs stout, the tibize a little curved at 
tip, with the process small and almost in continuous contact with the 
surface on which it stands; the basal joint of tarsi about one-fourth 
the length of the second, the second having the unguicule placed 
about one-third from the tip. Intermediate femora about two-thirds 
the leneth of the posterior, the tibia not quite as long as the pos- 
terior femur and tibia conjoined; the tarsus equal in length 
to the posterior tibia and tarsus conjoined. Corium of hemelytra 
short, with two elongated cells occupying nearly the whole width; 
membrane more than twice as long as the corium, the looped ner- 
vule running parallel to the entire margin. 

M. hesperius, n. sp. 

Opaque, velvety blue- or brown-black, densely pubescent. Head 
robust, convex, brown, at base and each side of it rufous or orange, 
minutely, densely pubescent, the face blackish. Rostrum black, 
beneath shining, above densely greyish pubescent, at base more or 
less orange. Antenne black, pubescent, the basal one-fourth of the 
basal joint orange. Pronotum very small in the unwinged specimens, 
and less than one-half as long as wide, having the anterior margin a 
little concave, the surface finely, closely pubescent, the middle line 
broadly depressed, yellow, invaded by gray or whitish lead color, 
which expands in running back and covers the whole width of the ° 
tergum to its tip, omitting only a few black streaks on the disks and 
margins of the segments. ‘The whole pectus, venter and two spots 
on the pleura lead color with a sericeous gloss. 

The winged form has the pronotum blackish-brown, densely pubes- 
cent, the middle of the anterior lobe broadly depressed, covered by 
an orange spot, but lacking the bluish stripe. Coxee yellow beneath, 
legs brownish-black, the anterior pair yellow at base, the yellow color 
continued further on the under side. Sternum blackish, each side of 
it yellowish. Hemelytra dark brown, with a faint, paler streak on 
the median suture, at base and on the costal margin pubescent. 
Venter cinereous, the disk of the penultimate and base of the last 
seoment yellow. 

Length to tip of hemelytra 5 millims. Extreme width of meso- 
thorax 2 millims. Unwinged, length, 3-4 millims. Mesothoracie 
width 18 21 millims. 

No. 29. Harris Collection. 


Shaler.] 110 [February 1, 


ON THE CAUSES WHICH HAVE LED TO THE PRODUCTION OF CAPE 
Hatreras. By Pror. N. S. SHALER. 


It is an almost self-evident proposition that the geological structure 
of a coast line is the key to its character; that the subterranean fea- 
tures have determined its outward contours. It is equally clear that 
the changes now going on along any coast must depend to a great 
extent upon the geological character of the materials along that 


coast. These considerations make it seem necessary to study the | 


geological disposition of the materials along any shore, as the condi- 
tion on which we may hope to attain to a true understanding of the 
causes which have determined its form. In endeavoring to arrange 
a plan for the examination of the geological history of the shore line 
of the United States, it is at once obvious that the first thing to be 
done is to interpret the history of the most conspicuous features of 
the shore, in order to obtain the basis for the detail work. Inspec- 
tion of the map of the eastern coast of North America shows the 
existence of a number of great indentations and projections. It is 
obvious that these must depend upon some great geological facts 
which require interpretation. I propose to discuss here the causes 
which have led to the production of one of the most important irreg- 
ularities, the great salient angle of our southern shore known as Cape 
Hatteras. The geological facts already in our possession have 
failed to account for the existence of this projection. The general 
character of the shore at that point, and of the low lands which lie 
between the sea and the base of the Aileghany mountains, is such as 
to make it seem at first sight unlikely that the shoulder which the 
continent forms at this point is to be referred to disturbances of the 
underlying rocks. The region, for nearly one hundred miles to the 
west of Cape Hatteras, is nearly level, and seems to be a northward 
prolongation of the great southern plain which extends from Texas 
to Virginia; a singularly monotonous surface, with little indication of 
disturbance away from the immediate contact with the borders of 
the Alleghany chain. Along the whole stretch of coast from near 
the mouth of the Rio Grande we find the shore line everywhere bor- 
dered by this plain, and throughout its whole extent presenting no 
features which require us to call in the aid of geological dislocations 
to explain, saving the projections at the mouth of the Mississippi 
and the peninsula of Florida. The shore, from Matagorda Bay to 
near Hatteras, forms an almost uniformly curved line. The consider- 


1871.] 111 (Shaler. 


able salients at these points are easily accounted for; the first is 
obviously the product of the Mississippi, and the second the result of 
the action of the reef-building corals (as has been shown by the 
researches of Agassiz and others), aided, it may be, by the action of 
the mud of the Mississippi. It is evident that this projection at Cape 
Hatteras is due to neither of the causes which have produced these 
more southern reliefs. It is not like the Louisiana salient, the product 
of the detritus deposited at a river’s mouth, for the rivers emptying at 
this point are small and carry but little amount of detritus; besides, it 
will be evident from the details of the geological structure of this 
region that the shore is waning at the mouths of the rivers rather 
than gaining in extent. It is not to be regarded as the product of 
corals, like the great monument of organic life, the promontory of 
Florida. Professor Agassiz has, it is true, suggested that the sand 
reefs which fringe the Cape may be merely ancient coral reefs now 
serving as a basis of sand accumulations. Itseems, indeed, natural to 
assume that these reefs, which continue to the northward, are the 
outlines of the coral barriers, or possibly have some relation thereto. 
Careful study, however, has shown that the changes which occur in this 
barrier are of such a character as to forbid our accepting this view- 
Passes open and close in the barrier, cutting apparently to its base 
which seems to be a dense clay. The truth is, these ridges of sand 
in the form of barrier reefs are common along the whole coast where 
moving sands occur, from Montauk Point to Mexico. They seem to 
be the necessary product of tidal action on any shore where there 
are large amounts of materials in a condition to be moved by the 
currents produced by the tides. 

I have elsewhere endeavored to account for the presence of the 
enormous masses of detrital material which constitutes the broad 
reefs of Hatteras, and have shown that it is likely that the excavation 
of the great bays of the Chesapeake and Delaware was accomplished 
during the geological period just passing away; and that the exca- 
vating agents were the streams of ice which at that time poured down 
the valleys which debouch at the heads of these great inlets, just as 
the great alpine glaciers have in times past dug out the basins 
of the Swiss lakes. JI have tried to show that the material so exca- 
vated, or at least a good part of it, drifted to the southward of these 
bays and went to form the great masses of reef material which make 
up the Hatteras bars and those which form the Eastern border of 
the broad waters of Eastern Virginia. 


Shaler.] 17 [February 1, 


A revision of the eyidence which led me to this opinion of the 
origin of the great bays of the Chesapeake and the Delaware, and 
secondly, of the source of the sands and muds which make the sand- 
bars and mud-flats to the south of them, has confirmed me in the 
opinion expressed a year ago. A glance at the map will show, how- 
ever, that the fringing reefs of the Hatteras shore are only the ante- 
cedents of this part of the coast ; remove them entirely and the difi- 
culty of explaining the prominence of Cape Hatteras remains. 
Stripped of these reefs the shore would still present essentially the 
form it does at present. 

A careful examination has satisfied me that the projection: of 
Hatteras is due to subterranean disturbances which have resulted in 
uplifting the whole of this part of the coast. We shall have to go 
to some distance from the cape itself in order to find the evidence of 
this uplifting action. Upon a north and south line which passes 
through Richmond, Virginia, there exists a hitherto little noticed 
fold of the rocks having an altitude of over one thousand feet. On 
examining this ridge carefully, we shall find that it is elongated 
in the fashion of all great plications of rocks, and that it extends from 
Richmond, where it seems to sink down to the northward, as far as 
Weldon, N. C., having a length of at least fifty miles ; its east and 
west development is much less, probably being not more than ten to 
fifteen miles at the base. On comparing the general character of this . 
ridge with the separate ridges of the Alleghanies we find a very 
close resemblance. We are drawn to the conclusion that the similar- 
ity of form and the identity of direction indicate that this ridge is to 
be regarded as an outlying member of the Alleghany chain. It may, 
at first sight, seem an extravagance to term this ridge a mountain 
chain, it giving no conspicuous evidence of its existence on 
the surface. Although there is no external relief, the uplift of the 
rocks beneath the surface is as great as in the case of those ridges 
which still have a conspicuous relief. 

The true explanation of this peculiarity is that this ridge has been 
to a great extent worn down, and covered by subequal fens 
tions of sedimentary materials. 

The geological structure of other points along this chain, to the 
eastward of the elevated region, indicates the same extensive erosive 
action as would have been required to reduce the Richmond elevation 
to its present height. 

The upturned edges of the old series of rocks which crop out 


1871.) 118 [Shaler. 


along the line of the Manassas railroad, indicate that extensive reliefs 
once existing in that region have been worn away since the time of 
their upheaval. This erosive force I conjecture to have been 
brought into action by the successive periods of glacial activity 
which have probably operated in this region. It is in the highest 
degree improbable that the period of wide spread glaciation which 
has just passed away, was an unexampled accident in the history of 
our earth. It is, on the contrary, becoming more and more probable 
that we must accept glaciation as a recurring phenomenon, giving 
alternations in the action of the erosive force at work upon the sur- 
face of the continents ; at one time the streams acting in the local 
manner in which water works in its channels, again working over 
the whole ‘surface of the country when its surface is ice covered to 
profound depths. 

The glacial streams, which have dug out the: vast excavations of 
the Chesapeake and Delaware Bays, must have been accompanied by 
lesser streams, or more likely by an almost continuous sheet of ice, 
pouring down the flanks of the mountain range along its whole ex- 
tent. Supposing such repeated ice action, we should naturally expect 
to have many of the lower outlines of the range of mountains over- 
ridden by the rising streams and much ground by their action. The 
energy of the glacial action on the borders of a range is naturally 
much greater than in the central parts thereof; generally speaking, 
the weight of the ice sheet, and therefore its cutting power, increases 
from its sources towards the border. We should, on this as well as on 
other accounts, expect glaciation to be most destructive of reliefs, 
not in the centre of a chain but rather upon its borders. During 
the last glacial period in Switzerland, the great peaks of the inner 
region probably lost little, if anything, in height. Their summits 
covered with incoherent snow, or with névé, would be protected 
from external accidents; the lower regions alone, where the snow 
had become compacted, where it had gained its real glacial charac- 
ter, would be eroded. 

It is not to glaciation or other erosion alone that we owe the 
disappearance of this, and probably other of the eastern outlines of 
the Alleghanies. ‘There is abundant evidence of a considerable 
subsidence which has carried this and other summits below the bend 
which at one time they had. To see this point more clearly it will 
be necessary to look at some of the singular results obtained during 
the exploration of the Gulf stream by this survey. In the course of 

PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 8 AvausT, 1871. 


Shaler) 114 ’ [February 1, 


the stream, in the latitude of Charleston, S. C., several parallel 
ridges were discovered which had a height of over one thousand 
feet; these ridges were, in their course, approximately parallel to 
the coast, and to the trend of the Alleghany range. The symmetri- 
cal relations of direction and arrangement existing between these 
submarine ridges and those of the Alleghany chain, at once sug- 
gest the existence of some relation of a genetic kind. ‘The fact, 
hitherto unnoticed, of the existence of a ridge occupying a somewhat 
intermediate position between the Alleghanies and these submerged 
mountains, makes it not at all improbable that deeper down, beneath 
the more recent strata, there may be other similar ridges. I have else- 
where endeavored to show that the formation of mountain chains is 
necessarily limited to the land areas, or at least to those areas where 


there is no deposition of sedimentary material taking place. If this 


principle be correct, then we shall be safe in assuming that the sub- 
merged mountains; in the path of the Gulf stream above referred to, 
were formed above the level of the sea, and have since been sub- 
merged. Assuming that the continent has moved, as a whole, in this 
change of level, we should be compelled to suppose that the Allegha- 
nies had lost over ten thousand feet of their altitude by this subsidence. 
It is possible, however, and this view derives probability from several 
sources, that the subsidence took place through the downward flexure 


of the section lying between the base of the Alleghanies, and the point 


where these submerged chains now lie. We shall see hereafter that 
there is evidence at hand to show that the coast of the continent, from 
a point somewhere between New York and the Chesapeake, is grad- 
ually subsiding, and that this subsidence has already gone so far as to 


depress recent accumulations to the depth of near one hundred feet 


at some points. 

The question next in importance is that concerning the time of up- 
lift of the Richmond axis. Passing to the east from Richmond we find 
at the distance of a few miles a set of coal bearing beds, dipping 
steeply to the west. The shafts of the coal field mines enable us to 

‘be sure that this dip amounts to over one thousand feet in the dis- 
tance of three or four miles, at those points where the dip is least, and 
to two or three times this declivity at other points. The degree of 
inclination of these beds, together with the evidences of intense dis- 
turbance visible in every section through the coal bearing part of the 
series, makes it evident that they could not have been laid down in 
their present position. The presumption always is that coal beds have 


1871.]- 115 [Shaler, 


been deposited in the form of swamp accumulations, and thus must 
have been laid down upon horizontal surfaces. There is every reason 
to suppose that the present condition and arrangement of the materials 
in the Dismal Swamp on the eastern side of the Richmond ridge exactly 
correspond to what was to be found in the region now occupied by the 
coal field we are considering, at the time when the vegetable matter 
of which it is composed was in the state of formation. Thus we have, 
on either side of a low dividing ridge, two basins of nearly equal size 
and comparable forms, the one holding vegetable matter, which has not 
yet been converted to coal, the other showing us an advanced state 
in this process of conversion. I know no other point where the pro- 
cess and the product. of forming coal are shown so well together. 

It is evident that if we could determine with accuracy the age of 
the beds which embrace the Richmond coal, we should thereby fix 
the most remote time at which this mass of the disturbing ridge had 
been uplifted. It was long ago perceived that the Richmond coal 
was not of the same age as the more extensive beds which lhe to the 
westward. As yet the precise period to which it is to be referred is 
not yet determined. The first determinations of a trustworthy char- 
acter assigned a Liassic age to the fossil plants found in the coal beds. 
Although these determinations have sometimes been called in ques- 
tion, no naturalist has ever yet assigned a time earlier than the Trias- 
sic period as the age when these beds were formed. Accepting these 
determinations, and of their trustworthy character there seems no 
occasion for doubt, we must conclude that the East Virginia uplift 
dates sometime later than the formation of the Alleghanies, provided 
the general opinion among geologists, which refers the elevation of 
that chain to the close of the carboniferous period, should be accepted 
as correct. 

This is conclusive that two axes of elevation, coinciding in eleva- 
tion very closely, yet of different age, is not in accordance with 
some of the views which were advanced by M. Elie de Beaumont, 
and for many years have had a singular influence upon the minds of 
geologists. The principal point in the theory of M. de Beaumont 
was that all chains, elevated at the same time, stand in a parallel 
relation to each other, even though they might be a hemisphere apart. 
In the same connection it was held that all the elements of the same 
chain, standing to each other in the sort of relation in which the sep- 
erate elements of the Appalachian system stand to each other, were 
uplifted at the same time. The extraordinary ability with which the 


Shaler.] 116 [February 1, 


arguments were presented, rather than the number of well-ascertained 
facts which were adduced to support the theory, caused most geol- 
ogists to give it their ready adherence. ‘The criticisms of Mr. Charles 
Hopkins, together with more extensive and careful study of mountain 
chains, have caused a great decline in the estimation of this theory, 
so that we may not now fear to run counter to a generally accepted 
opinion in venturing to oppose M. de Beaumont’s views. 

In a subsequent report I hope to embody the result of some obser- 
vations made upon the western flanks of the Alleghanies, showing the 
existence, in a position about as far west of their centre as the Rich- 
mond axis is east of that point, of a mountain range, which, though 
formed Jong anterior to the elevation of the principal mass of the 
Appalachian chain, is still parallel to it, may in fact be regarded 
as the first step towards the formation of that singular mountain 
system. 

Geologists have long known that the city of Cincinnati rests upon 
an elevation of the silurian rocks of the Ohio valley, the beds dipping 
gently away from that point. It has been always assumed that the 
dip was uniform in every direction, giving a true dome character to 
that elevation. Careful study of the region, however, has convinced 
me that the elevation is not a dome, but has a north-east by north, 
and a south-west by south trend, and extends as far as a similar ele- 
vation of the silurian rocks, which is found in western ‘Tennessee, 
which elevation is, in fact, only the southern extremity of the Cin- 
cinnati axis. The direction of the line connecting these isolated 
patches of silurian rocks almost precisely coincides with the general 
trend of the Appalachian chain to the eastward. There are many 
reasons for believing that this Cincinnati axis was lifted above the sea 
early in the silurian period. The presence of considerable quantities 
of salt in the rocks of lower silurian age which flank this ridge, the 
existence of ancient beach marks in the rocks of the same age, and 
other phenomena, which cannot be properly discussed here, all point 
to the conclusion that this ridge was formed at a time when the silu- 
rian period had just begun, and while a large part, if not the whole, 
of what is now the highest part of the Alleghanies was still beneath 
the level of the sea. The existence of ridges of widely different ages 
on either side of the Appalachian chain, makes it questionable 
whether the central mass of that system is to be all referred to the 
same period as has hitherto been done; whether it may not be rather 
a congeries of elevations dating from periods of various ages, between 


1871.] 117 [Shaler. 


the age which we must assign to the Cincinnati and the Richmond 
axes. 

it would be very important to determine the age of the several 
members of the central part “of the Appalachian chain; as yet we 
_ have no data to make the basis of such a determination, nor do we 
even know the age of the rocks which compose the great mass of the 
chain to the south of the Pennsylvania line. It is quite evident that 
there has been a difference in the character of the movements which 
have produced the upheavals of the section from northern Virginia 
to the southward. ‘To the north of that first-named line the chain is 
characterized by the absence of great faults. ‘These dislocations are 
very frequent in the region to the southward. The existence of the 
hot springs of Virginia is due to the great dislocations of that region. 
The existence of a different class of irregularities in this part of the 
Alleghany chain, points to the conclusion that the conditions of ele- 
vation, and therefore likely the time of upheaval, was different from 
that of the mountains to the northward. 

I am confident that the tertiary rocks which lie to the eastward of 
the Richmond ridge have been so far uplifted by the original or some 
subsequent elevation of this ridge, that they have had given to them 
the additional height which produces the projection of Cape Hatteras. 
Along the shore of the main land from Newhbern, N. C., to Washing- 
ton, at the mouth of the Roanoke, the hard, shelly limestone of the 
Tertiary period, looking much like the shell bed which is found near 
Charleston, S. C., comes to the surface just above high tide mark, 
and seems to be the principal barrier to the encroachment of the sea. 
At most points this shell bed is covered to the depth of several feet 
by an accumulation of vegetable mould, but before the last subsidence 
of this shore began it probably stood several feet higher. The dip 
of these beds is so slight that it is impossible to obtain any distinct 
indications of the slope. The relation of the beds is, therefore, to a 
certain extent, inferential. 

We have determined that the Richmond axis must have been elevated 
since the close of the Paleozoic time. But we have found no reason 
to conclude that it must have been uplifted at or near that period in 
the earth’s history. Iam inclined to think that the only satisfactory 
evidence concerning the period at which this uplift occurred must be 
sought for at a point remote from this part of the coast, though closeiy 
connected with it geologically. The belt of rocks of a Triassic or 
Liassic age, to which the Richmond coal-field belongs, continues along 


Shaler.] 118 | wh) [February 1, 


the foot of the Alleghany chain all the way from North Carolina to 
Vermont. Throughout this line it is more or less disturbed by dislo- 
cations, the directions of which coincide quite closely with that of the 
Richmond ridge and the faults of the*coal-field just west of it. In 
Massachusetts these dislocations are distinctly seen in the great faults 
of the Connecticut valley which have given us the ridges of the 
Mounts Tom and Holyoke range, the Greenfield trap ridge, and 
many other similar reliefs. 

If we could assume that these dislocations, which have cut up the 


Connecticut equivalents of the Richmond beds, were produced at the 1 
same time as the uplift of the Richmond axes, or the faults of its coal | 


basin, we should be near the determination of the age of these dis- 
turbances. 

The Connecticut river system of dislocation seems to be continued 
in parallel disturbances to the eastward, as far as Martha’s Vineyard, 
the principal faults and folds of which have a north, south, and south- 
west trend. On this island the disturbances have upheaved beds of 
the Miocene age, so that we are led.to suspect, on good grounds, that 
the whole system of north-west and south-west breaks, so extremely 
developed between this point and the foot of the Berkshire hills, are 
of this recent age. The recent look of the Connecticut valley dislo- 
cations, upon which the erosion which has always been active in this 
region has acted to a very slight extent, seems to corroborate this 
view; but it would be hazardous to say that the Virginia dislocations, 
which cut rocks of the same formation, and have near the same 
course, are to be regarded as of the same age. All that these corres- 
pondences can be regarded as establishing, is the probability of such 
a relation of age, a probability which must be carefully weighed with 
the other evidence before we can give it much weight. These Vir- 
ginia dislocations have undoubtedly been much more eroded than 
those of Massachusetts, inasmuch as despite the powerful disturbance 
produced by the elevation of the Richmond axis, and the great faults 
of the coal basin, the region in which they occur is nearly level. 
There is reason to believe that the sea has worked more constantly 
against the reliefs produced by these dislocations than upon those of 
Massachusetts, which have probably never been subjected to the pow- 
erful erosion of the oceanic waves. Unless we can attribute the dis- 
appearance of all these irregularities of surface to some such differ- 
ence of conditions, we must certainly assign to them a much earlier 
period of uplift. Taking the facts altogether, it seems reasonable to 


\ 


1871.) 119 [Shaler, 


conclude that the uplift took place after the tertiary series of rocks 
began to be laid down, and that the disturbance in the tertiary beds 
at Hatteras and Martha’s Vineyard occurred during the same period 
of upheaval. It is not improbable also, that the whole of the disturb- 
ances of the Richmond axis did not take place at the same time, but 
at successive times, during two or more geological periods. 


CHANGES OF LEVEL OF THE HATTERAS COAST. 


There is a change in the character of the surface of the country, as 
we pass southward from Petersburg. North of that point everything 
seems to indicate that the topography is the product of many thou- 
sand years of aerial erosion. As we go southward, the evidences of 
the atmospheric action grow steadily less and less manifest. At Goulds- 
boro’ the streams seem to have had little to do with shaping the 
_ surface of the country. Their basins have but a slight slope towards 
the channel. But what topography there is seems to be entirely the 
result of river action in its broadest sense. The slopes are all those 
normal in river systems, though very slight. In the section from 
Gouldsboro’ to Newbern, we observe, however, some decided pecu- 
liarities. Soon after passing the first-named place, on our way to the 
coast, there is an apparent diminution of height, and a gradual 
change of topography. The long, low ridges could not well have 
been formed by subaerial erosion. They do not lie normally to the 
course of the streams. I am satisfied that the topography is of sub- 
marine origin, as is that of the South Carolina coast above the Sea 
Islands. The long winrow-like ridges are, in shape, like those now 
found along many of the shoal, tide swept sea floors of our coast. The 
drainage seems to have found its way around these low reliefs when 
the country became uplifted, without changing them much. Gener- 
ally the streams find their way around and between the ridges, rarely 
cutting them across. The behavior of the streams among these undu- 
tits reminds one very much of the way in which the streams in the 
Alleghany system cut their way across the series of ridges of that 
mountain region. 

There is reason to believe that the subsidence of the land in this 
region is still going on, and that since the last considerable uplift 
there has been a sinking, amounting to several feet, at least. There 
are a variety of facts tending to support this conclusion, which are well 
established by the observations made since the settlement of the coun- 
try. At Charleston, S. C., the phosphate bed which, at a point six 


Shaler.] 120 [February 1, 


miles to the west of that city, is at the surface of the ground, is de- 
pressed to a depth of seventy-five feet, as was demonstrated by the 
section made by the artesian well at that point. The existence of a 
continued submergence at this point of our shore is a matter of great 
economic, as well as scientific importance. As no part of the east- 
ernmost one hundred miles of the State can be submerged to the 
depth of fifty feet without either becoming covered by the sea, or so 
liable to overflow as to be useless for cultivation, it follows that a 
sinking of a few feet a century is a matter of great concern to those 
who would anticipate the future of this part of our national area. 

It is a well ascertained fact that a rise in the whole shore line from 
New York to Greenland has taken place since the close of the glacial 
period. This movement has most likely taken place in connection 
with the removal of the glacial sheet which, for some as yet unex- 
plained reason, seems to have brought about a subsidence proportion- 
ate to the depth of the icy accumulation. It seems not at all unlikely 
that coincident with this re-elevation of the northern coast, there 
began a subsidence in the southern part of the Atlantic shore of the 
United States. It is certain that from New York southward to 
Charleston, there are, from point to point, indications of subsidence 
of a date about as recent as the elevation to the north of that point. 

The form of the debouchures of the rivers which empty along this 
part of the coast, giving us the broad waters known as Albemarle 
and Pamplico Sounds, is not readily explained. Unlike the greater 
inlets of the Delaware and the Chesapeake on the north, these estua- 
ries do not seem to have been formed by ice action. ‘They are far 
shallower than those bays, and do not, like them, extend all the way 
from the shore to the hard rocks and high lands of the interior. It 
would be difficult to suppose that glacial action could have excavated 
their mouths and not cut out the upper part of their courses deeper 
than we find them to be. JI am inclined to think that they have been 
formed much in the fashion of the estuary known as the Broad River 
in South Carolina. A river carrying comparatively little sediment, 
and thus having a small delta-forming power, has had its mouth grad- 
ually depressed by the sinking of the shore, and has thus naturally 
formed an estuary as wide as that part of the valley which was sub- 
merged. 

It seems likely that at the time when the beds of these streams 
were first thus depressed the barrier of the Hatteras reefs had not 
been raised above the sea, and that the run of the tides in these 


1871.] 121 (Niles. | 


bays was far greater than at present. This would have contributed 
to cut away their shores of incoherent sand, and thus increase their 
width. If we examine the shores of Pamplico and Albemarle Sounds 
we find a tolerably regular correspondence between the direction of 
the major axis of the narrow bays and inlets which lead off the 
large sounds, and the course of the prevalent winds, showing a ten- 
dency to elongate in the direction of the run of the waves. This | 
shows how far the development of the irregularities of this shore may 
be dependent upon the wear of the water currents. 

Although my investigations of the geology of this part of our 
coast was carried on under great disadvantages, from the fact that 
deep snows covered the surface, and made detailed geological work 
impossible, yet there are some points in the economy of the subject 
upon which some information was gained. To the people of this 
region it is of great importance to determine whether the phosphate 
marls exist beneath their soil as in the coast region of South Caro- 
lina. I have not yet succeeded in finding the nodular phosphates in 
the Pamplico region. There can be no doubt, however, that the 
similarity in the geclogical structure of the country points to the 
probability of finding these valuable deposits in some parts of the 
shore region. A careful exploration of all the localities where there 
is a probability of finding the oe should be undertaken at 
the earliest opportunity. 


Mr. J. B. Perry said, in regard to the Syenite underlying 
the coal, that there is no evidence of intrusion. The Syen- 
ite was in existence before the coal was laid down. 


Mr. W. H. Niles remarked that the question which Prof. 
Shaler had discussed was one of great interest, and he con- 
sidered his view consistent with all the physical features of 
our eastern coast. The deepest portion of the sea-bed lies 
opposite mountains, showing a parallelism between the At- 
lantic valley and the Appalachian System. The Cincinnati 
axis he thought instructive, because showing that all parallel 
chains were not raised at the same time. The long terrace 
of the Atlantic plain forms another parallel. The deposi- 


1This paper is from a report on the geological history of Cape Hatteras, published 
by permission of Prof. B. Pierce, Superintendent of the U. S. Coast Survey. 


Hyatt.} 122 [February I, | 


tions are parallel with the mountain chains. He accepted 
Prof. Shaler’s explanation of the elevation and depression of 
land in connection with water deposition. 

He also showed that from the earliest time, in the Nan. 
dacks, and at different points southerly, there had been 
peninsulas corresponding in position to Florida, which is the 
most southern and latest. 


Prof. A. Hyatt said, beside the general westerly and 
easterly motion described by Prof. Shaler, there were eviden- 
ces of a motion transverse to this along the coast. 


Thus the north of Greenland, as shown by various Arctic explora- 
tions, has beaches recently elevated, and historical records, as well as 
direct observations, have proved that the southern portions of this 
peninsula are sinking. Dr. Packard’s observations in Labrador give | 
the evidence of a comparatively recent elevation, perhaps still in 
progress. Farther south, at the Mingan Islands, the speaker had 
observed a remarkable series of beaches, the lower still remaining 
near high water mark. On the island of Anticosta the remains of 
fresh water shells were found, evidently killed by the encroachments _ 
of the sea into the mouth of an ‘estuary or brook, where the water 
had previously been fresh. There are two series of cliffs, stretching 
around the southern shore of this island, each about fifty feet high. — 
The present level of high tide, however, now reaches to the foot of 
the inner line of cliffs, burying the crest of the outer line, which is — 
only bare at low water. The shores of Nova Scotia, according to the 
observations of Hind, Gesner and Dawson, are sinking; those of 
New Brunswick and Eastern Maine rising. The shores of Western 
Maine, as shown by Dr. A. S. Packard, Dr. C. T. Jackson, and 
others, are rising. At Marblehead Neck, and along the Beverly 
shore, the speaker has observed several marks of recent elevation in 
beaches at the height of from eight to ten feet above high water 
mark. 

The submarine forests of Holmes’ Hole and Nantucket, described 
by Hitchcock, appear to indicate the beginning of another grand 
wave of subsidence. Observations made by the Coast Survey show 
that the coast of Long Island Sound, and southward in New Jersey, 
is sinking. The formation of Florida Keys on the other hand, ac- 


' 


1871.) 128 (Dall, 


cording to Agassiz, again evinces the action of elevating forces. 
These and other facts, which investigation would readily establish, 
prove that a series, or perhaps many series, of more or less local 
waves of elevation and depression run down the coast at right 
angles to the direction of the great waves which created the Appala- 
chian folds. 


Section of Microscopy. Feb. 8, 1871. 
Mr. E. Bicknell in the chair. Seven members present. 


The Recording Secretary being absent, on motion of Mr. 
W. F. Whitney, Mr. A. H. Tuttle was appointed Secretary 
pro tem. 


Mr. Chas. K. Stevens and Dr. Geo. B. Harriman were 
elected members of the Section. 


The Chairman called attention to photographs of Amphi- 
pleura pellucida and Surrirella gemma, taken by Dr. Wood- 
ward, of the Army Medical Museum, and exhibited by Mr. 
Chas. Stodder. 


Mr. A. H. Tuttle made some remarks on the fissiparous re- 
production of Stentor, with reference to the direction of the 
plane of fission in Stentor, and in other ciliate infusoria. 


Feb. 15, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Thirty-eight persons present. 
The Secretary read the following paper : 
On THE RELATIONS OF THE CLAss Bracuiopopa. By W. 
H. Datu, WasHineTon, D. C. 


Having received a report, presumably correct, of some remarks by 
Mr. E. S. Morse in relation to my views of the relations of this class, 


oe 


Dall.] 124 [February 15, | 


at a recent meeting of the Society, it would seem desirable to cor- 
rect some erroneous inferences contained therein, and still further 
explain some disputed points from my own point of view. 

Mr. Morse seems to think that I have not acted impartially in 
omitting to notice in my comparisons ‘‘nearly every point brought 
forward to prove the Annelidan character of the Brachiopods” and 
instances “the dorsal and ventral plates, the serial arrangement of 
sete and gill lamine, the bilobed lophophore, the cephalic collar, the 
thin and muscular visceral walls, the composition of the shell of Lin- 
gula, the cecal prolongations of the mantle, and the presence of 
one or more pairs of segmental organs in form, character, and func- 
tion like the segmental organs of the annelids.” 

In regard to this, it was distinctly stated that in the comparisons 
which I undertook, I included characters of high structural value 
alone, such as are almost universally acknowledged to be so by the 
1raturalists of the present day, and not trivial characters peculiar to 
small groups, and due to adaptation and special development. This 
is a general answer, and I believe a sufficient one to Mr. Morse’s 
criticisms, but I would add the following remarks to further explain 
the circumstances. All the so-called Annelidan characters brought 
forward by Mr. Morse in his published remarks on the subject, ap- 
pear to me to be due to a series of extremely defective and entirely 
unproved homologies, which require much more evidence than has 
yet been brought forward, to confirm them. 

That dorsal and ventral plates, serial arrangement of sete and 
gills (other than such’ as exist in Patella), and segmented organs of 
any kind exist in the Brachiopods, remains to be proved; and as yet 
no evidence has been brought forward to sustain any such hypothesis. 
Such assertions must be supported by facts to render them worthy of 
notice and none have yet been adduced. Isubmit that such a state- 
ment as ‘‘one pair of segmental organs” in the absence of other seg- 
ments with similar organs, is a contradiction in terms. Again, stria- 
ted muscular fibre is not a characteristic of any group as distin- 
guished from any other, according to Lebert, the best authority on 
the subject, and is, moreover, present in all classes of Mollusks, ex- 
cept the Cephalopod, where it may yet be found. 

Mr. Morse complains that I have accepted Clark’s definition of the 
Mollusca which includes the Tunicata, Polyzoa and Brachiopoda. If 
Clark’s definition includes them by their principal structural charac- 
ters, as I believe it does, it remains for Mr. Morse to give us a defini- 


1871.] 125 [Dall. 


tion, equally good, which shall include the Brachiopods with the An- 
nelids Tunicata and Polyzoa as opposed to the typical Mollusks. 
_ This he has yet failed to do. 

Mr. Morse seems to think that I have omitted the unisegmental 
‘“vermes” in my comparison. 1 have not considered ,“‘segmenta- 
tion,” as properly understood, as a character at all. Segmentation 
is merely an adjunct, and the successive repetition of organs occurs 
without it, throughout the worms. The sete of Brachiopods, some- 
times entirely absent, are not arranged in successive series as are the 
‘setee of worms. Furthermore, I have expressly avoided drawing any 
homology between the peduncle of Lingula and the siphon of Mya, 
but have pointed out that the histological structure of the two being 
identical it affords no basis for homologizing the peduncle of Brachio- 
pods alone with any Annelidan organ. Nor have I stated or inferred 
anywhere, that the position of the sete in Brachiopods prevents 
their identity in structure with those of Annelids, but I have proved 
that their structure is by no means identical, and any homology 
drawn from them is therefore erroneous. 

I am at a loss to know the basis of the remark that I believe all 
Chetopods have sete from head to tail, and trust that the inferences 
which Mr. Morse has drawn from certain supposed characters of 
Brachiopods are less erroneous than those which my paper appears to 
have afforded him. 

In regard to Chitons, admitted to be Mollusks, though a very aber- 
rant group, I have shown that their aberrancies are in some points 
similar to those of the Brachiopods, and therefore should not be 
taken in either as proofs that either group is non-Molluscan. Such 
homologies would afford a much more powerful argument for placing 
the Tunicates among the Vertebrates than any yet brought forward 
by Mr. Morse for placing the Brachiopods with the Worms. 

Leuckhart, Gegenbaur and Heckel, have, it is true, placed the 
Polyzoa and Tunicata among the ‘‘Vermes,’’ but their views have 
not been adopted by naturalists, and proceed, as in my opinion do 
those of Mr. Morse, from a magnifying of certain unimportant char- 
acters and the overlooking of truly valid details of structure. 
Proofs have not been afforded of either view; when they are, it will 
be time to combat them. 

With regard to the embryology of the Polyzoa, Tunicata and 
Brachiopoda it must be remembered that they differ among them- 
selves in this regard, as widely as do any of the higher subkingdoms, 


Brigham. ] 126 [February 15, 


and also that our classifications are to be drawn from the mature 
characteristics and not from embryology alone, which would, if taken 
by itself, throw the study of all low forms into confusion. 

In conclusion I would say, that, while adhering to the views enter- 
tained by the most eminent naturalists of the present day, I am by 
no means unwilling to modify my opinions when good cause is shown; 
but I cannot do so on vague and unproved statements, doubtful 
homologies, or supposed identity of trivial points of structure. 

I look forward, as others do, to the publication of Mr. Morse’s re- 
searches, with the greatest interest; and trust that the essential 
points of my arguments, which he jag not a so far to refute 
or even to allude to, will be met with all the facts in his possession. 

Truth will infallibly be established through such discussion, which 
is the final aim of all, and which will endure after the discussions are 
forgotten. While Allman, who has made a life-long study of the 
Polyzoa, finds the most intimate homologies between them and the 
Lamellibranchs, and Kovalevsky and’ Heckel show the strongest em- 
bryological affinity between the Tunicates and Vertebrates, we may 
well pause in our speculations and more profitably devote ourselves 
to active research. Facts brought forward are immutable, while hy- 
potheses and inferences depend on the individual eee and in 
many cases have the most fleeting duration. | 


Mr. Wm. T. Brigham described the system of volcanoes in 
Mexico, which he said was arranged in a line between the 
West Indies and Hawaiian Islands. He referred to the geo- 


graphical position of Orizaba, near Vera Cruz, which has re- _ 


cently been active. The first eruption took place in 1456-7. 
In 1569, another occurred, throwing up immense columns of 
ashes and boulders, which now resemble those that have been 
subjected to glacial action. It has since been quiet until last 
year, when it was again active, causing much destruction. 
In March, 1870, Ceborujo was in a state of activity. He 
read an interesting account of this eruption, showing its ef- 
fects upon the magnetic needle. He next referred to the 
well known voleano Jorullo. In reply to a question from Dr. 
C. T. Jackson, he said that fishes six or eight inches in length 
had been taken from subterranean lakes in the vicinity of 


1871.] 1 ait [Shaler. 


Carguairazo, one of the Andes. Some of these lakes con- 
tain beds of diatoms twelve feet in thickness. He also made 
‘a brief reference to the multitude of extinct volcanoes in 
the vicinity of Ceborujo. 


Dr. Charles Pickering, referring to an observation made by 
Dr. Jackson at the preceding meeting, to the effect that the 
central heat held water on the surface of the globe, said he 
had seen this exemplified on a small scale at Hawaii. All 
the water there is distilled by the heat below, condensed by 
the vegetation and collected in pools, from which the supplies 
were taken. Immediately after an eruption, when he visited 
the volcano, the crater was empty. He could detect no 
steam or vapor in the fields of lava. There rises from the 
lava a kind of smoke, which is very conspicuous. He could 
not say what it was, but thought it was not vapor. The 
winds there always blowing in one direction, he had visited 
the regions to leeward of the volcano and found quantities 
of “Pele’s hair” in rolls. The eruption of Kilauea, he said, 
differs in some respects from that of Mauna Loa. In the 
latter, the lava breaking out eight or ten miles from the sum- 
mit, flows eighty or ninety miles to the sea. The ascent of 
Kilauea is so gradual that it is difficult for one ascending to . 
its summit to appreciate its altitude. The great crater does 
not overflow, but when -full splits the island, opening a way 
for the lava thirty miles to the sea. 


Mr. Brigham, referring to the opinion that water was neces- 
sary to an eruption, said, that with the ocean all around it, 
the vapor from this volcano is always dry. It is blown down 
toward the sea and its moisture, if it contained any, would be 
deposited, but the region over which it passes is dry and bar- 
ren. He found it necessary to wear a wet cloth over his face 
to protect respiration while passing through it, and it was 
quickly dried. It is mixed with sulphur, but what gives its 
occasional black appearance, he could not say. The rocks 


Shaler.] 128 [February 15, | 


are so porous that water runs through them as it does 
through sand. The natives are obliged to place calabashes 
to catch the rain. Water which is filtered through the roofs 
of the caverns is perfectly pure. | 


Dr. Chas. T. Jackson referred to Etna as another instance 
of a volcano which does not overflow its crater. The lava 
breaks its way down by Monte Rosa. The openings of the era- 
ter of the volcano on the Island of Ischia also, is not at the 
summit but on the side of the mountain, and at Stromboli, 
visitors can stand on a table rock above the crater, while ex- 
plosions are taking place every minute. 


Mr. W. H. Niles spoke of an examination recently made 
by him of a quarry of the sandstone series at Montague, and 
referred to the extremely large size of the conglomerate 
pebbles found in that vicinity. He also exhibited specimens 
to illustrate the lateral change in a bed of conglomerate, at 
the Chestnut Hill Reservoir, Brighton, Mass. He showed 
pebbles of quartz, or of quartzose rock, from the conglomer- 
ate, which were from two to five inches in diameter, and not 
larger than many others there; only fifty-eight feet from these 
pebbles when in the rock, the same stratum was entirely 
a fine argillaceous slate, a specimen of which was shown. 
Also specimens of the intermediate rock were used to illus- 
trate the nature of the change. 


Dr. Pickering said that the conglomerate appears in almost 
every part of the globe. He had found it in the Pacific Is- 
lands, but he had seen it containing boulders, like that de- 
scribed by Prof. Niles; only on the Island of Madeira. In 
regard to the formation of conglomerate, he said we do not 
want the aid of sea or river, but only to conceive of the re- 
cent deposits, which we see about Boston, hardening into 
rock. He had tried in vain to find the conglomerate at Ha- 
Wail; the lava is amorphous and insoluble. 


1871.) 129 [Brewer 


Mr. Brigham said he had found a conglomerate lava in one 
of the Hawaiian islands, containing rounded pebbles, which 
after having been broken, undergo a change in the arrange- 
ment of material. By weathering, they scale off, and on 
splitting them, they show a concentric arrangement, and can 
be peeled off in laminz. 


Dr. Jackson remarked, concerning Mr. Niles’ two speci- 
mens, one of quartzite, the other of argillaceous slate, that 
the former resists, while the latter undergoes disintegration, 
though they lie together. The argillaceous clays consolidate 
around them and form slates. 


“Mr. Niles found the evidence of glacial action on the con- 
glomerate, grinding down the hard and soft rocks to asmooth 
and level surface. 


The President called attention to the perfect cast skin of 
a lizard, prepared by Mr. J. T. Ogden, and presented through 
Mr. R. C. Greenleaf to the Society. It was obtained with 
difficulty while the animal was in the act of swallowing it. 


March 1, 1871. 
The President in the chair. Thirty-eight persons present. 


Dr. Thomas M. Brewer exhibited the egg of the Mooruk, 
Casuarius Bennettii, which the Society had recently pur- 
chased, and read from the Proceedings of the Zoological 
Society of London, an interesting account of this bird, which 
inhabits New Britain, and of its habits in domestication. 
It resembles in some respects the Dinornis. 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 9 NOVEMBER, 1871. 


Sceva.] 130 a [March 1, 


Mr. Geo. Sceva exhibited some Hindoo skulls, and made 
the following remarks : — 


I notice especially the shortness of the upper jaws and the fre- 
quent absence of the third molars. 

The first specimen, from a person of about twenty-three years, had 
fourteen teeth in the upper jaw, all of which were well formed and 


free from any appearance of disease, but no trace of the third molars 
(or wisdom teeth) could be found. ‘The posterior part of the jaw | 
[maxillary tuberosity] presents the same appearance back of the | 
second molars as that of European skulls back of the third molars. | 
In the lower jaw the third molar is wanting on the left side, but | 
is present on the right, its roots being crowded backward and up- | 


ward into the ramus of the jaw. 

In the second specimen (age about thirty years), the third molar 
is wanting on the right side of the upper jaw, and on both sides of 
the lower jaw. A section had been made with a fine saw, so that a 
portion of the bone in both jaws could be removed and the internal 
structure examined, but nothing was shown to indicate that the third 
molars had ever existed. 

In the third specimen —of about the same age as the last — the 
third molars are present but are crowded backward, their crowns 
approaching near the external pterygoid plate; the lower jaw of this 
specimen had not been preserved. 

In the fourth specimen (age about twenty years), the third mo- 
lars are wanting on both sides. In this specimen is shown a 
remarkable displacement of one of the canine teeth. The decid- 
uous canine on the left side, instead of being shed as usual at the age 
of about twelve years, has been retained, and the permanent canine 
is found after cutting away a thin plate of bone, completely in- 
verted, the point of its crown appearing a little below the orbit of 
the eye. No trace, however, of the third molars is found. 

A great displacement of the teeth might often be observed in, 
European skulls, but the cases in which chews had been no develop- 
ment of the dea molars were exceedingly rare. In almost every 
case where a third molar did not appear in its normal position in 
European skulls, it might be found above, or between, the roots of 
the second molar, or in some other part of the jaw. In the lower 
jaw it had been found so far removed as to appear in the upper part 


1871.] 131 [Sceva. 


of the ramus, its crown reaching nearly to the level of the sigmoid 
notch, between the condyle and coronoid process. 

I obtained these Hindoo skulls while in Calcutta, but as I did not 
observe this peculiarity of their dentition until I was preparing to 
leave, I was unable to obtain any information concerning them, 
except that they were found in some burial place where the bodies 
had been partially exposed by jackals. 

I desire to call attention to two Hindoo skulls (Mumbered 141 and 
126) from the Society’s collection, in one of which the third molars 
are absent on both sides. In the other the third molar is wanting 
on the right side, but on the left there is a small tooth with a short, 
conical root, showing no tendency to division, and being less in diam- 
eter than that of the central incisor. . 

I have been informed by Dr. J. B. S. Jackson that the Museum 
of the Boston Society for Medical Improvement contains four | 
Hindoo skulls, in two of which the third molars are wanting. 

From the examinations which I have been able to make, 1 have 
thought that these cases are confined chiefly to one caste, or to some 
particular class of people inhabiting the lower part of Bengal. 

I have examined the dentition of about four hundred European 
skulls, and I believe the cases where the third molars are wanting, 
either wholly, or in part, are less than one per cent., while in the 
class of people to which these East Indian skulls belong, they ap- 
peared to be absent in about fifteen per cent. 

Although this last mentioned proportion could not be found in the 
inhabitants of India generally, and might — owing to the small num- 
ber of skulls now examined — exceed slightly that of any particular 
class, yet I wish to call attention to the subject that it may be further 
investigated by any one having an opportunity for doing so. 


Mr. W. T. Brigham (replying to an inquiry made by Mr. 
Sceva) said that when he visited India a few years ago, he 
_ had heard it reported that the mongous was able to resist the 
effects of the poison of the cobra by eating some kind of 
plant, but the accounts given were so various that nothing 
trustworthy could be obtained. He afterwards inquired of 
scientific men residing in the country concerning the report, 
and was told that they had no reason for believing it. 

Mr. Sceva thought the mistakes which had been so often 


Sceva.] 132 "(March i, 


made in supposing that the mongous could resist the effects _ 
of the cobra’s poison, were easily accounted for. ! 

The mongous, when attacking the cobra, would seize it 
by the neck or throat, and would usually retain its hold for a 
few seconds, at the same time sucking the blood from the 
large vessels in its neck. 

Sometimes the snake and mongous would roll. over to- 
gether several times, and he had known people who were so 
ignorant of the habits and powers of these animals, as to 
suppose that during this time the weak jaws of the cobra 
were holding the mongous, and on seeing the blood about 
its head and mouth, would think that it came from wounds 
on its own body, received from the fangs of the cobra. 

Another mistake was often made in supposing that the 
blood frequently seen on the cobra’s nose comes from a wound 
inflicted there by the mongous. And assuming this to be 
the case, the question was often asked how the mongous 
could bite the cobra’s nose without receiving in return 
wounds’ from the cobra’s fangs. On carefully observing the 
movements of the cobra when snakes and other animals were 
put into its cage, Mr. Sceva had found that it would strike 
at them with its nose without opening its mouth, and in 
many instances the cobra, by striking past them, would bruise 
its nose on the side of the box, or against the wire netting in 
front, causing it to bleed. This had occurred in every case 
he had witnessed of its encounters with the mongous. 

Dr. Fayrer had made the mistake in one of his first ex- 
periments, of thinking the mongous bitten when it was 
struck by the nose of the cobra, and as the mongous did not 
die, his report, published in the Indian Medical Gazette, stat- 
ing that the animal was “bitten,” was regarded by some as 
conclusive evidence that the poison must have entered the 
blood, but could produce no bad effect on it. Dr. Fayrer, 
however, soon discovered that when animals were put into a 
box with a cobra it was very difficult to tell— merely by 
watching the snake’s movements — whether they were bitten 


1871.] 1 33 [Sceva. 


or not; and in nearly all the experiments made afterwards he ~ 
had the animal secured, and the fangs of the snake applied 
to any part of the body required, or the poison taken from 
the snake and injected under the skin with a hypodermic 
syringe. Several experiments were made on the mongous 
by both methods, causing its death in every case. 

‘Dr. Thomas Dwight, Jr., inquired if any one had attempted 
to give any reason for supposing that the mongous enjoyed a 
special immunity from the effects of the cobra poison. 

Mr. Sceva said the habits of the animal were somewhat — 
similar to those of the weasel. He thought no anatomist or 
physiologist would find anything to favor the presumption 
that its blood could withstand the action of cobra poison 
better than that of other animals of its kind, although he 
thought it probable that there might be those who would 
consider the mere fact of the mongous attacking and killing 
the cobra enough to warrant the belief that the animal was 
differently organized from others; and notwithstanding the 
best evidence to the contrary, there were those who still un- 
reasonably believed that the mongous, by eating the cobra’s 
flesh, could resist the action of the poison. 

Dr. C. T. Jackson remarked that many think the hog 
is not affected by the poison of the rattlesnake, as it is 
known to attack and kill the snake. 

Mr. Sceva believed that hogs would attack and kill poison- 
ous snakes in almost every part of the world. He had never 
seen a hog at the commencement of his attack upon a poi- 
sonous snake, but on one occasion he had seen one with 
both fore feet on the snake’s head and neck while he was 
tearing open the body with his teeth. He had met with 
many people in North and South America, and in India, who 
thought that the venom of snakes could not affect the hog, 
but this supposition had been proved by careful experiments 
to be incorrect. In India he had seen a hog bitten by a co- 
bra on the ear and on the inside of the fore leg; the action 
of the poison and the time of its death were shown to be 


Atwood.] . 134 [March 1, 


‘ about the same as in the case of dogs. Mr. Sceva had once | 


travelled with a party of men from the Western States, who 
had provided themselves with two bottles of brandy and a 


bottle of hog’s lard as antidotes for snake bites. They had 
no reason to give for using the lard, except that they thought | 
the snake’s poison could not affect the hog. Mr. Sceva had | 


known several cases of recovery from the bite of the rattle- 
snake in California, where the men had drank freely of 
whiskey and brandy. He did not think the bite of this 


reptile so dangerous in the Northern States and California | 


as in warmer places. 


Dr. Jackson remarked that it is not so dangerous in Cali- | 


fornia as in the States eastward of the Rocky Mountains. 

Mr. Sceva, in reply to an inquiry by Mr. Putnam, said that 
the poison of many of the venomous snakes had been tried, 
both on themselves and on each other, without producing 
death. 

Mr. Putnam mentioned a case in which the rattlesnake bit 
himself several times, and was not injured by its own venom. 

Mr. Sceva mentioned an experiment in which a small 
quantity of blood from a poisoned fowl was injected into the 


Se 


a 


4 
f 
/ 
f 
t 
‘ 

' 


flesh of another, and from the second into the third, death. 


occurring in each case. He thought that the venom of all 
poisonous snakes acts in a similar manner on the blood, al- 
though varying greatly in power. A great deal depends on 
the quantity of poison thrown into the blood. A large and 
vigorous animal might survive the action of a minute 
quantity. 


Capt. N. E. Atwood spoke of the Capelin, Mallotus villo- 
sus, one of the Salmonide. It does not come as far south as 
New England, but is abundant on the coast of Labrador, 
around Newfoundland, in the Straits of Belle Isle, and west- 
ward as far as the Gulf of St. Lawrence, also on the coast of 
Greenland. It resembles the smelt and is a migratory spe- 


1871.] 135 (Putnam. 


cies, as is generally the case with the fishes on the coast of 
Labrador. They come on the coast in great numbers, the 
cod accompanying and feeding upon them, but at first there 
are no females among them. The sexual marks are very 
prominent. The female resembles the common smelt, but 
the male is thicker, with a ridge of villous scales on each 
side, running the entire length of the body. The male is 
harder and better for bait. About a week after the arrival 
of the males, females begin to appear among them, but only 
in the proportion of about one to ten. The males disappear 
after milting, and in about a week the females follow, their 
stay on the coast continuing about three weeks. Some 
stragelers only remain, in such an emaciated condition that 
the cod will not take them. 

He referred also to the disproportion in weight and num- 
ber, in the different sexes of the Halibut. Nine-tenths are 
females, the largest of these weighing about one hundred and 
fifty pounds, while the largest males reach about sixty only. 


Mr. F. W. Putnam mentioned a remarkable case occur- 
ring in a collection of fishes recently received by him, from 
the east coast of Africa. An eel had swallowed a spiny 
Chetodon, of three times its own normal diameter, so that 
the fish appeared as a great lump distending the abdomen 
of the eel. | 


March 15, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Thirty-nine persons present. 


Mr. Edward S. Morse referred to the communication of Mr. 
Wm. H. Dall, “On the Relations of the Brachiopoda,” read 
at the preceding meeting. 


Hyatt.] 136 [March 15, 


He dealt with all the points treated of in Mr. Dall’s communica- | 
tion, by reading, in both cases, Mr. Dall’s first paper and his last | 
communication side by side, and submitting the facts to the Society | 
as to what Mr. Dall really said in his first paper, and the denials to | 
the same in this last communication. As to Mr. Dall’s personal — 
opinions regarding improved homologies, and the doubts expressed 
regarding certain well known structural features of the Brachiopods, 
Mr. Morse would pass them over as the result of haste in discussing 


the question. 


Prof. Hyatt said 


My objections to Mr. Morse’s classification have heretofore rested 
wholly upon the presumed affinities of the Polyzoa and Ascidia. I 
have been led by the similarities of the adult animals of the two 
groups, to partially follow Prof. Allman in his opinion, that these two 
groups are closely related. In a paper on the fresh water Polyzoa 
(Proceedings Essex Institute, Vol. 1v.) I have compared them, but 
at the same time shown that. the differences are much greater be- 
tween the Polyzoa and Ascidia than between the former and Brachi- 
opods. Thus, there is no muscular system in the Ascidia which can 
compare in any sense with that of the Polyzoa; and in transforming 
the Polyzoa into an Ascidian, Prof. Allman is obliged to violate this 
obvious difference, as well as to effect many changes which are not 
consistent with their organization. The nearer affinity of the Poly- 
zoa and Brachiopoda is hardly questionable, since the investigations — 
of Kovalewsky, who has shown us that the young Ascidians are ap- 
parently more like young vertebrata than they are like the young of 
the Polyzoa. The importance and value of the resemblances exist- 
ing between the adult Polyzoon and the adult Ascidian, so far as they 
may be supposed to indicate any close affinity or community of origin, 
are thus doubly denied by the differences of HORE and space both 
in the adults and in the larve. 

The Ascidians are also likely to be removed by these new discov- 
eries, not only entirely away from the Polyzoa, but to an equal or 
greater distance from all the rest of the Mollusca; and even if we 
could, in the face of embryology, still maintain our comparison be- 
tween the two structures, we should be contrasting the Polyzoa, not 
with a typical Mollusk, but with an animal whose own position is 
very uncertain. J can think of no fundamental molluscan character- 
istics, either in the Brachiopods or Polyzoa, which ally them with the 


1871.] 137 (Morse. 


Lamellibranchs (clams), except those which join them still more 
. closely to the Ascidia. Therefore it seems clear, that if we separate 
the Ascidia from the Lamellibranchs, which they so closely resemble 
in their general adult characteristics, on account of their different 
developments, we must also, in turn, divide the Polyzoan Ascidia, 
and should logically regard the similarities of the two as analogies 
arising in different structures, and not as affinities derived from some 
common ancestor. Thus cut off from its quondam molluscan allies, 
our Polyzoon has but one refuge; its development points concisely to 
a vermian ancestor, and to this source we must relegate both it and 
its nearest ally, the Brachiopod. 


Mr. Morse called attention to the fact that Kovalewsky, 
Heckel, Darwin and others had pointed out the relationship 
apparently seen in the embryo of certain Tunicates, and the 
typical idea of the vertebrate embryo. Without expressing 
an opinion for or against this view, it was interesting to re- 
mark that many eminent naturalists had seen reason to in- 
clude the Tunicates with the Vermes; and in the supposed 
relation, on the other hand, of the Tunicates with the Verte- 
brates, it was interesting to recall two prominent features of 
the Vermes that are likewise prominent characters of the 
Vertebrates, namely: hairs or sete secreted by follicles, and 
genitals in pairs, with infundibuliform orifices, suspended 
freely in the perivisceral cavity. 


Dr. 8. Kneeland gave an account of a trip which he made 
in 1870, by sea, from San Francisco to Panama, and pre- 
sented a few specimens which he had collected. He de- 
scribed the climate, the general appearance of the coast, and 
incidents of the voyage, and referred to the habits of some 
of the sea birds and of the flying-fish. 


Large petrels (Puffinus cinereus) began to appear, and followed us 
on the second day out. On alighting in the water, which they often 
do, they put forward their webbed feet, checking their headway in 
this manner, backing water, as it were, with the wings spread, before 
settling on the surface. They came round and near the steamer in 


Kueeland.] 1 5 8 : [March 13, 


considerable numbers, but never alighted on it, as the booby of the | 
Atlantic does. On account of the great length of their wings and . 
the shortness of their legs, they cannot rise, like the gulls, directly 
from the water, but are obliged to run along the surface like the 
smaller petrels, beating the water with their feet until sufficientiy 
elevated to use their wings. 

Flying-fish also appeared, but were neither so numerous nor so 
large as in the Southern Atlantic. The ventrals were expanded 
like the pectorals in the act of flight, the former being much the 
smaller. They rose out of a perfectly smooth sea, showing that they 
are not mere skippers from the top of one wave to another; they 
could be seen to change their course, as well as to rise and fall, not 
unfrequently touching the longer, lower lobe of the tail to the surface, 
and again rising, as if they used the tail as a powerful spring. 
While the ventrals may have acted chiefly as a parachute, it seemed 
that the pectorals performed, by their almost imperceptible but rapid 
vibrations, the function of true flight.° Another reason which leads 
me to think they perform a true flight, is the way in which they reén- 
ter the water. After reaching the end of their aerial course, they drop 
into the water with a splash, instead of making a gradual and gentle 
descent, like the flying-squirrel, flying-dragon, and other vertebrates 
with membranes acting as parachutes. The drying of the flying 
membrane in the air would prevent the small but numerous motions 
necessary for true flight, and the animal therefore suddenly drops 
when the membrane becomes stiff. I do not see how the drying of 
the pectorals would affect their action as parachutes. 

At the same time were seen small Portuguese men-of-war (Physa- 
lia) no larger than an olive, and without the purple reflections 
of the larger ones, so often met with in the Atlantic. Whether these 
were the young, or full-grown individuals, I do not know. I saw 
none larger than these, and they were not numerous. 

As we approached the coast off the Gulf of California, the. petrels 
lefé us, and were replaced in an hour or two by white gulls, about 
the size of Bonaparte’s gull, but either entirely white, or with a very 
slight lavender-blue tinge on the back and wings. These had an 
entirely different way of alighting and rising from the water; they 
did not push forward their feet to arrest their course, but circled — 
round like pigeons until their headway was stopped, then quietly 
settled upon the water, immediately folding their wings. They also 


1871.] 139 | [Perry. 


rose directly from the surface without running along, as the larger- 
winged petrels did. 


Dr. Kneeland also presented to the Society some specimens 
of copper ore from Chili, and beautiful green beetles worn 
as ornaments by the Brazilian ladies. 


Rey. J. B. Perry conjectured that some of the so-called 
Scolitht in the Potsdam may be the peduncles of the 
Brachiopods. In confirmation of this he remarked that 
Brachiopods are found in considerable abundance in many of 
the primordial rocks. He also added that the probable 
traces of worms occur, not only in the Potsdam, but also in 
rocks of much greater age. What appear to be worm-bur- 
rows are found in rocks in Vermont, at least twenty-five 
thousand feet below the Potsdam sandstone. They, and 
other traces of worms, are said to occur in the oldest fossilif- 
erous rocks in England and Ireland, namely, in the Long- 
mynd rocks and several of the overlying primordial forma- 
tions. 

Mr. Morse said it might seem singular that in the Potsdam 
we should not find the shells, if these cases are the peduncles. 
This, however, is readily accounted for on the ground that 
the sandstone is not favorable to the preservation of organic 
remains. 

Prof. Hyatt said Mr. Billings thought these cases were 
masses of sponge, on account of the presence of spicule in 
them, but they show themselves to be peduncles, by the 
swelling at the extremity. 


Prof. Hyatt also read a letter from Mr. W. H. Dall, in 
which he presents a valuable specimen of a new Lingula, 
discovered by him, to the Society, with the request that Mr. 
Morse may have an opportunity to study the structure of the 
animal. 


Sanborn. ] 140 [March 22, 


Section of Entomology. March 22, 1871. 
Mr. Edw. Burgess in the chair. Nine members present. 


Mr. F. G. Sanborn exhibited the galls of Cynips quercus- 
tubicola O. S., and C. quercus-lane Fitch, together with 
specimens of the gall-makers and their parasites, all presented 
by Rev. E. C. Bolles, who obtained them in the Cumberland 
Mountains of Alabama. Mr. Sanborn also called the atten- 
tion of the members to several trays of Longicorn Coleoptera 
recently presented by himself and others to the Society’s 
cabinet, and systematically arranged and labelled by Mr. 
Philip 8. Sprague. He also stated that the Society had been 
able to secure the services of this gentleman for an indefinite 
period, in the arrangement and preservation of the insect 
collection. 


Mr. P. S. Sprague mentioned that he had noticed a percep- 
tible power of motion in the antennz of a Pterostichus 
Semoralis, on removing it from alcohol, in which it had been 
kept two years; he alluded to a similar case of motion of the 
antenne in a Staphylinide beetle, recorded by him at a pre- 
vious meeting. Mr. Hollis Thayer had observed similar mo- 
tions in specimens of beetles which had been in alcohol 
several days. 


Mr. Edw. Burgess read an abstract of a letter recently 
received from our associate, Mr. Benj. P. Mann, now in the 
vicinity of Rio Janeiro, Brazil, in which he stated that he 
was engaged in studying the insects attacking the corn, and 
had found several species of Lepidoptera among them, which 
were identical with our northern forms. 


1871. 141 [ Morse. 


April 5, 1871. 


Vice President, Dr. Chas. T. Jackson, in the chair. Thirty- 
nine persons present. 


Rey. Edwin C. Bolles of Salem, Joseph Stone of Charles- 
town, Thomas C. Felton, Walter Ela and W. G. Farlow of 
Cambridge, Richard W. Bender, Sidney E. Sargent, William 
R. Nichols, Fletcher M. Abbott and 8. Dana Hayes of Bos- 
ton, were elected Resident Members. 


Prof. Edward 8. Morse presented the following paper :— 
On THE ADAPTIVE COLORATION OF MOLLUSCA. 


Naturalists have long recognized the curious cases oftentimes oc- 
curring, of the resemblance between the color of an animal and its 
immediate surroundings. It had been supposed that climatic influ- 
ences, or peculiarities of food, or greater or less access to light had 
something to do with these coincidences. Mr. Alfred R. Wallace has 
shown that the varied phases of these phenomena could not be ex- 
plained by such agents, and in a paper “On Mimicry and other pro- 
tective resemblances among Animals,” published in the Westminster 
Review, July, 1867, and since made widely public in his work on ‘‘Nat- 
ural Selection” he shows that the singular resemblances between the 
colors of animals and their surroundings are mainly brought about by 
the protection afforded them through greater concealment. Many 
very interesting examples are then cited from the Vertebrates and 
Articulates in support of these views. Briefly may be mentioned as 
examples, the almost universal sand color of those animals inhabit- 
ing desert tracts; the white color of those animals living amid per- 
petual snows; the resemblance seen again and again between the 
color of many insects and the places they frequent. Among the 
hosts of examples cited by Mr. Wallace as illustrating plainly the 
views he advances, may be mentioned the many species of Cicindela 
or tiger beetle. The common English species, “C. campestris, fre- 
quents grassy banks and is of a beautiful green color, while C. mari- 
tima, which is found only on sandy sea shores, is of a pale bronzy 
yellow, so as to be almost invisible.” He then states that a great 
number of species found by himself in the Malay Archipelago, were 
similarly protected. ‘‘The beautiful Cicindela gloriosa, of a deep 


Morse.] 142 : i [April 5, 


velvety green color, was only taken upon wet mossy stones in the 
bed of a mountain stream, where it was with difficulty detected. A 
large, brown species (C. heros) was found chiefly on dead leaves in 
forest paths; and one which was never seen except on the wet mud 
of salt marshes, was of a glossy olive so exactly the color of the mud 
as only to be distinguished when the sun shone, by its shadow. 
Where the sand beach was coralline and nearly white, I found a very 
pale Cicindela; wherever it was volcanic and black, a dark species of 
the same genus was sure to be met with.’’ 

But little attention has been given to adaptive coloring among the 
lower invertebrate animals. Darwin, in his last work on the “Descent 
of Man’’ calls attention to the statements of Heckel that the transpar- 
ency of the Meduse and other floating animals is protective since 
their glass-like appearance renders them invisible to their enemies, 
though Wallace also alludes to this same feature (p. 258). Mr. 
Edward Burgess informs me of a species of Acaleph, Polyclonia fron- 
dosa, on the coast of Florida, which lives in the mud and is brown in 
color. Darwin while admitting that the transparency of these animals 
unquestionably aids them to escape the notice of their enemies, yet 
doubts whether the color of Mollusks affords similar protection. He 
says, ‘‘The colors do not appear in most cases to be of any use as a pro- 
tection; they are probably the direct result, as in the iower classes, of 
the nature of the tissues, the patterns and sculpture of the shell de- 
pending on its manner of growth.” Vol. 1, p. 316. 

In glancing over our New England Mollusca, however, it seems 
that we do have very clear evidences of protective adaptations 
among them, not only in their form, but more particularly in their 
color. It would seem strange indeed if this were not so since so 
many species of Mollusca form an important portion of the food of 
many fishes, and also of certain species of birds. 


1In an inlet near Salem the writer observed a school of minnows swimming 
along the bottom and as they approached a certain point darting right and left in 
great alarm. For some time the disturbing cause could not befound. On closer 
examination, however, a Cottus was seen to open his large mouth and take in 
several of the little fishes. The Cottus was so perfectly protected by its colors, 
that it was only recognized when the capacious mouth opened, and only then were 
the minnows alarmed. Just beyond in their track was a rusty tin fruit can, the 
little tin remaining on it reflecting the rays of the sun, and from this harmless 
object they all turned affrightedly away. 

In this connection it would be interesting to inquire into the food of fishes in re- 
spect to their colors. Those fishes feeding upon Mollusca would certainly not 
require such protection for concealment as those living upon more active prey. 


1871.] 143 { Morse. 


In a general way we recall the sombre colors of the shells of most 
species, varying through different shades of yellow, brown and green, 
in this respect resembling the sand, mud and rocks, or sea weed in or 
upon which they live, and we then recall by groups the land snails of 
our woods with their almost uniform brown tints, like the dead 
leaves or rotten wood in which they live. 

The fresh water snails have similar shades to match their peculiar 
habitats. 

The fresh water mussels, colored likewise brown, greenish or ee 
accord with their places of refuge. 

Among the marine forms we notice the adaptive coloration of cer- 
tain species very well-marked. The common Littorina of the coast 
swarms on the bladder weed, the bulbous portions of which are olive 
brown in color, or yellowish according to age. The shells of the 
Litiorina found upon it, present in their varieties these two colors 
and are limited to these colors, though now and then delicately 
banded specimens are seen. 

Purpura lapillus, which generally hides beneath overhanging ledges, 
or is concealed under flat rocks, has generally a dirty white shell, with 
now and then a specimen bright yellow, or banded with brown. We 
are not aware of any fish that feeds upon this species, though in 
the almost universal white color of the species an adaptive color may 
be secured in resembling the white barnacles which oftentimes 
whiten the rocks by their numbers. 

In pools left at low tide where the rocks are often clothed with the 
red calcareous alge we find the little red Chiton. Certain Mytili are 
green. The young of the large M. modiolus has a rough coat of 
epidermal filaments looking like the aborescent growth of some Algz 
or Hydroid. 

The few species common to the mud flats exposed by the retreat- 
ing tide are colored black or dark olive. Jlyanassa obsoleta has the 
shell black, while the soft parts are quite dark. A related form, 
Nassa trivittata, lives in more sandy places and has a similarly colored 
shell. Rissoa minuta, inhabiting mud flats, has a shell dark olive, or 
nearly black, while other species of Rissoa are much lighter in color. 
The fronds of the large Laminarian are frequented by Lacuna vincta 
and its variety fusca. ‘The first is greenish or purplish horn color, 
with darker bands, while the variety fusca is uniformly dark brown 
or chestnut; the colors in both cases quite match the Laminarian 
upon which they are found. Another species of the same genus, 


Morse.] 144 ‘ [April 5, 


Lacuna neritoidea, Mr. Fuller has observed spawning on bladder 
weed and its yellowish tinge accords well with its surroundings. 
Margarita helicina I have found in numbers on the large Laminarian 
and on sea weed at low water mark, and its color is decidedly protec- 
tive; while other species of Margarita dredged in deep water on 
shelly ground are whitish, pearly, or red. | 

The protective coloring of certain species is well seen upon stones 
dredged in deep water, the various mollusks adhering to them, closely 
resembling the calcareous alg and the stones themselves. 

Species peculiar to sand beaches are of various sand colored shades, | 
as for example Machera, Mactra, Cochlodesma, Cyprina, the little — 
Solenomya and Solen. On muddy ground we notice certain Tellinas 
and other species with white shells. It has been supposed that those 
species hidden from the light were generally white, and this would 
seem to be the case when we recall Mya, certain species of Teredo, 
Tellina, Pholas, and other species. Yet we do have cases where the 
shell is oftentimes conspicuously banded or marked. It might appear 

‘that in those species living buried in the mud or sand, the shell was 
protected by a very thin epidermal layer, and that this layer was 
eroded, thus exposing the white shell; there are certain species, how- 
ever, living buried in the mud or sand which have an’epidermal coat 
very thick and dark brown or black, such examples are seen in So- 
lenomya borealis and Glycymeris siliqua. 

It has been noticed that the same species occupying different sta- 
tions are differently colored. Dr. A. A. Gould noticed this in regard 
to Astarte castanea; those thrown up from deeper water are darker 
colored than those found in quiet sandy places. In his report on 
the Invertebrate Animals of Massachusetts, first edition, p. 78, speak- 
ing of the shells found in the sandy harbor of Provincetown, he says: 
‘‘The color of all the shells in that harbor is remarkably light.” 

A very evident case of protective coloring is seen in the three spe- 
cies of Crepidula found on our coast. Crepidula fornicata is drab, 
variously rayed and mottled with brown, and it lives attached to 
stones near the roots of the large Laminarian or upon stones clothed 
with alga of similar colors, or attached to the large Mytilus. Cre- 
pidula convexa, a much smaller species, lives on the roots of sea weed. 
Prof. Perkins records its occurrence on the black shell of Ilyanassa 
obsoleta. This Crepidula has a very dark brown shell, according weil 
with the dark color of its various places of lodgement. Crepidula 
plona or unguiformis lives within the apertures of the shells of larger — 


1871.] 145 [Bicknell. 


species of Gasteropods, as Buccinum, Natica, Busycon and others. 
The shell of this Crepidula is absolutely white. 

There are many species that undoubtedly receive protection in al- 
lowing foreign substances to grow upon their shells, and these species, 
oftentimes covered by a dense growth of calcareous or other alge, 
are difficult of detection by the experienced collector. 

There are also certain species that habitually aceumulate foreign 
substances upon their shells. The little Pisedium ferrugineum possibly 
finds greater immunity from danger in its habit of accumulating a fer- 
rugineous deposit on that portion of the shell most conspicuous. Nu- 
cula delphinodonta has likewise a similar habit. ‘The delicate Lyon- 
sia arenosa, with its habit of entangling particles of sand in its epi- 
dermal filaments, undoubtedly finds protection in this peculiarity. 

It was not the intention to go outside of New England species in 
citing these examples, but in this connection I cannot forbear men- 
tioning the tropical genus Phorus. ‘The species are said to frequent 
rough bottoms and to scramble over the ground like the Strombs and 
not to glide evenly. ‘This peculiar manner of moving would render: 
them very conspicuous, and it is eurious to observe that most of the 
species attach foreign substances to the margins of their sheils as they 
grow, so that when a shell has attained its growth it is almost com- 
pletely concealed by fragments of shells large and small, spines of 
Echini, bits of coral and stones. 

These few observations are offered (and they might be multiplied) 
with the belief that if there is any truth in the theory of protective 
coloring as advanced by Wallace, the various colors of Mollusca in. 
‘many cases can be explained, and the occurrence of varieties in color 
are also accounted for by the same theory. 


Mr. Edwin Bicknell remarked that animals in preying 
upon each other were attracted more by the sense of smell 
than that of sight. He had noticed on one occasion, when 
jelly fishes were stranded, that numerous carnivorous snails, 
Lacuna vincta, were seen moving from all points towards: 
them. He thought they could be directed only by a acute 
sense of smell. 

Dr. B. Joy Jeffries called attention to the probability that 
the animals which prey upon those supposed to be pro-. 
tected by want of color, or by being of the color of their 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL, XIV. 10 DECEMBER, 1871. 


Hyatt.] 146 ~ [April 5, 


surroundings, can not perhaps be accorded a power of color | 
perception; and suggested that form and light may govern 
them in hunting for their prey. . He also explained the differ- 
ence between the red eyes of the albinos and others. With 
the opthalmoscope one sees in other eyes the same red reflec- 
tions as in albinos. 


Prof. A. Hyatt alluded to the color of the common Unios, 
or Anodons, as probably protective, and the well known case 
of the Melanias of the Western rivers, which are hardly 
distinguishable by the unpracticed eye, and to the peculiar 
and marked variations of the Siluroid fishes of the same 
region, which agree in color very closely with the ground on 
which they live. 


Mr. Hyatt then continued, however, that he by no means desired to 
endorse the Darwinian doctrine of Natural Selection. A belief in 
evolution and the derivation of all higher forms, from lower and 
simple organisms, perhaps from inorganic matter itself, by means of 
secondary natural forces, is perfectly consistent with opposition to 
the Darwinian theory. . According to this theory, new characteristics 
and therefore new kinds and species of animals arise by the survival 
of the fittest, asin a recent instance cited by the ‘‘ American Natu- 
ralist,” where a new race of deer is supposed to be in course of for- 
mation in the Southern Adirondacs. In this case, certain full grown 
bucks, about thirteen years ago were produced, with short stabbing 
horns like the young deer. These were thus enabled to drive away 
the branching horned forms during the rutting season, and to leave a 
larger number of descendants. These and their descendants, in turn 
enjoying similar advantages are, it is stated, gradually supplanting 
the branching horned deer in the Southern Adirondacs. The facts 
have been disputed and need the confirmation of farther observation 
and experience, but they form, perhaps, one of the best illustrations 
of the theory of natural selection ever recorded. Assuming, how- 
ever, that it is true, and that a new species of deer is now being 
evolved in this region, what does natural selection really account 
for? It must account for the preservation and perpetuation of the 
branching horned variety, as well as the rise of the straight horns. 
The Anoplotherium of the Eocene, which has always been considered 


1871] 147 [Hyatt. 


by Owen and others, as the probable ancestor of the Cervide, had 
no horns even in the adult. The young deer when it is born has 
none, and the process by which they are acquired, takes place subse- 
quently. The general characteristics of the deer’s antler of the 
Miocene and Pliocene were simple, with only one tyne or prong like 
those of the young deer, and the palmate and extensively pronged 
horns were not brought out fully until the Post- -pliocene. To-day, a 
decline seems to be taking place, since neither the reindeer or the 
moose equals the extinct Irish elk in the complexity and size of 
their horns. 

If Darwinism can account for the propagation af this new race by 
the advantage which the short, stabbing horns gives to the bucks, 
how could any branching antlers ever have arisen from the Miocene 
deer. In accordance with the theory of natural or sexual selection, 
the horns should have become longer and sharper and have dropped 
their tynes, thus making them better weapons. 

The reverse has certainly occurred, and antlers developed of extraor- 
dinary size, cumbersome and useless in comparison with the short, 
dagger-like horns of the Miocene deer. According to Darwin’s latest 
modification in his Descent of Man, the increase in the size would be 
accounted for by sexual selection, namely, that the females would se- 
lect the males having the largest horns, and thus the size of the 
horns would be increased in successive generations. If this be the 
explanation, how account for the rise of the short horned variety at 
the present time. Darwin quotes this instance as an example of 
Natural and Sexual Selection, in his last work, ‘The Descent of 
Man” (Vol. 11, p. 248, Am. ed.) 

Presuming, however, that natural selection does account for the 
evolution of the branching horns, and also for the preservation and 
gradual increase in number of the present spike horned bucks (as it 
may be fairly assumed in many instances, to act in the preservation 
and perpetuation of many characteristics), it neither does nor can ac- 
count for the first appearance of horns, nor the first appearance of a 
full grown buck having the spike horns. The inadequacy of the 
theory of natural selection, to show us how characteristics arise, has 
been repeatedly insisted upon by several authors. Prof. Cope and 
the writer, in two widely separated departments, among the Reptiles 
on the one hand, and the Mollusks on the other, have repeatedly 
pointed out the mode in which characteristics, races, species and 
genera have arisen. Several writers on the European continent, and 


Hyatt.] . 148 [April 5, 


St. George Mivart in his Genesis of Species, have lately taken similar 
views. The latter continually alludes to the sudden rise of species or 
races, and gives an instance of the sudden appearance of the black - 
shouldered peacock in a flock of common peacocks. This variety, 
previously known in India as a separate species, speedily increased 
to the extinction of the original form. Here, as St. George Mivart 
points out, under different geographical influences, the same species 
has suddenly arisen in India and in England. No slow changes 
similar to those perpetually cited by Darwin and Wallace, no gradual 
fading of one species into another, but a sudden evolutyon of a new, . 
distinct form. _ 

Mivart too states, that “the view here advocated, regards the 
whole organic world as arising and going forward in one harmonious 
development, similar to that which displays itself in the growth and 
action of each separate individual organism. ‘This apparently is the 
key note of his book.” This was the view advocated by the speaker 
some four years previously, in the Memoirs of the Society, in a paper 
written to establish the fact that all characteristics had arisen sud- 
denly among the Ammonites and Nautili of past geographical epochs. 
This paper was a short preliminary statement of facts observed, and 
it did not excite his surprise that Mivart had overlooked it. He 
could not, however, help wondering at the absolute silence preserved 
with relation to the essay of Prof. Cope, of Philadelphia. This had 
been issued at about the same time and independently, but advo- 
cated nearly the same views as regarded the sudden production of 
characteristics among the Reptiles, and must have been well known 
to Prof. Huxley, with whom Mivart seems to have taken council. 
This omission is by no means creditable to the author of a work writ- 
ten to refute such books as Darwin is in the habit of producing, and 
contrasts unfavorably with that writer’s evident acquaintance with 
the essay alluded to above. This is shown most by the manner in 
which he is obliged to rest the proof of his assertion that species 
arise suddenly, upon a number of isolated facts, whereas either Prof. 
Cope’s paper or the speaker’s, especially the former, would have fur- 
nished him with a number of reliable and serene connected illustra- 
tions of the quick evolution of species. 


Dr. 8. Kneeland presented to the Society specimens of 
deep sea soundings, collected by Lieut. Breck off the Pacific 


coast, in three thousand three hundred fathoms, samples of 
cS] 


1871.] 149 [Kneeland. 


which he had already furnished to Count Pourtales for inves- 
tigation. 


Dr. Kneeland exhibited several specimens of glass, marble and 
hard stones, engraved, carved, and grooved by the action of sand 
driven by a blast of air or steam. The surface being covered by 
perforated paper or a stencil plate, the parts exposed by the perfora- 
tions are cut rapidly and accurately, while the covered parts are un- 
touched, protected, it is supposed, by the elasticity of the paper or 
thin metal. 

He drew attention to this industrial process as illustrating the ad- 
vantage of diffusing, as a common branch of knowledge, information 
on the forces of nature, and, in this instance, on dynamical geology. 
This process, which promises to revolutionize one of the most exten- 
sive of the industrial arts, is simply carrying out what natural forces 
have been doing to the surface rocks of our continent for ages. 

Sands carried by strong and steady winds, passing over rocks, often 
wear them smooth or cover them with grooves and scratches, as no- 
ticed and figured by Mr. Blake, in the granite rocks at San Bernar- 
dino Pass, Cal.: see Pacific R. R. Reports, vol. v, pp. 92 and 231. 
Quartz rocks were there found polished, the softer felspar being cut 
away; where the latter had been protected by garnets, projections 
were left, tipped with the hard garnets, pointing like fingers in the 
direction of the wind. On the surface of the great Colorado desert 
the pebbles are finely polished by the drifting sand, or variously 
grooved, according to the hardness of their substance. Prof. J. 
Wyman also mentions that glass windows on Cape Cod have some- 
times holes worn in them by the drifting sands blown by the winds. 

It is the tendency of modern education to pay less attention to the 
dead languages and to ancient history, as a means of culture, and 
more to the practical and living issues of the day, and especially to 
combine a knowledge of natural phenomena with the elementary in- 
struction of the school room. In this particular instance, it is 
altogether probable that, if the grooving of rocks by the wind-driven 
sands, long known by geologists and physicists, and by them turned 
to no practical account, had been equally well known to our intelli- 
gent and skilful mechanics, the process here illustrated would have 
been invented years ago, and by this time have attained a high de- 
eree of perfection. The same reasoning will apply to other depart- 
ments of natural and physical science, and goes to show the wisdom 


Richards.] 150 [April 5, 


of those educators who are endeavoring to diffuse a knowledge of 
scientific principles and phenomena among the people. 


Mr. L. 8. Richards exhibited a stone taken from the exca- 
vations at Fort Hill, in this city, near Oliver Street, seventy- 
five feet below the surface, which, like the majority of the 
stones taken from the drift near this spot, was covered with 
“ olacial” grooves and scratches. He had also found on the 
southerly side of the locality conglomerate in the process of 
formation without the action of heat. 


On THE RELATIONS oF ANOMIA. By Epwarp S. Morse. 


Under the name Anomia was included Terebratula by the early 
writers. Misled by external appearance, Linneeus, Lamarck and 
others believed Anomia and Terebratula to be closely related. . While 
not the slightest ground existed for bringing them together, yet the 
mere fact of these two animals being enclosed within a living shell 
composed of two pieces, held to the rock by a process which passed 
out through that element of the shell which was undermost in both 
eases, furnished sufficient proof of their relationship to those who 
were ready to judge everything from external appearance. 

The whales among fishes, the barnacles among mollusks, were only 
some of the blunders committed by this superficial way of compari- 
son; and now after the external elements of the Brachiopods are ad- 
mitted by all writers to be dorsal and ventral, while the valves of 
Anomia are right and left, and after the splendid memoir of Lacaze 
Duthier on the anatomy of Anomia! has shown that its nearest rela- 
tions are with the Pectens, etc., there are still some writers who 
vaguely imagine that some sort of relationship exists between the 
two. 

It is refreshing to turn back twenty years and find Forbes 
stating that ‘‘a close examination shows that there is no relationship 
of affinity between them, but only a resemblance through forma’ 
analogy.” 

This brief note is given to verify the correctness of a statement 


‘Organization of Anomia. Aun. Sc. Nat. 1854, 11 series, 5-85. 


1871.] 151 [Morse. 


made by Forbes and Hanley in their standard work on the Brit- 
ish Mollusca, wherein the shelly plug which escapes through the 


sinus of the flat valve to hold the 


animal to its base of attachment 


is compared to a byssus. They 
say “when the very young fry of 
this genus shall have been care- 
fully observed, we believe they 
will be found spinning a byssus, 
which, passing through this sinus, 
fixes the shell in the first instance, 
before a portion of it becomes 
attached, eventually becomes de- 
tached with a part of the ‘adduc- 
tor muscle, and forms the opercu- 
lar process.” + 

They erred only in conceiving 
that the byssus passed through a 
sinus occupying the same position 
as in the adult; this is not so, as 
will be shown presently. 

Lacaze Duthier, after his ex- 
haustive study of the organiza- 
tion of Anomia, refers to these 


Fig. 1. Right or lower valve of 
Anomia, showing notch in ventral pal- 
lial margin, caused by byssus. Diame- 
ter one sixty-fourth inch. 

Vig.2. Lefi or upper valve of Fig. 1. 
Diameter one sixty-fourth inch. 

Fig. 3. Foramen commencing to 
form. The black portion shows pro- 
portions of left valve. 

Fig. 4. Amore advanced stage of 
right valve with foramen almost com- 
pleted. 

Fig.5. Left or upper valve of Fig. 4. 
Diameter one thirty-second of an inch. 

Fig. 6. Showing later stage, with 
foramen completed, and nucleus still 
visible. 


Fig. 1. Fig. 2. 


Fig. 3. 


Fig. 4. 


Fig. 5. 


Fig. 6. 


1 Forbes and Hanley, British Mollusca, Vol. I, p. 828. 


Wore) 152 - [Aprils, | 


statements of Forbes and Hanley, and expresses his belief in their 
correctness, and in describing some peculiar features of asymmetry, 
aptly calls them the Pleuronectes among mollusks. 

In examining some dried sea weed collected by a friend of mine 
during the last week in March, I noticed some very young Anomiz 
clinging to it. Unfortunately nothing but the little dried shells were 
left for examination, but as these presented some exceedingly inter- 
esting points as bearing upon the homology of the plug to the byssus, 
I may be excused for presenting such incomplete observations. The 
specimens were easily detached from the sea weed with the point of 
a knife, without fracturing the shells; they were consequently very 
lightly attached. The smallest specimens examined are quite orbicu- 
lar, the upper, or left valve, is very tumid near the nucleus, the 
lower or right valve is flat and somewhat smaller than the upper 
valve. ‘The foramen, or sinus, is not closed, but opens on the anterior 
border of the shell. The chief point of interest, however, is seen in 
the nucleus, or that portion of the shell first formed when the animal 
was free and roving. This early condition of the shell is distinctly 
marked at the beak in both valves. It is yellowish in color, and marked 
with numerous, very regular concentric lines of growth, while the re- 
maining portion of the shell is colorless or white with irregular lines of 
increment. The nucleus is oblong-oval. The umbones are nearly 
central though nearer the anterior margin,and the shell is more 
globose behind. Both valves of the nucleus appear equally convex, 
and no sign of a sinus or perforation is visible in either valve. On 
the free edge of the right valve, directly under the umbo, a dis- 
tinct notch is seen, the lines of growth indicating it, and showing that 
the edge of the shell is not absorbed to form this notch. It will be 
noticed that this marginal notch appears in that valve which is 
below, and which afterwards presents the opening for the passage of 
the byssal plug. 

The condition of the shell at this time clearly indicates that the 
animal is not only already attached, but has fallen to one side, and 
while in this position has added a few more lines of increment to its 
larval shell, as no sign of this notch is seen on the left or free valve. 
Soon, however, the peculiar and rapid secretion of a different. shell 
growth takes place; the lines of increment are no longer regular, nor 
so conspicuous, and the shelly matter is white. The left valve adds 
concentric layers around its entire margin, not excepting the hinge 
margin. The lower valve appears to grow from its posterior and 


1871.] 153 [Morse, 


lower half, the successive accretions being produced around the 
byssus. This growth for a while seems to take place exclusively 
from the posterior half of the shell limited in front by the byssus, 
and even after this growth has increased to twice the diameter of 
the embryo shell only a slight increase is noticed on its anterior mar- 
gin, this latter addition being slightly reflected. 

The left or upper valve grows more rapidly, so that its margin 
overlaps the right valve at all points. 

As the animal increases in size, the foramen increases also, and its 
earlier boundaries are consequently absorbed. 

It will be seen by reference to the figures that the growth of the 
perforated valve is first posterior and downward, from the posterior 
half of the shell; it then grows forward, avoiding the byssal plug, 
and by successive additions surrounds the byssal plug and ulti- 
mately reaches the umbones of the larval shell, and even beyond 
and behind this region. From these facts it is obvious that at an 
early stage the animal is free, and for a time locomotive; that it has 
an elongate, oval, bivalve shell, with close and regular lines of ac- 
cretion, and that during the latter stage of this growth it becomes at- 
tached by a byssus passing from between the valves as in Mytilus; 
that before the growth of the larval shell is completed, it drops over 
to one side, since one valve only shows the notch upon its margin, 
and that so soon as this growth ceases a new growth takes place, 
looser in texture, and white in color, as above described. In this ex- 
cessive growth of the shell backward it is interesting to note that in 
the Mytilide the growth of the shell is almost entirely posterior, 
leaving the umbones at the extreme anterior portion of the shell. 

It would appear that the larval shell is a true dimyarian and 
its affinities may possibly be quite remote from Ostrea or Pecten. A 
study of the early stages of the last named genera would easily 
remove all doubts upon these points. 


Drs. J. B. 8. Jackson and B. Joy Jeffries, and Messrs. R. 
C. Greenleaf, John Cummings, Jr., and Wm. H. Niles, were - 
elected a Committee of Nomination, to present the names of 
candidates for the officers of the Society for the ensuing year. 


Mr. Sanborn exhibited a valuable donation of alcoholic 
specimens of mammals, birds, fishes, reptiles, mollusks and 
insects from Florida, presented by Mr. Samuel N. Chamber- 


Wilder.] 154 [April 5, 


lain, and called attention to the number of fine specimens of 
both sexes, of the double striped “ walking-stick insect,” the 
Spectrum bivittatum of Say;—a species that had hitherto 
been unrepresented in the Society’s Cabinet. 


The Secretary read a letter from Dr. T. M. Brewer, an- 
nouncing a donation of bird-skins to the Society, from Mr. 
Thure Kumlein of Wisconsin, also a mounted Hrismatura 
dominica, the second specimen known to have been taken in 
this country. 


The following paper was presented : — 


INTERMEMBRAL Homo ocies. By Burt G. Wiper, M. D., 
Professor of Comp. Anat. and Zool., Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. 


INTRODUCTION. 


The general correspondence of the limbs with each other was re- 
cognized by the ancients. The first detailed comparison was made 
by Vicq d’Azyr,in 1774. Since then the subject has received atten- 
tion from nearly all anatomists, and there have come to my notice 
about seventy-five works wherein it is discussed. Of these about one 
half have appeared since 1860, and the number and eminence of their 
aithors give reason for expecting much work to be done in coming 
years upon intermembral homologies. Yet so radical is the present 
difference of opinion among the more earnest workers, and so many 
and profound are the problems involved, that there is little hope of 
its final settlement within the present century. For several years I 
have lost no opportunity of collecting material upon the subject, and 
have announced my intention to devote myself chiefly to its investi- 
gation, in the hope of deciding one great question in homologies ; but 
I had also resolved to publish no more upon the subject until I could 
begin the publication of a series of monographs treating in full of the 
various subdivisions of the question. - My intention has been altered 
by the following circumstances :— 

i. Several recent English writers have regarded the question as 
already decided in their favor, Flower, 66,1 240; Rolleston, 61, 219; 


1 The numbers refer to the bibliographical list at the close of this paper, the 
first number indicating the work, the last the page, and the middle one, when it 
occurs, the volume. 


1871. 155 [ Wilder. 


Humphrey, 72, 68; Mivart, 279, 163, in spite of the published opin- 
ions of Foltz, 39, Wyman, 55, and the writer. They hold that the 
relation of the membra is one of syntropy or parallelism, and that pol- 
lex (thumb) is the homologue of primus (great toe); we hold, on the 
contrary, that the relation of these parts is one of analogy, and that 
the true homologue of pollex is quintus (little toe), and that of min- 
imus (little finger) primus, the membra being antitropically or sym- 
metrically related. 

2. During the past year a new and vigorous ally has entered the 
discussion. Dr. Coues’ admirable papers, 70, have already been 
briefly noticed,! and will be reviewed at more lencth hereafter.? I 
now merely express my gratification and my hope that together, under 
the guidance of our eminent teacher, Professor Wyman, we may be 
able to show that a very small minority may yet be in the right. 

3. Ihave recently been led to modify my previous views respect- 
ing the normal position of the membra in which they should be com- 
pared together, and [am anxious to admit this change since it in- 
volves a concession to those who hold the view of syntropy. 

Still, the present paper is intended mainly as an index of what has 
been done, and of what remains to be done for intermembral homolo- 
gies, and as a prodromus of the works which I hope to offer in coming 
years. 

It will contain : — 


1. An historical sketch of the question. 

2. A revision of the nomenclature of parts. 

3. <A revision of the nomenclature of ideas. 

4. Evidence as to the morphical unimportance of numerical 
composition. 

5. Indication of general problems. 

6. Indication of special problems. 

7. Chronological list of special works upon intermembral homolo- 


8. Alphabetical list of collateral works. 
9. <A glossary of morphological terms. 


1 American Naturalist, April, 1871. 
2 American Journal of Science, July, 1871. 


The words below the names refer to 
the steps which each has taken in what 
seems to be the right direction; the di- 
verging lines denote the wrong paths in- 
to which they have wandered. 


ANTILROPY. 


[April 5, 


Homologous parts 
look in 
opposite 

directions, 


——. 


2 

Zu a 

oq g 

(deo) 8 5 (o) 
i = BE Vicq pD’Azyr, os 
re a c 1774. os 
as) IS a 

AO a a) o 

q 80 

a= 

fob) 

2 


AADS ’ 
wor SB 

soo 

ou" 


°F, > 
Lb ip 
SyYnTrRopy. 


Homologous parts 
look in 
the same 
direction. 


ty 
CEL, 
Qy, 
e 


Wilder.] 


? 


1871.] gS ~ [Wilder. 


I. HISTORICAL SKETCH. 


I have ventured to represent the progress of the question of Inter- 
membral Homologies since 1774, by the foregoing diagram. The 
brace at the left includes a reference to the general comparisons be- 
tween armus,} (anterior limb), and skelos (posterior limb), which were 
made by the ancient anatomists and by their successors prior to 1774. 
Between these and the recent general comparisons, and forming a 
common point of convergence of the one, of divergence for the other, 
is the ‘‘ detailed comparison” of Vicq d’Azyr. 

It is not easy to do justice to this great anatomist’s paper upon the 
membra, partly because it contains no figures, but chiefly because his 
words are capable of three different interpretations, which have 
served as the basis for as many distinct views of intermembral homol- 
ogies. 

Vicq d’ Azyr seems to have had in his mind three ideas : — 

1. That armus and skelos really correspond, not only as 
membra, but in detail. 

2. That similar parts face in opposite directions. 

3. That, therefore, in order to make a comparison more readily, 
it is convenient to place the armus of one side, reversed, against the 
skelos of the other side. 

In brief, he wished to demonstrate a certain proposition; in so 
doing he recognized a certain fact, and therefore followed a certain 
method. His successors have all admitted the truth of the proposition, 
and the majority have gone no farther than to recognize the general 
correspondence between the several segments and articulations of the 
membra. 

But those who have noted the admission by Vicq d’ Azyr of an 
antagonism between these corresponding parts, whether or not they 
saw the importance of the prindiple of symmetry, have more or less 
distinctly recognized the fact, and have, therefore, followed his method 
of comparison as a method, and nothing more. This is evident from 
the words of Turenne, 21, Pagenstecher, 54, and Haughton, 62; and 
some, if not all of those who have been much criticized and even ridi- 
culed (by Owen, 20, 335; Martins, 37; Wilder, 52; Wyman, 55) for 
the extraordinary methods adopted in making their comparisons, 
ought rather to be included among those who have followed Oken, in 
recognizing more or less distinctly the importance of this symmetrical 
antagonism as a law of organization. 


1 The nomenclature of parts will be discussed hereafter. 


Wilder.] 158 [April 5, 


On the other hand, the method of comparison suggested by Vicq d’ 
Azyr required that the armus of one side should be placed parallel 
with the skelos of the other. And this, with his frequent use of the 
term ‘“paralléle,” (by which I believe he really meant only corres- 
pondence,) has given rise to a class of views in which this method is 
in part adopted as an end, instead of a means; and the effort has 
been made in various ways to show that corresponding parts of the 
membra do, or at any rate should, face in the same direction. To 
this end, some have suggested ingenious serial homologies, leaving the | 
parts in their natural attitudes, while others have altered the position | 
of the membra or of their parts, in ways equally ingenious and plau- | 
sible, yet, as I believe, equally unsound. But all these comparisons 
are based upon the generally received opinion that pollex (thumb), 
and primus (great toe), are homologous, which opinion I hold to be 
incorrect. 


SYNTROPY. 


The former method of comparison originated with Dr. Barclay, the 
anatomical preceptor of Prof. Owen, who in 1824 suggested that the 
armus and skelos should be compared in their natural attitude with 
most mammalia, the manus pronated so as to bring the pollex upon 
the inner border of its membrum, as was the primus behind. 

This involved a denial of the homology which Vieq d’ Azyr ad- 
mitted between the extensor surfaces of brachium (upper arm), and 
meros (thigh), and between the convexity of the ancon (elbow), and _ 
the genu (knee); and it further involved the comparison of two par- 
allel bones, the tibia and fibula, with two crossed bones, the ulna and 
radius. Nevertheless, in 1838 Flourens proposed a similar view, 14, 
and in 1846 it was vigorously supported by Owen, 20, 335, and 63 in 
many places, who carried it so far as to find the homologue of the 
patella in the sesamoid bone of the biceps brachii in certain bats, and 
the homologue of the olecranon in the projecting post-genual process 
(fabella), of the wombat. : 

From this and other details of Owen’s peculiar views, Goodsir dis- 
sents; but in 1856 he enunciated what seems to be essentially the theory 
of Barclay and Flourens, associating with it, however, a belief in the 
quinary composition of the membra, which had been suggested by 
Oken, 285, 2380, Duges, 11, 44, and Gervais, 27, 32. 

I was formerly, 52, 486, inclined to include Humphrey among the 
‘* Antitropists,” by reason of his recognition of the antagonism be- 


1871.] 159 [Wilaer, 


tween the proximal parts of the membra, 34, 600, and 36, 16, which 

-had been previously pointed out by Agassiz, 26, 89, and others; but 
a more careful study of his works, especially of his later papers upon 
the subject, 64, and 72, has led me to regard his views as essentially 
syntropical ; since, in his opinion, the above-mentioned antagonism is 
purely telical, and involves no idea of a general principle of sym- 
metry ; so that his comparison of the membra must either be included 
among the recent general comparisons, or associated with those of 
Owen and Cleland, in spite of their disagreements in respect to some 
special homologies. To Humphrey, however, is to be given the 
credit of indicating the value of comparative anatomy in this discus- 
sion, as to Goodsir belongs the honor of urging the importance of 
embryological studies, in order to determine the “morphology of 
limbs.” 

The evident objection to a comparison of two parallel with two 
crossed bones, led Bourgery, 10, and afterward Cruveilhier, 18, to sug- 
gest that the tibia was represented by the upper half of the ulna and 
the lower half of the radius, and the fibula, in like manner, by the 
upper half of the radius and the lower half of the ulna; but their 
view has not been adopted by any later writers. 

Equally unnatural and unsupported was the ‘‘ Torsion’ theory of 
Maclise, 23, and Martins, 33, who at different times, but as it appears, 
independently, endeavored to preserve the syntropy or serial ho- 
mology of the membra, the natural attitude of the manus, and at the 
same time remove the objections to the views of Barclay and Bour- 
gery by admitting the homology of the convexities of ancon and 
genu, and the parallel relation of ulna and radius; they assumed that 
“the humerus was a bone twisted upon its axis for 180°,” and that it 
required to be untwisted in order to make the armus comparable with 
the skelos. A certain amount of ‘‘torsion” has lately been admitted 
by Gegenbaur, 59, but the conclusions of Maclise and Martins*have 
been adopted by no other anatomists, and have been objected to by 
Humphrey, 36, Wilder, 45, and Wyman, 55. 

A reaction from these speculative views took place in 1864, when 
Prof. Huxley proposed a comparison of the membra, 42, which differs 
in many respects from all others, even in the manner of its presenta- 
tion ; since its author appears to have attaclied so little importance to 
it that he has never written it out for publication or referred to it in 
his later works; and so far from believing, like the author of 23, that 
his method of comparison was to ‘‘ unravel the gordian knot of that 


Wilder.] 160 [April 5, 


problem which had so long existed as a mystery for the morphologist,” 
Professor Huxley admits that “it cannot be considered as thoroughly 
satisfactory since it has not been checked by the aid of the complete 
study of the development of the parts in question, the only method 
by which any morphological problem can be determined.” The pre- 
cise value of development in the determination of homologies will 
be discussed hereafter, but there can be no question that too little 
importance had been given to it in previous comparisons of the 
membra. : ; 

“ Professor Huxley instituted a new comparison of the limbs, placed 
not in the position which they assume in adult life, but in the only 
one in which they really correspond with each other, viz., that which 
they first exhibit in the embryo. In this condition they stand out at 
right angles from the body, the extensor surfaces being placed dor- 
sally, and the flexor surfaces ventrally, with both pairs of limbs. 
They then gradually become bent and afterward acquire the modified 
position which suits them for their function in life, and to which their 
various articulations become adapted. The embryonic position con- 
tinues throughout life in many amphibia and reptiles and without 
much change in galeopithecus.”’ 

Huxley then proceeds to compare the premembral (anterior) borders 
of the membra together, making the radius and pollex homologous 
with the tibia and primus, upon the generally accepted principle of 
syntropy or serial homology; not realizing that the yery same regard 
for the facts of development which led him to ignore the subsequent 
flexure and attitudes of the membra, should also require him to give 
no heed to those secondary modifications of the primordial buds 
which differentiate pollex and primus from their fellows, and cause 
them to resemble each other in many higher animals; but aside from 
his special interpretation of homologies, I am now ready to accept his 
method of placing the membra for comparison as the true one, of 
which more hereafter. 

This general view of the method to be pursued in determining 
intermembral homologies has been adopted by Mivart in 1866, by 
Pagenstecher in 1867, by Rolleston in 1868, and by Flower in 1870; 
who, however, have each proposed modifications in detail, which I 
will not discuss here, since the special interpretations of muscular 
homologies depend upon the general view of membral homology, and_ 
stand or fall therewith. 

Parker has not expressed a decided opinion upon the subject; let 


1871.] 161 (Wilder. 


us hope that his late magnificent contribution to rational homology, 
292, may be followed by a like work upon the membra, as a sound 
basis for all subsequent investigation. 

Cleland has published two short papers upon intermembral homolo- 
gies, 47 and 65; in the first he inclines to the general views of Goodsir, 
and in the latter makes the lower jaw serially homologous with the 
membra; but he kindly permits me to state that he is by no means 
satisfied with the present aspect of the question, and is even willing 
to admit the existence of “symmetry” in certain corporeal organs; so 
that I venture to hope that he may yet recognize the antitropic rela- 
tion of the membra, especially since I am now ready to agree with 
him that the antagonism of the membral flexures in many mammals, 
is the result of telical modifications of their primary and normal 
condition; therefore, in spite of his previous views, and his disagree- 
ment in detail with the muscular homologies of the others, he may 
not object to being enumerated among those who follow Huxley in 
basing their further investigation of intermembral homologies upon 
the facts of comparative anatomy and embryology rather than upon 
anthropotomy. 


ANTITROPY. 


The suggestion that a symmetrical relation or antagonism exists 
between the cephalic and caudal regions of the vertebrate body, is 
contained in many paragraphs of Oken’s Physio-philosophy, 285, Par. 
2114, 2242, 2951, etc., and has been since alluded to by Agassiz," and 
Dana?; but these eminent naturalists have never published any di- 
rect application of the idea to the membra, although it cannot be 
doubted that Oken would now be among the first to adopt the anti- 
tropical comparison, as Agassiz and Dana have privately done.® 

The first published comparison of the membra upon the basis cf 
antitropy was that of Gerdy in 1829, 9; he appears to have been an 
artist as well as an anatomist, and to have been thus led to look upon 
the whole body as a symmetrical structure, whose upper and lower 
ends repeat each other in opposite directions as do the right and left 
sides; he began to apply this principle to the membra, but unfor- 


1 Contrib. to the Nat. Hist. of the United States, Vol. I, pp. 308, 311, 312, - 
2 Am. Jour. Science and Arts, Nov. 1863, p. 351. 


3 Prof. Agassiz also informs me that in Europe he noted the symmetrical relae 
- tions between the manus and pes of the walrus, and afterward discussed the 
‘whole subject in a course of unpublished lectures at the Smithsonian Institution. 


PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 11 DECEMBER, 1871. 


Wilder.} 162 [April 5, 


tunately employed those of man in the erect attitude, and was, 
moreover so impressed with the prevailing belief that pollex and pri- 
mus must correspond, that he failed to discover the existence of the 
idea of symmetry in the distal portions of the.membra. 

A few years later, Budd, 79, and Paget, 80, observed some patho- 
logical evidences of a relation’ between symmetry and disease, to 
which I have made some additions in 50. 


A more successful attempt to ascertain how far the membra are — 
truly symmetrical structures, not in a telical sense, as Humphrey re- | 
garded them, but upon the ec of the ideas cuageretl by Oken and 


Gerdy, was made by Professor Wyman in 1860, 35. In a verbal 
communication which it was my good fortune to hear, this eminent 
anatomist clearly and impartially stated the views of previous authors, 
and pointed out the objections thereto; no report is given of this 
remarkable communication, but as I recollect it, being then a student, 
and hearing of the subject for the first time, Professor Wyman ex- 
pressed himself substantially as follows :— 

‘“‘In order to compare the upper and lower limbs of man, the skele- 
ton should be placed in a horizontal attitude ; the limbs then hang 
downward ; in their natural attitude, with most mammalia, the elbow 
looks backward and the knee forward; the shafts of the humerus 
and femur are inclined in opposite directions; if now the hand 
be supinated, and the fingers pointed backward, there results a 
complete symmetrical homology between all parts, until we come to 
the thumb and gréat toe ; for the former is now upon the outer bor- 
der of its limb, and thus opposed to the little toe ; this difficulty is a 
very serious one, and there seems to be no satisfactory method of 
removing it.” 


This view of the limbs was afterward freely discussed by Professor . | 


Wyman in his laboratory, and was made the basis of later and de- 
cided expressions of opinion by Folsom, 40, and myself, 45, who were 
not then able to perceive the full force of the objections which our 
preceptor had indicated to his own view. 

Three years later, but apparently unaware that Prof. Wyman had 
treated the subject, Dr. Foltz published his very valuable papers, 39, 
in which the general subject of symmetry is ably discussed and 
shown to exist between the membra, even to the digits and dactyls; 
but, excepting the supination of the manus so as to face the palm 
forward as the sole faces backward, Foltz retains the quadrupedal 
attitude of the membra, and further encumbers his theory with the 


1871.] 163 (Wilder. 


hypothesis of the ‘‘binary composition” of the pollex and primus, in 
order to get rid of the difficulty caused by their size in man; this 
makes us all normally sexdigitists; and as no sufficient reasons are given 
for this part of the view, and as man is the only species in which 
this special difficulty would arise, and as size is now admitted to be 
of very slight morphical importance, no one has adopted the view of 
binary composition of the pollex and primus. 

My own contributions to the solution of this problem originated in 
the effort to remove the difficulties pointed out by Wyman, by sug- 
gesting that the morphical value of the manus and pollex was in- 
versely to their telical importance, and that any difficulty with them 
should not be allowed to outweigh the teachings of the proximal 
portions of the membra; this suggestion was contained in my gradua- 
tion thesis in 1862; and more fully presented in 1865; the same view 
was advocated in subsequent papers, 51, 52,57 and 58, together with 
another respecting the morphical unimportance of the character ‘‘nu- 
merical composition”’; both these points, with the distinction between 
natural attitude and normal position, I regard as demanding careful 
study in this connection, and they will be discussed hereafter; but in 
the above papers, I followed Wyman and the rest in comparing the 
membra in the condition they present in the quadrupeds, which I 
now believe to be not their normal condition. 

In compliance with the oft-repeated request of former students and 
others interested in the subject, Prof. Wyman at length completed 
and published his paper on Symmetry and Homology in Limbs; 55. 
In the words of a reviewer, ‘‘ certainly no modern inquirer has 
searched the secrets of Nature more closely, or clothed his discoveries 
in more concise and modest language.” After showing that “in right 
and left parts distorted symmetry is the exception, while in the fore 
and hind (cephalic and caudal) parts of adults it is the rule,” 
Wyman points out the remarkable analogy which exists between 
symmetry as brought about by. vital forces and the effects of physical 
polarity; then discusses the signification of homology, and concludes, 
“those parts of the limbs will be homotypes which have the same 
relative position and are symetrically placed with regard to each 
other.” p. 260. 

He then compares the various parts of the membra as symmetrical 
structures, ‘‘repeating each other in a reversed manner from before 
backwards as right and left parts do from side to side, because, 
though open to grave objections, the difficulties met with, are, on the 


Wilder.} 164 [April 5, 


whole, fewer than in the other, and because too, it is supported by 
the indications of fore and hind symmetry in other parts of the 
body’’ (p. 246); the objections are the same as were stated by him 
seven years before, and relate to the thumb and great toe, which are 
“assumed by most anatomists to be homotypes; first, on account of 
their relative size ; second, because they have similar relative posi- 
tions in the ordinary attitude of the fore arm; thirdly and chiefly, 
because they have only two phalanges each, while each of the other 
digits has three or more” (p. 276). The first two objections to a sym- 
metrical homology of the parts, which brings the thumb as homo- 
logue of the little toe, are removed by showing first, that “the 
attribute of size loses its value when studied in the lower animals”; 
and second, that the natural attitude of the hand is a “false posi- 
tion’’ due to the “rotation of the forearm in the embryo, but for 
which the thumb would have been on the outside of the hand, and 
would consequently have conformed to the position of the little toe.” 
But the third difficulty “forms the greatest in our way and is not so 
easily disposed of; and we must rest content with the assumption that 
the thumb with its two phalanges is the homologue of the little toe 
with its three phalanges.” (p. 277.) 

The complete removal of this difficulty is one of the chief aims of 
the present paper, and will be the subject of a section upon the 
‘¢morphical unimportance of numerical composition.” 

Prof. Wyman makes a valuable suggestion (p. 274) as to the 
normal shape of the carpal and tarsal bones, the metacarpals and 
metatarsals (p. 275), which is capable of application to all the long 
bones of the membra, and had been even adopted by Mivart, 46,401, 
with respect to the scapula and ilium; if all the long bones had been 
regarded as morphically columnar and. cylindrical, the theory of 
“torsion” would never have taken the form it did. 

Like Huxley, Wyman lays great. stress upon the importance of 
comparative anatomy and embryology in this connection, but appears 
not to have seen the former’s paper, since he does not allude to the 
method of comparison suggested by him, namely, by placing the 
membra parallel with each other and at right angles with the trunk, 
the convexities of the ancon and genu looking upward as with em- 
bryos and many lower vertebrates; and as this is the visual method 
which now seems to me most likely to lead toward a final solution of 
the question, the lack of allusion to it and agreement with it, appears 


1871.] 165 | (Wilder. 


to constitute the main defect in the work of my illustrious preceptor 
as a complete guide to the future study of intermembral homologies. 

The same general criticism is applicable to the admirable series of 
papers by Dr. Coues, which appeared during the past year. The 
author follows closely in the footsteps of Wyman, ‘‘not blindly but 
unable not to see the validity of his arguments,’ 70, 195, and there- 
fore with a few minor differences, or doubts respecting details, adopts 
the osseous homologies of Wyman as the basis for the determination 
of the ‘‘muscular correspondences.” In respect to these, although 
Dr. Coues is led to differ materially upon some points from my own 
previous conclusions, 45, yet he has generally shown such good rea- 
sons therefor, that my approval of this part of his work is unqualified, 
and I am anxious to go over the whole ground anew in the light of 
his able discussion. In two other respects, however, I am forced to 
criticise his work. 

In the first place, he has ‘‘no acknowledgements to make excepting 
to three authors,” ? 70, 149, and therefore, whatever satisfaction may 
be derived from having so taken up the subject fresh, he has also lost 
the benefit of the check which an acquaintance with many and dif- 
ferent views exerts upon the tendency to the exclusive adoption of 
any one. 

In the second place, he has, in my opinion, adopted a faulty 
method from each of his predecessors. He has intentionally fol- 
lowed Owen, in the use of many different and often ponderous ex- 
pressions for the same idea in order to avoid monotony, 193, note; 
whereas, in homologies, as in mathematics, each object and idea 
should be known by a single term and by that alone; since of all 


1 “Tt may at first appear that too much stress is laid upon this point, since, as 
Dr. Coues has suggested to me, the principle is right and the same parts are anti- 
tropically compared, whatever be the attitude of the membra ; but it must be borne 
in mind that this matter, so trivial in the eyes of a zealous antitropist like my mor- 
phological brother, is astumbling block in the way of the confirmed syntropists 
who constitute the vast majority of anatomists. They deny the law of symmetry 
at the outset, on the ground that its chief evidences are the natural antagonistic 
flexures of the membra which exist in a few quadrupeds only, and not in the 
earlier stages of development. And in vigorously opposing this unnecessary corol- 
lary of our theorem, they get into a frame of mind wholly unfit to receive sounder 
evidence of the theorem itself; like ‘binary composition’ the ‘quadrupedal atti- 
tude’ is an unealled for, though natural amendment, to the measure of autitropy 
which we support.’’ 


2 Owen, Wyman and the writer. 


Wilder.] 166 [April 5, 


the natural sciences, this demands the closest attention, and the 
absence of all unessential considerations. 

Coues has accepted unquestioned the view of the normal position 
of the membra, for comparison, which was first proposed by Wyman 
and adopted by Foltz, Folsom, and myself; this view is based upon 
the proposition of Wyman, 55,265, that “the knees and elbows in all 
animals are bent so as to form anales pointing in opposite directions ” 
if we except the fishes, this fecnboe a ° is correct, provided that 
the membra are placed in the position they have with most quadru- 
peds; but Goodsir, Humphrey and Huxley and Wyman himself have 
shown that this is not their primary position, and it is quite possible 
that both Wyman and Coues might have followed Huxley in deny- 
ing that it is their normal position, had they read his paper.} 

Finally Dr. Coues has accepted from the writer a terminology of 
ideas (antitypy, etc.) which was itself based upon the Owenian 
phraseology, which was in no way expressive of the ideas designated 
thereby, and which I now propose to discard for a more significant 
nomenclature derived from the word which begins this section; of 
which more hereafter. 

I have commented upon Dr. Coues’ methods the more freely 
because, as regards the use of many and lengthy words, and the 
acceptance of single authors’ peculiar views, my own sins have been 
more and greater than his can ever be. 

Dr. Coues may be glad to know that it is only since reading his 
papers, and during the careful review of the whole subject in prepa- 
ration of this paper, that I have been led to modify my own opinion in 
regard to the position in which the membra are to be compared 
together, and to adopt the view of Huxley already referred to. It 
he will join me in this ?—and still better, if the great anatomist to 
whose example and advice we both owe so much of our encourage- 
ment to this kind of work,—will yield his adherence to this new 
method of comparison, we may be bold enough to hope to close the 
first century of this controversy by proposing a view embracing 


1 Dr. Coues writes me (Dec. 28, 1871) that he sees no valid objection to the neutral 
position proposed by Huxley. 


* Let me here thank my kind preceptor and my other scientific friends for allow- 
ing me to be the first to express the opinion that a certain memoir, 45, whereof 
the writer was rather proud, would have been the better for much cutting and 
pruning in the above mentioned respects, although I have no reason to regret the 
general views therein advocated. 


1871.] 167 [Wilder. 


the best elements of both the two great parties, Syntropists and 
Antitropists; the Realists and the Idealists they may also be called, 
since the former based their views upon certain facts to which were 
given undue prominence, while the latter began with the recognition 
of a great principle, which they sought to trace in all parts of the 
body; they may also be called the Peripheralists and the Centralists, 
since the former began their comparisons at the distal extremities of 
the membra and made the rest conform thereto, while the latter 
began with the evidences of symmetry in the body itself, and hoped 
to find the same law illustrated in the appendages; and finally the 
two schools are essentially of the Teleologists and Morphologists, since 
the former always laid great stress upon the functional correspond- 
ence of the pollex and primus, while the latter sought for the evi- 
dences of an abstract, morphical law of organization, and only failed 
in that search through lack of discrimination between morphical and 
telical attitude, form, and composition. 

Professors Huxley and Wyman are universally recognized as lead- 
ers of these two parties: both are anatomists of the highest rank 
and the latter has never been known to fully adopt a view which has 
afterward proved unsound: both admit the difficulties which beset 
this problem and, unlike some of their predecessors, make no pretence 
of “‘cutting the Gordian knot”; finally both have strongly urged the 
great importance of embryology and comparative anatomy. 


> 


i, 
Bb ie // \ Min 
Wyman. §& ‘ A 
c= x ==) P 
< NS Pr i, Min 
Vv 
A a 
ea cere Ly Baer 
2 pare 
Huxley. a= 
= Pr aM 
aN _— 


1 Among the notes made about the time of giving a course of University Lec- 
tures in Cambridge, Mass., I find the following: ‘It will be curious if the matter 
is finally compromised by adopting the view as to the position of the limbs pro- 
posed by Huxley, and making our own interpretation of Symmetry ’’; dated Feb. 
15th, 1868. 


Wilder.] 168 [April 5, 


It is probable, therefore, that for the final solution of this prob- 
lem, we must combine the visual method of Huxley, as based upon 
the facts of position in embryo and lower animals, with the 
intellectual method of Wyman, as based upon a great law of organi- 
zation. This convergence of the two opposing theories of Syntropy 
and Antitropy is indicated in our first diagram of authors, and may 
be seen stil! more plainly in the preceding figure. 

In that diagram the arrows represent the longitudinal axis of 
the body; they look in the same direction in the lower figure, in 
opposite directions in the upper; in the lower figure the membra of 
the right side are shown in the position suggested by Huxley; but the 
brace still connects pollex (P) and primus (Pr.), which according to 
syntropy are homologous parts; in the upper figure the membra are 
turned away from each other as wholes, but the special flexures could - 
be shown only from the side; here the brace joins the minimus (Min.) 
and primus (Pr.), which are homologous, according to antitropy. 
The position of the membra in the one, and the wea of symme- 
try in the other of these two figures are united in the third, where 
the braces can join pollex and quintus, minimus and primus. 


II. NOMENCLATURE OF PARTS. 


The great activity of workers in homologies demands the repair 
and, in some cases, the renewal, of their “tools of thought”; our 
anatomical nomenclature is now as incongruous and unmanageable as 
zoological nomenclature was before Linnzeus; even our highest au- 
thorities employ those abominable terms compounded of “fore” 
(200, 1, 273, and 2, 281), and describe the skeleton of an ape as if 
in the erect attitude, so as to reverse all the terms of comparison 
with the vertebrate animal in its normal position (275, 176, note 2). 
Special inconsistencies and objectionable features will appear in the 
following synonymy, wherein I have purposely quoted, as far as possi- 
ble, from high authorities, since upon them we must rely for effecting 


Since the above was written I have read such parts of 329 as discuss the rela- 
tive positions of the membra; but although the author well describes the iso- 
tropy which exists in many vertebrates where the membra either project lat- 
erally, or are rotated so as to bring the ancon and genu forward, as in tortoises, 
and the “‘Heterotropie”’ which characterizes the membra of most other quadru- 
peds, no direct light is thrown upon the morphical relations between the membra 


themselves; perhaps his investigations upon the Torsion of the Humerus and 
Femur are worth consideration. 


1871.] 169 [ Wilder. 


areform. The changes proposed are, as far as possible, in accord- 
ance with the following requirements of technical terms : — 

1. Classic Derivation; 2. Capacity for inflection; 38. Brevity; 
4. Independence of context for signification; 5. Non-ambiguity to 
the ear as well as to the eye; 6. Previous use in a kindred 
sense. I cannot hope to have satisfied all the requirements in every 
case, and ask for corrections and amendments. I admit all the ob- 
jections which have been urged against new terms; but am con- 
vinced that some change must be made before homology can be the 
exact science which it is capable of becoming; and I would refer to 
Agassiz (200, 3,69), Goodsir (237, 2, 83), Owen (68, 1, x1II) and 
Strauss-Durckheim (331, 1, xv) in support of a correct system of 
nomenclature. 

The accompanying dia- 
gram presents the dorsal 
surface of a vertebrate ani- 
mal in what may be called 
a neutral or indifferent con- 
dition as to both attitude 
and structure; although 
some details are introduced 
for the purpose of employ- 
ing this figure in other 
parts of the discussion. 
The animal is shown as a 
circular disk, the ‘‘ ger- 
minative area,” at the time 
it presents the two charac- 
eristic and common fea- 
tures of all vertebrates. 

First :— A  discrimina- 
tion between the cephalic 
and the caudal regions by 
the formation of the ce- 
phalic and caudal hoods; 
and it is of great signifi- 
cance that, (with the Tur- 
tle at least, according to 
Agassiz, 200, 2, 537-539) 
this oceurs prior to the 


separation into a right and 
a left half. 


Wilder.] 170 [April 5, 


Second:— The formation of a groove, the “‘primitive furrow,” which 
connects the cephalic and the caudal folds and indicates the posi- 
tion of the future longitudinal axis, dividing the ovum into a right 
and a left half. 

The membra also are left in what may be considered their neutral 
position, extending outward at right angles with the longitudinal axis 
of the trunk and parallel with each other; that this should also be 
regarded as the ‘‘normal position’’ of the membra in contradistinc- 
tion to their numerous ‘‘natural attitudes’? will be shown hereafter. 
This neutral position of the membra presents the convexities of the 
knee (genu) and elbow (ancon) corresponding with the so-called 
“dorsal” or ‘‘ extensor’? or ‘‘ epaxial” surfaces, the manus being 
supinated and placed flat upon the earth, and the whole armus having 
nearly the position it has in a land tortoise or in a man when upon 
“ all fours.” 

The digits and dactyls are shown of nearly equal length; the pre- 
membral digit and dactyl (pollex and’ primus) are joined by a dotted 
line (A), to represent the analogy which they undoubtedly bear to’ 
each other; but the continuous line (H) unites the postarmal digit 
(minimus) with the preskeleal dactyl (primus) to indicate the ho- 
mology which is held to exist between them by Wyman, by Coues and 
the writer. The carpal and tarsal bones are shown as parallel rows 
of similar ossicles, as suggested by Wyman (55, 274). 


OmoOZONE (shoulder girdle). 


Scutula, Lat. —Quoc, (?) Gr.— Ceinture thoracique, Foltz, 39. — 
Schulter-giirtel, Geg., 230, fere.—Shoulder-girdle, Park., 292, fere— 
Scapulo-coracoid arch, Ow., 20, 184.— Heemal arch of occipital verte- 
bra, Ow., 63, 1, 125.—Scapular girdle, Goods., 237, 2, 199.— Scapu- 
lar arch, Wym., 55, 260. 

Remark. For this and the following name J am indebted to Dr. 
Coues. ‘ 


IscHIZONE (pelvic girdle). 

Pelvis, Lat. —’Ioziu, (?) Gr.— Ceinture pelvienne, Foltz, 39, fere, 
—Beckengiirtel, Geg., 230 fere.— Hemal arch of (?) vertebra, Ow., 
20, 268.—Pelvic girdle, Hum., 72, fere.—Pelvic arch, Ow., 63, 2, 307. 

Memsra (the limbs). 


Membra, Lat.—'Pébea, Gr.— Membres, extremités, Fr.—Gllieder, Ger. 
—Artus, Bonap., Tr. Linn. Soc, 18, 248.—Legs, vulgo.—Limbs, Goods., 


1871.} . UL [ Wilder. 


240, fere—Lateral limbs, Hum., 248, 65.—Parial limbs, Ow., 63, 1, 62. 
—Appendages, Miv., 275, fere—Diverging appendages, Ow., 63, 2, 
581.—A ppendicular parts, Fiow., 71, 219.—Locomotive organs. Ow., 63, 
2, 280.—Liberated ribs, Ok., 285, Par. 2370.—Archipterygii, Geg., 68, 
400.—Hatremitdten paarigen, 231, 424. 

Membrum, membri, membra, membrorum, membral.} 


Novus (articulus membri). | 
Nodus articulus, Lat.—’4e60v, Gr.—Joint, articulation, Fr.—Gelenk, 
Ger.—Joint, Ow. 63, 2, 542, (internodium).?—Articulation, Anthropo- 
tomy, fere. 
Nodus, nodi, nodi, nodorum, nodal. 


INTERNODIUM (segmentum membri). 


Internodium, Lat.— Tujuc, (?) Gr.—Internode, Coues, 70, fere.—Seg- 
ment, Ow., 63, 2, 306.—Joint, vulgo, (nodus). 
Internodium, internodii, internodia, internodiorum, internodial. 


Armus * (membrum. anterius). 


Brachium, ulna, lacertus, Lat.— Bee ziwr, Gr.— Bras, Fr.— Arm, 
Ger.— Diverging appendage of occipital vertebra, Ow., 63, 2, Table 1.— 
Fin, Ow., 63, 2, 437.—Leg, limb, member, fin, appendage, with ad- 
jectives as follows: Fore, Ow., 63, 2, 482.—Upper, Macl., 23, 666.— 
Anterior, Hux., 42, 1.— Pectoral, Ow., 63, 2, 65.— Atlantal, Barclay 
(quoted by Owen, 20, 334).—Thoracique, Foltz, 39, fere.—Sternal, 
Vogt, Nature, Jan. 20, 1870. 

Armus, armi, armi, armorum, armal. 


Omos (nodus proximus armi). 


*Quos, Gr— Epaule, Fr.—Achsel, Ger.— Shoulder-zjoint, scapulo- 
humeral articulation, Anthropotomy. 
Omos, omou, omoi, omon, omal. 


1 Here and hereafter are given nom. and gen. singular and plural,and the ad- 
jective form of the word; the first number after an author’s name corresponds to - 
the number of his work upon the list; the last indicates the page: the second, when 
it occurs, the volume of the work. 

2 Here and elsewhere a word in parenthesis indicates that the preceding synonym 
has also been used for the part designated by that word, and thus in two distinct 
senses. 

3 This word means strictly rather shoulder than arm, but no other term is equally 
suitable, and the sound of this is in its favor. 


Wilder.] 1 7 2 [April 5, 


ANCON (nodus medius armi). | 
Cubitum, Lat.—’ 4yxor, Gr.—Coude, Fr.—Elbogen, Ger.—Elbow, 
Wym., 55, 265.—Elbow-joint, Anthrop. 
Ancon, anconos, ancones, anconon, anconal. 


Carpus (nodus ultimus armi). 


Carpus, Lat.—Kaegnés, Gr.—Carpe, poignet, Fr.—Handgelenk, Ger. 
— Wrist-joint, Ow., 63, 2, 310.—Knee, Ag., 200, 1,361, (genu). May- | 
nard, Nat. Guide, p. 40.—Radio-carpal articulation, Anthrop. 


STETHOS (pseudo-internodium proximum manus.) 


Metacarpus, Anthropotomy.—Sicihos, Str. Dur., 331, 1, 116. 
Stethos, stethou, stethoi, stethon, stethal. 


Remark. This term was really applied by Strauss-Durckheim, 
not to the whole metacarpus, but to the second metacarpal bone; but 
upon the ground that the Greeks applied the term to the whole 
metacarpus. 


BRACHIUM (internodium proximum armi). 


Lacertus, Lat.— Bras, or bras supérieur, Fr.— Oberarm, Ger. — 
Brachium, Fl., 71, 219, (armus).—Arm, F]., 71, 239, (armus).— Upper 
arm, Fl., 71, 219—First segment, Ow., 63, 2, 306 (sneros).—Proximal 
segment, Hum., 36, fere, (meros). 

Brachium, brachii, brachia, brachiorum, brachial. 


CunrrumM (internodium medium armi). 


Cubitum, (7) Lat.— Wiyvs, Gr.— Avant bras, Fr.— Vorderarm, 
Ger.—Cubit, Macd., 255, fere—Fore arm, Fl., 71, 219.—Middle seg- 
ment, Hum., 36, fere, (crus) —sSecond segment, Ow., 63, 2,306 (erus).— 
Antebrachium, Fl., 71, 219. 

Cubitum, cubiti, cubita, eubitorum, cubital. 


Manus (internodium ultimum armt), 


Manus, Lat.— Xeie, Gr.— Main, Fr. — Hand, Ger.— Manus, F1., 
71, fere.—Hand, Wym., 55, 273.—Foot, Ow., 63, 2, 484, (pes).— 
Fore-foot, Ow., 63, 2, 283.—Fore-hand, Ow., 63, 2, 541.—Distal seg- 
ment, Hum., 36, fere, (pes)—Terminal segment, Fl., 71, 252, (pes). 

Manus, maniis, manus, manuum, manual. - 


1871.] 173 [ Wilder. 


Dieiti (digtti manus). 

Digiti mantis, Lat.— 4ézxtvio, Gr.— Doigts, Fr.— Finger, Ger.— 
Fingers and thumb, Ow., 63, 2, 544.—-Toes, Ow., 63, 2, 488 (dactyli) , 
—Digiis, Ow., 63, 2, 539, (dactyli).— Fingers, Ow., 63, 2, 328. 

Digitus, digiti, digiti, digitorum, digital. 

PoLLEX (digitus radialis). 

Pollex, Lat.—’ Artizere, Gr.—Pouce, Fr—Daumen, Ger.—Pollez, F1., 
71, fere.—Thumb, Wym., 55, 276.— First digit, Fl., 71, 255, (primus). 
—Outer digit, Hum., 34, 389; 326, 112.— Inner digit, Ow., 63, 2, 
509, (primus).—Radial digit, F1., 71, 255.—Preazial digit, F1., 71, 337. 
First toe, Goods., 237, 1, 450, (primus). 

Pollex, pollicis, pollices, pollicum, pollical. 

INDEX (digitus a pollice proximus). 

Digitus index vel salutaris, Lat. — Aizaros, Gr. — Indicateur, Fr.— 
Zeigefinger, Ger—Index, Ow., 63, and FI., 71, fere.—Second. digit, 
Ow., 63, 2, 428, (secundus).—Fore-finger, vulgo. 

Index, indicis, indices, indicum, indical. 

, MeEpius (digitus medius). 

Digitus medius vel famosus, vel infamis, vel impudicus, Lat.— 
Doigt du milieu, Fr.—Mittelfinger, Ger.—Middle toe, Ow., 63, 2, 456, 
(tertius)—Middle finger, vulgo.—Medius, Ow., 63, Fl. 71, fere—Third 
digit, Wym., 55, 276, (tertius).— Second digit, Sandwith, letter to 
Owen, Mem. on Aye-Aye, Trans. Zool. Soc., (index). — Verpus, 
wer. Dur., oo15 1,19 7. 

Medius, medii, medii, mediorum, medial. 

Minimvus (digitus ulnaris). 

Digitus minimus ; digitulus auricularis brevissimus, Lat.—Doigt auric- 
ulaire, Fr.—Ohrfinger, Ger.—Litile finger, Wym. 55, 276.—Outermost 
digit, Ow., ? (quintus).—Fifth digit, Ow., 63, 2, 307 (quintus).—M ini- 
“mus, Ow., 63, Fl. 71, fere.— Wing-finger, (of the Pterodactyle) Ow., 
289, 273. — Micros, Str. Dur.,.331, 1, 117. 

Minimus, minimi, minimi, minimorum, minimal. 


ANNULARIS (digitus a minimo proximus). 

Digitus annularis, medicus, medicinalis, Lat.—Dorgt annulaire, Fr.— 
Ring finger, Ger.— Annularis, Ow., 63, Fl., 71, fere—Third finger, 
(Eng. Lat. Lexicon).—Fourth digit, Ow,. 63, 2,306 (quartus).—R ing- 
finger, vulgo.— Paramese, Str. Dur., 331, 1, 117. 

Annularis, annularis, annulares, annularium, annularial. 


Wilder.] 174 ‘April 5, 


SKELOS (membrum posterius). 


Artus, Lat.—2zzt0c, Gr.—Jambe, Fr.—Schenkel, (?), Ger — Dwerg- 
ing appendage of pelvic arch, Ow., 63, 2, 429.— Sacral limb, Barclay 
(quoted by Ow., 20, 334. note).— Hind limb, Ow., 63, 1, 191.—Lower 
limb, Macl., 23, 666.—Pelvic limb, Macl., 23, 664.—Membre pelwvien, 
Foltz, 39, fere-—Membre inferieur, Richaud, 15, fere.—Leg, vulgo, 
(crus). 

Skelos, skeleos, skelea, skeleon, skeleal. 

CoxA (nodus proximus skeleos). 

Coxa, Lat.—’Ioywr, Gr.—Hanche, Fr.—Lende, Hiifte, Ger.—Hip 
joint, vulgo.—Innominato-femoral articulation, Anthrop. 

Coxa, cox, cox, coxarum, coxal. 


GENU (nodus medius skeleos ). 
Genu, Lat.— Pov, Gr. — Genou, Fr.—Knie, Ger.— Knee, Wym., 
55, 265.— Knee-joint, vulgo. — Femoro-tibial articulation, Anthrop. 
Genu, geniis, genua, genuum, genual. 


. Taxus (nodus ultimus skeleos). 
Talus, Lat. — =ptgor, Gr. — Coude-pied, Fr.— Knéchel, Ger.— 
Ankle, vulgo.—Ankle-joint, vulgo.— Tibio-tarsal articulation, Anthrop. 
Talus, tali, tali, talorum, talar. 


Meros (internodium proximum skeleos). 


Femur, Lat.—Myeos, Gr.— Cuisse, Fr. — Schenkel, Ger. —Proximal 
segment, Hum., 36, fere (brachium).— Thigh, Fl., 71, 281. 
Meros, merou, merol, meron, meral. 
Crus (internodium medium skeleos). 
Crus, Lat.—Knijun, Gr.—Jambe, Fr.— Unterschenkel, Ger.— Middle 
segment, Hum., 36, fere, (cubitum)—Cnemion, Ow., 63, 1, 170.—Leg, 


Fl., 71, 281, (skelos). 
Crus, cruris, crura, crurum, crural. 


PES (tnternodium ultimum skeleos). 


Pes, Lat.— Io's, Gr.— Pied, Fr.— Fiiss, Ger.— Distal segment, 
Hum., 36, fere (manus).— Foot, Wym., 65, 276, (manus).— Hand, 
Ow., 63, 2, 294.—Hind hand, Ow., 63, 2, 542.—Hind foot, Ow., 63, 2, 
487.— Pes, Ow., Fl., Miv., Rol., fere— Terminal segment, FI., 71, 
306. 

Pes, pedis, pedes, pedum, pedal. 


1871.) 175 (Wilder. 


Popium (pseudo-internodium proximum pedis). 
Metatarsus, Anthropotomy, fere.—Podium, Str. Dur., 331, 1, 12. 
Podium, podii, podia, podiorum, podial. 
REMARK. This term was not really applied by Strauss-Durck- 

heim to the metatarsus, but the vowel variations of podion (padion, 
pedion, pidion, podion, pudion) were applied to the metatarsal bones 
of the primus, etc., respectively. 

DactTyY.Li (digiti pedis). 

Digiti pedis, Lat.— Adztvior r0dés, Gr.—Doigts~ postérieurs, Fr.— 
Zehen, Ger.—Digits, Ow., 63, fere, (digitt)—Toes, Ow., 63, 2, 362, 
(digiti). 

Dactylus, dactyli, dactyli, dactylorum, dactylic. 

ie Primus (dactylus tibialis pedis). 

Allex, Lat.— Gros orteil, Fr.—Grosse Zehe, Ger.—Haillux, Ow., 63, 
2, 553.—Great toe, Ow., 63, 2. 553.—Thumb, Ow., 63, 2, 544, (pol- 
lex).—Inner toe, Rol., 234, 1, vu1.—Tibial digit, Fl., 71, 306.—Pre- 
axial digit, Fl., 71, 337. — First digit, Fl., 71, 306.— Hinder thumb, 
Ow., 63, 2, 512.—Tibial toe, Ow., 63, 2, 362.— Protos, Wild., 67, fere. 
—Pollex, Hum., 34, 576. 

Primus, primi, primi, primorum, primal. 

SECUNDUS, (dactylus a primo proximus). 

Digitus secundus pedis, Lat.— Hellux, Str. Dur., 381, 1, 125.— 
Index, Rol., 284, L, (Index).—Second toe, Ow., 63, 2, 553, (Index).— 
First Hind-finger, Tenney, Man. of Zoology, 22.—Second digit, Ow., 
63, 2, 290, (Inder ).— Second finger, Vander Hoeven, 307, 743.— 
Deuteros, Wild., 67, fere. | 

Secundus, secundi, secundi, secundorum, secundal. 


TERTIUS, (dactylus medius ). 


Digitus tertius pedis, Lat.—Hillux, Str. Dur., 331, 1, 125.—Mid- 
dle toe, Ow., 63, 2, 309 (medius).—Third toe, Ow., 63, 2, 553.— 
Third digit, Ow., 63, 2, 308 (medius).— Main toe, Ow., 63, 2, 309. 
— Tritos, Wild., 67, fere. 

Tertius, tertii, tertii, tertiorum, tertial. 

Quartus, (dactylus a quinto proximus). 

Digitus quartus pedis, Lat.—Hollux, Str. Dur., 331, 1, 125.— 
Outer toe, (with Birds) Ow., 63, 2,83, (quintus).—Fourth toe, Ow., 
63, 2, 309.—Fourth digit, Ow., 63, 2, 308.—Tetratos, Wild., 67, fere. 

Quartus, quarti, quarti, quartorum, quartal. 


Wilder.] 176 [April 5, 


Quintus (dactylus fibularis). 


Digitus quintus pedis, Lat.—Hullux, Str. Dur., 331, :4, 225:— 
Fifth digit, Ow., 63, 2, 309, (minimus).—Fifih toe, Ow., 63, 2,309.— 
Little toc, vulgo.—Outer toe, Wym., 55, 277.—Pemptos, Wild., 67, fere. 

Quintus. quinti, quinti, quintorum, quintal. 

There remain for consideration the. terms used to designate the 
following internodia; in the armus, the carpus, the metacarpus, and 
the phalanges; in the skelos, the tarsus, the metatarsus, and the pha- 
langes; also the nodi which separate them and which are called carpo- 
metacarpal, metacarpo-phalangeal (or knuckle) and inter-phalangeal 
articulations of the armus, and tarso-metatarsal, metatarso-phalan- 
geal and inter-phalangeal articulations of the skelos; there are obvi- 
ous objections to all these terms, chiefly on the score of length, and 
the shorter terms of Hippotomy (cannon-bone, great and little pas- 
tern, and coffin-bone, etc.), are not available for our purpose. Iam not 
prepared to suggest the technical terms which are needed, excepting 
in the case of the phalanges or digital and dactylic internodes. 
These are variously termed proximal, middle and distal, or first, see- 
ond and third (proximal phalanx of the index, ete.), but all these 
terms are objectionable as to length, and the latter in that they do 
not indicate whether jirst is counted from the proximal or the distal 
extremity of the digit or dactyl. I would therefore suggest that the 
terminal phalanx of a digit or dactyl be called « (alpha), the middle 
one, 8 (beta), and the proximal, y (gamma); the corresponding meta- 
carpal bone may be called delta (4).1 For the present, however, 
the above nomenclature should be employed only when there are three 
phalanges in the digit or dactyl; for when the number is less, we are 
not yet sure which is the missing one;? and when there are more, 
as with Cetacea, the homologous phalanges are undetermined. 

To show what a reduction of labor and space is gained together 
with the greater definiteness, instead of saying that the Extensor 
indicis (of man) is inserted into the third phalanx of the fore-finger, 
we may now say that it is inserted into ‘‘e indicis.” 

There seems to be an ideal, if not a real, difference between the 
above mentioned segments of the manus and pes and those three pri- 
mary segments which have been generally recognized; the same may be 
said of the articulations between these segments. And although upon 
strict anatomical grounds we must designate them also as “‘internodia” 


1 This is lesscomplex and artificial than the nomenclature of the metacarpals 
and metatarsals proposed by Strauss-Durckheim, 8381, 1, 116 and 124. 
?This problem will be discussed hereafter. 


1871.] RTT [ Wilder. 


and ‘‘nodi,’’ yet for morphological purposes, we may indicate their 
nature as subdivisions of primary segments by calling them ‘‘pseudo- 
internodia”’ and ‘“‘pseudo-nodi.’’} 


iI. NOMENCLATURE OF IDEAS. 


During the early part of the present century all kinds and degrees 
of relationship between organisms and parts of organisms, were ex- 
pressed by the single term Analogy, or by phrases which were even 
more indefinite; Swainson used the expression “immediate and re- 
mote analogy,’’? but the distinction between these two relations was 
not at that time fully recognized even by the authors who have since 
done so much toward making it clear; * since 1846, however, these re- 
lationships have been generally admitted to be of two kinds, homology, 
or affinity, or internal or structural resemblance and analogy or external 
or functional resemblance. * 

These two kinds of organic relationship have seemed to be the re- 
sult of the operation of laws or principles, which, whether regarded 
as of material or divine origin, may be not irreverently called the two’ 
great commandments of Nature; the first is variously termed, the 
principle of adherence to plan, type, pattern, or idea; the second is called 
adaptation to ends, to special uses, to final causes, etc.; and by degrees 
the second has come to be included under the single term Teleology; 
the first under the less appropriate term Morphology; so that, speak- 
ing in the most general way, organisms which are morphologically or, 
for short, morphically similar, are homologous, and those which are 
teleologically or telically similar, are analogous. 

But it is evident that each of these general terms includes several 
special kinds and degrees of relationship, and that these cannot all be 
equally manifested in the same organs, or attributes of organs; we 
should therefore endeavor to ascertain the respective criteria by which 
these degrees of relationship may be recognized. In short there re- 
mains to be done for Comparative Anatomy the kind of work which 
Agassiz has begun for Zoology; and we must aim to discover the 
morphic or taxonomic values of organs and systems of organs, 


1 A distinction between morphological and teleological joints was proposed by 
me in 45, 28, with respect to the radio-ulnar articulation ; and this has been accepted 
by Coues, 70, 370. 

2 Cuvier; Anat. Comp.; t. vir, p. 164. _ 

8 Agassiz; Proc. Zool. Soc., 1884, p. 120; Owen; P. 1, s. 1880, p. 28; 1888, pp. 12, 
109, 145, 146; 1842, pp. 36, note, and 143. 

Te Strickland, 343, Owen, 20, Agassiz, 325. 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8S. N. H.—VOL. XIY. 12 FEBRUARY, 1872. 


Wilder.] 178 ” [April 5, 


whether central or peripheral; of organisms which are low or high, 
ancient or recent, immature or adult; and of their various attributes, 
such as relative position, mode of development, chemical composi- 
tion, size, form and color. 

The following diagram (p. 179) is an atten to indicate in concise 
form the work that has to be done in order to reduce our present con- 
fused notions of zodlogical and anatomical relationship to something 
like a logical codrdination; it is essentially similar to one which was 
presented three years ago, 58, Lect. 1, and I have not attempted to in- 
corporate in it the new and valuable ideas of Lankester, 257, and 
Mivart, 278. I am not now ready to state my grounds of differ- 
ence from some of their views; and will merely express my gratifica- 


tion at this sign of the recognition of what is to be done, by the new 


and vigorous school of English anatomy. 

For comely and the categories thereof, see Agassiz, 201, chap. 2 
sect. IX, 203, and the chapter on Morphology and Nomenclature, 200, 
8, chap. 2, sect. rv. I shall confine myself to the discussion of homol- 
ogies. 

PLURAL OR RELATIVE HomoLoey. 

This is the relation between corresponding parts of different indi- 
viduals; Geoffroy proposed to retain the term ‘‘analogie’’ for this 
relation and to employ ‘‘homologie” only for what is here named sin- 
gle or absolute homology; but the two terms were used indiscrimin- 
ately until 1846, when Owen, 20, 175, proposed the name “special 
homology” for this relation, and “serial homology” for the other. Of 
course the correspondence between the zoological criteria of Agassiz, 
201, 261 and 272, and the anatomical criteria, is provisional until the 
relative value of these criteria themselves is fully ascertained; but it 
appears to me that some good may follow their simultaneous 
presentation upon a diagram, even if it lead merely to a more 
general admission of the principle of subordination of characters. 

J also venture to suggest that since the three higher groups are 
based upon internal structural features and the three lower groups 
upon external features, and since both plan-_of structure and relative 
position of organs, which are branch characters, and outline as deter- 
mined by structure, and relative size of organs, which are family 
characters, are all alike displayed upon a transverse (vertico-lateral) 
section of the whole body, we may hereafter be able to say how the 
other two sections, (latero-longal and vertico-longal) correspond with 
the criteria of the class and genus, the order and species, respectively 
Some other questions in this connection will be discussed hereafter. 


TABLE OF THE SUB-DIVISIONS OF HOMOLOGY.1 


PLURAL OR RELATIVE HOMOLOGY. 


. 


Zoological criteria.? Anatomical criteria. — Characteristic section. of Examples: organs of 
homology. 

Plan of structure. m . ( Relative position. Vertico-lateral. Branch. Dog and Bird 

Mode of execution. 2's } Histological composition Latero-longal ? Class. at «Bat 
Complication of structure. 2 = (Chemical composition.3 Vertico-longal ? Ordinal. ss “Cat 

Form determined by structure. & _ ( Relative size, natural attitude. Vertico-lateral. Family. og « Lycaon 
Ultimate structure. +3 4 Numerical composition. Latero-longal ? Generic. a «Wolf 

Size, ornamentation, habit, etc. rs < | Size, colcr, ete. Vertico-longal? Specific. ef «Dog 


SINGLE, ABSOLUTE OR TROPICAL HOMOLOGY. 


Criteria. Planes. Kind of Homology. Examples. 
A Mekesyntropy. Two thoracic ribs. 
Serial homology or Syn- | Morphical parallelism on EL ae ae Platesyntropy. Brachium and cubitum. 
tropy. same side of planes. Thatevoston eal: 3 Hypsesyntropy. A rib and its cartilage. 
do. with ¢elical antagonism. Pseudantitropy. Dorsal and veutral arches. 
Font homology, or An- | Morphical antagonism on ee onoat Fi pse LOY Male ene tomas TIATONE 
itropy. opposite sides of planes. Wenticolatorall Melcueee High band | eine us. 


1 For spherical homology, see the text, p. 180. 

2 According to Agassiz, 200 and 201, Chap. 2, Lect. vii. : ; : 

3 I am in doubt respecting the relative value of these attributes, and even whether some other should not be substituted for one or both of them. 
The mode of yolk segmentation should perhaps have place here, but that it is not a branch character; see Agassiz, 300 and 101, Chap. 3, Lect. 1. See 
the text for full admission of the provisional nature of this table. 


Wilder.] 180 _ fApril 5, 


SINGLE oR ABSOLUTE OR TROPICAL HomMoLoey. 


Although the detailed comparison of the membra with each other 
was first made by Vicq d’Azyr, yet the germ of tropical homology 
existed in all recognitions of the correspondence of the right and left 
sides of the body; many and vague terms were employed (parallel- 
ism, analogy, homology, correspondence, repetition) which did not 
imply a difference between single and plural homology, or between 
the different kinds of the former. I hope hereafter to show that the 
same methods of comparison and argument are as applicable to single 
as to plural homology; and that cephalo-caudal repetition is compar- 
able to dextro-sinistral repetition. 


SPHERICAL HOMOLOGY. 


Radiality, Ag., (Rem. on) 298, 279.—Radiation, Ag., 201, 292.— 
Radial arrangement, Rol., 294, cxLi11, cLV1.—Radial symmetry, Hux., 
251, 46.—Radiate symmetry, ‘ae , 202, 33.—Radial homology, Miv., 
278, 119.—Spherical homology, Wild., 58, Lect. 1. 


DeEFINITION. The tropical relation between the morphically iden- 
tical, converging spheromeres of a radiate animal. 


Remark. The above definition is chiefly based upon the presenta- 
tion of the subject by Agassiz especially in 200, 3, pp. 79, 260, 261, 
etc.; but there remains much to be done toward clearing up the confu- 
sion in which the whole subject now rests. In the first place two 
distinct ideas are included in the above list of terms; radiality is a 
general name for an abstract idea involving the plan of structure of a 
branch of the animal kingdom; Agassiz admits, 200, 3, 209, 210, 
211, that upon this essential plan of radiality may be superinduced 
an apparent bilateral symmetry, but that he does not regard this as 
constituting a true bilaterality is shown by his contrasting the Radi- 
ates with bilateral animals, 200, 3, 260.1 

But the very existence of such a radiate idea, is questioned by 
Morse, 281, 163, Clark, P20 128, Huxley, 251, 47, and Rolleston, 
294, CxL, who hold that the bilateral symmetry which is quite 
prominent ca the larvee of echinoderms is equally, if not more character- 
istic of the branch; some join the echinoderms with the worms, Rolles- 
ton, 294,152, note; indeed so widely do they differ from Agassiz 
in respect to the classification of the invertebrates, that anything like 


age by his remarks in the Report of the Trustees of the Mus. of Comp. Zool. 
p. 9. 


1871.] 181 [ Wilder. 


a compromise upon a ground between the two extremes seems quite 
impossible. 

Ido not pretend to offer an opinion here, but have not yet seen 
reason for denying the existence of the radiate idea, and would refer 
to 45, 14, for suggestions as to a distinction between the morphical 
term ‘‘radiality” and the telical term, ‘‘radiation.”’ 

Agassiz evidently includes within the abstract idea of radiality, the 
existence of a real homology between the several spheromeres; but it 
is not clear whether the term ‘‘radiate” or ‘‘radial symmetry” means 
that each spheromere is symmetrical in itself as is believed by Pittard, 
293, 850, or with its immediate neighbor, or ‘“‘antitropically,” as im- 
plied by Agassiz, 200, 3, 260; in short, when any two contiguous 
spheromeres are compared, do the inner and outer surfaces correspond 
together, as with two eyes, or does the inner surface of one corre- 
spond with the outer surface of the other, as with two successive 
thoracic ribs? is the homology antitropical or syntropical or only 
general ? 

SYNTROPY. 


Serial homology, Ow., 20, 176; 63, 1, x111.—Symmetry, Ow., Proc. 
Zool. Soc., 1831, p. 67.—Homology, Gervais, (?).—Unreversed serial 
repetition, Pitt., 293, 845.— Homotypy, Ow., 63, 2, 361.— Irrelative 
repetition, Ow., 63, 1, x111.—Rethenfolge oder Nachfolge, Pagens., 54, 
162.—Serial symmetry, Miv., 277, 292.—Serial actinology, Miv., 278, 
120.— Homoplastic serial homology, Miv., 278, 119.— Homogenetic se- 
rial homology, Miv., 278, 119.—Similar parallel repetition, Coues, 70, 
149.1 

Syntropy, syntrope, syntropous, syntropic or syntropical. 2 

DerryiTion. The morphotropic relation between parts upon the 
same side of a structural plane. 


EXAMPLE. See Mekesyntropy, Platesyntropy and Hypsesyntropy. 


MEKESYNTROPY or SYNTROPY («jx0c, length, and syntropy). 


Irrelative or vegetative repetition, Ow., 20, 176, (1846), 63, XIII, 
(1866).—Unreversed serial repetition, Pitt., 298, 845, (1850).—Serial 
homology, Ow., 63, 1, x11 (1866).—Longiserial homology, Wild., 58, 
Lect. 1, 1867.—Homogenetic serial homology, Miv., 278, 119 (1870). 


1 With few exceptions, the synonyms for the names of ideas are given in chrono- 
logical order. 


2The other terms may be similarly inflected. 


Wilder.] 182 {April 5, 


DEFINITION. The syntropical relation between BS upon the 
same side of the vertico-lateral plane. 


EXAMPLE. Two thoracic ribs or vertebra. 


REMARK. Since this is the kind of syntropy which is most appar- 
ent and most commonly treated of, it may be allowable to use the 
shorter term syntropy for the longer one when no misunderstanding 
can arise. 


PLATESYNTROPY (72étoc, breadth). 


Actinoloqy (serial, correlated, etc.), Miv., 278, 118.—Latiserial ho- 
mology, Wild., 58, Lect. 1. 


DeFINITION. The morphotropical relation between parts upon the 
same side of the vertico-longal plane. 


EXAMPLES. Brachium and cubitum; two right maxillary teeth; 
two dermal scuta of right side of armadillo. 


HYPSESYNTROPY (Uzos, height). 


Vertiserial homology, Wild., 58, Lect. 1. 
(Other synonyms will be included under Pseudantitropy). 


DEFINITION. The syntropical relation between parts upon one 
side of the longo-lateral plane, which, in vertebrates at least, I am in- 
clined to believe should not bisect the body of a single individual into 
a dorsal and a ventral region, but should pass between two individuals 
of opposite sexes. 


Examptes. A rib and itscartilage; two muscular bundles of the 
same muscular segment (myocomma, Owen; myotome, Good sir). 


REMARK. Probably no objection exists to giving the name pro- 
posed to the relation between a rib and its cartilage; for both lie ven- 
trad of the vertebral axis; but so general is the impression that the 
vertebrate body presents a “dorso-ventral symmetry” (Macl., 23, 671; 
Pittard, 293, 851; Wyman, 55, 253; Spencer, 299, 2,186; Coues, 
70, 150), that it is not easy to show that this relation between organs 
lying upon opposite sides of the vertebral axis is really one of syn- 
tropy rather than of antitropy; yet I am convinced that this ‘“‘sym- 
metry’’ which is so striking in some fishes, is one of appearance 
chiefly and affects the external form only; certain it is that nothing 


1871.] 183 [ Wilder. 


like a real homology has ever been shown to exist between the inter- 
nal organs of the dorsal and ventral regions; and the development 
of the ovum results in a differentiation of dorsal from ventral, which is 
not suggestive of any such homologous relation as is so apparent be- 
tween right and left, or between cephalic and cercal, regions. 

This important question will be hereafter indicated as one of the 
problems to be solved. At present, I will only state my conviction 
that the complete vertebrate animal con- rs 
sists of two individuals of different sexes, 
placed face to face; there then results 
a true antitropical homology in all three 
directions corresponding with the three 
diameters of a solid; a lateral homology or 
‘“‘nlatetropy’’ between two right and left 
halves of this compound individual, a lon- 
gal homology or ‘‘meketropy” between its 
cephalic and cercal regions, and a vertical 
homology or ‘‘hypsetropy’’ between the 
dorsal regions of the two individuals and 
between the ventral regions in like man- 
ner, as in fig. 2. Such a homology of 
three directions might be exemplified in Fig. 2. 

a perfect double monster by “anterior duplicity,’’ described and 
figured as “‘Zipophage” by St. Hilaire, 235, Pl. x1v, fig. 3.2 


PSEUDANTITROPY. 


Polar relation of back and belly, Oken, 285, Par. 2093, (1810).— 
Dorso-ventral symmetry, Macl., 22, 667, (1849).— Antero-posterior 
symmetry, Pitt., 293, 851, (1850).—Tergality (in part), Ag., (Rem. on) 
298, 279, (1861).— Dorso-ventral polarity, Dana, 218, 351, (1863).— 
Verticality (in part), Wild., 45, 14, (1865).— Bipolarity, Clark, 211, 
265, (1865).— Vertipolar homology (in part), Wild., 58, Lect. 1, 
(1867).—Vertical homology, Miv., 278, 120, (1870).—Dorso-abdominal 


1 Prior suggestions of this idea are contained in Par., 2955 of 285: but indeed, 
there are few morphological ideas of the present day, germs of which cannot be 
found in the extraordinary work here cited; and althoughitis not altogether satls- 
factory to find one’s most valued conceptions thus ambiguously anticipated, no 
worker in homology should try to lessen Oken’s just fame, or hold any other than 
the opinion which one of his greatest pupils has given us concerning his work. 
Agassiz, 200, and 201, chap. 111, Sect. v. 

2This would be a Dicephalus tetrabrachius tetrapus,in the nomenciature of 
Fisher, 229, 61. 


Wilder.] 184 [April 5, 


symmetry, Coues, 70, 150, (1870).—Supero-inferior symmetry, Coues, 
70, 150, (1870.)— Correlated serial secondary actinology, Miv., 278, 
120, (1870).— Vertical symmetry, Miv., 279, 165, (1871).—Intrinsic 
bilateral symmetry (of membra), Fols., 40, (?),1 (1864).—Antitropy, 
(?) (with Radiates), Ag., 200, 3, 260. 

DeFIniTion. The anpereutty antitropic relation weuiween parts 
which are telically opposed to each other, but lie upon the same side 
of a structural plane. 


Examp.es. Of vertical pseudantitropy, the dorsal and hemal arches 
and the dorsal and anal fins; of longitudinal pseudantitropy, corre- 
sponding maxillary and mandibular teeth; the anterior and posteror 
ends of the sternum in many quadrupeds; the prearmal and _post- 
armal borders of manus (as of Chelydra serpentina, Flow., 71, 253); 
of lateral pseudantitropy, the inner and outer canthi of the eye; the 
opposite sides of an apparently bilateral radiate, (Ag., 200, 3, wood- 
cuts 88-91). 


Remark. The question involved here has been indicated under 
hypsesyntropy and spherical homology. No doubt it will appear to 
many that it is a question of words rather than of facts; but until I 
am convinced that ideas are not embodied in material forms, I shall 
aim to at least show what confusion we are now in respecting the 
nomenclature of both the ideas and the forms. 


ANTITROPY. 


Homologie symmetriqué, Foltz, 39, 51, (1863).—Symmetrie, Flour., 
228, fere, (1844). —Duplicity, Ok., 285, Par. 78, (1810).—Polarity, 
Ok., 285, Par. 76.(1810).—Antitropy (?), Schimper and Braun, (?).— 
Symmetry, Ok., 285, Par. 2096, (1810).—Respective symmetry, Archi- 
tecture.—A ntitropic relation, (?), Ag., 200, 3, 260, (1860).—Lateral- 
ity, Ag., (Rem. on), 298, 279, (1861).— Anatomical symmetry, Fols., 
40 (?), (1864).—Antitypy, Wild., 45, 15, (1865).—Polar homology, 
Wild., 45, 14, (1865).— Opposition oder Spiegelwilde, Pagens., 54, 
162, (1867).— Polar antitypy, Coues, 70, 372, (1870).— Reversed 
repetition,? Coues, 70, 152, (1870).—General antagonism, ib., 193.— 
Antitypical correlation, ib., 222.—Repetitive homology, ib., 398.—Oppo- 
site reversed repetition, ib., 149.—Symmetrical repetition, ib., 149.—True 
symmetrical antagonism, ib., 149. 


1 Here, as generally elsewhere, when an interrogation point stands for the num- 
ber of the page, it is because I have only manuscript copies of the papers referred 
to. 


* These are rather definitions than real synonyms. 


1871.] 185 [ Wilder. 


Derimition. The morphotropic relation between parts upon oppo- 
site sides of structural planes. 


EXAMPLE. See hypsetropy, meketropy and platetropy. 


No better evidence of the need fora uniform and simple terminology 
of ideas could be asked, than is given by the above synonomy; but it 
will be observed that the third and fourth terms mean something more 
than the rest; it is difficult to say just what Oken meant by duplicity 
and indeed many of the great physiophilosopher’s expressions are be- 
yond strict logical interpretation, although it is evident that he ine 
wardly perceived much more than he was able to express in definite 
terms; his Physiophilosophy was written in a kind of inspiration, 
(as he admits in the preface to the English translation), and inspira- 
tion is only suggestive in science, never conclusive; his term polarity 
too is used in many different senses, and Wyman has well said, 55, 
257, that ‘‘it does not appear precisely what he meant by the word 

‘pole.’” 

At any rate polarity (and perhaps duplicity) is the name for a 
general law of organization which is analogous to the physical polar 
force, Wyman, 55, 254; the result of its undisturbed action would be 
an absolute symmetry; the one is a cause, the other the effect of its 
action; and all the other terms given, in our list are synonyms of 
symmetry, and not of polarity; I do not propose a name for the force 
for it is not yet understood; but I would urge that symmetry is in 
eligible as a technical term on account of its common use in several 
other senses; of all the other terms antitropy seems to express most 
clearly the idea we wish to convey, a respective symmetry of struct- 
ure and not necessarily of external form; for this latter is early 
and most extensively modified by the telical antagonist of our hypo- 
thetical ‘‘polar force,’’ the so-called ‘‘vital force.”” See Wyman, 55, 
258. 

But while antitropy seems best adapted for our purpose, it is not 
quite clear that those who have already employed it have meant to 
convey the precise idea which we have under consideration; I have 
not been able to obtain the works of Schimper and Braun, but I judge 
that they used antitropy to designate any antagonistic relation be-- 
tween parts of the plant embryo, and between opposite leaves upon 
the stem, although I am not sure that they always included an idea of 
real homology in this antagonism of position; Agassiz has used the 
term antitropy to express the relation between spheromeres upon oppo- 
site sides of a radiate, 200, 3, 260; and here, of course, the general 


Wilder.] 186 [April 5, 


homology is perfect, but as he discriminates between the radiates 
and the bilateral animals of the other branches, it would seem better 
to call this relation of opposite spheromeres, simply symmetry, or per- 
haps pseudantitropy, and to confine antitropy to the three higher 
branches; for otherwise, we should have to devise another and differ- 
ent term for the relation in them; laterality does not seem quite suit- 
able, because, as used by Agassiz, (Rem. on 278, 279), “‘it relates to 
the disposition of organs upon any two sides of the body, without 
reference to symmetry”; and it is not evident that the idea of real | 
homology is included in this laterality. 


PLATETROPY. 


Symmetrie, Fr.—Symmetrie, Ger.—Symmetria, Lat.—Symmetry, Gn | 
part), Most authors.— Respective symmetry, Architecture.— Lateral | 
symmetry, Ok., 285, Par. 2114, (1810).— Bilateral symmetry, Ag., — 
(Rem. on) 298, (1861).—Homologie symetrique laterale, Foltz, 39, 
51, (1863).—Bilaterality, Clark, 211, 265, (1865).—Laztitypy, Wild., | 
45, 14, (1865).—Right and left symmetry, Wy., 55, 254, (1867).— 
Latipolar homology, Wild., 58, Lect. 1, (1867).— Lateral homology, 
Miv., 278, 119, (1870).—Lateritypy, Coues, 70, 151, (1870).—Trans- 
verse symmetrical repetition, Coues, 70, 150, (1870).— Transverse 
polar antagonism, Coues, 70, 150, (1870).— Latitropy, Wild., 74, 
Jere, (1871). - 


DEFINITION. The antitropical relation between parts upon oppo- 
site sides of the longo-vertical plane. 


EXAMPLE. The relation between the right and left ear, nostril or 
kidney. 

ReMARK. This kind of symmetry is so evident with the majority ’ 
of vertebrates and articulates, and with many mollusks and appar- 
ently with some radiates, that it is generally recognized and even 
thought to be absolute in some cases. But the perfect symmetry of 
crystals is never realized, according to high authorities, and Wy- 
man, 55, 247, says “it may be doubted whether absolute symme- 
try exists anywhere.” In 312, 1 have given instances of deviations 
from symmetry from many groups of animals, and have thus tried to 
bridge over from one side the gulf which is generally supposed to 
wholly separate lateral symmetry (platetropy) from longal symmetry 
(meketropy) ; the corresponding work from the other side will consist 
in the presentation of evidence of the close homology which, in many 
cases,exists between parts at the two ends of the body; and the first 


1871.] 187 [Wilder. 


step toward this is to recognize that morphically, as shown upon the 
diagram, these two regions are to each other, as are the right and 
left sides. 


HYPsETROPY. 


Sexual homology, Wild., 58, Lect. 1.— Dual homology, Wild., 58, 
Lect. 1. 


DerrniTion. The antitropical relation between parts of the two 
sexes, when facing each other. 


Exampite. The male and female mammary glands; sterna, etc. 


Remark. This kind of homology often but not necessarily in- 
cludes the idea of inserted development; the difference between it 
and the apparent dorso-abdominal homology within a single individual 
has been already indicated, [p. 183]. . 


MEKETROPY. 


Symmetry in length, Ok., 285, 2114.—Anterior and posterior symme- 
try, Wy., 35, 317.—Fore and hind symmetry, Wy., 49, 176.— Antero- 
posterior symmetry, Wy., 55, 277.—Fore and aft polarity, Dana, 218, 
351.—Antero-posterior polarity, Dana, 218, 351.—Cephality, (?), Ag., 
(Rem. on), 298.— Longitudinal homology, Wild., 45, 14.— Longitypy, 
Wild., 45, 15.— Anterior and posterior repetition, Wild., 45, 17.— 
Longitudinal polarity, Wild., 50, 194.—Longitudinal symmetry, Coues, 
70, 149.—Longitudinal antitypy, Coues, 70, 151.—Symmetry at oppo- 
site ends, Ogilvie, 283, 156.—Longitropy, Wild., 74, fere—Symmetry 
of superior and inferior regions, Gerdy, 9, (?).—Homologie symmet- 
rique du meme cété, Foltz, 39, 420.—Homotypy (implied in homotype), 
Wy., 55, fere. 

Derinition. The morphotropical relation between parts upon 
opposite sides of a vertical lateral plane. 


ExAmpie. The cephalic and caudal regions of an embryo; the 
armus and skelos; a double-ended ferry-boat offers a familiar example 
of meketropy. 

ReMARK. Vaecue suggestions of a polar or symmetrical relation 
between the anterior and posterior regions of the vertebrate body are 
contained in the writings of Oken. ‘‘The idea underlying his 
statement that the two ends of the body do repeat each other, is we 
believe, correct;’? Wyman, 55, 257. Duges (Traité de Phys. Comp. 


Wilder.] 188 [April 12, 


2, 204), seems to have noted the antagonistic relation of the ancon 
and genu and Humphrey, 36, 14, admitted a functional antagonism 
of the proximal parts of the membra; Gerdy, 9, (?), had already 
taken an artistic view of the symmetrical relation of the two ends of 
the body which he called ‘‘superior’’ and ‘‘ inferior, ’”’ which, like 
Humphrey, he traced in the proximal parts of the membra. Agassiz 
probably included under the term cephality an idea of homology, but 
it is not distinctly expressed by him or by Dana; and the idea of a 
symmetrical homology between parts at the two poles of a longitudi- 
nal axis has been evolved into something like clearness by Wyman 
and his pupils. All the arguments in favor of the generic term anti- 
tropy apply with even greater force to the specific term meketropy, 
for otherwise a compound term would be required.} 


Section of Microscopy. April 12, 1871. 
Mr. E. Bicknell in the chair. Hight members present. 


Mr. R. C. Greenleaf stated that he had hastily examined 
some soundings made by Lieut. Brook, between San Fran- 


cisco and the Hawaiian Islands. In samples from a depth of © 


3,300 fathoms, he had found in abundance a peculiar form 


which he had not yet been able to identify. In 2,500 fath-- 


oms TJriceratium spinosum and Hunodia gibba Bailey, were 
found. Many beautiful Polycistina occurred in soundings in 
2,600 fathoms. Mr. Greenleaf promised an extended report 
on these soundings at a future meeting. 


Mr. C. Stodder made some remarks on the nature of the 
Podura scale, so called, which strictly belongs to a species of 
Lepidocyrtus. 

For thirty years it has been considered the best test object 
for the microscope. About a year ago Dr. Royston Pigott 
published a paper, in which he declared that the so called 
exclamation marks were illusions, and gave reasons for be- 
lieving that this appearance is caused by two rows of par- 


1 To be concluded. 


1871.] 189 : [Putnam. 


allel striz crossing each other at an angle. This paper ex- 
cited much discussion among Microscopists, and the majority 
of students now hold that these exclamation marks are prob- 
ably illusive, while the true structure of the scale is still 
doubtful. Mr. Stodder believed that these markings, what- 
ever their nature, are confined to one surface of the scale. 
Photographs of the scales above mentioned, as well as of 
Amphipleura pellucida and Surrirella gemma, taken and - 
presented by Dr. J. J. Woodward, were exhibited. 


Wednesday, April 19, 1871. 


Mr. Wm. H. Niles in the chair. Thirty-three persons present. 


Mr. F. W. Putnam made a verbal communication on the 
classification of fishes, suggested by considerations on the 
discovery of the so called Ceratodus, in Australia. 


Mr. Edwin Bicknell, of the Museum of Comparative 
Zoology, said, a few months since, Prof. Agassiz handed him 
a fossil tooth of the Ceratodus to have sections made from it. 
On making the sections and submitting them to the micro- 
scope, he had found the structure to correspond very closely 
with such teeth of sharks as he had examined, and he con- 
sidered any one to be perfectly warranted in referring the 
fossil tooth to the shark family, although subsequent discov- 
ery of the living fish shows it not to belong to it. Prof. 
Agassiz has teeth of the recent fish, which will be subjected 
to examination hereafter. 

Mr. Bicknell said he considered it unsafe to found genera, 
or even species, upon the microscopical structure of a single 
tooth or bone, although it has proved correct in many cases: 
Prof. Owen founded a genus of extinct reptiles (Labyrintho- 
don) upon the structure of some fossil teeth. Prof. Jeffries 


Knight.] 190 [April 19, 


Wyman had found the same structure in the teeth of a 
recent fish, the Lepidosteus (Gar pike of the Western rivers), 
but not quite so complicated in arrangement. 


Mr. L. 8. Burbank, of Lowell, who was present by invita- 
tion, gave the following views on the Eozoonal limestones of 
eastern Massachusetts : — 


The observations, the results of which are here presented, relate 
chiefly to those deposits of crystalline limestone, that occur in the 
band of granitic gneiss which extends in a south-westerly direction 
from near the mouth of the Merrimack River thee the entire 
breadth of the State. 

To this formation belong the so-called granites of Westford and 
Chelmsford, which are extensively quarried for building purposes. 
In many other places also the gneiss of this series is highly erystal- 
line and not readily distinguished by its mineralogical character from 
a true granite. 

This belt of gneiss is bounded on the northwest by the slates of 
the Merrimack and Nashua vallies, which apparently rest conform- 
ably upon it. Moreover, there appears to be a gradual transition in 


passing westward, from the coarsely crystalline gneiss, through mica | 


and hornblende schists, to the thin bedded clay slates like the roof- 
ing slate of Lancaster. It may also be observed, especially in the 
vicinity of Lowell and Chelmsford, that the coarser granitoid gneiss 
occurs in beds alternating with the thin bedded and fine grained mica 
and hornblende slates ; while these latter pass by insensible erates 
tions into a clay state. 

From a series of careful observations on these rocks, I am con- 
vinced that the slates above referred to cannot be separated from 
the underlying gneiss, but form with it a continuous series ; the whole 
apparently underlying the great gneissic formation that stretches 
across the State from north to south, through the central and west- 
ern part of Worcester County, and which includes the rocks of Wa- 
chusett mountain and the adjacent highlands. 

Soon after the discovery of Eozoon Canadense by Mr. Bicknell, 
in the serpentine limestone of Newbury, it was also identified by Dr. 
Dawson in specimens collected by me at Chelmsford; as noticed by 
Dr. Hunt in the American Journal of Science for January, 1870. 
The specimens then examined were not from the rock in place, but 
were obtained from some outlying masses near one of the quarries. 


1871.] 191 [Burbank. 


These discoveries led me to undertake a, more careful examination 
of other limestone deposits included in the same formation ; and in 
May, 1870, I devoted several days to a more thorough exploration of 
some of the old limestone quarries, including the well known mineral 
localities of Bolton and Boxboro’. 

These examinations resulted in the discovery of the eozoonal rock 
at all the quarries visited; though it appeared in the greatest abun- 
dance at Bolton and Chelmsford. 

Specimens of the rock from Bolton and Boxboro’ were carefully 
examined by Mr. Bicknell of the Museum of Comp. Zoology; and 
the radiating and branching tubuli, like those of the Chelmsford 
specimens, were clearly identified by him. 

The eozoonal rock was also found in place at several of the 
_ quarries, and its position in relation to the other rocks observed. At 
all the quarries that I have visited, the limestone has been so 
thoroughly worked out that the limits of its extent at the surface can 
be readily traced. So completely are some of the quarries exhausted 
that it is now hardly possible to obtain specimens of the rock that 
constituted the mass of the deposits. The reiation of the limestone 
to the enclosing rocks can thus be readily seen. 

By the careful study of these relations, as observed at the time 
above referred to, and by reference to specimens collected and facts 
observed during many previous visits to some of the quarries, the 
conclusions have been reached which are here presented. 

1. These limestones are not true stratified rocks laid down with the 
gneiss, but are subsequent deposis of a vein-like character. The fact 
that some of these deposits appear to be interstratified with the 
eneiss, and also are found along a line apparently coinciding with 
the strike of the strata, may seem to indicate that they are parts of 
original strata included in the gneiss; but their position may also be 
explained in accordance with another theory, in support of which I 
shall offer some evidence. 

2. The principal deposits occur along the line of an anticlinal, fill- 
ing cavities produced by the folding and the falling down of portions of 
the included strata of the gneiss. ‘The anticlinal position is most 
clearly shown at Chelmsford, where there are four veins or masses of 
the limestone, in two lines coinciding with the strike of the gneiss. 

These lines are about half a mile apart, extending in a N. E. and 
S. W. direction; the strike, as observed by the compass, being N. 65° 
E. ‘The strata of the gneiss dip in opposite directions from these 


PLATE I. 


Since 2 EPR Ys ge” 
nate Se 


; tig & 


eB < 


bene WK Bi 


AQ 


a 


ke @ 
a ae 


ve 
Pet 
4. Be 
Rea en 
ore 
es 
gd. Sad 


Ss 


Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 


Fig. 4. 


PLATE II. 


Burbank.] 194 [April 19, 


lines; toward the northwest at an angle of about 65°, to the south- 
east at an angle varying from about 70° to a nearly vertical position. 

The deposits are all of very limited extent, the largest appearing at 
the surface, not more than 220 ft. in length, the width at the widest 
part being about 60 ft., including the intervening bands of gneiss. 

The accompanying sketch of one of the largest quarries was made 
from a survey with the Plane Table, by a friend, Mr. Nathaniel Hill 
of Lowell, to whose kindly aid I am much indebted. 

This quarry is situated about a mile southwest from the village of 
Chelmsford, near the Littleton road. It has been abandoned for 
many years, and is partly filled with earth and rubbish so that very 
little limestone is now accessible, if indeed it extends to any great 
depth. In some places it can be seen that all the limestone has 
been removed, exposing the gneiss at the bottom of the excavations. 

The folding of the strata, enclosing cavities ae held the lime- 
_stone can here be plainly seen. 

In the sketch, Pl. I, Fig. 1, the unbroken lines show the walls of 
the cavities opening to the sikiee, from which the limestone has 
been removed. ‘The space enclosed Des the dotted lines at (a) repre- 
sents one of the cavities which is completely arched over by the 
gneiss, forming a cavern about twenty feet in length. 

At (0) is a lateral cavity or pocket, connected with the larger cav- 
ern by a small opening through a thin stratum of the gneiss. At the 
opposite extremity of this part of the quarry, the gneiss of the walls 
is also curved and folded over the limestone. 

At (c) a projecting mass of the gneiss partly enclosed a pocket of 
limestone. 

At the excavations marked (/) and (/’) the limestone apparently, 
extended to only a few feet in depth. ‘The cavities in which it oc- 
curs were evidently produced by the dislocation of a portion of the 
gneiss of the central fold. This dislocation appears to be of a very 
small extent vertically, the greatest depth to which the limestone ex- 
tended being not more than ten or twelve feet from the surface. At 
the extremity of the central excavation (£), at the point shown by 
the dotted lines at (d), a small cavern from which the limestone has 
been nearly all removed is completely covered by the folding of a 
layer of the gneiss, which also forms a portion of the thin partition that 
separates this small excavation from the larger one at (C). 

Professor W. H. Niles, (who has visited these quarries with me, and 
whose careful observations will, I think, confirm my views,) pointed out 


1871.] 195 , [Burbank 


the fact here that the mass of gneiss, the dislocation of which evi- 
dently formed this little cavern, may still be seen, resting against the 
dividing wall a few feet below; where it has been exposed by the 
removal of the limestone. 

I have not been able to ascertain to what depth the limestone ex- 
tended in the larger excavations. The section (PI. I, Fig. 2) does 
not indicate the relative depth of the original excavations, which are 
here partly filled with loose rocks and earth. 

It will be seen by this section that if we suppose the strata to have 
been originally extended upward, and folded or arched over, as actu- 
ally appears in other parts of the quarry, we should have a fold 
within a fold, separated by the spaces (C) and (DJ), which have be- 
come filled with the limestone; while, as before noticed, portions of 
the central fold have also been dislocated, forming cavities for the 
deposition of the limestone. 

That such was the actual structure, and that the limestone was 
deposited in cavities mostly closed at the top, which have since been 
uncovered and exposed at the surface by the denuding action of the 
drift, seems to me a reasonable deduction from the facts observed. 

It is worthy of note that the gneiss of the enclosing walls of the 
cavities, and that of the dividing bands and the projecting masses 
nearly enclosed by the limestone,—is all of the same character with 
that of the surrounding strata not adjacent to the quarry. A speci- 
men broken from the projecting mass at (c) cannot be distinguished 
from the ordinary gneiss of this region. In the direction of the 
strike of the strata also, at a few yards distance from the quarries, 
the common rock of the region is found with apparently no traces of 
calcareous matter. In the line along which several of the quarries 
occur, there are intervals of several miles where no traces of lime- 
stone have been found, though the ledges are exposed at the surface 
in numerous places. 

The aggregate length of all the limestone deposits that occur along 
a line of some twenty-five miles in length, is probably less than one 
thousand feet. The only other quarry at Chelmsford, which lies 
nearly in the range with the one sketched, contained a mass of lime- 
stone filling a cavity of a lenticular form, about sixty feet in length by 
twenty-five feet in width in the widest part. 

Other quarries in Bolton, Stow and Chelmsford, show a similarity 
in structure to the one described here. The separation into two or 
more sections by walls of gneiss, may be seen in at least three of 


Burbank.] 196 [April 15, 


those that J have examined. At one of the quarries on Robbins’ 
Hill, in Chelmsford, it can be seen that the limestone rested against 
the irregularly fractured ends of strata of gneiss, which fill a small 
space in one of the excavations, completely dividing the limestone 
into two masses. A similar appearance is less plainly shown at (e) 
in the sketch given. 

I propose next to present some facts in regard to the mineralogical 
character and relative position, in these deposits, of the various mate- 
rials of which they are composed. Some of these facts and conclu- 
sions cannot readily be verified by examining the exhausted quarries 
at Chelmsford, but have been derived from observations made, and 
specimens collected, several years ago at Bolton, while the work of 
excavation was still in progress. 

The central and principal part of the mass which filled the veins 
and pockets and constituted the bulk of the deposit, was a coarsely 
crystalline magnesian limestone, homogeneous in structure, and showing 
no traces of stratification. In examining numerous specimens of this 
limestone from the different quarries, I have found in it no traces of 
the eozoonal structure. 

The various silicates which form the large number of distinct min- 
erals for which these localities are noted, occur only attached to, or 
near, the enclosing walls of the cavities, and generally in bands or lay- 
ers, though sometimes irregularly distributed. ‘They are found gen- 
erally in pretty regular succession. A network of interlacing crystals 
of actinolite, with smoky quartz, calcite and phlogopite, may be seen 
attached to the walls; and passing inward there are found pyroxene, 
scapolite, apatite, boltonite, fine fibrous tremolite, etc.; and also green 
serpentine in irregular bands or layers, traversed by narrow seams of 
chrysotile; or scattered through the rock in irregular rounded grains 
and masses, with intervening spaces filled with calcite. 

In these portions of calcite are found the radiating and branching 
forms that have been identified and described as belonging to the 
structure of Eozoon. The granules of serpentine are sometimes ar- 
ranged quite regularly in concentric lines, but more commonly 
appear irregularly scattered and varying indefinitely in form and size. 

Fig. 1 (PL 12), shows the arrangement of the serpentine in a piece 
of the Chelmsford ophi-calcite or serpentine limestone. This and 
the following figures were printed from plates copied by the electro- 
tvpe process from decalcified surfaces of the rock. In this specimen 
the larger calcite spaces showed under the microscope a great abun- 


1871.] 1 OF [Burbank. 


dance of the “ tubuli” in bundles, and radiating and branching forms. 

The undulating line that divides this specimen illustrates the 
banded structure that often appears in the rock. The tubuli are 
found on both sides of this line, but are most abundant in the part 
which shows the coarser structure. 

Fig. 2 (also from Chelmsford) shows at the base a mass of the ser- 
pentine intersected by narrow seams of chrysotile, and attached to a 
portion of the rock in which the decalcified spaces show the tubuli in 
great abundance, attached to the serpentine grains as if growing out 
from their surfaces. Some of the grains are surrounded by a fibrous 
layer, closely resembling the “true cell wall” of Eozoon, as I have 
seen it In the Canadian specimens. The surfaces of many of the 
grains are covered with acicular crystals penetrating the calcite. 
Some of these, as they extend into the calcite, become rounded and 
curved, losing the acicular character. 

In nearly all the specimens examined, bundles of acicular fibres, 
apparently of tremolite, are scattered abundantly in the calcite. 
The appearance of some of these is partially shown in fig. 3 

Fig. 4 represents a specimen which, in its structure, closely resem- 
bles the “ acervuline” portion of some of the best specimens from 
Canada. The calcite spaces show the characteristic tubuli of Eozoon, 
and these are invariably smaller than in the specimens of coarser 
structure. 

I have observed in this piece, also, some traces of a regular ar- 
- rangement of the serpentine granules (not well shown in the figure). 
Several of these appear on different parts of the surface arranged in 
regular curved lines, the granules composing each little are being of 
very nearly the same size and form. Curves of this kind formed by 
four or five grains, or more, are too common to escape notice in a 
careful examination of the polished surface. 

J notice a similar structure in a fine specimen of the eozoonal rock 
from Canada, which I received from Dr. Hunt. 

In some portions of the rock the serpentine appears embedded in 
the limestone in definite crystalline forms, apparently pseudomorphs 
of chrysolite, or boltonite. In the quarries of Boxboro’ and Carlisle, 
cinnamon garnet is abundant, associated with scapolite and green 
pyroxene or coccolite, with calcite. I have examined the calcite of 
many of these specimens for traces of the eozoonal structure, but, so 
far, with negative results. In fact, so far as I have observed, the 
tubuli invariably occur in the rock associated with serpentine. 


Burbank. ] 198 : ; [April 19, 
\ 

In a hasty examination of a specimen from Bolton, I at first 
thought it contained no serpentine, but more careful observations 
proved that the rock was filled with serpentine grains, so completely 
bleached by exposure that they were not easily distinguished by the 
eye. 

The question in regard to the particular manner in which these 
limestones, with the associated minerals, were deposited, and the 
cavities filled, is one of great interest and importance in connection 
with this subject. I do not, however, propose to enter into any ex- 


tended discussion on this point. On this and other questions con- . 


nected with this investigation, I hope to hear from Prof. Perry of the 
Museum of Comparative Zoology, who has made extensive observa- 
tions on the crystalline limestones elsewhere, and who visited the 
Chelmsford quarries with me last September. I remember distinctly 
that on entering the first excavation at one of the quarries, he at 
once pronounced the deposit ‘“‘a true mineral vein.” He had pre- 
viously expressed a similar opinion derived from my description of 
these quarries. It had not occurred to me to give them precisely 
this designation, thouch I had, as.indicated in this paper, become 
convinced by my own previous studies that the limestones are not 
true stratified rocks, but are deposits which have filled cavities 
formed by the folding and faulting of the strata of gneiss. 

Some facts have been stated in this communication for which I 
offer no theories in explanation. I do not claim a sufficient knowl- 


edge of the structure of the foraminifera.to found any argument upon - | 


the microscopic appearances that I have observed, nor do I mean 
now to enter into a discussion of the general question as to the true 
character of the Eozoon Canadense, as described by Carpenter and 
Dawson. Iam unable, however, to reconcile the facts here stated, 
with the theory that the forms in these rocks, which have been identi- 
fied as belonging to the structure of Eozoon, are of organic origin. 

On the other hand, it appears to me not unreasonable to infer that 
the so-called “tubuli” that are so abundant in these rocks are semi- 
crystalline forms that have been deposited with the serpentine and other 
minerals on the walls of the cavities, by infiltration of waters charged 
with mineral matters. 


Mr. Burbank was followed by Mr. W. H. Niles, who en- 
dorsed the views which he presented. 


1871.] 199 [Perry. 


Professor J. B. Perry said :-— 


It is perhaps fitting for me to offer a few remarks on the ““Eozoon” 
limestone of eastern Massachusetts, since I have been long engaged 
in the study of the foliated (or Laurentian) series of rocks, in which 
it occurs; insomuch, also, as I discovered many years ago what 
seemed to me indubitable evidence that portions of this limestone ~ 
are of vein-like origin; and because I was the first to suggest, and 
really to make out, that some of the limestones of eastern Massachu- 
setts have a similar vein-structure. It likewise properly devolves 
‘upon me to say something at this time, as, after visiting Chelms- 
ford, and satisfying myself in regard to the actual character of the 
calcareous masses containing the supposed organic remains, I agreed 
to present some of the more important points bearing on the strati- 
graphy of the rocks, whenever my friend, Mr. Burbank, of Lowell, 
should be ready to discuss the existing evidence, and especially that 
furnished by the microscope, as to the organic or inorganic character 
of the enclosed “‘ Kozoon.” 

As geologists have generally supposed that all limestones are strat- 
ified rocks, a few words may be requisite on this point. They are 
more especially needful at the present time, and in connection with 
the subject under consideration, as they may serve to meet an objec- 
tion which is likely to occur to many minds, — particularly such as 
hold to the organic, or “sedimentary ” derivation of all limestones. 
It is true that Dr. Emmons, as is well known, endeavored to show 
that limestones occur, not only as stratified beds, but also as intrusive 
masses; but this doctrine was never widely received, however much 
truth may have lain concealed at its foundation. Beginning my study 
of the limestones connected with the foliated series of rocks, in the 
light of this view, I finally became convinced in 1861, and set forth 
in a course of lectures delivered during the same year, that some of 
these limestones in Vermont and New York have a vein-like struc- 
ture, and should be regarded as true vein-stones. Having entered 
anew, some four or five years ago, upon the study of the rocks of 
eastern Massachusetts, I at once became convinced that limestones 
in Stoneham, Newbury, and some other townships in this portion of 
the State, are also vein-rocks. 

Such limestones are to be met with, as has been in part already 
implied, in association with the foliated series of rocks, both in east- 
ern and western Vermont, and in various parts of Massachusetts. 


Perry. 200 [April 19, 


They also occur among the Adirondacks of New York. Lime- 
stones of this character — hand specimens of which can be scarcely, 
if they can be at all, discriminated from given santples of strat- 
ified Silurian limestones— are likewise found in Vermont, New 
Hampshire, and elsewhere, in the form of dikes. In most of these 
cases close examination clearly shows, and perhaps it will hereafter 
as clearly evince in them all, that the dike-like masses were formed in 
a vein-like way by gradual deposition, extending from the enclosing 
walls toward the centres of what once were cavities. Similar 
masses of calcareous vein-stone are to be met with in St. Lawrence 
County, N. Y., and in some other places, penetrating beds of sand- 
stone. Indeed, were there time, it would not be difficult to show 
that rocks of this character may be found in association with forma- 
tions of greatly varying, if not of almost every, age. 

These, and other similar cases which might be readily cited, are 
suited to remove the objection that all limestones are stratified rocks, 
and show that no one can reasonably look for, or expect to find 
organic remains in any such masses. Having made out the points. 
just advanced years ago, in regard to some of the so-called prim- 
itive, or saccharoidal limestones, I have been skeptical ever since 
in respect to the supposed organic nature of the “Eozoon.” Ac- 
cordingly, on the announcement, in August, 1869, of the discovery 
of this strange form in the limestone of Newbury, I at once dis- 
credited its assumed organic character, — discredited the assumption 
that it represents, as its name indicates, the dawn of animal life on — 
the globe, — on the ground, among other reasons, of its occurrence 
in calcareous masses of a vein-like origin. Of course; on hearing a 
few weeks later, of a like discovery in Chelmsford, and seeing a 
specimen of the rock holding the supposed organic forms, I was pre- 
pared by my previous experience for a similar conviction in respect 
‘to the matter involved in the new announcement. This I im- 
mediately expressed, in one of the lectures on the foliated rocks, 
which I was then delivering in course, and I was fortunately able 
fully to confirm my impression by personal examination, on going to 
the quarry several months later with Mr. Burbank, who had pre- 
viously, and has since, devoted himself with commendable assiduity 
and care to the study of these older formations. 

On visiting the Chelmsford quarries and observing what had been 
before considered, and at first sight might be readily taken, as evi- 
dence of stratification in the limestone, I was able, because of ear- _ 


1871.] 201 [Perry. 


lier studies in this direction, at once to detect the falsity of the 
inference that had been drawn, and to indicate what all the evidence 
thus far gathered shows to be the true nature of the masses in ques- 
tion. I found, and have since substantiated by various and careful 
cross examinations, what the advocates of the organic structure of 
the “‘ Eozoon” seem never to have suspected, that the limestones 
under consideration are not to be regarded as stratified masses at all; 
that, while they may appear, on casual inspection, to be laminated, 
they are really foliated, and the appearance of stratification is thus to 
be accounted for in another way; and that being unstratified they 
are not either almost altogether, as has been affirmed of many such 
rocks, or in any degree made up of organic remains. ‘These calca- 
reous deposits, as should be constantly borne in mind, do not occur 
in an uninterrupted line, or crop out in ranges at all uniformly con- 
tinuous, as is usually the case with sedimentary beds. ‘They are 
isolated masses, generally of greatly varying size (though in the 
Chelmsford series more uniformity may be observed in this particu- 
lar) and as ordinarily found upon the surface, they almost invaria- 
bly appear only at irregular intervals. 
It should be also remarked that the limestones at Chelmsford, like 
other kindred masses, are of a lenticular shape. They occupy, or 
rather they once occupied — for the limerock has been mostly re- 
moved for economical purposes — pockets, irregular and uneven cay- 
ities, or in most cases, oven-shaped spaces, more or less lenticular, 
which were clearly produced by the disturbance of the main for- 
mation. ‘This, at Chelmsford, consists almost entirely of gneiss and 
of gneissoid rocks. The cavities containing the limestone were once 
plainly overarched by the accompanying gneiss. In places the gneiss 
now so overarches some of them, and beyond question it so over- 
arched them all before denudation took place, as to make it evi- 
dently impossible that extraneous fossils, or any other solid foreign 
bodies, could have been carried in and deposited in a continuous series 
beneath the summits, and all along the sides, of the gneissic arches. 
Again, these lenticular masses of limestone have that banded struc- 
ture which is peculiar to one class of veins. They are foliated, in 
the strict sense of the epithet, there being a series of leaves, or of 
leaf-like layers, and these having a regular sequence from the walls 
toward the centres of the cavities. And to this succession peculiar 
evidence is borne; for there is associated with the successive bands a 
like succession of different minerals. The orderly occurrence of 


Perry.] 202 [April 19, | 


these minerals (Mr. Burbank, I believe, was the first to notice their | 
presence in the limestone, on a previous visit) is a striking feature, | 
which may be verified by any visitor who is disposed to be sufficiently | 
pains-taking to go through with the task; while it is certainly well | 
deserving of attention, both in itself considered, and because of the | 
witness it bears in various directions. Indeed, the foliated structure, | 
with its accompanying series of mineral substances, each occurring 
in a determinate order, evinces that the process of veinous deposition 
was gradual, and probably long continued; that time enough must 
have elapsed for one set of ingredients to be brought in and depos- 
ited (for fresh supplies, containing some new elements, to be. intro- 
duced and exhausted), for these again to be superseded, or at least 
supplemented, by additional and somewhat varying materials, them- 
selves to be in their turn fixed upon the walls in leaf-like layers; also 
that one of these layers succeeded another in regular gradation, from 
the sides of the cavities, which in some cases were many feet in 
diameter, toward the centres, until all the interior spaces were finally 
filled; and that consequently, the apparent stratification is due, not 
to aqueous deposition, as ordinarily regarded, but to the vein-struc- 
ture of the calcareous deposits. 

Again it should be remarked that limestone veins, and various 
irregular apertures filled with carbonate of lime, of smaller size than 
the main cavities already noticed, may be detected here and there in 
the walls of the adjoining rock. Indeed, a careful inspection of the 
quarries reveals the occasional presence of calcareous matter in what 
were, perhaps, once minute clefts, cracks and crannies in the sur- 
rounding gneiss; the presence of matter, which was no doubt intro- 
duced into all the smaller crevices, in connection with the deposition 
of the principal masses of limestone, but long after the formation of 
the main gneissic rock. ‘This calcareous material which, in places, 
may be now seen ramifying, in a vein-like way, the walls that form 
the chief cavities, was evidently connected at some former period 
with the larger masses of limestone. Such veins, while they are not 
numerous, or likely to be noticed without careful scrutiny, are of 
great interest and very significant. 

But this is not all; there is other, and what to some will perhaps 
be more explicit, testimony to the former prevalence of a vein-form- 
ing agency. An accurate observer, even the casual visitor, will 
hardly overlook the marked conformity of the limerock with the 


1871.] 2903 {Perry. 


gneiss, as if the former, when in a plastic state, had been moulded 
upon the latter. Indeed, after careful inspection, one can scarcely 
fail to note that generally the calcareous bands exactly conform with 
the most abrupt irregularities and jagged inequalities in the surface 
of the enclosing walls, and by no means less with the occasional 
breaks which may be seen in them; that the deposit was everywhere. 
so made, in consonance with the adjoining rock-masses, as to reveal 
its more recent origin, in connection perhaps with the action of va- 
rious mechanical and chemical agencies; and, therefore, that instead 
of being largely made up of the calcareous remains of Rhizopods, it 
is not at all of a foraminiferous derivation, but took its place in a 
vein-like way, the material having been probably either forced up 
from below in a heated state, or introduced from above in the form 
of an aqueous solution. 

In confirmation of the view presented, reference ought to be made 
to the limestones holding “ Eozoon” in other localities, and appar- 
ently belonging to the same part of the series of foliated rocks, as 
well as to what seem to be kindred calcareous masses subordinate to 
formations of a very different character. Did time allow, I should also 
especially like to refer to other limestones. that are probably closely 
akin, but perhaps of somewhat varying age, limestones which I have 
repeatedly examined in their several places of occurrence, though 
they may not be known to hold “ Eozoon.” Waiving the consideration 
of these instances, I may, in a word, simply call attention to some of 
the calcareous masses in Stoneham, because they are intensely interest- 
ing, as suited both to reveal the processes which have been at work in 
their own formation and to suggest what has taken place in kindred 
rocks not so easily known; for they have a vein-structure, like that 
of the limestones of Chelmsford and Bolton. This structure, which 
seems to be common to the several rocks mentioned, is doubtless due 
to the operation of the same, or of closely allied causes. Portions of 
these calcareous masses I have found penetrating the adjoining Syen- - 
ite, for with this rock in Stoneham they are more particularly 
associated, in a vein-like way. ‘This limestone also corresponds 
exactly with the most ragged and broken surfaces, even with all the 
most diverse inequalities of the adjacent syenitic rocks. In short, it 
is so situated in relation to them, as clearly to reveal its more recent 
origin. 

Such are a few of the more important points characteristic of the 


Perry.] 204 [April 19, | 


calcareous masses in eastern Massachusetts, which are known to 


hold “‘Eozoon,” points which each should verify by an actual exam- i 
ination of the masses in question, and of similar rocks so far as || 
accessible and as they occur in place. Whether all the limestones |. 
noticed be exactly identical in origin, in structure and in age, or | 


not, they certainly have very many features in common, and are so 


essentially alike, if one may judge from their appearance, as to serve | 
well to illustrate each other. The question as to the mode of their | 
origin, whether it were by infiltration, segregation, or sublimation, I | 
leave undiscussed for the present, proposing to take it up in detail | 
on some future occasion. Enough, I think, has been said to show | 
that the limestones to which reference has been more especially made, | 
particularly those of Chelmsford, have truly a vein-like structure and | 


are really vein-rocks. 

But there is another point, of no small importance, to be briefly 
noticed. It is.a fact, which no one can successfully gainsay or deny, 
that genuine “‘Hozoon’”—‘ Eozoon,” which has been recognized and is 
accredited as genuine by those who hold to the organic nature of this 
marvellous form, and as advocating it are supposed to be best quali- 
fied to judge of its character—actually occurs in great profusion, in 
some of the limestones of Chelmsford. 

Meanwhile, the evidence now presented, evinces, so far as it is read- 
ily possible to evince, the inorganic character of the limestones under 
consideration. And while it seems thus clearly to show that the so- 
called “Kozoon” of Chelmsford is not an organic structure, it at the 
same time indicates the probability that the “Eozoonal” forms fur- 
nished by limestones of the Grand Calumet in Canada, of Bavaria 
and Bohemia, of Ireland and of other regions, have the same or a 
kindred origin, and therefore that they are. likewise inorganic. In- 
deed, so far as I can see, the evidence casts discredit upon the as- 
sumed organic character of the “Eozoon” generally, and fixes the 
burden of proof upon its advocates, to whom it originally belonged, 
and with whom of good right it should have always remained. It 
with equal certainty suggests that the resemblance which the “Ko- 
zoon” bears to animal structure, is, like that of “Dendrites” to vege- 
table forms, merely the result of chemical agency; in other words, 

that the “Eozoon” properly belongs to the department of Mineral- 
ogy, aud not, as has been claimed, to that of Paleontology. 


1871.] 905 (Brewer. 


Dr. T. M. Brewer presented, from the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion, two forms of the Quiscalus, (crow-blackbird,) and ex- 
hibited a third form of the same. They are species or races 
of the Q. versicolor. ‘The exact distribution of these vari- 
eties is not fully determined. The common Q. purpureus is 
an Eastern species, confined to the belt between the Alle- 
ghanies and the Atlantic. At the West, from Texas to 
Canada, it is replaced by the Q. @neus, which has amore © 
brilliant violet hue on the head, throat, breast and upper 
neck, while the rest is of a fine bronze color. This species 
(or race) extends through Northern New York to Calais, 
Maine. Both species, probably, occur in Massachusetts, the 
purpureus resident and the @neus migratory. In Florida 
the purpureus is replaced by a smaller race, its miniature in 
all respects, except the bill, which is much larger. This is 
Q. aglaius. 

He also called the attention of the Society to the interest 
attaching to the specimen of Hrismatura Dominica, the 
gift of Mr. Thure Kumlien of Busseyville, Wisconsin. It is 
a South American bird, and this specimen is the second ob- 
tained in the United States. The first was shot at Lake 
Champlain,—a male, and was presented to the Society by Dr. 
Samuel Cabot. This specimen, the second ever obtained 
north of Mexico, was shot at Rock River, Busseyville, Wis- 
consin, November, 1870. It is a female; its total length is 
fourteen inches; alar extent, twenty and one-half inches; 
wing, five and one-half inches. The tail consists of twenty 
very narrow feathers, of which the first is the shortest. The 
tail extends only three inches beyond the folded wings. Bill 
‘one and six-sixteenths inches from base to tip above; one 
and nine-sixteenths depth at base and three-fourths of an inch 
wide. Wing with second primary longest; third and first 
even. Iris, brown. 


The Nominating Committee reported a list of officers for 
the ensuing year. 


Sprague.] 206 - [April 25, | 


Specimens were exhibited of mammals of New England, 
purchased by the Sidney Homer bequest, of mounted birds, 
among them an albino swallow, and tortoises from Wiscon- | 
sin, presented by Mr. Thure Kumlien, and rocks and plants. | 
from the Pacific coast, by Dr. 8. Kneeland, a herbarium of 
Belgian cryptogamia from Mr. Andrews, and the anterior 
portion of an albino porcupine, from Mr. M. L. Bruce. The 
‘thanks of the Society were voted for the latter gift. 


Section of Entomology, April 25, 1871. 
Mr. F. A. Clapp in the chair. Eleven members present.- 


Mr. Philip 8. Sprague reported, that having been employed 
for some time in revising the family of Scolytide, ond arrang-. 
ing the Society’s material, he had found the use of the higher 
magnifying powers and a very careful dissection requisite. 
The funiculus of the antenna of -Xyleborus, which was be- 
lieved by Dr. Leconte to be four-jointed, proves five-jointed 
under a power of 200°. Eight species, representing four gen- 
era of this family, had been met with during a recent collect- 
ing trip in the vicinity: Cryphalus asperulus. Lec., found 
under the bark of the smaller branches of the white ash, 
measuring only .02 of an inch, was especially interesting from 
the construction of its burrow; this was invariably in the 
form of a cross, the shorter arms each little longer than the 
body of the insect, while the longer arms frequently encircled 
the twig. In answer to a question from Mr. E. Burgess con- 
cerning the purpose served by the characteristic sculpture of 
the apex of the elytra in this family, Mr. Sprague said that 
he thought these rugosities might enable the insect to brace © 
itself more firmly against the material excavated, or assist in 
the removal of excreta. 


1871.) 207 [Annual Report. 


Mr. Charles 8. Minot exhibited specimens of the so called 
Tarantula of California, (the trap-door spider, Mygale Hent- 
zit Gir.) and its nest, from aluminous soil, three or four inches 
deep, lined with two layers of silk. Also specimens of Pom- 
pilus formosus, a wasp which attacks and destroys the spider. 
He gave an interesting account of the manner in which 
the wasp paralyzes or renders its victim helpless. This spe- 
cles is very sensitive to odors, many individuals being fre- 
quently attracted to the spot where a spider is being victim- 
ized. 


Mr. Edward Burgess described and figured the peculiar 
sexual markings of some of the Diptera, Dolichopus pugil 
Loew, and other species of this genus, showing the variations 
in the feet, antennz, and wings; these in several species are 
rounded in the female but squarely cut in the male. He 
called attention to the views of Darwin in his recent work 
on the selection of species, citing the Dipterous family Bidi- 
onide. as affording very interesting characteristics. | 


Mr. 8. E. Sargent, of Boston, was nominated for member- 
ship in the Section. 


Annual Meeting, May 3, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Thirty-nine members present. 


Prof. Alpheus Hyatt presented the following report of the 
Custodian for the present year. 


My predecessor, the distinguished entomologist, Mr. Sam- 
uel H. Scudder, held three offices, Custodian, Secretary and 
Librarian; these at the last annual election were divided, 
Mr. J. A. Swan being selected as Secretary and Librarian. 
This division places the Museum more especially in my 
charge. 


Annual Report.] 208 - [May 3, |) 


The fact that the Society had no declared policy attracted 
the attention of the Committee who settled the. terms upon 
which I was to serve, and they requested me to draw up a | 
plan of organization. This was done after consultation 
with various members of the Society, and the provisional 
plan laid before the Council was, in all its essential features, 
adopted; but at my own request, it will remain on trial 
until sufficiently tested by practical application. The gen- 
eral considerations, however, which furnished the ground- 
work of the principles therein laid down, have been suffi- 
ciently matured by our own experience and that of other 
scientific institutions, both at home and abroad, to be 
announced now. 

The history of the Society shows that it is eminently a 
social organization, devoted to the cultivation and diffusion 
of scientific knowledge. This is plainly stated in the ad- 
dress of the first President, Mr. Greenwood, in 1833. The 
publications and museum were then considered as necessary 
parts of the design, the former as a means of self-culture and 
correspondence with distant institutions, and the latter, as 
the most suitable medium for diffusing knowledge among the 
people. 

Though these objects have never been more minutely de- 
fined, they have since served as the ground-work of all the 
progressive changes in the administration of the Society. 
The experience of the past thirty years, however, shows the 
insufficiency of our means to cover the whole field, which a 
practical application of such general principles embraces. 
Even were this not the case and our funds larger than they 
are, it would still be necessary to remember that we are no 
longer solitary. 

There are six other institutions in our vicinity, five of 
which have museums and are devoted to the cultivation of 
Natural History. 

Codperation in some definite form with them all is to be 
anticipated, and in fact has commenced between this Society 


1871.) 909 {Annual Report. 


and the Museum of Archeology and Ethnology at Cam- 
bridge. The first step in this direction demands a thorough 
acquaintance with our present position and a complete defini- 
tion of the future policy to be pursued. In this way, the 
Society will be ready for the consideration of any scheme of 
coOperation, and what is still more important, feel in the 
meantime that its expenditures, whether of money or labor, 
are distributed judiciously. Another reason for a definition 
of our plans lies in the fact that Societies are liable to sudden 
changes of policy and should, therefore, have some precise 
standard of comparison by which the value of each new 
measure can be judged. 

The Society, as it is now constituted, has three well 

‘marked divisions,—the meetings, with their attendant publi- 
cations, especially devoted to the use of the members; the 
Library, also for the use of the members, but to which, as to 
the meetings, all respectable applicants have ever been made 
welcome; and lastly the Museum and Lectures. 

The effects of the meetings are too complex to be readily 
defined. It may be affirmed, however, that they secure mu- 
tual good understanding and support between professional men 
and amateurs, that they furnish to mature minds the most sym- 
pathetic of all audiences, encourage the hesitating student to 
take his first steps in the public service of science, and restrain 
the hasty and over-confident by the presence of critical 
judges. They also exercise a powerful influence upon the 
public at large, by means of the bi-monthly reports of the 
Secretary, published in the newspapers. 

The publications are accessory to the meetings and add 
greatly to their attractions, besides maintaining creditably our 
part of the general correspondence now uniting all Natural 
History Societies and Institutions. 

The principal object of the Library must necessarily be 
the preservation and systematic cataloguing of the books and. . 
pamphlets, but it has certain duties, also, in connection with 
the publications and the purchase of books, which need to be: 


PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. Hi—VOLn XIV. 14 JANUARY, 1872.. 


Annnal Report.] 210 [May 3, 


definitely set forth. For instance, it is evident that the exten- 
sion of our exchanges should be limited to Natural History 
periodicals, excluding all political, economical or technological 
serials, or those which are strictly antiquarian or historical, 
and do not publish occasional articles bearing upon the sci- 
ences of Anthropology and Ethnology. 

Mr. Scudder directed his efforts principally to the ties 
tions, and to the establishment of a system of exchanges 
which now furnishes us with nearly all the best Natural 
History periodicals of the day. Every practical worker on 
Natural History in this vicinity, to a greater or less extent, 
reaps the benefit of his labor and admirable perseverance. 
The Museum, however, to which we now turn, has not re- 


ceived so much attention, and the principles to be adopted in > 


its arrangement require more careful consideration. 

The collection in the department of Ornithology is the 
scientific ornament of the Museum, and it contains numbers 
of original specimens, whose value to: the investigator can 
hardly be over-estimated. Such collections should be re- 
garded as scientific trusts, which an enlightened policy will 
not only preserve with the greatest care, but increase for the 
benefit of posterity. 

The situation of this Society obliges us to consider as per- 
haps the most important part of our duties, the gradual accu- 
mulation of a full and complete collection of the animals and 
plants, fossil and living, as well as the minerals of New Eng- 
land, especially those of our own State. 

On the other hand, there are certain special fees 
which it would not seem necessary to enlarge beyond the 
reasonable limits of educational collections. Thus, for exam- 
ple, the Botanical, Anthropological and Ethnological collec- 
tions at Cambridge and Salem are extensive, and it would be 
a waste of means to duplicate them. 


The relations of the Society to the public, require that 


the Museum should be made instructive to all visitors seek- 
ing either general information or amusement. The initial 


1871.] 911 : [Annual Report. 


labor of awakening a desire for knowledge in the minds of 
the public, by the exposition of curious specimens, is ap- 
proaching completion, and even the most ignorant are in 
some measure prepared to respect any attempt to offer them 
more solid, intellectual entertainment. The students of the 
neighboring Institute of Technology and the teachers and 
pupils of our public and private schools form another impor- 
tant class to whom our collections are useful. These, as well 
as the public, require such a classification of the specimens as 
will convey a knowledge of general laws and principles unen- 
cumbered by details. Careful pruning of the specimens on 
exhibition, the concealment of all others in convenient depo- 
‘sitories, and the strict limitation of the purchase of specimens 
to typical forms, are the only means by which we may hope 
to avoid the accumulation of unsuitable material. The Orni- 
thological and New England collections must be necessarily 
cumulative, but with correct management may be made 
subservient to the illustration of general principles without 
injury to their scientific value. When distributed in faunal 
groups they can be used to demonstrate certain laws and 
principles which cannot be explained by the more compre- 
hensive zoological and anatomical portions of the Museum. 

These conclusions were thought by many of the most 
experienced members of the Society, to afford a correct foun 
dation, and in accordance with them a series of practical rules 
was drawn up and provisionally adopted. With regard to 
the Meetings, Publications and Library, these rules were 
substantially the same as those principles which have just 
been recommended, but in the Museum they were much more 
minute. 

The governing principle proposed for this department was 
that all the different collections should form together a con- 
secutive series of lessons in the structure of the earth and in 
the organization of animals and plants. ‘To accomplish this, 
only such specimens should be exhibited as would promi- 
nently.represent some definite step in the morphological or 


Annual Report.] oto [May 3, 


structural series, in each class or minor division of the ani- 
mal and vegetable kingdoms. Besides these it was proposed 
to have a more general epitome collection which would enable 
the student to bind together in one sheaf all the knowledge 
he might have obtained from the type collections. Though we 
are apparently far from the final accomplishment of this or any 
other arrangement, yet the existence of a definite system 
exerts an excellent and healthy influence. 

The difficulties to be encountered in carrying out the de- 
tails of any scheme will be great or small, precisely in propor- 
tion to the feeling which governs the officers entrusted with 
its execution. If a broad, catholic spirit of consideration for 
the interests of the Museum obtains, there need be no doubt 
of ultimate success. On the other hand, if regard for the 
interests of any special departments is allowed to interfere 
with the uniform arrangements and proper scientific use of 
the whole Museum, no very beneficial results can be antici- 
pated. It should be remembered, and therefore make us 
doubly cautious, that besides our own interest in the matter, 
the result of such an experiment must become a precedent 
for similar undertakings, and in the future have a lasting in- 
fluence upon the development of scientific societies. 

The next important event of the year was an agreement 
made with the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. By 
the terms of this compact they are permitted the use of the 
halls of this building and the Museum collections for the in- 
struction of students, controlled by such restrictions as may 
from time to time be imposed by the Council. In return for 
these privileges, the Institute pays a certain sum per annum, 
and deposits, as soon as we are prepared to receive them, the 
valuable collections and series of diagrams which formerly 
belonged to Prof. Henry D. Rogers. 

This agreement affords the Society an opportunity to aid in 
the new movement of practical education and to extend its 
usefulness to a class heretofore beyond its. reach,—a class likely, 
on account of their opportunities in the field and laboratory, to 


t 


Annual Report.) 213 [May 8, 


be of great service to Natural History. This year the codp- 
eration has extended no farther than to the delivery of a few 
lectures in this Lecture Room, upon Zodlogy, by Dr. 8. Knee- 
land, and a course upon Paleontology by the Custodian. 

One of the principal items of expense has been the new 
heating apparatus. The old cast-iron boilers were entirely 
unfitted for their purpose, and great consumers of coal. 
These, owing to the exertions and management of the Presi- 
_ dent and Mr. W. T. Brigham, have been replaced by tubular 

boilers, and also new heating apparatus throughout the build- 
ing, which has so far worked satisfactorily. The expense of 
this change—some four thousand dollars, has borne heavily 
upon all sections of the Museum. Notwithstanding this, 
however, a well marked advance in the amount of work done 
in this division is apparent. 

The appointment of Mr. F. G. Sanborn as Instructor 
at the Bussey Institution of Harvard University, withdraws 
him only to a limited extent from his labors here. Two 
mornings of each week are occupied by the duties of this 
office, and the proportional deduction which he personally 
offered to make from his salary, has enabled us, with the 
addition of a small sum from the general income of the 
Society, to employ the whole time of another valuable assist- 
ant, Mr. Philip 8. Sprague. Mr. Sanborn’s almost constant 
occupation in the general work of the Museum prevents him 
to a great extent from paying that constant attention to the 
Entomological collections which their preservation demands. 

Mr. Sprague, however, who has been at work for two 
months past, with the aid of the closely fitting boxes recom- 
*mended by Dr. Hagen, will, it is hoped, place this collection 
out of danger. 

I desire also to draw special attention to the report on 
Comparative Anatomy. This shows the unusual activity 
which has prevailed in that department, and the results are 
highly creditable to the gentlemen who have worked upon 
the collection. This, and the reports on Mollusca and En- 


Annuai Report.] 914 [May 3, 
\ 

tomology, teach us the necessity of securing as early as possi- 
ble the services of qualified assistants in all departments. 
Several sections of this Museum, if properly attended to, 
would require every year as much labor as has been gratui- 
tously expended during the past twelve months upon the 
Osteological collection alone. 

' The remainder of this report is compiled from the special 
reports of the Secretary and Librarian and the Chairmen of 
the various Committees on the Museum. 


' LECTURES. 


Through the liberality of the Trustees of the Lowell In 
stitute, seven courses of free lectures have been given by 
the Society. The first course of six lectures, by Rey. John 
L. Russell, on Cryptogamic Botany, was attended by an 
average of eighty-five persons; the second course of two lec- - 
tures, by Prof. J.S. Newberry, on the Cafions of the Colorado 
and Ancient Civilization of America, by an average of two 
hundred and eighty-seven persons; the third course of six 
lectures, by Thomas Dwight, Jr., M. D., on the Comparative 
Anatomy of Mammalia, by an average of sixty-one persons; 
the fourth course of four lectures, by Dr. P. P. Carpenter, on 
a general sketch of Mollusca, by an average of sixty-one per- 
sons; the fifth course of two lectures, by Rev. R. C. Waters- 
ton, on the Journey across the Continent, or some of the 
remarkable features of California, by an average of three 
hundred and thirteen persons; the sixth course of twelve 
lectures, by W. H. Niles, on the Principles of Geology, by an 
average of two hundred and thirty-seven persons; the 
seventh course of six lectures, by Rev. E. C. Bolles, on the 
Revelations of the Microscope, by an average of two hun- 
dred and seventy-nine persons. 

These averages indicate, generally, the difference in the 
public mind between popular and strictly educational lectures, 
but the extreme severity of the weather during the courses 


1871.] 915 [Annual Report. 
of Drs. Dwight and Carpenter, must be taken into consid- 
eration. 

Summing up the result, it may safely be said that the 
courses have been successful; the character of the lectures 
and the interest manifested in them indicate that the Society 
can exercise an influence as an educator, while, at the same 
time, by the natural reaction of that influence, it will increase 
its own strength. 

This success is mainly attributable to the management and 
exertions of the Secretary. This gentleman, besides attend- 
ing at the Library much longer every day than his agreement 
with the Society demanded, was present at nearly every 
lecture, looking personally to the comfort of the audience. 


MEETINGS. 


_ Six corresponding and forty-eight resident members have 
been elected during the year. Of the resident members, 
three have not completed their membership according to the 
requirements of the Constitution, and their names do not ap- 
pear on the records. : 

There have been eighteen general meetings of the Society, 
with an average attendance of forty-one persons; eight meet- 
ings of the Section of Microscopy, with an average attend- 
ance of eleven; seven meetings of the Section of Entomol- 
ogy, with an average attendance of ten. Thirty-seven writ- 
ten communications have been made by twenty-six persons, 
and eighty-nine verbal communications by thirty-six persons, 
making a total of one hundred and twenty-six. Of these, 
thirteen were presented in the Section of Entomology, and 
thirteen in the Section of Microscopy. Their titles are as 
follows :— 


Acassiz, ALEX. On the formation of fiords. December 7, 1870. 

Atwoop, N. E. On the habits of the Bluefish. January 18, 1871. 

Remarks on the habits of the Capelin (Mallotus villosus). March 
1871. 


Annual Report.] 216 [May 3, 


BicKNELL, E. Ona Method of producing Low Powers for the Mi- 
croscope. October 12, 1870. 

On Flexible Muscular Preparations. November 2, 1870. 

On the Absorptions of the Frustules of Jsthmia. November 9, 
1870. 

On the Structure of Whalebone. November 9, 1870. 

Remarks on Microphotographs of Amphipleura pellucida and Sur- 
rirella gemma, taken by: Dr. Woodward, U. S. A. February 8, 
1871. 

Remarks on the Sense of Smell, as the guide of many lower ani- 
mals in seizing their prey. April 5, 1871. 


Buiss, RicHaRD, JR. On the Osteology of Structure of the dorsal 
fin of Doras. June 15, 1870. 
On markings which distinguish young from adult fishes. January 
18, 1871. 


Bouvk, T. T. On Conglomerate. October 19, 1870. 


BrEWwER, T. M. On the Nest of the Baltimore Oriole, made of 
Spanish Moss. May 18, 1870. 
On the Nests and Eggs of some of the most rare Birds of high 
latitudes. February 1, 1871. 
Remarks on Casuarius Bennettii. March 1, 1871. 
On the Varieties of the Crow-Blackbird. April 19, 1871. 


BrigHaM, Wu. T. On Meteorites from Tucson, Arizona. May 18, 

1870. 

On a deposit of Lava on the Columbia River. May 18, 1870. 

On the Sequoia gigantea. Mcy 18, 1870. 

On Morchella from Grafton, Mass. May 18, 1870. 

On the System of Volcanoes in Mexico. February 15, 1871. 

On Water as an element of Volcanic Eruptions. February 15, 
Sale . 

Remarks on a Conglomerate Lava in one of the Hawaiian Islands. 
February 15, 1871. 


Brown, F. H. On Ferns and. Fern Allies of Medina and Porto 
Santo. May 18, 1870. 


Burzank, L.S. On the Origin of the Eozoonal Limestone of 
Chelmsford and vicinity. April 19, 1871. 


1871.1 Allyl [Annual Report. 


Burerss, Epwarp. On Dr. Hagen’s Collections of Nestopiene 
May 25, 1870. 
On the Anatomy of Darapsa myron. December 28, 1870. 
On the Genital Armature of male Lepidoptera. January 25, 1871. 


CARPENTER, P. P. On the Family of Chitons. January 4, 1871. 


CLARK, HENRY JAmeEs. On the Anatomy and Physiology of our 
common Lucernaria. February 1, 1871. 


Corr, E. D. On Three New Species of Pythonomorpha. No- 
vember 2, 1870. 


Dat, W.H. On Arrangement of the order Docoglossa. October 19, 
1870. 
On the Relations of the class Brachiopoda. February 15, 1871. 


DwieutT, Tuomas, Jr. On flexible anatomical preparations, October 
i 5, 1870. : 
' On Supernumerary Limbs in Fowls. October 5, 1870. 
On Supernumerary Limbs of Fowls. January 4, 1871. 


Epwarps, A.M. Notice of an Undescribed Form of Pleurosigma ; 


family Diatomacee. April 5, 1871. 


Emerton, J. H. On Myrmeleon immaculatum. December 28, 1870. 
Remarks on the Structure of Spiders. January 25, 1871. 


Fartow, W.G. On the Marine Alee of the east coast of the 
United States. December 7, 1870. 


FonTARIvVE, E. On a new stand for the Microscope. March 8, 
1871. 


GREENLEAF, R. C. Onan infusion of mutton which showed mole- 
cular motion. January 11, 1871. 


Hacen, H. A. On the Deyrolle Collection of Curculionide. 
November 23, 1870. 


Harriman, G.B. On the Fibrous structure of Bone. December 14, 
1870. 


Hunt, T. Srerry. On certain features of the Geology of New 
England. October 19, 1870. 


Annual Report.] 218 f [May 8, 


Hyatt, A. On the Classification of Brachiopoda. June 1, 1870. 

On Preservative Fluids. October 5, 1870. 

On the Law of Acceleration in the development of certain types of 
animals. October 5, 1870. . 

On Revisions among the Ammonites. October'5, 1870. 

On the Embryology of Nautiloids. November 9, 1870. 

On Comparison of Soundings of East and West North American 
coasts. November 16, 1870. 

On the Elevation and Depression of portions of the Atlantic coast. 
February 1, 1871. 

Onthe affinity of the Polyzoa and the Brachiopoda. March 15, 
1871. | 

Remarks on Natural Selection. April 5, 1871. 


Jackson, C. T. On Meteorites. May 18, 1870. 
- On Lingula. June 1, 1870. | 
On an Analysis of the Rocks in the vicinity, of Boston. October 
19, 1870. 
On Glacial and Drift Phenomena. December 21, 1870. 
On the Elevation and Depression of the Atlantic coast. Febru- 
ary, 1871. 
On some Peculiarities of Volcanic Action. February 15, 1871. 


JACKSON, J. B. S. On Anatomical Preparations. October 5, 1870. 


JEFFRIES, B. Joy. On the Absence of Color-Perception in 
Animals. April 5, 1871. 


KNEELAND, S. On Optical Illusion. November 2, 1870. 

On the Geology and General Features of the country about the 
upper Mississippi. November 16, 1870. 

On the mechanical action of Sand driven by a blast of air or 
steam. Apri 15, 1871. 

On the Habits of Flying-fish off the Pacific Coast. March 15, 
1871. 

On the Habits of some of the Pacific Water-birds. March 15, 
1871. 


Knicut, C.F. On the Turtles of Florida. June 15, 1870. 


Maack, G. A. On the Geology of the Argentine Republic. 
June 1, 1870, 


1871.] : 219 {Annual Report. 


Mann, B. P. On Carbolic acid as a Preservative fluid. June 15, 
1870. 


Minor, C.S. On the Flight of Diurnal Lepidoptera. October 26, 
1870. 
On Lycena occurring in New England. November 23, 1870. 
Remarks on new Lepidoptera of Iowa. January 25, 1871. 


Morss, E. S. On reclassification of the Brachiopoda. June 1, 

1870. | 

On the Sipunculoid worm Phascolasma. November 16, 1870. 

On the Relations of the Brachiopoda. March 15, 1871. 

Remarks on some features common to the Vermes and the Verte- 
brates. March 15, 1871. 

On the Early Stages of the Shell of Anomia. April 5, 1871. 

Observations on the protective coloration of Mollusca. Apri 5, 
1871. 


Nites, W. H. On the System in the Physical features of Massachu- 

setts. Jay 18, 1870. 

On the Conglomerate passing into Porphyry at Dedham. October 
AOMAGTON | 

Observations on a Gneiss Quarry at Monson, Mass. January 4, 
1871. 

On the Parallelism between the Atlantic Valley and the Appal- 
achian Chain. February 1, 1871. 

On the Conglomerate Pebbles at Montague. February 15, 1871. . 

On Lateral Change in a bed of Conglomerate at Chestnut Hill. 
February 15, 1871. 


PackarpD, A. §., Jr. Catalogue of the Phalenide of.California. 
May 4, 1870. 
On new'and interesting Neuroptera. May 4, 1870. 
On the Embryology of Isotoma. June 15, 1870. 
On the Embryology of Limulus Polyphemus. November 16, 1871. 
On a new species of Pauropus. November 16, 1870. 


Perry, J. B. On the Glacial period in New England. December 
7, 1870. 
On Glacial action and drift phenomena. December 31, 1870. 
On Gradual Changes of Strata, caused by variations of tempera- 
ture. January 4, 1871. 


Annual Report.] 220 ‘ [May 3, 


On Drift Phenomena. January 18, 1871. 

On the formation of the Atlantic Coast line. February 1, 1871. 

On the Presence of fossil Brachiopods in the primordial rocks. 
March 15, 1871. 

Remarks on Eozoon in some quarries of Massachusetts. April 19, 


1871. 


PickERING, C. On Lingula at the Feejee Islands. June 1, 

1870. 

On the Drift in the vicinity of Salem. January 18, 1871. 

An Illustration in the Hawaiian Islands of water maintained at the 
surface of the globe by central heat. February 15, 1871. 

Remarks on the character of the eruptions of Kilauea and Mauna | 
Loa. February 15, 1871. 

On the General Distribution of the Conglomerate, and its forma- 
tion. February 15, 1871. 


PourRTALES, L.. F. DE. On deep sea soundings off the east coast of 
the United States. November 16, 1870. 


Putnam, F. W. On Mr. Bliss’s communication. June 15, 1870. 
On the Turtles presented by Mr. Knight. June 15, 1870. 
On an Eel, from the coast of Africa, containing a large, spiny, 
bream-shaped fish. March 1, 1871. 
On the Classification of Fishes. April 19, 1871. 


Ricwarps, L. S. On stones marked with glacial scratches, taken 
from Fort Hill. April 5, 1871. 


Sanzorn, F. G. On the capture of interesting Lepidoptera at 
Milford, N. H. May 25, 1870. 
On Lepidoptera from California. October 26, 1870. 
Remarks on habits of Forficula. January 25, 1871. 


Sceva, Grorce. On the habits of the Cobra di capello. January 


18, 1871. 

On the absence of the third molars in Hindoo skulls. March 1, 
1371. 

On the poison of the Cobra and of the Rattlesnake. March 1, 
1871. ‘4 ; 


Scupper, S. H. On Mr. Morse’s Classification of the Brachiopoda. 
June 1, 1870, 


1871] 221 [Annual Report. 


SHALER, N. S. On the Progress of Life on the several continents. 
June 15, 1870. 
On the Geological Structure of the Wachusett range. June 15, 
1870. 
On Stratification at Braintree. October 19, 1870. 
On Roxbury Conglomerate. October 19, 1870. 
Changes on the Atlantic Coast, and denuding action of Ice. 
November 2, 1870. 


On the life of lower latitudes passing further north. January 18, 
1871. 


On the Chesapeake Bay and the shore line thence southward. 
February 1, 1871. 


SPRAGUE, P.S. On Parasitic Insects. October 26, 1870. 


Stopper, C. On a section. of Tiger wood from Brazil. May 11, 
1870. 
On Albumen coagulated with carbolic acid. October 12, 1870. 
On a series of lenses constructed by R. B. Tolles. January 11, 
1871. 


Tutrrie, A. Ona form of Paramecium from Fresh Pond. Novem- 
ber 9,'1870. 
On the Fissiparous reproduction of Stentor. February 8, 1871. 


Unter, P. R. Notice of some Heteroptera in the collection of 
Dr. T. W. Harris. February 1, 1871. 


Warterston, R. C. On a visit to California. November 16, 
1870. 


Wiper, Burt G. On Intermembral or Limb Homologies. 
April 5, 1871. 


Winstow, C.F. On a mortar-shaped pebble from the banks of 
the Rhine. October 5, 1870. 


At the beginning of the year, a committee was appointed 
to look after the general meetings and solicit the proper kind 
of communications. The list above and the larger average 
attendance show a decided improvement resulting from this 
measure, 


Annual Report.] 292 [May 8, 


PUBLICATIONS. 


The radical changes made in the basement during the 
summer and autumn have materially impeded the regular 
issue of the publications. Eleven signatures of the Proceed- 
ings have been issued, completing the thirteenth volume, and 
four signatures of the fourteenth volume are already in type. 
One paper of the Memoirs, “Historical Notes of the Earth- 
quakes of New England,” by Mr. William T. Brigham, has 
already appeared; the second paper, “Karly Stages of Tere- 
bratulina,” by Prof. Edward 8. Morse, is ready, and only wait- | 
ing for the plates; the third paper, on the “Osteology and | 
Myology of Didelphys Virginiana,” by Elliott Coues, M. D., 
U.S. A., with an appendix by Prof. Jeffries Wyman, M. D,, 
is well advanced and will soon be issued, completing the first 
annual part of the second volume. ~ 

There is now a fair prospect that both the Proceedings and 
Memoirs will be issued with the promptness which has 
hitherto characterized the publications of the Society. 


LIBRARY. 


The accessions to the Library during the year by gift, ex- 
change and purchase, number 1185, which may be classified 
as follows: 215 volumes, 765 parts of ae 183 pam- 
phlets and 22 maps and charts. 

The disturbed state of the countries from which many of 
the exchanges come will suggest the cause of this reduced 
number compared with that of the preceding year. 

The appeals made to societies for volumes and parts to 
complete our imperfect series, have in several instances been 
responded to very generously. From the Zodlogical Society 
of London, we have received the first five volumes of its 
Transactions nearly complete. Two or three parts being out 
of print could not be supplied. 

Several societies to whom our Memoirs, Proceedings and 
occasional papers have been sent, have for the first time 
honored us with their publications. 


1871.] <0 a [Annual Report. 


From the Gessellschaft von Freunden der Natur-wissen- 
schaftlichen at Gera, we have received ten parts; from the 
Gesellschaft fiir Natur und Heilkunde at Dresden, six parts; 
from the Naturhistorische Verein, at Passau, eight parts; 
from the Museum of Economic Geology and Geological Sur- 


vey of Great Britain, Vols. 1-3 of its Memoirs, together with 


several valuable volumes of local Geology. 


We have opened correspondence with one new Society: 
the Verein zur verbreitung naturwissenschaftliche Kennt- 
nisse,in Wien. Seven volumes of its publications have been 
received, and portions of our own have been sent in exchange. 

Many of the series, and often those most called for, are in- 
complete, and much complaint is made because a desired part 
or volume is wanting. The librarian would recommend that 
at least the more valuable of these imperfect sets be filled 
out, since the value of a library often depends more upon its 
completeness than upon the number of the titles in its 
catalogue. 

The librarian also represents that the alcoves in the gal- 
lery assigned to the publications of Societies, are over- 
crowded. He would therefore recommend that, as soon as 
practicable, galleries be placed in the back room and furnished 
with a number of cases sufficient to receive the books belonging 
to “A Republican Institution.” ‘The removal of these from 
their present position would give ample space. 

There are several hundred parts of volumes and pam- 
phlets which have been classified during the last year, but 
not yet properly incorporated into the library. There is also 


considerable work to be done in re-arranging the catalogue, 


owing to the removal of books from one alcove to another, 
a work on which the assistants have for some time been dili- 
gently employed and which still remains to be done. The 


- librarian believes this can be entirely completed during the 


comparative leisure of the summer months. : 
The number of members who have taken books from the 


ie 


Annual Report.] Q24 ~ [May 3, 


library and the number of books loaned, correspond very 
nearly with the statistics of the preceding year. | 

The use of the library has been given to the members of 
the Institute of Technology and to others, who pursuing 
some branch of natural science, have made personal or writ- 
ten applications for the favor. 

We have again to express our indebtedness to the officers 
of the Smithsonian Institution, for the uniform courtesy and 
liberality with which they have gratuitously transmitted our 
own publications and received for us those of foreign 
societies. 


MINERALOGY. 


The mineralogical department is indebted to Messrs. J. Car- 
son, N. H. Bishop, A. K. Cole, W. T. Tracy and Dr. 8. Kneeland, 
for interesting specimens. Additions have also been made 
by exchange, and a fine series, including many rare species, _ 
has been acquired by purchase. The collection is reported 
by the Committee to be in perfect condition, well arranged, 
and every specimen properly labelled. 


GEOLOGY. 


This department is reported to be, as formerly, fully ar- 
ranged and labelled. No additions of special importance 
that need to be mentioned. 


BOTANY. 


The Herbarium in the Department of Botany has been 
carefully examined and rearranged according to the Genera 
Plantarum of Hooker and Bentham, so far as it has been 
published. This is in continuation of the work begun by the 
late Horace Mann. 

Some 25,000 specimens in all have been labelled and glued 
to papers, and many hundred duplicates separated for ex-— 
change. The Herbarium now contains no loose plants, and is 
wholly free from insects. The cases, however, are unsuitable 


1871.] 225 {Annual Report. 


for their purpose and do not even exclude the dust, which 
damages the collections. 

Many hundred specimens from various expeditions are 
labelled simply with numbers, and where the Reports have 
not been published, would require much work for their cor- 
rect identification. ‘This, however, should be done and the 
assistance which is necessary should be obtained, since the 
specimens are very valuable in themselves, but of no avail in 
their present unnamed condition. An appropriation of 
$159.00 would be desirable for this purpose. 

A nearly complete copy of “The Flore Cryptogamique de 
la Belgique,” has been presented by Mr. Andrews, of Boston, 
A few Hawaiian plants have been added to the Herbarium. 

The Ingalls Collection of paintings now deposited with 
the Society, may be, it is hoped, retained permanently as the 
property of the Society, but at present the price asked by the 
owner is beyond our means. 


PALZONTOLOGY. 


The specimens which have been accumulating for years 
past have been unpacked, partly identified, labelled and 
placed in the cases. A preliminary review of the whole col- 
lection has been completed, in order to determine the num- 
ber and quality of the specimens, and the proper mode of 
arrangement to be adopted. During this review, some very 
valuable specimens which had been displaced were dis- 
covered and restored to their proper places. The best man- 
ner of mounting has also been considered and experiments 
made. 

It is proposed to secure the specimens to wooden tablets 
by wire fastenings. The colors to be a light grey for the 
Silurian, a delicate, reddish brown for the Devonian, a shade 
of yellow or buff for the Carboniferous, a lighter blue for the 
Mesozoic, and a deeper shade of blue for the Tertiary and 
Post Tertiary. 


PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 16 FEBRUARY, 1872. 


Annual Report.] 226 [May 3, 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 


The Committee found this collection in poor condition at 
the beginning of the year, and much time was expended in 
cleaning the specimens and cases. The sashes of the latter 
had been toosened and admitted the dust freely, but this to 
some extent has been corrected by a system of fastenings 
devised by Mr. Sanborn. 

The whole collection is now in excellent order. The Soci- 
ety owes this to the exertions of Dr. Dwight and his assist- 
ant, Mr. Fletcher M. Abbott. The most important addition 
is the skeleton of a whale, the carcass of which was presented | 
by Harvey T. Litchfield, Esq. 

This skeleton is probably the most perfect in this country, 
and was secured to this Society for the small sum of $275.00, 
It is now in course of preparation, and will be described and | 
mounted by Dr. Dwight. The Society owes the perfection © 
of the skeleton principally to Mr. Sanborn’s constant care © 
of the carcass until the bones were safely secured in the — 
building. . 

A skeleton of Globicephalus melas, common “black fish,” 
of our coast, has been sorted out from a confused mass of 
bones with great labor, by Dr. Dwight, and is now mounted. 
The specimen referred to is over fifteen feet in length. 

A collection of the disarticulated bones, or rather parts, of 
the skeletons of the representative forms of the mammalia 
have been preserved, mounted and placed on exhibition. 
This collection enables the student to compare the morpho- 
logical relations of the anterior and posterior extremities in 
each type, and the general and special relations of the parts 
of the skeleton to each other throughout. Thus a visitor is 
able to observe either one single typical skeleton, standing 
vertically with all the parts slightly separated, but still sufii- 
ciently near to each other to show their dependence; or he 
may run his eye through the whole series, isolating some one 


— 1871.) . DOT [Annual Report. 


bone, and following it through all its more important modifi- 
cations within the class. 

Several alcoholic preparations have also been made. 

A system of mounting upon painted tablets, recommended 
by Dr. Wyman, has been adopted with admirable results. 
For white objects like bones, blue is preferred, and the effect 
is far superior to the funereal appearance of the black tablets 
previously employed. 

The Committee in their report, thank Mr. Abbott for the 
gratuitous services which he has so generously rendered. 


RADIATA. 


Mr. Sanborn has cleaned the cases and rearranged the 
corals and sponges, placing the whole upon black tablets, 
He also began the labelling of the species, but found that 
only about twenty per cent. had correct names. It is very 
important to this collection to secure, if possible, the services 
of Prof, A. E. Verrill, for the naming and labelling of the 
species. The gorgoniz and sponges also should be mounted, 
so as to be safe from careless handling. Mr. Minot has be- 
gun the study of classification and anatomy of Hchinoids, 
and the best mode of mounting and displaying this collection 
is now under consideration. 


INSECTA. 


Mr. Philip S. Sprague, though only employed for two 
months, has already arranged and placed in trays 160 species 
of the Curculionide, 206 species of the Cerambycide, and 199 
species of Chrysomelide, 51 species of Coccinellide, 45 spe- 
cies of Endomychidz —a total of 671 species. These are 
New England Coleoptera, and have been placed in the railing 
cases as part of the collection of N. American Coleoptera, 
begun and partially completed by Mr. Sanborn and Mr. G. D. 
Smith. The former generously placed his collection of 
Coleoptera at the disposal of Mr. Sprague, who has selected 
many species therefrom to fill blank spaces in the Society’s 


Annual Report.] 228 [May 3, 


collections. The balance of the specimens consist of the 
duplicates of the Harris, the remnants of the Say and Hentz, 
Shurtleff and Stratton collections. Mr. Sanborn, despite the 
numerous demands upon his time, has continued the work of 
labelling and arranging the Lepidoptera. 

The Society’s entire collection of N. American Bomby- 
cides, largely increased by donations to supply deficiences 
from Messrs. Swan, Trouvelot, Sprague, Dickinson, Minot, 
and Sanborn, is now displayed in the railing cases, properly 
labelled and in good condition. Mr. Minot has devoted 
much time to the Phalzenidz and Noctuide during the year, 
and the arrangement and labelling of the former family is 
now nearly completed. The collection of Butterflies of New 
England has been increased by more than 40 specimens from 
Messrs. Scudder, Edwards, Whitney and others, several of 
these being more than usually valuable, as types of the 
plates in Mr. Scudder’s forthcoming work; this department 
has also been relabelled throughout. Over 150 specimens of 
Lepidoptera, representing 53 species new to the collection, 
have been purchased from the collector, Mr. G. W. Belfrage, 
of Waco, Texas; some 20 species received in exchange from 
California, by Mr. Rh. H. Stretch, nearly 100 specimens of 
various orders from California, by Mr. William Holden, and 
a small lot of new and valuable diurnals from Tarma, Peru, 
by Mr. M. Moerner, have recently been presented. From 
Mr. Henry Edwards, of California, a large number of valu- 
able Coleoptera, both dry and alchoholic, have been received 
in return for exchanges. From Mr. Nathaniel H. Bishop, a 
number of Cuban insects of various orders, and from Mr. 
Samuel N. Chamberlain, of Port Orange, Florida, alcoholic 
specimens of value, numbering over one hundred. 

The Lepidoptera of the Sumichrast collection, received in 
envelopes and alluded to in our last report, have been en- 
tirely reset, and about twenty per cent. identified and 
labelled. More than half the duplicates of this collection, 
also inciuding the Coleoptera, have been sold at remunerative 


1871.] 999 [Annuat Report. 


prices. A valuable collection of the Ants of Mexico, identi- 
fied by Mr. Edward Norton, and presented early in the year 
by Mr. 8. H. Scudder, comprising 27 species, represented by 
86 specimens, has been labelled and placed on exhibition. 
Numerous specimens illustrative of habits, transformations, 
and structure, mostly alcoholic, have been added to the collec- 
tion. The Myrinpoda have been revised, and the North 
American species carefully identified by Mr. Edward Burgess, 
and 63 jars containing over 300 specimens, representing 45 
species, are now labelled and on exhibition. The Scorpioni- 
dee have also been determined by Mr. Burgess and are nearly 
ready for the cases. 

The Harris collection has been repeatedly examined during 
the past year, the transfer of the Heterocerous Lepidoptera 
to the new cases accomplished, and the orders Diptera and 
Hymenoptera stored for safety in the recently purchased 
boxes, awaiting a careful transfer to their proper place in the 
cabinet. The Neuroptera of this collection, by vote of the 
Committee and consent of the Custodian, have been en- 
trusted for comparison and identification to Dr. H. A. Hagen, 
of Cambridge, this gentleman having kindly offered to un- 
dertake the task. 

The Committee feel that the plan adopted in the railing 
cases for the safety of the collection, having stood some four 
or five years’ test, has proved an entire success, and that the 
new boxes recently procured after the pattern of those used 
at the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge, will 
obviate all danger of future damage from moths or anthreni. 
They would, however, again suggest that additional accommo- 
dation for the display of the specimens is required. 


MOLLUSCA. 


Notwithstanding the generous endowment of Miss Pratt, 
it has been found exceedingly difficult to obtain qualified 
assistance in this department. Dr. P. P. Carpenter, having 
been invited to lecture before the Society, his services were 


Annual Report.] 22,0 [May 8, 


secured, though for two weeks only. During this time he 
completed the preliminary work of unpacking the accumu- 
lations of the last five years and made a temporary arrange- 
ment of the shells into families and genera. 

The whole collection is now in the cases, and as a large 
portion is already mounted, there remains only about one- 
half still in an unfinished state. This very largely consists of 
duplicates, and, as suggested by Dr. Carpenter, the next step 
to be taken is to compare the species with our named collec- 
tion, pick out all the duplicates and make up sets for distri- 
bution and exchange. ‘The Amboyna mollusca, collected by 
Mr. Albert S. Bickmore, are exceedingly valuable, as they 
furnish us with alcoholic specimens of many Eastern species. 
Our collection of shells without the addition of specimens in 
alcohol, from which dissections and examinations of the ani- 
Te may be made, is comparatively valueless. 

.. Carpenter also looked over, arranged, and hastily 
ag a a small collection of Chitons, also the shells of Guate- 
mala and Cape Flattery, as well as the genera and a consider- 

able proportion of the species of the East India shells which 
had not been named and mounted previously by Prof. E. 8. 
Morse. 

Mr. L. Lincoln Thaxter has continued the New England col- 
lection, partly completed and mounted by Prof. E. 8. Morse. 
About fifty species have been added and the whole trans- 
ferred to a table case where it can be more readily studied. 
It is intended to illustrate the last edition of “Gould’s Inver- 
tebrata.” 

Mr. Arthur Smith has also been employed in sorting out 
and studying certain portions of the collection. 


FISHES AND REPTILES. 


The Custodian has received no report from the Chairman 
of this committee. Mr. Putnam has named over three hun- 
dred species of fishes and the labelling is nearly completed. 
The collection is very small, and though in good condition, 


1871.] 931 [Annual Report. 


as far as it goes, its incompleteness is not creditable to the 
Society. We are deficient in representatives of the larger 
fishes of our coast, and it is to be hoped that a decided im- 
provement in this respect may soon take place. 

The Reptilia, which were arranged last year, remain in 
about the same condition. This collection, also, is very. 
small and needs many additions. 


ORNITHOLOGY. 


There has been the usual activity in thisdepartment. Dr. 
T. M. Brewer has obtained several important additions — one 
donation from Mr. Thure Kumlein, of several very rare speci- 
mens, including the Hrismatura dominica, from Wisconsin, 
and alot from the same gentleman purchased by the Society. 
Another from the Smithsonian Institute contained an exceed- 
ingly valuable series of the nest and eggs of Arctic birds. 
Other additions will be found in the list of donations. 

The Brazilian skins of Dr. Bryant’s collection, about 200 
species, have been arranged, labelled and catalogued, by Dr. 
Brewer, all the doubtful species being referred to Dr. Geo. N. 
Lawrence, of New York. The Guatemalan skins purchased 
from Mr. Van Patten, have been received and are now being 
named. 

The Custodian has turned his personal attention more 
especially to the Birds, this being by far the most valuable 
collection in the building and most likely to suffer from neg- 
lect. In order to stop the ravages of anthreni, many expedi- 
ents have been adopted. Naphthaline has been largely used, 
but entirely without success. In fact, the use of any such 
“vade mecum” is often worse than nothing at all, since it 
leads the persons in charge to place confidence in its appar- 
ently favorable effect, and leaves the insects an open field to 
workin. ‘The birds on the lower shelves alone have become in- 
fected, the beetle does not seem to rise above these as long as 
there are any skins unattacked below. Several expedients 
have been resorted to, but nothing is apparently so effectual 


Annual Report.] 232 [May 3, 


as constant work. I have had every bird soaked in ben- 
zine or C. Naptha, and Mr. Arthur Smith has been employed 
several hours of nearly every day in this labor, going over 
and over the collection several times. The results are en- 
couraging. It is found that the Anthreni are confined to a 
few badly infected birds and decrease in number at each ap- 
plication. Notwithstanding the certainty that the beetles 
can be exterminated with our present system of constant 
supervision, the necessity of adopting some better method of 
preservation is very evident. 

The cases are not fitted by their construction either for 
containing the birds or for preserving them. Mr. Sanborn 
has devised several ingenious modes of stopping the cracks 
and stuffing the sashes, but as soon as one is caulked another 
opening makes its appearance and opens a new road for the 
incursions of these minute pests. 

A catalogue of the birds has been begun, and the work 
partially completed for the gallery of Water Birds. 


MAMMALIA. 


This department, hitherto the poorest in our Museum, is 
rapidly improving. 

A collection of the mammals of New England had been 
commenced this year and was progressing favorably, though 
slowly, when we received a donation of one thousand dollars 
from the estate of the late Mr. Sidney Homer. The Council 
appropriated this entirely to the purchase of New England 
mammals and thus secured the completion of this portion of 
our Museum. Mr. J. A. Allen has purchased several species 
from Mr. Rich, of Maine, and another lot from Mr. Maynard, 
of this State. Among them are a fine pair of Otter skins 
from Maine, and a remarkably fine specimen of Pine Marten. 
A pair of foxes obtained from Mr.S§. Jillson, also might be no- 
ticed on account of their fine appearance, and especially the 
dark color of the throat and breast of one of them. The 
collection has been named, labelled, and catalogued and 


1871.] 9338 [Annual Report. 


placed on exhibition, by Mr. Sanborn, in the wall cases on 
the east side of one of the north-west rooms. As these cases 
are needed for the osteological collection, it will soon become 
necessary to provide others for the reception of the skins. 


MICROSCOPY. 


The material in this department has not been increased by 
any very important donations during the past year. 


‘ 


The following report on the financial affairs of the Boston 
Society of Natural History, for the year ending April 29, 
1871, was presented by the Treasurer :— 


Receipts. 
Dividends and Interest . : 4 : : : P $7,831.04 
Courtis Fund Income : 0 5 . “ 0 2 666.73 
Pratt Gb B : 5 ° c : 798.00 
H. F. Wolcott Fund Income . 536.67 
Bulfinch Street Estate Accumulation applied to cost || 
of Heating Apparatus . 2,000.00 
Walker Fund Accumulation applicable to Repairs and 
Cabinet . : + 2,975.88 
Walker Fund Income (one half. seen : ‘ A 5 Il 1,233.14 
Bequest of Sidney Homer . : 6 é 0 9 1,000.00 
Annual Assessments . 6 “ 6 ; f : 1,170.00 
Admission Fees o 0 : 3 . A < 5 145.00 
Total 6 : . - 5 c 5 c c $18,556.56 
Expenditures. 
Museum Building and Furniture . $151.40 
Repairs of Building pre ncane new v Heating Appara- 
tus, costing #5, 152. ¢ 7,882.64 
Cabinet A 5 ; a : , “ : 1,447 42 
Library 4 : : ; ; a ; : : 217.383 
Publications 4 cl 6 é : . $2,188.68 
Less receipts . i ; : : : : 98.83 
Se 2,089.80 
Gas f 3 : : c : 5 : ; ; 155.70 
Kuel . x d 6 : é 0 ¢ : : a {fl 414.70 
Insurance . ; 5 fs 0 : . 31,672.50 |! 
Less return premium : : : : . 802.50 
sos 870.00 
Salaries and wages . c 0 : 9 d 6 : 6,52436 
Lectures. ¢ . $1,355.39 
Less subsidy of the Lowell Institute . . 1,200.00 
= 165.39 
General Expenses . ; ; 5 : 3 0 : 1,088.83) $20,507.07 


Excess of Expenditures over Receipts 6 a | $2,150.51 


234 


1871.] 


The following is a statement of the Property of the Society, ex- 


clusive of the Cabinet and Library. 
Museum Building. 
Cost of Building and Furniture, per last an 
Expended during the year : 
Bulfinch St. Estate THE) 
Note secured by mortgage 
84 Shares Tremont National Bank . 


2 <‘* Globe a 

4 “ Ogdensburg & Lake Champlain R.R. Co. 
preferred . . 

OES ently Wilmington & Balt. R.R. Co. 

Cash . : 5 


Cont F ind 


50 Shares Globe National Bank 
385 Shares Philadelphia, Wilmington & Balt. R.R. Co, 
$400 U.S. 5-20 Bonds F 


Walker finds 
Notes secured by mortgage . 


Walker Prize Fund. 


29 Shares Philadelphia, Wilmington & Balt. ee R. 3 
14 =« Vermont & Canada R.R. Co. 
Cash . j 


S. P. Pra Te: 


58 Shares Philadelphia, Wilmington & Balt. R.R. oe 
50 “ Norwich & Worcester R.R. Co. . ‘ 
10 <‘“ National Webster Bank . i: 
6 ‘* Boston National ate 
Cash ; : 


H, F. Wolcott Fund. 


$4,000 Bonds Chicago and N. Western R.R. Co. 10’s . 
42 Shares Philadelphia, Wilmington & Balt. RR. Co 


General Fund. 


a Shares Bates Manufacturing Co. 
Everett Mills . 
Hamilton Woolen Mills 

Washington Mills . : 

“  Cocheco Manuf. Co. 

«¢ - Lowell Manuf. Co. 

«¢ Laconia Manuf. Co. 

Pepperell Manuf. Co. 

«« Amoskeag Manuf.-Co. . 

«Essex County Manuf. Co. 

«© Manchester Print Works 

‘ New England Glass Co. 

56 Merrimack Manuf. Co. 


19 ‘“ Neptune Ins. Co. 
18 ‘ Boston Ins. Co. 5 
5 ‘ Washington Ins. Co. . 
12 <‘* United States Hotel Co. 
141 ‘“ Vermont and Canada R.R. Co. 
95 «¢ Michigan Central R.R. Co. . 5 
OO Ogdensb’ g & Lake Champl’n R.R. Pref. Stk. 
ay % Philadelphia, Wilmington & Balt. R.R. Co. 
2 “Boston & Lowell R.R. Co., and seein 
on new Share 5 
50 ‘ Norwich & Woreester R. R. Co. ; 
20 “ National Bank of Redemption : 
20s Tremont National Bank : 
DO Lo Atlas 
6 JG Globe OG 66 s 
15  “ National Webster “ p 


[ Annual Report. 


$137,185.66 


151.40 


$15,000.00 
10,122.00 
257.12 


421.95 
1,038.75 
48.94 


$6,250.00 
1,827.50 
425.00 


$1,582.92 
1,429.25 
233.04 


$3,057.25 
5,212.75 
1,072.75 
657.25 
67.94 


$4,058.27 
2,800.95 


$1,700.00 
38,500.00 
7,500.00 
8,000.00 
7,800.00 
1,800.00 


5,162.75 
2,782.60 


1,454.25 


1,684. 00 


$137,337.06 


26,888.06 


8,502.50 
41,105.00 


3,195.21 


10,067.94 


6,359.22 


102,723.68 


Annual Report.] 935 [May 3, 


Brought forward 5 5 ‘ 6 6 6 c ‘ 5 ‘ $886,178.67 
Miscellaneous. 
Unsettled Accounts and Cash $2,196.69 
Less pn cpiedness $1,293.19. Balance. of Homer r Be- 
quest $894.90. - 6 2,187.09 
ed $9.60 
Value of Property April 29, 1871, exclusive of Cabinet 
and Library . $335,188.27 
a6 ae «80, 1870, exclusive of Cabinet 
and Library . 9 4 324,083.86 
Increase of value the past year. c : : $12,104.41 


The foregoing statement of Receipts is exclusive of- a portion of 
the incomes of the Bulfinch Street Estate Fund, and of the Walker 
Prize Fund, and one half of the income of the Walker Fund, which 
are specially appropriated, and are received and accounted for by 
the Trustees of the Society in their respective reports, to which I 
beg leave to refer for explanation in detail. The sum of $20,415.00 
was received from the Executors of W. J. Walker, on June 4, 1871, 
in stocks and cash, which is included in the statement of the General 
Fund; and a reduction has been made in the estimated value of some 
of the stocks. 

All which is respectfully submitted. 

E. PICKERING, 
Treasurer of the Boston Society of Natural History. 

Boston, May 1, 1871. 


The report of the Nominating Committee presented at the 
preceding meeting was read, and the ballot ordered. 

Messrs. E. T. Bouvé and T. W. Brewer being requested to 
collect and count the ballots, reported that the following 
gentlemen were elected Officers of the Society for the ensu- 


ing year. 
PRESIDENT, 


THOMAS T. BOUVE. 
VICE-PRESIDENTS, 
CHARLES T. JACKSON, M.D., R. C. GREENLEAF. 
CORRESPONDING SECRETARY, 
SAMUEL L. ABBOT, M.D. 
RECORDING SECRETARY, 
J. A. SWAN. 


TREASURER, 
EDWARD PICKERING, 


Officers.] 


LIBRARIAN, 


J. A. SWAN. 


CUSTODIAN, 


ALPHEUS HYATT. 


COMMITTEES ON DEPARTMENTS. 


Geology and Minerals. 
THomas T. Bouvek, 
CHARLES T. Jackson, M.D., 
WILLIAM T. BRIGHAM. 


Paleontology. 


W. H. NILEs, 
N. S. SHALER, 
T. T. Bouvek. 


Radiates and Crustaceans. 
A. S. PackarD, JR., M.D., 


A. E. VERRILL, 
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ. 


Insects. 
F. G. SANBORN, 
A. S. PACKARD, Jn., M.D., 
EDWARD BURGESS. 


Birds ; Nests and Eggs. 
THomas M. Brewer, M.D., 
SAMUEL CaABoT, M.D., 

J. A. ALLEN. 


EDWIN BICKNELL, 
R. C. GREENLEAF, 


Botany. 
Wm. T. BRIGHAM, 
CHARLES J. SPRAGUE, 
J. A. LOWELL. 


Comparative Anatomy. 
Tuomas DwiGut, JR., M.D., 


JEFFRIES WYMAN, M.D., 
J.C. WHITE, M.D. 


Mollusks. 
EpWARD S. Morse, 


JOHN CUMMINGS, 
Levi L. THAXTER. 


Fishes and Reptiles. 
F. W. PUTNAM, 
D. H. STorER, M.D., 
J. A. ALLEN. 


Mammals. 
J. A. ALLEN, 
THOMAS WATERMAN, JR., M.D. 
J. B. S. Jackson, M.D. 


Microscopy. 


B. Joy JEFFRIES, M.D. 


The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. George E. 
Channing, for a large collection of birds’ eggs, made in South 


Carolina, and presented by him. 


A vote of thanks was also 


passed to Mr. J. I’. Wood, manager of the Union Stone 
Company for the highly satisfactory manner in which he had 
repaired a valuable specimen of footprints in sandstone, from 
Southern Asia, lately broken by visitors. 


It was voted that the thanks of the Society be presented 
to Mr. John A. Lowell, Trustee of the funds of the Lowell 


1871.] 9387 [Hyatt. 


Institute, for the generous appropriation made by him to sus- 
tain the several courses of lectures given under the auspices 
of the Society, during the past winter. 


May 17, 1871. 
The President in the chair. Thirty-five persons present. 


Dr. Thomas Dwight, Jr., presented by title, “A Descrip- 
tion of the Whale, Balenoptera musculus,’ now in the 
possession of the Society, with remarks on the classification 
of the Cetacea. 


The Secretary read the following paper: — 


CATALOGUE OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL COLLECTION OF THE 
Boston Socrery or NATURAL History. By Pror. ALPHEUS 
HYatTtT. 


A catalogue of the birds in the possession of this Society is here 
begun,and the observations recorded are only of such a cursory char- 
acter as have been made in the course of this work. The subject of 
the present article, the Spheniscidz, having been analyzed as a group 
only by Schlegel, more time and space have been given to them in 
proportion to the number of species than will be found necessary for 
other groups. Similar series of observations, however, upon the 
genera and species will be published, so far as they may be deemed 
appropriate or useful. The synonymy of each species has been 
followed out only so far as is necessary in order to settle the appro- 
priate name for each species, and give references to some one or two 
of the best figures extant. 

It is incumbent upon me to express the most grateful acknowledg- 
ments to the Smithsonian Institution and Peabody Academy, for the 
loan of books and specimens; to Prof. S. F. Baird and especially to 
Dr. Elliott Coues, for revision of my manuscript and proof sheets and 
many other acts of courtesy and kindness. The. note at the end of 
the enumeration of the species is also by Dr. Coues, and gives an 


important summary of the principal osteological characteristics of 
the family. 


Hyatt.] 238 [May 17, 
SPHENISCIDZ. 


The general affinities of the genera and species of the larger part 
of this family come to a focus in Spheniscus minor. This, while 
holding a strictly intermediate position, presents a nearer approach 
to the lowest members of the genera Pygoscelis, Eudyptes and Ap- 
tenodytes than any other existing form. Though not very closely 
related to Aptenodytes, it is quite as near this as any other known 
species, for, as I shall show in the generic analyses, the resemblance 
of Pygoscelis papua to Aptenodytes is counterbalanced by character- 
istics which really ally it closely with Spheniscus minor. Eudyptes 
chrysolophus, which stands precisely intermediate between Sphenis- 
us and Eudyptes, affords an opportunity of making a new genus 
founded upon a combination of the short tail and coloration of the 
former with the bill and head plumes of the latter. 

Jf we consider the three modifications which presumably take 
place upon the basis of the organization of Spheniscus, we find that 
they cannot be associated in any system but one of radiating straight 
lines. 

Every series, except Aptenodytes, which has only two very closely 
allied species, exhibits a decided change in each species. This 
change in Pygoscelis and Eudyptes carries each species farther from 
the lowest member, which in each case is more or less like the ances- 
tral form which was probably closely allied to Spheniscus minor. It 
is entirely conjectural, whether Aptenodytes came originally from 
Spheniscus or vice versa, or whether they both sprang from a common 
ancestor. Such a question can of course only be settled by refer- 
ence to fossils, and these, with a single Australian tertiary example, 
are at present wanting. 

The family may be divided into two groups; those with truncated 
mandible and hooked maxilla, and those with both jaws curved and 
the spindle-shaped areas of the sides of the mandible bare and 
highly colored. If it is divided according to the length of the tail 
feathers, the genus Eudyptes must be dismembered, if, according to 
the greater or less feathering of the bill, Pygoscelis must be separa- 
ted into as many groups as it has species, and in either case the 
genetic connection of Spheniscus with Pygoscelis and Eudyptes is 
violated. Such a connection may be legitimately inferred in any se- 
ries of species from the affinities of the adults, when they present in 
regular succession or gradation a progressive series of changes o1 


1871.] 939 [Hyatt. 


modifications departing more and more widely from some central or 
original type, whether that type be still in existence or not. 

This is undoubtedly the case among the Spheniscide. Pygoscelis 
has a long tail, and step by step the nostrils become feathered; Eu- 
dyptes begins lower with a short tail, then a long tail is added and the 
aberrant characteristics of the bill are increased. Throughout these 
two genera the bill has suffered considerable modification, but only 
in one species, Pygoscelis adelie, is the mandible sharp at the end, 
and though every other characteristic of the species may have been 
changed, the mandible remains straight and truncated. In Apteno- 
dytes this law of progress is broken through, and we find not only 
the long tail developed, but a very long and peculiar bill correlated 
with a system of coloration distinct from that of all the rest of the 
family, and apparently an exceptional system of nidification. 

According to Jules Verreaux the female of Aptenodytes Pennant 
carries one egg between the thighs in a pouch formed by a fold of 
the skin of the abdomen, this pouch disappearing after incubation; 
Spheniscus demersus and one species of Eudyptes which were also 
examined, deposited and hatched their eggs in the regular way. 

It is hardly necessary to repeat the family characteristics, they are 
so well known to every one. The wings are mere lateral paddles 
covered by feather scales on the upper side, but by perfect, though 
short, feathers on the under side. All the feathers are exceedingly 
immature, and the tail feathers have unusually large, broad shafts, 

According to Nitzsch there are no apteria. The feathers them- 
selves are narrow, lanceolate, with a very broad, flat shaft, convex 
beneath, with the ordinary furrow of the lower surface wanting. 2 
The terminal barbs are rigid, bristle-lke, and flat, at the lower part 
soft and downy. ‘The aftershaft is recognizable, and similar to the 
shaft. The tube is short and fusiform, and discriminated from the 
shaft by a‘deep constriction. No specially formed remiges can be de- 
tected in the wings, but in the tail stiff rectrices are distinguishable. 
The feathers of the oil gland circlet have finer but still rigid shafts 
and much longer, capillary, soft barbs which are downy below. The 
number of the orifices ig the gland was not ascertained. The spe- 
cies examined by him were Spheniscus demersus and Aptenodytes Pen- 
nantit. , 

So far as my observations have gone there appear to be two forms 


1 Revue Zoologique. 1847. 
2This is not always the case; often in the younger, and in the wing feathers, 
and even in some adult feathers, a faint trace of this groove may be observed. 


Hyatt.] 240 [May 11 


of feathers, exclusive of the tail feathers and the long filiform plumes 
which occur on the heads of the species of Eudyptes; one is the 
type found in Spheniscus. This has the barbs and shaft which form 
the extremity of the feathers dark colored, the remaining barbs and 
the base of the stem growing lighter until the down at the base be- 
comes perfectly white. The stem is in these very flat, and the bases 
of the barbs turned where they join the shaft or aftershaft. This 
division of color I presume takes place when the aftershafét barb takes 
the place of the true shaft barbs, but this I could nct determine satis- 
factorily. In the feathers of Spheniscus they occupy a considerable 
proportion of the whole length of the rather short and truncated 
plume. 

In Aptenodytes Pennantii the stem, instead of being but slightly in- 
flated at the base as in Spheniscus, is very considerably so; and is, 
together with the barbs, brownish to the very base as in this genus; 
the black being, on the contrary, confined to the very summit of the 
feather. In the form of the stem and its color, the outlines of the 
feather and the tumidity of the bases of the barbs near the base of 
the stem, it is very similar to the dorsal feathers of Spheniscus, but 
in the form of the stem and in size it is precisely ike Pygoscelis. 

This genus has very large shafts to the dorsal feathers, very broad 
and abruptly lanceolate, the tube being smaller at the base than in 
any other genus. The shaft itself is very broad, becoming suddenly 
acute instead of gradually tapering, and the tip of the feather itself 
more acute than in either Spheniscus or Aptenodytes. The barbs 
and stem are dark colored at the summit, but speedily become white 
and wholly downy at some distance from the base. This renders the 
tip of the feather much denser than the lower two-thirds and gives 
an attenuated, ragged look to the whole. Eudyptes has smaller 
feathers than Pygoscelis and the stem considerably longer and nar- 
rower, and not so abruptly lanceolate. The tip of the shaft narrows 
and gradually reaches nearly to the outline of the barbs— these 
being very short. The outline of the dorsal feathers is much the 
same as in Pygoscelis, with perhaps a slightly more acute tip. The 
long, lanceolate head feathers are peculiar, and differ from the dorsal 
feathers in the extreme length of the shaft as well as the small size 
and thinness of the base of the stem, which bears the later devel- 
oped barbs. The feathers on the back of the heads of the different — 
species of this genus present an approximation to this same mode of 
growth, the shaft being attenuated. In other genera the head feath- 


1871.] 241 [Hyatt. 


ers differ from the dorsal ones only in their smaller size and generally 
attenuated proportions. 

The term “scales” used for the abortive feathers of the wing is an 
awkward substitute for a more technical expression. These are 
really feathers in which a simple shaft alone is developed, and this 
becomes very broad and lanceolate in the outer feathers of the wings. 
The former are merely fringed by the short barbs, but in the centre 
of the wing true feathers are developed, though the shaft still re- 
mains the principal part, and the color of both shaft and barbs is 
dark nearly to the base. The form and shape of these feathers also 
accord with those on the back. In Spheniscus and Aptenodytes the 
shaft is gradually tapering, the terminal and lateral barbs long; in 
Pygoscelis there is a much more sudden tapering at both extremities, 
though the barbs are still long; and in Eudyptes there is a gradual 
tapering with very short terminal barbs. 

The feathers of Aptenodytes confirm the conclusion deduced from 
its other characteristics, that it is nearly allied to Spheniscus minor. 
The differences and resemblances between it and Pygoscelis are pre- 
cisely what might have been anticipated if both of these had de- 
scended from a type having similar characteristics, and standing in 
the same relative position as Spheniscus minor does. 

The toes are scutellate on the distal portions, but higher up re- 
ticulate with hexagonal and finally tetragonal or rhomboidal plates 
on the tarsi. The legs are situated posteriorly, the bird standing 
erect when on land; most of the crura are buried; the tarsi very 
short, flat and very broad, the tibio-tarsal joint nearly covered by the 
feathers, the four toes extended forward and are webbed, the hallux 
very short, lateral,1 and attached to the base of the tarsus on the in- 
ner side. Nails remarkably broad and flat; the middle toe invari- 
ably the longest, all of them straight, and webs complete. The bill 
has the maxilla curved at the tip, and usually divided by lateral 
grooves in which the nostrils are situated. 


APTENODYTES. 


Coloration is markedly distinct. The long narrow horns of orange 
on the sides of the head, the black of all the fore parts of the head, 


1 Whether the hallux is elevated or insistent cannot be decided satisfactorily, it 
seems to vary —in Some species or rather specimens to be elevated, and in others 
the nail bends under, touching the ground, and perhaps might be considered 
as insistent rather than elevated. 


PROCEEDINGS B.S. N. H.—VOL. XIII. 16 MARCH, 1872. 


Hyatt. 242 [May 17, 


the blue grey of the back of the neck and the partial collar formed 
by the extension of this color below the lateral orange bands, are all | 
peculiar to the two species representing this genus. The bill is ex- | 
tremely long and shallow, but very wide proportionally at the base, 
and flattened. The tipisacuteand bent in both mandibles. Broad | 
orange colored spaces occupy either side of the mandible for two- 
thirds of its length, tapering to a point at either extremity. 

Nostrils naked and,in the specimen examined, buried in the nasal 
groove, which is very deep and distinct. 

The maxilla is covered with feathers somewhat more than half its | 
entire length. Tail feathers long. Size largest in the family. 


SPHENISCUS. 


The coloration is uniformly dark, strongly contrasting with Apten- 
odytes in this respect. There is, however, a constant tendency to 
form a collar around the throat as in Spheniscus magellanicus, and 
to leave the sides of the head lighter colored. The bill is straight, 
short, laterally compressed, narrow and deep, the maxilla distinetly 
hooked, the mandible truncated. The feathers extend only a short 
distance on the maxilla; the nostrils are exposed and naked, the 
nasal groove being very shallow. In S. demersus and its immediate 
congeners the maxilla has also several sulci towards the base. 

The mandible is feathered to the angle of the lower and upper 
corneous plates of the jaw— about cne-half of its length. Tail 
feathers very short. 


PYGOSCELIS. 


The coloration is uniformly dark, and there is a general tendency | 
to form incomplete hoods of color. Thus, in P. papua, the hood is 
broken by a white semi-lune on top; in P. antarctica by white cheeks, 
the lower border of the hood, however, still remaining as a dark line 
encircling the throat just below the base of the bill; in P. adelice, 
when adult, the hood is complete, but the white cheeks of P. antare- 
tica are represented by a semi-circle of white continued upward from 
the neck towards the eyes on either side. 

The bill is straight, not so long and flattened as in Aptenodytes 
Pennaniti, but looking quite like the bill of that species. Of course 
it is destitute of the colored patches on the sides of the mandibie, 
the apex of which is truncated with an ascending gonys, instead of 
being acute and decurved as in Aptenodytes. 


1871.] 9438 - (Hyatt. 


Both mandibles are feathered for at least half their entire length, 
but the nostrils may be either naked, as in P. papua, or covered, as 
in the other three species. 

In P. adelie the amount of the bill exposed is small, (only about 
one-third), the nostrils are thickly covered, and the naked angle of 
the upper surface of the bill is very short. The nasal groove is very 
abrupt and widens out rapidly toward the skull, instead of being 
long and narrow as in P. papua and Aptenodytes. 

Although the bill becomes shorter in this species, like that of 
Spheniscus, it maintains the breadth of base viewed from above, 
which characterizes Aptenodytes and Eudyptes. The tail feathers 
are very long in all of these species. 

If now we seek the affinities of the different forms, we are at once 
impressed by the fact that P. papua and P. antarctica really repre- 
sent Spheniscus, and P. adelie is similar to Eudyptes. P. papua 
possesses the longest and narrowest bill of any, except Aptenodytes; 
both mandibles are feathered as in Spheniscus minor, though the 
plumes reach farther forward; the nasal groove is also very similar, 
especially as it is not strictly coincident with the nostrils as in 
Aptenodytes, but a little above them as in Spheniscus. The gonys 
is slightly concave, the sides compressed, the tip truncate, and the 
tip of the maxilla hooked. These characteristics indicate a very 
decided affinity with Spheniscus minor; but for the long tail (longer 
than that of any other bird of the family except P. adelie) it might 
be included in the same genus. Separated by this characteristic we 
are enabled to pass to P. antarctica, in which equally strong affinities 
are shown in the coloration, etc., but the tail is the same and the bill 
shows characteristics approximating it to P. adelia. 

- Finally, P. adelie has a beak which in general form and charac- 
teristics is like that of Eudyptes; this is apparent in the width 
posteriorly of the nasal sulci, and the extent to which the mandible 
is feathered. ‘The mandible, instead of being straight and truncated, 
with a concave gonys, as in P. papua and Spheniscus, is pretty evenly 
and convexly curved.? In this it is peculiar as it is also in the com- 
plete feathering of the nostrils. 


1 This was observed in but one specimen, no others being at hand for comparison; 
and it may prove that the abrupt though even curve, which terminates the mandi- 
ble, is a varietal difference. It needs a very slight exaggeration of the angularity 
of the upper portion to make it as decidedly truncated as in Spheniscus. 


2 


Hyatt. ] 244 [May 17, 


EuDYPTES. 


Coloration uniformly dark. A complete hood is here general, each 
of the several species having that pattern. The head feathers are 
generally longer than in other genera and the top of the head is or- 
namented by two still more elongated bunches of feathers, forming 
curly pendent lateral crests. ‘These are of an orange or yellowish 
hue. The bills are reddish, very short, straight, the maxilla hooked 
at the end, the mandible truncated, deep and broad at the base as in 
Pygoscelis. The nasal groove widens very rapidly posteriorly, and 
the feathers fill the triangular spaces thus made, but do not in any 
case entirely cover the nostrils, which are almost concealed under 
the large fold made by the upper edge of the deep nasal groove. 
The mandible, however, is plumed for more than half its length as 
in Pygoscelis adelie. The tail feathers are short in Hudyptes catar- 
ractes, and long in the other three species. The truncation of the 
mandible is usually denied, but an examination of the bills of the three 
specimens in our collection is sufficient to establish the truth of the 
above; itis hardly so decidedly truncated as in Spheniscus but yet 
very plainly so. The fullest development of this peculiar bill is in 
E. chrysocoma where the bill is deepest, and least in E. catarractes, 
which resembles Spheniscus minor in many of its characteristics, in 
its color, a dark penguin blue, its short tail and the extent to which 
both jaws are feathered. In all other respects it is a true Eu- 
dyptes. The size and shape of the head and bill, especially the 
shortness of the latter, the great breadth posteriorly of the nasal 
groove, and the great breadth of the base of the bill as well as its 
depth, are characteristics of Eudyptes. 

Linnzus, Editio X and XII, has two species, one confounded with 
Diomedea and one with Phaéton. 


LITERATURE. 


The genus Spheniscus was first formed by Brisson (Ornithologie, 
Tome 6, p. 99), and included one species only — Spheniscus nevius, 
which he identifies as Diomedea demersa of Linn., and Anser magel- 
lanicus of Clusius, Exot. Lib., Cap. v, p. 101. The specimen fig- 
ured in pl. 9, has the complete collar of the variety described by 
Forster as Aptenodytes magellanicus. Catarractes was also formed 
by Brisson, p. 102, to contain Phaéton demersus of Linn., figured 
by Edwards, Tome 1, p. 49, pl. 49, and Aptenodytes catarractes Fors- 
ter, Comm. p. 145. 4to. Paris. 


1871.] 9A5 [Hyatt. 


Forster, Comm. Society Reg. Scient. Gotting., vol. 11, p. 781, 
characterizes the genus Aptenodytes, and gives descriptions of the 
following species :— 


CRISTATA. 
Aptenodytes chrysocoma. 
ALOPHE. 


Aptenodytes: patachonica. 
Aptenodytes patagonica Miller. 
Aptenodytes papua. 
A ptenodytes antarctica. 
A ptenodytes magellanicus. 
A ptenodytes demersus. 
Spheniscus nevius Briss. 
Diomedea demersa Linn. 
Aptenodytes catarractes. 
Phaéton demersus Linn. 
A ptenodytes torquata. 
S. demersus, var. 
A ptenodytes minor. 


The name Aptenodytes must belong to A. patagonica, since A. 
chrysocoma is of the same group as Catarractes Briss., Spheniscus 
catarractes Schl. The genus Pinguinaria has for a type Pinguinaria 
patachonica Shaw, Nat. Miscel., vol. 1v, pl. 409, Dee. 1799. Refer- 
ence is also made to Mus. Leverianum, No. 3, t. 144, p. 11, for first 
description P. patagonica, but this I have not seen. 

Eudyptes, Vieillot, Analyse, etc., 1816, p. 67, is the first tenable 
distinctive name of the crested genus. In 1825, according to. Gray, 
Vieillot used Brisson’s original name of Catarractes, which, however, 
is antedated by Moehring (1752) for a genus of Alcide. 

Stephens, in Shaw’s General Zoology, 1825, established a new 
genus from the same group, Chrysocoma, which, however, also in- 
cluded Spheniscus minor. 

Whether Vieillot included in Eudyptes species which were not 
plumed on the head I cannot say, not having had access to his work. 

Pygoscelis has Wagler’s authority. From an extract in the Isis, 
' 1832, it may be seen that the characteristics are the “ gestalt” of 
the beak and the length of the tail. These characteristics are taken, 
from Wagler’s Nat. Syst. d. Amph., to which I have not had access. 
The type is Aptenodytes papua Forster. 


Hyatt. ] 246 [May 17, 


Hombron and Jacquinot, in preliminary descriptions of new species 
in Ann. de Sci. Nat., 1841, p. 320, describe two species of Eudyptes, 
and afterward in the publication of results in Voy. au Pole Sud, on 
pl. 33 of the birds, separate adelice as Dasyrhamphus adelie, leav- 
ing antipodes to represent Kudyptes.? 

It follows from the preceding review of the different generic de- 
scriptions that Linneus, neither by the position which he gave the 
eroup in his system, nor by his confounding it with Phaéton, recog- 
nized its real relations to the whole class of birds. 

The generic characteristics selected show a similar deficiency. 
They were taken from the specific differences of the hooking of the 
maxilla, and the peculiarities of the nostrils and the family charac- 
teristic of featherless wings, whereas four toes were used as of spe- 
cific value in “Diomedea” demersa, and the freedom of the hind toe 
as specifically characteristic of ‘“Phaéton” demersus. 

The necessity of separating this very distinct type from the groups 
with which Linnzus associated it, was first recognized by Brisson, 
and here we find general characteristics given for the group. These, 
however, are such as are shared in common with the Colymbidz with 
which they were associated; viz., four toes, three joined by a mem- 
brane, the fourth separate; the limbs behind are hidden in the ab- 
domen. 

The minor divisions were properly enough characterized by the 
peculiarities of the beak, this being hooked in the Penguins and 
straight in the Divers. The generic characteristics were a mere trans- 
cript of those of the group, except the form of the lower mandible, 
which is shown to be truncated in Spheniscus and rounded in Eu- 
dyptes. The colors of the feathers were very naturally selected as 
designating the species. 

The type of Spheniscus is Spheniscus nevius, but it becomes neces- 
sary to call it by the name of demersus, subsequently given to it by 
Linneus. The name would then be as used by Schlegel — Sphenis- 
cus demersus. 

Catarractes demersus of Brisson, the same species as Phaéton de- 
mersus of Linn., is the type of the crested group, but this cannot 
properly retain the generic designation of Brisson, but must, as pre- 
viously pointed out, take the name of Eudyptes, Vieillot, 1816, in- 
stead of Chrysocoma of Stephens, 1825. 


1 Bonaparte, in 1856, in the Comptes Rendus, institutes the genus Eudyptila 
upon the Aptenodytes minor of Forster 


1871.) 247 (Hyatt, 


Aptenodytes chrysocoma, which is a crested species, and therefore 
referable to the genus Eudyptes, makes it necessary to select the next 
species, A ptenodytes patagonica, as Forster’s type of the genus. 

Forster’s descriptions, though they did not recognize either of Bris- 
son’s divisions, and ignored both of his names, added greatly to the 
previous knowledge of the species and made the first mention of the 
crested birds as a group, contrasting them with the Alophe or non- 
crested group. 

Pinguinaria of Shaw is evidently identical with Aptenodytes of 
Forster, as may be seen from the figure of the type in Nat. Miscel- 
lany, vol. 11, pl. 409, Dec. 1799. 


APTENODYTES. 


Aptenodytes Pennantii Gray. 

Aptenodytes Pennantii Gray, Ann. Nat. Hist. 1844, vol. x11, p. 
315. Patagonian Penguin, Pennant, Trans. Phil. Soc; vol. 58, p. 91, 
pl. 5, nec Forst. 

Pinguinaria patachonica Shaw, Nat. Miscellany, 1799, pl. 409. 

The distinctive characteristics of this species as defined by Gray 
appear to be sufficiently well marked in the single specimen which 
is in the collection. Comparison with a specimen in the Museum of 
Peabody Academy at Salem shows, however, that considerable varia- 
tion must be expected in the coloration. The patches on the sides of 
the head in our specimen are of a decided orange ; they are also quite 
narrow above; the orange on the throat very broad and quickly fad- 
ing into lemon color, the greenish tips of the dark feathers of the 
throat and forehead hardly perceptible. In the Salem specimen the 
patches are very broad above, and bright lemon color fading into or- 
ange, the orange on the throat fading very gradually into lemon and 
this zone, partly, but not wholly, owing to bad stuffing, is long and nar- 
row; greenish feather tips distinctly marked on the throat and fore- 
head. ‘The Museum possesses no specimen of the Emperor Penguin, 
Aptenodytes patagonica Forst., so that no comparison could be made. 
The wings are quite dark underneath, the white occupying the larger 
part of the centre only. About three scutella on each toe. 

One adult, Str. Magellan, Coll. La Fresnaye. 


SPHENISCUS. 


Spheniscus minor Temm. 
Spheniscus minor 'Temm., Man. Orn., 2d Ed., 1820, 1, p. 113. 


Hyatt.] 248 [May 17, 


Aptenodytes minor Forst., Comm. Soc. Reg. Scient. Gotting., 1760, 
vol. 111, p. 147. 

Spheniscus minor and undina Gould, Birds of Australia, pls. 84 and 
85. 
Spheniscus minor Schlegel, Museum des Pays Bas, Urinatores, p. 
10. 

Gould’s figure is excellent, but the light feet are probably liable to 
become dark in some specimens, and I am even disposed to credit the 
assertion of Latham, that some of these birds have red feet and are 
occasionally marked with black on the toes. Several of the speci- 
mens in our collection though much faded, show the reddish tinge quite 
distinctly, and one only has the feet so light colored that they approx- 
imate to the variety figured by Gould. Latham also remarks that 
the absolute size and color of the feathers vary exceedingly on the 
back; this indicates that Spheniscus undina of Gould is only a small 
sized, perhaps more or less localized variety of Spheniscus minor, 
if, indeed, it be anything more than a young bird. The wings are 
white below with only a small spot of penguin blue at the tip. 

A young specimen from New Zealand has an imperfect collar 
formed by lines of dark brown feathers which cross the throat. The 
bill is shorter and rounder, not flattened on the sides or so deep as in 
the adults. At a still earlier period, when the true feathers begin to 
replace the down, there are no tail feathers. These are grown subse- 
quently, though very short, and are thicker and stiffer in some speci= 
mens than in others. The longest and thickest shanked feathers 
occur in the young specimen from New Zealand, described above. 
There are only one or two scutella on the toes at the bases of the 
nails. 

One, U. S. Ex. Ex., Capt. Wilkes, young. One, Soc.Coll., still 
in the down. Australia. One, Soc. Coll, adult. One, La Fres- 
naye Coll., adult. All from New Zealand. 

Spheniscus demersus Schlegel. 

Spheniscus nevius Brisson, Ornith., 1760, vol. vi, p. 99, pl. 9. 
Black-footed Penguin, Edwards, vol. 11. pl. 94. 

Aptenodytes magellanicus Forst., Commt. Gotting., vol. m1, p. 148, 
pl. 5. 

Diomedea demersa Linn., Syst. Nat., 1758, Ed. 10, p. 132. 

Spheniscus demersus Schlegel, Mus. des Pays Bas, 1867, Urina- 
tores, p. 10. 

A fine figure of a still younger stage, if Spheniscus demersus is 


1871.) 249 [Hyatt. 


really the young, is given by Ed., pl. 94. This has nearly a complete 
head of brown. The stripes that occupy the sides of the head are 
merely indicated by lighter areas on the cheeks. | 

The young of this species in our collection has the typical charac- 
teristics of S. demersus, and its companion S. magellanicus, has, as 
previously noted, a complete collar of dark feathers around the neck. 
The S. magellanicus is much the larger bird. In both, the light bar 
crosses the bill. 

The young bird: is quite dark under the wing and under the tail, 
while the old bird has only scattered black feathers forming minute 
spots under the wings, and is entirely white under the tail. 

One fact seems to militate against the supposition that S. demersus is 
the young of S. magellanicus. The tail feathers of the former in our 
collection are much longcr and stiffer than those of Spheniscus magel- 
anicus, which hardly differ from the feathers of the back. This is a 
feature of more or less variability, but it is usually the product of ma- 
ture growth and creates a doubt which can only be answered by the 
examination of other specimens of S. magellanicus. 

On the middle and outer toes there are four or five scutella upon, 
each of the first two joints, with hexagonal reticulations upon the 
joint itself. The inner first joint is wholly scutellate. 

One S. demersus, young, Cape Good Hope, La Fresnaye. One 
S. magellanicus, U.S. Ex. Exp., Capt. Wilkes, Tierra del Fuego, 
adult. 


PYGOSCELIS. 


Pygoscelis papua Wazel. 

Aptenodytes papua Forst., Comment. Soc. Gotting., 1781, vol. 3, p. 
140, pl. 3. Vieillot, Galerie, pl. 299. Gray, Erebus and Terror, 
pl. 25. 

A ptenodytes teniata Peale, U. S. Ex. Exp., Peale Mss. 1848. 

Eudyptes papua Cassin, U. 8. Ex. Exp. (from Peale Mss.), 1859, 
p- 350. 

Pygoscelis Wagleri Sclater, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1860, p. 390. 

The maxilla is black down to the lateral channels, and has the 
tomial parts and mandible, except the tip, yellow. On the under 
side of the wing the upper edge is dark colored for about one-fourth 
of its leneth and the tip is also dark. 

One adult. Coll. La Fresnaye.! 


1The locality given is ‘‘ New Guinea,” and probably therefore erroneous. 


Hyatt.] 250 [May 17, 


Pygoscelis antarctica Bon. 

Aptenodytes antarcticus Forst., Comment. Soc. Gotting., vol. 3, p. 
141, pl. 4. 

- Eudyptes antarctica Gray, Erebus and Terror, pl. 26. 

Pygoscelis antarctica Bon. Schlegel, Mus. des Pays Bas, Urina- 
tores, p. 5. 

The first joint is scutellate. Two-thirds of the upper edge and 
tip of the underside of the wing are dark colored. 

One adult. No locality. Coll. La Fresnaye. 

Pygoscelis adelie. 

Caiarractes adelie Homb. et Jacq., Ann. Sci. Nat., 1841, p. 820. 

Dasyrhamphus adelie Homb. et Jacq., Voy. au Pole Sud, Oiseaux, 
pl. 33. 

Pygoscelis brevirostris Gray, Erebus and Terror, Birds, pl. 28. 

Aptenodytes longicaudata Peale, U. S. Ex. Exp. Mss. 1848. 

Eudyptes adelie Cassin, U. S. Ex. Exp. (from Peale’s Mss.), Mam. 
and Ornith., 1859, p. 350. 

Dasyrhamphus Herculis Finsch, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1870, p. 322, pl. 
25. Young with white throat; fide Coues, in epist. 

The length of the legs in the stuffed skin of this species, has led 
me to suggest, that observations on recent specimens determining 
the length of legs might prove of considerable interest and value. 
There are only four or five scutella on the first joint of each toe. 

One adult. Antarctic Ocean. 


EUDYPTES. 


Eudyptes chrysolopha Brandt. 

Eudyptes chrysolophus Brandt, Bull. Acad. St. Petersburg, vol. 2, 
1837, p. 314. 

Eudyptes chrysocoma Gould, Birds of Australia, vol. 7, pl. 83. 

There are only two or three scutella on the first joint of each toe. 
Three-fourths of the upper edge, the tip and a portion of the lower mar- 
gin of the under side of the wing are dark. ‘The dark feathers ex- 
tend downward on the throat and have a concave outline. All the 
feathers on the top of the head are long and help to form the crest. 

One adult. Falkland Islands, Coll. La Fresnaye. 

Eudyptes catarractes. 

Aptenodytes catarractes, Gmelin, p. 558. Forst., Comment. Soc. 
Gotting., vol. 3, p. 145. 


1871.] 951 (Hyatt. 


Catarractes demersus Brisson, Ornithol., vol. 6, p. 112. 

Phaéton demersus Linn., Ed. x, p. 135. 

There may be three or four scutella on each toe. All of the up- 
per edge, the tip and part of the lower edge of the under wing dark 
colored. The dark feathers do not extend upon the throat but form 
a nearly straight line across. On one side the dark feathers of the 
sides of the neck encroach upon the white of the abdomen and form 
a partial collar of white which is not seen on the other side. Only 
the lateral feathers of the oral regions are sufficiently lengthened 
to form the crest, and they do not extend forwards above the eyes. 

One adult. Falkland Islands, Coll. La Fresnaye. 

Eudyptes chrysocoma. 

Aptenodytes chrysocoma Forst. Comment. Gott., vol. 111, 1781, p. 
135, pl. 1. 

Eudyptes pachyrhynchus Gray, Gen. of Birds, vol. 11, pl. 176. 

? Hudyptes nigrwestis Gould, P. Z. S., 1860, 418. 

Three scutella on each toe. Two-thirds of the upper edge and 
the tip alone of the under wing are dark. The dark feathers extend 
farther down upon the throat than in either of the two species men- 
tioned and have a pointed, convex outline. The lateral feathers of 
the oral regions form a double crest as in Eudyptes catarractes, but 
also extend forwards beyond the eyes and join on the front to form a 
central tuft. 

One adult. No locality, Coll. La Fresnaye. 


OSTEOLOGICAL NOTES, BY DR. ELLIOTT COUES. 


The skeleton of the Spheniscidz is highly characteristic. With the 
general conformation, as a whole, of that of other Pygopodes, seen 
in the backward set of the posterior limbs, the great extent of the 
bony (costal and sternal) framework enclosing the abdominal as well 
as thoracic viscera, etc., there are many special modifications of the 
skeleton, any one of a large number of individual bones being of 
itself diagnostic of the family. A remarkable solidity, breadth and 
flatness of different bones is the dominant characteristic; it marks sev- 
eral bones that are cylindrical in all other birds and hollow in most. 

_Foremost among the diagnostic skeletal characters of the family 
comes the partly confluent condition of the metatarsals, which in all 
other existing birds are completely fused. The compound metatarsus 
is exceptionally broad from side to side, and shows its composition in 
the two lengthened fenestre that indicate the three original meta- 


Hyatt.] Poe . {May 17, 


tarsals. This may afford a useful hint in any search for the ancestral 
stock or primitive type of the Spheniscide. As well as we can 
gather from the isolated fossil data at our service, birds have grad- 
ually coalesced both metacarpals and metatarsals that were free 
in a primitive condition. The metacarpals appear to have run 
together later than the metatarsals; for nearly all birds to-day show 
partial separation of the former, while the latter are confluent in all 
but the Spheniscide; while the oldest known bird, Archeopteryx 
macrurus, with confluent metatarsals, shows unanchylosed metacarpals, 
as well as two unguiculate digits on the radial side of the manus, 
a condition only elsewhere found in Struthio and Rhea. Reasoning 
upon this, we may infer that, ceteris paribus, the existing species of 
Spheniscidee with the broadest and most largely fenestrated metatar- 
sus, comes nearest the original stock, from which the several genera 
have been differentiated in the process of derivation. 

The sternum likewise is positively diagnostic. To general pygo- 
podous features, it adds a special configuration not found outside the 
family. The postero-external angles each send off a long slender 
apophysis that runs backward beyond the termination of the sternal 
body, and curves mesiad, approximating, at the end, to its fellow of 
the opposite side. There is a deep emargination between each apo- 
physis and the rather narrow but blunt median extremity of the 
bone. Each one of the four families of Pygopodes shows a different 
modification of the posterior border of the sternum; comparing 
which, we may infer that in a very early condition, the sternum of 
Spheniscidz extended solidly as.far as these apophyses now reach. 
In Uria for example, which has a relatively much longer sternum 
the posterior border is rounded and continuous, with only indications 
of the apophyses in two small fenestre; in Colymbus, also with a 
long sternum, the median portion is very long and broad, and sepa- 
rated from the much shorter apophyses by a wide emargination; in 
Podiceps, with a shorter sternum, the median portion is abrupt, with a 
reéntrance, and separated from the longer, broad and clavate apophy- 
ses by a very narrow emargination — little more than a fenestration. 
And in view of the fact that lengths of apophyses and of sternum 
proper seem somewhat complementary, it would appear that these 
long apophyses of Spheniscidze have remained in partial compensa- 
tion for the abbreviation of the sternum that has taken place. This 
would be the more probable, if the longest sternum, relatively, 
should be found coexistent with the greatest fenestration of the 
metatarsus. 


1871.) 2538 [Hyatt. 


The shoulder-girdle is not less diagnostic in the expansion of the 
scapula, which is irregularly clubbed and almost spatulate. The 
celavicles are very broad, flat from side to side, and strongly curved 
backward and downward. The coracoid is long and strong, less con- 
spicuously flattened, and developes an apophysis at the sternal ex- 
tremity on the mesiad side. 

All the bones of the anterior extremity are flattened, and the distal 
end of the laminar humerus has an oblique truncated articular sur- 
face —a condition only elsewhere seen in Alca impennis. There is 
no free radial digit—a state of things that might have been in- 
ferred from the pterylosis of the wing. The wrist preserves two free 
carpals, as usual, but the ulnare has an immense laminar expansion, 
not found outside this family. The elbow has two sesamoids (2 
feature shared, however, by the Guillemots), interesting in relation 
to the unusually large patella, which in these birds ossifies from two 
centres (Owen). There is a persistent, free ossicle in the ankle of 
Aptenodytes, apparently a sesamoid?; this is peculiar, so far as I 
know. The tibia is very long, but not specially remarkable; it does not 
develope the long apophysis of the Colymbide. The pelvico-sacral 
connections are said to be looser than in other birds. Notwithstanding 
the small size and sessile and elevated condition of the hallux, this has 
two bones, as usual, besides the accessory metatarsal; and the phalan- 
ges of the other digits are of normal number (3-4-5, from inner to 
outer anterior toe). The ribs have articulated accessory processes. 
The bodies of the hinder dorsal vertebre are strongly compressed 
with median hypapophyses; the anterior dorsals have broad divergent 
laminar parapophyses in Aptenodytes, and most of the dorsals are 
opisthoeelian (Owen). The palate has the schizognathous structure; 
there are no basipterygoid processes, and the pterygoids share the 
flattening that marks so many other bones. In its general configura- 
tion, and many minor details of structure, the skull shows three, if 
not four, strongly marked patterns, corresponding with and incontest- 
ably substantiating three, at least, of the genera that Prof. Hyatt 
has successfully established upon external characters. No one has 
hitherto shown us what groups are probably generic, and what are 
purely arbitrary. 


1 Certainly not a true tarsal ossicle, if the tarsus of Spheniscide agrees in de- 
velopment and structure with that of other birds; but this remains to beseen. 
Cf. Morse’s beautiful and invaluable researches into the carpus and tarsus of birds. 
Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist., N. Y., 1871. 


Jefiries.] 254 ~ [May 17, 


Dr. B. Joy Jeffries made a brief verbal communication on 
the unity of design in the eyes of man and the lower animals. 


In the Harvard University Course of Lectures on the “Anatomy and 
Physiology of Vision,” which [am now delivering at Cambridge, I have 
had occasion to especially study the unity of design in the visual 
organs of man and other animals, and by means of my pictures and 
diagrams I trust to make this evident to the Society. As every illu- 
minated point in nature sends out rays of light in all directions, we 
have only diverging rays, or those, which so far as the eye is con- 
cerned, are practically parallel. ‘There is needed a refractive me- 
dium therefore, to bring such rays to a focus on the recipient surface, 
where the stimulus of light finally causes nerve stimulation, sending 
the sensation of light through an optic nerve to the brain or its rep- 
resentative. We may take the human eye as the highest type, and 
here we have refracting media; namely, the convex cornea and double 
convex crystalline lens behind it, by means of which diverging or 
parallel rays of light are focussed on the recipient surface or retina, 
which lines the interior of the eye-ball behind. Thus is formed what 
exactly corresponds to a camera obscura. We have refracting me- 
dia in whose focus, or in the plane of whose focus, is placed a recipient 
surface, which recipient surface or membrane or retina contains the 
means or apparatus for causing the stimulus of light to give rise to a 
nerve sensation to be transmitted to the brain. Now all eyes, no 
matter what their external shape or appearance, if they answer these 
postulates may of course be ranked together as constructed on one de- 
sign or plan. If we follow down the series of vertebrates we shall 
find these eyes all formed on this principle of the camera obscura. So 
also in the simple or additional eyes of the rest of the animal kingdom, 
we shall find a refractive apparatus, in the plane of whose focus is a 
recipient membrane or retina. And this notwithstanding any differ- 
ence in shape, size, or general appearance of the vertebrate eye, or 
the simplicity of these so-called additional eyes of the insects. The 
only other form of eye existing in the animal series is the com- 
pound or facetted eye of the articulates. The common cornea of 
this eye is divided up into a large number of distinct facets, (five 
to thirty thousand), each one corresponding to a tube of pigment, so 
to speak, in which is found the final termination of the optic nerve 
fibre. The ray of light which enters through any one of the trans- 
parent facets can only affect the optic nerve fibre termination corre- 


1871] 255 [Jeffries 


sponding to it. Hence naturalists and philosophers seemed forced 
to accord to this form of visual apparatus a different method of per- 
ceiving light from that which prevails with the eyes formed on the 
principle of the camera obscura. Johannes Miiller’s dictum, more than 
anything else, seemed to render this an accepted truth. Long ago, 
however, the strangeness was pointed out, of an animal having eyes 
near each other, whose methods of receiving and perceiving light were 
on two entirely different plans. Mr. Darwin saw at once this would 
militate against his theory, and comparatively recent research shows 
that it is not true. These compound or facetted eyes are also now 
found to have a refracting medium, in the plane of whose focus is a re- 
cipient surface corresponding to a retina. Each one of these facets is 
in reality a convex lens, and as an old anatomist said, ‘if we look at 
a man through these we shall see a whole army of dwarfs.” There is, 
then, a picture formed behind them, just as there is a picture formed 
on the retina in the vertebrate eye. Moreover, behind each facet 
there is a refracting bocy which we will call the vitreous cone, and 
however its shape and appearance may vary in insects and crustace- 
ans, yet. its purpose remains the same; namely, that of refracting the 
light, and together with the convex facet focussing it on the terminal 
end of the optic nerve fibre behind and in contact with the vitreous 
cone. Here, then, the stimulus of light produces excitation of a 
nerve to carry sensation to the brain, or its representative. The 
facet may represent the human cornea, the refracting vitreous 
cone next behind it, the crystalline lens, and if we should push 
back the final optic nerve termini by the interposition of a 
vitreous humor, the very shape would then resemble the ver- 
tebrate type. Thus, we find unity of design in all eyes, ver- 
tebrate, simple and compound. The question naturally arises, how 
can the insect see things singly if thousand of pictures of the 
same thing are perceived. The answer is that a single fibre supplies 
many facets. Moreover, eyes seemingly facetted or compound, are 
on examination, found to be groups of simple eyes close together. 
No objection has been made to an animal’s seeing singly with several 
simple eyes, when these are closely grouped, or to man’s single vision 
with two eyes. A multiplied picture does not go as such to the 
brain. 

Now then, where does light become turned into nerve stimulation ? 
‘This takes place in the retina, for the optic nerve itself is insensible 
to light, and where it enters the eyeball is a blind spot in our field of 


Edwards.] 256 ~ (May 17, 


vision. The retina is by no means simply a membranous expansion 
of nerve substance, but a most complicated structure. Without 
dwelling upon the arguments in proof, I would simply say that its 
outer layer contains alone the percipient elements, called from their 
shape the rods and cones. These stand crowded together after the 
manner of a mosaic, at right angles to the black pigmented surface 
against which they lie, or rather in which they are bedded. The outer 
portion of these wonderfully minute little rods and cones is now found 
to be composed of a pile of plates of a refracting material separated by 
a less refractive intermediate substance, like a pile of glass plates sepa- 
rated by air. In contact with these come the ultimate fibrille of the 
optic nerve fibres, and in some way the action of the light streaming 
through this pile of plates stimulates the nerve to a sensation of 
light to go to the brain. This plated or layered structure of the rods 
and cones is universal in the vertebrate eye. The portion of the 
compound or facetted eye which corresponds to the rods and cones is 
the nerve substance, or its representative, behind the vitreous cone in 
the pigmented tube, and here also this plate structure has been found 
in the insects and crustaceans. Thus, then, not only are all eyes so 
formed as to be adapted to the same laws of light, in having refract- 
ing media, in the plane of whose focus a recipient organ turns light 
into nerve sensation, but the percipient elements of this receptive or- 
gan, the retina, are also the same, perfectly establishing the unity of 
design in all visual organs of men and lower animals. 


NoTIcCE OF AN UNDESCRIBED FoRM OF PLEUROSIGMA; FAMILY 
DiaTtomacex. By Pror. ArrHuR Mrap Epwarps, NEw 
Yor«.! 


With no wish to add another synonym to the already long lists 
which burden our overcrowded botanies, but simply with the de- 
sire of bringing to the notice of such biologists as are students of 
the Diatomacez, what I presume to be new, or, at least, unpublished, 
I venture to describe, and at the same time attach a provisional 
name to,a form of plant belonging to the family mentioned, and 
genus Pleurosigma of W. Smith, which I discovered some years since 
in a gathering I made at that time in a salt marsh situated near, and 
bordering, Coney Island, one of the small islets lying upon the ocean 
side of Long Island, New York. 


1 This paper was presented April 5th, 1871. 


1871.) , DART [Edwards. 


This form, as its general contour and characters plainly indicate, 
belongs, as I have said, to the genus Gyrosigma, which Hassall 
founded for the reception of the sigmoid forms hitherto included in 
Ehrenbereg’s genus Navicula, from which he thus very properly, as 
has been since proved, separated them. Subsequently to Hassall’s 
division of the genus in this manner, W. Smith bestowed the name 
Pleurosigma upon the same group, and this last designation is the one 
most commonly in use at the present time to distinguish this genus. 

I must here be permitted to make a few remarks in connection 
with the subject of nomenclature, as at the present time in use by 
writers when treating of this family of vegetable organisms. It does 
not appear to be generally known to such persons: that certain rules 
of nomenclature, to be used when describing or speaking of natural 
objects, and more especially animals and plants, have been devised, 
and from their plainly apparent rationality and admirable applica- 
bility, adopted very generally by biologists in all countries. It 
would be extremely advisable, therefore, for all students of the 
Diatomacez, before venturing into print, to make themselves 
thoroughly acquainted with these rules, and to frame their publica- 
tions thereon. One of these rules strongly deprecates the giving of 
new names to groups of natural objects, as plants or animals, which 
have already had designations applied to them, accompanied by suffi- 
ciently distinctive descriptions to admit of their recognition at any 
future time, at the fancy of any new observer, or for other insuffi- 
cient reasons. The rule itself is briefly stated thus: ‘‘Names given to 
species or groups unaccompanied by published characteristic descrip- 
tions, should yield place to the earliest name accompanying such 
descriptions.” 

To prevent mistakes occurring in biological nomenclature, of course 
great care is required, and considerable research necessary. In fact, 
it can hardly be denied that it would be much better if, as a general 
rule, students, before bestowing a name on a form new to them and 
apparently separable on good grounds from some already established 
group, would even rather tend to err upon the one side than the 
other; that is to say, permit the retention of a name already pub- 
lished, but unaccompanied by a sufficiently distinctive description, if 
they can nevertheless satisfy themselves that the form they have 
under examination is without doubt that previously named. Such a 
conclusion can, of course, most surely be arrived at by the examina- 


tion of authentic specimens, but sometimes, also, although not in so 
PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H. — VOL. XIV. APRIL, 1872. 


Edwards.] 95 8 [May 17, 


satisfactory a manner, by reference to plates. Thus in the case of 
many of Ehrenberg’s species, the descriptions are often so inaccurate 
that the student can hardly tell what that author means, and must be 
excused, if thereafter it should be discovered he has redescribed and 
renamed any of them. And this is more particularly the case with 
such forms as he examined in the recent condition. With his fossil 
species, however, in most cases there is not so much difficulty of iden- 
tification, as it is but necessary to obtain a portion of the same deposit 
as he has examined, and in many instances there is no very great 
difficulty in so doing, and there can generally be detected any form 
on which he has bestowed a particular appellation. Thereafter, it 
lies with the careful student to determine if the species be good or not; 
and he can satisfy his mind as to whether the name given to it should 
be retained. Unfortunately, however, Ehrenberg has occasionally 
bestowed the same name on two, or even more, totally different spe- 
. cies, or, what is quite as bad, if not worse, given two or more names 
at different times to the same species. In truth, the otherwise great 
value that would have attached to his contributions to this branch of 
knowledge, is very materially lessened by these facts, and students 
are compelled either to stretch their consciences to their utmost ca- 
pacity, or to ignore altogether what he has done in many directions. 
I instance Ehrenberg, as he has bestowed names upon a much larger 
number of forms than any other observer, and was almost the first to 
call attention to the beauty of structure exhibited in the siliceous 
epidermes of these remarkable plants. Many of the errors he has 
fallen into have, however, plainly occurred from the defective instru- 
ments of research at his command, at the time his investigations 
were made. Some of our later students have, nevertheless, at times, 
fallen into equal error, and in their case there is not so much 
excuse; for the rule above quoted, and which seems to be so very 
sensible upon the face of it, has not been even taken into considera- 
tion by those who appear otherwise to be very careful investigators. 
One example in illustration will suffice. Thus, on examining W. 
Smith’s very elaborate and beautifully illustrated Synopsis of the 
British Diatomacez, we find him naming a species of the genus 
Epithemia as Argus, acknowledging at the same time that it had been 
previously described as Epithemia alpestris by Kiitzing; ignoring 
entirely that already established name, for no sufficient reason, but 
apparently because he, Smith, wished, to apply the name Alpestris to 
what he considered a new form he had discovered. -The confusion 


1871.] 959 [Edwards. 


naturally resulting, and the obstruction to the progress of knowledge 
that would eventuate from such a mode of proceeding, is at once ap- 
parent, and plainly points to the wisdom of the rule alluded to above. 

‘No doubt an ignorance of the recognized rules of nomenclature is, 
in some cases, the cause of this mode of procedure, but a desire to 
see one’s name in print, tacked on to a species as its discoverer, is 
also, and itis to be feared oftener, the real reason why our botanies 
are loaded down with hundreds of confusing and avoidable synonyms. 
Therefore itis with the desire that the nomenclature adopted when 
describing and naming the Diatomacee, should be made as much as 
possible to conform to set rules, that I call the attention of students 
to the fact that Hassall was the first to separate the sigmoid forms 
from the genus Navicula, and to found a new genus for their recep- 
tion. This genus he named Gyrosigma. De Brébisson objected to 
the adoption of this name on tautological grounds, and _ his objection 
has been acquiesced in by others, who have, in consequence, rejected 
Hassall’s designation and adopted that applied to the group by 
Smith, Pleurosigma. 

It is not my wish in this short note to in any way urge the re- 
adoption of the name Gyrosigma, but I take the opportunity of call- 
ing the attention of students to a point in connection with the Dia- 
tomacez, on which time could be well spent, and would, it is plain, 
yield to the conscientious worker very profitable returns. It is my 
intention to do something myself, as opportunity offers, in endeavor- 
ing to clear upsome points in the synonomy of these plants, and I hope 
for assistance in the shape of specimens, from collectors in all parts 
of the world. ‘To that end, I have prepared printed directions for 
collecting and transporting gatherings, and these will be sent to any 
one desirous of contributing to the end in view. 

Another point I would wish to say a few words on, and that is, to 
enter my protest against the absurd habit of biologists, of giving the 
description of species and similar groups in a foreign, dead language, 
although the body of their paper may be in their native tongue. No 
one can write any better in a language which is foreign to him than 
in his own, and certainly not when the language is a dead one. De- 
scriptions of groups of natural objects should be as clear and concise 
as possible, and this an observer can do best in the language he has 
been most accustomed to. Therefore, I shall always give my descrip- 
tions in such English as I am master of, trusting to the ability of for- 
eign observers to translate them into their vernacular. 


Edwards.] 960 [May 17, 


The form I wish at the present time to describe, is of a brackish or 
perhaps salt water habit, as it was found in the living state associated 
with both brackish and salt water species, and in a part of the marsh 
at times open to the water of the ocean. Although I bestow a name 
upon it, I wish it to be distinctly understood that I do not therefore 
claim that it is a new species, but apply the name to it merely to 
distinguish it, so that hereafter as it is better known it may be re- 
ferred to and correctly placed. At the same time, I must say that I 
am strongly of opinion that it will be found on careful examination to 
be as good a species as most of those at the present time included in 
the genus. It is allied to Pleurosigma Baltica, of Ehrenberg; that is 
to say, the markings upon the valve are of the same character; being 
so arranged as to make it appear as if the valve.were covered with 
darkish lines running at right angles to each other, and in general, 
parallel and transverse to the median line. In outline it is closely 
allied to P. speciosum of W. Smith, but is much shorter on S. V., in 
proportion to its width, than that species. The characters of this 
form are briefly as follows: 

Pleurosigma robustum. 

F. V. linear. S. V. linear-lanceolate, strongly obtuse, flexure very 
slight, ends blunt, sides parallel for about one-third of the length. 

Length, .115 m.m. Width of valve, .03 m.m. Markings appar- 
ently consisting of parallel lines crossing each other at right angles, 
14 in. .001 m. m. 

Habitat, brackish or salt water. 


Locality, Coney Island, Long Island, New York, Sept. 27, 1862... 


P. S. Since the above was written I have found the same form, 
although still not common, and mixed with various others, growing in 
the form of a fawn-colored stain upon the sand of the sea shore at 
Coney Island. Several beautiful forms were obtained by washing 
the sand thus colored, and they would seem, for the most part, to be 
identical with those Dr. Donkin obtained in the same way some years 
since on the coast of Northumberland, England. 


* 


Section of Entomology. May 24, 1871. 
Mr. P. 8. Sprague in the chair. Nine members present. 


Mr. Sanborn described a simple method of preparing the 
skins of caterpillars for the collection. First puncture the 


» 


1871.] | 961 [Grayson. 


skin of the caterpillar at the anus, tearing away the internal 
membranes from their attachment at that part; the larva is 
then placed on a piece of blotting paper, and rolled out with 
a lead pencil from the head backwards, the contents of the 
body being thus expelled. A fine tube is then to be inserted 
in the anal puncture and confined there by thread. A sand- 
bath is to be made, consisting of an argand chimney or simi- 
lar tube inserted in a larger metal cylinder of the size of a 
- tomato can and the intervening space filled with hot sand. 
This apparatus may be placed upon a hot stove or above 
a lamp or gas jet. Thus the inside of the chimney forms a 
hot-bath, in which the skin of the caterpillar, tied to the 
tube, is thrust; the empty skin is now to be inflated by the 
breath, and frequently revolved, continuing the inflation 
until it is perfectly dry. . The skin s0 BecPanes may be 
pinned and _ placed in the cabinet. 


Mr. W. H. Dale presented over fifty pinned specimens of 
insects collected by him in Florida. 


June 7, 1871. 


Vice President R. C. Greenleaf in the chair. Twenty-two 
persons present. 


Dr. T. M. Brewer presented the following paper: — 


On THE PuysicaL GEOGRAPHY AND NaturRAL HISTORY oF 
THE ISLANDS OF THE TRES MARIAS AND OF SOCORRO, OFF THE 
WESTERN Coast oF Mexico. By Cot. ANDREW J. GRAYSON. 
EpItep By Gro. N. LAWRENCE. 


In a paper published in the Annals of the Lyceum of Natural 
History of New York, Vol. x, Feb., 1871, I stated that it was my 
intention to publish a catalogue of all Col. Grayson’s collections 
made in Northwestern Mexico, together with those of some others. 
Since then it has been thought best to give separate lists of the birds 


Grayson.] 262 [June 7, 


obtained by Col. Grayson at the Tres Marias Islands and the Island 
of Socorro. , 

With the other papers sent me by Prof. Henry, are the narratives 
of Col. Grayson’s visits to these Islands, which I have permission to 
print with the lists of birds. Little is known or published concerning 
these Islands, and as they are seldom visited by persons of intelli- 
gence, the information given by so accurate an observer as Col. 
Grayson will be found not only entertaining but instructive. Besides 
ordinary incidents, observations of the physical features of the Is- 
lands, interspersed with remarks upon their natural history, are re- 
lated in a very attractive and pleasing style. 

Col. Grayson made three voyages to the Tres Marias, in 1865, 
1866 and 1867, and visited Socorro twice, the last time in 1867. 

In April, 1869, Col. Grayson made a voyage to the Isabel Islands 
for the purpose of studying their natural history, but unfortunately 
while there he contracted a fever, which terminated his useful life in 
August, after an illness of about three months. 

An interesting account of the principal incidents of Col. Grayson’ s 
life is given in the Overland Monthly of Feb., 1870. 

In snpkeie the exploration of these Islands to ascertain their nat- 
ural history, Col. Grayson was aided by contributions of funds from 
the Smithsonian Institution and the Boston Society _ Natural 
History. 

All the material from Col. Grayson’s papers is indicated by in- 
verted commas. 

“This beautiful group of Islands, forming the subject of the present 
article, is situated about seventy miles west of San Blas, and about 
ninety or one hundred miles south of Mazatlan, in lat. 214° north, 
and long. 1064° west. They are respectively named, Maria Madre, 
the northern and largest; Maria Magdaléna, the middle, and second 
in size; Cleafa, the most southern, and smaller; and also San 
Juanito, which is the smallest, lying at the northwest extremity of . 
Maria Madre. Deep and narrow passages separate them all, except 
San Juanito, which is connected with Maria Madre by soundings of no 
great depth. They range nearly southeast and northwest. With 
the exception of the hacienda of Don Andres Somilara, to whom the 
Island of Maria Madre has been leased by the original grantee, they 
are entirely uninhabited. 

“This hacienda, consisting of a few rude huts for the laborers, and 
a larger one for the Mayordomo, is situated on the east side of Maria 


1871.] 963 (Grayson, 


Madre, and has been but recently established for the purpose of 
cutting and shipping the fine timber there abounding, as well as for 
the cultivation of cotton and other products. 

“'T’o these Islands I had long contemplated a visit, and at lenoth 
an opportunity offering, I sailed from the port of Mazatlan, on the 
third day of January, 1865, with a friend, upon a very small schooner 
of only fifteen tons. Imagine our discomfiture when we found her 
decks crowded with thirty persons, all Mexicans, men, women and 
children, together with the little worthless dogs which always accom- 
pany the lower class of natives wherever they go. They were 
bound to San Blas, the vessel only touching at the Islands to dis- 
charge some provisions for Don Andres. We started with a fair 
breeze from northwest, which is the usual, or trade, wind of this 
season. 

“The following morhing was delightfully clear and calm, and the 
sea remarkably tranquil. The Islands appeared in sight in the dis- 
tance, as if rising from the sea, like phantom clouds, and the scene 
was enlivened by numerous sea birds sailing lazily over the water, or 
resting in large flocks upon its glassy bosom. Large turtles lay 
sleeping upon the calm surface, and upon the back of each, a bird of 
the gannet species was standing like a sentinel. 

“A turtle was harpooned by one of the crew, as it lay immediately 
in our track, and soup for all who had an appetite was served from 
the captured prize. Large flocks of sea plover? were flying over and 
lighting upon the sea, busy feeding upon the animalcule or diminu- 
tive shells floating on the surface. I regretted that it was out of my 
power to secure specimens of these birds, as having seen them fre- 
quently before when the sea was calm and always far from land, I 
wished to know them better; but we had not a small boat to go after 
them if shot. Gannets were quite abundant following a school of 
porpoises. A few gulls and terns were flying about, also the dusky 
petrel, which is always common in these latitudes. 

“As the day advanced we gradually neared the Islands, and their 
magnificent forests were slowly unfolded to view, the ever green foli- 
age extending to the water’s edge and densely covering hill and vale. 
About sunset, we anchored in calm water, in a crescent shaped nook, 
a cable’s lenoth from the shore, fronting the small settlement of the 
timber cutters; a canoe came out to us and in it we went ashore, 
happy to be released from the miserable craft and crowd in which 


1 Prof. Baird suggests that these were probably Phalaropes (P. fulicarius.) Hd. 


Grayson. |] 264 [June 7, 


convenience or comfort was out of the question. We landed with- 
out difficulty, (there being no surf), upon a beautiful shingly beach, 
over which was scattered shells and snow-white coral in profusion. 
We were received with a considerable degree of suspicion on the 
part of the proprietor, Don Andres Sean and it took some time 
to satisfy him of the object of my visit. He may justly be called 
Lord of the Isle, being the pioneer to this primitive region. 

“Maria Madre is about fifteen miles in length, by ten or twelve in 
width. At the extreme southern end there is a salt pond yielding 
an abundance of salt for exportation, but at present no attention is 
paid to it. The salt is crystallized or formed by the flow and ebb of 
the tide, which filters through a narrow sand ridge dividing it from 
the sea. The pond, which is clean and free from brush and weeds, is 
about three-fourths of a mile long and a hundred and fifty yards 
wide. Maria Magdeléna is twelve miles in length and nine or ten in 
width; it is unoccupied and covered with a grand forest of fine tim- 
ber. The immense cedar (Cedrela odorata) grows in great abun- 
dance on this island, not having been disturbed by the wood cutters. 
This tree makes the finest lumber in the world. It is also common 
to the coast of Tierra Caliente. Cleofa, the smallest of the three 
islands, is also well wooded and has a good little port. All these is- 
lands, except Juanito, are covered with a dense forest from the water’s 
edge to the top of the highest hills. The shape of the trees (of 
which there is a great variety), is generally straight or straighter 
and taller than upon the main. There is but little thorny under- 
brush, so characteristic of the Tierra Caliente. 

“The morning of the 6th was bright, the air soft and balmy. AsI 
entered the magnificent forest upon the duties of my,mission, it was 
with no little pleasure I found the woods well supplied with birds, 
and noticed their remarkable docility. Many of the species were 
familiar to me, others entire strangers. I was surprised to find some 
of the species common to the main land, so tame as to be easily 
taken by the boys with a running noose upon the end of a rod or 
pole, whilst upon the main they are difficult to approach within gun 
shot. With but one or two exceptions the birds on these Islands are 
very tame, and look with but little concern upon the intruder in 
their shady retreats. Another fact worthy of note is that they are 
all very fat, so much so as to render the preparation and preserva- 
tion of the specimens difficult. The papers in which they are en- 
veloped become saturated with oil, while the skins were being dried. 


1871.] 265 (Grayson. 


The abundance of food that the insectivorous birds find among the 
vast amount of decaying logs and branches, which harbor innumer- 
able coleoptera and their larve, is one cause of their fatness ; another 
is their freedom from molestation by man, and the various species of 
hawks and other animals of a ravenous nature, which keep them in 
a constant state of watchfulness on the main shore. If these islands 
are interesting to the ornithologist, they would be equally so to the 
botanist and geologist. 

“The giant cactus (Cereus giganteus) grows here to an enormous 
size, and seems to vie with tall trees among which it is found. The 
dark hiocuera (Ficus Americanus) spreads its immense branches, up- 
held by the roots sent to earth to support them, giving the tree the 
appearance of the famous banyan. 

“The stupendous cedar (Cedrela odorata) with its rough bark and 
pinnated leaves, its huge branches overgrown with curious orchids, is 
king of the woods, and resembles in xs outward form the black 
walnut. , : 

“The Palo prieto, with its smooth ereen bark, its tall and straight 
trunk crowned with fresh looking and evergreen foliage, together 
with the hardness and durability of its wood, is one of the most 
beautiful, as well as useful trees of the forest. Here too, the gican- 
tic silk cotton tree (Hriodendron anfractuosum) with its spheroid 
pods suspended to its wide spreading branches, is conspicuous. Va- 
rious other handsome and strange trees interlaced and festooned with 
the innumerable lianes and creepers, among which the wild hop is 
most abundant, overshadowing the earth, give to the forest a dark 
and wild aspect. Scattered through the woods is a species of mag- 
_uey that exceeds in size any plant of the kind ever seen by me, their 
' long, spear-shaped leaves measuring six to eight feet in length, the 
head or stalk proportionally large. When in flower, the flower stem 
reaches to the height of forty or fifty feet, where it branches off like 
a candelabra. It blooms once in seven years, and then dies. There 
is a great abundance of this plant growing in certain localities. 
The San Juanito is partly covered by it. The palms are not repre- 
sented in the islands, while upon the near coast, below San Blas, 
they are abundant, particularly the Palma Real. 

‘“Were are hundreds of plants to interest the botanist, many of 
which I am certain are new. I found the true wild cotton, not 
growing as a tree, but a plant laden with small bolls or pods, contain- 
ing a very silky yellowish fibre, and black seed. The bolls were not 


Grayson.] 266 _ [June 7, 
well opened, but it is doubtless of the same species from which the 
cultivated cotton has been originally obtained. Wild tomatoes and 
capsicum are found growing in the woods. 

“The physical and geological structure is strange and peculiar, 


especially so, as differing from any other formation found upon the 


coast. 

“The indications and unmistakable evidences we read upon their 
surface lead us to the conclusion that the materials of which they are 
composed once lay at the bottom of the sea, and have been raised to 
their present form, at some period of the earth’s history, and perhaps 
subsequent to the elevation of the adjacent region composing the 
main land. 

“The stratified formation appears to be horizontal, and but little 
broken or disturbed, throughout the Island of Maria Madre. The 
strata are well defined, particularly where there is a precipitous bank 
or cliff exposing them to view. The composition of these layers is 
various. The most common is a conglomeration of sea mud and 
gravel, in which vast quantities of fossil shells and coral are mingled. 
Some consist entirely of soft sandstone, while in others lime and 

chalk are found. Large boulders, lying detached and scattered about 
over the surface, have the appearance of granite, but upon near 
inspection prove to be solid blocks of coral formation, which, where 
they are gradually becoming decomposed, are soft and easily broken. 
Vast masses of fossil shells, cemented compactly together, form in 
many places the upper strata. Many of them appeared identical 
with fresh shells found upon the shore. 

“JT discovered no indications of volcanic phenomena. Pumice 
stone is found in some localities near the beach, but its rounded and 
water-worn appearance shows it to have been drifted there by the 
waves of the ocean. In fact the regularity of the strata and the 
general physiognomy, especially of the largest island, shows that they 
probably have not been subject to any remarkable convulsions. 

“The island of Socorro, about two hundred and forty miles west of 
the Marias, which is about thirty miles in length and fifteen in width, 
presents a very different aspect. Its formation is entirely volcanic 
and its strata tilted and thrown into every position, and its high and 
peaked mountains prove it to have undergone severe convulsions. 

“But the Tres Marias seem to have risen gently and gradually 
from the sea, nearly in the shape they now present, with the excep- 
tion of the ravines and creek beds formed by the natural courses of 


1871.] ; 267 [Grayson. 


the water from copious rains. In ascending the elevated plateau 
upon the northern and southern end of Maria Madre from the sea 
shore, we find the country to be as flat as a table for several_miles in 
extent, covered with large trees and rank vegetation. This horizon- 
tal formation of the underlying strata retains the moisture in the 
earth throughout the dry season. It is my opinion, from various indi- 
cations, that bituminous coal exists in this island. 

_“Good water is found by sinking a well fifteen or twenty feet. In 
‘the latter part of the dry season, I saw young and tender plants 
erowing luxuriantly. The cotton and tobacco planted by Don 
Andres continued fresh and green throughout the dry season, and of 
very large growth, also melons, squashes, beans, etc., without irriga- 
tion. ‘The shelly debris and vast amount of decaying vegetable mat- 
ter have created an exceedingly rich and prolific soil. 

“How many centuries after the islands made their appearance 
above ocean’s waves it has taken to prepare a soil for its present 
form of vegetable and animal life, can only be left to conjecture or 
the scientific geologist to determine. 

“The climate is healthy, and free from malarious influences. The 
usual northwest trades, which are almost constant and of moderate 
force, serve to cool the air, making a temperature both regular, 
balmy and pleasant during the year. 

“In the dry season heavy dews are frequent, the drops of which 
I have often seen the birds sipping, for want of other means of 
quenching their thirst, there being but few ojas de agua (springs). 

“Thus we see in these islands a little world, whose creation seems 
to be comparatively modern, and whose fauna and vegetation are in 
many respects peculgar to itself. 

“The following list will represent the birds found upon these ' 
Islands. I include no species but those actually seen by me. In a few 
instances only, when I supposed the birds to be new, I have given their 
natural history more in detail.” 


“BIRDS OF THE TRES MARIAS.” 


VULTURID. 


1. Cathartes aura (Linn.). “Turkey Buzzard; Sopilote.” 
“This widely distributed species is common upon the Islands, 
where it is a constant resident, or a visitor from the main land. 


Grayson.] 268 ~ [June 7, 


None of the Vulturide is so well known throughout Mexico and the 
United States as the Turkey Buzzard. 

“T did not see this bird upon the Island of Socorro. Perhaps the 
Islands of ‘The Tres Marias’ form its extreme western range.” 


FALCONIDZ. 


2. Polyborus audubonii Cass. “Caracara Eagle; Quelele.” 

»“* The Caracara Eagle, or hawk vulture, possesses the qualitis of 
both the hawks and the vultures, and it is rather difficult to decide 
by its habits and manners to which it more closely approximates. In 
general appearance it resembles the hawk, and although it subsists 
mainly on dead animals and other offal, it does sometimes capture 
young birds, lizards, snakes and land crabs. It generally carries its 
prey in its beak, but I have also seen it bearing off its food, as the 
hawks do, in the claw. 

“Tt walks with facility on the ground, and I have often met with 
it in the thick woods, walking about in search of snakes and lizards. 
It is very docile, frequenting the vicinity of towns and ranches, and 
sometime seen in company with the Black Vulture (Cathartes 
atratus). 

“The Caracara Eagle is quite abundant in the Tres Marias, which is 
perhaps its greatest western range.” 

3. Buteo borealis var. montana Nutt. “Western Red-tailed 
Hawk; Gavilan.” 

“The Western Red-tailed Hawk is quite abundant on the Tela 
where it subsists almost entirely upon the Iguana lizard and rabbits, 
which are very numerous. I also found it in the far western Island - 
of Socorro, situated in lat. 18° 35/, long. 111°, where I saw a pair 
nesting. This must be the most western boundary of its range. It 
is a common species in all parts of Western Mexico, and northward 
to the Rocky Mountains.” 

4. Pandion carolinensis or “The Fish Hawk; Aquila 
pescadoro.” 

“T saw several individuals of this species on the Islands, a pair of 
which were nesting. This nest was placed upon the top of the large 
thorny limbs of the giant cactus.” 

5. Falco peregrinus var. nigriceps Cass. “The Western or 
Lesser Duck Hawk; Gavilan.” 

“I procared one specimen of this elegant species while upon the 
Island, which I sent to the Smithsonian Institution. "When I shot it, 


1871.] 269 [Grayson. 


it was endeavoring to capture a sparrow hawk (Falco sparverius) and 
had I not stopped him with a lucky shot, the little fellow would have 
most probably made a breakfast for his more powerful antagonist. 
This is another instance which I have frequently witnessed of the 
indifference or impartiality shown by this hawk in the selection of 
the game he pursues. It attacks with vigor every thing it sees upon 
the wing, from the size of a mallard duck down, and is the terror of 
all small birds. The range of this daring falcon, like the Peregrine, 
must be very extensive, as it often ventures far out to sea. Ona 
passage from Mazatlan to San Francisco, in 1858, on the bark Car- 
lota, one of these falcons came to us, more than a hundred miles off 
the coast of Lower California, and took up his quarters upon the 
main-yard, or mast-head; it remained with us two days, during this 
time it captured at least a dozen dusky petrels. It was a fine sight 
to see him dart headlong upon these unsuspecting wanderers of 
the deep, seldom missing his aim; he would then return to his usual 
resting place and partly devour his prize. At other times he would 
let them drop in the sea, after they were dead, seemingly in wanton 
sport. He finally became tired of this kind of game, and after mak- 
ing several wide circles around our ship, and ascending to a consider- 
able height, took his departure in the direction of the shores of 
Mexico.” 

6. Tinnunculus sparverius (Linn.). “The Sparrow Hawk; 
Gavilancillo.” 

“This common species is also found on the Tres Marias. Its geo- 
graphical distribution is the entire continent of America.” 

7. Hypotriorchis columbarius (Linn.). “Pigeon Hawk; 
Gavilan.” 

“The Pigeon hawk is very common upon the Islands where it finds 
an abundance of small birds, pigeons, robins, etc., to satiate its 
appetite. — 

8. Hypotriorchis rufigularis (Daud.); (aurantius 
Temm). 

“The year preceding my visit to these Islands, while in camp near 
the foot of the Sierra Madre mountains, not far from the mining town 
_ of Parnico, in the State of Sinaloa, I met with two small falcons, the 
smallest I had ever seen, which in their movements upon the wing 
reminded me of the Peregrine falcon. They were very small indeed, 
seemed to be but little larger than the large swift (Cypselus) found in 
this country, and the motions of their wings were apparently as 


Grayson.] 270 ~ [June 7, 


rapid as that of the swift. ‘They were chasing each other in a play- 
ful manner, and while observing their graceful movements, one of 
them captured a small parrot from a flock which had just settled on 
the top of a large tree. After striking this most diminutive of the 
parrot species (Psittacula) he came to the ground with it, at the foot 
of the same tree. I endeavored to procure one or both these falcons, 
but the mountains were so steep as to render it impossible. In 
chasing each other, they uttered a sharp whistle as t’chee, t’chee, 
t’chee. One morning during my rambles on the Tres Marias, hear- 
ing this well remembered note, I commenced searching for it with 
reat caution, and soon discovered the little fellow sitting upon a dry 
branch of a tall tree. Unfortunately both barrels of my gun being 
charged with fine shot, No. 11, I approached to the foot of the tree 
immediately under him to lessen the distance as much as possible, 
but upon firing, he darted downward through the forest (slightly 
wounded) with the rapidity of an arrow, his wings in rapid motion 
like the swift. The markings of its plumage, as far as it could be 
discernible at the distance from me, had the resemblance of the 
Perecrine. This is undoubtedly the smallest and most beautiful of 
the Falconide, a rare and perhaps but little known species. I still 
have hopes of again meeting with this interesting falcon with better 
success.” 

In a memorandum attached to Col. Grayson’s note, Prof. Baird 
suggests that the hawk seen by Col. Grayson was probably Hypo- 
triorchis aurantius. As one of that species was afterwards obtained 
at the Marias by Col. Grayson, Prof. Baird’s conjecture was doubt- 
less correct. 


STRIGIDA. 


9. Strix pratincola Bp. “The Barn Owl.” 

“I did not see this owl on the Islands, but often heard at night its 
well known hissing scream. It is common throughout Mexico, as 
also in all temperate North America.” 

10. Athene cunicularia (Molina). “Burrowing Owl; Lechu- 
gacillo.” 

“A few individuals of this species inhabit the Marias Islands, per- 
haps wandered from the main land. While making a passage from 
Cape San Lucas, Lower California, to Mazatlan, one of these little 
owls came on board, so much fatigued as to be easily captured. This 
is some evidence of its migrating propensities.” 


1871.) ; S76 . [Grayson. 


PSITTACIDA. 


11. Chrysotis levaillanti Gray. “Yellow-headed Parrot; 
Loro.” 

“This large and handsome parrot is peculiar to the Islands, where 
it is very abundant, but is not found upon the main land in this part 
of the country.) In the evenings they may be seen in flocks or pairs, 
flying very high, going to some part of the island tv roost. They are 
so tame and unsuspecting as to be easily taken, simply by putting a 
running noose upon the end of a slender pole and slipping it gently 
over the head while it is busy feeding among the branches of the 
trees. They breed in the hollows of large trees like all the species. 
The wood cutters sell them to vessels touching there for timber, 
doubtless of late some of them are taken to Europe and other parts 
of the world.” 

Although this species was not found by Col. Grayson in the 
neighborhood of Mazatlan, it is not uncommon in southwest Mexico, 
at Tehuantepec, whence specimens were sent by Prof. Sumichrast ; 
it also inhabits middle and eastern Mexico. 

12. Psittacula cyanopyga De Souancé. “Love Bird; Cata- 
lina.” . 

“The smallest of the parrots, and quite numerous in the Islands, 
where it is a constant resident. There is a closely allied species on 
the main land, from which the Tres Marias’ variety differs in its 
larger size, especially of the bill, and in its deeper green color, the 
bill also is darker at the base, that of the main being entirely white. 

“These beautiful little parrots are great favorites with every one. 
They become very tame and affectionate, but owing to their extreme 
delicacy, they do not survive long in confinement. 

“Their note is rather feeble, and they never learn to utter words 
like some other birds of their family. 

“The general appearance of the plumage is lively green, the tail 
short and rounded, rump in the male violet blue. 

“This and the yellow headed parrot are the only two varieties 
inhabiting the Tres Marias.” . 

Dr. O. Finsch (Abhand. Nat. Ver. zu Bremen, 1870, p. 353) has 
determined the species of Psittacula, collected at the Tres Marias, by 
Col. Grayson, to be P. cyanopyga De Souancé. 

There are but two specimens from the Tres Marias, both females; 
these differ from those of the main land, of which there are eight of 


Grayson.] _ 272 [June 7, 


both sexes before me, in being of a darker green, as pointed out by 
Col. Grayson, they are notably darker on the rump and upper tail 
coverts, in the others there is a greater prevalence of a yellow shade 
throughout the plumage; in size and the color of the bills, they do 
not differ materially from the two localities; perhaps the Marias bird 
may be considered a darker local race. 


TROGONIDE. 


13. Trogon ambiguus Gould. “Western or Mexican Trogon. 
Coa.” : 

‘“‘Although confident that this variety is peculiar to the Tres 
Marias, yet its congener upon the main land so closely resembles it, 
that I can scarcely perceive any specific difference in its general con- 
tour. A bird of so feeble flight, and always inhabiting a thickly 
wooded country, could never have passed from the main land to these 
Islands. Nature seems to have created it there, as those upon the 
main, with its magnificent plumage an ornament to the dark forest, 
for which it shows the greatest preference. It is more abundant in 
the Islands than on the main land, and more docile. 

‘The natives ensnare them in the same manner as the yellow 
headed parrot, 

“With all its resplendent dress, as is characteristic of such birds, 
its love song is not melodious. ‘The simple and rather hoarse repeti- 
tion of coa, coa, coa, is heard in the spring of the year, and from this 
note it has received its name by the natives. Most of the time it is 
silent, remaining stationary upon the branch of a tree with its head 
slowly turning from side to side, obviously hunting for some insect 
concealed under a leaf or the fruit upon which it feeds. When such 
objects are descried, it darts upon it something like the Fly-catchers. 

“Like the parrots, it nests in the hollows of tall trees; its flight is 
short and undulating. 

“Description of a fresh specimen. Bill pale yellow. Bare space 
around the eye or eyelids red. The entire upper part of this species, 
with the neck and upper part of breast, are of a rich lustrous metallic, 
golden green, more intense on the rump, with occasionally coppery 
reflections, especially on the scapulars. 

“The forehead, sides of head, chin and throat are dull black, with 
(in some lights) a greenish shade. ; 

“The wing coverts are finely mottled black and white. The quills 
dark brown, with the outer webs edged with white. The entire 


1871.] OTS [Grayson. 


underparts are of a rich carmine red. The feathers with concealed 
white just below the red. A white, crescent shaped collar separates 
the green of the breast from the carmine. The outer three tail 
feathers are white for most of their length, and dusky towards the 
base, especially on the inner webs for about the terminal inch, the 
white is pure elsewhere, finely barred transversely or dotted with 
black, the two middle feathers are greenish coppery, abruptly 
tipped for about an inch with black, the remaining ones are similar, 
but with more of a violet tinge. Feet, pale brownish. Iris brown. 

“The colors of females are much duller though otherwise similarly 
marked. 

“Dimensions of the Tres Marias’ bird taken fresh. ¢ Total 
lenoth, 11.50; alar ext., 16.75; tail, 6 in. ? Total length, 12; alar 
ext... 16.710 > tail, 7 in.” 


CAPRIMULGIDA. 


14. Nyctidromus albicollis (Gmel.). “Tres Marias’ Night 
Hawk; Caballero.” 

“T procured specimens of this goatsucker in the Islands, where I 
frequently found them upon the ground beneath the shade of rank 
forests. 

“All the birds I shot of this species were excessively fat. Its note 
is simple and plaintive, oft repeated throughout the night during 
' the love season and says very distinctly caballero, caballero, whence 
it derives its Mexican name.” 


PICIDA. 


15. Picus scalaris (Wagel.). “Least Woodpecker; Carpente- 
rocillo.” 

“This bird is more abundant in the Tres Marias than on the main 
coast, where it is also a common species. I have met with it along 
the Tierra Caliente bordering the Pacific coast, from Sonora to 
Tehuantepec. It seems to thrive better in the Marias than else- 
where, for there it is very numerous and may be seen, or its gentle 
tappings heard in the quiet woods at all hours of the day, busy drill- 
ing into the dried branches and logs in search of borers or white 
ants, upon which it becomes very fat. I found a nest (in the month 
of April) of a pair of these little woodpeckers, upon the Island near 
the sea shore, bored into the green flower stem of a large maguey 

PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOUL. XIV. 18 APRIL, 1872. 


Grayson.] OT4 [June 7, 


plant. The entrance of the nest was beautifully rounded, and about 
twelve feet from the ground. This tall, slender, smooth stem, not 
more than four inches in diameter, with its soft, spongy wood, 
afforded a convenient material to work out the nest, as well as a sure- 
protection against the raccoon or other intruders, the lone spear 
shaped leaves armed with spines at the root, preventing the possibil- 
ity of a near approach to it from the ground without some labor of 
cutting them away. 

“They both evinced a great deal of uneasiness at my presence. 
As I had no instrument however, to cut away the dagger shaped 
leaves of the maguey, I left them with their well fortified domicil.” 


COLUMBID. 


16. Leptoptila albifrons Bp. “The Ground Pigeon; 
Palomo.” 

“This dove seems to be identical with the species found through- 
out entire Western Mexico, and is very abundant in the Marias. It 
is commonly found upon the ground, in the thickest part of the 
woods; it also lays its eggs upon the ground, with but little preten- 
sion to forming a nest. It is entirely solitary in its habits, rambling 
about in the woods in search of various kinds of seed upon which it 
subsists, and occasionally uttering its peculiar coo oo zr. 

“Our table was often well supplied with this delicious game. The 
flesh is nearly as white as that of the quail, very tender and juicy.” 

17. Columba flavirostris (Wagl.). “The Blue Pigeon; Pata- 
gonia.” 

“This is the largest of our pigeons, and abundant in the Marias, 
as well as in some localities on the main land. It is gregarious and 
frequents large forests, feeding upon various kinds of berries, acorns, 
etc., etc. It migrates from one part of the country to another in 
small flocks. In some seasons of the year the flesh of this bird has 
a bitter, disagreeable taste, caused by some pues of berry or small 
bitter acorn upon which it subsists. 

“ Total leneth of male, 14.5; alar ext. 24 in.; tail, 5.5; tarsus, 
1-5; middle to end claw, 1.5; bill, white at tip, red at base; space 
around the eye red; feet, purplish red. 

“General appearance. Slaty blue, tinged upon the lesser wing 
coverts and upper part of neck and back with rufous, with slight 
metallic lustre, second and third primary longest;—tail slightly 
rounded and broad.” 


. 


1871.] 218 (Grayson. 


18. Chamepelia pallescens Baird. “Little Ground Dove; 
Cocochita.” 

These birds are not very abundant in the Marias, but upon the 
main land they are quite common, also found at Cape San Lucas 
Lower California. 

“On my hasty visit to Socorro Island, I saw several small doves 
that seemed to be of this variety, but I was unable to procure a 
specimen, in consequence of a short stay, and sudden departure from 
that Isiand. This species, unlike the larger ground dove, builds its 
nest on the low branch of a bush or cactus. 

“Total lenoth, 7 in.; alar ext., 11 in.; tail, 2.75; bill, brownish 
black, lighter below; iris, yellow; feet, flesh color; nails brown; 
tail slightly rounded.” 


TURDIDA. 


19. Melanotis ceerulescens (Swain.). “Blue Mocking Bird ; 
Mulato.” 

“One of the most. abundant as well as interesting song birds of 
the Marias.. They are tame and confiding; allowing persons to 
approach very near them, often following me in the woods, evincing 
considerable curiosity, and uttering mimicking cries, and occasionally 
breaking out into the richest song, awaking the echoes of the silent 
woods. Like the true mocking bird (Mimus polyglottus) this bird is 
solitary in his habits, showing great aversion to the companionship of 
its own species, and combats between them are very frequent. The 
notes of this bird are full and melodious; at all seasons of the year 
the woods are enlivened by its mellow song, and during the spring or 
love season, it is particularly so. They make excellent cage birds, 
are easily kept and soon become reconciled to their prison even when 
taken at an adult age. 

“This bird seems to differ but little from the species on the main 

land. 
“General appearance, dark slaty blue, lighter on the head and 
neck, with a black streak in front and around the eye. I have some- 
times met with specimens in which some of the feathers of the wing 
and rump had changed to pure white, giving them a singular and 
unnatural pied appearance. 

“I saw one that was nearly white. The black bill, which is gently 


curved and rather slender, is about as long as the head. ¢ Total 


length, 10 in.;—extent of outstretched wings, 13 in.; tail, broad, 
graduated or rounded, 4.5 in. 


Grayson.] 276 Ry une 7, 


“They inhabit the densest forests and thickets, spending much of 
their time upon the ground, turning up the leaves with their bill in 
search of insects.” 

20. Turdus flavirostris Swain. “Mexican Robin; Merulin.” 

In general appearance this thrush resembles its allied species 
(Turdus migratorius), the common robin of the United States, and 
like that bird is also partly migratory in its habits. They frequent 
the Islands in great numbers, and become excessively fat upon the 
various kinds of berries which they find in abundance in the Marias. 
They also breed there. This bird is common on the main land, in 
the vicinity of Mazatlan, Tepic, Bendaras Bay, Colima and 
Tehuantepec. i 

“Prof. Baird says this species is but little known to ornithologists 
at the present time, none having been obtained by Boucard, Sallé 
DeOca and other collectors. I have sent specimens from the Marias 
and main land. 

“Tris, reddish brown, feet brown. Total length of adult male, 
9.30; alar ext., 15 in.; tail, 4 in.; tarsus, 1.15; bill, measured from 
forehead, .75; third primary quill longest. 

“There is but little difference in the color of the sexes.” 

21. Turdus grayi, Bp. “Grey-breasted Robin, Merulin.” 

“Ts a resident of the Tres Marias, as well as in some localities on 
the main shore. I procured specimens near Tepic at the beautiful 
hacienda of Iauja, belonging to Barron and Forbes, in the months 
of April and May; they were in full song then, and commencing to 
build their nests among the orange and mango groves that so 
handsomely ornament the grounds of Iauja. One was here kept in 
a cage and its melodious whistling notes could be heard for some dis- 
tance. Their song somewhat resembles the northern robin (Turdus 
migratorius) but is more voluminous. 

“The Marias and Tepic are the only localities I saw this thrush; 
it is however, doubtless much more widely distributed.” 

22. Turdus ustulatus Nutt. “Wood Thrush; Merulincillo.” 

“I found this little thrush in the month of January, quite abun- 
dant in the thickest of the woods of the Tres Marias. It is very 
timid and shy, more so than any bird I saw upon the Islands; it 
frequently uttered a low plaintive whistle, and seemed solitary in its 
habits. J am unable to state whether it is a constant resident upon 
the Islands, or only a migratory visitor. 

“Special Characteristics. Third and fourth quill longest, (counting 
the spurious one); tail nearly even, or but slightly rounded. Upper 


1871.) Pager [Grayson. 


parts uniform reddish brown, with a faint olivaceous tinge; fore 
part of the breast tinged with a brownish yellow, becoming paler to 
the chin; the remaining parts are white; sides of the throat and 
fore part of breast, with small, distinct, triangular spots of well de- 
fined brown; sides of the breast more obsoletely spotted, and sides 
of body washed with olivaceous yellow-brown. Under wing coverts 
yellowish brown, the basal portion of the entire inner web of the 
secondaries pale yellow or buff. When the wings are outstretched, 
and particularly when the bird is in flight, this shows a broad and 
rather faint (although distinct) whitish band across the wing. Bill, 
brownish, under mandible yellow at base. Length, 7.50; wing, 
Sorwall,o> tarsus, 1.12.” 

23. Mimus polyglottus Linn. “Mocking Bird; Censontli.” 

“1 saw a few individuals of this interesting and well known song- 
ster, which were very shy and seemed to be lost or out of their 
range; perhaps wandered from the main land. ‘This is not improb- 
able, as during a voyage from Guaymas to Mazatlan, and midway 
in the Gulf, a fine male bird of this species came on board of our 
craft, so much fatigued as to be easily captured.” 


‘ AMPELIDZ. ' 


24. Myiadestes obscurus Lafr. “Tileuero.”} 

“In the Marias this bird is more frequently to be met with, and not 
so wary as on the main land; confining itself to the hilly portions of 
the Islands, where at all seasons its strange medley of song may be 
heard in the evening and morning. 

“They are great favorites with the Mexicans, and we often see 
them in cages, in different parts of the country. They make good 
cage birds, and sing well, their notes, however, are very singular, 
reminding one of a discordant music-box. 

“The general colors of this Jileuero is reddish brown on the 
upper parts; breast and sides pale lead color, chin and throat white, 
with a narrow black streak on each side of the throat, extending 
backward from the base of the lower mandible, about half an inch; 
a white ring around the eye; abdominal region and under tail cov- 
erts, white; bill, black, short, and rather depressed; feet, black; 
eyes black. Total length of male, measured fresh, 7.90 in.; alar ext., 
12.50 in.; tail, 4.10 in.; tarsus, 1 in.; 3d and 4th primary quills 
longest.” 

1 Pronounced Hilgaro. 


Grayson.] 278 [June 7, 


MNIOTILTID. 


25. Granatellus francesce Baird. Rev. Am. Birds, p. 232. 
“ Rose-breasted fantail; Rosillo.” 

“ This handsome little bird is one of the new species discovered by 
me in the Marias. I always met with it among the low underbrush 
in the dark recesses of the forest, hopping about among the decayed 
logs and brush, near and sometimes on the ground, busily searching 
for insects; at every move it has’a peculiar way of jerkine up and 
spreading its pretty fan-shaped tail, at the same time the head mo- 
tionless, and bent towards the ground, the wings recumbent, as if 
intensely looking for some little beetle or grub there concealed. Its 
notes are a feeble t’cit, t, cit. Its habits solitary.” 

26. Parula insularis Lawr. Am. Lyc., N. Y., Vol. x. p. 4. 
“Tres Marias yellow-throated Warbler; Silvestre.” 

“This lively little sylvia may be seen and heard in every tree, 
often repeating its delicate little song, at the same time busily search- 
ing among the foliage for apterous insects, and darting after passing 
flies.” 


TROGLODYTIDZ. 


i) 

27. Thryothorus felix Scl. “'Tres Marias Wren ; Reyezuelo.” 

“ Seems to be identical with the one found upon the main land, 
which closely resembles it. The Island species is a little larger, but 
the notes are similar. It is very common in the Marias, where it is a 
constant resident, and the only species of wren found there, where 
its lively song chimes in with the other songsters of the woods at all 
hours of the day. Total length, 6 inches.” 


TYRANNID. 


28. Myiarchus mexicanus (Kaup). (Cooper Baird). “Coop- 
er’s fly catcher; Alguacil de moscas.” / 

“A few birds of this species inhabit the Islands; I usually saw it 
among the low bushes, darting from its perch after flies and other 
winged insects. ‘They are very silent, seldom uttering a note. 

“Total lencth, 9 in.; tail, 4; tarsus, 95; bill, brownish black; 
under mandible paler at the base; feet, black; iris brown.” 

At the request of Mr. Sclater, the type of MZ. mezicanus was sent 
him by Dr. Kaup, and was found on examination to be the species 


1871.] 279 z [Grayson. 


generally known as MM. cooperi Baird, of which it has precedence, 
thus sustaining the specific value of my WM. ciner cule which has by 
many been referred to M. mexicanus. 

29. Myiarchus lawrencii (Giraud). ‘“Lawrence’s fly 
catcher; Alouacil de moscas.” 

“This little fly catcher is very abundant in the Marias, where I met 
with them every day, in all parts of the woods. These Islands must 
be their most natural and favorite abode. I do not remember to 
have met with it on the main land. Length, 7 in.; alar ext. 9.75; 
bill and feet, black; iris, brown.” 

30. Empidonax difficilis Baird. “The lonely fly catcher; 
Tristecillo.” 

“Ts common in the Marias, as well as on the main coast; and also 
in California. The accustomed places of resort of this solitary little 
bird are the most retired and secluded dells of the forest, where, be- 
neath the canopy of the natural and shady grottos, formed by the 
overlapping branches intermingled with innumerable lianes, convolvu- 
lus and other creeping plants, it sits upon some low twig, watching 
for a passing fly; or it may be seen frequenting ‘some secluded and 
shady little brook, near the surface of which it often darts upon the 
skimming water flies, ever and anon uttering its low and plaintive 
one syllabled note. 

“General colors brown olivaceous above, with the entire under 
parts bright yellow, intense on the throat and chin; a conspicuous, 
pale yellow ring around the eye; also two bands across the wings of 
a light yellowish tinge. Bill dark brown above, yellow beneath, 
rather broad and depressed; feet dark brown. Total length, 5.20; 
tail, 2.25.” 

31. EHlainea placens Scl. “Little golden crowned fly catcher ; 
Coronillo.” 

“This species is rather rare on the Tres Marias.” 


COTINGIDZ. 


32. Hadrostomus aglaiz var. affinis (Hlliot). “ Rose- 
throated fly catcher; Rosieler.” 

“In the Tres Marias, this bird is only found in the thick woods, 
where it is seen searching for insects, sometimes darting after them 
when on the wing, at other times looking for them among the leaves 
and branches not unlike the warblers. Its notes are feeble and but 
seldom uttered, and its habits solitary. 


~ 


Grayson.] 280 [June 7, 


“The colors of the upper parts are dark plumbeous, inclining to 
dark brownish or nearly black on the tail. The top of the head with 
a broad, rather flattened crest, is black, shading into brownish on the 
forehead. ‘The lower part bluish gray, slightly tinged with brown- 
ish on the abdomen and crissum; chin ashy white; upon the throat 
and fore part of breast, is a broad patch of bright carmine or rose 
color, a distinguishing contrast to the otherwise rather dull plumage. 
The wings are dark brown, edged externally with plumbeous. The 
bill is nearly black above or very dark brown, the under mandible, 
bluish horn color; feet, bluish grey, nails, bluish grey; iris dark 
brown.” 

“¢ Total length, 6.60; alar ext., 11 in.; tail, 2.75; second, third 
and fourth quills longest. Body robust; head, large; bill, strong, 
slightly decurved, and rather compressed towards the tip. 

“The colors of the female are different, the entire under parts are 
of a pale brown or rather buff color, an obscure band of the same 
passes entirely around the neck, posterior to the nape; the forehead 
is tinged with the same hue. The top of the head and back is a dull 
brown, with a plumbeous tinge; tail, brown; wings, reddish brown; 
‘the crest is as broad, but shorter than that of the male, and of a 
darker plumbeous brown than the back.” ! 

Specimens from the Tres Marias agree closely in color and dimen- 
sions with specimens from Jalapa, being somewhat smaller than ex- 
amples from some other parts of Mexico. 


ICTERID Zi. 


33. Icterus graysoni Cassin. “The Tres Marias Oriole; Cal- 
andria.” 

“This superb oriole is one of the most beautiful of its kind, and is 
entirely confined to the Islands of the Tres Marias, where it is the 
only representative of its genus. 

“There is a closely allied variety on the main coast (lelerus pustu- 
latus) but in comparing the two, the difference in the markings is at 
once observable, as also the larger size of the Island bird. The Tres 
Marias oriole proves to be a new and interesting species to be added 
to the already long list of the Jcteride at present known. 

“The nest of this oriole, like ali of its congeners, is pensile; gener- 
ally suspended from the extreme end of a slender, decumbent branch 
or twig, in some shady spot, where it may swing to and fro by the 
breeze free from entanglement with other branches. The nest, which 


1871.) 281 [Grayson. 


is purse-shaped and about twelve or thirteen inches in length with 
the entrance near the top, is composed of a long, narrow grass or the 
fibres of maguey leaves, which are very strong and elastic, and lined 
with silk cotton; it is firmly and well woven together, and would be 
difficult to pull apart; it differs a little in form from those found in 
the vicinity of Mazatlan. 

“Few birds surpass the oriole in discovering the hiding places of 
the various kinds of insects and their larvee, upon which it feeds. 
With its exceedingly sharp bill it searches and probes every crevice 
in the bark and leaves of trees, and with unceasing industry; the 
number it destroys in one day alone must be very great. Thus we 
here see beauty and elegance combined with utility, in the place as- 
signed to this species in the great economy of nature, in checking 
the accumulation of the insect kind. During my stay upon the Is- 
lands, I often saw them clinging about decaying logs or branches, 
sometimes with their heads downwards, busily engaged in piercing 
the rotten wood in search of wood worms or borers and white ants; 
it also feeds upon various kinds of fruit, Pitahaya (Pitajaie cactus) 
they are very partial to. In the Islands of the Tres Marias these 
birds become excessively fat, finding there an abundance of food, 
with nothing to molest them in their peaceful green island home.” 


TANAGRIDZ. 


34. Pyranga bidentata Swain. “Tres Marias Tanager; 


Burion.” 
“T found this species abundant in the Islands, where it is a con- 


stant resident. I have nothing especial to note of its habits.” 


VIREONIDZ. 


35. Vireo hypochryseus Scl. “Tres Marias Vireo.” 

“This species is quite common in the Marias, where I found it in 
all parts of the woods, from time to time uttering its cheerful little 
song.” 


FRINGILLID. 


36. Cardinalis virginianus (Linn.). “Cardinal Grosbeak; 
Cardinal.” 


Grayson.] 282 ; [June 7, 


“ This bird is remarkably abundant upon the Marias, where it is a 
constant resident. It is not so numerous on the main and adjacent 
land. ; 

“JT was surprised to find this old and familiar acquaintance in this 
remote region, upon the very confines of its wide-spread geograph- 
ical distribution, where its bright red plumage, its beautiful crest of 
crimson, its charming song, and above all its fondness for the habita- 
tion of man, —recalled the almost forgotten associations of my ear- 
liest boyhood days, in a far distant land.” 

37. Chrysomitris mexicanus Sw. “Mexican gold-finch; 
Canario.” | 

“This is another species found in the Island which is also common 
to the main land.” 


TROCHILID A. 


38. Circe latirostris (Sw.) “Shiny Green Humming Bird; 
Chopa-flores.” 

“T found but two species of humming birds in the Islands, and 
these were quite numerous. The present one is decked in a brilliant 
plumage of shiny green upon the upper and lower parts, with the 
exception of the front part of the head and chin, where the green 
shades into an invisible dark blue—these colors in some lights give 
forth bright metallic reflections, more beautiful than the purest eme- 
rald; the wings are a purplish brown and considerably recurved; 
the tail, which is moderately short, is forked, the feathers of which 
are broad and dark; shiny green above, with a slight obscure tip 
of lighter color; the crissum white, with dark invisible green marks: 
upon the under tail coverts. Bill, compressed at base; where it is 
orange red, both above and below, the rest black; it is slightly curved 
or arched, and .75 in. in length. Total length of bird 3.5 inches. 

“The nest of this lovely species, which I had the good fortune to 
discover, is equal in interest, and as beautiful in form, as the bird 
itself. The elegant little structure I found attached to a slender twig, 
and shaded with its leaves, about five feet from the ground. The 
situation was fronting the sea, but a few paces from the water’s 
edge, where the first beams of the morning sun dissolved the dews. 
Its form is cup-shaped, and composed of the down of the silk cotton 
tree (Eriodendron), intermingled with the down of other plants and 
spider webs, the whole exterior neatly studded with diminutive whit- 


1871.] 283 [Grayson. 


ish lichens; it contained two ilies hatched young, but little larger 
than flies.” 

Col. Grayson’s description, as given above, differs from C. latiros- 
tris in making the front blue and the tail green, whereas in that spe- 
cies there is no blue on the front, and the tail is steel blue; in all 
other respects it agrees with latirostris; as Col. Grayson says he 
obtained but two species of humming birds at the Marias, and I find 
in his collection from there only P. Graysoni and C. latirostris, I 
can only conclude that his description is intended for the latter spe- 
cies, and the errors were made by some inadvertence. Col. Grayson 
states that neither of these species inhabits the main land, but in his 
collection from Mazatlan, no doubt made subsequemtly, I find a spe- 
cimen of C. latirostris; P. Graysoni, however, has not been found 
elsewhere than at the Tres Marias. 

389. Pyrrhophena graysoni Lawr. “ Cinnamon-breasted 
Humming Bird; Chopa-flores.” 

“In my visit to the Tres Marias it has been my good fortune to 
discover this new addition to the large group to which it belongs. 

“This rather large humming bird is very abundant on the Islands, 
where they seem to be continually at war with each other; in fact 
they attack every bird, and even the butterflies, should they approach 
some chosen flowering plant which they guard unremittingly as their 
own treasure. As they dart like a golden sunbeam throuch the 
woods, they often utter their shrill note of t’weet, t’weet, t’weet. 

“Sometimes combats between them become of a desperate nature. 
One day while watching a number of them in active motion around 
some tobacco flowers (of which they seem to be very fond) two fine 
males after darting at each other for some time, at length came to a 
deathly struggle, eh above my head; they finally idlinched each : 
other, each having one of the mandibles of the other in his mouth, at 
the same time scratching with their little claws, and using their wings 
with the greatest force, and in this situation, whirling round and round 
they fell to the ground near my feet. During this terrible conflict, in 
which passion and desperation were exhibited, I observed them for a 
few seconds and then gently placed my hat over both; even after 
they were thus captured, and I held one in each hand, they evinced 
a desire to continue the war. 

“T have seen this species frequently darting from its perch upon 
passing diminutive flies like a real fly-catcher. I found the gizzard, 


Grayscn.] 284 [June 7, 


when examined, always well filled with them and other minute 
insects. 

“Neither of these species have I seen on the main land; it would 
seem, therefore, that they belong entirely to this locality, where per- 
haps other species may yet be found. 

“Here amid such luxuriance of flowers and leaves, and wild en- 
tanglement of climbing plants and vegetable glory, it would be sur- 
prising if no others should be discovered in this favored spot, where 
the flowers seem to vie with the brilliant tints of the ‘brave little 
humming bird.’ 

“ The bill of this species is long, but slightly arched, depressed at 
base, where it is orange-yellow above and below, the rest black ; 
the wings a little recurved, and of a purplish brown, tail with broad 
feathers and slightly forked, is of a deep cinnamon red, tipped with 
black and green reflections; the balance of the upper parts golden 
green with metallic reflections, slightly tinged with rufous on the fore- 
head. Entire under parts light cinnamon red, or rufous. Iris, brown ; 
feet dark brown. Total length, 4.75; alar ext. 6.5; bill, 1.02; tail, 
Laos? 

40. Thalurania lucie Lawyr. 

41. Florisuga mellivora (Linn). 

42. Cyanomya guatemalensis Gould. 

43. Petasophora thalassina (Sw.). 

44. Chlorostilbon insularis Lawr. 

The last five species were obtained at the Tres Marias by Capt. J. 
Xantus, and none of them were observed by Col.Grayson, nor did 
Mr. Xantus obtain either of the two found by Col. Grayson. 


~ 


ALCEDINIDZ. 


45. Ceryle alcyon (Linn). “Belted Kingfisher; Pescadoro.” 
“T met with this species along the sea shore, sitting upon the 
rocks, solitary and rare. It appeared to be accidental in the Tres 
Marias, although I observed one or two individuals upon every visit 
I made to the Islands. It is common upon the main land in this lo- 
cality.” 


HAMATOPODIDA. 


46. Hematopus palliatus Temm. “Red billed Oyster 
catcher; Agarrador.” 


1871.1 . 985 [Grayson. 


“Common on the sea shore of the Marias, as also on the main 
coast, from whence perhaps it visits this locality.” 


CHARADRITD A. 


47. Aigialitis semipalmatus (Bp.). “Little Plover; Fraile- 
cillo.” 

“JT procured one specimen of this bird on the shores of the 
island.” ; 


ARDEIDZE. 


48. Ardea herodias Linn. 

49. Herodias egretta (Gm.). “Garza.” 

50. Garzetta candidissima (Gm.). “Garza.” 

“The above three species appear to be only accidental or strag- 
gline visitors to the shores of the Marias. Common on the main 
land. 

51. Nyctherodius violaceus (Linn.). “Yellow-crowned 
Night Heron; Garza.” 

“J procured a few specimens of this heron in the Marias, some of 
which were in adolescent plumage; this led me to suppose that a few 
‘individuals may breed there. I found it in about equal numbers in 
the Socorro Island. It is a common species upon the main land.” 


LARID Zs. 


52. Haliplana fuliginosa var. crissalis Baird, M.S. “Black- 
back Tern; Sooty Tern.” 

“Numerous in the vicinity of the Islands of the Tres Marias; it 
breeds upon the small island of Isabele, near San Blas. ‘This species 
is never seen near the main shore, usually keeping far out to sea. I 
have never met with it in any other locality, but the southern part of 
the Gulf of California in the neighborhood of the Marias. It ap- 
pears to be semi-nocturnal. It is a constant resident in the localities 
above cited.” 

This differs from Z. fuliginosa in having the under tail coyerts 
tinged with ashy, instead of being pure white. 

“This comprises the list of land birds discovered by me during my 
comparatively short stay upon the Marias; doubtless a farther inves- © 
tigation may bring to light other species from this interesting 
locality. 

“Various species of sea birds common to these latitudes are seen 


Grayson.] 286 ; a une 7, 


along the shores and rocks, which I have excluded from this cata- 
logue as not being strictly inhabitants of these islands, but noted _ 
wanderers of the sea.” 

“Of mammals, I discovered but two species of any importance; 
one a rabbit, apparently a new species and very abundant, and the 
common raccoon. 

“A small species of bat is found, and I also saw indications of 
wood mice, and was informed that a small species of opossum inhab- 
its the woods, being but little larger than a common mouse (perhaps 
related to Didelphys tristriata),— a species allied to which I found in 
Tehuantepec.” 

“Among reptiles, there are two or three species of tree snakes, and 
the Mexican anaconda is sometimes met with. Various species of 
lizards are abundant, among which a very long one, two feet in 
leneth, known as the iguana, is very common; scarcely a hollow 
tree in the woods but is occupied by some venerable hermit of this 
species, who may be seen basking in the balmy air just in front of his 
door, into which he darts when you approach too near. ‘They are 
all harmless. This species appears to be different from those found 
upon the main land.” 

“ Of shells, there is but one variety of land shells, which, however, 
existsin great abundance. It has six whorls,—increasing regularly, 
streaked longitudinally and irregularly with white and bluish horn 
colored stripes,—average length, two inches. I found many of these 
shells during the dry season, in hollow trees and knot holes; in this 
situation I always observed that the shell itself had closed its door 
with a gummy substance, evidently intended to exclude the dry 
atmosphere, thus hibernating until the rains awakened them again 
from their winter sleep.” 

“Note. About half past ten o’clock p. M., Jan. 25, 1865, an unusual large 
and magnificent meteor passed over the Island, in a northeast direction, explod- 
ing near the surface of the water, about twenty miles distant. There were two 
or three very loud reports, not unlike the bursting of bomb shells, accompanied 
with a rushing sound, caused perhaps by its passage through the air. The 
Island was brilliantly illuminated for a few seconds during its passage over, the 
altitude of which did not seem to be very great.” 


1871.] 287 o [Grayson. 


EXPLORING EXPEDITION TO THE ISLAND OF SOCORRO, FROM 
MazaTLAN, Mexico, By A. J. Grayson. 


“Socorro is the largest of the group known as the ‘ Revillagigedo 
Isles, and is situated in Lat. 18° 35’ and Long. 111°. It is about 
twenty-eight or thirty miles in length and twelve in width; its great- 
est altitude 2,000 feet; the shores are bold and rocky, and as there 
are no sand beaches, to make a landing in any of its coves, even in 
calm weather, is attended with great difficulty if not danger. 

“The entire island is rent and torn by volcanic action, to such a 
degree as to render travelling in the interior very laborious. 

“The ‘ Revillagigedo Islands’ were so named by Capt. Collnett, in 
1793, in honor of the Mexican Viceroy. Capt. Collnett was commander 
of the British vessel captured by the Spaniards at Nootka Sound in 
1788 or 1789, and carried to San Blas asa prisoner, where he was con- 
fined some time, but was released by order of the Viceroy, then in 
the City of Mexico. 

“The Island now called Socorro (Succor) was discovered by 
Hernando de Guxalvo in 1533, and was by him named ‘Santo To- 
mas,’ which name it bears on all the ancient maps and charts. It 
derived its present name from the timely relief which it afforded to a 
ship’s crew suffering severely with the scurvy, who were completely 
restored to health by the use of that valuable antiscorbutic, the 
prickly pear, which was found in abundance on the Island. This 
was in the latter part of the last century. 

“On the second day of May, 1867, about 5, P. M.; we sailed from 
the port of Mazatlan on board the sloop ‘Republicana,’ of twenty- 
five tons, commanded by Capt. Garcia, a Mexican. 

“My companions were my son, Edward Grayson, and my Mexican 
servant, Christobal, a boy of fourteen years, to assist me in making 
my collections of Natural History, etc. A Mr. Anderson accompa- 
nied the expedition, representing other parties, for the purpose of 
examining the Islands as to their utility for farming and other pur- 
poses; my object being to make a more thorough research of its 
natural history, than I had done on a previous visit. The wind being 
fair but light, we made a good offing by dark, and headed for Socorro 
Island. At 12 M. of the 3d, Lat. 22° 50/, Long. 117°, the mereury 
was 85° Fh. in the cabin, and it was very warm on deck, there being 
no shade. On the 4th we sighted the ‘Tres Marias’ Islands, bear- 


Grayson.] 988 _ {June 7, 


ing south of us. We continued four days in sight of these Islands 
at a distance of thirty miles from them, with calms and light winds. 
We amused ourselves fishing, in which we had considerable success, 
—there being soundings for some distante northwest from these 
Islands. A small green humming bird paid us a visit, of the species I 
found abundant on the Islands when I was there three years ago, 
and excited our astonishment that it should venture so far from its 
green retreats; it remained but a few moments, apparently examin- 
ing our vessel, when it suddenly departed for its island home. 

“The black-billed terns were numerous on these soundings, as well as 
cuillemots, petrels andgannets. Occasionally a tropic bird (Phaéton) 
came around with its long tail feathers glistening against the sky. 
But none of these birds came near enough to be shot. With our 
scoop net we procured a number of floating sea snail shells, buoyed 
upon the surface of the water by means of a thin substance full of 
little air cells, which resembles sea foam. ‘The shell is very fragile, 
has three whorls, and when disturbed ejects a purple fluid; we saw 
many of these shells floating on the sea in calm weather, between 
the Marias and Socorro Island. On the 9th the Tres Marias Islands 
had disappeared below the horizon. Numbers of black-billed terns 
fly around to-day of which we shot and prepared two specimens; at 
12 o’clock M., Lat. 20° 38/, Long. 108°, the mercury stood at 86 Fh. 
in the cabin. From this time forth the voyage was very monotonous, 
until the 14th, when we at last sighted the Island of Socorro, at 
half past 6 p.M., bearing west, my son being the first to see it. 

“By this time the wood for cooking purposes had entirely given 
out and our provisions were also getting low,—we had neither 
pickles nor vinegar, nor dried fruit nor vegetables of any kind; nothing 
but dried beef and hard bread, with a little coffee and tea, and all on 
hand would not last more than twenty days even with strictest 
economy at that, notwithstanding according to the charter contract, 
there was to be provisions for two months. But I came tothe de- 
termination, that if we reached the Island, I would live upon fish 
before leaving it until the object which brought me there had been 
accomplished. 

“For four days, the wind headed us off from the Island most 
provokinely, or rather from a landing place. We first endeavored to 
go around the north side, but found it too difficult on account of 
head winds; we then tried the south and after beating against the 
wind and a strong current, finally reached the cove marked on the 


1871.] 989 [Grayson. 


chart as Cornwallis Bay. In this cove, 1 had been two years previ- 
ously. 

“Although it is a very unsafe anchorage, yet it is the only place 
we could find fit to come to anchor, in which we might lay with any 
show of safety. ‘The shores of this cove are rough and rocky, upon 
which the sea breaks in the calmest weather. There is no beach to 
land upon, instead of which, at its head, are heaped up round water- 
worn stones, and its sides are bold and precipitous. We did not see 
when sailing nearly all around this Island, any beaches or a better 
place to land than this little cove, which opens broadly to the 
southwest. 

“On the 19th of May, seventeen days from Mazatlan, we ran into 
this little bay with a fair breeze, and delighted with the green trees 
at the head of the cove and the song of birds among them. But the 
captain appeared to feel a great deal of uneasiness at the general 
' appearance of things. He let go the anchors as he thought a little 
too near the shore, and the breakers so near and all around, filled 
him with fear; and just when we felt that all was safe and our 
voyage at an end for the present, he ordered the anchor to be 
hauled up and at the same time the main sail hoisted, with the in- 
tention of beating out against a head wind; his excuse was that the 
anchor would not hold. But this movement proved fatal to our 
eraft. Before headway could be made, she was driven in by the 
wind and swells among the breakers near the shore; both anchors 
were again ‘let go,’ but it was too late, her doom was sealed. We 
made every effort to haul her out by kedging with the small anchor, 
this being taken ahead with great difficulty in the little skiff and 
dropped—we would then pull upon the chain; but futile was the 
effort. Her centre-board had already struck and broken off and her 
keel was thumping on the rocks as she surged heavily at her chains, 
which threatened every moment to part. 

“We now turned our attention to saving the water and provisions; 
the former giving me the most anxiety. As for the latter I had no 
fears, as fish of excellent quality swarm around the shores and are 
easily taken with hook and line. We still had hopes of saving the 
sloop when the sea became a little smoother, as she was not yet 
much damaged. We however, made preparations for landing every- 
thing we could. A rope was fastened to a point of rocks about 
twenty-five yards distant, to facilitate our landing, and the skiff was 
pulled back and forth just when the sea would give us an opportu- 

PROCERDINGS B. S. N. H. — VOL. XIV. 19 APRIL, 1872. 


Grayson.] 290 [June 7, 


nity of jumping ashore; much caution had to be used in this ex- 
ploit, the sea breaking furiously at times upon this rock. 

“Mr. Anderson being sea sick, from which malady he suffered the 
entire voyage, was first put on shore, afterwards my son and the boy 
Cristobal were landed, in order to receive the different articles as 
they were thrown to them from the skiff. The water casks were all 
hoisted on deck in order that should the sloop break up, they would 
float ashore; the provisions, guns, ammunition, and other articles 
~ most needed for the expedition were all soon safely landed. : 

“I remained on board till all these things were on shore. Cristo- 
bal, who had gone a few steps up the cove, suddenly cried out to me 
with demonstrations of the most lively joy, “agua, agua-dulce,” point- 
ing at the same time to an ugly pile of rocks upon which he was 
standing. 

“There indeed we found a small spring of warm water gushing out 
of a seam in the solid rock that forms a precipice on the western 
side of the cove; it was partly concealed by a pile of rocks and 
boulders, which is often covered by the tide, and the spring so low 
down would naturally be taken for tide water running back into the 
sea. 

“The uncertainty of the length of time we would have to remain 
before being rescued from our exile, for it is well known that vessels 
seldom pass near this island, rendered this discovery of the hichest 
importance. ‘The contemplation of the hardships, toil and intense 
suffering in searching for water in a locality where it seemed ex- 
tremely doubtful of success, filled my mind with the greatest anxiety, 
but it was now dispelled by this unexpected discovery, and I felt 
pretty certain that the preservation of our lives depended upon 
it. This I became more and more convinced of, as we made frequent 
and laborious excursions without being able to find it elsewhere. 

“During the day the sea became rougher, and the small anchor 
chain parted and nearly all of the sloop’s keel broke off. She still 
held by the larger anchor. 

“All the articles landed were taken up to the place selected for our 
camp, beneath the shade of the trees, which at the head of the cove 
are of profuse growth. As soon as it was dark, being much fatigued 
by our day’s work, we retired to sleep. About two o’clock, a.M., we 
we were aroused by the loud shouting of one of the sailors left on 
board the sloop. We hurried to the spot and found she had broken 
the chain and was already hard and fast upon the rocks close to 


1871.] 991 [Grayson. 


shore, rolling and thumping, and the water casks which had broken 
loose were dashing about over the deck most frightfully, endangering 
the legs of the poor sailor. On the 20th, every movable article that 
remained on board was taken off; this was safely done, because at 
low tide one side of the vessel could be reached without the aid of 
the little skiff, which was now hauled up on shore for safety. Nearly 
everything was saved, even the clock, cooking stove, culinary uten- 
sils, implements, sails, etc., all of which, the smallest articles, we 
prized and treasured up for some future necessity, in anticipation of 
along abode amid the wild solitude that surrounded us. We ar- 
ranged our camp in order, beneath the strange trees, the trunks and 
branches of which are bent. and crooked into every conceivable 
shape. The wide spreading branches, thickly clothed with leaves, 
were ample protection against the intense rays of the sun. 

“This tree seems to belong to the Euphorbiacew. When the bark 
is cut a thick milky sap Ane freely, which very soon becomes con- 
gealed, and would doubtless form caoutchouc; it bears a fruit re- 
sembling small green apples, also containing a profusion of milky 
fluid. ‘This fluid is poisonous to the skin; some of the party were 
poisoned by it. ‘These are the largest trees upon the Island, and the 
larzest of them would not measure quite three feet in diameter at 
the root; but the branches which commence near the root are lone, 
and horizontally inclined toward the ground, the leaves are ovate 
and smooth, of a delicate green color; the fruit, also smooth, contains 
clusters of hard seed inside the pulp; the flowers are without petals 
or fragrance. Specimens of this tree, together with all the plants 
collected and packed up, were unfortunately left behind. Other 
shrubs and plants found upon the Island are of a scrubby nature. 
Among the branches of the trees around our camp, the little warbler 
(Parula) and a busy, happy little wren, sing from morning till night, 
The new mocking bird, too, occasionally gives us a touch of his melo- 
dious song, sometimes imitating the scream of the Buteo montanus, 
and the pretty parakeets with their grass green plumage are chatter- 
ing and whistling all through the grove. Numbers of the little towhee 
finch (Pipilo) that pointed out the water to Cristobal, came around 
us picking up the crumbs of hard bread thrown to them, and drink- 
ing and bathing in a basin of water placed on the ground for their 
special use. All these birds were remarkably tame ; they confidingly 
came around us, and seemed to be as much pleased with our society 
as we were with theirs. 


Grayson.} 292 [June 7, 


“Our camp was now put into systematic order. We constructed 
seats of boxes, and out of the hatch covering of the sloop we made 
convenient tables, also swinging shelves for drying specimens upon. 
The stove was put up for cooking, and an excellent fish (called by 
the Mexicans cabreca), was caught with hook and line, just as needed 
for the table. This species is very abundant and fat, some of the 
largest would weigh from ten to twenty pounds; they are oblong in 
shape, with large mouth, and of mottled brown and grey color, swim 
near the bottom and are very voracious. ‘There are several other 
species in great abundance, some of which are very pretty. One 
kind is of a brilliant bluish green color; another species resembles 
the gold fish. Many of these fish are new to me, and may be to sci- 
ence, but I was unprepared for preserving specimens of this nature 
for the want of alcohol. j 

“As our small stock of provisions would soon be exhausted, we 
came to the conclusion that fish would be our principal means of 
subsistence; under these circumstances, however, we were in good 
spirits, and went to work as though nothing had happened, in mak- 
ing collections and exploring the Island. 

“The climate is very uniform and balmy, in the shade the ther- 
mometer varying only from 70° to 75° Fh., and almost a constant 
breeze from the west or northwest. On the 21st we went some dis- 
tance exploring and hunting. My son discovered the signs of the 
hogs, a pair of which I left here two years ago; from the number of 
tracks large and small seen, they have increased. ‘This was a happy 
discovery, as we could now have lard to fry our fish. He captured 
a very small owl and a new dove, both new species I think. I found 
the country exceedingly rough and barren of trees, with the excep- 
tion of a few scattering ones in the gorges, though otherwise clothed 
with low brush, of a species of wormwood, also coarse grass and 
weeds; these, combined with the sharp volcanic stones, made my prog- 
ress tedious and irksome. I found no indications of mammals of any 
kind, and no new species of birds other than those found in our little 
green cove. Shot two hawks (Buteo montanus) and returned late in 
the evening very much fatigued. 

“May 22. Preparing specimens all day. We captured all the 
birds, with a few exceptions, by means of a running noose fixed to 
the end of a slender pole, which is cautiously slipped over the vic- 
tim’s head, and with a sudden jerk the bird is secured alive; this 
extraordinary mode of catching birds I learned from the Mexicans 


4 


1871.} 293 [ Grayson, 


on the Tres Marias Islands. About one o’clock in the night I was 
awakened by my dog growling and showing signs of uneasiness, 
when I heard some large animal walking around among the leaves 


and brush. I remained quiet, endeavoring to make out what it could 


be ; it made a circle around our camp as if to get the wind of us. I 
at length heard it blow, which I recognized at once to be that pecu- 
liar snuff generally made by the hog family on certain occasions of 
alarm. I was soon satisfied of, as well as gratified by, this fact, for on 
calling to her familiarly, she came fearlessly into camp, and to my 
joy proved to be the same black sow that I had left here only a pig 
two years ago, and equally as tame now as then. She seemed to be 
glad to see us, welcoming, as it were, the return once more of hu- 
man beings to her lonely home. She had grown to be a large hoo, 
very fat, and far advanced in preenancy. She remained with us con- 
stantly during our stay and gave a domestic appearance to our camp. 
We left her there when we came off, where she may continue to in- 
crease the breed, for the benefit of some future castaways. We 
never could find the others, though we saw their numerous tracks. 
Day aiter day some of us were occupied in exploring the interior of 
the Island in various directions, which we always found to be very 
laborious and tedious, particularly as we could find no other water 
or new specimens of birds or mammals. The sailors and the cap- 
tain were engaged in making a wall around the little spring for the 
purpose of keeping the tide from running over it, which it often does. 
The water of this spring when first coming out of the rock is warm ; 
it is good soft water, however, and when cooled is good for drinking. 

“We kept the casks saved from the wreck, filled for fear of acci- 
dent. Over the spring we marked with white paint, on the steep 
rock out of which it flows— ~gg> water —in Spanish agua, thus 
any one visiting this place would be sure to find it. ‘This is the only 
water we found upon the Island, but it is very likely that it exists in 
some places higher up the mountain, in the deep impenetrable gorges, 
which we saw but did not enter. 

“We travelled over a large portion of this Island, and found its 
general aspect excessively rough, lonely and forbidding. There are 
but few varieties of plants, as of birds; but these are nearly all new 
tome. A stiff, unyielding brush, with occasional bunches of prickly 
pear, auoments the difficulty of walking over the rouch, stony sur- 
face. Large tracts of lava run to the sea on the south side, from the 
extinct volcanoes, leaving unmistakable evidence of their fury. 


Grayson.] 294° [June 7, 


These lava paths and craters can be distinctly seen from the ocean a 
few miles from shore. Our shoes were soon worn out by these sharp 
rocks, and some of our party were compelled to make shoes, or rather 
a nondescript between a shoe and a moccasin, of seal skin, which 
happened to be on board the sloop. 

“Qn the morning of the 28th I started out early and alone, pre- 
pared to ascend the mountain and penetrate as far as possible the 
interior; hoping to find something new and worthy of a place 
among my collection, as well as to learn more of the topography of 
the country. After travelling for a few miles over volcanic ridges, 
intereepted with brushy gulches and vast piles of crumbling sharp 
stones, | at length reached the head of a small, deep valley, which is 
overgrown with scrubby brush and an occasional small or stunted 
green tree; this dry valley or gulch runs toward the southern shore. 
of the Island; two deep gorges are here confluent, coming from 
towards the mountain peak that stands near the centre of the 
Island ; these gulches are very rocky and enclosed with precipices on 
both sides. I descended with some difficulty into this valley, for the 
purpose of going up one of the gorges mentioned ; they had a fresh 
green appearance in their narrow windings, in which water might be 
found; and where there is water, there would be found most likely 
the objects of my research; I observed the small ground dove 
(Chemepelia?) passing up these gulches, may be to some watering 
place. 

“On attempting to explore these wild and mysterious regions, I 
found the difficulty too great, on account of the tangled brush and 
the rank coarse grass that grew among it; there were also many 
strange looking holes, which had the appearance of having once 
been the vents of an interior fire, now extinct. The ground sounded 
hollow, as I stumbled over these places, and a horrible sensation 
came over me as I thought of the danger of falling through into 
some dark cavern, from the gloomy depths of which there could be 
no return to light. With these obstacles surrounding me, the idea 
of penetrating this gorge was abandoned for the present. Before 
again ascending the ridge I set fire to the grass, for the purpose of 
clearing away these impediments, and would at another time make 
the attempt with a better chance of success. The fire soon spread 
with great rapidity, making clean work of brush and grass. Im- 
mense columns of black smoke ascended to the clouds and might be 
seen fifty miles at sea, were a vessel within that distance. On again 


1871.] 995 (Grayson. 


reaching the summit of the ridge I proceeded on my course up the 
mountain, making my way the best I could over the rough ground. I 
had become very much heated and out of breath, there was no shade 
to invite repose, the scenery around looked dry, hot and wild in the 
extreme. I met with but few solitary birds, such as the little ground 
dove, mocking bird and little wren, and these had a gloomy, listless 
look, conformable to the sombre solitudes, which could call forth no 
song from these silent creatures; indeed, scarcely any animal life 
could be seen ; sometimes a small blue lizard basking on the rocks, or 
a solitary grasshopper started from the grass, was all the living 
things to be encountered in my rambles of that day. In my route 
up the mountain, and upon an adjacent ridge, I beheld a large and 
isolated rock, which had so strange an appearance that I was led to 
examine it more closely. At a distance it looked like a part of a 
broken wall of some vast ruin. A mile or so of tedious walking 
brought me to it, when I found it to be about sixty feet high, forty or 
fifty feet in length, and only about ten feet thick at base, standing 
perpendicular upon its edge and perhaps welded to a solid mass of 
the same formation below the surface of the earth where it stood. 
On examining its rough exterior I found it to be glazed over the en- 
tire surface, as if but recently taken seething from somie huge melting 
furnace; the whole mass had the appearance of a large block of 
dull, yellowish porcelain, equally as hard and flinty ; in places a slight 
tinge of pink was perceptible. 

“From this point an extended view of the wild scenery lay before 
me with its broken and rent forms of gulches, fissures, ridges and 
rude heaps of black rocky scoria. The lava paths could be dis- 
tinctly traced, running to the sea. Some very curious forms are 
produced in the jagged rocks that stand like sentinels along the 
rock-bound shore. One of these is the “Old man of the rocks,” at 
the extreme southeast point of our little bay. These rocks are ex- 
ceedingly sharp and rough, extending some distance into the sea, and 
making a very dangerous reef. Upon one of these isolated rocks is 
the colossal figure of a robust man in a sitting position, with arms 
folded and head thrown back, gazing forever upon the eternal sea, | 
whilst the breakers are dashing furiously against its pedestal. 

“While resting near these rocks, my eyes suddenly rested upon a 
dark speck to the northwest. I was soon satisfied after a second 
look, that it was a sail, and apparently heading towards the Island 
with a good breeze. The smoke which I had raised and now spread 


Grayson.] | 296 [June 7, 


far and wide had doubtless been seen. I started to camp as fast as 
the nature of the ground would permit, in order to signalize her 
should she come hear enough to our cove. I felt, however, indiffer- 
ent as to her coming in, as I had not satisfied myself of the full and 
complete exploration of the Island, and I was not quite ready yet to 
gO. : 

“By the time I reached the camp none of my companions had 
seen her, although she had arrived abreast of our cove, five or six 
miles off, and under full headway was sailine past. Sionals of smoke 

was made as soon as possible, by firing the dry grass on the sur- 
rounding hills, while my son Edward, with a white flac, ran out on 
the extreme point of rocks. The sight of this flag brought her to. 
She came within about three miles and sent a boat to see what we 
wanted. The sea was very rough and was breaking furiously in the 
cove. As the little boat neared the shore, I felt the chances of 
getting off in her very doubtful; the only place that we could em- 
bark was a bluff point of rocks, upon which we had made the first 
landing, but the waves were now breaking against this with great 
force. The boat, however, came near this point, and when an oppor- 
tunity offered, her stern was backed up to the rocks. Eddie, sup- 
posing the mate, who was dn the stern, wished to come ashore to 
make some arrangements about taking us off, reached him his hand 
to assist him in jumping ashore, but instead of doing so he pulled my 
son into the boat, and one of our sailors jumped in after him. She 
pulled off immediately to keep clear of the breakers. 

“The mate then informed me that the bark was the A. A. Eldridge 
from San Francisco, bound for Valparaiso, and that he would return 
for the rest of us. I went to camp and packed up such things as 
could be taken off. But after the boat returned the mate told me 
he would not take the smallest package in the boat, and if our lives 
were saved we ought to be thankful. Upon these conditions I hesi- 
tated about going, but as my son was already on board there was no 
alternative; especially as he, the mate, said he would not return 
again, fearing to lose the little boat. The idea of going to Valpar- 
aiso was out of the question, but I would not be separated from my 
son, and so determined to go, the mate crying out that he would only 
give us five minutes to decide. There was no time to be lost, and 
unavoidably leaving everything behind, we jumped into the frail 
boat; the sea was growing more stormy, and amid the roar of 
breakers, heightened by the thundering of the waves into a cavern, 


1871.] yy OT | [Grayson. 


we pulled out of the cove to the bark. Captain Abbott (her cap- - 
tain) treated us with genuine hospitality, and I shall always remem- 
ber him with grateful feelings. He agreed to land us on the Tres 
Marias Islands. I prevailed upon him to send the boat for some of 
my things left behind which I prized the most, particularly the Natu- 
ral History collections. But when the boat returned nothing could 
be brought off but the two boxes of specimens; the little boat came 
near being stove against the rocks in this last attempt. 

“Thus the expedition was suddenly and unexpectedly brought to 
an end. It was my intention, had we not been wrecked, to have 
spent a much longer time in examining this as well as the adjacent 
Island—but “diis aliter visum.” Darkness had now begun to shut out 
from view the lessening shores, as we sped on our course to the 
Marias. The mountain and clouds were brightly illumined by the 
flames of the burning grass and brush, which had spread in every 
direction, recalling to the imagination the long ago, when the volca- 
noes were in action, and the lurid lava blazed in all its desolation 
over this solitary Island, where it still remains as these convulsions 
have left it, in all its primitive grandeur and its wild solitude. Year 
after year the grass springs up on its hills uncropped by the herd; 
the songs of the birds are only heard by their mates; the fishes 
gambol and sport in the little bays undisturbed, and old ocean, as in 
countless centuries past, still roars and foams upon its lonely shore. 

“In three days we reached the Marias, where we remained four 
days. I made daily excursions in the woods for birds, but found 
nothing new, but what I had collected on a former visit to this 
locality. 

“We sailed in a small schooner for San Blas, in order to get a 
* vessel for Mazatlan, where we arrived in twenty-four hours from the 
Marias, ragged, dirty and without money. This place is noted for the 
unhealthiness of its climate and the tormenting insects that infest it. 
The natives, too, have a badreputation, and it was much against my 
will to go there, but it could not be avoided, and I cannot help but 
feel, from the strange coincidents which had transpired, that a mys- 
terious agency had directed us to this fatal spot, where my beloved 
son should meet with an untimely and most cruel death, by the rude 
hand of some unknown assassin. For what cause this shocking deed 
was committed, and by whom, in this land where the murderer goes 
free, will in all probability forever remain a profound mystery.” 


Grayson.] 298 ~ [June 7, 


List oF Socorro IsLAND BIRDS COLLECTED 
By A. J. Grayson, May, 1867. 


PSITTACID. 


1, Conurus holochlorus var. brevipes Baird. Ann. Lye. 
N. Y., Vol. x, p. 14. “Socorro Parrot.” 

“This parakeet is quite abundant and evidently belongs to this 
locality, which it never leaves; they are to be met with in flocks or 
in pairs. In the mornings they left the cove in which we were en- 
camped, for the higher regions of the interior to feed, returning 
again in the evening to roost. This cove, in which the trees are 
larger and the shade more dense than in other parts of the Island, 
seems to be their favorite resort. I saw them at times walking about 
on the ground beneath these trees, apparently picking up clay or 
gravel; they are remarkable tame, exhibiting no fear in our pres- 
ence. Three cages were soon filled with them, which were caught 
by hand, and their constant whistling for their mates brought many 
of them into camp, perching upon the cages and elsewhere; they 
feed upon a hard nut which they find in the mountain gorges, and 
on account of the inaccessible localities where this fruit grew, I was 
unable to find it. The powerful jaws of this parakeet would indicate 
the fruit to be very hard.” 


TURDIDZ. 


2. Harporhynchus graysoni Baird. Ann. Lyc.N. Y., Vol. 
xX, p-1. “Socorro Thrush; Mocking bird.” 

“Not very abundant, but seems to be well distributed over the Is- 
land. It has all the characteristics of the true mocking bird in its 
habits (Mimus polyglottus). Of solitary disposition, it attacks every 
bird of its own species that approaches its usual haunts. 

“One took up its quarters in our camp, and was certainly 
the tamest bird of this genus I ever saw; he appeared to take 
pleasure in our society, and attacked furiously every bird that 
came near us. He doubtless regarded us as his own property, often 
perching upon the table when we were taking our meals and eating 
from our hands, as though he had been brought up to this kind of 
treatment; at times ascending to the branches over our head, he 
would break forth into loud and mellow song, very thrush like. In 
the still hours of the night while roosting in the branches near us 


1871.] 999 [Grayson. 


he would sometimes utter a few dreamy notes, recalling to mind the 
well known habits of the true mocking bird.” 


FRINGILLIDZ. 


3. Pipilo carmani Lawr. Ann. Lyc. N. Y., Vol. x, p. 7. “So- 
corro Towhee finch.” 

“This is an abundant species, found in all the thickets of de Is- 
land. Many of them took up their abode in our camp, picking up 
crumbs about our feet, as tame as domestic fowls. They delighted in 
bathing in the water we had placed in a basin on the ground for 
their use, and frequent combats took place between them for this 
privilege. 

“It was through the agency of this species that water was dis- 
covered in a locality where we had not the remotest idea of finding 
it, and for this providential service, he was a welcome visitor and a 
privileged character. 

“T found them at times feeding upon small seeds of plants; but 
more frequently on the ground scratching up the dry leaves in search 
of insects. ‘Their notes are rather feeble, resembling slightly, in this as 
well as habits and general appearance, their congener of the East- 
ern States (P. erythrophthalmus). 

“From those examined, I found that the breeding season was near 
at hand.” 


TROGLODYTIDZ. 


4. Troglodytes insularis Baird. Ann. Lyc. N. Y., Vol. x, 
p- 8. “Socorro wren.” 

“This busy little wren is the most common bird I met with upon 
the Island, and everywhere its cheerful song may be heard in the. 
trees or among the brambles and rocks. Like all the birds peculiar’ 
to this Island it is very tame. I often saw it feeding upon dead land 
crabs, and I may here remark that all the birds inhabiting the Island, 
with the exception of doves and parrots, subsist more or less upon 
crustacea.” 


COLUMBIDZE. 


5. 4Zenaidura graysoni Baird, Ann. Lyc. N. Y., Vol. x, p. 17. 
“Solitary dove.” 

“Of all the birds I met with on the Island, these seemed to be the 
most lonely; not a flock or even a pair were ever seen together. 


Grayson.] 300 ~. [June 7, 


They are remarkably tame, perhaps more so than any bird of this 
order. One was captured by hand as it came into our camp and 
perched upon the rude table on which I was at work; its melan- 
choly look appeared to be in keeping with the solitude of, and its 
sombre plumage corresponding with the grey brush and brown vol- 
canic rock composing its wild home. In form and appearance, when 
alive, it resembles the common turile dove. 

“The first specimen seen and captured was by my son, Edward 
Grayson, whose name this evidently new species should bear, not for 
this discovery alone, but for the assistance often rendered in making 
my collections, and more particularly on this expedition, in which he 
was indefatigable, even to enthusiasm, in aiding its progress as well 
as the advancement of science, in the course of which he came to 
an untimely death.” . 

6. Chameepelia pallescens Baird. “Little Ground dove.” 

“This is a very common species on Socorro Island, as well as Tres 
Marias and main land, from whence they may have wandered to this 
spot, where they continue to breed and remain permanently.” 


STRIGIDZ. 


7. Micrathene whitneyi (Cooper). “Socorro Owl.” 

“Remarks. Iris bright yellow. Tarsus and toes dull yellow and 
eovered thinly to the end of toes with hair like feathers. Bill dark 
bluish, the tip and inner edge of upper mandible white. Tarsus 
short and claws very sharp and delicate. 

“Three specimens of this handsome little owl (perhaps the least of 
the entire genus) were captured. The first was caught by my son 
among the thick growth of trees that surrounds our camp, who came 
running into camp, saying ‘here is the prettiest little owl we have 
ever seen.’ It was caught with a running noose attached to the end 
of a long rod and slipped over the head of the unsuspecting day 
dreamer. Nearly all the birds were captured in this way. Contents 
of stomach, bits of small land crabs.” 


MNIOTILTIDA. 


gs. Parula insularis Lawr. “Warbler.” 

“REMARKS. This bird seems to be identical with the Tres Marias 
species, and is quite common on the Socorro. Is a little larger than 
the Marias bird.” 


| 1871.) 301 [Grayson. 


FALCONID. 


9. Buteo borealis var. montanus Nutt. “Western Red Tailed 
- Hawk.” 

“This is the only hawk found upon the island, and here it is quite 
common, being a constant resident, rearing its young, and subsisting 
exclusively upon land crabs, which they find in great abundance, 
and an easy prey. ‘Their claws are much blunted, doubtless caused 
by the frequent contact with the hard shell of these crustacea. ‘This, 
and the nicht heron, aye the only large landbirds found upon the 


Socorro Island.” 
ARDEIDZ. 


10. Nyctherodius violaceus (Linn.). “Yellow-crowned Night 
Heron.” 

“Upon this remote island, where there is a scarcity of fresh water, 
I was surprised to find this well-known species. Here its natural 
haunts,are entirely wanting. Here there are no lagoons or man- 
grove swamps to skulk in during the day; and the croaking of frogs, 
its favorite prey, is not heard. Allis dry, and destitute of such lo- 
calities suited to the nature of fresh water birds. I saw solitary ones 
in the day time perched upon the rocks in the interior of the island, 
and on one or two occasions, were started from the dry grass, where 
they were concealed. Hardly a night passed that I did not hear the 
well-known quak of this heron, as they came to our spring to drink. 

“From the appearance of the male bird on examination, and the 
presence of the young one shot, they doubtless breed here to some 
extent. Feed entirely upon crabs.” 


; LARID A. 


ll. Haliplana fuliginosa var. crissalis Baird. “Black Billed 
Tern.” 

“REMARKS. This tern is very numerous in the vicinity of the 
Tres Marias, and the little Island of Isabella, near San Blas, upon 
which they breed. About the Revillagigedo group they are only 
scattering, and replaced by another species—a black tern with a hoary 

_forehead, which are quite numerous in this locality. Although I shot 
some of these from the deck of our vessel, yet I was unable to pro- 
cure a single specimen; because the sea was too rough to launch our 
frail little skiff: I shot many other sea birds which I was unable to 


Grayson.] 302 [June 7, 


get on this account. Had we not been so unfortunate in losing 
our vessel, it was my intention to have visited the rocks and 
islands adjacent to Socorro, for the purpose of collecting the various 
species of sea birds and eggs. But this misfortune put an end to 
further researches in this channel—much, very much indeed, to my 
regret.” 


SULIDZ. 


12. Sula cyanops Sundevall. “Revillagizedo Gannett.” 

“Remarks. Bill pale violet; iris brown; bare space at forehead 
and base of the under mandible, purple red; feet do.; bare space 
around the eye, violet blue ; bare space of chin and throat, jet black ; 
toe nails white ; nostrils indistinct. Contents of stomach, flying fish. 
The ovarium contained nearly developed eggs; the sternum I send 
with the specimen. The plumage of the sexes are about the same, 
immature birds grey on the upper parts, the color of bill and feet, 
paler.” 

“Inhabits the region about the Revillagigedo Isles, have not met 
with it elsewhere. Another species, nearly answering to the de- 
scription of Sula bassana, is found in large numbers about the Tres 
Marias and upon the Island of Isabella; they breed upon the rocks 
and on the sand of this little Island, they lay but one ege—white, 
and nearly the size of a goose egg; both arents assist in in- 
cubation.” ; 

13. Sula piscator (Linn.). “Booby, or Bobo.” 

“Shot near Socorro. A common species in the tropical Pacific. 
Breeds on the rocks.” 

Some species of this genus are very difficult to determine satis- 
factorily ; the Socorro examples were examined by Prof. Baird, who 
states that they are probably the species above named, as they agree 
quite well with the descriptions given of them. 


PELECANIDZ. 


14. Pelecanus fuscus Linn. “Brown Pelican.” 


Among the papers relating to Socorro, I found the description 
given below of a new lizard, by Prof. E. D. Cope ; on communicating 
with him concerning it, he replied that no account of it had ever 
been published, consequently it now appears for the first time. 


1871.] 303 [Brewer. 


DESCRIPTION OF THE CoMMON LIZARD OF SOCORRO. 
By E. D. Cops. 


Uta auriculata Cope. 

Seales above minute, except six carinate, oe rows, of which 
the median of each three is larger than the others; these increase 
towards the rump and diminish anteriorly. Abdominal scales 
smooth, in twenty-three rows. A dorso-lateral, dermal line on each 
side is covered by rounded scales larger than those of the adjacent 
regions. Two pair supranasal plates; four internasals, the posterior 
large as the rest combined, and equal anterior division of the two, 
into which the prefrontals are divided,*and which lie on each side of 
it. Frontal transversely divided. Interparietal larger than parietals, 
a little longer than broad. Temporal region granulated; a crest of 
short acute scales on the ridge of the os quadratum above the large 
tympanum. 

Tatal length (tail reproduced) 6.90 inches; end of muzzle to vent, 
2.90; length of hind foot, .92 inches; muzzle to posterior margin 
tympanum, .70; width cranium at supratympanic crest, .45 inches. 

Color blue above, with eight pairs of black spots between scapular 
and crural region, which are more or less connected across the me- 
dian line. Another series of black spots alternating on the sides. 
A large black crescent on scapulaon each side; gular region cross- 
banded with blackish. 

This is the seventh species of this genus now Ea which all 
belong to the Sonoran district, though two of them, U. ornata Bd. ; 
and U. Stansburiana Bd., Gird., occur in Texas. 


Note. Specimens of the only land mollusk collected at Socorro by Colonel 
Grayson, were submitted through the Smithsonian Institution to Mr. Thos. 
Bland, who determined the species tobe Orthalicus undatus Brug. From the 
note by Col. Grayson on the species found at the Tres Marias, Mr. Bland infers 
it to be the same as that from Socorro. 


Dr. Brewer said that among the birds from Wisconsin, 
purchased of Mr. Kumlien, is a species of Empidonax, 
parent birds with nest and eggs, identified as 4. pusillus by 
Prof. Baird. This species had not before been seen east of 
the Rocky Mountains, over one thousand miles west of the 
locality where it is now found breeding. The differences 


Farlow. ] 304 [June 14, 


in the nest and eggs from those of Hmpidonax Traillii, and 
all other species of the genus, indicate that &. pusillus is a 
good species and not merely a variety of the former. 


Dr. B. Joy Jeffries, by the aid of diagrams, illustrated the 
unity of design in the eyes of animals which he had referred 
to at the preceding meeting; he also explained the causes of 
color-blindness. 


Dr. Farlow exhibited the Alge collected by Mr. Chas. 
Wright, in the lateSan Domingo expedition, thirty-five spe- 
cies, of which twenty-five had been collected by Mr. Wright 
in Cuba also. Dr. Farlow remarked that it was singular that 
among the many specimens of Sargassum no specimen of S. 
bacciferum, the true gulf-weed, was to be found. He also re- 
ferred to the ill-defined characters of this large genus. Tur- 
binaria vulgaris, found also in Jamaica, forms an interesting 
connecting link between Sargassum and Fucus. 


The thanks of the Society were voted to the Trustees of 
the Mt. Auburn Cemetery for the gift of a Trumpeter Swan. 


Section of Microscopy. June 14, 1871. 


Mr. Bicknell in the chair. Nine members present. 


Mr. Bicknell showed some paper cells made by him in a 
very simple manner. A number of layers of card-board of 
the desired thickness are clamped together, and holes are 
bored with a spur-bit through the whole thickness, at a con- 
venient distance apart. The card is then pressed smooth 
and finally cut up. 


Mr. Stodder exhibited a slide containing Stauroneis Stod- 
derii Greenleaf, from Lyman’s Pond, Waltham, collected by 


1871.] f 305 [Dwight. 


Dr. Warren, a diatom which has not before been found out- 
side of New Hampshire and Maine. 

Mr. Greenleaf remarked that his types came from Bemis 
Lake, N. H. 


June 21, 1871. 
The President in the chair. Twenty-nine persons present. 


Mr. W. H. Dall made some remarks on the geography of 
the Aleutian Islands, which have been as yet only imper- 
fectly explored, and stated that an expedition to them in 
charge of the Coast Survey was intended, with which he was 
to be associated. Mr. Dall also referred to the differences 
between the walrus of the Atlantic and Pacific Coasts, which 
he considered as varieties of one species, and described the 
habits and commercial importance of these animals. 


The President read an article on Silica. He showed the 
almost universal presence of this mineral, its beauty under 
many forms, and its great economic value. He exhibited a 
beautiful crystal globe, six inches in diameter, of Japanese 
manufacture, which Mr. Thos. Gaffield had lent him for the 
occasion. 


Dr. Chas. T. Jackson called attention to the occurrence of 
erystal globes in the Druid Mounds of England, which are 
of an oblate-spheroidal form, and about the size of an orange. 
He thought the Druids must have obtained the material from 
Japan or other equally remote place, as no locality for it is 
known nearer England. 


Dr. Thos. Dwight gave a brief account of his work in the 
preparation of the skeleton of the whale for the Society’s 
Museum. 

The whale is an example of the Balenoptera musculus, or Physa- 
lus antiquorum, although there are so many small peculiarities that 
many observers would be inclined to make it a new species. 


PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H. — VOL. XIV. 20 APRIL, 1872. 


Jackson.] 306 [June 21, 


There are sixty-three vertebre, fifteen of which are dorsal. The 
last rib on the right side had an ununited fracture, and many others 
on the same side bore an anomalous protuberance near the head of 
the rib, which was very suggestive of injury. The animal was briefly 
described and thoroughly measured before dissection by Mr. J. A. 
Allen, and drawings were made by Mr. J. H. Blake, both of the 
Museum of Comparative Zoology. These drawings and notes have 
been put very handsomely at my disposal by Mr. Allen. 

The length was 48 ft. The circumference of the head at the eye, 
23 ft. 8 in. The magnitude of the dissection and the decomposed 
state of the carcase, prevented any careful examination of the soft 
parts, but the skeleton is very complete. Both pelvie bones, each 
with a rudimentary femur have been preserved, as well as all of the 
bones of the hyoid apparatus. ; 

It is hoped that the skeleton will be mounted in the course of a few 
months, and it will be minutely described in the Memoirs. 


Dr. C. T. Jackson read the following final report on the 
Frozen Well in Brandon, Vt., in behalf of the committee 
appointed to investigate the phenomenon. 


REPORT ON BRANDON FROZEN WELL. 


Twelve years ago Mr. John H. Blake called the attention of this 
Society to the curious fact of the existence of a well of water in 
Brandon, Vermont, which remained frozen throughout the summer 
months, and a Committee was appointed to make an examination of 
this singular phenomenon. 

Uriah A. Boyden, Esq., of this city generously placed in the hands 
of this Committee the sum of three hundred dollars, to defray the 
expenses of their examination of this matter. The Committee con- 
sists of the following gentlemen: William B. Rogers, John H. Blake, 
Charles T. Jackson, and subsequently Thomas T. Bouvé. 

Owing to other engagements some members of the Committee 
were unable to visit the Frozen Well, but Messrs. Blake and Jackson 
have steadily devoted their attention to the subject, Mr. Blake 
performing by far the largest share of the work,while he was resident 
in Brandon in charge of his iron and paint mines. 

The first explorations made by the Committee were on the 10th of 
June, 1859, and they continued each year to visit and examine the 
Frozen Well and the surrounding country for six years, and they 


1871.] 307 {Jackson. 


made a very full report of their explorations to the Society, which re- 
port is published in the number of the Proceedings for the month of 
May, 1862, pages seventy-two to eighty-seven. 

They would gladly have closed their examination at that time, but 
owing to the prediction made by a very eminent man of science, 
Prof. Loomis, that the ice would soon cease to form in the Brandon 
well, it was thought best to wait a few years to see if this prediction 
would come to pass. We have now to report that for twelve years 
the ice has remained in the Brandon well during the hot months of 
summer, and that notwithstanding the openings we have made in 
the soil, and a tunnel into the gravel bed near to the well, giving 
more free access to warm surface water, the ice does not diminish in 
the well. 

Even the cutting away of the Hogback gravel hill nearly to a 
level with the ground around the well, has not caused the heat to 
penetrate sufficiently to melt the ice hoop that clings to the stones 
just above the surface of the water, and it remains as it was when 
we first visited the place. It seems that the wave of heat is still un- 
able to overcome the intense cold of the gravel bed. 

Among the suggestions thrown out by some who have attempted to 
solve the problem of the frozen well is the idea, that the water dis- 
solves something from the rocks that makes it a freezing mixture. 
This conjecture is disproved by the chemical analysis of the water. 


CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF THE WATER OF BRANDON FROZEN WELL. 
By C. T. JACKSON. 


One wine gallon of this water contains 25.2 grains of solid matter, which 


was resolved into grs. 
MECcraOleTMALbeR ns te ee) es wee ne mt eee ae nOLOU 
Minaeralecaliwre ce . oh NT get etna: VSS ern wnat 8 FAO 
25.20 


Of this, 2.8 grains forms an adhesive crust on the capsule in which the evapora- 
tion took place, and consists of.carbonates of lime, magnesia and iron, derived 
from their bi-carbonates. 5 
The water was found to contain bi-carbonates of lime, magnesia and iron, sul- 
phate of soda and a little chloride of calcium and of sodium. 
There is nothing in its composition that will explain its freezing any more 
readily than other water. 


Others have imagined that electricity had something to do with the 
freezing, taking the idea probably from the fact that electricity 
favors, if it does not actually cause, hail. 


Edwards.] 3 0 S {J une 2, 


The difference of the cases is very decided. In the atmosphere 
there may be, and doubtless are, highly electrified particles electrified 
with the same kind of electricity so as to act as repellants to each 
other, and thus is caused expansion of the air, absorption of latent 
heat, and consequent cooling, so as to cause moisture to congeal into 
ice. Liquid water, being a pretty good conductor of electricity, could 
not be thus operated upon by electricity, and so no freezing could re- 
sult even if the water should be electrified. In order to settle the 
question as to the existence of currents of electricity, both Mr. Saw- 
yer and myself ranged squares around the well and tested the direc- 
tion of the magnetic needle, and found no difference or local varia- 
tion, showing that no perceptible electric current was taking place 
in the well or in the soil around it. 

We are therefore forced to recur to our original explanation, that 
the gravel bed was frozen by the cold of former rigorous winters, and 
that the wave of heat has not yet been able to overcome that cold. 
Whether it ever will do it is a problem to be solved only by time, 
but we think our numerous pits sunk into the gravel bed will hasten 
the thawing. 

Since your Committee reported the results of their former exam- 
ination, Mr. Boyden sent Mr. Sawyer, a civil engineer, to make a 
topographical survey of the premises, and to sink some new shafts 
around the frozen well. Mr. Boyden has also himself visited the 
locality and made a careful examination, and can suggest to the 
Committee no new or additional experiments or researches, and it is 
therefore the wish of the Committee to close their examination, and to 
ask to be discharged from further consideration of the subject. 

The expenses attending the examinations of the Brandon frozen 
well from June 10, 1859 to the completion of our labors, was $270.07, 
there remaining a balance of the $300 of $29.83, which was re- 
turned to Mr. Boyden, with a detailed account of our expenditures. 


‘Mr. Bouvé presented the report of the Committee on the 
Walker Prizes. Three papers had been received. A first 
prize was awarded to Prof. Albert N. Prentiss, of Ithaca, 
N. Y., and a second to Mr. Daniel Milliken, of Hamilton, 
Ohio. The report was accepted. 


Mr. Sanborn called attention to the gifts upon the table, 
among them the skull of a walrus, presented by-Capt. E. T. 


1871.] 309 [Wilder. 


Fish, for which the thanks of the Society were voted to the 
donor. 


A paper was read by title “Observation on the Surface 
Geology of North Carolina, by L. 8. Burbank.” 


INTERMEMBRAL Homotoairs. By Burr G. WixpeEr, M.D. 


Continued from p. 188. 
IV. THE MORPHOLOGICAL UNIMPORTANCE OF 
NUMERICAL COMPOSITION. 


The familiar fact that with most Mammalia the pollical and primal 
phalanges are only two in number, while the other digits and dactyls 
possess three, forms the chief difficulty with those who are asked to 
consider pollex the meketrope of quintus and primus that of minimus; 
and it forms the only difficulty with those who have already recog- 
nized the fallacy of the objections generally urged upon the ground 
of the size and natural attitude of the parts; evidently then, the 
removal of this difficulty is of the utmost importance. 

Here, as generally throughout this paper, the facts and conclusions 
will be given with reference to the Mammalia; partly because that 
class has afforded me the most material, but chiefly because the 
three grand difficulties already mentioned are especially manifest in 
the higher vertebrates; and I am convinced that they never would 
have prevented our recognition of meketropy in the membra, had we 
been lizards or turtles instead of primates. 

It cannot be denied that some significance must attach to numer- 
ical composition of organs; since, aside from the symbolic character 
which many believe them to possess, the very constancy of numbers 
is a remarkable fact in Natural History. But for the general rule 
that the mammalian cervix consists of seven vertebre, it is prob- 
able that no effort would be made (as by Thomas Bell, Trans. Zool. 
Soce., vol. 1)to show that Bradypus tridactylus has but seven, instead of 
nine, as believed by Turner and Owen; and there would be nothing 
strange in the fact that Cholepus Hoffmanni has but six cervical verte- 
bree; on the other hand, the value of this as even a generic character 
seems to be destroyed by the fact, that another species of the same 
genus (C. didactylus) has the usual number. 

Again, it is stated by Mosely and Lankester, that the mole is the 
only placental mammal with eight intermaxillary teeth; and the ex- 


Wilder.} 310 [June 21, 


ception is equally inexplicable with those of the vertebre, since that 
animal shows comparatively little more affinity with the marsupials, 
than the sloth shows to the birds. 

Again, it is stated by Argyll (204, 223) that the number of tail 
and wing feathers is constant throughout the Trochilide, although 
430 species are already known. 

Finally, the constancy in the number of mammalian digits is so ab- 
solute, that not only do we exclude from the category all “sixth fin- 
gers and toes,’’ but we give no heed to the ossicle which projects from 
the ulnar border of the carpus in Chelone (63, 1, 173) and in many 
Cetacea (63, 2, 427), and call it ‘‘pisiform,” although it looks as much 
like a digital metacarpal as some which are generally accepted as 
such; and, indeed, so convinced are we that five is the maximum 
normal number of these parts, that we hardly wonder to find that the 
required expansion of the manus with the mole and the Yapock opos- 
sum is gained, not by the addition of a sixth digit, but by the exces- 
sive development of a carpal ossicle. 

We must admit, therefore, that numerical composition means 
something; perhaps more in some cases than in others; how much it 
means is difficult to determine; probably, however, not as much as 
relative normal position. 

The following citations from authors are sufficient by show the 
present obscurity of this subject. 

‘The examination of the skeleton (of fishes) has led to the conelu- 
sion that the number of vertebra is another character of great 
importance for the distinction of families; but whether it has any 
bearing of still greater import, cannot be exactly determined at pres- 
ent. 

Owen says, (63, 1, 42), “The number of trunk vertebrz is useful 
as a specific character in Icthyology.” 

Agassiz writes as follows (200, 4, 64), respecting the zoological im- 
portance of this attribute with radiates; ‘“ I would remind the reader . 
of the little value which numerical differences undoubtedly have in 
this question, notwithstanding the constancy of the number of parts 
in most of the radiates ; for though the number five is the typical 
number among echinoderms, there are crinoids and starfishes and 
even echinoids, with four and six spheromeres, and others with 
an unusually large number; and though the number four and its 


1 Gunther; Cat. of Acanth. Fishes, 1861, Preface. 
\ 


1871.1 811 [ Wilder. 


multiples are the typical numbers of acalephs, we find those which 
have five or six spheromeres and other numerical combinations. We 
need not therefore hesitate to compare an Aurelia with a quadripar- 
tite and an Echinarachinus with a quinquepartite arrangement of 
parts;” again, (200, 4, 379) ‘‘as soon as we can free ourselves from 
the belief that histological complication and structural differentiation 
are positive tests of homological relationships, and as soon as we al- 
low full weight to embryological evidence, the close affinities of the 
echinoderms and the other classes of radiates becomes self-evident.” 

Spencer uses the following very suggestive language, which I ac- 
cept as true, omitting his cndieaan as to the cause of the superin- 
duced segmentation, (299, 2, 110); “The parts composing the 
supposed archetypal vertebre” (of Owen) “are constant neither in 
their number nor in their relative” (natural) ‘‘position, nor in their 
modes of ossification, nor in the separateness of their several individ- 
ualities when present; . . . . everything goes to show that the 
seemental composition which characterizes the apparatus of external 
relation in most vertebrates is functionally determined or adaptive.” 

Finally, Thomas Bell remarks, ‘‘the laws which regulate the nu- 
merical variations in the different systems of organs in an animal, 
are perhaps less defined or at least less understood than those which 
relate to many other conditions of their existence.” } 

Coming now to our special point, we may enumerate the morphical 
relations of the digits as follows, taking the medius for an example, 
since there has never been a doubt respecting its homology with ter- 
tius, and both these are present in every known manus. 

1. Its special or plural homology with the medius of other Mam- 
malia. (Fig. 2, A-B) 

2. Its single, serial and longal homology or mekesyntropy, with its 
fellow-digits of the same manus. (C-D). 

3. Its single and vertical homology, hypsetropy with the medius of 
an individual of the opposite sex. (H-F). 

4. Its single and lateral homology, platetropy with the medius of 
the opposite side. (G-H). 
5. Its single and longal homology, meketropy, with the middle 

dactyl, tertius. (G-I). 

Now although all these five relations are between a single digit 

and another digit or dactyl, yet the relations of the several regions 


1Trans. Zool. Soc., vol. 1, p. 183, 1883. 


Wilder.] 312 [June 21, 


or surfaces of the digits compared are quite distinct, as shown by the 
figure. In plural homology and in mekesyntropy, the premembral sur- 
face of the one corresponds to that of the other, the dorsal surface of 
the one to that of the other as if both occupied the same place, or 
were merely superposed, as with geometrical comparisoiiis of similar 
figures; but with the three 

oo _ antitropical homologies, 
corresponding parts look 
in opposite directions; so 
that with platetropy, the 
right and left digits are 
as if placed base to base, 
or tip to tip, with hypse- 
tropy as if placed back to 
back or palm to palm, 
and with meketropy as if 
placed side by side; but 
the two contiguous sur- 
faces then correspond. In 
case the normal position 
of the membra should be 
determined to be other 
than it is here assumed 
to be, a corresponding 
change would be made 
with the surfaces com- 
pared together; for in- 
stance, if the digits were 
made to point backward 
and the dactyls forward, 


am 1X | (1) their bases and tips would 
(4 rf VW I) < be related meketropical- 

xs mathe (\, , Aaa ly instead of platetropi- 

Fig. 8. cally, while their opposite 


sides would be related 
platetropically instead of meketropically ; and although this would 
be a matter of little consequence as regards a single and simple part 
like a digit, yet when we have to compare such parts as tarsus and 
carpus, and muscular organs, misunderstanding can be avoided only 
by regarding the membra as always in the same normal position. 


1871.] 813 [ Wilder. 


Now since these five relations above described, however they may 
differ among themselves as to the particular regions of two parts 
_which are compared together, are all relations of homology, it may 
probably be taken for granted that whatever criteria are accepted for 
one kind of homology, are equally applicable to the rest; excepting, 
of course, the tropical relations which depend upon the position of 
the parts with reference to the axis of the body. If this is granted, 
then, we are entitled to employ the arguments used in deciding any 
one of the relations upon which there is now no dispute, in determin- 
ing those now under consideration. 

For instance, the tertius of a seal is determined to be the plural 
homologue of the middle dactyl of a rhinoceros, not from its size 
or function, but from its relative position in the pes; the tertius of 
man is held to be the meketrope of the medius, from their similar rel- 
ative position, although the one is a short dactyle, and the other is 
the longest digit; again, the primus of man is held to be homolo- 
gous with the primus of a bat, although they differ not only in size 
and function, but in their apparent relative position, since the human 
primus is on the inner border of the pes, and that of the bat becomes 
the “ outer toe” through the complete eversion of the skelos; we here 
see that relative normal position is of superior morphical value to 
size, function, and natural attitude; finally, the homology between 
the human primus and that of an orang has never been questioned, 
although the latter often, if not generally, consists of but a single 
phalanx; the homology between the minimus of an ordinary mammal 
and that of a bat has never been denied, although the latter rarely, 
if ever, consists of the usual number of phalanges; no one has even 
doubted the entire homology of the five digits of many tortoises, (Ow., 
63, 1, p. 173) with those of the Mammalia, as is shown by the use of 
the same names (pollex, etc.,) yet none of the former have more than 
two phalanges; a like discrepancy exists with the birds; and, if, as I 
am willing to admit, it is better to confine the comparisons to the 
Mammalia, an even more striking case is offered by many Cetacea, 
where the digits are enumerated from one to five, (or styled pollex, 
ete.,) and where the subdivisions of the digits are invariably called 
phalanges, although in some cases, as in the round-headed dolphin, 
(Globiocephalus melas), the medius may possess eight and the index 
twelve of them, and although the form, function, and attitude of the 
entire manus be unlike that of man. 

It appears therefore, that in the determination of all kinds of ho- 


Wilder.] | 314 [June 21, 


mologies, the relative normal position has been found to be of greater 
morphical value than size, than function, than natural attitude, and 
finally than even numerical composition; and yet, when we ask anat- 
omists to consider the other evidences of meketropy, which are pre- 
sented by the development and structure of the body, and show that 
even the adult membra offer no difficulties in their proximal 
portions, and that in the embryo, no difference of size or segmen- 
tation exists in the manus and pes, they hold to the syntropical com- 
parison, partly because of its antiquity and general acceptation; 
partly because of the similarity of pollex and primus in that mor- 
phological anomaly, the human body; partly because in the natu- 
ral attitude of the manus with quadrupeds, the pollex becomes the 
inner digit like the primus; but chiefly because with many Mam- 
malia pollex and primus differ in numerical composition from the 
other digits and dactyls : and this in spite of the fact that for the 
determination of every other case of homology, all these considera- 
tions have been set aside in favor of the single character, relative 
normal position. | 

In reference to this question, some other facts and arguments 
should be considered. 

1. That with most members of the group called Perissodactyla, 
(Ow., 62, 2, 283; Fl., 71, 3,) including the existing genera Rhinodceros, 
Hyrax, Tapirus, and Equus, and many extinct genera, the pollex and 
minimus, the primus and quintus are wanting,!so that, were the prob- 
lem to be decided for them alone, no objection would arise respecting 
these outer digits and dactyls; and the argument that such a question 
cannot be decided upon evidence drawn from a single group, applies 
with equal force to the consideration of the Mammalia alone out of 
all the vertebrate branch; and, as has been already stated, the objec- 
tion derived from the numerical composition of certain digits and 
dactyls, would never have arisen among the members of the lower 
classes of vertebrates. | 

2. That it is not yet determined whether the so-called pollical 
metacarpal (4 pollicis) and primal metatarsal (4 primi) should not be 
regarded rather as proximal phalanges of the pollex and primus, as 
Oken (284, Par. 2382) and Maclise (23, 663) are inclined to believe; 
this view is not obviously inconsistent with the observations of Thom- 
son and Humphrey (305) upon the mode of ossification of these parts, 
and Flower admits (71, 255) that the question is not decided. 


‘ Tapirus retains the minimus and Hyrax the minimus and a rudimentary pollex. 


1871.) 315 [Wilder. 


3. That in a few cases, the human pollex has consisted of three 
phalanges, and so resembled the other digits and the quintus; such a 
case figured by Annandale,! who adds that he has met with others; 
Dubois describes a case? which is referred to by Fort?; and in the 
Cabinet of the Boston Society for Medical Improvement, is a plaster 
cast of another case which came under the observation of Dr. B. E. 
Cotting, and was described by Dr. J. B. S. Jackson.* Dr. Fort men- 
tions other instances of an unusual increase or decrease in the num- 
ber of digital phalanges. 

4, That all the digits and dactyls may possess less than three 
phalanges, as in Chrysochloris, while in Cetacea all of them may pos- 
sess more than that number. 

5. That in many Mammalia the number of minimal and quintal 
phalanges is less than three; which removes, so far as those species - 
are concerned, the objection to homologizing minimus and quintus 
with primus and pollex; the following list gives the species, the num- 
ber of phalanges, and the authority for the statement; no reference 
is made to the many species in which the minimus and quintus are 
wholly wanting, or represented only by a metacarpal or metatarsal. 
The Cetecea are enumerated in a separate table, since their digital 
phalanges generally vary from the usual number with Mammalia. 


POLLEX. 
Ateles. Sp the eae : ‘ fe Lond. Wik (250: 
Colobus. . penive : ; - sul ss ss 
Piaget e ely dee: el, we Hum., 36, 5. 
INDEX. 
Perodicticus. . 5 eae El, 71, 258. 
Arctocebus, : ‘ ‘ weg Miy., 276, 325. 
Cheiroptera (generally). . . 2 Fl., 71, 262. 
Cirysochloris.:. . «os 2 es Joutte of Anat. and Phys. 
MEDIUS. 
Chrysochloris. BUM sl alek Set! hg a trate Z ourn. of Anat. and Phys., 
Enns a ea Fl., 71, 262. 
ANNULARIS, 
Cheiroptera, (generally). Sh LC ay F1., 71, 262. 


1Malformation of fingers and toes; p. 29; pl. ii, fig. 19. 
2 Archives de Medicin, Apr., 1826. 

8 Difformités des doigts, p. 59, 1869. 

4 Catalogue of Museum of Med. Imp. Soc., p. 871. 


Wilder.] 316 {June 21, 


MINIMUS. 

Cheiroptera ete wig Fi., 71, 262. 
Chrysochloris. al oy Aare pan eR Miv., J. of A. and P., 2, 133. 
Rhynchocyon. . : : : ene gate Ow., 63, 2, 890. 
Hyrax dorsalis. 2 Brie Fl., 71, 298. 
Periodontes (Dasypus) sexcinctus. 2 Ow., 63, 2, ee BY (1 ae 
Megatherum Americanum. yom Ow., 63, 2, 412 
Myrmecophaga jubata. . 2 Ow., 63, 3, 410. 

didactyla. 2 Bip; 7, 275. 


Table giving the number of digital phalanges with some species of Cetacea. 


Species. Pe i, 1 ee VE Authority. 
Balena mysticetus 0 3 4 3 2 Esch. and Reinh: Ray 
Soc. Mems., 129. 
Balenoptera Bonerensis 0 4 3 2 2 ? aoe Zool. Soc., 1867, 
« musculus o | 5 | 6 | 7 | 4 | Lillej. Ray Soc. Mems. 260. 
ce laticeps 0 3 6 5 2 ES sanity? OO he Bitte zea PM, 
6 rostrata 0 t 7 6 3 ee * ce ie 
66 6é 0 3 v6 6 4 of 6c (t3 6c 
Physalus antiquorum 0 4 5 5 3 Flow. Proc. Zool. Soc., 
? 1864, 413. 
CG £6 0 2 7 6 83 | Flow. Proc. Zool. Soc. 
1864, 418. 
As sibbaldii. 0 4 5 5 3 Flow. Proc. Zool. Soc. 
1865, 478. 
Sibbaldius ? 0 38 3 6 3 Flow. Proc. Zool. Soc. 
1864, 398. 
Catodon macrocephalus 3 4 4 4 3 Gray, P. Z. S. 1864, 288. 
Physeter aI 3) 5 4 3 Fl. T. Z.S. d pl. 61. 
«« — (euphysetes) simus} 3 6 4 3 3 2E Zi Seava ieee 
Euphysetes ? OF rt 5 5 4 Burmeister, P WA S., 1865, 
Pp 
“6 grayil 2 5 4 ea | aa Ou T. Z. Soc. vi., “—p. 
Delphinus orea 2 6 4 3 2 as Ray Soc. Mems., 
G6 sinensis 0 6 5 2 1 Flow. T. Z. S., vii., 158. 
"e leucas i 5 4 3 3 aoe Ray Soc. Mems., | 
a griseus 2 8 7 2 1 one qu. in Ray Mems., | 
Globiocephalus ( ?) 45 | 14 | 10 3 2 none Ray Soc. Mems., | 
fs mel as 8 |12 | 8 | 2 | 0 | Flower, 71, 271. 
Clymene similis 2 ii 3 7 0 Gray, P. Z. S. 1868, 148. | 
Inia Geostoy ensis 0 5 4 2 2 (2) Ee ZSe va pple 25. 
Orca (?) 2 7 4 3 2 aa Ray Soe. Mems., 

« gladiator 1 66 | 4 3 i wee Ray Soc. Mems., 

««  schlegellii 1 5 3 2 1 Tales, Ray Soc. Mems., 
Pseudorea crassidens 2 7 6 8 2 to Ray Soe. Mems., 
Pontoporia Blainvillii 0 6 6 3 2 Burm. P. Z. §. 1867, 487. 
Hyperedon rostratus 1 6 5 2 1 


Lillej. Ray Soc. Mems. My 
248, 


1 Mystacina has three according to Tomes. 

2 Hyraz capensis has the usual number. 

3 These digits were articulated artificially, so the observer had some doubts re- 
specting the number of phalanges. 

4The figure (from a photograph) does not show clearly whether there is a pha- 
lanx attached to the metarpal pollicis. 

5 The left pollex had three phalanges. 

6 The index may have had seven and the minimus two. 


1871.] 317 [ Wilder, 


The foregoing tables are suggestive of some other considerations 
bearing more or less directly upon intermembral homologies. 

1. From the natyre of the parts, especially in Cetacea, and also 
from the admissions of some observers, it is not always easy to ascer- 
tain the number of digital phalanges; it appears also, that the possi- 
ble morphical value of such information has not always been recog- 
nized by observers, by reason of the slight telical importance of the 
individual phalanges; but on the other hand, some have been so ac- 
curate as to note a difference in the numerical composition of the 
same digit upon the two sides of the body: (as with the Globioceph- 
alus described by Reinhardt). 

2. The distinctions between metacarpals and phalanges, in respect 
to length and mobility, which exist with the higher Mammalia, do not 
appear with the Cetacea; with Glob. swineval, according to Macallis- 
ter, (P. Z. 8., 1867, p. 481), the exact ‘number of phalanges could 
not be reckoned,” and the only synovial capsule was at the omos; 
and in describing the armus of Balena mysticetus, Eschricht and 
Reinhardt state that the minimus ‘is in direct contact with the 
ulna,’ . . . and they are led to suppose that ‘‘ not only the car- 
pus and digits, but also the bones of the forearm have all been 
formed in the beginning from one continuous cartilage, and that, at 
all events, we cannot here expect fixed or quite immutable relations 
between individual bones.” (Ray Soc. Mem., p. 131.) 

3. While there seems to be no objection to admitting the special 
homology of the cetacean digits with those of other Mammalia, there 
appears to be no way of determining the special homology of individ- 
ual phalanges even within the Cetacea themselves; for, allowing a 
margin for inaccuracies of observation and statement, there is never- 
theless a considerable discrepancy in this respect between members 
not only of the same order and family, but also of the same genus 
(Delphinus, for instance) and species (Physalus antiquorum). 

4. The taxonomic value of the numerical composition of the 
digits must be regarded as very low with the Cetacea; it may be said 
that this conclusion would not necessarily apply to the other Mamma- 
lia, but it would not be easy to prove this, since they are members of 
one and the same class; the Cetacea do not present exactly the case 
of the Cheiroptera, because the usual number, three, is never ex- 
ceeded in this group, and although it is not now certain which of 
the phalanges is missing, yet there appears to be no reason why this 
matter may not some time be decided; but I see no way of ascertain- 


Wilder.] 318 [June 21, 


ing the special homology between the twelve indical phalanges of 
Globiocephalus melas and the three of an ordinary mammal. 

5. It might be thought that such lack ofsspecial homology be- 
tween the cetacean digits and that of other Mammalia, indicated the 
propriety of regarding the former as forming a subclass; but this at 
once brings up another consideration. ; 


NUMBER OF VERTEBRA. 


The number of vertebre (excepting the cervical), differs greatly 
among the ordinary Mammalia, as is stated in all works upon com- 
parative anatomy; from various authorities, chiefly Owen, 63, 2, and 
Flower, 71, I have prepared a table showing the number of cervical, 
thoracic, lumbar, sacral and caudal vertebree of many species of 
Mammalia, (105 species representing 91 genera) ; the cervical 
vertebree are seven in all excepting in Manatus (6) and Cholepus 
Hoffmanni (6) and Bradypus tridactylus (9); but there is evidently 
room for different interpretations of the facts in these cases. 

The same is the case with the enumeration of the sacral and cau- 
dal vertebre, but the variations in their number are so great and so 
generally recognized that a tabular statement is not required in this 
connection. J wish here, however, to-ask whether the immense 
elongation of the tail in many species is primordial or secondary; 
and if the latter, whether the increase is by gradual development of 
new segments or by the increase in size of some which are formed 
all together at the front; upon the answer to this question, might be 
based a discrimination between the segments which immediately 
succeed the sacrum, and have the structure of vertebra, and those 
more simple cylinders of bone which have no claim to the title of 
vertebra beyond their serial relation to the former. 

In any case, the numerical variation of a peripheral part like the 
tail, would not have a greater morphical significance than that of the 
phalanges. 3 

But with the so-called trunk vertebre the case is very different; 
they are the central portion of the skeleton, whether from side to side, 
from back to belly, from head to tail; and there is no obvious reason 
why their number should not be constant, or at least as much so as 
that of the cervical vertebre, since the degrees of mobility required 
of the latter in different species, are far more numerous and decided 
than appear to be required from the trunk; yet no such constancy 


1871.] 819 [Wilder. 


exists, even with species of the same family and genus, as is shown 
by the following table of the thoracic and lumbar vertebra. The 
conflicting statements of different authorities may be due to a differ- 
ent interpretation of facts, but I am quite prepared to suppose that in 
some cases, really individual differences existed between the speci- 
mens examined. 


Table showing the number of trunk-veriebra with Mammalia.1 


LEMURIDZ. 
De IDE 

Tarsius spectrum 13 6 19 Owen. 
Perodicticus Potto 16 6 22 “(or 15-7,—22). 
Stenops gracilis 15 ¢ 24 ee 

« tardigradus 16 8 24 ss 
Otolicnus peli 13 7 20 Gs 

ee crassicaudatus 13 6 19 + 
Lichanotus Indri 13 8 21 “(or 12-9,—21). 
Loris 14 9 23 Miy. (or 15-9,—24). 
Cheiromys madagascariensis 18 6 19 Owen. 
Arctocebus 15 ? Mivart 
Nycticebus 16 8 24 uD 
Hapalemur 12 7 19 a 
Microcebus pusillus 13 7 20 { 
Cheirogaleus millii 13 7 20 cs 
Lemur (?) 13 6 19 Owen 

CARNIVORA. 
D. ibe 

Canis (lupus, rufus and familiaris) 13 7 20 Owen. 
Ursus (generally) 14 6 20 oe 

“«< Jabiatus 15 5 20 “0 
Hyena ees and crocuta 15 5 20 a 
Felis (generally) 13 7 20 «6 
Procyon lotor 14 6 20 Flower. 
Nasua 14 6 20 ce 
Meles 15 5 20 Gh 
Phoca greenlandica. 15 5 20 Owen (or 14, 5,—19), 
Stenorrhynchus serridens 15 5 20 sf 
Otaria r 15 5 20 Flower. 
Crystophora 15 5 20 fs 
Callorrhinus ursinus 15 5 20 Allen, J. A. 
EKumetopias Stelleri 15 5 20 a6 
Putoriuserminius . 14 6 20 Owen. 
Mustela zibellina 14 6 20 os 
Trichecus rosmarus 15 5 20 GG 
Mephitis 16 6 22 
Mellivora 14 4. 18 


1 The materials are drawn chiefly from four works; Owen, 638, 2; Flower, 71; 
Mivart, Osteology of the Insectivora, Journ. of Anat. and Phys.; and Mivart, Ost. 
of Lemuridz, Proc. Zool. Soc., Dec. 12, 1867. 


Wilder.] | 320 [June 21 


INSECTIVORA. 
Dy L. 
Hrinaceus 15 6 21 | Flower. 
Talpa europza 16 6 22 a 
Sorex 15 6 21 Mivart (or 138-5—18). 
Centetes 19 5 24 Owen. 
Tupaia 13 3) 18 Flower 
Macroscelices 13 7 20 Owen 
Chrysochloris 19 38° | 22 Flower 
Potomogale 16 5 21 Mivart. 
Echinops 16 6 22 “© (or 17-5—22). 
Rhynchocyon 13 8 21 “ (quot. Peters). 
Gymunura 15 5 20 a 
Scalops 14 5 19 eS 
Urotrichus 13 7 20 at 
Myogale 13 6 19 “(or 14-5---19). 
Galeopithecus 1 14 5 19 « 
es 14'| 6 20 Owen (or 13-7—20). 
CHEIROPTERA. 
D. | L. 
Vespertilio murinus 12 7 iW) Owen. 
Pteropus fuscus 14 5 19 es 
ARTIODACTYLA. _ 
D. L. 
Sus scrofa 13 6 19 Owen. 
Dicotyles 14 5 19 sie 
Hippopotamus amphibius 15 4 19 6 
Camelus bactrianus 12 7 19 ee 
««  dromedarius 12 7 19 a4 
Auchenia 12 7 19 ee 
Bos taurus 13 6 19 He 
“ europeeus 14 5 19 yo 
“¢ americanus 15 4 19 « 
Moschus moschiferus 14 5 19 G3 
Ovis 18 6 19 af | 
Cervus tarandus 14 5 19 “ 
Camelopardalis giraffa 14 5 19 fe 
Antelope equina 14 6 20 of | 
Chousingha 18 5 18 2 
PERISSODACTYLA. 
D. L. 
Equus caballus 19 5 24 Owen. 
“¢ zebra 18 6 24 as 
« quagga 19 6 25 “ 
« asinus 18 5 23 as 
Tapirus americanus 18 5 23 ¢ 
Rhinocerus indicus 19 3 22 of 
Elephas indicus 2 20 3 23 a 
Hyrax capensis 22 8 80 * 


1 The place of this genus appears yet undetermined. 
* Huxley (78) and Gill regard this genus as forming a distinct order. 


1871.] 321 [ Wilder. 


RODENTIA. 
: . D. L. 
Hystrix cristata 15 4 19 Owen. 
«¢  alopha 14 5 19 “s 
Lepus timidus 12 7 19 e 
Castor fiber A 15 4 19 WG 
Fiber zibethicus 13 3 16 Flower. 
Capromys 17 6 23 oh 
Loncheres 17 8 25 < 
Hydromys chrysogaster 14 7 21 Owen. 
Myoxus 13 7 20 Cuvier. 
BRUTA 
IDE ee 
Dasypus peba 10 5 15 Owen. 
Bradypus 17 3 20 Flower. 
“< 15 5 20 as 
“4 tridactylus 16 3 19 Owen. 
Manis 13 5 18 Flower. 
“«  pentadactyla 13 4 17 Owen. 
Myrmecophaga jubata 15 3 18 o 
Orycteropus capensis 13 8 21 a 
Megatherium 16 3 19 cs 
Cyclothurus 15 2 17 Flower. 
MARSUPIALIA. 
DA | aE 
Most genera 13 6 19 Owen. 
Phascolomys wombat 15 4 19 ae 
us latifrons 13 6 19 Flower. 
Phascolarctos i 8 19 a 
Petaurus macrurus 12 7 19 as 


After making due allowances for differences in the interpretation 
of facts by different observers, the preceding tables are very sug- 
gestive. 

1. ‘The different groups are seen to be unlike as regards the con- 
stancy of the vertebral formula; the adherence to 20, among the Car- 
nivora (with but two exceptions so far as I know) is as startling as is 
the adherence to 7 with the cervical vertebre; the number 19 is 
equally characteristic of the Artiodactyla; while in striking contrast 
to these two groups are the Perissodactyla and the Insectivora, which 
certainly do not differ widely enough in their habits from the Artio- 
dactyla and Carnivora, to give a clue to the reason for these discrep- 
ancies. 

2. Although in most cases, the species of a genus differ only by 
the greater or less development of the rib-process, so that the total 
number of thoracico-lumbar vertebre is the same, yet in some cases, 
(Equus, Otolicnus, Loris, Sorex), this number varies by a single verte- 


PROCEEDINGS B. S. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 21 APRIL, 1872. 


Wilder.] Byes {June 21, 


bra; it appears, also, that even individuals of the same species may 
vary in this manner, (Phoca grenlandica); and this recalls a sug- 
gestion already made by me (45, 15), which ought to be considered, 
although, at present, its importance may seem rather ideal than real; 
“it does not seem possible that the head and pelvis can be as strictly 
homologous in animals having a different number of vertebre as in 
those with the same number; in other words, the heads or the pelves 
of two animals may be cephalic or pelvic modifications of vertebre, 
without being such modifications of the same identical vertebrae.” 
Even if wé exclude the skull from the category of vertebra, the diffi- 
culty is not removed; for if the atlas of Hyrax is homologous with 
that of Elephas, then the sacrum of Elephas is the homologue of the 
twenty-fourth vertebra and its successors, with Hyrax; or if we also 
assume that the sacra of the two are homologous, we must homologize 
29 vertebre in the one with 22 in the other; and, practically at least, 
this seems to be our only course. 

I trust that the foregoing considerations will aid in removing the 
stumbling block of numbers, from the path of those who would other- 
wise accept the meketropy of pollex and primus. To my own mind 
they were hardly needed, so decided was the conviction formed in 
1866, and expressed in 51,52 and 57, that no difference in the num- 
bers of phalanges ought to affect our recognition of a profound mor- 
phological law affecting the membra. 


Norz. Dr. Coues has kindly placed at my disposal the ms. of some un- 
published investigations bearing upon this subject, which so nearly accord 
with my own views, that Iadd them here. April, 1872. 

Susceptibility of variation in numerical composition he believes to be, @, in di- 
rect ratio of number of parts composing an organ, and 6, in inverse ratio of mor- 
- phical differentiation and telical specialization of the parts of an organ ; and 
that, consequently, the value of numerical composition as a morphological or 
taxonomic datum can be estimated with reasonable confidence of at least ap- 
proximate accuracy. Value is inversely as variability. 

‘¢ Tt isnotorious,”’ he continues, “ that an organ (whether central or periph- 
eral — whether indispensable to the integrity of an animal, or merely a useful 
adjunct to its economy) composed of a few parts, does not exhibit the same per- 
centage of variation in the number of these parts, as the same or a similar organ’ 
does when it is composed of many parts. For instance, the normal variation in 
the bones of the coccyx of Primates is at a minimum, if it be not, indeed, ned ; 
whilst the ordinary individual variation in the coccyx of a longicaudate mam- 
mal, suchas the Jaculus hudsonius, for example, amounts to four or five coccy- 
geal vertebrae. The few dermal scutes of armadillos are sufficiently constant in 
number to afford specific characters, while the essentially similar but numerous 


1871.] S213) [ Wilder. 


dermal scales upon the belly of a serpent may vary widely in number in differ- 
ent individuals of the same species. The rays of a small, sharply-outlined dor- 
sal fin of a fish have no such variation in number as those composing a fin that 
extends the’greater part of the length of the animal. The very numerous teeth 
of a serpent cannot be rendered with the certitude that attaches to the dental 
formula of a few-toothed mammal. In the lower families of birds possessing 
more than twelve rectrices, the number is fallacious even as a specific charac- 
ter, since it varies ‘one or two pairs, at least, in different individuals of the same 
species, whereas in birds with eight, ten, or twelve rectrices these numbers mark 
whole familes, and the slightest variation is properly regarded as an anomaly. 
The few digital phalanges of birds are so constant (much more constant than 
their vertebrse) that deviation from the ordinary number becomes a character 
marking families. 

“‘ But it is unnecessary to dwell upon this obvious point, the more so since it is 
simply one part of the main proposition, that variation is greatest in organs 
composed of the most similar parts—parts that are essentially either morphi- 
cally or telically repetitive, and conversely, that the variation in numerical com- 
position is least in the structures made up of more perfectly differentiated or 
specialized parts. Any structure the essence of which admits of what is called 
* vegetative repetition,’ is susceptible of enlargement or curtailment by the de- 
velopment of more or fewer segments or moieties, and variability is a necessary 
result of such plasticity of organization. The examples adduced may be here 
cited again in illustration. Most of the caudal vertebra: of a long-tailed mam- 
mal are precisely similar in form and function—positive duplicates of each 
other, and in such a mammal as the house-rat, the coccygeal formula can only 
be given approximately, while the still more numerous dermal annuli of the 
tail, though corresponding in a general way with the bones themselves, must be 
enumerated simply in round numbers. The vertebrz of a serpent, essentially 
similar throughout the long series, represent no such fixed number as those of a 
mammal where they are differentiated in several groups, each with its own char- 
acter. And even surveying organs composed of few parts, we find striking dif- 
ferences in variability. The presence, in an animal possessing five digits, of a 
supernumerary one, is in frequency out of any calculable proportion to the ap- 
pearance of two functional digits in an animal that, like the horse, has normally 
but one—perhaps the improbability of the latter is on a par with that of the ap- 
pearance of ten digits in aman. Iam not informed as to the individual varia- 
bility in the number of phalanges of cetaceans, and probably too few of these 
animals have been dissected for correct estimation, but there is every reason to 
suppose that the liability to variation here is as much greater than it is an or- 
dinary mammal, as the increase in the number of phalanges. 

“ The abrupt and marked increase in the number of phalanges of cetaceans 
as compared with ordinary mammals, and the imperfect discrimination of pha- 
langes, metacarpals and carpals in these mammals, seem to be explicable upon 
the same principles that account for the great number, small size and mutual 
resemblance of the vertebree of prehensile tailed mammals, and those that use a 
long flexible tail asa balance. There is the same teleology in either case—it is 
the production of perfect pliability ; and in both, the increase seems to be sim- 


’ Wilder. 394 [June 21, 


. ply a matter of repetition. It is probably as impossible to homologize individ- 
ual bones of a cetacean manus with those of an ordinary mammal, as it is to 
homologize the immense number of caudal vertebrae of the genus Mus, for in- 
stance, with the few of a neighboring genus, Arvicola. In all such cases as 
these, where variability is at a maximum, the importance of numerical composi- 
tion, either as a taxonomic or as a morphical character, is obviously at a mini- 
mum. If the Cetacea agreed with ordinary mammals in other respects, the 
composition of the manus would afford no better grounds for these wide separa- 
tion than the number of caudal vertebree in certain other families. 

“Tf we take the other extreme, of a solidungulate anfmal, we find such strong 
differentiation of the osseous elements of the manus, that every single one of the 
few bones has its own shape and size, and each of the distal segments, at least, 
performs a perceptibly distinct function ;even a sesamoid is elevated, function- 
ally, almost to the rank of a phalanx. Here the variability is virtually nél ; if 
it occur at all, it would be entirely abnormal ; and the slightest normal differ- 
énce in numerical composition, either in number of digits or of their phalanges, 
has a generic, if not a higher, value. 

“The value of numerical composition of the pollex and primus as a mor- 
phological character, has been éstimated by different anatomists at its two possi- 
ble extremes—-some considering it an insuperable objection to the antitropic 
homology of pollex with quintus, and others finding it little or no obstacle to 
such a view. ‘Two considerations have had great weight with me, in reducing 
my estimate of its value so low, that it presents itself as no valid objection, 
when taken in connection with the ‘strong evidence derived from other sources. 
In the first place, the question can only arise in respect to five-fingered mam- 
mals, a part, at least, of the digits of which have three phalanges each ; and 
since here we have the maximum known number of digits,and the next to the 
maximum known number of phalanges (Cetacea alone having more) the suscep- 
tibility of variation in numerical composition is nearly at a maximum, accord- 
ing to the principles already laid down, and hence the value of numerical com- 
position is nearly at a minimum so far as the manus is concerned. 

“Secondly, it is certain that pollex and primus are telically correspondent 
(analogous), and no less so that the modification each has undergone in its com- 
position is simply telical. Both have been strongly differentiated from the other 
digits in the same way, and for the same purpose. It is presumed that no anat- 
omist questions the homology of the whole manus of a bird, a reptile and a 
mammal; yet the homology cannot be pushed to the individual osseous ele- 
ments without recognition of vastly more difference in numerical composition 
than we are called upon to admit in the present case of pollex and quintus, and 
hence without tacit depreciation of the morphical import of merenumber. The 
manus and the pes of a bird cannot be homologized with each other, according 
to any one of the current modes of comparison, without greater allowance still 
for telical modification in the matter of numerical composition. For myself, if 
I attempt to recognize any homology between the manus of a man, for example, 
and that of certain chelonians and of a cetacean, beyond a homology of the 
members in their aggregate, I must consider that a medius digit, for example, 
with three phalanges, corresponds to one with several more than three, and be- 


1871} Bas, (Wilder. 


lieve in telical suppression of a phalanx in one case, and a similar redundancy 
of phalanges in the other case. If I undertake to compare the manus of a bird 
with its pes, either antitropically or otherwise, I must admit with every single 
digit a difference in the numerical composition of its homologue. Until our 
morphological insight has penetrated far enough for the solution of such prob- 
lems as these, it seems perfectly reasonable to maintain that the objections on 
the score of numerical composition that have been urged against the antitropic 
homology of pollex with quintus, and of minimus with primus, apply with 
manifold force to a majority of the homologies that anatomists consider de- 
termined.” 


V. GENERAL PROBLEMS. 


The radical difference of opinion respecting the morphical rela- 
tions of membra which the historical sketch exhibits between such 
Syntropists as Owen, for instance, and such Antitropists as Wyman, 
is not to be accounted for by any assumption of difference in their 
knowledge of facts or their intellectual power, but rather, as it 
seems to me, by a recognition of the dissimilarity of the premises 
which they have admitted, and the methods of reasoning which they 
have followed: in the one case, the human body has been chiefly em- 
ployed in making the comparison, and attention has been early di- 
verted to the correspondence of the pollex with the primus in respect 
to size, numerical composition and relative position, when the manus 
is in its natural attitude of pronation, as with many quadrupeds. In 
the other case, more attention has been given to the telical antago- 
nism of the ancon and genu with many animals, and to the relative 
position of the membra during the early stages of development. 

In more general terms, the idea of Syntropy is based upon the ob- 
vious resemblance in respect to size, numerical composition and natural 
attitude of certain highly specialized parts of peripheral organs belong- 
ing to animals of high zoological rank, and in the adult condition; 
while the idea of Antitropy is based upon the antagonism of relative 
position of proximal and less specialized parts with animals lower in 
rank or at earlier stages of development.} 

Now, without doubt, the question under discussion is primarily one 
of structure rather than of function; it is a morphological and not a te- 
leological problem. Before it can be solved, it is evident that we must 
first ascertain which are correct of the two groups of premises above 


1These ideas were advanced by me in part in 45, 21, and more distinctly in 57, 
(Props. 9 and 10). 


Wilder.} 326 : [June 21, 


/ 
mentioned; and our present inquiry is, therefore, what are the rela- 
tive morphical values of different attributes, different organs, differ- 
ent systems, different species and stages of development ? 

To fully discuss this question would require many volumes, and I 
can only attempt at this time to present the conclusions to which I 
have been led by the material now at my command, and, perhaps, to 
indicate more definitely than has been done heretofore, the matters 
which demand especial investigation. For it is clear that some of 
us upon both sides have been arguing upon false or insufficient prem- 
ises, and that we have taken some steps upon the “hich priori road,” 
which we shall have to retrace in order to reach the truth; still, I 
must claim that, as a rule, the Syntropists have, in spite of their num- 
bers, fallen into the more serious errors, and have disagreed so decid- 
edly among themselves, as to suggest upon that ground alone that 
their general view was incorrect; The Antitropists, on the contrary, 
have at least kept a great idea always before them, although they 
may have been too eager and confident, and been led astray by un 
founded fancies. 


MorPHICAL VALUES OF CHARACTERS. 


Admitting then, as an abstract definition, that morphical value is 
the usefulness of any character in the determination of morphical re- 
lations, we have still to ascertain the relative morphical value of the 
various characters already mentioned. So far as I know, the phrase 
“morphological value” was first employed by Huxley, in 1858 (250, 
381); “morphological importance” was used by Cleland in 1860 
(215, 306), and the former phrase several times by Traquair, in 
1865.1 

In 1867, Wyman suggests that the osseous system is more reliable 
in the determination of intermembral homologies than the other sys- 
tems (55,277), and a like comparison is made by Flower (66,239) in 
1870; my own convictions of the need of some determination of 
morphical values, were reached independently, and were expressed 
in 1866 and 1867 (57 and 58); but, although I am convinced that 
an approximate estimate of the comparative value of the characters 
already mentioned might be reached by analogies, and by a careful 
study of the history of the question, yet there appears to be a more 
satisfactory method of accomplishing the same end; namely, by as- 
certaining the value which these characters have for the determina- 


iQn the Asymmetry of the Pleuronectide Trans. Linn. Soc., 1865. 


x 


1871.] 327 [ Wilder. 


tion of the other kind of morphical relations, plural homologies, upon 
which zoological classification is based; since, although few have 
spoken of the two halves of a single individual as if they were two 
distinct, individuals and comparable in like manner, yet it is not 
“probable that any one will object to such a view of the case, and 
such a method of comparison. ; 

May we then conclude that morphical value is essentially equiva- 
lent to taxonomic or zoological or classificatory value, and that the 
only difference is that the former is used when two parts of the same 
individual are compared, while the latter is used when two different 
individuals are compared, with a view to ascertain their zoological 
relationship ; if so, then morphical value is value in respect to single 
homologies, taxonomic value is value in respect to plural homologies ; 
and since both are morphical relations, it seems probable that the 
same attributes, organs, systems, species and stages of development 
which have been found available in the one, should be given a like 
absolute and relative importance in the other class of morphical 
questions. 

This conclusion seems warranted by the language of high author- 
ities,1 who either use morphological as if equivalent to taxonomic 
value, or imply that morphical relations, near and remote, are the 
true test of zoological affinity. 

Assuming then provisionally, and until decided objection is raised 
by others, that morphical value and taxonomic value are correlative, 
we are now justified in considering the zoological criteria, which have 
been admitted, in order to ascertain the relative morphical value of 
the characters already mentioned; but here, unfortunately, we meet 
with a most unsatisfactory difference of opinion. 

For instance, we find the same high authority making two incom- 
patible generalizations, as follows: “The generative organs, being. 
those which are most remotely related to the habits and food of the 
animal, I have always regarded as affording very clear indications of 
its true affinities; we are least likely in the modifications of these 
organs, to mistake a merely adaptive for an essential character.” 
Owen (on the Dugong, Proc. Zool. Soc., vol. 1, p. 40.) “Teeth are 
always most intimately related to the food and_habits of the animal 
and are therefore important guides in the classification of animals.’’ 
(63, 1, 361). 


1 Agassiz (201, fere), Huxley (251, 2 and 100), Gill, American Naturalist, vol. rv, 
Proc. Am, Ass. Adv. Soc., 1870, and Rolleston (294, xx11). 


Wilder.] 328 [June 21, 


Dr. J. E. Gray “observed that in his opinion internal characters 
were of little use in Zoology; (Proc. Zool. Soc., Apr. 11, 1867, 
and Journ. of Anat. and Phys., 2, 371); while Parker admits 
the value of external characters, but says the mind will not rest in 
these outward things, and that the skeleton, nervous system, diges- 
tive, respiratory and vocal organs are very important! Testimony 
to the zoological value of the skeleton is given by Agassiz,? but 
Owen speaks again as follows: “ Guided by the seldom failing law 
that distinctive characters are most strongly developed in the periph- 
eral portions of the body,” etc.,? and further believes that the “form 
and disposition of the scales of the legs of birds have afforded dis- 
tinctive characters to the zoologist ” (63, 2, 232). 

Further reference to the opinions of various authors, respecting 
the taxonomic value of different systems of organs is given by Rolle- 
ston (294, xx, note), and the matter is briefly discussed by H. 
Allen‘. 

It is quite probable that in practice all the above authors have 
been more definite than their language would imply, and that they 
have more or less perfectly discriminated between the value of an or- 
gan for one kind of group, and that which it might have for another; 
this is done by Wyman > when he says that the “teeth of mammals 
afford the surest indication of zoological affinities,” because he 
means that for the determination of groups within the class the teeth 
have a high morphical value. Flower questions this fact,® but admits 
the principle, as had Turner before him,’ by attaching morphical 
value to characters of the base of the skull within the order, Car- 
nivora. ; 

Giinther likewise discriminates within the order, when he says,® 
‘under these circumstances, I still feel satisfied to distribute the 
fishes on the basis of Miuller’s ordinal arrangement into minor natural 
groups, whether called families, groups or genera; and in my opin- 
ion, there is no character equal in importance to that of the structure 
and position of the fins; as they are in immediate connection with 


1Trans. Zool. Soc., v. 149, 1862. 

2 Anat. des Salmones, p. 1. 

3 Memoir on Dinornis, p. 78. 

4 Outlines of Comp. Anat.. and Med. Zool. p. 18, 1869. 

5 Lectures on Comp. Physiology, 1849, p. 24. 

6 Proc. Zool. Soc., 1849, p. 5. 

7 Turner, H.N., P. Z. 8. 1848. 

8 Catal. of Acanth. Fishes. Preface. 1861. ly 


1871.] 829 [ Wilder, 


the entire habit of fishes, and with their mode of life, they best indi- 
cate their natural affinities, and indeed prove to be the most constant 
and general characters.” 

As to generic criteria, Miiller and Henle enumerate! the charac- 
ters found by them most useful among selachians; and Parker is 
explicit respecting the unimportance of certain characters, for the 
determination of groups more comprehensive than genera.? 

Specific characters of the Pycnogonide are enumerated by H. D. 
S. Goodsir,? and those of the tortoises by Owen (62, 1, 162.) 

Finally, a great part of Agassiz’s later works (200 and 201), is de- 
voted to the effort to show not only that groups really exist in na- 
ture, but that they are based upon distinct “ categories of structure.” 
I quote the following also from my notes of his lectures on Selach- 
ians.4 “ Zoologists take very different criteria or different parts as 
foundation for the same kind of group, or the same criteria for dif- 
ferent kinds of groups, so that their results are very diverse. We 
must have some means of determining the value of characters.” 

Accepting provisionally Agassiz’s abstract enunciation of these cri- 
teria and their subordination as to value, assummed up on page 261 of 
201, and likewise considering the only direct application of these prin- 
ciples to a single group, the Testudinata and its subdivisions (200, 1) 
Part 11), | have endeavored to translate the zoological criteria into 
anatomical language, and in this way to at least indicate the means 
by which we may sometime be able to determine the exact morphi- 
cal value of any anatomical character. The conclusions which I 
reached are given in the diagram (page 179), and afterward briefly 
explained; but I must here admit that I feel sure of being right upon 
only the following points: 

1. That both plan of structure and form are displayed upon a 
vertico-lateral section of an animal.° 

1 Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 1844, pp. 1 and 4. 

2Proc. Zool. Soc., 1868, p. 572. 

8 Ann. of Nat. Hist., July, 1844, p. 1. 

4 Given at the Museum of Comp. Zool., 1867 - 1868. 

5 As between Vertebrata and Radiata, or between either of these and the Mol. 
lusea, and Articulata this is clear enough; but since the relative positions of di- 
gestive, nervous and circulatory systems seem nearly identical in the two latter 
branches, the respiratory and perhaps some other systems must be included in our 
representation of a vertico-lateral section. See Huxley’s diagrams, 151, fig. 30. 
As to the view that Vertebrata and Mollusca may find connecting links in Amphi- 
oxus and the ascidians (references to which are given in 386). I have not yet seen 


any comparison of the vertico-lateral sections of these animals, or any statement 
that they are identical. 


Wilder. ] 330 : {June 21; 


2. That plan of structure depends upon -the relative normal posi- 
tion of important organs; while form depends upon the relative size of 
these and other organs. If, then, it is true that the branch is determined 
by the plan of structure, and the family by the form, it follows that rel- 
ative size is of less morphical value than relative normal position ; it 
seems probable, too, that the natural attitude of organs must be simi- 
lar within the same family, since the membra of a family have not 
only the same form, but the same mode of locomotion; if this is true, 
then this character also is of less morphical value than normal posi- 
tion. 

3. Iam also convinced that segmentation, or numerical composi- 
tion, is of less morphical value than either of the characters above 
named; but this has been already considered. 

In support of the general conclusion which is expressed by the di- 
agram (page 179), that internal characters are more valuable in the 
determination of the more comprehensive groups, while external 
characters are more valuable for the determination of lesser groups, 
which would ascribe to the former more, and to the latter less, mor- 
phical value, I can bring little direct evidence; but the following 
passage from an eminent conchologist shows that the idea is not con- 
fined to myself; and I am inclined to believe that it must have been 
in practice, at least, recognized to some extent by all who have 
sought to reach a natural classification. 

“In all attempts to characterize the groups of animals, we find 
that in advancing from the smaller to the larger combinations, many 

of the most obvious external features become of less avail, and we 
are compelled to seek for more constant and comprehensive signs in 
the phases of embryonic development, and the condition of the cir- 
culatory, respiratory, and nervous systems.” ? 

The above is in part confirmed by Agassiz’s view that the genera of 
turtles are based upon the voluntary organs of nutrition, the jaws and 
other muscles (200, 1, 422), and by Owen’s view that the primary 
subdivisions of the mammalia are characterized by the condition of 
the brain (63, 2, 270 2), and further by the general acknowledgement 
that osteological characters alone are often insufficient for the dis- 


1 Woodward; Recent and Fossil Shells., p. 56. 

2 Flower (Phil. Trans. 1865, p. 647), remarks of the brains of monotremes and 
marsupials as contrasted with those of other Mammalia. ‘The appearance of 
either a transverse or longitudinal section would leave no doubt as to which group 
the brain belonged. 


2 


1871.) 331 [ Wilder. 


crimination of species within the same genus; although Owen once 
held a different opinion. (Trans. Zool. Soc., vol. 11., p. 379, 1838). 

But how can we reconcile the above generalization with the state- 
ment of Dr. J. E. Gray,! that with the Balenide and Baleenopteri- 
de, “every bone of each genus is peculiar, though not always easy to 
describe; likewise, almost every bone of each species, especially the 
ribs and phalanges, the skull, tympanic bones, scapula, and cervical 
vertebre”? Is it not probable that there are not only specific but in- 
dividual differences between two individuals in each and every part 
of the body, and in each and every possible attribute of these parts; 
but that these differences are more obvious in some, parts than in 
others, so that certain parts and attributes are more available than 
others? and such a view is by no means incompatible with the result 
of our experience, and with the analysis of other matters which lead 
us to believe that for the determination of more important and com- 
prehensive questions, we must look to the central and essential parts, 
while minor questions may be decided by observation of peripheral 
and less vital organs. For instance, a single vertebra would enable 
us to say whether its owner were a reptile, a bird, or a mammal; but 
it would far less distinctly exhibit the particular genus or species to 
which it belonged; on the other hand, the manus of the whales and 
of the Sirenia resemble each other, and even that of the penguin 
might not be at once recognizable as that of a different class; but 
within the same order or family, the genus would be at once appa- 
rent from the special proportions of the parts. 

According to Gray,? the long spine which has been described as 
Myriosteon Higginsti, was thought by some to be the tail of a ray, but 
is probably part of a starfish; certain pointed fossils are thought by 
Pander to be teeth of selachians, by Owen to be from the borders 
of the suckers of cuttlefish; the “ichyodorulites ” have been regarded 
as spines of Crustacea by some authors, but as selachian spines 
by Agassiz*; from which the latter concludes that these parts are at 
any rate not available as either branch, class, ordinal, or perhaps 
family characters, but rather as generic; the “bird-tracks” in the - 
Red Sandstone of the Connecticut Valley, did not at once indicate 
whether the feet which made them belonged to birds or to reptiles; 

\ 


1Proc. Zool. Soc., 1864, p. 228. 
2 Proc. Zool. Soc., 1864, p. 163. 
8 Lectures on Selachians, Dec. 1867; (unpublished). 


Wilder.] oon [June 21, 


now all the above examples are peripheral parts, and the like ques- 
tions never would have arisen with such a part as a vertebra. 

Putnam [Am. Nat., Jan. 1872, p. 26, note], mentions the slicht tax- 
onomic value of air-bladder, head-scales, barbels, ventral fins and 
eyes, and Agassiz once figured fossil Crustaceans [ Eurypterus remipes 
and Pierygotus], as fishes on account of their external aspect. 1 

Packard? has recognized the. unreliability of characters drawn 
from peripheral and inconstant organs, like the mouth parts and 
wings; and Owen himself seems to recognize the principle, “Judge 
not according to appearances,” in the following paragraph: “ The 
prominent appearances which first catch the eye are deceptive; and 
the less obtrusive phenomena which require searching out, more fre- 
quently, when their full signification is reasoned upon, guide us to 
the right comprehension of the whole.” ? 

From the unpublished lectures on Selachians I again quote Agassiz: 
«¢ The Chimere are generally separated from the other Selachians on 
account of a single branchial fissure; but as this is a variable charac- 
ter, it should not set aside more internal characters.’’ 

A zoological illustration of our proposition is given in the great 
variety and discrepancy of the definitions of the vertebrate type; so 
long as investigators regarded especially some one group with which 
they were more familiar, and so long as they included in their defi- 
nition of an abstract idea, the special structures which characterized 
those minor groups (see Agassiz, 201, 213), so long they disagreed 
among themselves, and failed to follow Nature; this is seen in the 
difficulty which others have found in accepting Owen’s archetype 
skeleton as correct; for it is essentially a piscine skeleton, and 
although the great anatomist holds that fishes depart least from the 
vertebrate archetype (63, 1, 102), such a generalization involves 
reasoning in a circle, and has been adopted by few (as Maclise, 23, 
674-676). 

The Amphioxus is, without doubt, the simplest known vertebrate; 
but it cannot be regarded as the material manifestation of the verte- 
brate idea, since its structure presents positive characters by which 


1 Microscopic section of the tooth of Ceratodus has convinced Mr. Bicknell that 
itis “unsafe to found genera or even species upon the microscopical structure of a 
single tooth or bone, although it has proved correct in many cases.’’ Proc. Bost. 
Soc. Nat. Hist., April 19th, 1871. 

2 Guide to the Study of Insects, p. 14. 

5 Paleontology, p. 857. 


1871.] 308 [Wilder, 


it is not merely an exception to the generalizations applicable to all 
other fishes, but which seem to constitute it a distinct class, coéqual 
with the Myzonts, Selachians, Ganoids, and Teleosts; still there 
can be no question that this simply organized vertebrate, pre-. 
senting the fewest organs, and the simplest functions, really does 
“come the nearest to being the realization of the ideal plan of struc- 
ture of the branch. Now the Amphioxus may be said to be the zoo- 
logical counterpart of the embryonic state of the higher vertebrates, 
and to hold within the branch a central position, surrounded by the 
more specialized organisms, as the central and constant organs of a 
single individual are encompassed by peripheral and variable ones. 

A still better illustration will be furnished by the very question 
now under consideration, in case it is decided in favor of antitropy; 
a glance at the manus and pes of most animals indicates a general 
correspondence between them ; but they alone would furnish no sure 
guide to the principle upon which they are to be compared in detail; 
at any rate, even if we are not right now, the total disagreement for 
a century is sufficient evidence of our proposition, and of the need of 
appealing to more central and reliable parts of the membra, and even 
to the trunk itself. 

From the foregoing considerations, there arises the suggestion that 
the morphical value of a part of an animal, is in an inverse ratio to 
its telical importance; that relzability is inversely to variability; and, 
that hence, in determining morphical relations, we should regard pri- 
marily, those parts which are constant in position and function, and 
secondarily, those which are variable and inconstant, whether zoo- 
logically, physiologically or teratically. 

The variability of the two extremes of the vertebral column is re- 
marked by Owen, (63, 1, 94,) and Bell* connects peripheral variabil- 
ity with diversity of function in language the more suggestive, as 
coming from so “ untranscendental ” an anatomist. 

It is generally admitted that multiple organs, whether animal or 
vegetal, are liable to variation, and many authors have remarked the 
variability of the membra; Owen refers to it in many places?; T. 
Rymer Jones® suggestively associates peripheral position with varia- 
bility in number and appearance; and Pouchet* goes so far as to 


1On the Hand; close of chap. 2. 

2Trans. Zool. Soc., 1885, p. 853; 20, 333; 20, 269; 638, 2, 254, 
3 Cycl. of Anat. and Phys., 3, 841 and 848. 

4 Plurality of races, p. 47. 


Wilder.] 334 : [June 21, 


acknowledge that the “law which causes the modifications of organ- 
isms, becomes more and more decided and clear from the centre to the 
periphery.” I may here say that the convictions expressed in 58, 
(Props. 9 and 10) were formed independently of the authors above 
quoted. 

The results of a tabulation of cases of sexdigitism and hexadactyl- 
ism,! (as given in 313), have been.confirmed by the addition of cases, 
gathered up to Jan. 1, 1870; at that date, of 242 individuals affected, 
152 were males and 90 females; and of the membra, 312 were armi 
and only 155 skelea; this not only shows the extreme frequency of 
this malformation of peripheral parts belonging to the highest verte- 
brate animal, but also indicates that in this respect, the skelos is 
more constant and reliable than the armus, as it is also the membrum 
less often and less extensively modified for special purposes through- 
out the vertebrate type (313, 10); but in respect to the vascular 
system, particularly, Meckel believes the reverse is the case, (6, 
Enelish edition, 2, 176); and upon this question more remains to be 
done. ’ 

Another very important question is as yet undecided; is the ho- 
mology of a muscle to be determined mainly by its place of origin, or 
its point of insertion? The latter is the opinion of Mivart (46, 398) 
Rolleston (61, 620), (with some exceptions), and Humphrey (64, 
321). Coues states that the insertion is less frequently changed than 
the origin (70, 223), and I know of no author who has taken the op- 
posite view?; I am not now prepared to do so, and would suggest that 
we oucht first to discriminate between the “sliding up or down the 
same bone” referred to by Coues (70, 223), and the lateral transfer 
from one bone to another, as of the tendon of insertion of the biceps 
brachialis (Coues, 70, 299); the former transfer would generally be 
for the purpose of securing greater length of fibre, and extent of mo- 
tion, and would also occur more frequently with the origin; but the 
latter would affect the essential function of the muscle, and would 
perhaps warrant us in regarding a muscle so affected as wholly dis- 
tinct. 

1Do cases ever occur of extra digits, or dactyls upon both borders of the manus 

Ss? 
se ines this was written, the graduation thesis of W. S. Barnard, ‘On the Mem- 
bral Myology of the Orang’’ has been prepared in my laboratory, and the facts and 
ideas therein presented have nearly convinced me that the homology of muscles 
depends far more upon their origins than upon their insertion : the paper has been 
offered for publication to the Boston Society of Natural History. 


1871.] ees The [Wilder. 


MorrHicAL INTEGERS. 


This suggests a further and very important enquiry. What is a 
morphical integer, whether in the muscular or osseous system, or 
among the digits and dactyls? The phrase “morphological integer” is 
first used by Coues (70, 222), but the general problem has been con- 
sidered by Owen and others, with especial reference to the bones, 
The question of Spencer (299, 2, 526), “ How are centres of ossifi- 
cation which have a homological meaning to be distinguished from 
those which have not?” is not answered satisfactorily by Owen’s ref- 
erence to a “knowledge of the archetype skeleton” (63, 1, XXIV), 
since the knowledge itself depends upon the prior determination of 
the question. I do not feel ready to discuss the question, but 
would call attention to its great importance, and to the need 
of such investications as those of Parker; this author (292, 4) 
thinks that “true and safe landmarks” for the recognition of 
“morphological territories,” may be found in segmentation both by 
fission of primary cartilage, and by the appearance of two or more 
separate centres of ossification within the same undivided tract”; 
but it is evident that much more remains to be done, not only for the 
bones, but for the muscles, in order to ascertain the morphical inte- 
gers and equivalents in the osseous and muscular and other sys- 
tems. 


Wuat Constitutes A Digit oR A DAcTYL? 


There do not appear to have arisen as yet any serious discrepan- 
cies between the statements of different authors respecting the num- 
ber of digits or dactyls which may exist in a given animal ; but since 
no one, so far as I know, has given a general rule by which to deter- 
mine the above question, and it is probable that at some time direct 
contradictions will appear in different works1, it is worth our while to 
inquire into the elements which might form the basis of such a rule. 

Among the mammalia, the vast majority of those digits and 
dactyls about which no question can arise, consist of three phalanges, 
are visible to the eye as subdivisions of the distal extremity of the 
member, and perform some obvious function in the economy of the 
animal ; the ordinary mammalian digit or dactyl is then functional, 
visible, and trimerous. But to this definition are many exceptions. 


1 Leading perhaps to as unfortunate complications as the conflicting accounts of 
the hippocampus minor and the corpus callosum. 


Wilder. ] _ 836 [June 21, 


First: in respect to the number of phalanges, which may be increased 
to 14 (index of Globiocephalus) or, more commonly, reduced to 2, 
(as with all the digits of Pteropide and the pollices and primi of 
most species), or to 1 (as with the primus of Simia); but all these 
dimerous or monomerous digits and dactyls are visible and functional, 
and numerical composition alone is evidently insufficient to deter- 
' mine their right to be included with the rest. But there may be no 
phalanges whatever, and merely the metacarpal or metatarsal bone ; 


and the question may arise as to the propriety of including that in ~ 


the enumeration. 

Second: in respect to its external visibility. The pollex of Hyena 
(63, 2, 3806), has a single minute phalanx, supported by an 
equally minute metacarpal; the Hyraz capensis offers a similar 
structure; these digits are monomerous, concealed, and apparently 
functionless, and would not be enumerated in a new species by one 
who confined himself to the external characters which are believed 
by many to serve for generic and specific distinctions; yet, undoubt- 
edly, an anatomical description of the species would mention the ex- 
istence of five digits in both these animals, in contradistinction to a 
new ‘Tapirus, which presents only a rudimentary pollical metacar- 
pal. Again, although the pollices might be concealed from the sight, 
they might be felt under the skin, and another and distinct element 
must be taken into account in framing our definition. 

‘Third: a digit or dactyle may be trimerous and visible, and yet, 
to all appearance, functionless or atelic; such are the “‘ dew-claws ” 
of many Artiodactyla, and the slender index and annularis of Hippa- 
rion (63, 2, 309, and 63, 3, 825); they are supposed to prevent sink- 
ing into soft soil, but there seems no reason why the Camelide should 
be wholly destitute of these organs, if this is their use with the typi- 
cal Ruminants ; such are also the pollices of the Canide and Felide 
which have little 1f any power of motion. 

The above are instances of what are generally called “ rudimentary 
organs,” to which so much attention has lately been directed, and 
respecting which such contradictory opinions are entertained; this is 
not the place for a discussion of the general subject, but the above 
remarks may indicate the special questions as to the definition of 
digits and dactyls. 


HiIsToLOGICAL COMPOSITION. 


The morphical value of this attribute of organs is variously esti- 
mated by different authors; Agassiz, in the second passage already 


| 


1871.] oat [Wilder 


quoted, evidently thinks it is not of class value in the determin- 
ation of homologies among radiates; Parker, 292, 3, associates 
“histology ”’ and ‘‘ function” in such a way as to indicate that he re- 


| gards their morphical value as less than that of relative position. 


} 
| 


But it does not appear that due attention has been given to the 
problem suggested by the following considerations: 

It is certain that a tendon may ossify, as in the skelea of fowls 
and the so-called ‘‘ marsupial bones,” so that what was at one time 
fibrous becomes osseous in structure; the same, however, holds true 
of the membrane bones of the skull, and of course, no one questions 
the homology of a bone with its own pre-existing cartilage, or with 
that of another individual or part of the same indiviudal; and upon 


this ground alone no objection arises to Owen’s view of the meke- 


syntropic homology of the marsupial bones} (63, 2, 356); so, too, 
the capsule of the eye-ball is generally admitted to be homolo- 
gous throughout the vertebrate branch, although it is fibrous in 
man, gristly in the turtle, and bony in the tunny (Thynnus) (63, 
1, 26). But is it possible for a muscle to be the true homo- 
logue of a ligament ? as Duvernoy thinks of the human subclavius and 


the costo-coracoid ligament of the gorilla?; and still more, can 


muscle correspond to bone? as is assumed by Humphrey and Huxley 
of the clavicle and Pouparts’ ligament (72, 77 and 78,37). Coues 
alludes to a theory (apparently a notion of his own) that certain om- 
ozonic muscles may be antitropically represented in pelvico-sacral 
ligaments. It might be urged that since in a typical muscular organ, 
muscle and tendon are continuous parts, and since the belly of a given 
muscle may be of very different lengths in different species, they are 
in one sense homologous structures, but evidently there should be a 
better understanding among homologists respecting the morphical 
value of histological composition.’ 


Moper or DEVELOPMENT. 


Respecting the morphical value of this attribute of organs and an- 
imals, the most widely diverse opinions have been held. Owen has 
constantly urged its slight importance in comparison with adult struc- 


1As to the rudimentary fibro-cartilages of Thylacinus, see Owen, Proc. Zool. 
Soc., 1848, p. 148. 

2 Archives du Museum, Tome vii1; referred to in 88, 367. 

3 Goodsir alludes to this question (297, 897), when he says, ‘‘ Tissue is subordinate 
to form,’ and Huxley mentions without comment, the extraordinary fact that the 
outer serous stratum, or epiblast, of the beginning embryo, gives rise to the two 
anatomical and physiological antipodes, epidermis and cerebrospinal nervous cen- 


_ tres (78, 10). 


PROCEEDINGS B &. N. H. — VOL. XIV. 22 MAY, 1872. 


Wilder.] 308 [June 21, 


ture and relative position, and I quote a few passages: ‘‘ There ex- 
ists, doubtless, a close general resemblance in the mode of develop- 
ment of homologous parts; but this is subject to modification, like the 
forms, proportions, functions, and very substance of such parts, with- 
out their essential homological relationships being thereby obliterated. 
These relationships are mainly, if not wholly, determined by the rel- | 
ative position and connection of the parts, and may exist independ- 
ently of form, proportion, substance, function, and similarity of 
development. But the connections must be sought for at every 
period of development, and the changes of relative position, if any, 
during growth, must be compared with the connections which the 
part presents in the classes where vegetative repetition is greatest: 
and adaptive modification least” (20, 174). ‘‘ So far is embryology 
from being a criterion cf homology” (63, 1, xxv1). ‘‘ Embryology 
affords no criterion between ossific centres that have a homological, 
and those that have a teleological significance” (63,1, xxv). “No 
part is, however, absolutely autogenous throughout the vertebrate 
series, and some parts usually exogenous are autogenous in a few in- 
stances? (63, 1, 27).. ** The developmental phenomena of the head 
neither supersede nor can supply the better evidences of homology 
afforded by relative position and connections, any more than do 
those of the foot; . . . it is neither here nor elsewhere the cri- 
terion of homology ’’ (63, 2, 311). Cleland says, ‘“ Morphologically, 
it is of little importance whether cranial bones are developed in the 
privordial cartilage of the skull or around it” (215, 305). 

The general importance of embryology in the determination of ho- 
mologies has been urged by Goodsir and Huxley, and in 251 the lat- 
ter has well indicated the necessity of deciding the general question 
before attempting to solve minor problems respecting the correspond- 
ence of the skull and the vertebral column. Agassiz has constantly 
presented the taxonomic value of embryology not only throushout 
his later works, but in the lectures on Comparative Embryology, 
Boston, 1849; and upon the ground of a difference of development, 
he in great measure bases his opinion that the Batrachians form a 
class distinct from the scaly reptiles; but in discussing this, Dana 
asks!“ whether, in the determination of classes it is not the more 
correct method to take note primarily of species in their finished or 
adult state; and whether adults do not express the true nature and 
idea of species, or the objects to be classified, rather than the special 


1Am. Journ. of Sci., Mar. 1864, p. 184. 


1871.] 839 l Wilder. 


series Of changes through which the adult characteristics are 
(| reached.” i 
On the other hand, Owen based his own nomenclature of the 
mammalian molar and premolar teeth upon the facts of development; 
‘but Flower (227), and Moseley and Lankester (282) have pointed 
_ out defects in this system, and the latter even hold that “the existence 
of any homology at all between upper and lower jaw teeth must be 
denied; it could only have a theoretical existence in connection with 
that view of the structure of the vertebrate skull, which placed the 
upper and lower jaws as homologous parts of a vertebra” (282, 272). 
Now all this has no apparent reference to intermembral homolo- 
gies, but it must nevertheless be considered before any conclusion 
can be reached satisfactory to all; are, or are we not, justified in 
comparing the membra together in that condition in respect to both 
position and structure, which they present when first forming in the 
embryo? if not, then the utter disagreement between Syntropists 
and Antitropists will forever remain; but if we are, then the former 
must simply eliminate from their train of argument, all such criteria 
as numerical composition, size, shape and function; and both must 
wholly disregard the telical parallelism or antagonism which exists 
between the corresponding parts of the membra of some animals, and 
must endeavor to ascertain first the general laws of organization ' 
according to which the trunk is formed.t 


October 4, 1871. 
The President in the chair. Thirty-seven persons present. 


Mr. Alonzo Meserve of Neponset was elected a Residen 
Member. 


Prof. Louis Agassiz made the following verbal communica- 
tion: — | 

Great doubt has always existed among naturalists as to the method 
of copulation among Selachians, and there is no definite information 
on this point. In speaking of the subject it has been assumed that the 
appendages of the male were used in clasping the female during the 
act, but no facts are given in regard to the manner of their use. 


1To be concluded. 


Agassiz.] 340 [October 4, 


As far as anatomical features are concerned, we have information no 
where more full than in the fourth volume of Cuvier’s Lectures on 
Comparative Anatomy. In reviewing the accounts given by various 
observers, we find that Aristotle really knew more about the process 
than all other zoologists since his time. He says the, cartilaginous 
fishes in copulation “hang together after the fashion of dogs, ‘dozee 
zuvac,’ the long-tailed ones mounting the others, unless the latter 
have a thick tail preventing this, when they come together belly to 
belly.” Before my late illness I had the good fortune to be able to 
observe and study the subject among the sharks and skates, with re- 
sults which satisfactorily settle this question; no opportunity to in- 
vestigate the Trygons has yet occurred to me. One ray of each 
posterior fin is capable of erection and rotation, and is covered with 
erectile tissue, far too delicate to allow it to be used as a clasper 
around a body covered with sharp, rough spines. In the act these 
two organs are rotated inward and forward, bringing the furrows on 
their inner surface into parallel contact, and in apposition with the 
testes. Being then introduced into the body of the female, their ex- 
tremities diverge in the two oviducts, and the glans being uncovered 
exposes a sharp cutting instrument, which would injure the organs 
of the female if she resisted; the male has her, therefore, in com- 
plete subjection, and has been observed to strike and wound her 
with this spine. What was formerly supposed to be the penis is too 
small, and of insufficient length to accomplish fecundation. The 
penis consists of the two long flexible finger-like fins, furnished with 
two projectile spinous appendages, as in vipers. (In Chimera the 
surfaces of the organs are also spinous, as in snakes.) The two 
spines found in cartilaginous fishes are homologous with the os penis 
of mammals. In man this bony part has disappeared, and we have 
only the soft spongy portions of the organ remaining; the quivering 
of the legs during connection seems the echo, as it were, of the sen- 
sitiveness of the flexible posterior limbs of the skates. 

The fins of the male skate resemble those of the female, having 
only in addition the sexual organ. We are led here to consider the 
connection between posterior limbs and sexual organs. In the 
snakes we find the latter organ, but no limbs. The examination of 
the homologies of the penis shows these various forms, the long 
erectile, the smaller pointed, and the mere tubercle. We may 
therefore conclude that the more lascivious animals have gradually 
developed these organs, or, as seems to me far preferable, that this 


1871.) 341 [Jackson, 


difference of form is the device of the same great creative thought, 
as illustrated in an infinite variety of methods in all objects of 
creation. 


* 


Dr. C. T. Jackson read the following letter from Mr. J. 
B. Meader, on the mineral resources of Utah, announcing 
the discovery of a Bismuth mine in that territory. 


Salt Lake City, Sept. 3, 1871. 
My Dear Friend: 

I have for some time been on the point of writing to you and 
giving you a little outline of the mineral resources of this Territory 
and finally I have brought myself up to the point. 

Utah is pretty well supplied with valuable minerals, but as yet the | 
principal developments, as in all other new countries, have been 
made upon those mines which produce ores more or less rich in sil- 
ver or gold. 

Gold is not very plentiful here; however in ‘‘ Bingham” Cajion 
some twenty-five miles southwest of the city they are working some 
‘placer diggings’’ which produce gold in paying quantities, the 
total yield of this district in gold being upwards of $150,000. 

Also at ‘‘ Deep Creek” some hundred and twenty miles west of 

‘here they find some gold in veins of quartz; and the quartz car- 
ries from 5 to 15 ounces copper; this district being rather out of the 
way and so far removed from railroad facilities, is not in munch favor, 
so as yet nothing of any note is being done there. 

These two sections are the only ones in which as yet gold appears 
to be found. 

Silver is more abundant ; its most ordinary forms or rather the 
class of ores which produce the most of it is the lead ores. These 
ores are very abundant, and there are more than a dozen districts 
within a radius of eighty miles from the city in which they are found. 

The most remarkable mine yet opened is the ‘‘ Emma,” a mine sit- 

uated in Little Cottonwood cajion twenty miles southeast from here, 
The mine has produced several thousands of tons of ore, and is said 
yet to contain large quantities opened up ready for extraction. The 
ore is of a very singular character, it would perhaps be more appro- 
priate to say that it has no character at all, for it is a strangely mixed 
up deposit. The vein produces galena, fine grained; black anti- 
monial galena, coppery carbonate of lead, decomposed antimonial 


Jackson. ] 342 [October 4, 


lead and silver, and a black ore quite soft, fine grained, containing 
arsenic, antimony, lead, sulphur and silver. 

The above varieties of ores occur in places where the vein is hard 
and compact, but a large portion of them are decomposed and occur 
in the vein apparently mixed up with vein stuff; where this occurs 
the vein is soft and requires no blasting, and when the ores are taken 
out they resemble coarse sand slightly stamed with oxide of iron. 

The ore that has been shipped from this mine will average about | 
35 per cent. of lead and contains from i00 to 190 ounces silver to — 
2000 lbs; perhaps 150 ounces would not be far from the actual | 
average. 

I have assayed specimens of galena from this mine which con- 
tained 450 ounces silver to the ton, and others of the antimonial | 
galena carrying as high as 520 ounces. One peculiarity of the ores — 
from this mine is, that the percentage of silver in the ores is 
constantly varying, and bearsno ratio whatever to the amount of 
lead contained —for instance, one piece of galena contained 94 
ounces silver to the ton, while another specimen identical as to looks 
and the per centage of lead, contains 150 ounces. But as I did not 
intend to particularize, I must pass on. 

There are two or three districts where silver abounds in ores 
free from lead. The principal district producing what are classed 
here as milling ores is East Cafion, situated some fifty-three miles south- 
west from the city. The ores found in “this district” are quite rich in 
silver. The silver exists in the form of horn silver, chloro-bromide, 
carbonate of silver and decomposed antimonial silver; as yet no sul- 
phide of silver has been found that I am aware of. I have some very 
fine specimens of horn silver from this district, also some from “ Tin- 
tic’ some seventy-five miles south-southwest from here. I have found 
specimens carrying as high as 60 ounces of silver. Copper is not very 
abundant; however, there are several localities in which it occurs in 
paying quantities. At ‘“Tintic” they have a very large deposit, the 
ores are principally carbonates, and some very fine specimens of 
azurite are found. I am inclined to think that at a depth the ores 
will change, but what they will be below water level is hard to tell. 
There isone species of ore from this locality which resembles stib- 
nite somewhat in looks and in the form of crystalization but it con- 
sists of arsenious acid and copper; as yet I have not had an oppor- 
tunity to fully analyze it. There are some ores also in the “‘Cotton- 


’ 1871.] 343 (Jackson 


- wood Cafions” cary-copper pyrites and “ horseflesh ” copper ores. 


Tron is found in abundance but as yet is not made available. 
Now as to the financial success of the mines I have but a few 


words to say. Of course all mines which produce ores rich enouch 
‘in silver to leave a profit after shipping to either of the points where 


smelting is carried on, say San Francisco in the West, Omaha, 
Chicago, Newark and New York in the East (I speak more par- 
ticularly of lead and silver ores), are profitable, and ‘are making 
their owners rich. But for those mines which produce ores, carrying 


only say from 15 to 25 ounces silver, the future is rather doubtful. 


Smelting has been undertaken and carried on by people wholly 
ignorant of the business, and as yet has proved a failure; and I am 
decidedly of the opinion that untilit is carried on by a company with 
a very Jarze capital, and under the direct charge of some one fully 
capable to conduct such enterprises, it will continue to be a failure. 
We lack many things here to enable ts to make an immediate suc- 
cess of smelting, yet should works, as I have stated above, be erected 
at some central point where all the classes and varieties of ores 
would become available, I think they would prove successful. 

There are several ordinary German blast furnaces under opera- 
tion at various points in the territory, and they are producing more 
or less lead; but I fear should one make careful examination of their 
work, assaying the ores before they go into the furnace, and keep 
accurate account of the quantity used, and then assay the pig 
lead and weigh up the quantity produced, they would find that 
from 25 to 30 per cent. of the lead was lost, and from 20 to 40 per 
cent. of the silver unaccvunted for. Some of the lead produced here 
contains as high as 15 per cent. of antimony. 

One specimen of lead which was brought to me to determine the 
percentage of antimony it contained, yielded 15 ounces of sulphide 
of lead, showing conclusively that it had been melted, but that they 
failed to get a thorough reaction, and the sulphur had not been- 
eliminated. Yet the future should be prosperous for this place, and 
another year I look for great changes. 

But I am drawing this letter into too voluminous proportions, and 
yet I have to speak of the subject which I considered the principal 
one of interest when I commenced to write. 

Last fall a person came into my office with a sample of ore to be 
assayed for lead and silver, mistaking some black shining crystals 
for galena. My assistant mixed up an assay in the usual way for a 


Meader.] 344 [October 4. | 


crucible assay for lead, and obtained a brittle button which he could 
not account for; he called my attention to it, and I found it to be 
“bismuth.” 

The result of this examination was not arrived at until some time 
after the man who brought the ore in had left town, and it was not 
until December that I found him again, at which time I learned 
where he got the ore, and made arrangements for an interest in the 
mine. My father immediately proceeded to the place (which is 
about two hundred and fifteen miles south from here, in “ Beaver | 
County,” seven miles from the town of Beaver), and’made an exam- | 
ination of the property. He found a well defined vein cropping out | 
boldly and strongly for three thousand feet in length. On one side 
of the vein the rock consists of granite, while at the other side | 
it is carbonate of lime. The vein is about seven feet wide, and | 
as far as developed, down to a depth of fifty feet, is very reou- 
lar. The gangue consists of quartz, hornblende, some granite, and 
is intersper a 7 garnets. 

The bismuth exists as sulphide (bismuthite ) cond oid say 
(bismuthinite ) and bismuth ochre, and as yet there is no other 
metal mixed with it; the gangue, however, contains some iron 
pyrites. From all appearances it is the largest deposit of bis- 
muth ever discovered; we are going to work it, and it is our inten- 
tion to crush and concentrate the ore on the ground for the present, 
as we can bring it up to a product containing easily 40 per cent. of 
bismuth. 

Some specimens of the ore I have found to contain as hich as 
37 per cent., just as they came out of the mine. I look upon it as 
one of the most valuable discoveries yet made in the Territory. 

It is my intention, as soon as father returns from the mine, to | 
make you up acollection of specimens and forward to you, at which © 
time I may have more to say on the subject. 

Yours very truly, 
J. B. MEADER: 


P. S. I might mention that, as a general thing, the silver ores 
here are entirely free from gold, but there are one or two exceptions, 
The “Flagstaff” mine, situated not far from the “ Emma,” in Little 
Cottonwood Cafion, produces an ore which will, on the average, 
contain 58 per cent. of lead, 60 ounces silver, and 543, of an ounce of 
gold, while all the other mines in the immediate vicinity do not con- 


1871.] 345 [Greenleaf, 


tain a trace of gold. From the fact of gold existing in this isolated 
case, and the large proportion of oxide of ifon contained in the vein 
matter of the mine, I shall look for some discoveries of gold-bearing 
quartz veins near that locality. : 
Dr. C. F. Winslow is a resident of our city, and has become inter- | 
ested in the bismuth mine with us; he was here this evening and 
wishes to be remembered, and sends his kind regards. 
) J. B. M. 
Mr. Moses Woolson, recently from Salt Lake City, and 
present by invitation, confirmed this account, and said he had 
seen fine specimens of bismuth and sal ammoniac from Cotton- 
wood Cafion, where it was said a mountain of the latter sub- 
stance existed. He had seen finer specimens of azurite in 
that vicinity than he had ever before observed in America. 


In reply to a question of Dr. G. F. Waters, Dr. Jackson 
said there was rich tin ore in Winslow, Me., but the mine be- 
ing in the hands of poor and ignorant parties was not worked. 


Prof. G. F. H. Markoe exhibited some stereoscopic views 
of the interior of the “Mammoth Cave,” Kentucky, and de- 
scribed its most interesting features. 


Prof. Shaler also spoke of this and other similar caves. 
He had no doubt that in the region of the Kentucky cave 
many thousand miles of subterranean passages exist, which 
have been formed by water percolating through the limestone. 


The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. J. G. Swan, 
of Port Townsend, Washington Territory, and to Mr. Chas. 
Horton, of Boston, for gifts to the Museum. 


Section of Microscopy. October 11, 1871. 
Mr. Edwin Bicknell in the chair. Ten members present. 


Mr. Greenleaf stated, in reference to the circulation in 
Amebz, that he had seen the central forward current, but 


Bicknell.] 846 [October 11, 


never the two return side currents so often described. He 
considered these merely optical delusions. 


Mr. Stodder said he had lately tried collecting germs from 
the satmosphere. This last summer he had in his experi- 
ments used a glass vessel filled with ice, on which the moist- 
ure of the air condensed outside. In this manner nothing 
not in the air was obtained. In his examinations he had fol- 
lowed the methods given by Dr. Maddox in the February 
number of the Monthly Microscopical Journal for 1871. 

He, at first, placed the germs so obtained in molasses, but 
subsequent examination showed that this contained abundant 
apparent germs of its own. He next took pure crystals of 
- sugar dissolved in the water collected, and placed on a slide. 
To keep the moisture present, he had used the cell deseribed 
by Dr. Maddox. 

His first collection made August 11, developed in a few 
weeks mycelium and spores of fungi in great abundance. 

Other collections of the same date have as yet shown but 
few sions of life. He had found in these experiments that 
no animal life was developed. 


Mr. Greenleaf showed a simple growing slide. A small 
hole was drilled in the centre of a common slide, which was 
placed on the edge of a shallow tray containing water, with 
the hole below the water level; placing a thin glass cover 
over the hole, we have a self supplying water cell. 


Mr. Stodder exhibited some photographs by Dr. Wood- 
ward, of Amphipleura pellucida, Stauroneis Baleyii and S. 
Stodderit. 


Mr. Bicknell spoke of the difficulty in using the micro- 
scope vertically, a position which is often necessary, in such 
work as observing living animals in fluid, or in dissecting. 
He had obviated this difficulty by using an ordinary Nachét 
camera lucida, by placing the camera lucida on the eye piece 
in the usual manner, and looking into the underside of the 


1871] 347 (Bicknell, 


camera lucida, at an angle of 30° from horizontal, a perfect 
view of objects on the stage of the microscope is obtained. 
The position is thus very easy, and entirely free from the 
usual constraint attending the use of the microscope when in 
a vertical position. 

Mr. Bicknell also exhibited an achromatic condenser made 
in the form of an eye piece, and remarked : — 


Dr. Beale in “How to work with the Microscope,” has recom- 
mended the use of the “Kellner eyepiece” as a condenser, and says 
“by stopping off the greater part of the light passing through the 
condenser by placing over the upper lens a thin plate with a very 
small central hole, great advantage results in working with high 
powers.” In the condenser shown by Mr. Bicknell, the amount and 
direction of the light is controlled by a revolving diaphragm placed 
between the lenses, where the diaphragm is usually placed in an eye- 
piece; there are three holes of different sizes for direct light, one hole 
with a central stop for dark field illumination, which gives an admira- 
ble effect with objectives under 30° ang. ap., and there are two oval 
openings and an oblong opening, especially for use with binocular in- 
struments. The oval openings are opposite each other and are in use 
at the same time, giving two oblique pencils of light converging to a 
point. 

This condenser was used with various objectives from a 1} in. toa 
1-50th of an inch, giving ample light for the latter with the highest 
eyepicces. . 

With this condenser and a 1-5 of only 100° aneular aperture, I 
had seen the same test object that had required a 1-10 or 1-12, of 
150°, when used without it. 


October 18, 1871. 


Vice President Dr. Chas. T. Jackson in the chair. Fifty- 
five members present. 


Prof. Louis Agassiz delivered the following eulogy on Dr. 
J. E. Holbrook :— 


Agassiz.] 348 [October 18, | 


The death of Dr. Holbrook has been deeply felt by a very 
large circle of friends, and by those who are acquainted with 
the history of science during the last fifty years. But highly 
as he was appreciated by all to whom he was personally 
known, and by his scientific peers and colleagues, America 
does not know what she has lost in him, nor what she owed 
to him. A man of singularly modest nature, eluding rather 
than courting notice, he nevertheless first compelled Euro- 
pean recognition of American science by the accuracy and 
originality of his investigations. I well remember the im- 
pression made in Europe more than five and thirty years ago, | 
by his work on the North American reptiles. Before then, © 
the supercilious English question, so effectually answered | 
since, “ Who reads an American book?” might have been | 
repeated in another form, “ Who ever saw an American sci- 
entific work?” But Holbrook’s elaborate history of Ameri- 
can Herpetology was far above any previous work on the | 
same subject. In that branch of investigation Europe had at 
that time nothing which could compare with it. ) 

Born near the close of the last century, in 96, Dr. Hol- © 
brook entered upon his career as a student at a moment of 
unusual activity in scientific research in Hurope. Although 
his birth occurred at Beaufort, S. Carolina, he received, his 
early education at the North. His father, himself a New 
England man, brought him, when only a few months’ old, to 
Wrentham, Mass. There he grew up, and though his after 
fortunes led him back to his birthplace, and the greater part 
of his life was passed in South Carolina, he remained warmly 
attached to the home of his boyhood.- From school he went 
to Brown University, and after completing his college course 
there he studied medicine in Philadelphia, and subsequently 
practised for a short time with a physician in Boston ;_but he 
took a larger and more comprehensive view of his profession 
than that of the special practitioner, and he went abroad to 
seek a more general scientific culture. He went through the 
Medical School at Edinburg, and then travelled on the con- 


- 


£ 1871.) é 349 [ Agassiz. 


| tinent, making himself familiar with methods of study and 
| practice there. But perhaps nothing in all his European 


\ journey had greater influence upon his future life than his 


i. stay in Paris, where he worked at the Jardin des Plantes, and 


( became intimate with some of the leading scientific men of 
' the day. He formed relations then which ended only with 
' life, such as his friendship with Valenciennes, with. Dumeril, 
' Bibron and others. 


| 


On his return to America he was called to the Professor- 


ship of Anatomy in the Medical School of Charleston, South 


| 


Carolina. This appointment decided the outward tenor of 


his life, and led to the formation of his nearest and dearest 


ties. He there married Miss Harriet Rutledge. Her re- 
markable mental gifts, unusual cultivation and high-toned 
character, made this lady beloved and respected by all who 
ever knew her. Such a marriage naturally strengthened and 
confirmed the loftiest purposes of his life. The allusion may 
seem, perhaps, too personal to be introduced here, but these 
lives were so closely knit together that it is difficult to speak 
of one without the other. 

From this time forward, Dr. Holbrook, although he became 
an eminent practitioner in the city which had adopted him, 
was even more distinguished as a teacher of human anatomy, 
and finally renounced practice to devote himself to his pro- 
fessorship. Clear, simple and straight forward as a teacher, 
Intimate with the most advanced systems of thought and 
instruction, he inspired his students with a love of nature, 
and made them indeed, in not a few instances, naturalists and 
men of science, as well as physicians. His pupils are among 
the most cultivated men of the South. His loveable personal 
qualities endeared him to them, and many of his students 
lost in him not only a revered teacher, but a well beloved 
friend. 

He found time in the midst of his professional duties not 
only for the largest hospitality, as simple as it was cordial, of 
which I have personally the most tender and grateful mem- 


Agassiz.] 350 [October 18, 
ory, but also for his investigations in Natural History, and he 
published in successive years a series of admirably illustrated 
volumes upon Herpetology and Ichthyology. This series 
remains, and will ever remain, a standard work in Natural 
History. He was still engaged upon his Ichthyology of South 
Carolina, when all undertakings of that kind at the South 
were interrupted by the war. Dr. Holbrook was too calm 
and far-sighted to be swept along by any gust of passion or 
public excitement. For a long time he tried to stem the 
current, and hoped that a judicious and wise statesmanship 
might save the country from civil war. But when all hope 
of an amicable settlement was over, he shared the dangers of 
his friends, served as a physician in the Southern army, and 
old as he was then, seventy years of age, shrank from no 
hardship or exposure, slept under the army wagon and shared 
the rations of the common soldier. While he was away 
upon this service his wife died at Columbia, 8. Carolina, 
where she had taken refuge with her family and friends from 
the impending siege of Charleston. 

Nothing was more characteristic of Dr. Holbrook than the 
way in which he accepted the end of the war. There was 
not a taint of bitterness in his feeling, though the result had 
involved him in the common ruin. The struggle had been 
fairly fought, he considered the end as final, and was among 
those who were willing to make all reasonable efforts and 
concessions for the restoration of peace on a sound basis. 
He returned with unimpaired affection to his northern friends, 
for difference of opinion did not, with him, affect private 
relations in the least. Manly as he was in each word and 
act of his life, ever ready to stand by his convictions, the 
freeest discussion of disputed points was always possible with 
him because of his large liberality and gentle courtesy. 
After the war he resumed his habit of coming north for the 
summer. Those of us who had the privilege of being his 
intimate personal friends, will not easily forget the time 
when, after five years of separation under such painful cir- 


1871.] BOL [Morse. 


6 


cumstances, he crossed our thresholds again, and took his 
wonted place in our households. Thenceforth, to the year of 
his death, he passed his summers in New England. He was 
a cherished guest under many a northern roof, but his perma- 
nent northern home was at North Wrentham, now more 
commonly called Norfolk. There he died among his broth- 
ers and sisters and their families, in the village where his 
infancy and boyhood were passed, and where he was ever 
regarded with the tenderest affection and respect. 


Prof. Edward 8. Morse read the following paper : — 


NoTes ON THE EARLY STAGES OF AN ASCIDIAN (CYNTHIA 
PYRIFORMIS, RATHKE). By Epwarp S. Morse, Pu.D. 


PLATE I. 


In‘ the year 1866, Kowalevsky published a remarkable series of 
observations on the embryology and early stages of several Ascidians,! 
in which a structure similar, if not identical, with the type characters 
of the vertebrata was demonstrated. 

Professor Kupffer at first doubting, then not only confirms the 
validity of Kowalevsky’s observations, but adds additional facts show- 
ing that the nerve mass actually penetrates the tail of the embryo to 
a considerable length. ? 

The important facts revealed in these investigations have led the 
eminent naturalists above mentioned, as well as Heckel, Schultze, and 
others, to believe that the connecting’ link between the Vertebrates 
and Invertebrates had at last been established. 

Darwin, with prompt recognition has incorporated the facts in his 
last work on the “Descent of Man.” 

Since Kowalevsky’s memoir above referred to was published, he 
has traced out the embryology of Amphioxus ? in which the closest 
resemblance is seen between this low vertebrate and similar stages of 
the Ascidian. 

In these unsuspected relations between the Vertebrates and Ascid- 
ians through Amphioxus, it is interesting to remark that long ago 


1Kowalevsky, Mem. Acad. Imp. St. Petersburg, Series v11, Tom. xX, 3, 1866. 
2Kupfier. Schultze’s Archiv. fiir Mikrosk. Anatomie, Bd. 6, 1870. 
’ Mem. Acad. Imp. des Sci. St. Petersbourg, v11 Series, Tome x1, No 4. 


Morse.] 302 {October 18, 
Goodsir called attention to the resemblance between the phryangeal 
sac of the Ascidians, and that of Amphioxus.! He says “The Lance- 
let respires by receiving sea water into the anterior compartment 
of the intestinal tube—this cavity is kept dilated by the elasticity of 
the numerous filamentous ribs, and this dilatation may be inereased 
by the action of the super-imposed ventral bundles of the lateral 
muscles. It is contracted by the action of the abdominal muscle. 
This is a mode of respiration similar to that which prevails in the 
tunicated mollusks. It is interesting to observe that the branchial 
membrane of the Lancelet is exactly similar in its peculiar vascular- 
ity (ramifications at right angles) to that which lines the branchial 
cavity of the mollusks just specified. .=. . . As in Ascidiz the 
entrance of the intestino-respiratory canal is guarded by filaments.” 

In the recent removal of the Tunicates from the Mollusca, and 
incorporation of the same with the Vermes by Gegenbaur and others, 
it is interesting to recall from the memoir of Goodsir above cited, the 
fact that he calls attention to certain resemblances between Amphi- 
oxus and the Annulosa. 

“The plan of circulation is simple and in accordance with the 
primitive condition of the respiratory apparatus, both functions being 
performed in a manner closely resembling that observed in certain 
annulose animals. The dorsal vessel corresponding to the heart, or 
branchial artery, and the abdominal vessel to the aorta of the Lance- 
let.) “bid: py260: 

Any scrap of information connected with a subject so profoundly 
interesting justifies me in bringing forward a single observation 
made upon the young stages of a sessile Ascidian, Cynthia pyriformis, - 
at Eastport, Maine, July, 1870. 

John H. Gavit, Esq., of New York, kindly placed the larve in my 
hands for examination. The eggs were noticed in all stages, as well 
as free swimming larve in active motion. ‘These were easily seen 
with the unassisted eye and looked like gigantic spermatozoa. <A 
special series of observations in another line limited me to a single 
examination of these interesting forms. 

Kowalevsky in the paper above referred to represents on plate m1, 
fig. 26, a delicate membrane bordering the tail like a fin. This is 
represented as structureless. In the unfolded tail no traces of cartil- 
agenous centra are shown, though he represents these parts as more 


1 Goodsir on the Anatomy of Amphioxus. Royal Society of Edinburg, Vol. xv, 
part 1, page 259, 


1871.] D090 [Morse. 


or less conspicuous while still enclosed in the egg. Kupffer repre- 
sents the same condition of things in his figures.? 

Tn the many free larve examined by me, the axial segments were 
perfectly defined. Fig. 2, plate I, represents two as they rested on 
the slide. In these, forty seyments were counted, four of these seg- 
ments extending into the body proper, the anterior segment sending 
off three diverging processes toward the hemal, or ventral region. 
Beside the persistence of these segments after the animal was freed 
from the egg, a remarkable structure not hitherto figured, as far as I 
am aware, was noticed in the caudal fin, which vividly recalled the 
fine diverging rays as seen in the embryo fish. These rays were 
extremely delicate though plainly marked. They ran off nearly 
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the tail, and were confined 
to the last five segments, reaching beyond the last caudal seg- 
ment, to a distance equal to eight segments, as shown in figs. 3 
and 4. ‘Those who have seen the caudal fin of the embryo trout with 
its closely crowded ray lines, will bear witness to the strong similar- 
ity between the two. At the junction of the tail with the body, a 
series of rays of various lengths converging in pairs at the outer 
border of the membrang and running off at right angles to the longi- - 
tudinal axis, were also marked, though of extreme tenuity. This 
peculiar feature is represented in fig. 2. All of the segments were 
nucleated, and the tail appeared of uniform length. They were 
enclosed in a continuous investing sheath which disappeared at the 
caudal tip. This latter region was granulated. The peculiar black 
Spots, the ‘sinnesorgane, of which nothing is known, save that they are 
supposed to be sense organs of some sort, were seen, but nothing defi- 
nite was made out in regard to them. In fact the structure of the 
fin only was studied. 

Since the above lines were written, Mr. Gavit has placed in my 
hands for examination a number of embryos, from the same lot 
studied, which he preserved in a saturated solution of salt and water. 
These he has since mounted in cells with the same preservative fluid, 
and though a year and a half has elapsed since these specimens were 
immersed in the fluid, they are remarkably preserved and reveal cer- 
tain features not recognized in the living specimens. 

Fig. 6 represents one of these preserved specimens. All traces of 
segments have disappeared, the segments being irregularly broken 


1Tbid., Taf. 1x, fig. 16. 
PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 23 JUNE, 1872. 


Morse.] 304 [October 18, 


in'a series of short, cylindrical masses. Lowig and Kolliker! repre- 
sent the tail of a larval Botryllus with the segments divided in a 
median line, making a double row of segments running parallel, as 
well as a double row of smaller cells representing the investing mem- 
branes. This condition may represent a later stage, though all the 
specimens preserved by Mr. Gavit present this peculiar appearance. 

With the breaking up of the segments, a contraction of the axis has 
taken place at the tail, leaving a distinct cavity, this is more plainly 
shown in fig. 5, where double transverse lines are faintly seen indi- 
cating the former presence and position of the segments. The fin is 
seen as a continuous membrane bordering the entire outline of the 
animal. The fin rays are very conspicuous and commence just at 
the junction of the tail with the body and start off at right angles | 
with the longitudinal axis. At the tail they rapidly diverge and 
finally run parallel with the axis. ‘The wider marks of the fin rays | 
correspond nearly in number to the number of segments in the axis. | 
As these were invisible in the living specimens it is impossible to say | 
whether they agree as to number and position with the segments. 

In conclusion it is interesting to add that Savigny, Milne Edwards, | 
Van Beneden, Sars, Kolliker, Dalyell, Agassiz and many others 
have added their testimony in regard to the existence in many gen- 
era of Ascidians of active tailed larve, till it was supposed that this 
appearance of the embryo was characteristic of all Ascidians. 

Lacaze Duthiers,? however, describes the young of Molgula as pre- 
senting a remarkable exception ; the young not having a tail, nor 
showing any signs of activity, but escaping from the egg with the 
appearance of Ameba, by flowing out of the egg, a rounded plastic 
fluid mass, and remaining sedentary at the bottom of the vessel. 
Albany Hancock? on the contrary has observed the embryos of two 
species of Moleula in which they present all the features of the tsual 
active tailed larvee, and questions whether Lacaze Duthiers had Mol- 
gula at all; for certain reasons, which he presents, he thinks Duthiers, 
had another genus, Eugyra, under examination. Prof. A. E. Verrill 
however, in a series of valuable papers on the Ascidians of New 
England,* states in regard to Lissoclinum tenerum V. (gen. et sp. 
nov.) that “the eggs are few and relatively very large. The develop- 


1 Annales des Sciences Naturelle, 111 Series, Tome v, pl. 7. 

2 Comptes Rendus, Tome Lxx, p. 1154. 

3’ Annals and Magazine Nat. Hist. rv Series, No. xxxv, p. 353. 
* American Jour. Science and Arts, Jan. to June 1871, p. 445. 


- 1871.) : 355 [Morse. 


ment of such eggs is direct, without passing through a tadpole- 
shaped larval state,” with the following note, ‘‘with the alcoholic 
specimens it is not possible to ‘trace completely the early stages of 
this development, or to be perfectly certain that these ege-like bodies 
are genuine eggs, although some of them appear to contain at first, a 
germinal vescicle.” 

Further investigation will probably show that eggs passing through 
such an anomalous development are different in their nature, and it is 
not improbable that the simple Ascidian Eugyra and the compound 
Ascidian Lissoclinum will also present a kind of egg which passes 
through that course of development supposed to be typical of the 
class. Prof. Verrill, with his usual caution, expresses a doubt 
whether the egg-like bodies he observed, were genuine eggs, in the 
note just quoted. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. 


The embryos from which these were drawn were about eight one-hundredths 
of an inch in length. 

Fig.1. Showing body of embryo and anterior end of axial, cartilaginous rod. 

Fig. 2. Two embryos showing fin rays at the junction of the tail with the 
body. 

Figs. 8,4. Showing caudal fin. 

Fig. 5. Tail of preserved specimen showing contraction of axial rod, leaving 
cavity. 

Fig. 6. Entire drawing from preserved specimen, showing breaking up of 
axial rod with fin rays. 


Prof. Agassiz said that he studied the embryology of the 
Ascidians nearly twenty-five years ago, but that the appear- 
ances described by Prof. Morse were new to him and of great 
interest. He failed, however, to see more than a certain 
analogy between the embryo Ascidian and Vertebrate. He 
thought that if the Vertebrates had descended from the As- 
cidians there ought to be some traces of the process in the 
geological record but there was no evidence of this. 


Dr. Chas. Pickering remarked that the position of Amphi- 
oxus among the vertebrates seemed doubtful to him. 


Mr. F. W. Putnam said he thought there was no rea- 
son for regarding Amphioxus as an adult vertebrate. We 


Maynard.] 356 {October 18, 


should know the younger stages of the Myxinoids before 
attempting to decide the question. The Amphioxus has 
been only found in waters where some species of Myxingids 
were abundant, and perhaps is only a young stage of the 
latter. 


The following paper was presented : — 


A CATALOGUE OF THE Brirps or Coos Co., N. H., anp Ox- 
FORD Co., ME&.; WITH ANNOTATIONS RELATIVE TO THE | 
BREEDING Hapits, Micrations, &c. .By CU. J. Maynarp. 
Wits Notes py WM. BREWSTER. 


Although many catalogues of the birds of different localities in 
New England have appeared, yet we remain in ignorance as to the 
distribution of many of our birds, especially the rarer ones, during 
the breeding season. I therefore present the following catalogue, 
because it lies in my power to define more definitely than has hith- 
erto been done, the northern distribution of many species. The Al- 
leghanian and Canadian faunz meet in the localities of which I write, 
and I have ina measure been enabled by my observations to draw 
more clearly the line between them than has been done by pre-- 
vious authors. In this enterprise I have been greatly assisted by 
my friend, Mr. Wm. Brewster, of Cambridge, who has spent several 
summers in the region of the White Mountains and southern New 
Hampshire. 

Starting on the north-eastern coast of Maine, near Mt. Desert, the 
dividing line of these faune proceeds in a north-westerly direction 
along the southern margin of the mountain range which stretches 
across the State to the White Mountains. Here it declines to the 
south, reaching quite to Rye Beach. Then once more proceeds 
north-west along the western borders of the mountain range into Ver- 
mont, where it is not my present purpose to trace it. 

So abruptly is the line defined in many places by the range of 
mountains, that some birds which occur in abundance one side are 
found only as stragglers, or not at all, onthe other. This is invaria- 
bly the case in any country, especially where the dividing chain runs 
east and west. 

I have also given the southern distribution during winter of the 


i 
| 


| 1871.) 857 ‘ (Maynard. 


species mentioned, as far as they are known. In this connection I 
have been aided by notes made during two winters’ labor in Florida.! 
That the reader may better understand the distribution of a given 


| species, quotations are made from several eatalogues of neighboring 


localities, viz.: Mr. Wm. Couper’s Birds of Quebec, as published by 
Mr. E. A. Samuels, in the “ Birds of New England and adjacent 
States”; a list of the birds found at Norway, Oxford Co., Me., by 
Prof. A. E. Verrill (Proceedings of Essex Institute, Vol. 11., p. 136- 


| 160); and a Catalogue of the Birds observed near Hamilton, Canada 


West, by Mr. T. Mcllwraith (Proceedings of the Essex Inst., Vol. v., 
p- 78-96). These quotations are accredited to the individuals from 
whom they are taken, in every instance, for convenience in reference. 
I am also indebted to Mr. R. Deane, of Cambridge, Mr. H. B. Bailey, 
of Boston, and others, for valuable notes, to all of whom I have en- 
deavored to give due credit. 

It is not to be supposed that all the species occurring in eee lo- 
calities are given in the catalogue, but only those that have been 
observed. 

TURDIDZ. 


1. Turdus migratorius Linn. Robin. 

Not very common. I found it breeding the first week in June, 
about Lake Umbagog; some of the nests contained young, but in the 
majority the eggs were freshly laid. Indeed, as late as June 5th, I 
saw nests scarcely completed. It is given as nesting the second week 
in May, at Norway (Verrill). This wide difference between the 
former and latter places is surprising, inasmuch as Lake Umbagog 
is only thirty miles north of Norway. Although this bird is known 
to have a high northern distribution, it is not given a Couper as a 
bird of Quebec. 

2. Turdus fuscescens Steph. Wilson’s Thrush. 

Not common either at Norway (Verrill), Franconia (Brewster), or 
at Umbagog. Breeds probably at Upton, during the second week 
in June. This species is given as breeding commonly about Quebec 
(Couper). 

3. Turdus Pallasii Cab. Hermit Thrush. 

Not very common. Two nests were taken at Upton, on June Sth, 
containing three fresh eggs. Another, found on the 9th, contained 
three newly hatched young. All the nests were built on the tops of 
old, moss-covered logs. 


1 The results of the researches will soon appear in a volume entitled “The Birds 
of Florida,” by the author of this paper. 


Maynard. 308 [October 18, 


4. Turdus Swainsonii Cab. Olive-backed Thrush. 

The most common of all the Thrushes. Its loud, echoing, and me- 
lodious song greets the ear in every wooded valley. Breeds; nesting 
either in small evergreens or on the lower branches of higher ones. 
Several newly completed nests were found the first week in June, 
and on the 9th one was taken containing two fresh eggs. Although 
common at Franconia (Brewster), I do not think it is to be found in 
summer south of the neighboring mountain-range, for it is not given 
in the Norway list (Verrill). As this is its extreme southern limit 
during the breeding season, the specimens are of a much smaller 
size, and generally darker colors than those from further north.1 

5. Seiurus aurocapillus Sw. Golden-Crowned Thrush. 

Common. Breeds; a nest was found on June 9th, containing four | 
fresh eggs. 

6. Seiurus Noveboracensis Nutt. Water Thrush. * 

Common. Breeds; probably about the second week of June. 
Frequents thickets along the margins of the lakes and water-courses. 
It is extremely shy, and is seldom seen, for it runs nimbly about on 
the ground, beneath the thick undergrowth and fallen trees. Its 
beautiful warbling song, however, ‘always betrays its hiding-place. 
‘Common at Franconia in summer” (Brewster). Said to breed 
somewhat rarely at Norway (Verrill). Given as a common summer 
resident at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). 


SAXICOLIDZA. 


7. Sialia sialis Bd. Blue-Bird. 

Not very common at Umbagog. Breeds. More numerous at Nor- 
way (Verrill). ‘Only seen here (Quebec) in early Spring, while 
on its passage to the West. Does not breed in Lower Canada.” 
(Couper). 


PARIDA. 


8. Parus atricapillus Linn. Black-capped Titmouse. Chick- 
a-dee. 

Common. Breeds. Two nests, containing nearly fresh egos, were 
taken June 18th. I found it very common in Coos County, New 


1 This merely illustrates a well known law in nature; southern born birds, of the 
same species, being always smaller and darker than those born further north. This 
is especially noticeable upon comparing birds taken in Massachusetts during the 
breeding season, with those from the southern portion of Florida. 


1871.] 859 [Maynard. 


Hampshire, in November. Specimens taken during the breeding 
season at Upton have less rufous on the under parts than those taken 
at the same time in Massachusetts; there is, however, no appreciable 
difference in size. 

9. Parus Hudsonicus Forster. Hudson-Bay Titmouse. 

I found it quite common, and associating in flocks with the preced- 
ing species in the heavily-wooded mountain valleys of Errol, New 
Hampshire, during the latter part of October, 1869. I also took two 
specimens at Albany, Maine, on October 22d, but did not see it in 
this place previous to this date. Common at Quebec (Couper) dur- 
ing autumn. Resident near Calais (Boardman). Not given as a 
bird of Norway (Verrill), or of Hamilton (MclIlwraith). Mr. Brews- 
ter took a single specimen at Concord, Massachusetts, on October 
29th; 1870. The song-note of this species somewhat resembles that 
of P. atricapillus; it is harsher, however, and more quickly given. 


SITTIDZ. 


10. Sitta Carolinensis Gm. White-bellied Nuthatch. 

Common resident. Breeds (Verrill)» Common at Errol, New 
Hampshire, and Oxford County in October and November. Tid not 
see it at Uptonin June. Not given as occurring at Quebec (Couper), 
or at Gorham and Franconia (Brewster). 

11. Sitta Canadensis Linn. Red-bellied Nuthatch. 

Very common resident. Breeds; probably at Umbagog during the 
latter part of May. This species has a more northern distribution 
than S. Carolinensis, and does not occur so,far south either during the 
breeding season or in winter. It was common in the same localities 
as the preceding at Errol, in November, 1870. They were both seen 
in flocks, yet m no instance did I find them associating together. It 
changes its usual sharp, querulous note during the breeding season 
for one more deliberate. Indeed, when heard in the deep woods 
where the bird is always found, it sounds very grave and solemn. 


CERTHIIDZ. 


12. Certhia familiaris Linn. Brown Creeper. 

Common at Upton in summer, where it must breed. Given asa 
common resident at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Not common, but 
breeding at Norway (Verrill), and as common and breeding at Que- 
bec (Couper). Sawa few at Bethel in October, but did not meet 
with it in Coos County a little later in the season. Massachu- 


Maynard.] 360 (October 18, 


setts is probably its southern limit during the breeding season. North, — 
it extends probably to the barren grounds. During summer ‘this bird” 
sings a low, warbling song, but at other seasons it has only the usual 
sharp, hissing note. 


TROGLODYTIDZ. 


13. Troglodytesaédon Vieill. House Wren. — 

Common summer resident (Verrill). Rare at Umbagog, and as it 
is not given at Quebec by Couper, this may be its extreme northern 
limit. f 

The so-called 7. ‘‘Americana”’ is given by Verrill as a bird of this 
section. This is, however, a doubtful species founded probably on 
specimens of 7’.aédon of a larger size, and generally darker colors.t 

14. Troglodytes hyemalis Vieill. Winter Wren. 

Common at Franconia and Gorham (Brewster). Very common 
at Umbagog during the breeding season. Ialso found it quite abun- 
dant at Bethel, in October, 1869. Given as breeding commonly at 
Quebec (Couper). Not given as nesting at Hamilton (Mcllwraith), 
or at Norway (Verrill). The mountain range south of Upton may, 
therefore, form the barrier of its extreme southern limit during sum- 
mer. ‘This bird frequents the thickets and heaps of fallen trees, gen- 
erally in the deep woods. It is extremely shy, and were it not for 
its most beautiful and continuous warbling song, which is heard at 
intervals throughout the day, it would pass almost unnoticed; for 
upon the approach of man it instantly hides. Indeed, it often re- 
mains concealed while singing, for I have, in many instances, stood 
within a few yards of its retreat, and listened to its indescribable 
melody without being able, with the closest attention, to detect the 
singer. It probably deposits its eggs in those secluded spots. 


‘MOTACILLIDE. 


15. Anthus Ludovicianus Licht. Tit Lark. 

Given as common at Quebec (Couper) in autumn, and at Hamil- 
ton (McIlwraith), during spring and fall. Not given as occurring at 
Norway (Verrill). Idid not meet with it either in Oxford or Coos 
counties during October and November of 1869. I have always 
found this species occurring on the sea-coast much more abundantly 
during the migrations than inland, which may account for its non- 
appearance in the above-named localities. It winters in Florida. 


1 See author’s “ Naturalists’ Guide,’’ Part II., Page 94. 


1871. 361 [Maynard. 


SYLVIIDZ. 


16. Regulus calendulus Licht. Ruby-crowned Wrén. 

Given merely as a bird of passage at Quebec (Couper), Hamilton 
(MelIlwraith), and (Verrill). I found it common at Bethel on my ar- 
rival there October 13th, 1869, but by the 22d they had all disap- 
peared. It was not to be found at Umbagog in June. This bird 
probably breeds far to the north, yet it winters in the Carolinas and 
northern Florida, where they are very numerous. They do not visit 
the southern section of this latter named State in numbers, and I 
have never found it on the Keys. 

17. Regulus satrapa Licht. Golden-crowned Wren. 

Quite common at Umbagog in June. Breeds; and judging from 
the condition of female specimens taken, lays its eggs about June 
1st. Although we found several pairs in the thick hemlock woods, 
that evidently had nests in the immediate vicinity, yet we were un- 
able to discern them. It probably builds in the long hanging moss 
that grows so abundant on the trees in these northern forests. Given 
as perhaps breeding rarely at Norway (S. I. Smith). Not given as 
breeding or wintering at Hamilton (MclIlwraith), or Quebec (Cou- 
per). Although this species does not visit so high latitude as the 
preceding, it is much more limited in its migrations; many spend the 
winter in Massachusetts, and from thence it. scatters southward to the 
Carolinas, which is nearly its southern limit, for only stragglers ever 
reach northern Florida. The song note during the breeding season 
is a series of low, shrill chirps, terminating in a lisping warble. 


SYLVICOLIDZA. 


18. Mniotilta varia Vieill. Black and White Creeper. 

Not common, but breeding at Norway (Verrill). Breeds rarely in 
the neighborhood of Quebec (Couper). Common spring and autumn 
at Hamilton (Mellwraith). We did not see it at Upton in June. 
Mr. Brewster never met it at Gorham or Franconia. 

19. Parula Americana Bon. Blue-yellow backed Warbler. 

Common at Upton during the breeding season. Not given by 
Couper at Quebec. Not common during the breeding season at Nor- 
way (Verrill). Does not breed at Hamilton (MclIlwraith). Does not 
breed very far north. The majority winter in the West Indies and 
adjacent islands. It passes through Florida in autumn about Octo- 
ber, and in spring during early March. Some few remain all winter 
at Key West. 


Maynard.] 362 [October 18, 


20. Geothlypis trichas Cab. Maryland Yellow-throated 
Warbler. 

Common during summer at Norway (Verrill), Hamilton (Mell- 
wraith), and Quebec (Couper). Not very common at Umbagog in 
June. Breeds about June 8th. A widely distributed eas ipo 
ing over nearly the whole continent of North America. bs 

21. Geothlypis Philadelphia Baird. Mourning Warbler. 

Common at Umbagog in June. Breeds. Mr. Brewster has taken 
the nearly fledged young at Franconia in spring (Mcllwraith). Not 
given at Quebec (Couper), or at Norway (Verrill). It frequents the 
bushes along fences, stone walls and the edges of woods. The male 
may be seen in the early morning perched on the top rail of a fence, 
or dead branch of a tree singing. The song is loud and clear, some- 
what resembling that of the Water Thrush. 

22. Helminthophaga ruficapilla Baird. Nashville War- 
bler. 

Not very common at Umbagog during summer. Breeds about 
June ist. Rare at Norway during summer (Verrill). Common at 
Hamilton (MclIllwraith), Franconia and Gorham (Brewster). Not 
given by Couper at Quebec. This is no doubt the northern limit of 
this species. 

23. Helminthophaga peregrina Cab. Tennessee Warbler. 

Very common at Umbagog during the breeding season. Also at 
Milltown, Maine (Boardman). Not given by MelIlwraith at Hamil- 
ton, Couper at Quebec, by Verrill at Norway, or by Brewster at Gor- 
ham and Franconia. ‘This beautiful little species breeds at Upton; 
two or three females were taken about June 8th, which showed 
every evidence of incubating, yet we were unable to discover the 
nest, though diligent search was made for it in localities near where 
it must have been built. The nest is probably placed on the ground 
after the manner of all this genus. This bird is found in all wooded 
localities in the region north of the neighboring mountain range, 
which is without doubt its southern limit during the breeding season. 
Its song bears a resemblance to that of H. rujficapilla, only the notes 
of the first part are more divided and the latter part is shriller. The 
male, while singing, is generally perched on some high, dead branch. 
In this habit it resembles the H. ruficapilla and H. chrysopiera. 


1871.J 363 [Maynard. 


24. Dendcroeca virens Baird. Black-throated Green War- 
bler. aves 

Not very common at Norway (Verrill), or at Upton during the 
breeding season. Seen only during the migrations at Quebec (Cou- 
per), and Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Massachusetts is prebably the 
southern limit of this species during summer. It may breed as far 
north as the barren ground region. : 

25. Dendroeca cerulescens Baird. Black-throated Blue 
Warbler. 

Common, and breeding at Upton and Quebec (Couper). Not com- 
mon at Norway during the summer (Verrill). <A spring and autumn 
migrant at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). This is perhaps another north- 
ern species that finds its southern limits in this region during sum- 
mer. It winters in the West Indies and adjacent islands, passing 
through the western section of Massachusetts (Allen) more abun- 
dantly than the eastern, and so on through the intervening States 
into Florida. A few remain at Key West all winter. 

26. Dendrceeca coronata Gray. Yellow-rumped Warbler. 

Common during the breeding season at Upton. Breeds. Not known 
to breed at Quebec (Couper), Hamilton (Mellwraith), or at Nor- 
way (Verrill). They nest about the second week in June, at Upton. 
Three nests were found by Mr. H. B. Bailey, on June 7th and 8th. 
They were all built in low spruce trees, about four feet from the 
ground; and were rather neat structures, being made of hemlock 
twigs and lined with a few feathers. They each contained four fresh 
eges. Several other nests were taken by Mr. Bailey between the 8th 
and 15th. This is also a strictly northern species, but rarely 
breeds south of the White Mountain Range. They winter in great 
numbers in Florida and the West Indies, but I did not find it at Key 
West or on any other of the Florida Keys. 

27. Dendreeca Blackburnie Baird. Mrs. Blackburn’s War- 
bler. 

Common at Upton. Breeds. Not uncommon at Norway during 
the summer (Verrill). Seen only on the migrations at Quebec (Cou- 
per), and Hamilton (Mcllwraith). This highly-colored warbler fre- 
quents the tops of high trees in the thick woods ; it is therefore 
difficult to obtain. I think it must build its nest on the topmost 
limbs of the spruce or hemlock, where it is concealed by the hanging 


Maynard.] 364 [October 18, 


moss, as we were unable to detect it, although the bird was plentiful. 
It has a very pretty song. 

28. Dendreeca castanea Baird. Bay-breasted Warbler. 

Most abundant of the Sylvicolide at Umbagog. Breeds. Ob- 
served only in spring at Quebec (Couper). Seen rather rarely in 
spring at Hamilton (Mclllwraith). Very rare at Norway (Verrill). 
Two nests of this species were taken at Umbagog on June 8th. The 
tree selected by the birds belonging to the first nest discovered, as a 
summer home, stood by the side of a cart-path in the woods. My at- 
tention was attracted to it while walking along, by seeing the female 
fly into the tree and alight on the nest which was then (June 3d) but 
just completed. It was placed on the horizontal branch of a hem- 
lock twenty feet from the ground, and five or six feet from the trunk 
of the tree. On June 8th the nest was taken, and then contained 
three fresh eggs. The second nest was found by Mr. Brewster who, 
having shot a female that exhibited signs of nesting, searched for the 
nest, and discovered it in a hemlock tree on the side of a thickly 
wooded hill. This nest contained only two fresh eggs. It was_like- 
wise placed on a horizontal branch about fifteen feet from the ground. 
The nests are both large for so small a bird, and resemble that of 
the Purple Finch. The first one is composed outwardly of fine,dead 
twigs, from the larch,among which are scattered a little of the long 
tree-moss. It is very smoothly and neatly lined with black, fibrous 
roots, the seed stalks of a species of ground moss, a few hairs of 
Lepus Americana, and a single piece of green moss that grows in 
damp woods. The dimensions are; diameter externally, six inches; 
internally, three inches ; depth, externally, two and one-half inches; 
internally, one and one-fourth. It contained three eggs, of which the 
following is a description: No. 1 is bluish green, thickly spotted 
with brown over the entire surface, with a ring of nearly confluent 
blotches of brown and lilac at the larger end. The dimensions are: 
71 X 53.1 No. 2 resembles No. 1, with the exception that there are 
some amber spots in the ring around the larger end, and the smaller 
end isimmaculate. Dimensions, 65 X 50. No. 3 is less spotted than 
the others, and has a few brown lines on the larger end. Dimen- 
sions, 70 X 50. No.1 is the most perfect in form. No. 2 rather 
rounder, while No. 3 is long for the width. The second nest also 
resembles the first, but contains a few stalks of grass near the centre. 


1 Hundredths of inches. 


1871.] | 365 [Maynard, 


It is lined with the same materials as the other, excepting, the green 
moss. The dimensions are; diameter externally, five and one-half 
inches; internally, two and one-half; depth externally, three inches; 
internally, one and one-half. Description of the eggs : No. 1, bluish 
green, with a ring of spots and blotches of brown and lilac around 
the larger end. The remainder of the surface is somewhat sparsely 
spotted and blotched with the same, the smaller end being nearly im- 
maculate. A few of the spots are of a deep umber color. Dimen- 
sions, 70 X 53. No. 2 same as No. 1, but with the spots on the larger 
end more diffused, and nearly covering it, the remainder of the egg 
much less spotted than in the preceding. Dimensions, 70 X 52. 
Both of the eggs are perfect inform. Upon dissecting the female 
two more eggs were found that would have been laid. 

Another nest was found, but contained no eggs. It was built in a 
similar position as the two preceding, and composed of much the 
same materials. Its dimensions are ; diameter externally, five and 
one-half inches; internally, two and one-half. 

Mr. R. Deane found a warbler’s nest at Umbagog, in June, 1870, 
which upon comparison with those taken the present season, proves 
it to be without doubt that of this species. It was placed in a hem- 
lock somewhat higher than those already described, but was con- 
structed in the same manner. 

It contained six eggs. The following is a description of four 
which are now before me. No. 1, bluish green, spotted and blotched 
on the larger end with lilac, brown and umber. The remainder of 
the surface finely spotted with the same, smaller end nearly immacu- 
late. Dimensions, 70 X 55. No. 2 almost a counterpart of No. 1 in 
colorations. Dimensions, 72 X 55. No. 3 is also similar in mark- 
ings, there is, however, an irregular ring of deep umber spots around 
the larger end. Dimensions 75 X 55. No.4 is very different from 
the others. The ground color is the same, but it is blotched with 
pale brown and lilac, thickly at the larger end and more sparsely 
towards the smaller where the spots are finer. There is also a large 
irregular blotch of pale brown on one side of the larger end. Di- 
mensions, 72 X 53. Nos. 1 and 3 are most perfect in form, No. 2 is 
narrow for the length, while No. 4 is short for the width. 

These birds are found in all the wooded sections of this region, 
where they frequent the tops of tall trees. The first part of the song 
is like that of the Black-poll Warbler, but it has a terminal warble 


Maynard.) 3 6 6 [October 18, 


similar to that of the Redstart, to which it bears a striking resem- 
blance, with the exception that it is given with less energy. This 
species seems to be confined during the breeding season to the region 
just north of the White Mountains range. 

This species, together with G'eothlypis Philadelphia and Helminthoph- 
aga peregrina, seems to pursue a very eccentric course during the mi- 
grations. Avoiding the eastern and middle States, the majority pass 
along the borders of the Great Lakes, through Ohio, southern Illinois 
(Ridgway +), down the Mississippi Valley, across into Texas, and so 
on into Mexico and Central America where they winter. Returning 
in spring they (at least D. castanea) pursue a more southern route, 
keeping along the coast as far as the New England States, where- 
they ascend the Connecticut Valley, generally avoiding eastern Mas- 
sachusetts. 

29. Dendreeca striata Baird. Black-polled Warbler. 

Not common at Umbagog, Hamilton) (McIlwraith), or at Nor- 
way (Verrill) during the migrations. Breeds at Quebec (Couper). 
They. disappeared from Upton about June 5th. This species breeds 
very far north, probably in Labrador. Some few winter in the West 
Indies, but the greater part pass into South America. I have never 
seen it in Florida or on the Keys. 

30. Dendrceca pinus Baird. Pine Warbler. 

Common during the migrations at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Prob- 
ably occurs rarely in the southern sections of Oxford county, but this 
is far north of its usual range. This species breeds from Florida to 
Massachusetts. They winter in great numbers in the pine woods of 
the main-land of Florida. 4 

sl. Dendreeca Pennsylvanica Baird. Chestnut-sided War- 
bler. 

Common at. Hamilton (Mcllwraith ) during the summer. 
Rather common at Norway (Verrill), but not very abundant at Um- 
bagog or at Quebec (Couper). Breeds at all the above mentioned 
localities; it may, however, find its northern limit somewhere about 
Quebec. This species mainly winters in Mexico and Central Amer- 
ica. They, however, follow the coast during both migrations. 

32. Dendreeca estiva Baird. Yellow Warbler. 

Given as abundant by Mcllwraith, at Hamilton, Couper at Que- 
bec, and Verrill at Norway. Although this bird is known to have 


iIn Mss., June, 1870. 


a 


1871.] 367 [Maynard. 


a high northern distribution, we did not see it at Upton, but it was 
common at Bethel about June 4th. This is another species that finds 
its winter home in South America. 

33. Dendroeca maculosa Baird. Black and Yellow Warbler. 

Common at Umbagog, Quebec (Couper), and rather common at 
Hamilton (MclIlwraith), during the breeding season. Rare at Nor- 
way (Verrill) only during the migrations. A nest of this species 
was taken during the second week in June, 1870, at Umbagog, by 
Messrs. R. Deane and H. B. Bailey. The following is the descrip- 
tion of the nest and eggs kindly given to me by Mr. Deane. “The 
nest was placed on the forked branch of a low spruce, about three 
feet from the ground on arising piece of land, leading from a wood 
path. The nest, which contained four eges, was constructed of dry 
grass, spruce twigs, roots, etc., and was lined with fine black roots, 
the whole being a coarse structure for so dainty a looking warbler. 
The eggs were more spherical than any warbler’s I have ever seen. 
The ground color is a creamy white, blotched sparingly over with 
large spots of lilac and umber. 

“The dimensions were: No. 1, 62 * 52; No. 2, 61 X 52; No. 8, 
62 X 503 No. 4, 63 X 52.” 

Another nest, taken by Mr. Brewster, June 8th, 1871, was built in 
a similar. locality, but was placed on a low hemlock about four feet 
from the ground. The following is a description of the nest. It is 
composed outwardly of a few scattering, dead twigs of larch, inter- 
woven with stalks of weeds and dry grass. It is lined with black 
horse hairs. Mr. Brewster says ‘‘this dark lining formed a strange 
contrast with the faded appearance of the outer part. The whole 
structure is very light and airy in appearance, strongly reminding 
one of the nest of D. Pennsylvanica.” Dimensions of the nest are; 
external diameter, three inches; internal diameter;two;external depth, 
one and three quarter inches; internal depth, one and one-quarter. 
The descriptions of the eggs are: No. 1, ashy-white, with a ring of 
brown and clouded lilac around the larger end. The remainder of 
the surface is thinly mottled with minute spots of brown. Dimen- 
sions 65 & 50. No. 2 similar to No. 1, but with a large irregular 
blotch of burnt sienna on one side of the larger end. Dimensions, 
62 47. No. 3, not so thickly marked with spots as the others, but 
otherwise similar. Dimensions, 64 X 46. No. 4, is more sparingly 
spotted than any. Dimensions, 65 X 48. 


Maynard.] 368 [October 18, 


A nest that I found June 7th, 1871, built in a small hemlock that 
grew on a hillside, was composed from grasses and fibrous roots and 
is lined with horse hair. Its dimensions are: external, three and 
three-fourth inches; internal, two inches; external depth two and one- 
fourth inches; internal, one and one-half. The eges, four in number, 
were fresh. The descriptions are: No.1, ashy-white, circle of brown 
and pale lilac spots or blotches around the larger end, remainder of 
the surface sparsely spotted with the same. Dimensions 65 x 53. 
No. 2 is nearly the same as No. 1. Dimensions, 67 X 50. No. 3 has 


the spots extending more to the smaller end. Dimensions, 64 x 50. 


No. 4 is somewhat like the others, it is, however, marked with lines 
of deep umber and has a large irregular blotch of very pale brown 
on one side near the smaller end. Dimensions, 65 X 52. 

I found a second nest June,8th, by the side of a public road, near 
'a wood. This also was built in a low hemlock not over four feet 
from the ground. The nest is composed of larch twigs, tree moss, 
and silk from the nests of spiders, all closely interwoven. It is 
smoothly lined with black and brown fibrous roots. Its dimensions 
are: external diameter, four inches; internal, two and one-fourth. 
External depth,two and one-fourth inches; internal, one and one-half. 
The eggs were four in number, and almost exact counterparts of 
those already described. Both of these nests were very compact 
and pretty structures. The White Mountain range is the southern 
limit of this bird in summer. During the spring and autumn migra- 
tions it follows D. casianea, and spends the winter in the same local- 
ity. 

34. Dendrosca palmarum Baird. Yellow Redpoll Warbler. 

Common at Norway (Verrill), spring and fall. Rare at Hamilton 
(McIlwraith) during the same seasons. Not.given as a bird of Que- 
bec by Couper. We did not see it at Uptonin June. I think this 
species breeds in the barren grounds of Labrador, along the sea- 
coast. It winters in large numbers in Florida,on the Keys, and at 
the West Indies and adjacent islands. 

Perhaps the Cerulean Warbler (D. cerulea) may occur, as it is 
given as a bird of Quebec (Couper), and of Hamilton (Mcellwraith). 

35. Perissoglossa tigrina Baird. Cape May Warbler. 

Common at Umbagoe. Breeds. Rare at Hamilton (Mcllwraith), 


and in southern Maine (Boardman). Not given by Couper at Que- 


bec. This species frequents the thick evergreen woods, keeping in 
the tops of the trees. I think it must breed high above the ground 


1871.] 369 [Maynard. 


in some of the immense spruces or hemlocks of this region. Fe- 
males were taken the second week in June that bore marks of incu- 
bating, yet we were unable to find its nest. This species winters in 
the West Indies, and afew remain at Key West, where they are 
abundant during the migrations. I think it must reach its winter 
quarters by way of the Great Lakes and Mississippi Valley, as it 
does not occur in any numbers in Massachusetts. 

36. Myiodioctes pusillus Bon. Black-capped Fly-catching 
Warbler. , 

Not common at Norway (Verrill) and Gorham (Brewster) during 
summer. Rare at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Not given at Quebec 
(Couper). We did not see it at Umbagog in June. Not found at 
Franconia (Brewster). 

37. Myiodioctes Canadensis Aud. Canada Fly-catching 
Warbler. ~ 

Common at Umbagog, also at Quebec (Couper), and at Norway 
(Verrill). Notrare at Hamilton (MclIlwraith). It breeds at all these 
places. Nests at Umbagog about the second week in June. It 
probably winters in Mexico and Central America. 

38. Setophaga ruticilla Sw. Redstart. 

Common at Upton, Quebec (Couper), Hamilton (MclIlwraith) and 
at Norway (Verrill). Breeds in all these localities. Winters in the 
West Indies. Passes through Florida on its way north in April. 


HIRUNDINID Z&. 


39. Hirundo horreorum Bart. Barn Swallow. 

Abundant at Umbagog. 
40. Petrochelidon lunifrons Bd. Cliff Swallow. 

Common everywhere. Breeds; nesting at Umbagog about the 
middle of June. 

41. Tachycineta bicolor Cab. White-bellied Swallow. 

Common everywhere. Breeds at Umbagog, nesting in old decay- 
ing stubs that have their bases submerged in the lake. It either ex- 
cavates a hole for itself, or selects one formerly used by a wood- 
pecker. I have seen two holes in one stub. Lays its eggs the 
second week in June. — 

42. Cotyle riparia Boie. Bank Swallow. 

Common everywhere. 

PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H. — VOL. XIV. 24 JUNB, 1872. 


Maynard.] 370 [October 18, 


43. Progne subis Bd. Purple Martin. 
Also common everywhere. All of the above Hirundinide have a 
wide distribution, and winter far south. 


VIREONID. 
44. Vireo olivaceus’ Vieill. Red-eyed Vireo. 


Abundant at Umbagog, Hamilton (Mcllwraith) and Norway (Ver- 
rill). Breeds. Not common at Quebec (Couper). They winter 


in South America. 

45. Vireo gilvus Bonap. Warbling Vireo. 

Common at Norway (Verrill), and Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Not 
found at Umbagog or at Quebec. I think the White Mountain range 
forms its northern limit. Probably winters far south. 

46. Vireosolitiareus Vieill. Solitary Vireo. 


_ Common at Umbagog and at Franconia (Brewster). Breeds. | 
Not given by Couper at Quebec. Rare at Hamilton in spring (Mcll- | 
wraith). Not common at Norway (Verrill). Massachusetts forms | 
the extreme southern limit of this species during the breeding sea- | 

4 


son. It winters in Florida. 


AMPELIDZ. 
47. Ampelis cedrorum Baird. Cedar Bird. 


Common at Hamilton (MclIlwraith), Quebec (Couper), Norway 


(Verrill), and Umbagog. Breeds in all these places; nesting in the 


last named about the 15th of June. 


The Bohemian Wax-wing may occur in winter, as it is given by | 


Couper at Quebec, and by McIlwraith at Hamilton. 


LANIIDZ. 
48. Collurio borealis Baird. Northern Shrike. 


Common at Bethel and in Coos county in autumn and winter. | 


Breeds far north. 


TANAGRIDZE. 


49. Pyrangarubra Vieill. Scarlet Tanager. 


Common at Hamilton (MclIlwraith). Rare at Norway (Verrill), | 


Umbagog and Quebec (Couper), which place must be its northern 
limit. The majority pass the winter in South America. 


1871.] 871 [Maynard. 


FRINGILLIDZ. 


50. Pinicola Canadensis Cab. Pine Grossbeak. 

Common in winter in Coos and Oxford counties, arrives from the 
north about the 1st of November. This species has a high northern 
range in summer. 

51. Carpodacus purpureus Gray. Purple Finch. 

Common at Umbagog, Norway (Verrill) and Quebec, (Couper). 
Not common in summer at Hamilton (MclIlwraith). This species 
has a northern distribution, and does not migrate very far south in 
winter. 

52. Chrysomitris tristis Bon. Gold Finch. 

Common, and breeds at Umbagog, Norway (Verrill), and Quebec 
(Couper). It does not winter at any of these places. Resident at 
Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Winters from Massachusetts to southern 
Florida. 

53. Chrysomitris pinus Bon. Pine Finch. 

Common at Umbagog in June. Migrant at Norway (Verrill). 
Winter visitant at Hamilton (MclIlwrath), and at Quebec (Couper). 
Not common at Franconiain summer. Breeds at Gorham in Au- 
gust (Brewster). This species is quite irreeular in its migrations, 
being governed by the supply of food.1 Sometimes they barely 
reach Massachusetts in winter, and at other seasons occur in Florida. 

54. Curvirostra Americana Wils. 

Common at Umbagog, according to Mr. Deane, during the summer 
of 1870. Very commen at Franconia in summer (Brewster). Win- 
ter visitor at Norway (Verrill), Hamilton (Mcllwraith), and Quebec 
(Couper). I did not see it at Bethel, or in Coos county in October 
and November, 1869. 

55. Curvirostra leucoptera Wils. White-winged Crossbill. 

Very numerous at Bethel, and in Coos county in October and No- 
vember, 1869. Common at Umbagog in June, 1870 (Deane), and at 
Franconia in summer (Brewster). Common in winter at Norway 
(Verrill), and Quebec (Couper). Rare in winter at Hamilton (Mc- 
Iiwraith). Both of these species sometimes migrate far south of 
Massachusetts in winter. The latter species, however, has a higher 
northern distribution than the former.” 


1See ‘‘Naturalist’s Guide,’’ Part II, page 10. 
2 For remarks upon these species, see ‘‘ Naturalist’s Guide ’’ Part II, page 112. 


Maynard.] 312 [October 18, 

56. Asgiothus linarus Cab. Redpoll Linnet. 

Common in winter throughout the New England States during cer- 
tain seasons. ‘They disappeared entirely from Bethel and Albany in 
the latter part of November, 1869. I did not see it in Coos county 
during the first week in November. It is found far north. 

57. Plectrophanes nivalis Meyer. Snow Bunting. 

Common in winter throughout New England. I found it in Coos 
county in the latter part of October, 1869, although generally breed- 
ing far north. This species may breed on the tops of some of the 
ranges of Maine and New Hampshire. I have a note of a well au- 
thenticated instance of a large flock being seen on Mount Katahdin, 
in early August, 1869. 

58. Plectrophanes Lapponicus Sel. Lapland Long-spur. 

This species may perhaps occur, as it is given at Hamilton (MclIl- 
wraith). I have ever found it, however, a bird of the coast. 

59. Passerculus savanna Bon. Savannah Sparrow. 

Common in summer at Norway (Verrill), Hamilton (Mcllwraith), 
and Gorham (Brewster). Not rare at Umbagog, which is without 
doubt nearly its southern limits, for it is not given by Couper as a 
bird of Quebec. It winters in the southern States. 

60. Pocecetes gramineus Baird. Grass Finch. 

Common throughout New England. Breeds from Maryland to the 
far north. Winters in the southern States. 

61. Zonotrichia leucophrys Sw. White-crowned Sparrow. 

Common, and breeding at Quebec (Couper). Not rare spring and 
autumn at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). Not common at Norway (Ver- 
rill), during the same seasons. I saw one or two specimens at Al- 
bany, in October, 1869. Not found at Upton in June. This bird 
seems to occupy the eastern and seaboard portions of the north dur- 
ing the breeding season. Quebec is nearly its southern limit at this 
time. It probably winters in the south-western States, pursuing 
much the same course to reach them as is followed by D. castanea. 

62. ZGonotrichia albicollis Bon. White-throated Sparrow. 
“Peabody Bird.” 

Common and breeding throughout the northern portions of the 
New England States. Does not breed at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). 
Occurs plentifully from about latitude 14° to the far north, keeping 
the middle districts, being replaced on the eastern coast by Z. leuco- 
phrys and on the western by Z. Gambelii. It winters in the southern 
States, east of the Mississippi. Breeds at Umbagog the first week in 


1871.] 373 [Maynard. 


June. Builds on the ground by the side of a stump or log; fre- 
quently by the road-side. 

63. Junco hyemalis Sclater. Blue Snow-bird. 

Common and breeding in the district north of Franconia. Nests 
in early June. Generally builds on the ground, but Mr. H. B. 
Bailey found one that was placed in a low spruce four feet from the 
ground. Disappeared from Bethel in 1869 about November 10th. 
Winters from Massachusetts to the Carolinas. 

64. Spizella monticola Baird. Tree Sparrow. 

Did not see it at Umbagog in June. Breeds far north. Given 
as, wintering at Norway (Verrill), and at Hamilton (Mcllwraith). 
Disappeared from Bethel at the same time as the preceding; asso- 
ciating with them while they remained, in large flocks. Winters 
in the southern, New England and middle States. 

65. Spizella pusilla Bon. Field Sparrow. 

Common at Norway (Verrill), and Hamilton (MclIlwraith). We 
did not find it at Umbagog in June. Not given by Couper at Que- 
bec, or by Brewster at Franconia. I think the White Mountain 
range forms its northern limits. It winters in Florida and the other 
eastern-southern States. 

66. Spizella socialis Bon. Chipping Sparrow. 

Common in all the New England States in summer. Given at 
Quebec (Couper), as common and breeding. It probably finds its 
northern limits not far from this point, however. Winters in Flor- 
ida and the extreme southern States east of the Mississippi. 

67. Melospiza melodia Baird. Song Sparrow. 

Common in the New England States and Canada in summer. 
Breeds. Winters from Massachusetts to northern Florida. Breeds 
at Umbagog the last week in May. I found it in Coos county the 
first week in November, when the snow was on the ground. 

68. Melospiza palustris Baird. Swamp Sparrow. 

Not uncommon in the New England States in summer. Given as 
rather rare at Quebec (Couper). Breeds at Umbagog about the first 
week in June. Winters in Florida and the Gulf States. 

69. Passerella iliaca Sw. Fox-colored Sparrow. 

Given by Couper as breeding not commonly at Quebec. This 
is probably its southern limits during summer. SBreeds plentifully in 
Labrador, and far north. We did not find it at Umbagog in June. 
Common in all the New England States, spring and autumn. Win~- 
ters in the easternSouthern States north of Florida. 


Maynard.] 314 [October 18, | 


70. GuiracaLudoviciana Sw. Rose-breasted Grosbeak. : 
Not common at Umbagog, Norway (Verrill), or Quebec (Couper). 
The last named place is its northern limit; breeds from this point to 

Maryland. Winters in Mexico and Central America. 

71. Cyanospiza cyanea Baird. Indigo Bird. | 

Common at Hamilton (Mcllwraith), and at Norway in summer | 
(Verrill). Not common at Umbagog or Quebec (Couper). This 
last named place is nearly its northern limit. This species has a | 
wide distribution in summer. Winters in Mexico and Central | 
America. 

72. Pipilo erythropthalmus Vieill. Tohee Bunting. 

Not common at Norway in summer (Verrill). Not found north of 
the White Mountain range, or at Franconia (Brewster). From this | 
point it is found breeding southward to Georgia. Winters in the | 
eastern Southern States and northern Florida. | | 


ALAUDIDZ. 


73. Eremophila alpestris Linn. Shore Lark. 

Given as wintering, by Verrill, at Norway, but I did not see it in 
October or November at Bethel. It is a bird of the coast in New 
England. Breeds north and west. 


ICTERIDZE. 

74. Dolichonyx oryzivorus Sw. Bobolink. 

Very common at Norway (Verrill). We saw it at Bethel in June, | 
and so along the road-side to the mountain range at Newry. Not 
seen at Umbagog, but Couper gives it as breeding commonly at Que- 
bec, which he says is its northern limit. Winters in the West Indies. | 

75. Molothrus pecoris Sw. Cow Blackbird. 

Given as breeding commonly at Norway (Verrill). Winters in 
the Southern States and northern Florida. 

76. Ageleius phoeniceus Vieill. Red-winged Blackbird. 

Common throughout the whole eastern section of the United — 
States, and far north. There is but little difference in the time of | 
breeding between those individuals which occur in southern Florida 
' and Umbagog. During the last week in April, 1871, I found nests 
just completed in the Everglades of Florida, and about May 1st found 
them nesting in hollow stubs on the Keys. May 10th I found fresh 
egos at Ipswich, Mass., and June 1st they were apparently incubat- 
ing at Umbagog. ‘Winters in the Southern States and Florida Keys, — 


| 1871.] 875 [Maynard. 


but Ido not think individuals from the far north .ever pass South 
‘ Carolina. 
| 77. Icterus Baltimore Daud. Baltimore Oriole. 

Common, and breeding at Norway (Verrill), and Bethel. Does 
not occur north of the White Mountain range. This species has a 
‘wide distribution. Winters in Mexico and Central America. 

' 78. Scolecophagus ferrugineus Sw. Rusty Grakle. 


Common, and breeding in the valley of the Magalloway (Samuels). 
| Saw a few at Umbagoeg in June. Another species whose southern 
limit is the White Mountain range. Winters in the Southern States 


_ and Florida Keys. Z 


79. Quiscalus versicolor Vieill. Crow Blackbird. 
Common throughout eastern United States. There is even less 


| difference in the time of breeding of this species than A. pheniceus. 


They were not nesting, but apparently about to do so, on the Florida 
Keys, May ist. Nesting at Ipswich, Mass., May 2d, and Messrs. 
Brewster and Bailey found a nest in a hollow stub which stood in the 
lake, with large embryos in the eggs, June 3d. Winters in the 
Southern States. 


CORVIDZE. 


80. Corvus carnivorus Bart. Raven. 

Common on the Chatham flats (McIlwraith). Two shot by J. G. 
Rich at Richardson’s Lake (Deane). 

81. Corvus Americanus Aud. Common Crow. 

Common throughout the New England States. Partially migrant. 

82. Cyanura cristata Sw. Blue Jay. 

Common and resident throughout New England. 

83. Perisoreus Canadensis Bonap. Canada Jay. “ Meat 
Hawk.” 

Two specimens were taken early in June, 1870, by Messrs. Deane 
and Bailey, at Umbagog. May breed, but this is south of its usual 
summer range. I found it common at Errol, November 3d, 1869. I 
also took two a little later in the season at Bethel. Common during 
winter at Norway (Verrill). This bird has a variety of harsh, dis- 
cordant notes, some of which resemble the sounds produced by the 
common Lynx rufus. It is quite inquisitive, and will follow the trav- 
eler through the woods for miles, keeping quite near him. 


Maynard.] 376 [October 18, 


TYRANNIDZ. 


84. Tyrannus Carolinensis Baird. King Bird. 

Common throughout New England States and Canada. Breeds. 
Winters in the West Indies. 

85. Myiarchus crinitus Cab. Great-crested Fly-catcher. 

Given by Verrill as rare at Norway. Common summer resident 
at Hamilton (MclIlwraith). Massachusetts is its northern limit on 
the eastern coast, but stragglers sometimes go further north. Win- | 
ters in southern Florida and Central America. | 

86. Sayornis fuscus Baird. Bridge Pewee. 

Common at Norway (Verrill), during the breeding season. Not 
given at Quebec (Couper). I think it does not range much north 
of this part. A widely distributed species. Winters in immense 
numbers in Florida. 

87. Contopus borealis Baird. Olive-sided Fly-catcher. 

Quite common and breeding at Umbagog. Not found at Franconia, 
though common at Gorham (Brewster). Rare at Norway (Verrill). 
Not given at Quebee (Couper), or at Hamilton (McIlwraith). Iam 
not certain whether this species has a higher northern distribution or 
not, but judge that it may be found as far north as the barren 
grounds. Is not known to breed south of Massachusetts. I think this 
species winters in Mexico and Central America. It has the habit of 
perching on dead stubs on the edge of clearings at Umbagog, and giv- 
ing its loud, clear notes. Mr. Brewster observed this same peculi- 
arity at Gorham. 

88. Contopus virens Cab. Wood-Pewee. 

Common throughout the New England States, but perhaps less so 
in the northern section. Given by Couper as breeding rarely at Que- 
bec. This is beyond its usual range, however. A widely distributed 
species. Winters in Central America and Mexico. 

89. Empidonax minimus Baird. Least Fly-catcher. 

Common throughout New England. Breeds. Not given by Cou- 
per at Quebec. Probably winters in Central America. 

90. Empidonax Traillii Baird. Traill’s Fly-catcher. 

Common at Gorham (Brewster), and at Quebec (Couper). 
Breeds. Not common at Norway (Verrill). Rare in summer at 
Hamilton (McIlwraith). Did not see it at Umbagog, but shot two 
specimens in an alder thicket, by the side of a stream at Newry. 
This species has a most peculiar note like the syllables Ke wink!; 


1871.] 377 [Maynard. 


this is not so quickly given as the se wick! of E. minimus, and is 
somewhat harsher. There is, perhaps, thirty seconds interval be- 
tween each ke wink’. The birds while singing were perched on the 
tops of a low alder. It appears to frequent these thickets generally 
by the side of streams, for Mr. Brewster has repeatedly observed it 
in similar localities at Gorham, where it has the same song and hab- 
its. When the bird is freshly killed, the bill bears a striking resem- 
blance to that of E. flaviventris, being somewhat broader than E. 
minimus, and having a yellow under mandible delicately veined with ' 
purple. But in the dried skin, this yellow fades into brown and 
loses its veining. The whole bird then appears much like the 
larger and darker types of E. minimus. Indeed, were it not for the 
slightly larger and broader bill, generally olivaceous, or greenish yel- 
low of the strip at the base of the upper mandible and sides of the 
head of #. Traillii, it would be difficult to determine skins of the two 
species. Although these species approach each other so closely that 
without a sufficient number of skins for comparisons, they are m 
great danger of being confounded, two intermediate species have 
been formed, Acadicus and pusillus. ‘The only difference between 
Trailitt and the former, are the feathers on the crown of Acadicus 
lack the darker centres of those of Traillii and afew other (seem- 
ingly to me), inconsistent characters. ‘The latter (pusillus) is also 
described as quite like Zrailli, but different from it in being browner, 
and having a less amount of white on the wings, with a few other 
characters that I have repeatedly proved (to my mind), to be ex- 
ceedingly variable and inconstant. Although I have never seen a 
sufficiently large series of these three species ( pusillus, Traillit and 
acadicus), to prove conclusively that they are one, I have seen 
enough to cause grave doubts in my mind, as to the validity of the 
characters used in separating them. Indeed, I have been unable to 
find any decided difference between the specimens of pusillus and 
Acadicus, labelled by competent authorities, that I have examined 
and compared with quite a large series of Traillii taken north. 

In connection with these observations, which have induced me to 
advance the hypothesis that these three so-called species: are one, I 
have been strengthened in my opinions by the experience gained by 
studying the individual variations of birds. One of the first and 
simplest lessons we can learn in this study, is that such characters as 
intensity and paleness of color are subject to wide individual differ- 
ences, and should be used with extreme caution in determining spe- 


Maynard.] 318 [October 18. 


cies. This is especially noticeable in the Fly-catchers, specimens 
from the south being very much browner than those taken north. 
In making these observations, the student will also perceive that spe- 
cies having stripes or spots caused by dark centres of the feathers, 
are subject to wide individual variations in this respect. In speci- 
mens with generally pale colors! the lighter margin of the spotted 
feathers will be wider, and if the central stripes are narrow or the 
spots small, the entire feathers will become of a uniform color, or 
with a shade or two darker nearer the base. In darker colored indi- 
viduals the reverse is the case, the darker spots become larger and 
increase in number. ‘This is particularly to be remarked in the gen- 
era of Turdus, Myiarchus and Empidonax. 

Again, in pale specimens all white markings, such as ; bars on the 
wings, terminal spots on the quills or tail feathers, generally increase 
in size and width, while in the darker types these spots and bars will 
decrease and sometimes disappear entirely. 

Another character which is considered of specific value in compar- 
ing these supposed species, is the number of the longest quill and 
its comparative length. To show how inconstant this is, we have 
but to examine a series of any of the Fly-catchers. Take for exam- 
ple E. minimus, and of 23 specimens examined, 12 have the third 
quill the longest, 3 the second, 7 the second and third, while one has 
the fourth. 

Understanding, then, the slight, though constant, difference be- 
tween minimus and Traillii, it seems to me that, with the individual 
variations to which these species are subject, it is impossible to form 
a single species. between them with constant characters not possessed 
by either one or the other, but when two are brought forward, and 
characters sought after that are strictly specific, dividing each from 
the other, and both from Traillii and minimus, the subject becomes 
very much confused, and exceedingly difficult to comprehend. 

91. Empidonax flaviventris Baird. Yellow-bellied Fly- 
catcher. 

“ Common at Franconia, where it breeds. I have seen the young 
out of the nest by August Ist. When the young were approached 
the female uttered the usual pea as a note of distress, but more plain- 
tively than at other times. Frequents the maple undergrowth in the 
mountain ranges” (Brewster). Not uncommon at Umbagog. Prob- 


1 Represented in dark brown colors by a bright rufus, in rufus by buff, in dark 
olive or brownish green by brighter greens, or more olivaceous. 


| | 1871.] a19 [Maynard. 


ably breeds rarely at Hamilton (MclIlwraith) and Norway (Verrill). 
We found it in dark swamps at Upton. Here, for the first time, I 
detected this species with any other note than the low pea. It was 
like the syllable kil-lic very gravely given, with a long interval be- 
tween each utterance. The song was even less energetic than that 
of Traillii. While singing, the birds were perched on low limbs. 
Both male and female used this note. Both of the latter species 
winter in South America. 


ALCEDINIDA. 


92. Ceryle aleyon Boie. Belted Kingfisher. 

Common throughout New England. This species has a wide dis- 
tribution. Winters in the Southern States. “ Occurs hich up on the 
mountain sides at Gorham, and is looked upon as a nuisance by the 
trout fishermen ” (Brewster). 


CARPRIMULGIDA. 


93. Antrostomus vociferus Boie. Whip-poor-will. 

Common in summer throughout New England. Arrives at Upton 
about June 1st. Winters in Florida and the West Indies. 

94. Chordeiles popetue Bd. Nicht Hawk. 

Common throughout New England. A large number of females 
came for several successive nights during the second week in June, 
and alichted on a small piece of cultivated ground near the hotel at 
Upton. Several that were shot contained eggs about to be laid. 
They must have been gathering the fresh earth, as they were walk- 
ing about on the ground, apparently searching for something. This 
bird winters in the West Indies. 


CYPSELID. 


95. Cheetura pelasgia Steph. Chimney Swift. 

Common throughout New England. “Saw them nearly every day 
in summer flying through the notch at Gorham. Thirty miles down 
the valley, at Plymouth, they had a roost in an old chimney, to which 
they came pouring in every evening from all directions, until thou- 
sands had collected” (Brewster). This species winters far south. 


Maynard.] | 380 [October 18, 


TROCHILIDZ. 


96. Trochilus colubris Linn. Ruby-throated Humming 
Bird. 

Common throughout New England. Winters in large numbers in 
Key West and the West Indies. ¢ 


CUCULIDZ. 


97. Coceygus erythrophthalmus Bon. Black-billed Cuckoo. 

Common at Norway (Verrill). I think only stragglers ever go 
north of the White Mountain range. Saw a single specimen at Up- 
ton, June 5th, 1871. Mr. Brewster saw another at Gorham in 
summer. 

98. Coccygus Americanus Bon. Yellow-bellied Cuckoo. 

Rare at Norway. Not seen at Upton, Franconia, or Gorham 
(Brewster). This species probably finds its northern limit at the 
same point as the preceding. Both species winter in South America. 


PICIDZE. 


99. Picus villosus Linn. Hairy Woodpecker. 

Very common resident. Breeds. 

100. Picus pubescens Linn. Downy Woodpecker. 

Less common resident than the preceding. Breeds. 

101. Picoides arcticus Gray. Black-backed Three-toed 
Woodpecker. 

Common in winter at Norway (Verrill). 

102. Picoides hirsutus Gray. Banded Three-toed Wood- 
pecker. 

Not given by Verrill at Norway. Rare at Calais (Boardman). 
Mr. Brewster took two adult males at Gorham, July 30th, 1870, and 
one at Umbagog the first week in June, 1871. I took a single 
specimen at Errol, October 31st, 1869. This species has a harsh, 
discordant note. 

103. Sphyrapicus varius Baird. Yellow-bellied Woodpecker. 

Common throughout this northern section in summer. Breeds 
about Umbagog about the second week in June. It utters a peculiar 
alarm note which closely resembles that of the blue jay. Mr. 
Brewster in describing its habits at Gorham, says: “It commonly 
feeds on a species of large yellow hornets, that punctures the bark of 


}, 1871.) : 381 ‘ (Maynard. 


| the birch tree with rows of square holes. It also had the habit of 
| sitting on the top of some dead stub and darting at insects, then re- 
|- treating to its perch like a fly-catcher.” Winters in the Southern 
| States and Florida. 

104. Hylatomus pileatus Baird. Pileated Woodpecker. 

Not uncommon resident in this section of New England. Breeds. 

105. Melanerpes erythrocephalus Sw. Red-headed 
Woodpecker. 

Rare at Albany in summer. 

106. Colaptes auratus Sw. Golden-winged Woodpecker. 

Common, and breeding throughout New England. Resident in 
the more southern section. 


STRIGIDZ. 


107. Bubo Virginianus Bon. Great Horned Owl. 

Common resident throughout New England. 

108. Scops asio Bon. Mottled Owl. 

Common resident throughout New England. 

109. Otus Wilsonianus Aud. Long-eared Owl. 

Common, and resident throughout New England. The short- 
eared owl is undoubtedly found here, but it is not given by Verrill at 
Norway. I never saw it in this section. Common at Hamilton 
(Mcllwraith), and at Quebec (Couper). 

110. Syrnium cinereum Aud. Great Gray Owl. 

Rare in winter at Norway (Verrill). 

lll. Syrnium nebulosum Gray. Barred Owl. 

Common resident throughout New England. 

112. Nyctale Acadica Bon. Acadian Owl. 

Common resident throughout New England. 

113. WNyctea nivea Gray. Snowy Owl. 

Not very common at Norway (Verrill). 

114, Surnia ulula Bon. Hawk Owl. 

Common autumn and winter at Norway (Verrill]. 


FALCONID. 


115. Falco anatum Bon. Duck Hawk. 

At Norway spring and fall (Verrill). 

116. Hypotriorchis columbarius Gm. Pigeon Hawk. 
Spring and fall. 


Maynard.] 382° [October 18, 


117. Falco sacer Forster. Jerfalcon. 

I saw a single specimen Nov. 5th, at Errol. 

118. Tinnunculus sparverius Vieill. Sparrow Hawk. 

Spring and-fall, not very common at Norway (Verrill). 

119. Astur atricapillus Bon. Goshawk. 

Common resident in northern New Eneland. 

120. Accipiter Cooperi Bon. Cooper’s Hawk. 

Common at Franconia and Gorham in summer (Brewster.) Not 
common summer visitor at Norway (Verrill). 

121. Accipiter fuscus Bon. Sharp-shinned Hawk. 

Common summer visitant at Norway (Verrill). 

122. Buteo borealis Vieill. Red-tailed Buzzard. 

Common summer visitant in northern New England. Resident 
in the southern section. 

123. Buteo lineatus Jard. Red-shouldered Buzzard. 

Common summer visitant to northern New England. Resident in 
the southern sections. ; 

124. Buteo Pennsylvanicus Bon. Broad-winged Buzzard. 

Common summer visitant in northern New England. 3 

125. Archibuteo lagopus Gray. Black Hawk. 

Common in the adult black plumage (A. sancti-johannis of authors) 
at Norway in winter (Verrill). 

126. Circus Hudsonius Vieill. Marsh Hawk. 

Common summer visitant at Norway (Verrill). 

127. Pandion Carolinensis Bon. Fish Hawk. 

Not very common throughout New England. “Breeds at Umba- 
gog about the first of June” (Deane). 

128. Aquila Canadensis Cass. Golden Eagle. 

“ A pair have bred for years on the cliff directly over the Profile 
House. They could be seen at almost any hour of the day scaling 
about their eyrie, uttering loud screams, but were especially noisy 
and active from sunset to dark” (Brewster). 

129. Haliaeus leucocephalus Savig. Bald Eagle. 

Common resident throughout northern New England. 


COLUMBIDZ:. 


130. Ectopistes migratorius Swain. Wild Pigeon. 
Common in summer throughout the wilder section of New Eng- 
land. 


1871.) 383 [Maynard. 


TETRAONIDZ. 


131. Tetrao Canadensis Linn. Spruce Partridge. 

Common at Umbagog: The White Mountain range seems to form 
its southern limit. “Is found in secluded, swampy localities. The 
eggs were taken in the latter part of May by J. G. Rick, found young 
on June 15th” (Deane.) 

132. Bonasa umbellus Steph. Ruffed Grouse. “Pariridge.” 

Common resident throughout New England. 


CHARADRODZ. 


133. Charadrius Virginicus Borck. Golden Plover. 
Common in autumn at Norway (Verrill). 


SCOLOPACIDZE. 


134, Philohela minor Gray. Woodcock. 

Not a common summer resident. A nest with four eggs was found 
by Rich, near Lake Umbagog, May 10th, 1870. 

135. Actodromus maculata Cass. Jacksnipe. 

Not common in autumn at Norway (Verrill). 

136. Gambetta melanoleuca Bon. Tell-tale. Greater Yel- 
low-Legs. 
Not a common summer visitor. 
137. Gambetta flavipes Bon. 
Not a common summer visitor at Umbagog, and Norway (Verrill.) 
138. Rhyacophilus solitarius Baird. Solitary Sandpiper. 
Not common at Umbagog, or at Norway (Verrill). “Common in 
July at Gorham when they were migratory ; saw a pair with young in 
August at Franconia” (Brewster). J took a specimen in Errol, No- 
vember Ist, 1869, when the ground was covered with snow and the 
ponds were partly frozen. 

139. ‘Tringoides macularius Gray. 

Common through New England in summer. Breeds at Umbagog 
about June 6th. 

140. Actiturus Bartramius Bon. Field Plover. 

Common summer visitant. Breeds at Norway (Verrill). 


ARDEIDZE. 


141. Ardea herodias Linn. Great Blue Heron. 
Common and breeds throughout northern New England. 


Maynard.] 384 [October 18, 


142. Botaurus lentiginosus Steph. American Bittern. 

Common, throughout New England. Breeds at Umbagog about 
June 5th. Builds nests of sticks which are placed on the ground of 
the floating islands on the Lake; lays six eggs. 


RALLID. 


143. Porzana Carolina Vieill. Carolina Rail. 
Not a common summer visitant at Norway (Verrill). 


ANATIDA. 


144. Bernicla Canadensis Boie. Canada Goose. 
Common during the migrations throughout northern New Eng- 
land. 

145. Bernicla brenta Steph. Brant. 

Like the preceding, common during the migrations. 

146. Anas boschas Linn. Mallard. 

Rare spring and fall at Norway (Verrill). 

147. Anas obscura Gm. Black Duck. 

Summer visitant to northern New England. Breeds commonly 
about Umbagog. | 

148. Querquedula discors Steph. Blue-winged Teal. 

Common spring and fall. 

149. Aix sponsa Boie. Wood Duck. 

Common summer visitant, and breeding throughout the wilder por- 
tions of New England. Breeds at Umbagog about May 15th. Saw 
young a week old June 7th. 

150. Fulix affinis Baird. Scaup Duck. 

Not common during the migrations (Verrill). 

151.' Fulix collaris Baird. Ring-necked Duck. 

Not common spring and fall (Verrill). 

152. Aythya Americana Bon. Red-head. 

Rare, spring and fall (Verrill). 

153. Bucephala Americana Baird. Whistler. 


Breeds at Lake Umbagog. “One nest containing eight egggs was 
found in a tall stub.” (Deane.) I have seen it in November on the 
Lake. 


154. Bucephla albeola Baird. Ruffle-head. 
Common, spring and fall (Verrill). 
155. Harelda glacialis Leach. Old Squaw. 


1871.] 389 [Maynard, 


Not common spring and fall (Verrill). 
156. Pelionetta perspicillata Kaup. Surf Duck. 
Rare spring and fall (Verrill). 
157. Mergus Americanus Cass. Sheldrake. 
Common spring and fall (Verrill). I have seen it on Lake Umba- 
gog, in November. 
158. MergusSerrator Linn. Red-breasted Merganser. 
Not common spring and fall. 
159. Lophodytes cucullatus Reich. Hooded Merganser. 
Breeds not uncommonly on Lake Umbagog in hollow stubs, ac- 
cording to J. G. Rich. Mr. Deane has the eggs taken there. 


LARIDZ. 


160. Larus argentatus Brunn. Herring Gull. 
Breeds on some rocks in B Pond every season about June 5th, 


(Deane). 
161. Chrococephalus Philadelphia Leach.  Bonaparte’s 


Gull. 
Not common spring and fall (Verrill). 


COLYMBIDZ. 


162. Colymbus torquatus Brunn. Loon. Common about 
the lakes and ponds. Breeds at Umbagog about June 15th. 


PODICIPIDZ. — 


163. Podiceps cornutus Lath. Horned Grebe. 

Rare spring and fall (Verrill). 

164. Podilymbus podiceps Lawr. Water Witch. Com- 
mon spring and fall (Verrill). 


Prof. Agassiz made some observations on a set of bould- 
ers in Berkshire County, Mass. | 

These boulders are found in place only upon a ridge in 
Canaan, from which some have been carried by glacial action 
and deposited in parallel lines through Richmond and Lenox, 
crossing two ranges of hills in their course. These boulders 
could not have been distributed in this regular manner by 

PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 25 JUNE, 1872. 


Agassiz.] 3886 [October 18, 


icebergs. They are rounded and scratched and must have > 
been carried beneath the glacier. Similar lines of boulders | 
in New England always extend in the direction of the ice | 
scratches on the rocks. He thought this evidence settled the | 
iceberg theory, and that Dr. Reed, of Canaan, had not re- | 


ceived due credit for his observations on this subject. 


Prof. Shaler stated that the boulders in Ohio, Kentucky | 
and the vicinity of Lake Erie, must have been carried over — 
two hundred miles from Crestline Ridge, north of Lake Erie. — 


Prof. Agassiz stated that the glacial scratches run obliquely 


across the Berkshire and Wachusett ranges and trend to the 
Atlantic, which he thought indicated the former existence of 
an immense ice-sheet rather than a local Connectitut Valley 
glacier. This ice sheet, he thought, was not less than ten 
thousand or twelve thousand feet in thickness. He had 
traced the glacial marks on the Rocky Mountains to a height 
of eleven thousand feet, and thought these mountains must 
have been covered by the ice as well as the New England 
hills. 


Dr. Chas. T. Jackson remarked in relation to the distance 
to which boulders had been transported, that rocks containing 
peculiar andalusite macle had been carried from the White 
Mountains to the Atlantic, and stone walls were built of 


them in South Berwick, Me. Boulders also had been trans- 


ported from Kingston, R. I., to the top of Block Island. 


Prof. Agassiz thought that this latter case might be ex- — 


plained by the sea having encroached on the land, since the 
boulders were deposited on what is now Block Island. ‘ 


Mr. F. W. Putnam called the attention of the Society to — 


the destruction of the Museum of the Chicago Academy of 
Sciences, by the great fire, and proposed the following resolu- 


| 1871.] 387 [Hagen, 


tion, which was seconded by Prof. Agassiz and unanimously 
_ adopted :— 


Resolved: That the Boston Society of Natural History, having 
received information of the destruction of the Collections, Library and 
Building of the Chicago Academy of Sciences during the recent devas- 
tating fire, hereby offers its sympathy to the Academy in this, its sec- 
ond trial by fire, with the promise of a series of its publications, and 
such duplicate specimens as may prove acceptable, when the Academy 
is prepared to receive them. 


The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. John J. 
Glover, for a fine mounted specimen of the male peacock, 
Pavo cristatus. 


Section of Entomology. October 25, 1871. 
Mr. P. P. Mann in the chair. Thirteen persons present. 


Dr. H. A. Hagen read the following communication :— 


I wish to bring to your notice at this meeting a new kind of 
pocket lens made by Carl Zeiss, of Jena, Germany, at a very low 
price, and used and strongly recommended by Heckel and other 
naturalists. I have imported two sets, and examined three other sets 
just imported by others. The definition of these lenses is perfectly 
good and their great focal distance permits one to work very easily. 
They are made on the plan of Briick’s lens, having a concave eye lens 
adapted to the objectives. The following table shows their magnify- 
ing power, focal distance and diameter of field, which is very large : 


Magnifying power. Focal distance. Diameter of field. 
8 diameters 4} inches -60 inches. 
18 66 238; 66 18 3 
386 it] 175 66 
72 1s 1 nl 08  « 


120 
180 ae 3 cs 03 “ 


Hagen.]} ; 388 [November 1, | 

The prices are 3 thalers for the 4 1-2 inch, 7 thalers for the 2 3-10 
and the 1 2-10 together. The others, together with a complete 
- stand, 21 thalers. An achromatic pocket lens made on a new plan 
and magnifying 12 diameters, with 9-10 of an inch focal distance and 
1-2 inch field is furnished for 3 thalers. 


Mr. P.S. Sprague announced that he had raised a hymen- 
opterous parasite from the pupa of Pieris rape, which Dr. 
Packard had identified as Pteromalus puparum of Europe. 


Dr. Hagen presented to the Society a specimen of the 
wingless Bittacus apterus Mc Lach., discovered in San Jose, 
Cal., by Mr. Wm. Holden, and described in the Hntomolo- 
gists Monthly Magazine for October, 1871. Dr. Hagen 
stated that Mr. Holden had found a wingless Tipula in the 
same region which bears a striking resemblance to the 
Bittacus. 


Mr. F. G. Sanborn reported the recent capture of a spider, 
of the genus Lycosa?, upon which was a parasitic larva ap- 
parently dipterous. i) 


Dr. Hagen remarked that two species of Hymenoptera 
were known to be parasitic on spiders in Europe, but this 
was the first account of a dipterous parasite on these animals. 


November 1, 1871. 
The President in the chair. ‘Twenty-nine persons present. 


The President offered the following tribute to the late 
Secretary of the Society, Rev. J. A. Swan, who died Octo- 
ber 31, 1871. | 


I know not how to utter the deep grief I feel and which 
I know is shared by you all, in the death of our dear com- 
panion, Mr. Swan, the Secretary of this Society. No one I 


\ 


| 1971.) . 889 [Bouvé. 


‘| am sure who has had the pleasure of personal intercourse 
with him, but will feel that he has lost a near and dear 
| friend. 

To me his presence even, has always seemed a benediction. 
I do not think I ever was so much impressed by the personal 
| character of any man with whom I have come in contact, as 
| with that of Mr. Swan. He seemed always overflowing 
with love for, and a desire to aid, all about him. What 
might excite in other men feelings of bitterness or anger, 
moved him only to sorrow, and no one was more charitable 
in his judgments of the acts of others. Truly we have lost 
from our circle a man devoid of guile, upright in conduct, 
loveable beyond expression, pure in heart and faithful in 
every duty. God grant that his family, so dear to him, may 
have strength to bear the loss that falls so much more 
heavily upon them than upon all others. 


Prof. J. D. Runkle offered the following resolutions : 


Resolved: That in the death of Mr. Swan, the Society recognize 
the loss of not only a highly efficient officer and member, but of an 
associate greatly respected for his attainments as a scholar, admired 
for his noble qualities as a gentleman, and loved for his many virtues 
as a man and a Christian. 

Resolved: ‘That a Committee be appointed to prepare a sketch of 
his life for the Proceedings. 

Resolved: ‘That the action of this meeting be communicated to 
the family of the deceased. 


In accordance with the second resolution, the President 
appointed a Committee consisting of Dr. Jeffries Wyman, 
Rev. E. C. Bolles, and Mr. W. T. Brigham. Out of respect 
for the occasion, it was then moved that the Society adjourn; 
but the President announced that Prof. Agassiz, who was 
‘present, had prepared a communication for the present 
meeting, and expected to depart immediately on a long 
voyage, and the motion was withdrawn. 


Agassiz.] 390 " [November 15, | 


Prof. Agassiz then made an exposition of the relations be- 
tween certain extinct genera of fishes, bringing forward 
strong evidence that the Chimeroids, Skates and Sharks 
form three groups nearly equai in value. Prof. Agassiz also 
read a letter from Dr. Anton Dohrn, of Jena, who writes that 
the project which has long occupied the attention of zool- 
ogists, namely, to establish a Laboratory of Marine Zool- 
ogy on the Mediterranean, is on the point of being realized. 
Dr. Dohrn is authorized to construct at his own expense, and 
have the control of, for not less than thirty years, a building 
in the Villa Reale, in Naples, close to the sea, containing an 
aquarium for the public, and extensive workrooms for natural- 
ists of every country. Dr. Dohrn, with other German zoolo- 
gists, proposes to settle there and take charge of the station. 
Helmholtz, Dubois Reymond, Huxley, Darwin, Heckel, 
Leuckart, Van Beneden, Agassiz, and others have consented 
to form a committee to aid the project. 


November 15, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Twenty-three persons present. 


The President read the following letter : 


“Mr. R. M. Hodges, in behalf of his daughter, Mrs. J. A Swan, 
her family and other relations, presents to the President, his associ- 
ates in office, and to the members of the Boston Society of Natural 
History, his grateful acknowledgements for their interest in the Rev. 
Joshua Augustus Swan, while he was connected with the Society, 
and for the deep and tender respect in which they hold his memory 
since his decease. The tie which has been severed by his death, has 
wounded many hearts that were favored with his sympathy and love 
in the activities and affinities of life. 

Cambridge, Nov. 11, 1871.”’ 


Prof. Morse made some remarks on the Relationships of 
Amphioxus. 


1871.) 391 [Dwight. 
Prof. Morse also made some remarks on the bones of the 
| ¢arpus and tarsus in birds and reptiles. 


Dr) Thomas Dwight remarked on a peculiar nerve plexus, 
| which he had noticed in the upper lip of Phoca vitulina, the 
harbor seal. 


The fifth pair of nerves is extremely large and breaks into fibres, 
some going to the root of the whiskers, and others beyond, but one 
set formed a loop following down the sensory filaments nearly to the 
roots of the hair, then recurving accompany the motor filaments 
which pass down from the facial nerves. He could find no account 
of this structure in works on the subject, and was unable to say 
whether it was the usual or exceptional condition. 


Prof. Morse gave some observations of his on a species of 
“frog-hopper” or “spittle insect.” 


It has been stated that these insects excrete their frothy covering, 
but they, in fact, excrete a perfectly clear liquid and add the bubble 
afterwards. When placed in the middle of a drop of clear fluid the 
little insect immediately backs to the margin, and protruding the cau- 
dal appendages, grasps a bubble of air and draws back into the drop. 
The air thus obtained runs along the concave ventral surface of the 
abdomen, where it can be noticed shining like little quicksilver glob- 
ules. This air supplies the abdominal spiracles, and when it becomes 
no longer fit to breathe, is allowed to escape into the fluid. The in- 
sect then praceeds to take another bubble of air and this process is 
repeated until the originally clear drop is blown up into a frothy mass, 
_ forming an effective retreat for its inhabitant. 


Section of Entomology. November 22, 1871. 
Mr. S. Henshaw in the chair. Ten members present. 


Mr. James Boll exhibited specimens of Ploiaria and Emesa 
captured in stables in Cambridge. 

Dr. Hagen exhibited the eggs of Ploiaria brevipennis, 
which are of an elongated, conical form. 


Hitchcock.] . 3 92 [December 6, 

Mr. C. 8S. Minot stated that the potato crop in some parts 
of Maine had been much injured during the past summer by 
the attacks of Capsus appetite which, puncturing the 
leaves, induced decay. 


December 6, 1871. 
The President in the chair. Forty-three persons present. 


Prof. Chas. H. Hitchcock made some remarks in regard to 
his recent survey of the Ammonoosuc gold fields, and prom- 
ised a more detailed communication at a future meeting. 


Dr. Chas. T. Jackson said that when engaged in the survey 
of New Hampshire, he had never found Labrador feldspar in 
situ. The more he thought of the andalusite macles in Ster- 
ling and Lancaster, the more he became convinced that they 
were not in place, but had been brought a long distance. 


Prof. Hitchcock said, in answer to a question from Dr. Jack- 
son, that he had found fossils in Littleton, but nowhere else 
in the White Mountains. In this place a large number of 
corals had been found. but no other fossils. These cor- 
responded with those of the Helderberg rocks on Lake Mem- 
phremagog. 7 


Prof. Shaler made some remarks on the rattlesnake and 
Natural Selection,’ showing that the note of the rattlesnake 
closely resembles that of the Cicada, and thus seems to decoy 
insectivorous animals. ‘The rattle is, therefore, useful to the 
snake and cannot be used as an argument against Mr. Dar- 
win’s theory. 


A discussion on this subject followed, participated in by 
Messrs. Hitchcock, Farlow, Tuttle, Hyatt, and others. 


1See American Naturalist, Vol. v1, p. 382. 


1871.] 393 (Bicknell. 


Section of Microscopy. December 13, 1871. 


Mr. Edwin Bicknell in the chair. Twelve members 
present. 


The Chairman exhibited a new binocular instrument by 
Zentmayer, intermediate in size between the “grand” and 
“hospital” stands. He stated that for some months he had 
been using a Tolles binocular eye-piece and a fine Wenham 
binocular made by Zentmayer, and had carefully compared 
their performance. He found the Wenham best with objec- 
tives of from 3 inches to 4 inch focal distance, and the 
Tolles the best with 2 to 7: objectives, and in stereoscopic 
effect, the Tolles eye-piece far exceeds the Wenham arrange- 
ment. 


Mr. A. H. Tuttle read a paper on a species of the genus 
Uvella, Ehrenberg, a compound flagellate infusorian. 


December 20, 1871. 


The President in the chair. Twenty-five persons present. 


The following paper was read : — 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHOLCUS. 
By JAmMeEs H. Emerton. Puare II. 


The spiders, from which the eggs were taken on which these ob- 
servations were made, agree with the descriptions of Pholcus pha- 
langioides Walck, and with the figure of that spider in Blackwall’s 
spiders of Great Britain and Ireland. They are very common about 
Salem in cellars and dark buildings, but I have never seen one far 
from houses. The embryology of this species has been studied by 
Claparede and forms the principal part of his memoir on the develop- 
ment of spiders.? ; 

In July, 1871, several females were confined in glass cases and be- 


1 Recherches sur ]’evolution des Araignées. Utrecht, 1862. 


Emerton.] 394 [December 20, 


tween July 28th and Aug. 3d, laid their eggs and were found carry- 
ing them bound together in a mass in the usual manner. 

In eggs examined within four hours after they were laid, the vitel- 
lus was epkeaca and its surface covered with polygonal cells (Pl. I. 
Fig. 1) filled uniformly with granules but showing no nuclei. Cells 
with transparent nuclei soon appeared here and there (Fig. 2), and 
within twenty-four hours covered the whole surface of the vitellus, 
(Fig.3), which had meanwhile diminished in size and become some- 
what flattened (Fig. 4). One half was whiter and more opaque than 
the other, and always turned upward, in whatever position the °88 

micht be placed. 

On the second day (July 31), a distinct white'spot appeared a little 
way from the centre of the upper side of the vitellus and slightly. 
elevated above its surface, the cumulus primatif of Claparede (Fig. 4). 
From this extended a pear-shaped appendage which, at 4 P. M., Aug. 
1, reached to the margin of the opaque upper half of the vitellus. 
(Figs. 5 and 6). At the same time, beginning at the cumulus, the 
whole surface became whiter except a strip on each side of the pear- 
shaped appendage (Figs. 5 and 6). When the latter had reached its 
full length its peduncle gradually became narrower and finally dis- 
appeared entirely, while the central portion of the cumulus became 
divided lenethwise by a transparent band, which widened toward the 
point where the appendage began (Fig. 7). 

At 7 P.M., Aug. 1, the first traces of the segments of the body ap- 
peared (Fig. 7) as four white stripes extending from the cumulus on 
each side and finally meeting on the ventral surface, where two 
more segments, one at each end, could be distinguished. These six 
segments, which at first nearly encircled the embryo (Figs. 8 and 9)» 
gradually separated on the dorsal surface until they extended only 
half round it at 7 P. M., Aug. 2, and at the ends of each segment ap- 
peared the_rudiments of limbs which continued to approach toward 
the ventral portion of the embryo (Fig. 10). At this stage the whole 
embryo was barrel-shaped, and the head and abdomen were indicated 
only by undefined whiter portions at each end (Fig 10). 

Aug. 3 the whole body became shorter and the limbs were about 
half the diameter of the egg apart on the ventral side. The head 
was distinctly outlined and the post-abdomen projected from the op- 
posite end of the body (Figs. 11 and 12). Two segments of the ab- 
domen had formed between the thoracic segments and the post-ab- 
domen. At this stage first appeared a transparent band extending 


1871.] 395 (Emerton. 


from the anterior part of the head along the ventral surface to the 
post-abdomen, dividing the whole embryo into two parts (Figs. 13 and 
14). 

Aug. 4 the segments of the abdomen increased in number from 
two to six, and the post-abdomen became narrowed and constricted 
into three divisions and turned down against the abdomen (Fig. 15). 
Each segment of the abdomen now showed two pairs of appendages, 
the bourrellets ventraux of Claparede, one pair on the edges of the 
transparent band, the other a little removed from it in line with the 
legs. Twelve hours later, when the separation of the ventral portion 
had exposed the under side of the body, between the legs a pair of 
similar appendages could be seen on each segment of the thorax, on 
the edges of the transparent band (Fig. 16). 

Aug. 5 the turning of the embryo began. The transparent ventral 
band had widened at the posterior part of the thorax to nearly the 
diameter of the body. The post-abdomen had turned down along 
the ventral surface of the abdomen. The thoracic portion now di- 
minished in size while the abdominal portion increased, turning grad- 
ually under the thorax between the legs. At this stage the under lip 
appeared in the anterior end of the transparent band, which now 
reached to the top of the head (Fig. 18), but in the next three days 
descended below the mandibles (Fig. 19). The position of the eyes 
was indicated by two pairs of white spots (Fig. 18) on the front of the 
head, and of the dorsal vessel by a white line from the head to the 
front part of the abdomen (Fig. 17). 

Aug. 6 the thorax continued to diminish and a constriction began 
between it and the abdomen. 

Aug. 10 the eyes were distinctly seen, and the mandibles had come 
together in front of the mouth. The legs entirely covered the ven- 
tral surface of the body. 

Aug. 11 the eggs began to hatch, the outer envelope cracking along 
the lines of the limbs and not coming off entirely for two days. The 
first moult took place Aug. 16. ; 


Mr, B. P. Mann read portions of an account of the “White 
Coffee-leaf miner”, Cemiostoma coffeellum, which he had 
prépared for the American Naturalist. 


Mr. W. T. Brigham called attention to a mounted speci- 
men of the mute swan, Cygnus olor, presented by the Hon. 


Hyatt] i 396 [December 20, 


Arthur N. Austin, and upon his motion a vote of thanks for 
the gift was passed. 


Prof. Hyatt spoke of the results of his researches on the 
embyology and development of the Shells of the Ammonoids 
and Nautiloids, made at the Museum of Comparative Zoology 
in Cambridge. 


The ovisac of Ammonites was discovered by Louis Sacmann and 
figured in Dunkee and Meyer’s Paleontographica. <A figure of Nau- 
tilus aratus was also drawn alongside of this in order to show the con- 
trast of its obtusely pointed apex with the globular apex of the first 
whorls of Lytoceras fimbriatus. 

Other authors before this had regarded the Goniatites as the only 
forms of tetrabranchiate Cephalopods which possess globular ovi- 
sacs, and had characterized the young in this way. I have been able 
to verify Sacmann’s observations with his original specimens, so that 
we must now consider all the Ammonoids as beginning with a globu- 
lar ovishell. 

Nautilus, also, though it never retains an ovisac, shows at the apex 
a scar which marks the former attachment of some such embryonic 
shell. This scar has such a form that one is led immediately to com- 
pare it with the outline of the aperture and living chamber of Gom- 
phoceras. 

The aperture of the embryo and the form of the living chamber, as 
indicated by the scar, has its longest axis vertical or abdomino-dorsai 
instead of from side to side, as in many Goniatites and all of the typi- 
cal Ammonites. 

No signs of this scar were directly observed among fossil Nautiloids, 
though indications of its presence were not wholly wanting, capecially 
among Jurassic Nautili. 

The variability in the form of the young and its amount of coiling 
is much greater in the earlier than in the later formations. Among 
Silurian species the young may be straight like Endoceras, and as the 
siphon is probably central at this age and composed as in Endo- 
ceras of a succession of siphonal funnels, we must have with this 
agreement of form an agreement of structure also. These straight 
young form the nuclei of varieties with elliptical adults, and the pas- 
sage is insensible from these to others of the same species — 
young which are closely coiled from the very beginning. 


1871.] | : 897 [Hyatt 


In the Devonian among the young of Goniatites the variation of 
the young is not so great,and according to Sandberger’s observation 
- the amount of coiling is at least of specific value. 

In the Jura the young do not vary among the typical Ammonites, 
all are closely coiled and all are involute. 

The straight young of the Silurian Goniatites Bohemicus are evi- 
dently reversions to the ancestral type of Endoceras, and show the 
tendency of the organization to revert to that type whenever the 
growth is retarded; whereas the closely coiled varieties of the same 
species show the progressive tendency of the series, which is expressed 
more determinately among the Goniatites of the Devonian, and finally 
becomes universal among the typical Ammonities of the Jura. The 
first septa of Ammonites and Goniatites closely resemble each other ; 
and also those of the adult Nautiloids; both have large, simple, entire 
abdominal cells, and broad, simple, superior lateral lobes. The form 
of the first whorl among the Ammonites is like that of a typical adult 
Goniatite, but the septa cannot be so closely compared. 

The siphon is very similar in both forms. It is a blind sac, at first 
opening at the middle through the first septum. The second septum 
embraces the narrowing neck, from which springs the slender tube of 
the siphon proper. Every successive part between the different septa 
is formed by a posterior inflection or bending of the septa themselves. 
Thus the fundus of the siphon is composed of a cecal prolongation 
of the first septum ; this is the lower part of the siphonal cecum or 
bag. The next segment is formed by a corresponding elongation of 
the second septum, which, however, is open at the bottom, and con- 
tinues the walls of the blind sac; the next, a third septum, sends down 
another prolongation, which is very narrow comparatively, and forms 
the neck of the siphonal cecum orthe siphon proper. The differ- 
ences of Ammonites and Goniatites are to be found in the conical 
prolongation of the siphonal cecum. This organ is a cone-like pos- 
terior extension of the cecum, which opens into the bottom of the 
siphonal ececum in Goniatites, but is closed over by the bottom of the 
cecum-in Ammonites. 

The second septum of Goniatites is like those of the adult Nau- 
tilini of the Silurian ; the third has a pointed goniatitic superior lateral 
lobe. The Ammonite has the second septum more ammonitic than 
goniatitic on account of the broad superior lateral and abdominal 
lobes. There is here a decided acceleration, since the trué goniatitic 
characteristics are hardly visible except in the form, whereas in Gon- 


Hyatt.) 398 [December 20, 


iatites there is a repetition of the characteristics of the Nautilini in 
the second septum and the pure Goniatite does not appear until the 
third septum. 

Among the Nautiloids the same formation of the siphon is found, 
but the cecum is entirely out of the embryonic ovi-shell, which has 
left the ccecum entirely isolated inside of the apex of the first whorl. 
The first septum of the recent Nautilus has a. faint ventral cell, is 
very shallow, not parallel with the area of cicatrix, and is penetrated 
by a dorsal lobe. 

The first septum of Nautilus atratus of the Jura is very shallow, 
nearly parallel with the area of the scar, ! and not penetrated by a dor- 
sal lobe. In outline, suture and position of siphon, it resembles the 
form of Nautilus Bohemicus of the Silurian, until it attains a much 
older period. The second septum has the dorsal lobe and is other- 
wise changed, and this is the representative of the first septum in 
Nautilus pompilius. 

The first septum of Nautilus Koninckii of the Carboniferous differs 
but little from the succeeding septa, except in being shallower. It is 
very shallow, and has nearly the same outlines as the first septum of 
Nautilus atratus or lineatus. The septa of Nautilus Bohemicus, until 
a much later period, possess apparently similar shallow ventral and 
abdominal cells, though in the adult these become too deep for com- 
parison. The evidence is sufficient, however, to show that the first 
ten or twelve septa of Nautilus Bohemicus of the Silurian, and the 
earlier septa of Nautilus Koninckiw of the Carboniferous, are all repre- 
sented by one stage of growth in one septum in Nautilus atratus of the 
Jura; then that this stage is skipped, or left out entirely in Nautilus 
pompilius of the present epoch. This is the law of acceleration, or the 
perpetual reduction of adult characteristics to earlier and earlier peri- 
ods in the growth of the later existing individuals, until finally many 
characteristics altogether disappear. The shell of Ammonites, Gon- 
iatites, and Nautilus is composed of two layers, the external layer 
being separable into two strata, an outer colored stratum and an inner 
whiter stratum. All of these are imbricated so as to show that they 
are undoubtedly made up of zones of growth laid on from within by 
the edge of the mantle. 


i This scar is the real apex of the whorl, not the apparent apex, but lies on the 
dorsal side of the angular termination of the whorl. 


187.) 8399 [ Wilder. 


The layers of the shell do not extend around the whorl in Am- 
monites, being wholly absent from the dorsal side. In Nautilus, 
however, they do encompass the whorl, though the outer layer is very 
thin on the dorsal side. The shell encompasses the ovisac in Ammo- 
nites and Goniatites, but is very thin on the dorsal side of the em- 
bryo, and very thick on the sides and abdomen. This at first led me 
to suspect that the whole shell was deposited by the arms, as sug- 
gested by Valenciennes, with regard to the deposition of the colored 
stratum. 

But the structure of the shell in the walls of the ovisac is like that 
of the adult, and shows that it, too, was deposited from within. All 
the tetrabranchiate Cephalopods, therefore, are likely to prove to be 
animals either wholly, or to a large extent, included in their shelly 
coverings. 


INTERMEMBRAL Homo.ocires. By Burt G. WILDER, M.D. 
Continued from p. 339. 


VI. SPECIAL PROBLEMS. 


» Since it is probable that the telical antagonism of the membra with 
some mammals must be eliminated from the discussion of their mor- 
phical relations; and since the latest views upon the subject are based 
upon the primitive condition and position of the membra in the 
embryo; and since they then do not indicate either syntropy or anti- 
tropy, but are capable of interpretation upon either hypothesis; and 
since, finally, their adult condition points toward syntropy rather than 
antitropy, so that the majority of anatomists are inclined to regard that 
as their true and morphical relation; it is evident that we must not 
merely remove the obvious objections to our way of thinking, but 
must produce some positive evidence in its favor. 

This evidence consists in the establishment of the following proposi- 
tions. — 

1. The cephalic and caudal regions! of the body are comparable 
with each other as are the right and left sides. 


1The term region must here be taken to include all in front of, or behind, a mid- 
dle point, and not merely the head or the tail. 


Wilder.] 400 {December 20, 


2. The armus and skelos are appendages of the cephalic and caudal 
regions respectively. 

Whence it follows that the armus is comparable with the skelos as 
the two armi or the two skelea are comparable with each other. 


CEPHALICO-CAUDAL HOMOLOGY. 


The evidence in favor of the first proposition is admirably stated 
by Wyman, 55,249 ; but I think we must eliminate what he regards 
as ‘‘the most striking facts bearing upon the idea of fore-and-hind 
symmetry,” the antagonistic attitude which the membra assume dur- 
ing the third stage of development, (55,252.); since the syntropists — 
would say that this attitude is only secondary and adaptive with the 
mammalia, and does not even occur at all with lower vertebrates. 

As to the trunk, we quote Wyman’s statements as follows : 

‘‘ First. The embryo increases in size, not by a growth from before 
backward, but from a central, and, as it were, neutral point, both 
backward and forward, so that the two ends are made to recede 
from each other in opposite directions.”’ 

To this it may be objected, that with the turtle (Agassiz, 200, 
2,539 and 543), and probably with most vertebrates, the cephalic fold 
is first formed; and retains throughout a prominence by which it is dis- 
tinguishable from the caudal fold; but on the other hand we may say, 
that the turtle is from the beginiting a cephalized organism, and all its 
development must have reference to the after existence of a promi- 
nent head, so that this priority in appearance of a cephalic over a 
caudal part is purely telica} and no bar to a morphical-comparison. 
I am inclined to doubt whether this objection could arise with Am- 
phioxus. 

‘‘ Second. The primitive groove of the nervous axis in its earliest 
stage is nearly symmetrically enlarged at either end, so as to form two 
apposite dilatations ; one the precursor of the future cerebral vesicles, 
the other of the rhomboidal sinus.” 

‘‘ Third. When the spinal groove closes up, it does so, as Reichert 
has shown, by the union of its lips, first in the middle portion, and 
then gradually in a symmetrical manner towards either end.” 

To the above it will perhaps be answered that with turtles, (200, 
544, and 546), the primitive furrow appears first nearer the cephalic 
fold, and its closure also begins in that region ; but it is probable that 


1871.] 401 [ Wilder. 


both these differences are explicable like the preceding, and that they 
would not exist in the Amphioxus. 
“Fourth. ‘The first traces of vertebral segments are to be found in 


three or four pairs of plates, which appear on either side of the primi- 


\ 


| tive axis, midway between the two ends ; the ossification of the bodies 


of the vertebrze takes place in the same order, beginning in tae mid- 
dle and extending in either direction.” 

Upon this point. Dr. Cleland has written me as follows: ‘‘ Remak 
is quite explicit in the statement that the primordial vertebre are 
developed from before backward ; it is quite true that the first three or 
four which appear, are placed about the middle of the embryo, but 
that is because the cephalic part of the embryo forms so large a por- 
tion of the whole.” May 7th, 1868. Upon this I cannot give an 
opinion, because it is not yet determined where the middle point 
of the vertebrate embryo lies; indeed, it seems to shift position from 
stage to stage of growth. Agassiz’s statements respecting the turtle 
agree with Wyman’s, but if we exclude the head from the length, 
then the first vertebree appear to be formed in the neck ; and I have 
observed that in a large adult skate, Raia ocellata, the segmentation 
of the vertebral column appears at some distance behind the occiput, 
and increases gradually toward the middle of the length. 

Bischoff’s figures, especially in the paper on Kaninchen-Eies (figs. 
53 and 54), indicate that the primitive vertebre begin at some dis- 
tance behind the cerebral vesicles; but Huxley (78, 11) states that 
the protovertebree commence at the anterior part of the cervical re- 
gion and gradually increase backward. The matter can only be 
decided by observations made with the present doubt in view. 

But for this as for the previous questions, I believe we must look to 
Amphioxus. 

I quote further from Cleland’s letter. ‘‘A strong point against 
primitive antero-posterior symmetry, is found in the construction of 
the vertebre; the body of each vertebra, according to Remak, is 
originally formed, the anterior half from one primordial vertebra, the 
posterior from another ; you have these two parts seen in the shape of 
two cones placed apex to apex, and if there were primitive sym- 
metry, surely, when the arch and ribs are in Sennen with the 
anterior cone in the anterior vertebrx, they ought to spring from the 
posterior cone in the posterior vertebre ; but it is not so ; they always, 
I believe in all vertebrates, come from “a anterior half; .. . . the 
nerves also, lie behind’the arches and ribs of the permanent vertebre, 

PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL. XIV. 2 AUGUST 6, 1872. 


a 


Wilder.] 402 [December 20, 


throughout the spinal column.” It is evident that these are fair objec- 
tions, and I call upon others to aid in their removal. 

But in my opinion, the most conclusive evidenee of a meketropic | 
homology between cephalic and caudal regions, lies in the fact that 
in the very earliest stages of the vertebrate embryo, no difference 
whatever can be detected between them; the primitive disk is circu- 
lar, and homogeneous, and, in the turtle at least (200, 2, 536), the 
very first step toward the formation of organs is the depression of the 
surface at two points upon opposite sides, which mark the position of 
the future head and tail; the “primitive furrow appears later; so that 
if development is given the importance which most now allow it, we 
can say that the two ends of the body are set off against each other, 
as homologous and antagonistic parts, even before the right and left 
sides are separated by the primitive furrow; moreover, at this time, 
the head and tail are nearer each other than the right and left borders 
of the embryonic disk, and the subsequent elongation and narrowing 
is adaptive and not of morphical importance. 

Prof. Wyman’s fifth kind of evidence embraces the facts of resem- 
blance between the organs at the oral and the anal outlets of the 
alimentary canal, which was first alluded to by Oken; but it is pro- 
bable that all determinations of the softer parts must wait until those 
of the bones are satisfactorily made out. When, however, they are 
taken up, it ought to be ascertained whether the reversed relative 
position of the urinary to the intestinalorifices in Teleostet as compared 
with other vertebrates, affects the homology of the parts, or whether it 
may be regarded as comparable to the differences in the connection 
of the pneumatic duct of Lepidosteus and Erythrinus, (Ow. 63, 1,494), 
as compared with Lepidosiren and the true air-breathing vertebrates. 


THE ‘‘ NATURE OF LIMBS.” 


Can we now demonstrate the second proposition, that the armi 
are appendages of the cephalic region of the trunk, and the skelea 
of the caudal region, and thus find reason for regarding them as 
similarly related ? 

The ‘‘ Nature of Limbs” has been very differently suitgeee and 
the minor problems involved in the general question are many and 
complex. 

1. What is the normal number of membra ? 


1 See Hunter’s Anat. Memoirs, edited by Owen, vol. 1, p. 198. 


1871.) 403 [ Wilder. 


If we could confine ourselves to the adult Mammalia, the answer to 
this would be easy, for no member of this class is known to possess 
more than two pair of organs which answer to the common idea of 
“limbs”; the same is true with the reptiles, the birds, and the 
amphibia, but if we include the fishes, there is room for difference of 

“opinion. 

Huxley (251, 61,) and Rolleston, (284, xxx1r), state that there 
are only two pair of “articulated limbs ;” and this is the opinion of 
nearly all anatomists ; but Parker, (292, 3), seems to include the 
ordinary membra in the same category with the median fins ; Hum- 
phrey, (248, 65,) is more explicit and holds that ‘- each limb of the 
higher animals corresponds with a lateral factor or factors of the 
mesial fin of the fish and would, if development had proceeded in a 
similar manner, have united with its fellow into a mesial organ.” Cle- 
land (65), advances the view that ‘‘ the suspensorium and lower jaw 
form an arch corresponding with the limb arches, and the opercular 
apparatus of fishes consists of appendages attached toit;” while 
Owen (20, 333 and 63, 1, 102), not only includes under the general 
title of ‘‘ diverging appendages,” the pectoral and ventral fins (or 
*“‘limbs’’), the ‘‘ branchiostegals,” the ‘‘ operculars” and the ‘“ ptery- 
goids,” but also (20, 269; 63, 1, 30, and 63, 2, 18) enumerates there- 
with the slender or flat processes projecting backward from the ribs in 
some fishes, crocodiles and birds; and further adds that ‘the true 
insight into the general homology of limbs leads us to recognize 
many potential pairs in the typical endo-skeleton,” (20, 270). 

Now it must be admitted that the facts of development as at present 
understood, are not wholly opposed to the above views of the ‘‘general 
homology of limbs”; and Wyman, after a most admirable exposition 
of the case (55, 264) says ‘‘ we believe there is ground for the hypo- 
thesis that limbs belong to the category of tegumentary organs.” 1! 
But it ought also to be considered that this conclusion is based chiefly 
upon the apparent identity of the membral buds with the ridges which 
afterward give rise to the median fins; and this involves the great ques- 

_ tion of the relative value of development and of position for the deter- 
mination of homologies ; in the present case, if we allow that the hom- 
ology between the median and thé lateral appendages of fishes is as 
complete as that between the two pairs of lateral appendages them- 
selves, upon the ground of primitive identity of structure, then must 


1 Oken, (285, Par. 3387), called them ‘‘ tegumentary members.” 


Wilder.] 404 [December 20, |) 


we not likewise conclude that the visceral arches are membra joined 
on the middle line; that the flukes of cetacea are membra; that 
the lateral ridges at the root of the tail in some selachians are also mem- 
bra; and finally that the carapax of tortoises, (Agassiz, 200, 2, 562,) 
represents a continuous series of undistinguishable membra above the 
ordinary pairs; this is almost a reductio ad absurdum, and is to my | 
mind sufficient evidence that in this connection at least, relative posi- 
tion is of greater importance than apparent identity of primitive 
structure; and that we are entitled to recognize in the vertebrate only 
two pairs of real membra. 

There is one other fact which serves to distinguish the membra from 
the median fins; the latter always appear as a continuous dorsal and 
ventral ridge, which may persist in some fishes and batrachians, but 
which is generally absorbed at intervals so as to leave certain portions 
to form the permanent fins; now if the membra were wholly in the 
same category with these median fins, why should they not be formed 
in like manner? The fact is that they never are so formed, even in 
the skate, where, as shown by Wyman (3817, p. 35 and Fig. 4), the 
pectoral and ventral fins commence as slight ridges in the same plane 
and in close juxtapositicn, yet not continuous with each other. 

Nevertheless the opinions of the above-mentioned authorities are 
entitled to great respect, and it can hardly be assumed that the ques- 
tion as to the number of membra is decided; indeed, perhaps a recog- 
nition of three or more “ potential pairs of limbs” is not necessarily 
incompatible with the idea of a meketropic relation between the armus 
and skelos, which all agree to be homologous in some way ; but it is 
evident that such a conception as Owen’s archetype skeleton, (63, 1, 
80), in which the diverging appendages all point backward, could not 
co-exist with a distinct idea of meketropy; and neither he nor Cle- 
land, nor Humphrey, nor Parker have ever admitted such a principle 
of organization so far as the skeleton is concerned ; it is manifestly 
more easy to regard the membra as themselves antitropically related 
if we can show that there are but two pairs, the one belonging tothe 
cephalic the other to the caudal half of the trunk, as seen in Fig. 4. | | 

The early and enormous increase of the head in the higher verte- 
brates leaves the armal buds at about the middle of the embryo; the 
balance is only restored when a long tail is formed at the other end; 
in either case the armi would seem to be most intimately connected 
with the cervical region, and the skelea with the lumbar; but here 


\ 871] 405 [ Wilder, 


| \arises the question as to the relative value of nervous and osseous 
associations, 

The previous question suggests several others which have already 
been much discussed. 

1. What is the morphical relation between the membra and the 
-omozone and ischizone ? 

2. What is the morphical relation between these arches themselves 
_and the skeletal axis? 

3. What relation do these arches hold to each other ? 

It is now generally admitted that the scapula and ilium are not 
properly parts of the membra, although the former, especially, appears 
to be such in many quadrupeds, which lack the other elements of 
the omozone; and although the telical antagonism of position 
between scapula and ilium has led me to include these bones in the 
presentation of evidence (45, 20,): but I am now convinced that this, 
like some other considerations (the convergence of the dorsal spines 
toward the centre of motion, and the antagonism of membral inter- 
nodes), must be eliminated from the discussion. 

The relation between the membra and the membra] arches has been 
ably discussed by Humphrey, (36, 23); also by Wyman, (55, 264), 
who concludes that “in their primary condition, limbs do not appear 
to be dependencies of the scapular and pelvic arches any more than 
- . . . . the teeth are dependencies of the jaws, with which, 
notwithstanding their totally different origin they become so intimately | 
united at last.” Stili, and in spite of the probability that the omo- 
zone serves, especially with fishes, as a heart protector, there seems 
no reason to doubt that both omozone and ischizone are formed 
with reference to the attachment of the membra, and are shifted in 
position in conformity with the needs of different species. Upon 
this point consult also Coues, (70, 194, note). | 

This leads to the second question as to the morphical relation 
between the omozone and ischizone and the rest of the skeleton. 

The view of Owen that the “ scapular arch is normally the haemal 
arch of the posterior occipital vertebra of the skull” has been en- 
dorsed by no real investigator of the subject,! and has on the contrary 
been vigorously combated by Goodsir, (240, 199,) Humphrey. (36, 26), 
Agassiz, Wyman, (55, 260) Spencer, (299, 522) and Parker, (292, 
87); like some other views of the eminent English anatomist, this 
must be regarded as a motion unseconded, and therefore not open 
to debate. Upon this question consult Parker, (292), Cleland (65,) 


Wilder.] 406 [December20, | 


and Wyman (55, 260,) who think that “‘ additional evidence, especially — 
from embryology, is needed before definite conclusions can“be reached.” | 

Embryology ought to determine whether the forward transfer of the | 
ventrals to beneath or even in front of the pectorals, in some Mala- | 
coptert, is a real shifting or only an ideal one, and if the former, | 
how it is accomplished ; for evidently our second proposition will not _ 
be accepted by the ‘‘ realists” in anatomy so long as the “‘legs’’ are | 
in front of the “arms” with any vertebrate, unless a sufficient account : 
can be given of the matter, enabling us to adduce the somewhat simi- | 
lar displacement of the eye in the Pleuronectide, which, by the way, 
could be made to serve in the elucidation of both problems, since | 
Traquair’s researches are not so complete as might be wished. 

As to the third question, there seems to be no dispute that the 
omozone and ischizone do, in some way correspond; but both | 
Wyman and Humphrey, who have most ably discussed it, will now 
doubtless admit that no determination of the special homologies of the — 
constituent bones can be other than provisional until the development 
of the ischizone has been elucidated as completely as that of the 
omozone has by Parker; and even then, we must know whether these _ 
bones are to be compared syntropically or antitropically; the impor- | 
tance of such determinations is obvious on account of the great num- 
ber of muscles which arise from the two arches. 

We have now to inquire whether the foregoing considerations justify 
our acceptance of the proposition that the armus and skelos are > 
respectively appendages of the cephalic and caudal regions of the 
trunk ; it seems to me that they do justify us in accepting it provision- 
ally, and until it is satisfactorily shown, first, that there are more than 
two pairs of membra, actual or potential, and second, that no such 
thing as antitropy exists in the body itself. ‘Till then, I think we are 
entitled to study the membra asif they might be proved to be antitrop- 
ically related, and to regard our success in such comparison as pre- 
sumptive evidence of es correctness of our method. 


MEMBRAL OSTEOGENESIS. 
1 


If, as is held by Darwin and others, the morphical value of a char- 
acter is inversely to its apparent telical importance, I think a very 


1 Prof. Dana has in a letter to me stated that he now regards the relation of the 
arms to the head as a functional one, not a structural, as admitted in 217, 341; andI 
here beg to withdraw my own acceptance of what Parker calls the “peripatetic 
morphology of the shoulder-girdle.”’ 


1871.) 407 [ Wilder. 


' strong argument in favor of the antitropic relation of the membra may 
be derived from the manner of their ossification as described and 
~ figured by Robin.1 


Fig. 5. 


I have copied his figures, reversing one of them in order to show the 
membra in the relative position which they would have when attached 
to the body, the inside borders (post-armal and pre-skeleal) facing 
each other. It appears from both the figure and description of Robin, 
(though he evidently attached no such significance to the fact, and 
this gives it the greater value for us,) that the long bones of both 
membra begin to ossify in a strictly antitropic manner, the very shapes 
of the points of ossification being symmetrically related. If this is 
the rule with the mammalia, I shall look upon it as a most decided 
confirmation of the general views advocated in this paper, and would 
call the attention of embryologists to the statements of Robin, which 
I have no means of verifying at the present time. 


1 Sur les conditions de l’osteogenié avec ow sans cartilage prexistant; Journ. de 
l’Anatomie, Tom. 1, 1864, p. 577, Pl. xv. 


Wilder.] 408 [December 20, 


REMARK. 


The delay in the publication of the last part of this paper enables 
me to offer some general remarks upon it in place of the Glossary of 
morphological terms, the announcement of which was inserted during 
publication, but which for various reasons I have concluded to omit. 

The chief of these reasons is a doubt of my ability to do the work 
satisfactorily at this time; but to this are added the doubt as to the 
limits of such a glossary, and the hope that the new nomenclature 
herein proposed may find helpful criticism among my morphological 
brethren. Yet even were every new term refused acceptance, my 
own conviction of the urgent need for a reform in our system would 
be in no way shaken. At present we are trying to do good work 
with most imperfect instruments; for we are trying to tell each other 
about the parts of animals and their relations to each other (these 
appearing daily more numerous and complex), in the language of 
popular science; we are, in fact, discussing these matters in a manner 
nearly as loose and inexact as that in which animals and plants were 
described prior to the reform begun by Linneus. 

The various problems which are involved in the general question 
of intermembral homologies, are rather indicated than discussed; 
the solution of some requires new information upon facts; but it 
seems to me that a more urgent need is some agreement as to the 
value of different kinds of evidence; together with a logical method 
in its application. In view of these necessities I venture to suggest 
the incorporation of systematic instruction upon “logic” and “ evi- 
dence” into all University Courses in Natural History. I am certain 
that had logical and legal methods of thought been followed, the 
acceptance of the symmetrical relation of the membra never would 
have been hindered by a purely popular superstition, like the corres- 
pondence of thumb and great toe; and I claim to have proved in the 
foregoing pages that the agreement or disagreement of parts in nu- 
merical composition has never been held to invalidate any homology 
based upon relative position or mode of development. Yet even in this 
section of my paper merely an outline of the evidence and argument 
is given, and J have to thank my friend Dr. Coues for a forcible am- 
plification of certain points. I may here refer to the intention formed _ 
ten years ago, and expressed at the beginning of this paper, to make 
the elucidation of intermembral homologies a main object through 
life, and to offer from time to time papers upon the special problems 


1871. 409 [ Wilder. 


involved. One word as to the historical sketch; I can hardly hope 
to have done justice to all; especially to those whose works have not 
been directly accessible; but while the diagrammatic arrangement of 
the authors will make my errors more apparent, it will also enable 
every one to find or alter his own proper place, or that of another 
upon the scheme. 

Finally I beg that the whole paper may be viewed as a “‘topog- 
raphy of our ignorance,” and as an effort to map out our future 
work, rather than as an ad captandum attempt to decide the great 
questions herein presented. 


ADDENDA. 


Pagei61. It is worth noting that the great work of Bourgery and Jacob 
contains the following suggestion to a symmetrical comparison of the membra, 
which, however, like many another, fell still-born; ‘‘ En resume, l’epaule n’est 
autre chose que le bassin renverse.’’ Anat. de l’homme, tom i, p. 107. 

Page 169. I trust that the new technical terms here proposed will not be 
included by the Rev. J. G. Wood in his reference to the “‘ Cacophonic combina- 
tions of syllables”’ (Ill. Nat. Hist. of Birds, p. 178). Yet his general criticism 
upon scientific nomenclature is well merited; and would only perhaps be more 
useful if coming from one whose style was less diffuse than that of the above- 
mentioned popular writer. 

Page 173. Synonyms of Annularis; from Huxley, 78; Ulnar finger, p. 266, 
Ulnar digit, p. 270; Fourth digit, p. 269. 

Page 311. As to the morphical value of numerical composition Mivart says, 
“T think the degree of segmentation of such structures (ribs) of very little 
consequence morphologically.”’ Vertebrate skeleton, p. 374. 

Page 826. The phrase “ morphological value’? occurs in Wyman’s paper on 
the Development of Raia batis, 337, 35. ‘i 

Page 828. As to establishing different kinds of groups upon certain organs, 
Agassiz says, “ No system can be true to Nature which is based upon the con- 
sideration of a single part, or a single organ’’; 201, 289. And Alfred Newton, in 
reviewing Huxley’s new classification of Aves, speaks as follows: “It does 
seem a question very much deserving of attention, how far any approach to a 
natural system can be based upon the modifications of one part of an animal’s 
structure, without any reference whatever to other portions of it.’’ Zoolog. 
Record, 1867, p. 48. 

Page 330. Agassiz intimates that orders are based upon internal structure, 
in contradistinction to form upon which families are founded; 201, 213. 

Page 332. I greatly regret that Kowalewsky’s researches upon the develop- 
ment of Amphioxus were not accessible to me when this paper was written: 
the little creature is a good illustration of the contrast between teleological 


Wilder.] 410 [December 20, 


importance and morphological value, for I believe it will prove more useful than 
all other vertebrates together, in deciding the problems indicated in this paper. 

Page 337. For representation in fibrous tissue by adult structures of what 
was cartilaginous in the embryo, see Parker (292, 152 and 197). 

Page 338. As to the morphical value of development, the two great English 
authorities differ further, as follows: Owen (63, 3, 742) speaks/of the “low 
taxonomic value of the placental character”’; ‘development is no ground of 
homology or homotypy’’; while his general repudiation of the criterion is vig- 
orously expressed as follows: ‘‘ Whenever a false homology has to be main- 
tained, the earliest and obscurest phenomena and embryonal development are 
usually resorted to in support of such view” (63, 3, 146, note 5). While Hux- 
ley, on the other hand, states that ‘an extensive stake of the integumentary 
organs convinces one at once that mere structure affords no base for homology; 
3 these definitions of ecderon and enderon rest wholly upon the mode of 
growth.’’? Cyc. Anat. and Phys.; suppl., p. 476. 


VII. CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF SPECIAL WORKS AND PAPERS UPON 
- INTERMEMBRAL HOMOLOGIES.! 


1. Vicg p’AzyRr: Memoire sur les rapports qui se trouvent entre les usages 
et la structure des quatre extrémités dans homme et dans les animaux. 
Mémoires de Académie royale des sciences, 1774, p. 254. (Reprinted in 
CEuvres recueillies par Moreau, 1805; tom. iv, p. 315.) 

2. Wuinstow, J. B.: Exposition anatomique de la structure du corps hu- 
main, nouvelle édition, 1775. (First edition, 1732; second, 1763.) 

38. ISENFLAMME ET FERLYROLLES: Dissertation des extrémités ——- —— 
Erlangen, 1785. 

4, CHAUSSIER: Exposition des Muscles, 1789. 

5. S@MMERING: De corporis humani fabrica, 1794. 

6. Cuvier: Lecons de l’ Anatomie comparée, 1800; tom. i, p. 430. (2d ed. 
1832.) 

7. Handbuch der menschlichen Anatomie, 1816. (See also the French and 
English editions.) : ; 

8. DE BLAINVILLE: Nouveau dictionnaire d’histoire naturelle de Deterville, 
1818; tom. xix, p. 91. (See also his Ostéographie Primates, tom. i, p. 26, 
1841; and a citation upon the Muscles in the Appendix to Meckel’s Traité 
d’anat. comp., tom. vi, p. 494.) 

9. Barcutay: The bones of the human body represented in a series of en- 
gravings; explanation of plate xx1v, 1824. 

‘10. Grrpy: Note sur le paralléle des os; Bulletin Univ. de Férussac, Sci- - 
ences Médicales, tom. xix, 1829. 

11. Ducxs: Sur la conformité organique de l’echelle animale; Ann. des Sci. 

Nat., 1831. (Printed separately, 1832.) 


1 An asterisk indicates that the work is in the possession of the writer. For oth- 
ers he would be glad to exchange copies of the present and previous papers. 


1871.] 411 [ Wilder. ' 


12. BourGrerRy (ET JAcos): Traité complet de l’anatomie de homme; 
tom. i, pp. 182-185, 1882. 

13. Buanpin: Nouveaux éléments d’anatomie descriptive, 1838. 

14. Fuourens: Nouvelles observations sur le paralléle des extrémités dans 
VPhomme et les quadrupédes; Ann. des Sciences Nat., 1838; the same in Me- 
moires d’ Anat. et de Phys. Comp., 1844. (With plates.) 

15. RicwAup: Sur l’homologie des membres supérieures et inférieures de 
Vhomme; Comptes rendus, tom. xxix, p. 180, 1840. 

16. BreremaAnn: Vergl. des Unterschenkels mit dem Vorderarm; Miiller’s 
Archiv fiir Anatomie, 1841. 

17. Bupp: On diseases which effect corresponding parts of the body in a 
symmetrical manner; Med. Chi. Trans., Vol. xxv, 1841. 

174%. Pagcxt: On the relation between symmetry and the diseases of the 
body; Med. Chi. Trans., Vol. xxv, 1841. 

18. CRUVEILHIER: Paralléle des membres: thoraciques et des membres ab- 
dominaux; Anat. desc., tom. i, p. 340, 1848. 

19. Srrauss-DurcKHEIM: Traité d’ Anat. Comp., 1848, pp. 281, 282. 

20. OwerEn: On the archetype and homologies of the vertebrate skeleton; 
Rep. of Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Science, 1846; pp, 169-340. (Many figures.) 

21. AuziIAs TURENNE: Sur les analogies des membres supérieures avec les 
inférieures; Comptes rendus de |’ Acad. des Sciences, 1846; tom. xxiii, p. 1148. 

22. MAcLISE, JosEPH: Comparative osteology and the archetype skeleton; 
1847. (With plates.) 

23. *Macuisu: Article SkELETON; Todd’s Cyclopedia of Anatomy and 
Physiology, 1849. 

24. *JonEs, T. R.: Article Osszous System; Cyc. of Anat. and Phys., 1847. 

25. Ricaup: Sur V’homologie des membres supérieures et inférieures de 
VYhomme; Comptes rendus de l’Acad. des Sciences, 1849, p. 680; the same, 
Revue et Magasin de Zodlogie, 1849, p. 564. | 

26. *AGaAssiz and GouLp: Principles of Zoology, 1851. 

27. GERVAIS: Sur la comparison des membres chez les animaux vertébrés; 
Ann. des Sciences Naturelles, 1853. 

28. Jouy ET LAvocat: Etudes d’Anatomie philosophique sur le pied et la 
main de l’homme, remenés au type pentadactyle; Mémoires de f’ Académie de 
Toulouse, 1853. (See 31.) 

29. PrrirreR, HERMANN: Zur Vergleich. Anat. des Schultergeriistes. 
Geissen, 1854. 

30. CHAUVEAU: Traité d’ Anatomie des animaux domestiques, 1857. 

81. Jouy ET LAvocaT: —— ——; Comptes rendus, tom. xxxv, 1852, p. 
338; 1853, p. 1242; 1857, p. 1223. (see 28). 

82. Fiox, Lupwie: Hand und Fuss; Archiv fiir Anatomie, 1857, pp. 485- 
458. 

33. *MARTINS, CHARLES: Nouvelle comparison des membres pelviens et 
thoraciques; Memoires de |’ Academie des Sciences et des lettres de Montpellier, 
1857; Annales des Sciences Nat., 1857. (The above is reviewed in the Journal 
de la Physiologie, 1858, p. 812.) (See 53). 

34. *HuMPHREY, Geo. M.: A treatise on the human skeleton, p. 600, 1858. 


Wilder.] 412 [December 20, 


35. *WyMAN, JEFFRIES: On anterior and posterior symmetry in the limbs ~ 


of mammals; Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. History, June 6th, 1860. 

36. *HuMPHREY: Observations on the limbs of Vertebrate Animals; Com- 
munication to the Cambridge Philosophical Society; 4to, pp.44. With plates. 

37. *Marrins: Ostéologie comparée des articulations du coude et du genou; 
Mems. de Acad. des Sciences de Montpellier, 1857; Untersuchungen zur 
Naturlehre des Menschen und der Thiere von Moleschott, vol. v1, 1860; Ann. 
des Sciences Nat., 1862. we 

88. *WitpER, Burt G.: Contributions to the Comparative Myology of the 
Chimpanzee; Boston Journal of Natural History, Vol. vu, pp. 858-384, p. 362, 


~ esol 


39. *Foutz: Homologie des membres pelviens et thoraciques de homme; 
Journal de la Physiologie, 1863, pp. 40-81, 379-421. (With plates.) 

40. Fousom, Norton: Anatomical Symmetry; a thesis read at his gradua- 
tion in the Harvard Medical School, Boston, Mass., March, 1864. (Not printed.) 

41. GEGENBAUER, CARL: Untersuchungen zur Vergleichenden Anatomie 
der Wirbelthiere; erstes Heft (Carpus und ee Leipzig, 1864; mit sechs 
tafeln. 

42. Huxury, T. H.: Onthe limbs of Vertebrates; a lecture before the 
Royal Coll. of Surgeons of London, Feb. 6th, 1864; an abstract in Medical 
Times and Gazette, Feb. 20th, 1864. 

43. 

44. Paget: Surgical Pathology; 3d Am. ed., 1865, p. 35. 

45. WiILDER: On morpholégy and teleology, especially in the limbs of Mam- 
malia; Memoirs Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 1, No. 1, p. 85 

46. Mrvart, St. GrorGE: On some points in the anatomy of Echidna 
hystrix, and on the serial homology of the limbs; Trans. Linn. Soc., Vol. xxv, 
1866; pp. 379-403; with plates. 

47. CLELAND§ JOHN: Comparison of the upper with the lower limbs; 
Quain’s Anatomy, 7th ed., 1866, p. 115. 

48. Vrouix: Den Carpus der Zoogdieren, 1866. . 


49. *WYMAN, JEFFRIES: Description of a double foetus; Bost. Med. and , 


Surg. Journ., Mar. 29th, 1866. 

50. *WiLpER: Pathological polarity, or what has been called symmetry in 
disease. Bost. Med. and Surg. Journ., April 5th, 1866, pp. 189-198. 

51. *WiLpDER: On a cat with supernumerary digits; Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat., 
May 16th, 1866, pp. 3-6. 

52. *WiLDER: The hand as an unruly member; American Naturalist, Vol. 1, 
Oct., Nov., 1866, Jan., 1867; pp. 414-422, 482-491, 631-638. 

53. UAB ARR Abstract of paper above cited (33); Report of British Asso- 
ciation for Adv. of Science, 1867. 

54. PAGENSTECHER: Ein Vergleich der Muskulatur des Drill mit der des 
Menschen; der zoologische Garten; Zeitschrift fiir Beobachtung Pflege und 
Zucht der Thiere. April and May, 1867. 

55. *WyMAN: On symmetry and homology in limbs; Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. 
Hist., June 5th, 1867; pp. 246-278. (Many figures.) 


\ 


1871.] 413 [ Wilder. 


7 


56. MaAcAtiister, ALEx.: Muscular anomalies, and their bearing on homo- 
typical myology; Proc. Royal Irish Acad., Dec. 9th, 1867. ; 

57. *WiLpER: On the morphological value and relations of the human hand; 
Am. Journ. of Science, July, 1867; abstract of a paper read before the National 
Academy of Science, Aug. 8th, 1866. . 

58. * WILDER: On the morphological value and relations of the human hand; 
six lectures delivered at the Museum of Comparative Zoology, at Harvard Uni- 
versity, Dec. 6th, 1867 to Jan. 10th, 1868. (Unpublished.) 

59. *GEGENBAUER: Sur la torsion de ’humerus. Journ. d’Anat, et de la 
Phys. (Brown Sequard,) 1868. Translated from Jenaische Zeitschrift. Bd. 1v. 

60. MAcALLISTER: Contributions towards the formation of a correct system 
of muscular homologies; Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., Ser. iv, No. v, May, 
1868. 

61. *RoLLESTON, GEORGE: On the homologies of certain muscles connected 
with the Shoulder-joint. Trans. Linn. Soc., Vol. xxvi, pp. 609-629. Read 
June 14, 1868. 

62. Hauceuron, Rey. §.: On the muscular anatomy of the Alligator; Ann. 
of Nat. Hist., April, 1868. 

638. *OwEN: Comp. Anat. and Phys. of Vertebrates, Vol. 1, pp. 125, 161, 220, 
221; Vol. 11, pp. 75, 307, 361; Vol. 111, pp. 7, 8, 14, 787. 1868. 

64. Humpurey: Disposition and homologies of flexor muscles of leg and 
forearm (Journ. of Anat. and Phys. May 69, pp. 820-334). 

65. CLELAND: On the interpretation of the limbs and lower jaw. .Rep. 
Brit. Ass., 1869, p. 120. 

66. FLowrr, W. H.: Correspondence between the parts composing the 
shoulder and pelvic girdle of Mammalia. (Journ. of Anat. and Phys., May, 
1870.) 

67. *WiLDER: Fingers and Toes. Hours at Home. October, 1870. 

68. GEGENBAUER: Vergleichung des Skelets der vordern und hintern Glied- 
maassen der Selachier. Jenaische Zeitschrift, finfter Band, viertes Heft., p. 
416. 1870. 

69. GEGENBAUER: Ueber das Gliedmaassenskelet der Enaliosaurier. Jenais- 
che Zeitschrift, Bd.v, Heft 3; (A brief synopsis is given in the Journ. of 
Anatomy, Nov., 1870, p. 199). 

70. *Coures: Antero-posterior symmetry, with special reference to the mus- 
cles of the limbs. The Medical Record. New York, June 1, July 1, July 15, 
Aug. 15, Sept. 1, Oct. 1, Oct. 15, Nov. 1, 1870. 

71. *FLowER, W. H.: An introduction to the osteology of the Mammalia, 
1870. . 

72. Humpurey: Comparison of shoulder-bones and muscles with pelvic 
bones and muscles; Journ. of Anat. and Phys., Nov., 1870, p. 67: plate. 

73. *Hoxutey: Manual of the Anatomy of vertebrated animals; London, 1871; 
pp- 30-49, 45-57. New York, 1872; pp. 31-39, 44-54. (For convenience of my 
students, the references to this work apply to the American edition.) 

74. *WiLDER: Review of Coues on antero-posterior symmetry (70); Ameri- 
can Naturalist, April, 1871; (the same in more extended form, Am. Journ. of 
Science, July, 1871). 


Wilder.] 414 [December 20, 


75. *Cougs: On the myology of the Ornithorhynchus; communications to. 
the Essex Institute, Vol. v1, pp. 127-173, March, 1871; (published May, 1871). 

76. *CouEs: The osteology and myology of Didelphys Virginiana. Memoirs 
Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. m, pt. 1. 1871. (Published 1872.) 


LIST OF GENERAL WORKS OR PAPERS IN WHICH HOMOLOGIES 
s : 
ARE DISCUSSED; ARRANGED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER. 


200. Agassiz: Contributions to the Natural History of the United States. 

4 Vols. 1857 to 1860. 

' 201. *AGaAssiz: Essay on Classification. London, 1858. 

202. *Acassiz, L.: Methods of Study in Natural History. Boston, 1863. 
Chap. iii. 

203. *AGAssiz: The Catagories of Analogy. (Essay on Classification. Ch. 
ii. Sect. rx.) London, 1859. (This subject is not directly discussed in 200.) 

204. *ArGYLL, DUKE oF: Reign of Law. Chap.iv. 1869. 

205. *BARCLAY: Anatomical nomenclature; cited by Owen. 63, 2, 68, note. 

206. *BrcHAT: Recherches physiologicales sur la vie et la mort. 

207. *Brcuat: Anatomie Descriptive, v. 167. (On symmetry and distorted 
symmetry). 

208. Braun: Sur les transformations de l’ovule vegetale. Ann. des Sc. Nat. 
1860. . 

209. CLARKE, B.: On relative position and its value as a differential charac- 
ter (with plants). Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist. 18538. p. 81, p. 189. 

210. Carus, V.: System der thierischen Morphologie. Leipzig, 1853. 

211. CuArK, Henry J.: Mind in Nature; or The origin of life and the 
mode of development of animals. N. Y., 1865. 

212 *CLELAND: On the Vomer in man and the Mammalia, and on the sphe- 
noidal spongy bones. Edinburgh New Phil. Journal, January, 1861. 

213. *CLELAND: On the serial homologies of the articular surfaces of the 
mammalian axis, atlas, and occipital bone. Natural History Review, April, 
1861. 

214. *CLELAND: On ribs and transverse processes, with special relation to 
the theory of the vertebrate skeleton. Read at the Meeting of the British 
Association at Cambridge. Natural History Review, October, 1862. 

215. *On the relations of the vomer, ethnoid, and intermaxillary bones. 
Read by Professor Huxley before the Royal Society of London, March, 1861. 
Philosophical Transactions, 1862. (2 plates.) 

216. CANESTRINI, G.: Caratteri rudimentali in ordine all’ origine del uomo, 
Annuario della Soc. d. Nat., Modena, 1867. 

217. *DANA, J. D.: On Cephalization. From the “New Englander” for 
July, 1863. 

218. *DANA, J. D.: The classification of animals, based on the principles 
of cephalization. Am. Journ. Science, etc., Vols. xxxv1, Nov., 1863, and 
XXXVH, Jan. and March, 1864. _ 


1871.] 415 [ Wilder. 


219. *Dana, J. D. Note on the position of amphibians among the classes 
of vertebrates. Am. Journ. of Sci., March, 1864. 

220. *DARwIN, C.: Origin of species. Chap. xiii. 

221. *DARWwIN: The variation of animals and plants under domestication. 
(Am. ed.) N. Y.. 1868. 2 vols. 

222. *DARWwIN: The descent of Man and natural selection in relation to sex. 
2871. N. Tf. 2 vols. 

223. De CANDOLLE: De la symetrie vegetale. Orgauographie, m, 236, 
(Eng. Ed., 1851, 11, 302.) 

224. Du Puiu: De homine dextro et sinistro. Leyden, 1790. 

225. Duans, Ant.: Rech. sur lostéologie et la myologie des batraciens. 
Paris, 1834. (The portions concerning shoulder-girdle and pelvis are quoted by 
Parker, 292, 84.) 

226. Fanconer, H.: On Prof. Huxley’s attempted refutation of Cuvier’s 
Laws of Correlation in the reconstruction of extinct vertebrate forms. Ann. 
and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 1856, p. 476. 

227. Frowmr, W. H.: Remarks on the homologies and notation of the 
teeth of the Mammalia. (Read at meeting of Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Sci., 1868.) 
Journ. of Anat. and Phys., May, 1869, p. 262. | 

228. *FLOURENS: Etudes sur les lois de la symetrie dans le regne animal, et 
sur la théorie du doublement organique. (Memoires d’ Anatomie et de physi- 
ologie comparées. 1844. quarto.) 

229. *FisHER, GEO. J.: Diploteratology, an essay on compound human 
monsters; from the Trans. N. Y. State Medical Soc., 1866. (In course of 
publication. ) 

230. GEGENBAUER: Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden Anatomie der 
Wirbelthiere. Zweites heft. (Schultergiirtel der Wirbelthiere. Brustflosse der 
Fische.) mit neun Tafeln. Leipzig, 1865. 

231. GEGENBAUER: Vergleichenden Anatomie. Von den thierischen Typen. 
p- 83. 1859. 

232. GrOoFFROY St. HILAIRE: Principes de philosophie zoologique. 1880. 

233. GEOFFROY Sr. Hitarre: Philosophie Anatomique, 1818. 

234. GEoFFRoY St. HitArre, Istpore: Essais de zoologie générale. 1841. 

235. GEOFFREY St. HiLarre, IsiIDoRE: Histoire des anomalies d’organiza- 
tion, with others. 3 vols. 1836. 

236. GorrHE: Der Morphologie. 

237. *Goopsir, Jonn: Anatomical Memoirs. 2 Vols. 8vo. Edinburg, 1868. 

238. Goopsrir: On the morphological relations of the nervous system in the 
annulose and vertebrate types of organization. Ed. Phil. Journ., Jan., 1857. 
(Anat. Mems., 2,78.) This and the following two papers were read to the 
Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Sc>in 1856. 

239. *Goopsir: On the morphological constitution of the vertebrate head. 
Ed. Phil. Journ., Jan., 1857. (Anat. Mems., 2, 88.) 

240. *Goopstr: On the morphological constitution of limbs. Ed. Phil. 
Journ., Jan., 1857. (Anat. Mems., 2, 198.) 

241. *Goopsir: Notes on the general morphology of the muscles. (Anat. 
Mems., 1, 451, Jan., 1857.) 


a? 


Wilder.] 416 [December 20, 


242. *Goopstr: On the anatomy of Amphioxus lanceolatus. Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Ed., Vol. xv. (Anat. Mems., 1, 371.) 

243. *Goopsir: Notes on the morphology of the muscles of the limbs. June 
15, 1858. Anat. Mems., 1, 452. 

244. GoopMAN, NEVILLE: Note on a three-toed cow. Journ. of Anat. and 
Phys. Nov., 1867, 109. J 

245. HrriAnp: Darstellung der Verhdltnissen zwischen der rechten und 
linken Halfte des Menschlichen Korpers. Nuremburg, 1807. 

246. His, WirHELM: On the first formation of the body in Vertebrata; 
Arch. fur taiteno eke Anat. Band 2, p. 513; Bibl. Univ., Aug. 25, 186 7 ;Bull. Sci. 
pp. 830-332. Abstr. in Ann. of Nat. Hist., Jan., 1868. 

247. HAECKEL; Generelle Mocoholesie, der Organismen. 

248. HumMPHREY; Homology of mesial and lateral fins of fishes. (Journ. of 
Anat. and Phys., Nov, 1871, p. 59. Plate.) 

249. *HILGARD, T. C.: Notes on comparative organotaxis; Trans. Ac. of 
Sci. of St. Louis, Vol. 1, No. 8; also Oct. 17th, 1869. 

250. Huxtry: On the theory of the vertebrate skull; the Croonian Lecture 
for 1858. Proc. Roy. Soc., 1858, p. 381. 

251. *Huxtey: Elements of comparative anatomy. London, 1864. 

252. Jackson, J. B. S.: Catalogue of Museum of Boston Soc. for Med. Im- 
provement. 

253. Jackson, J. B. S.: Catalogue of Warren Anatomical Museum of Har- 
vard University, 1870. 

254. JENyYNS, Rev. L.: Some remarks on genera and subgenera, and on the 
principles upon which they should be ee Mag. of Nat. Hist., Sept., 
1853. 

255. *Knox, R.: Great artists and great anatomists; p. 103. ousion, 1852. 

256. LAMARCcK: Philosophie Zoologique. 18386. 

257. LANKESTER, E Ray: On the use of the term Homology in modern Zo- 
ology, and the distinction between homogenetic and homoplastic agreements. 
Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., July, 1870, p. 34, and Oct., 1870, p. 342. 

258. LruKart, R.: Ueber die Morphologie und die Verwandschafts Verhalt- 
nisse der wirbellosen Thiere. Braunschweig, 1848. 

259. LoscuGE: De sceleto hominis symmetrico. Erlangen, 1795. 

260. *Lucam, J. C. G.: Die Hand und der Fuss. Abhdl. d. Senchenb. Ges.; 
Bdv. Mit 4 Tafeln. Frankfurt A. M., 1865. . 

261. MAcALLIsTER, ALEX.: Homologies of flexor muscles of the vertebrate 
limb. (Journ. of Anat. and Phys., May, 1868.) 

262. MACALLISTER: Arrangement of pronator muscles in limb of verte- 
brates. (Journ. of Anat. and Phys., Nov., 1867, and May, 1869.) 

2638. MACALLISTER: The law of ecrumotnes in animal forms. Journ. of Roy. 
Dub. Soc. Scientific Opinion, Nov. 17th and 24th, 1869. 

264. MAcALLISTER: Human muscular variations. (Journ. of Anat. and 
Phys., May, 1867, and Nov., 1870.)- 

265. MACDONALD Dr.: On the vertebral homologies as applicable to Zool- 
ogy. P.Z.S., Nov. 28th, 1848. 


- 


1871. ALT [ Wilder. 


266. Mactiss, J.: Comparative osteology and the archetype skeleton. Lon- 
don, 1847. 

267. Macuise: Letter on the nomenclature of anatomy; London Lancet, 
March 7th, 1846. 

268. Macvicar: General principles of vegetable morphology. Ed. N. 
Phil. Journ., New series, Vol. 12. 

269. Macvicar: First lines of morphology explained by geometry. Ed. 
New Phil. Journ., New series, No. 14. 

270. *MARSHALL, JOHN: Outlines of Human Physiology. Am. Hd., 1868, p. 
115. 

271. McCosm and Dickie: Typical forms and special ends in Creation. 
N. Y., 1857. 

272. Mrcoxag., A. A.: De genitalium et auigethe reacts analogia. Halle, 1810. 
Trans. in J. F. Meckel’s Beitr. zur vergl. Anat., Vol. 11, p. 2, no. 1. 

273. Mrnuis: De morbis homanis dextri et agin Guinea. 1818. 

274. MELVILLE, Dr.: On the ideal vertebra. Proc. Zool. Soc., Dec. 12th, 
1848, and Jan. 23d, 1849. 

275. *MivaARrT: Contributions toward a more complete knowledge of the 
skeleton of the Primates, Parti. The appendicular skeleton of Simia. Zool. 
Trans., Vol. v1, Dec. 18th, 1866. 

276. *Mivazr: On the appendicular skeleton of the Primates. Phil. Trans., 
Jan. 10th, 1867. : 

277. Mivart: The vertebrate skeleton. Trans. Linn. Soc., Apr. 21st, 1870. 
Vol. xxv, pp. 869-392. 

278. Mivart: On the use of the term “Homology.” Ann. and Mag. of 
Nat. Hist., Aug., 1870. 

279. *Mivart: The genesis of species. London, 1871. 

280. Monrrcets, J. B.: Fasciculi pathologici. Turin, 1793: morbisymmet- 
rici et asymetrici. 

281. *Morss, E. 8.: A classification of the Mollusca based on the principle 
of Cephalization (one plate). Proc. Essex Institute, June 19th, 1865. 

282. MosrLey, H. N., and LANKEsTER, E. RAy: On the nomenclature of 
mammalian teeth, and on the dentition of the mole and the badger. Journ. of 
Anat. and Phys., Nov., 1868, p. 72. 

283. Ocuivie: The Master Builder’s plan. (A popular account of Owen’s 
system of homologies.) 

284. Oxen: Ueber die Bedeutung der Schadelknochen; Jena, 1807. (Ex- 
tracts from this are given by Huxley, 251, p. 282, et. seg., and further de- 
tails upon some points were given in the Isis for 1817, 1818 and 1823.) 

285. *OKEN: Physio-philosophy. Transl. by Tulk. London, 1847. Par. 
2072, 2114, 2380, 23883, 2330, 3337, and elsewhere. 

286. Owen: Lectures on the comp. anatomy of ‘the invertebrate animals. 
1843. 2d ed., 1855. 

287. Owen: On the Nature of Limbs. 1849. 

288. Owern, R.: Comments on the paper by Dr. Melville (274). P.Z.S., 
Dec. 12th, 1848. 

289. OWEN: Paleoninloe. 

PROCEEDINGS B. 8. N. H.—VOL, XIV. 27 AuGgusT, 1872. 


Wilder.] 418 [December 20, 


290. OwrNn; Monograph on the Aye-aye (Chetromys Madagascariensis). 
Trans. Zool. Soc., Vol. Vv. 

291. *OwEN: Comp. Anat. of Vertebrates, Chap. xu, and elsewhere. 

292. ParkER, W. KiTcHEN: Structure and development of the Shoulder- 
girdle and Sternum in the Vertebrata. Ray Soc., 1868. (With 30 plates.) 

298. *PirTARD, 8. R.: Article Symmetry. Cyc. of Anat. and Phys., Vol. rv, 
p- 845. 

294. *RoLLEestTon, GEo.: Forms of Animal Life. Oxford, 1870. 

295. *ScuppER, S. H., and Burezss, E.: On asymmetry in the external 
genital armature of males of Nisoniades. (Proc. B..S. N.H., April 27th, 1870.) 

296. SEELEY, H.S.: Outline of a Theory of the Skull and the Skeleton. 
Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 83d series, Vol. 18, 1866. 

297. SCHIMPER ET BRAUN: Resumé des travaux, par Martins et Bravais. 
““Sur la disposition spirale des organes appendiculaires.’’ Ann. des Sc. Nat., 
1837, Vol. 8, p. 161. . 

298. *SHALER, N. S.: Lateral Symmetry in Brachiopoda. Proc. Bost. Soc. 
Nat. Hist., Dec. 4th, 1861.) 

299. *SPENCER, HeRBeERT: Principles of Biology. 2 vols. Am. reprint. 
N. Y., 1867. 

800. *SpenceR: A criticism on Prof. Owen’s theory of the vertebrate ‘skele- 
ton. Brit. and For. Med. Chir. Rev., Oct., 1858. Reprinted as Appendix B, 
Principles of Biology, Vol. 11. 

301. Sprx: Cephalogenesis. 1815. 

802. STRICKLAND: Observations upon the analysis and affinities of organ- 
ized beings. Mag. of Nat. Hist., New series, rv, 219, 1840. 

808. STRICKLAND, Hueu: On the signification of the terms Homology and 
Analogy (not the precise title, as I know it only as mentioned by Owen, 175, 
note); Phil. Mag., 1846, p. 358. 

804. Smuiru, Pre: Left-handedness. Report of Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Sci., 
4870. 

805. THompson, ALLEN: On the difference in the mode of ossification of 
the two first and other metacarpal and metatarsal bones. (With 1 plate.) 
Journ. of Anat. and Phys., Nov., 1868, p. 181. 

806. Turner, H. N.: Observations relative to some of the foramina at the 
base of the skull in Mammalia, and on the classification of the order Carnivora. 
Proc. Zool. Soc., 1848, p, 63. 

807. VAN DER HoEvEeN: Handbook of Zoology. Translated by Clark. 

3808. WELLKER: Archiv. fiir Anthropologie, Vol. 1, p. 273. 

309. Werstwoop, J. O.: Illustrations of the Relationships existing among 
natural objects, usually termed Affinity and Analogy, selected from the class 
of Insects. Trans. Linn. Soc., Vol. xvii, p. 409, 1837. 

810. Wrxstwoop, J. O.: A few further observations on Affinity and Anal- 
ogy. Mag. of Nat. Hist., New series, 1v, 305, 1840. 

811. *WitpER: On symmetry and distorted symmetry in the leaves of plants. = 
Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Nov. 6th, 1867. 

812. *WiLpDER: Right and Left.. Atlantic Monthly, April, 1870. 


1871.] 419 | Wilder, 


318. *WitpER: Extra Digits. Publications of Massachusetts Med. Soc., Vol. 
11, No. 8 (read at annual meeting, June 2d, 1868). A popular presentation of 
the subject is given in Old and New; Boston, Feb., 1870. 

314. Woop: Varieties in human myology. Proc. Royal Soc., Vol. x1. p. 
299 (1864); Vol. xiv, p. 385 (1865); Vol. xv, p. 239 (1866); p. 524 (1867); 
Vol. xvi (1868). . 

315. Woop, Joun: Human muscular variations. (Journ. of A. and P., 
Nov., 1866.) 

316. *WymaAn, J.: Anatomy of the nervous system of Rana pipiens. Smith- 
sonian Contrib. to Knowledge, Vol. v, Art. iv, 1853. (2 plates.) 

317. *WyMan: Observations on the development of Raia batis. Memo. 
Am. Acad. Arts and Sciences, Jan. 27th, 1864. (1 plate.) 

318. Wyman: A description of some instances of the passage of nerves 
across the middle line of the body. Am. Journ. of Med. Sciences, April, 1864. 


ADDENDA.1 


319. MAcponaALp: On the structure of fishes, so far as the analogies 
can be traced between the limbs of man and the fins of fishes; Rep. of 
Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Sci., 1840, Section, p. 1381. 

820. MAcponauLp: Unity of organization in animals; Rep. of Brit. Ass. for 
Adv. of Sci., 1845, Sections, p. 62. 

821. MAcDoNALD: Vertebral homologies; Rep. of Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Sci., 
1855, Sections, p. 128. 

322. Owzxn: The value of the origin of nerves as a homological character; 
Rep. of Brit. Ass. for Adv. of Sci., 1848, Sect., p. 93. 

328. Owen: On the zoological names of characteristic parts; Proc. Roy. 
Soc., March 23d, 1865. 

324. Swarnson: On the geography and classification of animals. 1835. 

325. AGassiz: Structure and homologies of radiated animals. Proc. Am. 
Ass. Adv. of Sci., 1849. 

326. *Humpurey: The human foot and the human hand. 16mo, pp. 215. 
1861. 

327. ARISTOTLE: De animalium partibus. 

328. *CLARK, H. J.: Polarity and Polycephalism. 

329. DuRAND, Dr. J. P. (DE Gros): Les Origines animales de l’homme 
eclairées par la Physiologie et l’anatomie comparatives. 1871. 

330. Muriz and Mivart: On the anatomy of the Lemuroidea; Trans. 
Zool. Soc., Lond., Vol. vir (p. 99). Read 1866; publ. 1869. 


1 An apology is due for the inaccuracies, omissions and occasional inconsistencies 
of the foregoing list of works. The latter defect is mainly the result of my desire 
to avail myself of the numerical designation of many works before the list was 
completed; a partial remedy for the others will be the reception of the papers not 
herein marked as already in my possession. 


Wilder.] 420 [December 20, 


331. SrrAuss DurRcKHEIM: Anatomie du chat; 2 vols., with folio atlas 
1845. 

332. *VERRILL, A. E.: Review of 45; Am. Journ. Science, 1866, p. 132. 

383. Fry, EDwArpD: Remarks on the morphology of the vertebrate skele- 
ton. Proc. Zool. Soc., 1850, p. 15. 

334. *MrvartT: The vertebrate skeleton. Nature, Aug. 11th, 1870. 

835. *ALLEN, J. A.: On the mammals and winter birds of East Florida, with 
an examination of certain assumed specific characters in birds, and a skeleton of 
the bird fauna of Eastern North America; with five plates. Bull. Mus. Comp. 
Zool., Vol. 11, No. 8, 1871, pp. 450. 

336. *Morsg, E. §.: On the early stages of an Ascidian. Proc. Bost. Soc. 
Nat. Hist., Vol. xtv, Oct. 18th, 1871. © 

837. *CLELAND, JoHN: On the action of muscles passing over more than one 
joint. (Journ. of Anat. and Phys., Nov., 1866.) 

838. *CouEs: On a chick with supernumerary legs. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. _ 
Hist., May 19th, 1869. ! 

839. *Dwicut, THomMAS, JR.: Right and Left-handedness. Journ. of Psy- 
chological Medicine, July, 1870. 

340. *Fort, J. A.: Des Difformités congénit. et aequisés des doigts. Paris, 
1869. (With bibliography.) f 


INDEX TO 


Abranchiaia, 50. 
Accipiter cooperii, 882. 
fuscus, 882. 

Acmeide, 51. 

Acmea, 51. 

Actiturus Batramius, 388. 

Actodromus maculatus, 388. 

Aigialitis semipalinatus, 285. 

fégiothus linaria, 372. 

Aecassiz, Pror. L. Mode of copulation 
among the Selachians, 339; Observa- 
tions on boulders in Berkshire Co., 
Mass., 885; Eulogy on Dr. J. E. Hol- 
brook, 348; Glacial scratches in Berk- 
shire and Wachusett Ranges, 3886. 

Agelaius pheniceus, 374. 

Aix sponsa, 384. 

Alaudide, 3874. 

Alcedinide, 284, 379. 

Aleochara, parasitic on Anthomyia, 54. 

Algz, distribution of the marine, of the 
eastern coast of the United States, 64. 

AMENDMENT to Article VI. of the Con- 
stitution, 57. 

Amiurus catus, 5. 

Ammonites, reversions among, 22. 

Ammonoids, development of, 896. 

Ampelide, 277, 370. 

Ampelis cedrorum, 3870. 

Anas boschas, 3884. 

obscurus, 884. 

Anatide, 384. 

Ancistromesus, 52. 

Androgynoceras appressum, 42. 

hybridum, 41. 

Aneurus inconstans, 105. 

ANNUAL REPORT, 207. 

Anomia, 150 

Anthocoridez, 106. 

Anthus ludovicianus, 3860. 

Antrostomus vociferus, 379. 

Aptenodytes, 241. 

Pennantii, 247. 

Aquila canadensis, 382. 

Aradide, 104. 

Aradus robustus, 104. 

Arenhibnteo lagopus, 382. 

Ardea herodias, 285, 3838. 

Ardeide, 285, 301, 383. 

Ascidian, early stages of an, 851. 

Astur atricapillus, 382. 

Athene cunicularia, 270. 

Atmosphere, germs in, 346. 

Atomosira, 97. 

Atomosira sordida, 98. 


VOL. XFV. 


/ 


AtTwoop, N. E. Habits of the Blue-fish, 
92; Habits of the Capelin (Mallotus 
villosus), 184. 

Aulacostethus, 98. 

Aulacostethus marmoratus, 94. 

Aythya americana, 384. 


Balistes, 8, 10. 

Belonochilus, 104. 

Belonochilus numenius, 104. 

Bernicla brenta, 384. 

canadensis, 384. 

BICKNELL, E. A method of producing 
low powers for the microscope, 44; on 
preparations of muscle, 57; structure 
of whalebone, 58; on Isthmia nervosa, 
58; on the microscopical structure of 
the tooth of Ceratodus, 189; exhibi- 
tion of a new binocular microscope, 
393; method of using the microscope 
in a vertical position, 346; remarks on 
an achromatic condenser, 347. 

Bismuth mine in Utah, 841. 

Buiss, R., JR. On the anterior verte- 

‘bre of Doras niger, and the structure 
of the fin in Doras and Balistes, 8; on 
the markings in young fish, 92. 

Blue-fish, habits of, 92. 

Bonasa umbellus, 388. 

Boston, Geology of the vicinity of, 45. 

Botaurus leutiginosus, 384. 

Bouvs&, T. T. Elected President, 3; re- 
marks on the death of the Rey. J. A. 
Swan, 388. 

Brachiopoda, relations of, 128, 186. 

aeouin report on the Frozen Well of, 


ifs 

BREWER, Dr. T. M. On some rarieties 
of Quiscalus, 205; on Erismatura do- 
minica, 205. 

BRIGHAM, W. T. Remarks on volca- 
noes in Mexico, 126; on conglomerate, 
128; on the mongous and cobra, 181. 

Brochymena Harisii, 95. 

Bubo virginianus, 381. 

Bucephala albeola, 384. 

americana, 384. 

BuRBANE, L. S. On the Eozoon lime 
stones of Massachusetts, 191. 

Buteo borealis, 268, 301, 382. 

lineatus, 382. 
pennsylvanicus, 382. 
Butterflies, flight of, 55. 


Capelin, habits of the, 184. 


422 


Caprimulgide, 273, 379. 

Capsus quadrivittatus, 392. 

Carbolic Acid, use of, 18. 

Cardinalis virginianus, 281. 

Carpodacus purpureus, 371. d 

Caterpillars, preparation of the skins of, 
0 


Cathartes aura, 267. 
Certhia familiaris, 359. 
Certhiide, 359. 
Ceryle alcyon, 284, 379. 
Circe’ latirostris, 282. 
Circus hudsonicus, 382. 
Chetura pelasgia, 379. 
Chamepelia pallescens, 275, 300. 
Charadriide, 285, 388. 
Charadrius virginicus, 383. 
Chelonia Mydas, 17. 
Chicago, destruction of the Academy of 
Sciences of, 386. 

Chordeiles popetue, 379. 
Chreecocephalus philadelphia, 385. 
Chrysomitris mexicanus, 282. 

pinus, 3871. 

tristis, 371. 
Chrysotis Levaillanti, 271. 
Cobra, experiments with poison of, 87. 
Cobra, 181. 
Coccygus americanus, 380. 

erythrophthalmus, 380. 

Colaptes auratus, 381. 
Collisella, 51. 
Collurio borealis, 370. 
Coloration, adaptive, in Mollusca, 141. 
Columba flavirostis, 274. 
Columbide, 274, 299, 382. 
Colymbide, 385. 
Colymbus torquatus, 385. 
Conglomerate, remarks on, 128, 129. 
CONSTITUTION. Amendment to Article 


Contopus borealis, 376. 
. virens, 3876. 
CorkE, E. D. Description of the com- 
mon lizard of Socorro. 

Coreidz, 100. 
Corvide, 375. 
Corvus americanus, 375. 

carnivorus, 375. 
Cotingide, 279. 
Cotyle riparia, 369, 
Cours, ELLIoTT, M.D., U.S.A. Oste- 

ological note on the Spheniscide, 251. 
Cryptobranchia, 50. 
Curvirostra americana, 3871. 
leucoptera, 371. 

Cuculide, 380. 
Cyanospiza cyanea, 374. 
Cyanura crestata, 375. 
Cypselide, 379. 
Cynthia pyriformis, 351. 


Dactylopterus, 3. 

DatL, W.H. Preliminary sketch of a 
natural arrangement of the order Do- 
coplosea, 49; relations of the Brachio- 
poda, 123. 

Dendreeca zstiva, 866. 

Biackburniz, 363. 


Dendreca cerulescens, 863. 
castanea, 3864 
coronata, 363. 
maculosa, 367. 
palmarum, 3868. 
poi aiey 366. 
pina, 366. 
striata, 366. 
virens, 863. 

Deroceras confusum, 39. 
densinodum, 40. 
Dudressieri, 37. 
planicosta, 38. 
ziphius, 38. 

Doroplorsy arrangement of the order, 


Dolichonyx oryzivorus, 374. 

Doras, 3. 

Dwicuat, THos., JR.,M.D. Preparation 
of flexible dissections, 19; on two 
fowls with supernumerary legs, 76; 
remarks on mounting the whale skele- | 
ton, 805; remarks on a nerve plexus in | 
Phoca, 891. 


Ectopistes migratorius, 382. | 
EpWarps, A. M. Notice of an unde- | 
scribed form of Pleurosigma, 256. 
Elainea placens, 279. | 
EMERTON, J. H. Observations on the 
development of Pholeus, 393. 
Emeside, 107. * 
Emesa longipes, 107. 
Empidonax difficilis, 279. 
flaviventris, 378. 
minimus, 3876. 
pusillus, new place of breed- | 
ing, 303. 
Traillii, 376. 
Emys floridana, 17. 
serrata, 16. 
Eozoon, nature of, 191, 199. 
Eremocoris fera, 1038. - i 
Erimophila alpestris, 274. 
Erismatura dominica, 205. 
Enudyptes, 244. 
catarractes, 250. 
chrysocoma, 251. 
chrysolopha, 250. 
Euschistus jissilis, 96. 


Falco anatum, 381. 
peregrinus, 268. 
sacer, 382. 

Falconide, 268, 301, 381. 

FarRtow, W.G., M.D. Remarks on the 
distribution of the Algz of the Atlan- 
tic Coast of the United States, 64. 

Fistularia, 3. 

Fringillide, 281, 299, 371. 

Fulix affinis, 384. 

collaris, 384. 


Gambetta flavipes, 383. 
melanoleuca, 383. 
Garzetta candidissima, 285. 
Geothlypis philadelphica, 362. 
trichas, 362. 
Glacial period in New England, 62. 


42 


Glacial theory of drift, 65. 

Granatellus francesce, 278. 

GRAyYsON, Cot. A. J. On the Physical 
Geography and Natural History of the 
Islands of the Tres Marias and of So- 
gore, off the western coast of Mexico, 

61. 

GREENLEAF, R.C. Remarks on sound- 
ings between California and the Ha- 
waiian Islands, 188; on circulation in 
the Ameebe, 345. sins 

Guiraca ludoviciana, 374. 


Hadrostomus aglaiz, 279. 

Hematopodide, 284. 

Hematopus pailiatus, 284. 

HAGEN, Dr. H. A. Notice of a new dis- 
secting microscope, 887. 

Halietus leucocephalus, 382. 

Haliplana fuliginosa, 285, 301. 

Halydide, 965. 

Harelda glacialis, 384. 

Harporhynchus graysoni, 298. 

Hatteras, causes leading to the produc- 
tion of the Cape, 110. 

Helcion, 53. 

Helcioniscus, 58. 

Helminthophaga peregrina, 362. 

ruficapilla, 362. 

Herodias egretta, 285. 

Hindoo skulls, peculiarities of, 180. 

Hirundinide, 369. 

Hirundo horreorum, 369. 

Hitcoucock, Pror. C. H. Remarks on 
the geology of N. H., 392. 

Hovees, R. M. Letter from, 390. 

Hoxiprook, Dr. J. E. Eulogy on, by 
Prof. Agassiz, 348. 

Homologies, intermembral, 154, 309, 399. 

Hunt, Dr. T. SteRRY. On the Geol- 
ogy of the vicinity of Boston, 45. 

Hyatt, A. On reversions among the 
Ammonites, 22; on drift, 91; on 
changes of coast level, 122; affinities 
of the Brachiopoda and Polyzoa, 1386; 
on Natural Selection, 146; Annual 
Report for 1871, 207; catalogue of the 
Ornithological Collection of the Soci- 
ety, Part 1, 2837; development of the 
aor of Ammonoids and Nautiloids, 
396. 

Hydroessz, 107. 

Hydrometride, 108. . 

Hylatomus pileatus, 381. 

Hypotriorchis columbarius, 269, 381. 

rufigularis, 269. 


Icteride, 280, 3874. 
Icterus baltimore, 375. 
graysoni, 280. 
Isotoma, embryology of, 18. 
. Walkerii, 14. 
Isthmia nervosa, habitat of, 58. 


JACKSON, CHAS. T., M.D. Letter to 
Nominating Committee, 2; glacial the- 
ory of drift, 65; remarks on boulders, 
386 


86. 
JEFFRIES, B. Joy, M.D. Unity of de- 
sign in the eyes of animals, 254. 


3 


wunco hyemalis, 373. 


KNEELAND, S., M.D. Observations 
made on voyage from Panama to Cali- 
fornia, 137; on a method of engraving 
and cutting glass, marble, etc., by 
sand blasts, 149. 

Bey Rurv. C. F. Habits of turtles, 


Laniide, 370. 

Laridz, 285, 301, 384. 

Larus argentatus, 3884. 

Lepetide, 50. 

Lepeta, 50. 

Leptoptila albifrons, 274. 

Tes polyphemus, development of, 


Lioderma, 97. 
Lioderma saucia, 97. 
senilis, 97. 

Liparoceras Bechei, 48. 
Henleyi, 42. 
indecisum, 42. 

Liparoceratide, 32. 

Lophius piscatorius, 8. 

Lophodytes cucullatus, 385. 

Lottia, 51. 

Lyctocoris domesticus, 106. 

Lygeide, 100. 


Malformations in fowls, 76. 

Mallotus villosus, habits of, 134. 

Mammoth Cave. 345, 

MAYNARD, C. J. Catalogue of birds of 
Coos Co., N. H., and Oxford Co., Me., 
with notes by Wm. Brewster, 356. 

MEApDER, J. B. Letter on the mineral 
resources of Utah, 341. 

Melanerpes pileatus, 381. 

Melanotis cerulescens, 275. 

Melospiza melodia, 373. 

palustris, 378. 
MEMBERS, RESIDENT, election of, 18, 
141, 339. 
Abbott, Fletcher M., 141. 
Bender, R. W., 141. 
Bolles, Rey. HE. C., 141. 
Bradlee, C. D., 18. 
Bullard, Wm. W., 18. 
Cook, Caleb, 18. 
Ela, Walter, 141. 
Emerton, J. H., 18. 
Farlow, W.G., M.D., 141. 
Felton, Thos. G., 141. 
Hayes, S. Dana, 141. 
Howe, S., 18. 
Letteney, D. T., 18. 
Lyman, C. F., 19. 
Meserve, Alonzo, 339. 
Miller, F. D., 18. 
Nichols, W. R., 141. 
Rockwell, Prof. A. P,, 18. 
Sargent, Sidney E., 141. 
Shaw, Edw. S., 18. 
Tuttle, A. H., 18. 
Walker, Chas. A., 18. 
Willard, Arthur W., 18. 
Mergus americanus, 385. 
serrator, 385. 


f 


‘ 


424 


Metapodius confraternus, 99. 
instabilis, 98.- 
Metoptoma, 54. 
Metrobates, 108. 
hesperius, 109. 
Micrathene Whitneyi, 300. 
Microceras arcigerens, 36. 
biferum, 34.. 7 
crescens, 36. 
laticosta, 35. 

Microderoceras Birchii, 32. - 

Hebertii, 33. 
Microscope, low powers for, 44. 
Mictide, 98. 

Mimus polyglottus, 277. 

finor, CHas. 8S. Notes on the flight 
of butterflies, 55; injuries caused by 
Capsus quadrivittatus, 392. 

Mniotilta varia, 3861. 

Mniotiltide, 278, 300. 

Mollusea, adaptive coloration in, 141. 

Molothrus pecoris, 374. 

Mongous, 131. 

Morse, Pror. B.S. Structure of Phas- 
colosoma, 61; reply to Mr. Dall’s re- 
marks on Brachiopoda, 135; relation- 
ships of the Tunicates, 138/; on the 
adaptive coloration in Mollusca, 141; 
relationship of Anomia, 150; early 
stages of an Ascidian, 3851; observa- 
tions on the spittle-insect, 391. 

Motacillidz, 350. 

Myiadestes obscurus, 277. 

Myiarchus crinitus, 376. 

Lawrencii, 279. 
mexicanus, 278. ¢ 

Myiodioctes canadensis, 369. 

pusillus, 369. 


Nacella, 53. 

Nautiloids, development of, 396. 

Neides decurvatus, 100. 

Neottiglossa undata, 96. 

Nitxrs, W. H. Some phenomena in 
quarrying, 80; on conglomerate, 128, 
129. 


NOMINATING COMMITTEE, report of, 1. 
Nvetale acadica, 331. 

Nyctea nivea, 381. 

Nyctherodius violaceus, 285, 301. 
Nyctidromus albicollis, 273. 


Officers for 1871-2, election of, 2385. 
Otus Wilsonianus, 3881, 
Ozophora, 102. 

picturata, 102. 


Pachycoride, 93. \ 

Packanrp, A.S., JR., M.D. Embryology 
of Isotoma, 18; on the development of 
Limulus, 60. 

Pandion carolinensis, 268, 882. 

Paride, 358. 

Parus atricapillus, 358. 

Parula americana, 851. 

insularis, 278, 800. 

Passerculus savanna, 872. 

Passerella iliaca, 878. 

Patella, 52. 


Patellide, 52. 

Patina, 53. 

Patinella, 58. 

Pelecanide, 302. s 
Pelecanus fuscus, 802. 

Pelionetta perspicillata, 885. 
Pentatomidz, 96. 

Perisiglossa tigrina, 368. 


~ Perisoreus canadensis, 875. 


Peritrechus fraternus, 108. 

Perry, Rev. J. B. On the Glacial 
Period in New England, 62; remarks 
on Dr. Jackson’s objections to the 
glacial theory, 68; nature of the ‘‘Sco- 
lithi,”’ 139; on the EKozoon limestones 
of Massachusetts, 199. 

Petrochelidon lunifrons, 369. 

Phascolosoma, structure of, 61. 

Philohela minor, 8838. 

Phoca, nerve plexus in the Jip of, 391. 

Pholeus, development of, 398. 

Picide, 278, 380. 

PICKERING, Dr. CHas. Remarks on 
the glacial theory, 75; on drift, 91; on 
the agency of heat in holding wate 
on the surface of the globe, 127; o 
conglomerate, 128. 

Picoides arcticus, 380, 

hirsutus, 380. 

Picus pubescens, 380. 

sealaris, 278. 
villosus, 380. 

Pieris rape, 388. 

Pilidium, 50. 

Pinicola canadensis, 371. 

Pipilo carmani, 299. 

erythropthalmus, 874. 
Platypeltis ferox, 16. 
Plectrophanes lapponicus, 872. 

nivalis, 372. 
Pleurosigma robustum, 260. 
Plociomerus constrictus, 101. 
— diffusus, 101. 

Ploiaria, 391. 

Ploiaria errabunda, 107. 

Podiceps:cornutus, 885. 

Podicipide, 385. 

Podilymbus podiceps, 885. 

Podisus serieventris, 94. 

Pecetes gramineus, 872. 

Polyborus Audubonii, 268. 

Porzana carolina, 384. 

PourRTALes, L. F. DE. Constitution of 
the bottom of the ocean off Cape Hat- 
teras, 59. 

President, election of, 8. 

Progne subis, 370. 

Proteobranchiata, 51. 

Psittacidz, 271, 298. 

Psittacula cyanopyga, 271. 

Pteromalus puparum, 388. 


_Ptochiomera nodosa, 100. 


Ptychemys concinna, 17. 
Putnam, F. W. Notice of the burning 
of Chicago Academy of Sciences, 386. 
Pygolampis pectoralis, 107. 
Pygoscelis, 242. 
adeliz, 250. 
antarctica, 250. 


425 


Pygoscelis papua, 249. 

Pyranga bidentata, 281. 
rubra, 370. 

Pyrrhophxna Graysoni, 2838. 


Quarrying, interesting phenomena in, 80. 
Querquedula discors, 384. 
Quiscalus, remarks on some species of, 
205. 
versioolor, 875. 


Rallidz, 384. 

Reduvide, 106. 

Regulus calendulus, 361. 

satrapus, 3861. 

Report Annual, of the Custodian, 207; 
of the Treasurer, 233; of the commit- 
tee on the Walker Prizes, 308. 

Report on the Brandon Frozen Well, 387. 

Report of the committees on 
Mineralogy, 224. 

Geology, 224. 

Botany, 224. 
Palzxontology, 225. 
Comparative Anatomy, 226. 
Radiata, 227. 

Insecta, 227. _ 

Mollusea, 229. 

Vishes and Reptiles, 280. ’ 
Ornithology, 231. 
Mammalia, 232. 

Rhagovelia obesa, 107. 

Rhaphigaster Pennsylvanicus, 98. 

Rhyacophilus solitarius, 383. 


Sanborn, ¥. G. Method of inflating 
skins of caterpillars for the cabinet, 
260. 

Saxicolida, 358. 

Sayornis fuscus, 376. d 

ScEVA, GEORGE. Experiments with 
the poison of the Cobra de Capello, 87; 
peculiarities in Hindoo skulls, 180; on 
the mongous and cobra, 131. 

Scolecophagus ferrugineus, 375. 

Scolithi, nature of the so-called, 189. 

Scolopacide, 383. 

Scops asio, 381. 

Seurria, 52. 

Selachians, mode of copulation among, 
839 


Setophaga ruticilla, 369. 

SHALER, N. S. On the causes leading 
to the production of Cape Hatteras, 
110 


Sialia sialis, 358. 
Sittide, 359. 
Sitta canadensis, 359. 
carolinensis, 359. 
Skulls, peculiarities in Hindoo, 180. 
Socorro, Natural History of the Island 
of, 261, 287. 
Spheniscidz, catalogue of the, in the 
Society’s Museum, 288. 
osteological notes on, 251. 
Spheniscus, 242. 
demersus, 248. 
minor, 247. 
Sphyrapicus varius, 380. 


Spittle insect, observations on, 891. 
Spizella monticola, 378. 

pusilla, 378. 

socialis, 873. ° 

SPRAGUE, P. S. On a Staphylinidous 
parasite on Anthomyia, 54; on the 
types of Kirby, 55; remarks on the 
Scolytidez, 205; discovery of a parasite 
of Pieris rape, 388. 

Stiretride, 94. 

SToppER, C. On a case of Molecular 
Motion, 43; on the Podura scale, 188; 
on atmospheric germs, 846. 

Strigide, 270, 300, 381. 

Strix pratinicola, 270. 

Sula cyanops, 802. 

piscator, 302. 

Sulide, 302. 

Surnia ulula, 381. 

SWAN, Rev. J. A. Resolutions in re- 
lation to the death of, 3889. 

Sylvicolide, 361. 

Sylviide, 351. 

Syrnium cinereum, 381. 

nebulosum, 881. 


Tachycincta bicolor, 369. 

Tanagride, 281, 870. 

Testudo polyphemus, 16. 

Tetrao canadensis, 8838. 

Tetraonide, 383. 

Thryothorus felix, 278. 

Thyrosternum pennsylvanicum, 17, 18. 

Tinnunculus sparverius, 269, 382. _ 

Trachemys seabra, 16. 

Tres Marias, Natural History of the Isl- 

ands of, 261. 

Trichopepla semivittata, 96. 

Tringoides macularius, 388. 

Trionyx ferox, 16. 

Triphleps insidiosus, 106. 

Trochilid, 282, 380. 

Trochilus colubris, 380. 

Troglodytes «don, 850. 

hyemalis, 360. 
insularis, 299. 

Troglodytid, 278, 299, 360. 

Trogon ambiguus, 272. 

Trogonide, 272. 

Tunicates, relationship of, 187. 

Turdidez, 275, 298, 357. 

Turdus aurocapillus, 358. 

flavirostris, 276. 
fuscescens, 3857. 
Grayi, 276. 
migratorius, 857. 
noveboracensis, 358. 
pallasii, 357. 
Swainsonii, 358. 
ustulatus, 276. 

Tyrannide, 278, 376. 


UHLER, P. R. Notices of some Hete- 
roptera in the T. W. Harris Coilec- 
tion, 98. 

Uta auriculata, 3038. 

Utah, mineral resources of, and the dis- 
covery of a bismuth mine in, 3841 


426 


Vireo gilvus, 370. WINsLow, C. F., M.D. Letter from, 
hypochryseus, 281. describing a deep excavation in the 
olivaceus, 370. Valley of the Rhine, and a mortar- 
solitarius, 370. ' shaped pebble found twenty-five feet 

Vireonide, 281, 370. below the surface, 20. 

Volcanic phenomena, 127, 128. 

Volcanoes in Mexico, 126. Xerobates carolinus, 16, 17. 


Vulturide, 267. 
WILperR, B. G. Intermembral Homol- Zenaidura Graysoni, 299. 
ogies, 154, 301, 399. Zonotrichia albicollis, 372. 
leucophrys, 372. 


Plate |. 


Proc. Bost. SoG. Nat, Hist. Vol, XIV; 


G.AWALKER se 


S.-MORSE vex. 


ES 


MORSE, ON EARLY STAGES OF AN ASCIDIAN. 


M 


Plate 2 


5 


EMERTON del. 


NEW ENG.LITH.CO.109 SUMMER ST. BOSTUN. 


EMERTON, DEVELOPMENT OF PHOLCUS. 


= 


¥ 
\ 
* fo 
) 
r 
i f 
\ 
0) 
« 
t 


e 
if 


ti 
i 


REN OSEAN a, Wo Y, . bp 4 then 2S wl x QD ~- 
Ys = Ne Ey = Pega = CIN 2 
AY a = ~S Pay = re >" 
RVers ihe ers = ” Zz 
LILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS SSIYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITU 
= ty =a ie = — 
Y- Ju Ww ud (a) ‘30 N 
= . = = _2 Kaen 
= = 4 A =a 
rs) em rs) aa 5 
ie oF 2 ea 2 
AR | aoe SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS SJZIUYy bel s 
Pad Et 
5 ge o 3 fe 
= = w = 
> a = aa = 
a > ke be re 
= ra = a rea 
; asia o9) == 'o9) rs — 
ea yy FINVEAIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITL 
< = (2) es ae < 
eer = = NS = > WN 
J oO Se D We KE Z O 
yf 2 g ERE 2 2 
Lea Sy ES = | > == 
”) si ” 
ARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S3IYVug 
ee a e “i 2 
aivpipe < 4 < 
Ye 9 e 3 a 
Ba —_ Zz hee 
LILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3!IYVYNgIT LIB RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITU 
rT \ = & a4 bs a 
i - B, ‘3 
- Zz 2 z o 
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWNS S3I1uYvYy 
= < = = = 
e\ = S = 6 z 
‘\ = = Zi te Zz 
es Ca aS = = | 
ALSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS SAlYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIO! 
2 a Z a + 2 — 
= Pa 7) — A ” < 20NG 
= - 5 : 65 & 
= ~ naan aX 
S SN siete 5 ae 5 
Mu a : my a = 
R | aie SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NO}MLd aa S3!IuYVe 
A: x Z 
= Na hie = a = 5 
4% ey 
2 LY = : = 2 
a aa g : a X 
= ” = ” ~ = 
HISNI_NVINOSHIINS Sa 1yYVvudd oat BRARI ES p MITHSONIAN 
<r ASO; < ,< Gel k =< <x 
Pye aS 44) = 4, SY A <9 \HSVAT S = 
Pe a hp ON ee a he NS 4 {£% tN = 
ty o ie i “Yt & NS 2 KAMP ZS 


Wb 
NVINOS 
oo: 

Zon i 
SMITHS: 


NVINOSI 


SMITHS\ 
Nour 

> 
C. 
WAS 
NVINOS| 


\, , Wase\y SS O S/NosAY 

TILSNI_NVINOSHLINS Sa l¥YVuYa i re a BRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT! 

1 = Te) = A Fa 

| bee —| ar of 

_ Of — fod Ls ms 

— AN cc — oc = 

Pa SY ey Nak 6 

2 a aj 2 a = 

ad me 


RIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS SJIYVY! 


Vi 
ae 
RE 


INSTITUTION 
INSTITUTION 


Saiuvuddll 
INSTITUTION 


* 


NLILSNI oo Pave LIBRARIES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT 


NVINOSHLINS S3INVYSIT 


” 
! & & <= z 
= Cn ae am = 
= Cy es =z = 
Y =. = oa) es = 
” ? _W * Pk Ww » 
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI 


ARIES NVINOSHLINS S3I1UVUS 


wo = ” S ae ” 
uo uu sO es on Ws = 
<5, a < 2 WA < 
ce ox 
yy « : : Zia 
' p= ne : 
HLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN. INSTITUTI 
i cS E z a 
; : : : : 
> 7 Se = ; 
ke > = a 
o = a a ee 
AR | ES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS $3 luvug 
- = = | = wy, «= = 
EAN = z= - = =u 
SE E Z ie z 
NS = = ae >" = oll 
DLLLSN ie veins me a 
SILSNI_NVINOSHLINS SAIYWVYE1T LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT! 
ee = 2 
| ea SI ne 
7 4 a 
= : | 
2 = : 
Oo oO O 
z S = 


IWRIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI 


S31YVYRIT LIBRARIES 
S3Iu¥vUGIT_ LIBRARIES 


NVINOSHLINS S31YVe 
= = , Zz 
2 Se) Ne O 
aad ; nf s = SY = 
=D Tee f ty Y, 
E fd : 
= : = Ue 
9 “fe o 3 
for ONS OSHLINS Saluvud Mee IBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT! 
J \) KiHSON/5 = =< ~ 2 = Sy << NS é 
} 4 sow 4 WN \ pees NOB iS pe AS 
1§ Mita, fy = WS = YoTRN = we 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES 
"HTT ATM 
3 9088 01276 3934